Chevrolet - Civic Sedan - Workshop Manual - 1996 - 1996

Factory Workshop Manual Make Honda Model Civic Sedan Engine and year L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Alarm Module: Locations Rear of Radio Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Canada Security Control Unit Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Canada > Page 9 Security Control Unit Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Antitheft Lighting Relay: Locations Upper Left Kick Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft Relay > Component Information > Locations Antitheft Relay: Locations Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 16 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations Integrated Control Unit: Locations Rear of Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Integrated Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 22 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 23 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 24 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 25 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 26 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 27 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 28 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 29 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 30 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 31 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 32 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 33 Integrated Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 34 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 35 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 36 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 37 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 38 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 39 Integrated Control Unit: Electrical Diagrams Integrated Control Unit Part 1 0f 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 40 Integrated Control Unit Part 2 0f 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 41 Integrated Control Unit (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 42 Integrated Control Unit (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 43 Integrated Control Unit: Testing and Inspection SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the integrated control unit. 3. Remove the integrated control unit from the under-dash fuse/relay box. All Systems Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 44 Intermittent Wiper System 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector and the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 48 Disconnect the 12P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Reconnect the 12P connector to the power door lock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 53 Disconnect the 12P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Reconnect the 12P connector to the power door lock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Control Module: Locations Dashboard/Door Front of Driver's Door (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Door Lock Control Unit (With Keyless) With Keyless Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Door Lock Control Unit (With Keyless) > Page 59 Keyless Door Lock Control Unit (USA Only) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 60 Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the control unit. 3. inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 61 Disconnect the 12P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Reconnect the 12P connector to the power door lock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Diagrams > Moonroof Close Relay Moonroof Close Relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Diagrams > Moonroof Close Relay > Page 67 Moonroof Open Relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Moonroof Close Relay Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Close Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Five-terminal type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Moonroof close relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Moonroof Close Relay > Page 70 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Open Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Five-terminal type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Moonroof open relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 75 Engine Compartment Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 76 Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. ABS pump motor relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Electronic Brake Control Module: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Attaching Torx Bolts ............................................................................................................................ ............................................ 9.8 Nm (84 inch lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 82 Electronic Brake Control Module: Connector Locations Connector A Behind Right Kick Panel Connector B Behind Right Kick Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 83 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Main Control Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Main Control ABS Operation The ABS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates the vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the rate of deceleration. The ABS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and it transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high. The pressure reduction control is a three-mode system, that is pressure reduction, pressure retaining and pressure intensifying modes. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Main Control > Page 86 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Diagnosis Function SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION Since the anti-lock brake system modulates the braking pressure when a wheel is about to lock, regardless of the driver's intention, the system operation and the braking power will be impaired if there is a malfunction in the system. To prevent this possibility, the self-diagnosis function monitors the main system functions. The ABS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU The CPUs check each other and the circuits of the system. When the CPUs detect failure, they shift to the "system down mode" or the "control inhibition mode". When an abnormality is detected, the ABS indicator light goes on. CHECK MODE/BULB CHECK There is also a check mode of the self-diagnosis system itself; when the ignition switch is first turned on, the ABS indicator light comes on and stays on for a few seconds after the engine starts to signify that the self-diagnosis system and indicator light are functional. FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected in the ABS control system by the self-diagnosis, the solenoid operations are suspended to inhibit anti-lock brake system operation. Under these conditions, the braking system functions just as an ordinary one, maintaining the necessary braking function. When the ABS indicator light is turned on, it means the fail-safe is functioning. SELF TEST - FAULT DETECTION - The self-diagnosis can be classified into these four categories. Initial Diagnosis - Performed right after the engine starts and until the ABS indicator light goes off. Except ABS Control - Performed when the ABS is not functioning. During ABS Control - Performed when the ABS is functioning. During Warning - Performed when the ABS indicator light is ON. ABS Self-diagnosis - The system performs the following controls when a problem is detected by the self-diagnosis. > ABS indicator light ON > Memory of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) > Mode change to the "system down mode" or the "control inhibition mode". 1. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is memorized when a problem is detected and the ABS indicator light does not go off, or when the ABS indicator light comes on. The DTC is not memorized when the ABS indicator light comes on unless the CPU is activated. 2. The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However, when the same DTC is detected twice or more, the later one is written over the old one. Therefore, when the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is recorded as one DTC. 3. The DTCs are indicated in the order of ascending number, not in the order they occur. 4. The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs cannot be canceled by disconnecting the battery. Perform the specified procedures to erase. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 87 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 88 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 89 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair 1. Remove the right side kick panel. 2. Disconnect the ABS control unit connectors. 3. Remove the ABS control unit. 4. Install the ABS control unit in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 94 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 Radiator fan relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 99 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 104 Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Blower Motor Relay Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Blower motor relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Blower Motor Relay > Page 107 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor High Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Blower motor high relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Component Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 112 Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 113 Wiring/Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 114 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation A/C Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from the air conditioning system, it delays the compressor from being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 115 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 A/C compressor clutch relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Component Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 120 Fan Controls Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 121 Wiring/Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 122 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 Condenser fan relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 127 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 128 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 129 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 130 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 131 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 132 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 133 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 134 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 135 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 136 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 137 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 138 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 139 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 140 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 141 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 142 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 143 Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Speed (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 144 Blower Motor Speed (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Panel Illumination Control Module > Component Information > Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 153 Lighting System (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 154 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 155 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test (Canada) 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the connectors from the daytime running lights control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Panel - Photo 69 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 162 Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 163 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/ hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View Horn Relay: Locations Alternate View Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 168 Horn Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 169 Horn Relay: Locations Picture Location Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 170 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Horn relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View Turn Signal Relay: Locations Alternate View Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 175 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 176 Turn Signal Relay: Locations Photo Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 177 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/ hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 183 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 184 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 185 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 186 Relay Box: Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 187 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 188 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 189 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 190 Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 191 Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 194 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 195 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 196 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 197 Relay Box: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Removal: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 5. Remove the two mounting nuts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box out from under the dash. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. Installation: 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/ relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect the airbag connectors. 4. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets ('99 - 00 models). 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Locations Integrated Control Unit: Locations Rear Of Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Integrated Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 205 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 206 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 207 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 208 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 209 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 210 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 211 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 212 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 213 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 214 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 215 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 216 Integrated Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 217 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 218 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 219 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 220 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 225 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 226 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 227 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 228 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 229 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 230 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 231 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 232 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 233 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 234 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 235 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 236 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 237 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View > Page 240 Engine Control Module: Locations Picture View Behind Right Kick Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 243 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 244 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 245 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 246 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 247 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 248 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 249 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 250 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 251 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 252 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 253 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 254 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 255 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 256 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 257 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 258 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Programming and Relearning Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset Procedure NOTE: Resetting the ECM/PCM will erase any stored DTCs and any freeze data. It will also restart all readiness code monitors. Either of the following actions will reset the ECM/PCM. - Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. - Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. NOTE: Removing the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse cancels the clock and the radio presets. Make note of the customer's presets so you can reset them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 261 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset Procedure NOTE: Resetting the ECM/PCM will erase any stored DTCs and any freeze data. It will also restart all readiness code monitors. Either of the following actions will reset the ECM/PCM. - Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. - Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. NOTE: Removing the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse cancels the clock and the radio presets. Make note of the customer's presets so you can reset them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay > Page 266 PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Main Relay (PGM-FI) Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 269 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 270 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 271 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 272 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 273 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 274 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 275 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 276 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 277 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 278 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 279 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 280 PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 281 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 282 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 283 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 284 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 285 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 286 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation Description The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 287 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 288 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 289 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 295 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 296 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 297 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 298 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 299 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 300 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 301 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 302 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 303 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 304 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 305 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 306 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 307 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 308 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 309 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 310 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 311 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PURPOSE AND OPERATION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 312 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 313 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 314 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay > Page 319 PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Main Relay (PGM-FI) Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 322 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 323 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 324 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 325 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 326 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 327 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 328 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 329 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 330 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 331 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 332 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 333 PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 334 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 335 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 336 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 337 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 338 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 339 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation Description The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 340 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 341 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 342 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 348 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 349 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 350 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 351 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 352 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 353 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 354 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 355 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 356 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 357 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 358 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 359 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 360 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 361 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 362 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 363 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 364 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - See Malfunction Indicator Lamp when the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is turned ON. - Perform the following input test for the ignition control module (ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems. INPUT TEST FOR THE IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM) 1. Remove the distributor ignition (DI) cap, the distributor ignition (DI) rotor and the leak cover (TEC). 2. Disconnect the wires from the ICM. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the BLK/YEL wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no battery voltage, check the BLK/YEL wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the ICM. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the wire*1 and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no battery voltage, check: the ignition coil. - the wire*1 between the ignition coil and the ICM. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. *1: BLU2 wire (HITACHI) WHT/BLU wire (TEC) 5. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connector A (32P). Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire between the ECM/PCM and the ICM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 365 - There should be continuity. 6. Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire to body ground. - There should be no continuity. 7. Check for continuity on the BLU1 wire between the test tachometer connector and the ICM. - There should be continuity. 8. Check for continuity on the BLU1 wire to body ground. - There should be no continuity. 9. If all the tests are normal, replace the ICM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Air Bag Control Module: Specifications SRS Unit SRS Unit Torx Bolt(s) 9.8 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 370 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Dashboard/Door Behind Left Side of Front Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 371 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 372 Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions Take extra care when painting or doing body work in the area below the dashboard. Avoid direct exposure of the SRS unit or wiring to heat guns, welding, or spraying equipment. Disconnect the airbag connector(s) before disconnecting SRS harness connectors. After any degree of frontal body damage, or after a collision without airbag deployment, inspect the SRS unit for physical damage. If it is dented, cracked, or deformed, replace it. Be sure the SRS unit is installed securely. Do not disassemble the SRS unit. Store the SRS unit in a cool (less than about 104 °F / 40 °C) and dry (less than 80% humidity, no moisture) place. Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit, and keep it away from dust. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit. The airbag(s) could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 373 Air Bag Control Module: Application and ID 96 - 97 Model SRS Units Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 374 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charge(s). If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: 1. The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflator(s) must ignite and deploy the airbag(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 375 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before disconnecting any part of the SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connector(s). - During installation or replacement, do not bump (impact wrench, hammer etc.) the area near the SRS unit. NOTE: Do not damage the SRS unit terminals or connectors. - Do not disassemble the SRS unit; it has no serviceable parts. - Store the SRS unit in a clean, dry area. - Do not use any SRS unit which has been subjected to water or shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s): NOTE: When disconnected, the airbag connector is automatically shorted. Driver's Side Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Front Passenger's Side Disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the right side cover from the SRS unit. 4. Remove the left side cover from the SRS unit, then disconnect the SRS main harness 18P connector from the SRS unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 376 5. Remove the four Torx bolts from the SRS unit, then pull out the SRS unit from the driver's side. 6. Install the new SRS unit. NOTE: Do not reuse a torx bolt that has red threads. Replace the bolt with a new one. 7. Connect the SRS main harness 8P connector to the SRS unit; push it into position until it clicks. 8. Install the SRS unit covers (right and left). Make sure the covers snap together in the middle. 9. Reconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, then reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 10. Reconnect the front passenger's airbag connector to the SRS main harness. 11. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 377 12. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 382 Starting System Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 383 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Starter cut relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations > Page 389 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagrams Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 393 Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 394 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 395 Shift Interlock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock System Shift Lock System 1. Disconnect the 8P connector from the interlock control unit. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 396 - If all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good control unit, and recheck the system. If the check is OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and you step on the brake pedal (with the shift lever in [P]), the shift lock system is electronically normal; if the shift lever cannot be shifted from [P], test the A/T gear position switch, park pin switch. Reconnect the 8P connector to the interlock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 402 Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Photo Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 403 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Rear window defogger relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger Relay > Component Information > Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Windows Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 413 Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 414 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 Power window relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Headlamp Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection Integrated Control Unit Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the integrated control unit. 3. Remove the integrated control unit from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector and the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. All Systems: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 422 Intermittent Wiper System: Key-in/Seat Belt Reminder, Lights-on Reminder System: Bulb Check System (Brake System Light): Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the inner handle. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the door lock switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Connector A Power Mirror Switch: Locations Connector A Driver's Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Connector A > Page 432 Power Mirror Switch: Locations Connector B Driver's Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 433 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Without Defogger Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Without Defogger 1. Remove the switch as described in Function Test . 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Without Defogger > Page 436 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection With Defogger 1. Pry the switch out of the dashboard driver's lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the switch. Mirror Switch Defogger Switch 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Locations Center of Trunk Lid Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Open/Close Switch Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Open/Close Switch Underside of Roof Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Open/Close Switch > Page 444 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Tilt/Close Switch Underside of Roof Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 445 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Adjustments Switch Plate Adjustment (Fully Closed Position) 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Using the moon roof wrench, close the glass fully. NOTE: Check the glass fit to the roof panel. 3. Using an open-end wrench, loosen the switch plate mounting bolts. 4. Adjust position of the switch plate (switch cam) as shown. 5. Check the operation of the glass (from tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch. NOTE: Check the glass height. 6. Close the glass fully, and check for water leaks. NOTE: Do not use high-pressure water. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Underside of Hatch Lid Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Photo 22 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Photo 22 Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Photo 22 > Page 454 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Additional Image SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS, before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 455 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation The brake system indicator light comes on to alert the driver that the parking brake is applied, or that the brake fluid level is low. It also comes on as a bulb test when the engine is cranked. Brake Fluid Level With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied through fuse 25 to the brake system light. If the brake fluid level is low, the brake fluid level switch closes, providing ground to the circuit. The brake system light then comes on, alerting the driver to a low brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder. (Check brake pad wear before you add fluid). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 456 Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Braking Sensor/Switch: Locations Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Release Switch: Locations Below Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Wheel Speed Sensor Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Sensor Lock Bolts 7 ft.lb Air Gap Front & Rear 0.02 - 0.04 in For EX with optional ABS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Wheel Speed Sensor > Page 470 Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Toothed Ring PULSER/WHEEL SENSOR AIR GAP * Front & Rear Standard ........................................................................................................................ .................................................. 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in) * For EX with optional ABS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Front Inside of Left Front Wheel (Right Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front > Page 473 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Rear Inside of Left Rear Wheel (Right Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 474 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation WHEEL SPEED SENSOR Wheel Sensor AC Current The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. As the gear pulser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor's magnetic coil, AC current is generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The ABS control unit detects the wheel sensor signal frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed. There are four wheel sensors, one for each wheel. The gear pulser has 50 teeth. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Toothed Ring Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Toothed Ring INSPECTION OF THE TOOTHED RING 1. Check the front and rear pulser for chipped or damaged teeth. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser. Standard: 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) NOTE: If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 inch), the probability is a distorted suspension arm which should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Toothed Ring > Page 477 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wheel Speed Sensor TESTING THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 1. Check the front and rear pulser for chipped or damaged teeth. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser. Standard: 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) NOTE: If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) , the probability is a distorted suspension arm which should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 478 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - Be careful when installing the sensors to avoid twisting the wires. - The torque value of the bolts is 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m, 7 ft. lbs.). FRONT REAR 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the four backing plate bolts. 3. Pull the backing plate away from the trailing arm, then remove the wheel sensor. It is not necessary to disconnect the brake line. NOTE: This illustration is drum brake type. The torque value of the disk type is same as drum type. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Right Side of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 487 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Fan Controls Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 491 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Removing the ECT switch while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the ECT switch. NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the ECT switch. 1 Remove the ECT switch from the thermostat housing. 2. Suspend the ECT switch in a container of water as shown. 3. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a thermometer. CAUTION: Do not let the thermometer touch the bottom of the hot container. 4. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Lamp Switch (Cruise Control) <--> [Brake Switch (Cruise Control)] > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Lamp Switch (Cruise Control) <--> [Brake Switch (Cruise Control)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 499 Brake Lamp Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 503 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch (M/T) 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Test/Replacement Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Carefully push out the switch from behind the dash-board. 3. Disconnect the connector from the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If there is no continuity, replace the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 509 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the driver's airbag connector. 4. Remove the dashboard driver's lower cover. 5. Disconnect the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector from the main wire harness. 6. Check for continuity between the terminals of the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, the switch is OK. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, go to step 7. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 510 7. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 8. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, replace the cable reel. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. 9. If all tests prove OK, reconnect the cable reel and cable reel sub-harness connector, then reinstall the steering column covers. 10. Reconnect the driver's airbag connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 11. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. 12. After connecting the airbag connectors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. ('99 - 00 models). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Test/Replacement Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Carefully push out the switch from behind the dash-board. 3. Disconnect the connector from the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If there is no continuity, replace the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 513 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the driver's airbag connector. 4. Remove the dashboard driver's lower cover. 5. Disconnect the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector from the main wire harness. 6. Check for continuity between the terminals of the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, the switch is OK. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, go to step 7. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 514 7. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 8. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, replace the cable reel. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. 9. If all tests prove OK, reconnect the cable reel and cable reel sub-harness connector, then reinstall the steering column covers. 10. Reconnect the driver's airbag connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 11. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. 12. After connecting the airbag connectors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. ('99 - 00 models). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the A/C thermostat. 2. Connect battery power to the No.3 terminal, ground the No.2 terminal, and connect a test light between the No.1 and No.3 terminals. NOTE: Use a 12 V, 3W - 18W test light. 3. Dip the A/C thermostat into a cup filled with ice water, and check the test light. Serpentine-type evaporator The light should go off at 36 - 39 °F (2 - 4 °C) or less, and should come on at 39 - 41 °F (4 - 5 °C) or more. Laminate-type evaporator The light should go off at 39 - 43 °F (4 - 6 °C) or less, and should come on at 43 - 45 °F (6 - 7 °C) or more. If the light doesn't come on and go off as specified, replace the A/C thermostat. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 530 Blower Motor Switch: Connector Locations Underside of Heater Control Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 533 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 534 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 535 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 536 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 537 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 538 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 539 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 540 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 541 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 542 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 543 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 544 Blower Motor Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 545 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 546 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 547 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 548 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 549 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 550 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Right Side of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Photo 82 Behind Right Side Of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 557 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation The A/C thermostat is located on the evaporator housing. The A/C thermostat turns OFF the A/C compressor clutch if the temperature at the evaporator goes below 3°C (37°F). This prevents condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins and blocking the air delivery into the passenger compartment. The blower motor will keep running when the sensor turns OFF the compressor. If the temperature goes below 3°C (37°F) turning OFF the A/C thermostat, ground will be removed from the condenser fan relay. This will deenergize the relay and remove voltage from voltage from the condenser fan motor causing the fan to stop running. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 558 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the A/C thermostat. 2. Connect battery power to the No.3 terminal, ground the No.2 terminal, and connect a test light between the No.1 and No.3 terminals. NOTE: Use a 12 V,3 W-18 W test light. 3. Dip the A/C thermostat into a cup filled with ice water, and check the test light. Serpentine-type evaporator The light should go off at 36 - 39°F (2 - 4°C) or less, and should come on at 39 - 41°F (4 - 5°C) or more. Laminate-type evaporator The light should go off at 39 - 43°F (4 - 5°C) or less, and should come on at 43 - 45°F (6 - 7°C) or more. If the light doesn't come on and go off as specified, replace the A/C thermostat. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations Left Front Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 563 Wiring/Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 564 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Battery voltage is supplied through fuse 56 to the A/C compressor clutch relay contacts at all times. With the ignition switch in ON (II), voltage is applied to the coil of the A/C compressor clutch relay through fuse 17. When you push the A/C switch ON , and the heater fan switch is in position 1, 2, 3, or 4, a "ground" input is provided to the engine control module (ECM) or powertrain control module (PCM) through the A/C thermostat and the A/C pressure switch. The A/C compressor clutch relay is grounded by the engine control module (ECM) or Powertrain Control Module (PCM). When energized, the A/C compressor clutch relay allows battery voltage to turn on the A/C compressor clutch. The A/C ON indicator light comes on when the A/C system is requested. A/C Pressure Switch The A/C pressure switch is located in the condenser outlet line where refrigerant is in a high temperature/high pressure liquid state. The switch will sense abnormally high or low pressure, and open the circuit. This removes ground, and the compressor will stop running. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ventilation Switch > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Locations Dashboard Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dashlight Brightness Controller: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 574 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 575 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 576 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 577 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 578 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 579 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 580 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 581 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 582 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 583 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 584 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 585 Dashlight Brightness Controller: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 586 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 587 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 588 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 589 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 590 Dash Lights Brightness Controller Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 591 Dashlight Brightness Controller: Testing and Inspection NOTE: The control unit is built into the dash brightness controller. 1. Carefully pry the controller out of the dashboard. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the controller. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the controller must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch Left Rear Door Striker Area (Right Similar) Left of Rear Seat (Sedan Shown, Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch > Page 596 Door Switch: Locations Door Switch At Driver's Door Striker Area (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications Fuel Gauge Sender: Specifications Float Position E 1/2 F USA,Canada Produced (ceramic Board Type) 105 - 108 ohms 29.5 - 35.5 ohms 3.5 - 5 ohms Japan Produced (wire -Wound Type) 105 - 110 ohms 29.5 - 39.5 ohms 2 - 5 ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 600 Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 601 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from your work area. NOTE: Refer to fuel gauge system circuit. 1. Check the No.25 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fusel relay box before testing. 2. Remove the access panel from the floor. 3. Disconnect the 3P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. 4. Connect the voltmeter positive probe to the No.2 terminal and the negative probe to the No.1 terminal, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5 and 8 V. If the voltage is as specified, go to step 5. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK wire. - poor ground (G552). 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Attach a jumper wire between the No.1 and No.2 terminals, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts moving toward the "F" mark. CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer reaches "F" on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the fuel gauge. NOTE: The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, hence the fuel level is continuously indicated even when the ignition switch is OFF, and the pointer moves more slowly than that of a bimetal type. - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at all, replace the gauge. - If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 602 8. Remove the fuel gauge sending unit as shown. 9. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 603 If the resistance readings are beyond the range, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 608 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 609 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 610 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 611 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 612 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 613 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 614 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 615 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 616 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 617 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 618 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 619 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 620 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 621 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 622 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 623 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 624 Seat Belt & Ignition Key Reminders Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 625 Key Reminder Switch: Description and Operation Ignition Key Warning Battery voltage is supplied at all times to the seat belt reminder/key-on beeper circuit in the integrated control unit. When you turn on the ignition key switch the integrated control unit senses ground. If you open the driver's door, the door switch closes, causing the beeper to sound until the door is closed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Back-Up Light Switch (M/T) Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Back-Up Light Switch (M/T) Right Side of Engine Compartment (M/T) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Back-Up Light Switch (M/T) > Page 634 Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Back-Up Light Switch (SI) Lower Front of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect wiring at switch. 2. Loosen locknut and remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Allow 0.039-0.196 inch (1-5 mm) brake pedal freeplay. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. Technical Service Bulletin # 97-007 Date: 981215 Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. 97-007 December 15, 1998 Applies To: 1996 - 97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Turn Signal Does Not Cancel (Supersedes 97-007, dated March 10, 1997) SYMPTOMS [NEW] The customer complains of one or more of the following. ^ Low power assist while turning ^ A "notchy" feeling when turning the steering wheel, or looseness in the steering ^ A clicking sound while turning the steering wheel ^ The turn signal switch does not cancel after making a turn PROBABLE CAUSE The cancel sleeve inside the combination switch shrinks and sticks to the combination switch assembly. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996 Civic - ALL 1997 Civic: 2-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8. . .VL049149 3-door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .VH111461 4-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .VL015491 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ8. . .VH540019 - Thru VIN JHMEJ6. . .VS037746 [NEW] - Thru VIN JHMEJ8. . .VS005454 [NEW] CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination switch assembly with the one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Combination Switch Assembly: P/N 35251-S04-A81, H/C 4790218 Steering Wheel Nut: P/N 90163-S04-000, H/C 4852794 Torx Bolt (2 required): P/N 90134-504-A81, H/C 4794996 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 728102 Flat rate time: 0.8 hour Failed part: P/N 35251-504-A81 H/C 4790218 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 646 Defect code: 032 Contention code: B01 Template ID: 97-007A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Repair Procedure 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes before continuing. 3. With the front wheels aligned straight ahead, remove the access panel from the back of the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and the cable reel. NOTE: Disconnecting the 2P connector automatically shorts the airbag wires; a shorting connector is not needed. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Remove the two bolt covers from the back of the steering wheel. Then remove and discard the two Torx bolts, disconnect the horn connector, and remove the driver's airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 647 6. Disconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). 7. Remove the steering wheel nut, and discard it. Then remove the steering wheel by rocking it side-to-side as you pull steadily with both hands. 8. Remove the upper and lower column covers. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 648 9. Disconnect the 3P connector between the main wire harness and the cable reel sub-harness, and disconnect the 2P connector between the cable reel and the SRS main harness. Then remove the cable reel. NOTE: The edges of the knee bolster are sharp. Be careful when you are working near it. 10. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the headlight switch. Then disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the wiper/washer switch. 11. Remove and retain the four screws that secure the combination switch assembly, then remove the assembly from the steering column. 12. Remove the headlight and wiper/washer switches from the old combination switch assembly and install them on the new one (see PARTS INFORMATION). 13. Reconnect the headlight and wiper/washer switch connectors, then reinstall the combination switch assembly with the original screws. 14. Set the cancel sleeve so its projections are aligned vertically. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 649 15. Carefully reinstall the cable reel on the steering column with the original screws. Then reconnect the 3P connector to the cable reel sub-harness and the 2P connector to the SRS main harness, and reinstall the connectors in their holders. 16. Reinstall the steering column covers with the original screws. 17. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops and then rotating it counterclockwise about 2-1/2 turns until the arrow on the label points straight up. 18. Reinstall the steering wheel. Then reconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). Route the wires in their clips on the steering wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 650 19. Install a new steering wheel nut (see PARTS INFORMATION). Torque it to 50 N.m (36 lb-ft). 20. Reconnect the airbag horn connector to the steering wheel, and reinstall the airbag with two new Torx bolts (see PARTS INFORMATION). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (7 lb-ft), then reinstall the bolt covers. 21. Attach the cable reel 2P and 3P connectors to the connector holder. Then reinstall the driver's dashboard lower cover. 22. Reconnect the airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 23. Reconnect the positive cable to the battery, and reconnect the negative cable. 24. Check the operation of the SRS: When you turn the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS light comes on and then goes off after six seconds. 25. Check the operation of the cable reel, the headlight switch, the wiper/washer switch, and both horn buttons. 26. Reset the radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. Technical Service Bulletin # 97-007 Date: 981215 Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. 97-007 December 15, 1998 Applies To: 1996 - 97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Turn Signal Does Not Cancel (Supersedes 97-007, dated March 10, 1997) SYMPTOMS [NEW] The customer complains of one or more of the following. ^ Low power assist while turning ^ A "notchy" feeling when turning the steering wheel, or looseness in the steering ^ A clicking sound while turning the steering wheel ^ The turn signal switch does not cancel after making a turn PROBABLE CAUSE The cancel sleeve inside the combination switch shrinks and sticks to the combination switch assembly. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996 Civic - ALL 1997 Civic: 2-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8. . .VL049149 3-door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .VH111461 4-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .VL015491 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ8. . .VH540019 - Thru VIN JHMEJ6. . .VS037746 [NEW] - Thru VIN JHMEJ8. . .VS005454 [NEW] CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination switch assembly with the one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Combination Switch Assembly: P/N 35251-S04-A81, H/C 4790218 Steering Wheel Nut: P/N 90163-S04-000, H/C 4852794 Torx Bolt (2 required): P/N 90134-504-A81, H/C 4794996 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 728102 Flat rate time: 0.8 hour Failed part: P/N 35251-504-A81 H/C 4790218 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 656 Defect code: 032 Contention code: B01 Template ID: 97-007A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Repair Procedure 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes before continuing. 3. With the front wheels aligned straight ahead, remove the access panel from the back of the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and the cable reel. NOTE: Disconnecting the 2P connector automatically shorts the airbag wires; a shorting connector is not needed. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Remove the two bolt covers from the back of the steering wheel. Then remove and discard the two Torx bolts, disconnect the horn connector, and remove the driver's airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 657 6. Disconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). 7. Remove the steering wheel nut, and discard it. Then remove the steering wheel by rocking it side-to-side as you pull steadily with both hands. 8. Remove the upper and lower column covers. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 658 9. Disconnect the 3P connector between the main wire harness and the cable reel sub-harness, and disconnect the 2P connector between the cable reel and the SRS main harness. Then remove the cable reel. NOTE: The edges of the knee bolster are sharp. Be careful when you are working near it. 10. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the headlight switch. Then disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the wiper/washer switch. 11. Remove and retain the four screws that secure the combination switch assembly, then remove the assembly from the steering column. 12. Remove the headlight and wiper/washer switches from the old combination switch assembly and install them on the new one (see PARTS INFORMATION). 13. Reconnect the headlight and wiper/washer switch connectors, then reinstall the combination switch assembly with the original screws. 14. Set the cancel sleeve so its projections are aligned vertically. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 659 15. Carefully reinstall the cable reel on the steering column with the original screws. Then reconnect the 3P connector to the cable reel sub-harness and the 2P connector to the SRS main harness, and reinstall the connectors in their holders. 16. Reinstall the steering column covers with the original screws. 17. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops and then rotating it counterclockwise about 2-1/2 turns until the arrow on the label points straight up. 18. Reinstall the steering wheel. Then reconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). Route the wires in their clips on the steering wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 660 19. Install a new steering wheel nut (see PARTS INFORMATION). Torque it to 50 N.m (36 lb-ft). 20. Reconnect the airbag horn connector to the steering wheel, and reinstall the airbag with two new Torx bolts (see PARTS INFORMATION). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (7 lb-ft), then reinstall the bolt covers. 21. Attach the cable reel 2P and 3P connectors to the connector holder. Then reinstall the driver's dashboard lower cover. 22. Reconnect the airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 23. Reconnect the positive cable to the battery, and reconnect the negative cable. 24. Check the operation of the SRS: When you turn the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS light comes on and then goes off after six seconds. 25. Check the operation of the cable reel, the headlight switch, the wiper/washer switch, and both horn buttons. 26. Reset the radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 663 Combination Switch: Connector Locations Combination Light Switch Connector A Left Side of Steering Column Combination Light Switch Connector B Left Side of Steering Column Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 664 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 665 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables. If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 666 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Switch Replacement Honda does not provide a service procedure for this component. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch Left Rear Door Striker Area (Right Similar) Left of Rear Seat (Sedan Shown, Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch > Page 671 Door Switch: Locations Door Switch At Driver's Door Striker Area (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 675 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 676 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the hazard warning switch or the center outlet panel when prying the switch out. 1. Pry the hazard warning switch out of the center outlet panel. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the hazard warning switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 681 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 682 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 683 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 684 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 685 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 686 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 687 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 688 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 689 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 690 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 691 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 692 Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 693 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 694 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 695 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 696 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 697 Headlamp Switch: Electrical Diagrams Part 1 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 698 Part 2 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 699 Part 3 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 700 Part 4 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 701 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables. If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch: Turn Signal Switch: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 702 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Remove dashboard lower cover. 4. Remove steering column upper and lower covers. 5. Disconnect switch electrical connectors. 6. Remove two switch attaching screws, then slide switch assembly out of housing. 7. Reverse procedure to install. 8. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables. If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch: Turn Signal Switch: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 706 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Remove dashboard lower cover. 4. Remove steering column upper and lower covers. 5. Disconnect switch electrical connectors. 6. Remove two switch attaching screws, then slide switch assembly out of housing. 7. Reverse procedure to install. 8. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set 04-004 August 10, 2004 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord V6 - ALL 1996-00 Civic DX, LX - ALL 1999-00 Odyssey - ALL Rough Idle at Cold Start; MIL Comes On With DTC P0107 or P0108 (Supersedes 04-004, dated March 5, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09103 Skill Level: Repair Technician SYMPTOM In cold weather, the engine idles roughly after a cold start. The MIL may also come on with DTC P0107 (MAP sensor circuit low voltage) or DTC P0108 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture freezes inside the MAP sensor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the MAP sensor. For Japan-built Civics, also replace the intake manifold. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 717 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Accord V6; 1998-00 Civic DX, LX; Odyssey Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 718 1996-97 Civic DX, LX Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 81400 Symptom Code: K4900 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS *1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P data link connector (DLC).* 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 3. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the correct date and time. 4. From the System Selection Menu screen, select PGM FI. 5. From the Mode Menu screen, select DTCs/Freeze Data. 6. Enter the repair order number when prompted, then read the screen. Is DTC P0107 or P0108 set? Yes - Go to step 7. No - Go to step 8. 7. Press the freeze data (camera film strip) icon on the right side of the screen. Look at the IAT SENSOR value. Is the IAT value at or below 32°F (0°) (4.0 volts)? Yes - Press the red DTC icon on the right side of the screen to clear the DTC. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Go to the appropriate *REPAIR PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* 8. Find out from your customer the approximate ambient air temperature when the problem happened. Was the ambient air temperature at or below 32°F (0°C) when the problem happened? Yes - Go to the appropriate REPAIR * PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* *REPAIR PROCEDURE - ACCORD V6, ODYSSEY* NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 719 Discard the instructions that came with the kit they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 2. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 3. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 4. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 720 6. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. *7. Accord V6 only: Remove and discard the throttle body cover.* 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. * NOTE: For 1998-99 Accord V6 models, discard the sensor spacer from the kit, and use P/N 16442-P8F-A21, H/C 6562896, instead. Also, discard the adapter harness bracket from the kit. This bracket cannot be mounted to the spacer on those models.* 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. *10. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Install the adapter harness bracket on the sensor spacer (one flange bolt).* 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the MAP sensor. *13. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place.* *14. 1998-99 Accord V6 only: Use a wire tie to secure the engine harness 3P connector to any nearby vacuum hose. Make sure the connector and the harness do not interfere with the throttle cables and the wire tie does not pinch the vacuum hose.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 721 REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (U.S.-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 3. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the 3P connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 4. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 722 5. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. 7. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. 10. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 11. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 723 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 13. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 14. Clamp the engine harness in place. 15. Reinstall the air cleaner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (JAPAN-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual). Make sure you replace the fuel pressure regulator 0-ring and the seal rings and rubber rings for the fuel injectors. 3. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 724 4. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 5. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 6. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 725 8. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 9. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 10. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 9. 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 12. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 726 13. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 14. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 15. Clamp the engine harness in place. 16. Reinstall the air cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set 04-004 August 10, 2004 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord V6 - ALL 1996-00 Civic DX, LX - ALL 1999-00 Odyssey - ALL Rough Idle at Cold Start; MIL Comes On With DTC P0107 or P0108 (Supersedes 04-004, dated March 5, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09103 Skill Level: Repair Technician SYMPTOM In cold weather, the engine idles roughly after a cold start. The MIL may also come on with DTC P0107 (MAP sensor circuit low voltage) or DTC P0108 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture freezes inside the MAP sensor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the MAP sensor. For Japan-built Civics, also replace the intake manifold. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 732 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Accord V6; 1998-00 Civic DX, LX; Odyssey Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 733 1996-97 Civic DX, LX Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 81400 Symptom Code: K4900 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS *1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P data link connector (DLC).* 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 3. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the correct date and time. 4. From the System Selection Menu screen, select PGM FI. 5. From the Mode Menu screen, select DTCs/Freeze Data. 6. Enter the repair order number when prompted, then read the screen. Is DTC P0107 or P0108 set? Yes - Go to step 7. No - Go to step 8. 7. Press the freeze data (camera film strip) icon on the right side of the screen. Look at the IAT SENSOR value. Is the IAT value at or below 32°F (0°) (4.0 volts)? Yes - Press the red DTC icon on the right side of the screen to clear the DTC. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Go to the appropriate *REPAIR PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* 8. Find out from your customer the approximate ambient air temperature when the problem happened. Was the ambient air temperature at or below 32°F (0°C) when the problem happened? Yes - Go to the appropriate REPAIR * PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* *REPAIR PROCEDURE - ACCORD V6, ODYSSEY* NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 734 Discard the instructions that came with the kit they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 2. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 3. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 4. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 735 6. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. *7. Accord V6 only: Remove and discard the throttle body cover.* 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. * NOTE: For 1998-99 Accord V6 models, discard the sensor spacer from the kit, and use P/N 16442-P8F-A21, H/C 6562896, instead. Also, discard the adapter harness bracket from the kit. This bracket cannot be mounted to the spacer on those models.* 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. *10. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Install the adapter harness bracket on the sensor spacer (one flange bolt).* 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the MAP sensor. *13. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place.* *14. 1998-99 Accord V6 only: Use a wire tie to secure the engine harness 3P connector to any nearby vacuum hose. Make sure the connector and the harness do not interfere with the throttle cables and the wire tie does not pinch the vacuum hose.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 736 REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (U.S.-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 3. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the 3P connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 4. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 737 5. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. 7. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. 10. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 11. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 738 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 13. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 14. Clamp the engine harness in place. 15. Reinstall the air cleaner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (JAPAN-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual). Make sure you replace the fuel pressure regulator 0-ring and the seal rings and rubber rings for the fuel injectors. 3. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 739 4. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 5. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 6. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 740 8. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 9. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 10. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 9. 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 12. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 741 13. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 14. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 15. Clamp the engine harness in place. 16. Reinstall the air cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 746 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 747 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 748 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 749 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 750 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 751 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 752 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 753 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 754 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 755 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 756 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 757 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 758 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 759 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 760 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 761 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Barometric Pressure Sensor: Locations The Barometric Pressure Sensor (BARO) is built into the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 768 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 772 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 776 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 777 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 778 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 779 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 782 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 783 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 784 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 785 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 786 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 787 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 788 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 789 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 790 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 791 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 792 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 793 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 794 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 795 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 796 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 797 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 798 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper cover and dipstick/tube. 4. Remove the lower cover and idler pulley bracket. 5. Disconnect the CKF sensor connector, then remove the CKF sensor. 6. Install the CKF sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Electric Load Sensor: Component Locations Engine Compartment Picture View Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 803 Starter Cables/Battery Ground Cable/Engine Ground Cable A, Engine Compartment Overview Of Power Terminals (T) And Grounds (G) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 804 Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 805 Electric Load Sensor: Connector Locations Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Left Front Corner of Fuel Tank Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Ignition Hall Effect Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Ignition Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance At 0°C (32°F) ....................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 5.0 - 7.0 K Ohms At 40°C (104°F) .......................................................... ..................................................................................................................... 1.0 - 1.5 K Ohms At 100°C (212°F) ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 0.3 - 0.4 K Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 816 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Rear of D16Y8 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 817 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The IAT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Underside of Vehicle, Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications With 5 in.Hg. ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 2.4 - 2.5 Volts With 15 in.Hg. ................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. 1.4 - 1.5 Volts With 25 in.Hg. ............................................................................................................................. .................................................................... 0.5 - 0.6 Volts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 824 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Rear of D16Y8 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 825 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation PURPOSE The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 834 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 840 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 841 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications OXYGEN SENSOR (WITH ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND ON THREADS) ......................................................................................... 45 Nm (33 lb-ft) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 842 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Below Rear of D16Y5 Eng. Below Rear of D16Y5 Eng. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 845 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 846 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 847 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 848 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 849 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 850 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 851 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 852 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 853 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 854 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 855 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 856 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 857 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 858 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 859 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 860 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 861 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PURPOSE The Engine Control Module (ECM) uses the O2 signal to fine tune the Fuel Injector duration to maintain the correct fuel mixture. OPERATION The Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) is installed in the exhaust manifold with the sensor end extending into the exhaust stream. It uses zirconia and platinum to compare exhaust oxygen content with that of the outside air. When heated by the combination of its internal heater and exhaust gases, the sensor supplies a low voltage signal (0.0 - 1.0 volt) to the ECM. The amount of voltage produced is determined by the air/fuel mixture, A high voltage (0.7 - 1.0 volt) indicates a rich mixture, and a low (0 - 0.3 volts) voltage indicates a lean mixture. Oxygen sensor operation is monitored by the Engine Control Module (ECM) and a malfunction should be accompanied by a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Circuit and output testing procedures are covered in detail in the Diagnostic Trouble Code Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Oxygen Sensor malfunctions will cause increased emission output and smog check failure. Other symptoms may include poor idle quality or poor fuel economy. HINT: When monitoring oxygen sensor operation with an oscilloscope, watch for a sine wave with a frequency of at least 8 cycles in 10 seconds. A "lazy" oxygen sensor will not always set a code, but will usually cause abnormal emissions levels. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 862 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 863 Part 2 Of 2 The scan tool indicates Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0135: An electrical problem in the Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S) (Sensor 1) Heater system. (Except D16Y5 engine with M/T) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 864 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair PRIMARY H02S: 1. Remove the primary H02S. D16Y5, D16Y7 Engines: a. Disconnect the primary H02S connector, then remove the cover. b. Remove the primary H02S. B16A2, D16Y8 Engines: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 865 a. Disconnect the primary H02S connector then remove the primary H02S. 2. Install the primary H02S in reverse order of removal. SECONDARY H02S: 1. Remove the secondary H02S. D16Y5, D16Y7 Engines: a. Disconnect the secondary H02S connector, then remove the secondary H02S. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 866 B16A2, D16Y8 Engines: a. Remove the grommet, and pull out the secondary H02S connector, then disconnect the secondary H02S connector. b. Remove the secondary H02S. 2. Install the secondary H02S in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Lower Left Rear of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 870 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 871 Part 2 Of 2 This signals the ECM/ PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 876 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 877 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 878 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 879 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 880 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 881 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 882 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 883 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 884 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 885 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 886 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 887 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 888 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 889 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 890 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 891 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1 / Rear of D16Y8 Engine Rear of D16Y8 Engine Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1.2 / Top of D16Y7 Engine Top of D16Y7 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 895 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications A/T Gear Position Signal: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 899 A/T Gear Position Signal: Locations Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 902 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 903 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 904 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 905 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 906 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 907 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 908 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 909 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 910 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 911 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 912 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 913 A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 914 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 915 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 916 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 917 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 918 All Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 919 A/T Gear Position Signal: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come on. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the powertrain (all except '96-'98 CVT) or transmission ('96-'98 CVT) control module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for CVT) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 920 A/T Gear Position Signal: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 921 A/T Gear Position Signal: Adjustments 1. Shift to the P position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of D4 or D position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No. 1 and No. 7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. - If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position N in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 922 A/T Gear Position Signal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown above. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the P and N position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position P anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch <--> [Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch] > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch <--> [Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch] > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 > Page 927 Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC Pressure Switch - 2 Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View > Page 934 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Picture View Lower Right Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 937 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 938 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 939 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 940 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 941 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 942 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 943 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 944 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 945 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 946 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 947 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 948 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 949 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 950 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 951 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 952 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 953 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 15 and the BLK/WHT and BLK/YEL wire to the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). The sensor is grounded by the BLK wire to G101. The speedometer and other control units in the circuit supply about 5 volts to the BLU/WHT wire. The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) intermittently grounds the BLU/WHT wire which generates a pulsed signal in it. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the car. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 954 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 955 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 961 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 962 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 963 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 964 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 965 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 966 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 967 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 968 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 969 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 970 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 971 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 972 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 973 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 974 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 975 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 976 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 981 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 982 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 983 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 984 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 985 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 986 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 987 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 988 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 989 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 990 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 991 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 992 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 993 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 994 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 995 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 996 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1 / Rear of D16Y8 Engine Rear of D16Y8 Engine Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1.2 / Top of D16Y7 Engine Top of D16Y7 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1000 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1005 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Hall Effect Sensor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Hall Effect Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Ignition Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Underside of Vehicle, Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations Impact Sensor: Locations The impact sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Safing Sensor: Locations The safing sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch > Page 1034 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Interlock Switch Behind Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Lower Left Rear of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1045 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1046 Part 2 Of 2 This signals the ECM/ PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch Signal <--> [Brake Switch - TCC] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1055 Mainshaft Sensor: Locations Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations Park Pin Switch: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 1059 Park Pin Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the park pin switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with: - the shift lever any position other than [P], or - the push button pushed in [P]. There should be continuity. 4. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with the shift lever in [P] and the push button released. There should be no continuity. If necessary, replace the park pin switch. NOTE: Park pin switch 4P connector No.1 and No.2 terminals are for A/T gear position console light. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications A/T Gear Position Signal: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1063 A/T Gear Position Signal: Locations Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1066 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1067 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1068 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1069 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1070 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1071 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1072 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1073 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1074 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1075 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1076 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1077 A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1078 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1079 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1080 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1081 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1082 All Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1083 A/T Gear Position Signal: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come on. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the powertrain (all except '96-'98 CVT) or transmission ('96-'98 CVT) control module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for CVT) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1084 A/T Gear Position Signal: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1085 A/T Gear Position Signal: Adjustments 1. Shift to the P position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of D4 or D position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No. 1 and No. 7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. - If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position N in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1086 A/T Gear Position Signal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown above. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the P and N position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position P anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Top of Transmission (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 1093 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Drive Pulley Speed Sensor Right Side Lower Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 1094 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 1095 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 1096 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Secondary Gear Shaft Speed Sensor Right Side Rear of Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1097 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the countershaft speed sensor from the right side cover. 2. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the mainshaft speed sensor from the transmission housing. 3. Replace the 0-ring with a new one before installing the countershaft speed sensor or the mainshaft speed sensor. NOTE: Install the mainshaft speed sensor washer on the mainshaft speed sensor. The mainshaft speed sensor washer is used on models with the D16Y7 engine. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1103 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1104 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1105 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1106 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1107 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1108 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1109 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1110 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1111 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1112 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1113 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1114 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1115 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1116 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1117 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1118 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1119 CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rear window defogger switch or the center panel when prying the switch out. NOTE: Before testing, check for blown No.16 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 1. Pry the switch out of the center panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector from the switch. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the voltage between the BLK/BLU (+) and the BLK (-) terminals. There should be battery voltage. - If there is no voltage, check for an open in the BLK/BLU wire. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Connect a jumper wire between the BLK/BLU and the BLU/YEL terminals. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the rear window defogger works; if it does, replace the defogger switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1131 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Washer Fluid Level Switch: Testing and Inspection Washer Level Switch Test (Canada) 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the washer. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each float position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the switch, remove the two screws, and pull out the switch. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1139 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Remove instrument panel lower cover. 3. Remove upper and lower steering column covers from steering column. 4. Disconnect 8-P and 6-P connectors from wiper switch. 5. Remove two attaching screws and slide wiper switch out of housing. 6. Reverse procedure to install. 7. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Right Side of Steering Column Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1143 Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1144 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the switch, remove the two screws, and pull out the switch. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1145 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Remove dashboard lower cover. 4. Remove steering column upper cover. 5. Disconnect electrical connectors. 6. Remove wiper/washer switch attaching screws, then the switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. 8. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1155 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1156 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1157 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1158 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1159 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1160 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1161 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1162 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1163 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1169 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1170 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1171 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1172 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1173 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1174 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1175 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1176 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 1177 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1178 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1179 Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1180 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1181 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1182 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1183 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1184 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1185 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1186 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1187 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1188 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1189 to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1190 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1191 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1192 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1193 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1194 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1195 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 1196 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1197 Alignment: Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1198 Alignment: Service Precautions CAUTION: When fasteners are removed, always reinstall them at the same location from which they were removed. If a fastener needs to be replaced, use the correct part number fastener for that application. If the correct part number fastener is not available, a fastener of equal size and strength (or stronger) may be used. Fasteners that are not reused, and those requiring thread locking compound will be called out. The correct torque value must be used when installing fasteners that require it. If the above conditions are not followed, parts or system damage could result. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > General Description Alignment: Description and Operation General Description GENERAL DESCRIPTION "Front End Alignment" refers to the angular relationship between the front wheels, the front suspension attaching parts and the ground. Proper front end alignment must be maintained in order to insure efficient steering, good directional stability and to prevent abnormal tire wear. The most important factors of front end alignment are wheel toe-in, wheel camber and axle caster. CAMBER: Camber is the vertical tilting inward or outward of the front wheels. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheels tilt inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt measured in degrees from the vertical is called the camber angle (1). If camber is extreme or unequal between the wheels, improper steering and excessive tire wear will result. Negative camber causes wear on the inside of the tire, while positive camber causes wear to the outside. CASTER: This illustration shows view from the side of the vehicle. Caster (1) is the vertical tilting of the wheel axis either forward or backward (when viewed from the side of the vehicle). A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). On the short and long arm type suspension you cannot see a caster angle without a special instrument, but if you look straight down from the top of the upper control arm to the ground, the ball joints do not line up (fore and aft) when a caster angle other than 0 degree is present. With a positive angle, the lower ball joint would be slightly ahead (toward the front of the vehicle) of the upper ball joint center line. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > General Description > Page 1201 TOE-IN: This illustration shows view from the top of the vehicle. Toe-in is the measured amount the front wheels are turn in. The actual amount of toe-in is normally a fraction of a degree. Toe-in is measured from the center of the tire treads or from the inside of the tires. The purpose of toe-in is to insure parallel rolling of the front wheels and to offset any small deflections of the wheel support system which occurs when the vehicle is rolling forward. Incorrect toe-in results in excessive toe-in and unstable steering. Toe-in is the last alignment to be set in the front end alignment procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > General Description > Page 1202 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the front wheels from the vertical. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheels tilt inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt measured in degrees from the vertical is called the camber angle. If camber is extreme or unequal between the wheels, improper steering and excessive tire wear will result. Negative camber causes wear on the inside of the tire, while positive camber causes wear to the outside. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > General Description > Page 1203 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Caster is the tilting of the wheel axis either forward or backward from the vertical (when viewed from the side of the vehicle). A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). On the short and long arm type suspension you cannot see a caster angle without a special instrument, but if you look straight down from the top of the upper control arm to the ground, the ball joints do not line up (fore and aft) when a caster angle other than 0 degree is present. With a positive angle, the lower ball joint would be slightly ahead (toward the front of the vehicle) of the upper ball joint center line. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > General Description > Page 1204 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe-In Toe-in is the turning of the front wheels. The actual amount of toe-in is normally a fraction of a degree. Toe-in is measured from the center of the tire treads or from the inside of the tires. The purpose of toe-in is to insure parallel rolling of the front wheels and to offset any small deflections of the wheel support system which occurs when the vehicle is rolling forward. Incorrect toe-in results in excessive toe-in and unstable steering. Toe-in is the last alignment to be set in the front end alignment procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1205 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Preliminary Checks Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Checks INSPECTION Before making any adjustments affecting caster, camber or toe-in, the following front end inspection should be made. 1. Inspect the tires for proper inflation pressure. 2. Inspect the front wheel bearings for proper adjustment. 3. inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends. If excessive looseness is noted, correct before adjusting. 4. Inspect the wheel and tires for run-out. 5. Inspect the trim height. If not within specifications, the correction must be made before adjusting caster. 6. Inspect the steering unit for looseness at the frame. 7. Inspect shock absorbers for leaks or any noticeable noise. 8. Inspect the control arms or stabilizer bar attachment for looseness. 9. Inspect the front end alignment using alignment equipment. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 10. Alignment must be performed on a level surface. - Check that the suspension is not modified. - Check the tire size and tire pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Preliminary Checks > Page 1208 Alignment: Service and Repair Alignment Preliminary Checks For proper inspection/adjustment of the wheel alignment check and adjust the following before checking the alignment. Check that the suspension is not modified. - Check the tire size and tire pressure. - Check the runout of the wheels and tires. - Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with your hands and move it up and down and right and left to check for wobbling.) NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Caster 1. Check the caster angle. Caster angle: (1°40' ± 1°) +0.67° to +2.67°. 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Camber 1. Check the camber angle. Camber angle: - Front: (0°00' ± 1) -1° to +1°. - Rear: (-1° ± 1°) -2° to 0°. 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Front Toe 1. Check the tire pressure. 2. Center steering wheel spokes. 3. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead. Front toe: (IN 1 ± 2 mm /IN 0.04 ± 0.08 inch) -0.12 to +0.04 inch a. If adjustment is required, go on to step 4. b. If no adjustment is required, remove alignment equipment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Preliminary Checks > Page 1209 4. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts, and turn both tie-rods in the same direction until the front wheels are in straight ahead position. 5. Turn both tie-rods equally until the toe reading on the turning radius gauge is correct. 6. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. NOTE: Reposition the tie-rod boot if it is twisted or displaced. Rear Toe 1. Release parking brake. NOTE: Measure difference in toe measurements with the wheels pointed straight ahead. - If the parking brake is engaged, you may get an incorrect reading. Rear toe-in: (2 minus 1 or plus 2 mm /0.08 minus 0.04 or plus 0.08 inch) -0.12 to 0 inch. - If adjustment is required, go to step 2. - If no adjustment is required, remove alignment equipment. 2. Before adjustment, note the locations of adjusting bolts on the right and left compensator arms. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolts, and slide the compensator arm in or out, as shown, to adjust the toe. 4. Tighten the adjusting bolts. Example: After the rear toe inspection, the wheel is 2 mm (0.08 inch) out of the specification. a. Move the arm so the adjusting bolt moves 2 mm (0.08 inch) inward from the position recorded before the adjustment. b. The distance the adjusting bolt is moved should be equal to the amount out-of-specification. Turning Angle Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Preliminary Checks > Page 1210 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake, and measure the turning angle of both wheels. Turning angle: Inward wheel: (39°50') 39.83°. - Outward wheel (reference): (33°10') 33.17°. 2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts Fuel Pressure: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts 97-020 MAR 10, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts New Gauge The fuel pressure gauge with 10" hose (T/N 07406-0040001) has been discontinued. The gauge that replaces it (T/N 07406-004000A) has an easier-to-read face, a protective boot around the gauge housing, and a 48" hose. Replacement Parts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts > Page 1216 The replacement hose for the old gauge (24", T/N 07406-004020A) has also been discontinued. If you need a replacement hose, order the new 48" hose (T/N 07406-004020B). The new hose comes with an adapter so you can use it with the old fuel pressure gauge (T/N 07406-0040001). Before connecting the hose to the vehicle, make sure the aluminum washer on the end of the hose seals properly. If the aluminum washer doesn't seal, replace the washer. Replacement washers come in a set of five (T/N 07406-0040300). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1217 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Condition: engine idling, regulator vacuum hose disconnected Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kg/Sq.cm; 38 - 46 psi) Condition: engine idling, regulator vacuum hose connected Pressure should be: 200 - 250 kPa (2.0 - 2.5 kg/Sq.cm; 28 - 36 psi) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1218 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the service bolt on the fuel filter while holding the banjo bolt with another wrench. Attach the special tool. 3. Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure with the engine idling and the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator disconnected from the fuel pressure regulator and pinched. If the engine will not start, turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait for two seconds, turn it off, then back on again and read the fuel pressure. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kg/Sq.cm, 38 - 46 psi) 4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Pressure should be: 200 - 250 kPa (2.0 - 2.5 kg/Sq.cm, 28 - 36 psi) If the fuel pressure is not as specified, first check the fuel pump. If the fuel pump is OK, check the following: If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, Inspect for: Pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect for: Clogged fuel filter. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - Fuel line leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester Idle Speed: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester 03-016 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord -ALL 1996-00 Civic -ALL 1997-01 CR-V - ALL 1997-01 Prelude - ALL *1999-04 Odyssey - ALL* Inspecting Idle Speed With the PGM Tester or Honda Diagnostic System (Supersedes 03-016, dated March 25, 2003, to update the information marked by asterisks) BACKGROUND The ECM/PCM controls the vehicle's idle speed with the idle air control (IAC) valve. The IAC valve and the air bleed screw (idle adjusting screw) work together to allow the proper amount of air into the intake manifold when the throttle valve is closed (the accelerator pedal is released). The ECM/PCM "learns" to work the IAC valve based on the total amount of air entering the intake manifold. Air can enter the intake manifold from several sources, including the air bleed screw, but only the air bleed screw is adjustable. If any changes are made that alter this airflow, specifically with the air bleed screw, the ECM/PCM must learn new idle parameters. When the air bleed screw is properly set, the ECM/PCM controls the engine's idle speed seamlessly. But when the air bleed screw is not properly set, either of these symptoms may be present: ^ Idle speed dips and then quickly recovers. ^ Engine stalls intermittently when it is just "off-idle." Here are the criteria for this symptom: - The accelerator pedal is released but the driver's right foot rests over the pedal, causing just enough pressure for the ECM/PCM to detect an input, yet there is little or no throttle valve opening (the throttle valve is either not allowing any airflow or it is opened so slightly that more air supply is needed). - The engine speed is about 1,250 rpm or less. - The lockup clutch (A/T models) or the clutch (M/T models) is disengaged. - All during this time, the driver's foot does not move and stays resting over the accelerator pedal. - The air bleed screw is not set properly and does not allow enough airflow. - The amount of "air leakage" into the intake manifold is very low. (The normal amount of air let into the intake manifold by sources other than the IAC valve, the air bleed screw, and normal operation of the throttle body can vary slightly from vehicle to vehicle.) NOTE: "Air leakage" cannot be easily checked. If the first four criteria are met when the vehicle stalls, you can assume the last two criteria are met as well. CORRECTIVE ACTION L4 Models and 1999-00 Odyssey: Inspect the idle speed with the PGM Tester or Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) (see INSPECTION PROCEDURE A). V6 Models except 1999-00 Odyssey: Inspect the idle speed with the PGM Tester or HDS, and clean out the throttle body if needed (see INSPECTION PROCEDURE B). PARTS INFORMATION Throttle Body Gasket (use only if needed): Refer to the parts catalog. TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 1223 PGM Tester with SN 320 or Honda Diagnostic System with 1.006.004 or later software REQUIRED MATERIALS Carburetor Cleaner: P/N 08732-0006, H/C 4713673 or Throttle Plate and Induction Cleaner: P/N 08732-9009, H/C 6204945 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Inspect Idle Speed (L4 and V6 Models) Operation Number: 120301 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 16400-PAA-A61 H/C 5429006 *Defect Code: 07403 Symptom Code: 08901* Skill Level: Repair Technician Clean Throttle Body (V6 Models Except 1999-00 Odyssey) Operation Number: 216001 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 16400-PAA-A61 H/C 5429006 *Defect Code: 08103 Symptom Code: 08901* Skill Level: Repair Technician NOTE: Warranty claims for these labor operations must be submitted separately. Do not combine them on the same claim. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE A 1. Access the air bleed screw on the throttle body. 2. Record the current setting of the screw: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 1224 ^ Turn the screw clockwise, and count the number of turns (both full and partial) it takes to fully seat the screw. ^ Turn the screw counterclockwise back to its original setting. ^ Subtract the number of clockwise turns it took to seat the screw from 3-1/2. Record that number. Example: If it took two full turns to seat the screw, subtracting 3-1/2 from that gives you 1-1/2. 3. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). 4. Turn off all electrical items (A/C, audio unit defogger, lights, etc.). Center the steering wheel so there is no power steering load. 5. Connect the PGM Tester or HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn on the PGM Tester or HDS. Enter the VIN and odometer reading. 7. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester or HDS to get to DATA LIST. Scroll down the list to IAC. 8. While watching the IAC counts on the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw (either counterclockwise or clockwise) until the IAC count reaches 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey) or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. (Count the number of counterclockwise turns you have made, and add that number to the screw setting you recorded in step 2.) ^ If you see an IAC count of 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey), turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 9. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey), and you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns, leave the screw set where it is. Go to step 9. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 9. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes to allow the ECM/PCM to learn the new idle parameters. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Turn off and disconnect the PGM Tester or HDS. INSPECTION PROCEDURE B 1. Access the air bleed screw on the throttle body. 2. Record the current setting of the screw: ^ Turn the screw clockwise, and count the number of turns (both full and partial) it takes to fully seat the screw. ^ Turn the screw counterclockwise back to its original setting. ^ Subtract the number of clockwise turns it took to seat the screw from 3-1/2. Record that number. Example: If it took two full turns to seat the screw, subtracting 3-1/2 from that gives you 1-1/2. 3. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). 4. Turn off all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.). Center the steering wheel so there is no power steering load. 5. Connect the PGM Tester or HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn on the PGM Tester or HDS. Enter the VIN and odometer reading. 7. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester or HDS to get to DATA LIST. Scroll down the list to IAC. 8. While watching the IAC counts on the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw (either counterclockwise or clockwise) until the IAC count reaches 7 or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. (Count the number of counterclockwise turns you have made, and add that number to the screw setting you recorded in step 2.) ^ If you see an IAC count of 7, turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 14. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 7, and you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns, leave the screw set where it is. Go to step 9. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Remove the throttle body (see the Fuel and Emissions section of the appropriate service manual). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 1225 10. Open the throttle. Spray carburetor cleaner or throttle plate and induction cleaner into the throttle body to clean out any contaminants. Make sure you spray the cleaner through the back of the throttle body not the front, to avoid damaging the IAC valve. 11. Inspect the throttle body gasket, and replace it if needed. Reinstall the throttle body, making sure all cables are properly adjusted, the accelerator pedal works properly, and all hoses and cables are correctly routed. 12. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature. Make sure all electrical items are turned off and the steering wheel is centered. 13. While watching the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw until the IAC count reaches 7 or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. ^ If you see an IAC count of 7, turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 14. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 7, leave the screw set at 3-1/2 turns. Go to step 14. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 14. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes to allow the ECM/PCM to learn the new idle parameters. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Turn off and disconnect the PGM Tester or HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Manual Transmission Idle Speed: Specifications Manual Transmission Base Idle Speed .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 450 ± 50 rpm Controlled Idle Speed USA ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 670 ± 50 rpm Canada ...................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm With Headlights On Low ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 750 ± 50 rpm With fan switch on HI and A/C On ....................................................................................................... ............................................................ 850 ± 50 rpm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Manual Transmission > Page 1228 Idle Speed: Specifications Automatic Transmission Controlled Idle Speed USA ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 700 ± 50 rpm Canada ...................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm With fan switch on HI and A/C On ....................................................................................................... ............................................................ 810 ± 50 rpm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With A/T Adjust the idle speed using a Honda PGM Tester if possible. If not, use the following procedure: NOTE: - Leave the IAC valve connected. - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: USA: D16Y5 engine with CVT, D16Y7 engine with A/T, D16YS engine with A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) D16Y7 engine with M/T: 670 ± 50 rpm Canada: D16Y8 engine, D16Y7 engine: M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 4. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn clockwise or counterclockwise. 5. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn, check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn again. NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more than 1/2-turn without checking the idle speed. 6. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T 810 ± 50 rpm A/T,CVT 810 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air conditioner is on. - If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 1231 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With CVT Adjust the idle speed using a Honda PGM Tester if possible. If not, use the following procedure: NOTE: - Leave the IAC valve connected. - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: USA: D16Y5 engine with CVT and D16Y7 engine with A/T and D16Y8 engine with A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) D16Y7 engine with M/T: 670 ± 50 rpm Canada: D16Y8 engine, D16Y7 engine: 750 ± 50 rpm 4. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn clockwise or counterclockwise. 5. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn, check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn again. NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more than 1/2-turn without checking the idle speed. 6. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be (all): 810 ± 50 rpm NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air conditioner is on. - If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 1232 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With M/T NOTE: - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (transmission in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Disconnect the IAC valve connector. 4. If the engine stalls, restart the engine with the accelerator pedal slightly depressed. Stabilize the rpm at 1,000, then slowly release the pedal until the engine idles. 5. Check idling in no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: 450 ± 50 rpm Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw. NOTE: After adjusting the idle speed in this step, recheck the ignition timing. If it is out of spec, go back to step 4. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Reconnect the 2P connector on the IAC valve, then do the ECM reset procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 1233 8. Restart and idle the engine with no-load conditions for one minute, then check the idle speed. NOTE: (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. Idle speed should be: (USA): 670 ± 50 rpm (Canada): 750 ± 50 rpm 9. Idle the engine for one minute with headlights (Low) ON, and check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: 750 ± 50 rpm 10. Turn the headlights off. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: 810 ± 50 rpm NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC, 1.6L DOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC Air Cleaner (ACL) NOTE: Do not clean the ACL element it with compressed air (except dry type). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Relieving Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 6 mm service bolt on top of the fuel filter. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 6 mm service bolt at the fuel filter while holding the special banjo bolt with another wrench. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 6 mm service bolt. 6. Slowly loosen the 6 mm service bolt one complete turn. NOTE: A fuel pressure gauge can be attached at the 6 mm service bolt hole. - Always replace the washer between the service bolt and the special banjo bolt whenever the service bolt is loosened. - Replace all washers whenever the bolts are removed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Ignition Timing Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Cable: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1256 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1257 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1258 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1259 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1260 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1261 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1262 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1263 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1264 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1265 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1266 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1267 Ignition Cable: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1268 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1269 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1270 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1271 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1272 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might break them inside. 1. Check the condition of the ignition wire terminals. If any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken or distorted, replace the ignition wire. 2. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance. 3. If resistance exceeds 25 K Ohm, replace the ignition wire. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Distributor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 1281 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 1282 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 1283 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Distributor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 1289 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 1290 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 1291 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1292 Distributor: Locations Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Distributor: Exploded Views HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1295 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1296 Distributor: Service and Repair Removal: 1. Disconnect the connector from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the distributor ignition (DI) cap. 3. Remove the mounting bolts from the distributor, then remove the distributor from the cylinder head. Installation: NOTE: Before you install the distributor, bring the No.1 piston to compression stroke TDC. 1. Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, then install it. 2. Slip the distributor into position. NOTE: The lug on the end of the distributor and its mating grooves in the camshaft end are both offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the distributor 180° out of time. 3. Install the mounting bolts, and tighten them lightly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1297 4. Connect the ignition wires to the distributor ignition (DI) cap as shown. 5. Connect the connector to the distributor. 6. Set the ignition timing. 7. After setting the ignition timing, tighten the mounting bolts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator for: Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too low - Insufficient cooling Fouled plugs may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too high - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coil or ignition wires 2. D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engine: - Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool, and replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1301 3. B16A2 engine: - Do not adjust the gap of a platinum tip plug: replace the spark plug if the center electrode is rounded or if the gap is not within the specifications. NOTE: Use only the spark plugs listed. 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kg.m, 13 lb.ft). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Check compression with engine at normal operating temperature and throttle in wide open position. Prior to performing test, disable ignition and fuel injection to prevent fuel from being sprayed into cylinders while cranking engine. Ensure is fully charged and that cranking speed is 250 RPM. Standard reading should be 135-184 psi. The maximum variation between cylinders is 28 psi. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... .......................................... 0.007-0.009 inches Exhaust ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 0.009-0.011 inches Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1308 Valve Clearance: Adjustments NOTE: Valves should be adjusted only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). - After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the upper cover. 3. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark on the cam-shaft pulley should be at top, and the TDC marks should align with the cylinder head surface. 4. Adjust valves on No. 1 cylinder. Intake: 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust: 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1309 5. Loosen the locknut, and turn the adjustment screw until the feeler gauge slides back and forth with a slight amount of drag. 6. Tighten the locknut, and check the clearance again. Repeat the adjustment if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1310 7. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark should be on the exhaust side. Adjust valves on No. 3 cylinder. 8. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. Both TDC grooves are once again visible. Adjust valves on No. 4 cylinder. 9. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark should be on the intake side. Adjust valves on No. 2 cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Timing Belt: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine - Timing Belt Noise Timing Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Timing Belt Noise Bulletin No. 96-057 Issue Date OCT 28, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To ALL File Under ENGINE Timing Belt Noise SYMPTOM A whine or chirping noise can be heard coming from the front of the engine at idle or just above idle. PROBABLE CAUSE The timing belt is tensioned too tight. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the timing belt tension according to the procedure given in this service bulletin. NOTE: This procedure applies only to 1996 Civics. The procedure in the service manual should be used for all other years. 1. Start the engine. Let it run until it is warmed up (the cooling fan cycles on and off twice). 2. Turn off the engine. Connect the PGM tester and monitor the coolant temperature. Let the coolant cool down to 135°F (57°C). (This should take about an hour in an ambient temperature of about 75°F.) 3. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise until either the No. 1 or No. 4 piston is at TDC. 4. Remove the plug for the timing belt tensioner bolt. 5. Loosen the timing belt tensioner bolt 1/2 turn. Then torque the bolt to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). 6. Install the plug. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 110371 Flat rate time: 0.3 hour Failed part: P/N 14400-P2E-004 H/C 4837357 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-057A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Timing Belt: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine - Timing Belt Noise > Page 1319 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Timing Belt: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine - Timing Belt Noise Timing Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Timing Belt Noise Bulletin No. 96-057 Issue Date OCT 28, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To ALL File Under ENGINE Timing Belt Noise SYMPTOM A whine or chirping noise can be heard coming from the front of the engine at idle or just above idle. PROBABLE CAUSE The timing belt is tensioned too tight. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the timing belt tension according to the procedure given in this service bulletin. NOTE: This procedure applies only to 1996 Civics. The procedure in the service manual should be used for all other years. 1. Start the engine. Let it run until it is warmed up (the cooling fan cycles on and off twice). 2. Turn off the engine. Connect the PGM tester and monitor the coolant temperature. Let the coolant cool down to 135°F (57°C). (This should take about an hour in an ambient temperature of about 75°F.) 3. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise until either the No. 1 or No. 4 piston is at TDC. 4. Remove the plug for the timing belt tensioner bolt. 5. Loosen the timing belt tensioner bolt 1/2 turn. Then torque the bolt to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). 6. Install the plug. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 110371 Flat rate time: 0.3 hour Failed part: P/N 14400-P2E-004 H/C 4837357 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-057A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Timing Belt: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine - Timing Belt Noise > Page 1325 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1326 Timing Belt: Diagrams NOTE: Refer to Service and Repair / Removal and Installation for procedure to position the crankshaft and pulley before installing the belt. - Mark the direction of rotation on the belt before removing. - Do not use the upper cover and lower cover for storing removed items. - Clean the upper cover and lower cover before installing. - Replace the camshaft seals and crankshaft seals if there is oil leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Timing Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL NOTE: Replace the timing belt at 105,000 miles (168,000 km) according to the maintenance schedule (normal conditions/severe conditions). If the vehicle is regularly driven in one or more of the following conditions, replace the timing belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.A.) 100,000 km (Canada). In very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C). - In very low temperatures (under -20°F, -29°C). - Turn the crankshaft pulley so the No. 1 piston is at Top Dead Center (TDC) before removing the belt. - Inspect the water pump before installing the timing belt. 1. Remove the splash shield. 2. Loosen the mounting bolt and lock bolt, then remove the Power Steering (P/S) pump belt and pump. 3. Loosen the idler pulley center nut and adjusting bolt, then remove the Air conditioning (A/C) compressor belt. 4. Loosen the mounting nut and lock bolt, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the dipstick, then remove the upper cover and idler pulley bracket. NOTE: Do not use the upper cover to store removed items. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1329 6. Remove the upper bracket. NOTE: Use a jack to support the engine before the upper bracket is removed. - Make sure to place a cushion between the oil pan and the jack. 7. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 8. Remove the lower cover and dipstick tube. NOTE: Do not use the lower cover to store removed items. 9. Remove the CKF sensor from the oil pump. 10. Loosen the adjusting bolt 180°. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing belt, then retighten the adjusting bolt. 11. Remove the timing belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1330 INSTALLATION Install the timing belt in the reverse order of removal; Only key points are described here. 1. Set the timing belt drive pulley so that the No. 1 piston is at Top Dead Center (TDC). Align the groove on the timing belt drive pulley to the pointer on the oil pump. 2. Set the camshaft pulley to TDC. Align the TDC marks on the camshaft pulley to the cylinder head surface. 3. Install the timing belt tightly in the sequence shown. (1) Timing belt drive pulley (crankshaft) -> (2) Adjusting pulley -> (3) Water pump pulley -> (4) Camshaft pulley. NOTE: Make sure the timing belt drive pulley and camshaft pulley are at TDC. 4. Loosen and retighten the adjusting bolt to tension the timing belt. 5. Install the lower cover and upper cover. NOTE: Clean the upper and lower covers before installation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1331 6. Install the crankshaft pulley, then tighten the pulley bolt. 7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns counterclockwise so that the timing belt positions on the pulleys. 8. Adjust the timing belt tension. 9. Check that the crankshaft pulley and camshaft pulley are both at TDC. 10. If the camshaft and crankshaft pulleys are not positioned at TDC, remove the timing belt and adjust the position. Then reinstall the timing belt. 11. After installation, adjust the tension of each belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1332 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Inspection INSPECTION 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the upper cover. 3. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. NOTE: Replace the belt if oil or coolant soaked. - Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. 4. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt. TENSION ADJUSTMENT CAUTION: Always adjust the timing belt tension with the engine cold. NOTE: - The tensioner is spring-loaded to apply tension to the belt automatically after making the following adjustment. - Always rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise when viewed from the pulley side. Rotating it clockwise may result in improper adjustment of the belt tension. - Inspect the timing belt before adjusting the belt tension. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the upper cover. 3. Rotate the crankshaft five or six revolutions to set the belt. 4. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1333 5. Loosen the adjusting bolt 180°. 6. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise three teeth on the camshaft pulley. 7. Tighten the adjusting bolt. 8. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools Belt Tension Gauge Calibration and Repair Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Belt Tension Gauge Calibration and Repair Bulletin No. 96-014 Issue Date Feb. 20, 1996 Model ALL Applicable To ALL File Under SPECIAL TOOLS Belt Tension Gauge Calibration and Repair Tensioning the engine belts properly with the belt tension gauge (T/N 07JGG-001010A) is critical to bearing life of the A/C compressor, alternator, etc. Calibration of the belt tension gauge should be checked regularly. CALIBRATION A Belt Tension Gauge Checker, needed for checking the calibration of the belt tension gauge, is now available. One checker is being automatically shipped to each dealership. Additional checkers may be ordered through normal parts ordering channels. The part number is 07TGG-001010A. Procedure 1. Push the handle and slide the checker into the gauge. Position the checker as shown. 2. Release the handle and read the tension value on the Kg scale. 3. Compare your reading to the value etched on the checker. Your gauge is in calibration if it is within +/- 3 kg of the checker value. If your belt tension gauge is out of calibration, you cannot recalibrate it yourself. Contact America Kowa Seiki about sending it for recalibration. REPLACEMENT PARTS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools Belt Tension Gauge Calibration and Repair > Page 1338 If your belt tension gauge is damaged, replacement parts are available from America Kowa Seiki. They are: REPAIR AND CALIBRATION INFORMATION To order replacement parts for a gauge, contact: America Kowa Seiki 20013 S. Rancho Way Rancho Dominguez, CA 90220 (800) 824-9655 To return your belt tension gauge for calibration: ^ Contact America Kowa Seiki for authorization and shipping instructions. ^ Pack the belt tension gauge in a suitable box. Use "bubble pack" to protect the gauge. ^ Ship according to their instructions. America Kowa Seiki will charge a fixed fee to inspect, clean and calibrate the belt tension gauge, and return it via UPS ground. Any repair parts needed are extra. The gauge will be returned within 15 days. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1339 Drive Belt: Specifications NOTE: When using a new belt, adjust deflection or tension to new values. Run the engine for 5 minutes then turn it off. Readjust the deflection or tension to used belt values. Deflection [1]: With Used Belt .............................................................................................................................................................. 10.5 - 14.0 mm (0.41 - 0.55 inch) With New Belt ................................................................................. ............................................................................... 7.5 - 10.0 mm (0.30 - 0.39 inch) Tension [2]: With Used Belt ................................................................................................................................................ 340 490 N (35 - 50 kgf, 77 - 110 ft. lbs.) With New Belt ............................................................................................................................................... 640 780 N (65 - 80 kgf, 143 - 176 ft. lbs.) [1] With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 ft. lbs.) between pulleys. [2] Measured with belt tension gauge. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > A/C Compressor Drive Belt: Adjustments A/C Compressor Deflection Method 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb), and measure the deflection between the A/C compressor and the crankshaft pulley. A/C Compressor Belt Used Belt: B16A2 engine 6.0 - 9.5 mm (0.24 - 0.37 in) Except B16A2 engine 7.5 - 9.5 mm (0.30 - 0.37 in) New Belt: B16A2 engine 4.5 - 6.5 mm (0.18 - 0.26 in) Except B16A2 engine 5.0 - 6.5 mm (0.20 0.26 in) Note these items when adjusting belt tension: If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. - "Used belt" means a belt which has been used for five minutes or more. - "New belt" means a belt which has been used for less than five minutes. 2. Loosen, the center nut of the idler pulley (SANDEN), or the pivot bolt of the idler pulley bracket and the lock nut of the adjusting bolt (DENSO). 3. Turn the adjusting bolt to get proper belt tension. 4. Retighten the center nut of the idler pulley (SANDEN), or the pivot bolt of the idler pulley bracket and the lock nut of the adjusting bolt (DENSO). 5. Recheck the deflection of the A/C compressor belt. Tension Gauge Method 1. Attach the special tool to the A/C compressor belt as shown below, and measure the tension of the belt. A/C Compressor Belt Used Belt: B16A2 engine 390 - 540 N (40 - 55 kg, 88 - 120 lb) Except B16A2 engine 340 - 490 N (35 - 50 kg, 77 - 110 lb) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > A/C Compressor > Page 1342 New Belt: B16A2 engine 740 - 880 N (75 - 90 kg, 170 - 200 lb) Except B16A2 engine 690 - 830 N (70 - 85 kg, 150 - 190 lb) Note these items when adjusting belt tension: Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the belt tension gauge. - If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. - "Used belt" means a belt which has been used for five minutes or more. - "New belt" means a belt which has been used for less than five minutes. 2. Loosen the center nut of the idler pulley (SANDEN), or the pivot bolt of the idler pulley bracket and the lock nut of the adjusting bolt (DENSO). 3. Turn the adjusting bolt to get proper belt tension. 4. Retighten the center nut of the idler pulley (SANDEN), or the pivot bolt of the idler pulley bracket and the lock nut of the adjusting bolt (DENSO). 5. Recheck the tension of the A/C compressor belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > A/C Compressor > Page 1343 Drive Belt: Adjustments Alternator Deflection Method: Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection between the alternator and the crankshaft pulley. Deflection 8.0-10.5 mm (0.31-0.41 in) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 6.0 - 8.5 mm (0.26-0.33 in) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the lower mounting nut and the upper mounting bolt. 2. Move the alternator to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the upper mounting bolt and the lower mounting nut to the specified torques. 3. Recheck the deflection of the belt. Belt Tension Gauge Method: Following the gauge manufacturer's instructions, attach the special tool to the belt, and measure the tension. Tension 340 - 490 N (35 - 50 kgf, 77 - 110 lbf) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the tension should be 540-740 N (55 - 75 kgf, 121 - 165 lbf) when first Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > A/C Compressor > Page 1344 measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the lower mounting nut and the upper mounting bolt. 2. Move the alternator to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the upper mounting bolt and the lower mounting nut to the specified torques. 3. Recheck the tension of the belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > A/C Compressor > Page 1345 Drive Belt: Adjustments Power Steering Pump Belt NOTE: When using a new belt, first adjust the deflection or tension to the values for the new belt, then readjust the deflection or tension to the values for the used belt after running engine for five minutes. Inspection Attach the special tool to the belt and measure the tension of the belt. Tension: '99-'00 models: B16A2 Engine Type only Used Belt: 390 - 540 N (40 - 55 kgf, 88 - 120 lbs.) New Belt: 740 - 880 N (75 - 90 kgf, 170 - 200 lbs.) '96-'00 models: Other Engine Types Used Belt: 340 - 490 N (35 - 50 kgf, 77 - 110 lbs.) New Belt: 640 - 780 N (65 - 80 kgf, 143 - 176 lbs.) NOTE: If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. - Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the tension gauge. Inspect the pump belt for cracks or any damage. Replace the belt with a new one if necessary. Measurement without Belt Tension Gauge: Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs.) and measure the deflection between the power steering pump and the crankshaft pulleys. Deflection: '99-'00 models: B16A2 Engine Type only Used Belt: 7.5 - 11.0 mm (0.30 - 0.43 inch) New Belt: 5.0 - 7.0 mm (0.20 - 0.28 inch) '96-'00 models: Other Engine Types Used Belt: 10.5 - 14.0 mm (0.41 - 0.55 inch) New Belt: 7.5 - 10.0 mm (0.30 - 0.39 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC, 1.6L DOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC Air Cleaner (ACL) NOTE: Do not clean the ACL element it with compressed air (except dry type). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Relieving Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 6 mm service bolt on top of the fuel filter. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 6 mm service bolt at the fuel filter while holding the special banjo bolt with another wrench. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 6 mm service bolt. 6. Slowly loosen the 6 mm service bolt one complete turn. NOTE: A fuel pressure gauge can be attached at the 6 mm service bolt hole. - Always replace the washer between the service bolt and the special banjo bolt whenever the service bolt is loosened. - Replace all washers whenever the bolts are removed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT WARNING: After the engine has been run, the exhaust pipe will be hot; be careful when working around the exhaust pipe. - Be careful when loosening the drain bolt while the engine is hot. Burns can result because the oil temperature is very high. 1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the threads and rubber seal on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the new filter's rubber seal. NOTE: Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 3. Install the oil filter by hand. 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the oil filter wrench. Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise. Tightening torque: 22 Nm (2.2 kgs.cm, 16 ft.lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1358 Use this procedure to tighten the filter if eight numbers (1 to 8) are printed on the surface of the filter. 1) Make a mark on the oil filter base under the number that shows at the bottom of the filter when the rubber seal is seated. 2) Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise seven numbers from the marked point. For example, if a mark is made under the number 2 when the rubber seal is seated, the filter should be tightened until the number 1 comes up to the marked point. CAUTION: Using any procedure other than those shown could result in serious engine damage due to oil leakage. 5. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than three minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Hose/Line HVAC: Mechanical Specifications Discharge hose to the compressor 9.8 Nm 6 x 1.00 mm Discharge hose to the condenser 9.8 Nm Condenser pipe to the condenser 9.8 Nm Condenser pipe to the receiver/dryer 9.8 Nm Receiver pipe A to the receiver/dryer 9.8 Nm Receiver pipe B to the receiver pipe A 13 Nm Receiver pipe C to the receiver pipe B 13 Nm Receiver pipe C to the Evaporator 9.8 Nm Suction pipe B to the Evaporator 9.8 Nm Suction pipe A to the Suction pipe B 31 Nm Suction hose to the Suction pipe A 31 Nm Suction hose to the Compressor 9.8 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 1364 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 1365 Hose/Line HVAC: Capacity Specifications SANDEN Line or hose 10 mL NIPPONDENSO Line or hose 10 mL Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications Power Steering Lines Power Steering Lines Outlet Hose to Pump 8 ft.lb Cylinder Housing to Cylinder Lines 20 ft.lb Valve Body Unit to Cylinder Lines 12 ft.lb Valve Body Unit to Feed Line 27 ft.lb Valve Body Unit to Return Line 20 ft.lb Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1369 Power Steering Line/Hose: Testing and Inspection - Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference or twisting. - Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting and leakage. - Inspect for leaks at hose and line joints and connections. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1370 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Connect each hose to the corresponding pipe securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. 2. Add the power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP 1. Position the adjustable hose clamps at the points indicated (a) in the drawing above. 2. Slide the hose over the line until it contacts the stop. CAUTION: Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. HOSE CLAMP 1. Position the hose clamps at the points indicated (b) in the drawing above. 2. Slide the hose over the line until it contacts the stop. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Fluid type DOT 3 or 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Coolant Capacity, Quarts: Man. Transmission .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................... 4.4 Auto. Transmission ................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. 4.5 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1379 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant/Anti-freeze Ethylene Glycol Based Coolant Concentration Minimum 50 % Maximum 60 % Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1380 Coolant: Service and Repair CAUTION: When pouring engine coolant, be sure to shut the relay box lid and not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the paint. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 1. Slide the heater temperature control lever to maximum heat. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch. 2. Remove the radiator cap. 3. Loosen the drain plug, and drain the coolant. 4. Remove the drain bolt from the cylinder block. 5. Apply liquid gasket to the drain bolt threads, then reinstall the bolt with a new washer and tighten it securely. 6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1381 7. Remove, drain and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the tank halfway to the MAX mark with water, then up to the MAX mark with antifreeze. 8. Mix the recommended antifreeze with an equal amount of water in a clean container. NOTE: Use only genuine Honda antifreeze/coolant. - For best corrosion protection, the coolant concentration must be maintained year-round at 50% minimum. Coolant concentrations less than 50% may not provide sufficient protection against corrosion or freezing. - Coolant concentrations greater than 60% will impair cooling efficiency and are not recommended. CAUTION: Do not mix different brands of antifreeze/coolants. - Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products; they may not be compatible with the coolant. Engine Coolant Refill Capacity [including reservoir (0.4 (0.42 US quart. 0.35 Imp quart))]. 9. Pour coolant into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck, and install the radiator cap loosely. 10. Start the engine and let it run until it warms up (the radiator fan comes on at least twice). 11. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator, add coolant if needed. 12. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again and check for leaks. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid Dry Fill ................................................................................................................................................. ............................................... 5.9 liters (6.2 US qts.) Drain and Fill .................................................... .................................................................................................................................. 2.7 liters (2.9 US qts.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1386 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ................... Genuine Honda Premium Formula ATF Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1387 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection FLUID LEVEL CHECK CAUTION: Keep all of the foreign particles out of the transmission. NOTE: Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Turn off the engine. 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 3. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 4. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. 5. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the recommended fluid* into the filler hole to bring it to the upper mark. 6. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission in the direction shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1388 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair CHECKING NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, then turn off the engine. 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper mark and lower marks. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the recommended fluid into the filler hole to bring it to the upper mark. Always use Genuine Honda Premium Formula Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 7. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission in the direction shown. CHANGING NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle. 2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the engine off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1389 3. Remove the drain plug, and drain the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to cooler flushing. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer, then refill the transmission with the recommended fluid into the filler hole to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Genuine Honda Premium Formula Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 2.7 L (2.4 Imp qt.) at changing 5.9 L ( 5.2 Imp qt.) at overhaul Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission/Transaxle Fluid S40 Fluid At Oil Change ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 1.8 l (1.9 US qt.) Fluid At Overhaul ........................................ ................................................................................................................................................ 1.9 l 2.0 US qt.) S4C Fluid At Oil Change ......................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 2.2 l (2.3 US qt.) Fluid At Overhaul ........................... ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.3 l (2.4 US qt.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1394 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission/Transaxle Fluid Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) preferred, or an API service SG, SH or SJ grade motor oil with a viscosity of SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as a temporary replacement. An SG grade is preferred but SH or SJ may be used if SG is not available. However, motor oil does not have the proper additives and continued use may cause stiffer shifting. Drain and replace with Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) as soon as convenient. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1395 Fluid - M/T: Testing and Inspection TRANSMISSION OIL CHECK NOTE: Check the transmission oil with the engine OFF and the vehicle on level ground. 1. Remove the oil filler plug, then check the level and condition of the oil. 2. The oil level must be up to the filler hole. If it is below the hole, add oil until it runs out, then reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. 3. If the transmission oil is dirty, remove the drain plug and drain the oil. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill the transmission with the recommended oil to the proper level. NOTE: The drain plug washer should be replaced at every oil change. 5. Reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. Oil Capacity - 1.8 l (1.9 US qt.) at oil change - 1.9 l 12.0 US qt.) at overhaul NOTE: Always use Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Use ONLY New GF-4 Standard Engine Oil APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new performance standard for engine oil: GF-4. It was jointly developed by automotive and oil experts, and it represents a significant performance upgrade and improvement in fuel economy. GF-4 engine oils must pass grueling tests totaling over 500 hours. On top of this, Honda Genuine engine oils are also tested to ensure specific compatibility with Honda vehicles. GF-4 engine oil is compatible with all current and earlier model year Honda cars and trucks. It also provides these added benefits: - Improved oxidation resistance (reduced thickening of the oil) - Improved deposit protection and better wear protection - Better low-temperature performance over the life of the oil - Environmental protection by extending the life of emissions systems While Honda has upgraded its engine oil to GF-4, other brands may not yet be at this new standard. Keep in mind you must use Honda Genuine engine oil for all warranty repairs. If you use some other brand of oil for non-warranty repairs, make sure that oil meets the GF-4 standard. We recommend you stop using non-GF-4 engine oils and check with your supplier that you're purchasing GF-4 oil. Engine oil produced after April 1, 2005, that meets the GF-4 standard, must post this starburst certification mark on the container. Always look for this mark; some oil container labels won't specifically refer to GF-4. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil For D16Y7 engine (1.6 L SOHC)Engine For Engine Overhaul ........................................................... .................................................................................................... 4.3 L (4.5 US qts. 3.8 Imp.qt) For Oil Change, Including Filter ........................................................................................................................................... 3.6 L (3.8 US qts. 3.2 Imp.qts) For D16Y5, D16Y8 (1.6 L VTEC DOHC)Engine For Engine Overhaul ............................................... ................................................................................................................ 3.7 L (3.9 US qts. 3.3 Imp.qt) For Oil Change, Including Filter ........................................................................................................................................... 3.3 L (3.5 US qts. 2.9 Imp.qts) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1402 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engien Oil New standard for engine oil, GF-4. See TSB SN050109 for Honda Service News 050109 for additional information. API Classification ................................................................................................................................. ................................ SH or SJ Energy Conserving II Viscosity ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... SAE 5W-30 (Preferred) SAE 10W-30 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1403 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn off the engine. Allow the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan so the dipstick will show the actual level. 2. Make certain that the oil level indicated on the dipstick is between the upper and lower marks. 3. If the level has dropped close to the lower mark, add oil until it reaches the upper mark. CAUTION: Insert the dipstick carefully to avoid bending it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service Engine Oil: Service and Repair Oil and Filter Service ENGINE OIL Inspection 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn off the engine. Allow the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan so the dipstick will show the actual level. 2. Make certain that the oil level indicated on the dipstick is between the upper and lower marks. 3. If the level has dropped close to the lower mark, add oil until it reaches the upper mark. CAUTION: Insert the dipstick carefully to avoid bending it. Replacement CAUTION: Remove the drain bolt carefully while the engine is hot; the hot oil may cause scalding. 1. Warm up the engine. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1406 2. Drain the engine oil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1407 3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer, and refill the engine with the recommended oil. NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at every other oil change. Under severe conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil change. The numbers in the middle of the API Service label tell you the oil's SAE viscosity or weight. Select the oil for your car according to this chart: An oil with a viscosity of 5W - 30 is preferred for improved fuel economy and year-round protection in the car. You may use a 10W - 30 oil if the climate in your area is limited to the temperature range shown on the chart. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1408 4. Run the engine for more than three minutes, then check for oil leakage. OIL FILTER Replacement WARNING: After the engine has been run, the exhaust pipe will be hot; be careful when working around the exhaust pipe. - Be careful when loosening the drain bolt while the engine is hot. Burns can result because the oil temperature is very high. 1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the threads and rubber seal on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the new filter's rubber seal. NOTE: Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 3. Install the oil filter by hand. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1409 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the oil filter wrench. Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise. Tightening torque: 22 Nm (2.2 kgs.cm, 16 ft.lbs.) Use this procedure to tighten the filter if eight numbers (1 to 8) are printed on the surface of the filter. 1) Make a mark on the oil filter base under the number that shows at the bottom of the filter when the rubber seal is seated. 2) Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise seven numbers from the marked point. For example, if a mark is made under the number 2 when the rubber seal is seated, the filter should be tightened until the number 1 comes up to the marked point. CAUTION: Using any procedure other than those shown could result in serious engine damage due to oil leakage. 5. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than three minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1410 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Oil Service REPLACEMENT CAUTION: Remove the drain bolt carefully while the engine is hot; the hot oil may cause scalding. 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Drain the engine oil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1411 3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer, and refill the engine with the recommended oil. NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at every other oil change. Under severe conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil change. The numbers in the middle of the API Service label tell you the oil's SAE viscosity or weight. Select the oil for your car according to this chart: An oil with a viscosity of 5W - 30 is preferred for improved fuel economy and year-round protection in the car. You may use a 10W - 30 oil if the climate in your area is limited to the temperature range shown on the chart. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1412 4. Run the engine for more than three minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid-V or S Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1416 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair FLUID REPLACEMENT NOTE: Check the reservoir at regular intervals, and add fluid as necessary. CAUTION: Always use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid-V or S. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose. 2. Connect a hose of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a suitable container. CAUTION: Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid. 4. Refit the return hose on the reservoir. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line. 6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. 7. Recheck the fluid level and add some if necessary. CAUTION: Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1421 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1422 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 1423 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications A/C Refrigerant Capacity 550 +0 -50 g A/C Refrigerant Type R-134a Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1426 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications A/C Refrigerant Capacity 550 +0 -50 g A/C Refrigerant Type R-134a Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Condensor 20 mL Evaporator 45 mL Line or hose 10 mL Receiver/Dryer 10 mL Leakage Repair 25 mL Compressor (Sanden) 130 mL Remove oil from new compressor equal to the amount drained from the old compressor but not more than 50 ml. Compressor (Denso) 130 mL Remove oil from new compressor equal to the amount drained from the old compressor but not more than 50 ml. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1431 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Oil Type ............................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... SP-10 Honda PN ....................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ 38897-P13-A01AH Honda Code ......................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... 5023627 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Without Anti-Lock Brakes Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Without Anti-Lock Brakes CAUTION: - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. NOTE: The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add fluid as required. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line. 2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Without Anti-Lock Brakes > Page 1436 3. Loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. Brake Bleeding Sequence 4. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. 5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Locations With Front Passenger's Airbag Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations > Page 1440 Without Front Passenger's Airbag (Part Of Canada Model) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble the airbag assembly. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been operated (deployed), it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag assembly during service, please observe the following precautions: Store the removed airbag assembly with the pad surface up. The driver's (and front passenger's) airbag connector(s) has (have) a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury Store the removed airbag assembly on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F / 100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal procedures for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 1443 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to- metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 1444 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact The driver's airbag (and front passenger's) airbag has (have) a spring-loaded lock connector with a built-in short contact. When this connector is disconnected, the power terminal and the ground terminal in the airbag connector are automatically shorted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact > Page 1447 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation System Description The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charge(s). If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: 1. The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflator(s) must ignite and deploy the airbag(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1448 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair To prevent accidental airbag deployment, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait three minutes before disconnecting any SRS connectors. - Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C,D). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s). Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Side: Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector and cable reel 2P connector. Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Side: Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector and SRS main harness 2P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1454 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1455 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1456 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1459 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1460 Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1461 Fuse: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1462 Fuse: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1463 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1464 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse-to-Component Index Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1465 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 1466 Fuse: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Removal: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 5. Remove the two mounting nuts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box out from under the dash. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. Installation: 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/ relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect the airbag connectors. 4. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets ('99 - 00 models). 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off Fuse Block: Customer Interest Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off 00-007 February 15, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Fuse Box Cover Falls Off PROBLEM The cover for the under-dash fuse box (to the left of the steering column) falls off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the spring clip on the cover. VEHICLES AFFECTED PARTS INFORMATION Spring Clip: P/N 90666-SD4-003, H/C 2601532 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841125 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 90666-SD4-003 H/C 2601532 Defect Code: 004 Contention Code: A02 Template ID: 00-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse box cover from the dashboard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off > Page 1475 2. Use a small screwdriver to remove the clip from the fuse box cover. Discard the clip. 3. Install the new spring clip on the cover. 4. Install the cover in the dashboard and check that it fits securely. If it does not, bend the arm on the spring clip up slightly. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off 00-007 February 15, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Fuse Box Cover Falls Off PROBLEM The cover for the under-dash fuse box (to the left of the steering column) falls off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the spring clip on the cover. VEHICLES AFFECTED PARTS INFORMATION Spring Clip: P/N 90666-SD4-003, H/C 2601532 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841125 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 90666-SD4-003 H/C 2601532 Defect Code: 004 Contention Code: A02 Template ID: 00-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse box cover from the dashboard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off > Page 1481 2. Use a small screwdriver to remove the clip from the fuse box cover. Discard the clip. 3. Install the new spring clip on the cover. 4. Install the cover in the dashboard and check that it fits securely. If it does not, bend the arm on the spring clip up slightly. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1484 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1485 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1486 Fuse Block: Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1487 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1488 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1489 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1490 Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1491 Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1494 Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1495 Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1496 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1497 Fuse Block: Application and ID Fuse-to-Component Index Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1498 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1503 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1504 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1505 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1506 Relay Box: Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1507 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1508 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1509 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1510 Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1511 Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1514 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1515 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 1516 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 1517 Relay Box: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Removal: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 5. Remove the two mounting nuts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box out from under the dash. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. Installation: 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/ relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect the airbag connectors. 4. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets ('99 - 00 models). 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair If equipped with maintenance reminder flag: After completing the required service, the maintenance flags may be reset by inserting the ignition key into the appropriate slot, on the instrument below the indicator flag. When the ignition key is inserted into the slot, the indicator flag should change to green. If equipped with maintenance reminder lamp: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Press and hold the select/reset button(s) on the instrument panel, then turn the ignition switch ON (Position II). 3. Hold the button(s) for at least 10 seconds, until the indicator resets. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Customer Interest Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 1530 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 1536 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1537 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Does Not Come ON NOTE: If this symptom is intermittent, check for a loose fuse No.25 (METER 7.5 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box, a poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal A18, or an intermittent open in the GRN/ORN wire between the ECM/PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON > Page 1540 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Stays ON Part 1 Of 3 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON > Page 1541 Part 2 Of 3 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON > Page 1542 Part 3 Of 3 NOTE: - When there is no Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) stored, the MIL will stay on if the SCS service connector is connected and the ignition switch is on. - If this symptom is intermittent, check for: A loose FIE/M (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box - A loose No.13 FUEL PUMP fuse (15 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C7) and the service check connector - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D4) and the MAP sensor - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D10), the TP sensor, the EGR valve lift sensor (D16Y5 engine) and/or the Fuel tank pressure sensor ('96 D16Y8 engine (coupe), '97 D16Y7 engine (coupe: KL model, sedan: KL (LX model), '97 D16Y8 engine (coupe: all models, sedan: KL model), '98-all models) - PGM-FI main relay See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information > Page 1548 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Tires: Technician Safety Information WARNING: This vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Refer to the SRS component and wiring location view in order to determine whether you are performing service on or near the SRS components or the SRS wiring. when you are performing service on or near the SRS components or the SRS wiring, refer to the SRS service information. failure to follow warnings could result in possible air bag deployment, personal injury, or otherwise unneeded SRS system repairs. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 1551 Tires: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. Honda will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. Honda will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. Unless otherwise specified, do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1552 Tires: Description and Operation GENERAL DESCRIPTION Replacement wheels or tires must be equivalent to the originals in load capacity, specified dimension and mounting configuration. Improper size or type may affect bearing life, brake performance, speedometer/odometer calibration, vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis. All model are equipped with metric sized tubeless steel belted radial tires. Correct tire pressures and driving habits have an important influence on tire life. Heavy cornering, excessively rapid acceleration and unnecessary sharp braking increase premature and uneven wear. TREAD WEAR INDICATORS The original equipment tires have built-in tread wear indicators (1) to show when tires need replacement. These indicators may appear as wide bands. When the indicators appear in two or more grooves at three locations, tire replacement is recommended. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes Tires: Testing and Inspection Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF ABNORMAL TIRE AHEAD WEAR AND MAJOR CAUSES: CAUTION: Similar wear patterns can be caused by worn suspension parts, misalignment of wheels and tires, and other suspension related problems. Spotty Wear Wear localized on shoulder sections, and in an extreme cases, the tire becomes polygonal in shape. 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. 3. Play in hub bearings or ball joint. 4. Rotating parts out of balance. Tread Wear One-Sided 1. Rotating parts out of balance. 2. Tire or wheel out of round. 3. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. Localized Tread Wear Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1555 1. Once spotty wear develops in tread due to hard braking or abrupt starting, localized wear tends to be promoted. Shoulder Wear (Generally Wear Develops In Outer Shoulder): 1. Camber or toe-in incorrect. 2. Shoulder wear caused by repeated hard-cornering. Wear In Shoulders At Points Opposed To Each Other 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Play in bearings or ball joint. Premature Wear In Shoulders 1. Flexing of tire excessive due to under-inflation. One Sided Feather Edging 1. Wear caused by repeated hard cornering. 2. Camber or toe-in incorrect. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1556 Tires: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis By Symptom Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1557 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1558 Tires: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis List If the following conditions are noted, rotation is required. 1. Front tire wear is different from rear. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 4. Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. If the following conditions are noted, check the wheel alignment. 1. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Front tire treads have scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of tread ribs or blocks. 4. There is cupping, flat spotting etc. Higher than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Hard ride. 2. Poor steering stability. 3. Rapid and uneven wear at center of the tread. Lower than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Tire squeal on turns. 2. Hard steering. 3. Rapid and uneven wear on the edges of the tread. 4. Tire rim bruises and rupture. 5. Tire cord breakage. 6. High tire temperatures. 7. Reduced handling. 8. Reduced fuel economy. Unequal pressure on same axle can cause: 1. Uneven braking. 2. Steering lead. 3. Reduced handling. 4. Swerve on acceleration. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1559 Tires: Testing and Inspection Irregular and Premature Wear Irregular and/or premature wear has many causes. Some of them are incorrect inflation pressures, lack of tire rotation, poor driving habits or improper wheel alignment. Incorrect inflation is common cause of tire premature wear. NOTE: Due to their design, radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly on the front tires. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. After rotation, be sure to check wheel nut torque, and set tire pressures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1560 Tires: Testing and Inspection Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF ABNORMAL TIRE AHEAD WEAR AND MAJOR CAUSES: CAUTION: Similar wear patterns can be caused by worn suspension parts, misalignment of wheels and tires, and other suspension related problems. Spotty Wear Wear localized on shoulder sections, and in an extreme cases, the tire becomes polygonal in shape. 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. 3. Play in hub bearings or ball joint. 4. Rotating parts out of balance. Tread Wear One-Sided 1. Rotating parts out of balance. 2. Tire or wheel out of round. 3. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1561 Localized Tread Wear 1. Once spotty wear develops in tread due to hard braking or abrupt starting, localized wear tends to be promoted. Shoulder Wear (Generally Wear Develops In Outer Shoulder): 1. Camber or toe-in incorrect. 2. Shoulder wear caused by repeated hard-cornering. Wear In Shoulders At Points Opposed To Each Other 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Play in bearings or ball joint. Premature Wear In Shoulders 1. Flexing of tire excessive due to under-inflation. One Sided Feather Edging 1. Wear caused by repeated hard cornering. 2. Camber or toe-in incorrect. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1562 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1563 Part 2 Of 2 Diagnosis List If the following conditions are noted, rotation is required. 1. Front tire wear is different from rear. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 4. Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. If the following conditions are noted, check the wheel alignment. 1. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Front tire treads have scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of tread ribs or blocks. 4. There is cupping, flat spotting etc. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1564 Higher than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Hard ride. 2. Poor steering stability. 3. Rapid and uneven wear at center of the tread. Lower than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Tire squeal on turns. 2. Hard steering. 3. Rapid and uneven wear on the edges of the tread. 4. Tire rim bruises and rupture. 5. Tire cord breakage. 6. High tire temperatures. 7. Reduced handling. 8. Reduced fuel economy. Unequal pressure on same axle can cause: 1. Uneven braking. 2. Steering lead. 3. Reduced handling. 4. Swerve on acceleration. Irregular and Premature Wear Irregular and/or premature wear has many causes. Some of them are incorrect inflation pressures, lack of tire rotation, poor driving habits or improper wheel alignment. Incorrect inflation is common cause of tire premature wear. NOTE: Due to their design, radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly on the front tires. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. After rotation, be sure to check wheel nut torque, and set tire pressures. Radial Tire Lead/Pull "Lead/Pull" is vehicle deviation from a straight path, on a level road with no pressure on the steering wheel. Lead is usually caused by: 1. Poorly manufactured radial tires. 2. Uneven brake adjustment. 3. Wheel alignment. The way in which a tire is built can produce lead in a car. An example of this is placement of the belt. Off-center belts on radial tires can cause the tire to develop a side force while rolling straight down the road and the tire will tend to roll like a cone. The "Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction" chart should be used to make sure that front wheel alignment is not mistaken for tire lead. Rear tires will not cause lead/pull. Radial Tire Waddle Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 1565 Waddle is side-to-side movement at the front and/or rear of the car. It can be caused by the steel belt not being straight within the tire, or by excessive lateral runout of the tire or wheel. It is most noticeable at low speed, about 8 to 48 km/h (5 to 30 mph). It may also cause rough ride at 80 to 113 km/h (50 to 70 mph). The car can be road tested to see which end of the car has the faulty tire. If the tire causing the waddle is on the rear, the rear end of the car will "waddle". From the driver's seat, it feels as if someone is pushing on the side of the car. If the faulty tire is on the front, the waddle is more easily seen. The front sheet metal appears to be moving back and forth. It feels as if the driver's seat is the pivot point in the car. Another more time-consuming method of determining the faulty tire is substituting tire and wheel assemblies that are known to be good. Follow these steps: 1. Drive the car to determine if the waddle is coming from the front or rear. 2. Install tire and wheel assemblies known to be good (from a similar car) in place of those on the end of the car which is waddling. If the waddle cannot be isolated to front or rear, start with the rear tires. 3. Road test again. If improvement is noted, install the original tire and wheel assemblies one at a time until the faulty tire is found. If no improvement is noted, install tires known to be good in place of all four. Then, install the originals one at a time until the faulty tire is found. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel Tires: Service and Repair Separating the Tire From the Wheel Use a tire changing machine to demount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or wheel rim could result. Follow the tire changing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly separate the tire from the wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 1568 Tires: Service and Repair Mounting the Tire on the Wheel CAUTION: Recommended vehicle tire mounting and inflation procedures are especially important with radial tires. Failure to follow these procedures can cause bead deformation in both tube type and tubeless tires due to incorrect bead seating. Bead deformation may lead to chafing, lower sidewall and bead area cracking, eccentric wear, ride vibration and nonretreadable casings. Only use rims approved for radial tire usage by the rim manufacture. 1. Clean the rim. Remove all rust and other foreign material. 2. Lubricate tire beads and rim bead seats with an approved rubber lubricant. CAUTION: Do not use silicon base lubricants. This could cause the tire to slip on the wheel. 3. Attach the tire to the wheel. a. Use a tire changing machine. b. Align air valve and tire balancing match marks (about 8 mm diameter paint mark). Hold in this position and inflate the until the tire beads are firmly seated on the rim against the flanges (steel wheel model only). 4. Inflate the tire to operating pressure. 5. Check the bead seating. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 1569 Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance: a. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. b. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. NOTE: Using wheel balancing equipment. Follow the tire balancing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly balance wheel and tire. Balance weight for the wheel should not exceed 170 g in total, and 140 g is the maximum amount for either side. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 1570 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation Tire rotation is recommended to equalize wear for longer life. If the following conditions are noted, rotate the tires: - Front tire wear is different from rear. - Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. Check wheel alignment if the following conditions are noted: - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Wear is uneven across the tread of any front tire. - Front tire treads have a scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of the tread ribs or blocks. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 1571 Tires: Service and Repair Separating the Tire From the Wheel Use a tire changing machine to demount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or wheel rim could result. Follow the tire changing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly separate the tire from the wheel. Mounting the Tire on the Wheel CAUTION: Recommended vehicle tire mounting and inflation procedures are especially important with radial tires. Failure to follow these procedures can cause bead deformation in both tube type and tubeless tires due to incorrect bead seating. Bead deformation may lead to chafing, lower sidewall and bead area cracking, eccentric wear, ride vibration and nonretreadable casings. Only use rims approved for radial tire usage by the rim manufacture. 1. Clean the rim. Remove all rust and other foreign material. 2. Lubricate tire beads and rim bead seats with an approved rubber lubricant. CAUTION: Do not use silicon base lubricants. This could cause the tire to slip on the wheel. 3. Attach the tire to the wheel. a. Use a tire changing machine. b. Align air valve and tire balancing match marks (about 8 mm diameter paint mark). Hold in this position and inflate the until the tire beads are firmly seated on the rim against the flanges (steel wheel model only). 4. Inflate the tire to operating pressure. 5. Check the bead seating. Balancing Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 1572 Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance: a. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. b. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. NOTE: Using wheel balancing equipment. Follow the tire balancing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly balance wheel and tire. Balance weight for the wheel should not exceed 170 g in total, and 140 g is the maximum amount for either side. Tire Rotation Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 1573 Tire rotation is recommended to equalize wear for longer life. If the following conditions are noted, rotate the tires: - Front tire wear is different from rear. - Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. Check wheel alignment if the following conditions are noted: - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Wear is uneven across the tread of any front tire. - Front tire treads have a scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of the tread ribs or blocks. Inflation of Tires Tire pressure, in cold condition (after vehicle has set for three hours or more, and driven less than one mile) should be checked monthly or before any extended trip. Tire pressure increases approximately 15% when the tires become hot during driving. Tire pressure specification is shown on the label located on the left door lock pillar. NOTE: Check the tire pressure whenever irregular wear is found. Tire inflation greatly affects tire wear. If the alignment check does not reveal any alignment problems, check the condition of the shock absorbers and wheel/tire balance. Tire Replacement TIRE REPLACEMENT When replacement is necessary, the original metric the size should be used. Most metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. It is recommended that new tires be installed in pairs on the same axle. If necessary to replace only one tire, it should be paired with tire having the most tread, to equalize braking traction. CAUTION: Do not mix different types of tires such as radial, bias and bias-belted tires except in emergencies, because vehicle handling may be seriously affected and may result in loss of control. Tire Dismounting Remove valve cap on valve step and deflate the tire. Then use a tire changing machine to mount or dismount tires. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instruction. Do not use hand tools or tire lever alone to change tires as they may damage the tire beads or wheel rim. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 1574 Tire Mounting Rim bead seats should be cleaned with a wire brush or coarse steel wool to remove lubricants, and light rust. Before mounting a tire, the bead area should be well lubricated with an approved tire lubricant. After mounting, inflate the tire to 196 kPa (28 psi) so that beads are completely seated. Inflate the air to specified pressure and install valve cap to the stem. WARNING: Never stand over tire when inflating. bead may break when bead snaps over rim's safety hump and cause serious personal injury. never exceed 240 kPa (35 psi) pressure when inflating. if 240 kPa (35 psi) pressure will not seat beads, deflate, re-lubricate and re-inflate. over inflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Tire Repair There are many different materials on the market used to repair tires. Manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. These instructions can be obtained from the tire manufacturer if they are not included with the repair kit. Wheel Inspection Damaged wheels and wheels with excessive run-out must be replaced. Wheel run out at rim (Base on hub Bore): General Balance Procedure Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 1575 Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications Wheels: Specifications Wheel Runout Wheel Runout Axial Runout Steel Wheel 0.0 to 1.0 mm Aluminum Wheel 0.0 to 0.7 mm Service Limit 2.0 mm Maximum Radial Runout Steel Wheel 0.0 to 1.0 mm Aluminum Wheel 0.0 to 0.7 mm Service Limit 1.5 mm Maximum Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1579 Wheels: Testing and Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Check for bent or deformed wheels. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the wheel runout by turning the wheel. Front And Rear Wheel Axial Runout: Standard: Steel Wheel: 0 -1.0 mm 10 - 0.04 inch) - Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service Limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) Front And Rear Wheel Radial Runout: Standard: Steel Wheel: 0 -1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) - Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service Limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) 5. If the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications End Play End Play End Play Front 0.0 to 0.5 mm Rear 0.0 to 0.5 mm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1583 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc in or outward. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1584 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Wheel bearings and hub on these models are an integral assembly and bearings cannot be adjusted. If hub endplay exceeds 0.002 inch with spindle nut properly tightened, hub and bearing assembly should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension TOOL REQUIRED - 07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint remover, 28 mm - 07JAF-SH20110 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Pilot, 38 mm - 07JAF-SH20120 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Shaft, 22.4 x 25.4 mm - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm - 07GAF-SE00401 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Base - 07947-6340201 Driver Attachment 58 x 72 mm - 07965-SD90100 Support Base - 07GAF-SE00200 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Guide Attachment CAUTION: - Replace the self-locking nuts after removal. - The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. NOTE: - Use only genuine Honda wheel weights for aluminum wheels. Non-genuine wheel weights may corrode and damage the aluminum wheels. - On the aluminum wheels, remove the center cap from the inside of the wheel after removing the wheel. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. - Wipe off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball joint. 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1587 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. 4. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut, then remove the nut. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. 6. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and hang the caliper assembly to one side. CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws. 8. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts into the disc to push it away from the wheel hub. NOTE: Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1588 9. Remove the brake disc from the knuckle. 10. Check the front wheel hub for damage and cracks. 11. Remove the wheel sensor from the knuckle (for cars with ABS). NOTE: Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Use the special tool to separate the ball joints from the suspension or steering arm. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot. 12. Clean any dirt or grease off the ball joint. 13. Remove the cotter pin from the steering arm and remove the nut. 14. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown. This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 15. Install a 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1589 16. Install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure you do not damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the pressure bolt. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 17. Once the special tool is in place, turn the adjusting bolt as necessary to make the jaws parallel. Then hand-tighten the pressure bolt, and recheck the jaws to make sure they are still Parallel. NOTE: After making the adjustment to the adjusting bolt, be sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in this position to the allow the jaw to pivot. 18. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint shaft pops loose from the steering arm. Wear eye protection. The ball joint can break loose suddenly and scatter dirt or other debris in your eyes. 19. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint and pull the ball joint out of the steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot and replace it if damaged. 20. Remove the cotter pin from the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 21. Install a 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 22. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and lower arm. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1590 23. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 24. Install the 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 25. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and knuckle. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 26. Pull the knuckle outward and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the knuckle by tapping the driveshaft end with a plastic hammer, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one after removal. 27. Separate the wheel hub from the knuckle using the special tools and a hydraulic press. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. - Hold onto the wheel hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. - To prevent damage to the tool, make sure the threads are fully engaged before pressing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1591 28. Remove the circlip and the splash guard from the knuckle. 29. Press the wheel bearing out of the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. 30. Press the wheel bearing inner race from the wheel hub using the special tools, a bearing separator, and a press as shown. NOTE: Wash the knuckle and wheel hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1592 31. Press a new wheel bearing into the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. NOTE: Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 32. Install the circlip securely in the knuckle groove. 33. Install the splash guard and tighten the screws. 34. Install the wheel hub on the knuckle using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press as shown. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1593 35. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and pay particular attention to the following items: a. Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots when installing the knuckle. b. Torque all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. c. Torque the castle nuts to the lower torque specifications, then tighten them only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening. d. Install new cotter pins on the castle nuts after torquing. e. Avoid twisting the sensor wires when installing the wheel sensor. f. Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and the inside of the brake disc. g. Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. h. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1594 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension The rear bearing is to be serviced with the wheel wheel hub as one unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Front Spindle Nut .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 181 Nm (134 ft. lbs.) Rear Spindle Nut .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 181 Nm (134 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Nut ............................................................................................................................................ ................................................... 110 Nm (80 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1609 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1610 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1611 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1612 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1613 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1614 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1615 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1616 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1617 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1618 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1619 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1620 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1621 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1622 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1623 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1624 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Specifications Resistance ........................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 14 - 30 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 1629 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Mechanical Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Solenoid Valve - 1 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations VTEC Solenoid Valve - 1 Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Solenoid Valve - 1 > Page 1632 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations VTEC Solenoid Valve - 2 Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1633 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the VTEC solenoid valve. 2. Measure resistance between the terminal and body ground. Resistance: 14 - 30 ohms 3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve assembly from the cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter for clogging. - If there is clogging, replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1634 4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. - If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the engine oil pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Check compression with engine at normal operating temperature and throttle in wide open position. Prior to performing test, disable ignition and fuel injection to prevent fuel from being sprayed into cylinders while cranking engine. Ensure is fully charged and that cranking speed is 250 RPM. Standard reading should be 135-184 psi. The maximum variation between cylinders is 28 psi. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft: Specifications Maximum Journal Run-out 0.001 in Camshaft Bearing Clearance 0.002-0.004 in Camshaft End Play 0.002-0.006 in Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1642 Camshaft: Testing and Inspection NOTE: Do not rotate the camshaft during inspection. - Remove the rocker arms and rocker shafts. 1. Put the camshaft and the camshaft holders on the cylinder head, then tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Specified torque: 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgs.cm 14 ft.lbs.) Apply engine oil to the threads. 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgs.cm 8.7 ft.lbs.) Apply engine oil to the threads. 2. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of the cylinder head. 3. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth, and read the end play. Camshaft End Play: Standard (New): 0.05 - 0.15 mm (0.002 - 0.006 inch) Service Limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) 4. Remove the bolts, then remove the camshaft holders from the cylinder head. - Lift the camshaft out of the cylinder head, wipe it clean, then inspect the lip ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or excessively worn. - Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder head, then set the camshaft back in place. - Place a plastigage strip across each journal. 5. Install the camshaft holders, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1643 6. Remove the camshaft holders, then measure the widest portion of the plastigage on each journal. Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance: Standard (New): 0.050 - 0.089 mm (0.002 - 0.004 inch) Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) 7. If the camshaft-to-holder oil clearance is out of tolerance: - And the camshaft has already been replaced, you must replace the cylinder head. - If the camshaft has not been replaced, first check the total runout with the camshaft supported on V-blocks. Camshaft Total Runout: Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 inch) - If the total runout of the camshaft is within tolerance, replace the cylinder head. - If the total runout is out of tolerance, replace the camshaft and recheck the camshaft-to-holder oil clearance. If the oil clearance is still out of tolerance, replace the cylinder head. 8. Check the cam lobe height wear. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1644 Cam lobe height standard (New) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1645 Camshaft: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT REMOVAL NOTE: For removal refer to Cylinder Head Assembly / Service and Repair. INSTALLATION CAUTION: - Make sure that all rockers are in alignment with their valves when torquing the rocker assembly bolts. - Valve locknuts should be loosened and adjusting screws backed off before installation. - To prevent the rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the holders. 1. After wiping down the camshaft, camshaft seal and journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice with a new O-ring. 3. Turn the camshaft until its keyway is facing up (No. 1 piston Top Dead Center [TDC]). 4. Apply liquid gasket (Part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003, or equivalent) to the head mating surfaces of the No. 1 and No. 5 camshaft holders. - Apply liquid gasket to the shaded areas. 5. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. - Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1646 6. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. - Specified torque: 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (14 ft. lbs.) apply engine oil to the threads. - 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) apply engine oil to the threads. NOTE: 6 mm bolts are identified by the numbers (11), (12), (13), (14). 7. Install the back cover, then install the camshaft pulley Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Service Tips Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1651 NOTE: Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original locations. - Inspect rocker shafts and rocker arms. - Rocker arms must be installed in the same position if reused. - When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1652 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen the adjusting screws. 2. Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts, then remove the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly. - When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the camshaft holders, the springs and the rocker arms on the shaft. Camshaft Holder Bolts Loosening Sequence: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1653 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Inspection Clearance Inspection Clearance Inspection Measure both the intake rocker shaft and exhaust rocker shaft. 1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location. 2. Zero the gauge to the shaft diameter. 3. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm and check for an out-of-round condition. Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1654 Standard (New): Intake: 0.017 - 0.050 mm (0.0007 - 0.0020 inch) Exhaust: 0.018 - 0.054 mm (0.0007 - 0.0021 inch) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) 4. Repeat these measurements on all the rockers. - If the clearance is over the service limit, replace the rocker shaft and all over-tolerance rocker arms. Inspection Using Special Tools CAUTION: Before using the Valve Inspection Tool, make sure that the air pressure gauge on the air compressor indicates over 400 kPa (4 kgf.cm, 57 psi). - Inspect the valve clearance before rocker arm inspection. - Cover the timing belt with a shop towel to protect the belt. - Check the intake primary rocker arm of each cylinder at TDC. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Plug the relief hole with the special tool. 3. Remove the sealing bolt from the inspection hole and connect an air pressure regulator with a 0 - 100 psi gauge. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1655 4. Loosen the regulator valve on the valve inspection tool and apply the specified air pressure. Specified Air Pressure: 250 kPa (2.5 kgf.cm, 36 psi) 5. Make sure that the intake primary and secondary rocker arms are mechanically connected by the piston and that the mid rocker arm does not move when pushed manually. 6. If any intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary rocker arms, replace the rocker arms as a set. 7. Remove the special tools. 8. Use a 10 mm diameter rod to depress each lost motion assembly through its full movement. Replace any lost motion assembly that does move smoothly. 9. After inspection, check that the MIL does not come on. Manual Inspection 1. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. 2. Remove the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1656 3. Push the intake mid rocker arm on the No. 1 cylinder manually. 4. Check that the intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary intake rocker arms. 5. Check the intake mid rocker arm of each cylinder at TDC. - If the intake mid rocker arm does not move, remove the mid, primary and secondary intake rocker arms as an assembly and check that the pistons in the mid and primary rocker arms move smoothly. - If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary, mid, and secondary rocker arms as an assembly. Lost Motion Assemblies Inspection Inspection NOTE: When reassembling the primary rocker arm, carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1657 1. Inspect the rocker arm piston. Push it manually. - If it does not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling. - Bundle the rocker arms with a rubber band to prevent them from separating. D16Y5 engine: NOTE: Set the timing plate and return spring as shown below. D16Y8 engine: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1658 2. Remove the lost motion assembly from the holder and inspect it. Test it by pushing the plunger with your finger. - If the lost motion assembly plunger does not move smoothly, replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1659 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Assembly CAMSHAFT, ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT SEAL/PULLEY INSTALLATION CAUTION: Make sure that all rockers are in alignment with their valves when torquing the rocker assembly bolts. - Valve locknuts should be loosened and adjusting screws backed off before installation. - To prevent the rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the holders. 1. After wiping down the camshaft, camshaft seal and journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice with a new O-ring. 3. Turn the camshaft until its keyway is facing up (No. 1 piston TDC). 4. Apply liquid gasket (Part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003) to the head mating surfaces of the No. 1 and No. 5 camshaft holders. - Apply liquid gasket to the shaded areas. 5. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. - Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. 6. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1660 Specified torque: 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgs.cm, 14 ft.lbs.) Apply engine oil to the threads. 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgs.cm, 8.7 ft.lbs.) Apply engine oil to the threads. 6 mm bolts: (11), (12), (13), (14) 7. Install the back cover, then install the camshaft pulley. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1665 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1666 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1667 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1668 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1669 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1670 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1671 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1672 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1673 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1674 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1675 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1676 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1677 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1678 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1679 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1680 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Application and ID Connecting Rod Bearing: Application and ID CAUTION: If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with sol" vent or detergent. NOTE: Numbers have been stamped on the side of each connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Use them, and the letters stamped on the crankshaft (codes for rod journal size), to choose the correct bearings. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 1685 Connecting Rod Bearing: Testing and Inspection CLEARANCE 1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half. 2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 3. Place plastigage across the rod journal. 4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the nuts. Torque B16A2 engine: 40 Nm (4.1 kgs.cm, 30 ft.lbs.) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: 31 Nm (3.2 kgs.cm, 23 ft.lbs.) NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection. 5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure the widest part of the plastigage. Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): 0.032 - 0.050 mm (0.0013 - 0.0020 inch) Service Limit: 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): 0.020 - 0.038 mm (0.0008 - 0.0015 inch) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new, complete bearing with the same color code (select the color as shown in the right column), and recheck the clearance. CAUTION: Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check clearance again. NOTE: If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over. SELECTION CAUTION: If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Connecting Rod Code Location Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 1686 Numbers have been stamped on the side of each connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Use them, and the letters stamped on the crankshaft (codes for rod journal size), to choose the correct bearings. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Connecting Rod Damage Information Connecting Rod: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Connecting Rod Damage Information Why Do Connecting Rods Break? Curious why connecting rods break? Afier all, these are heavy-duty parts specifically designed to endure punishing forces and temperatures. Yet, every once in a while they do bend or break and wind up as cool conversation pieces for a coffee table or desk. Connecting rods break only after they've gotten bent. And they won't get bent unless the engine hydro-locks or the rod bearings fail. When troubleshooting a bent or broken connecting rod, here are some things to consider: ^ The number one culprit for connecting rod breakage is hydro-lock. This happens when liquid (water or fuel) entering the combustion chamber exceeds the chamber's volume. Since liquids don't compress, that extra volume in the chamber causes the rod to bend. You won't really notice anything wrong, until that bent rod finally gives out and breaks. This could happen if you're driving through deep, standing water and someone coming the other way splashes water over your hood. On very rare occasions, a bad ECM/PCM or fuel injector can cause too much fuel to enter a cylinder, causing hydro-lock and resulting in a bent rod. Before this happens, though, there are usually some kind of drive ability problems that crop up and remain afier the engine is fixed. A bent rod might not show any symptoms until it actually breaks. But bent rods leave a wider-than-normal carbon witness line in the cylinder because they're shorter. Typically, a healthy engine has a carbon line that's 6 mm deep. An engine that's suffering from bent rods has a second carbon line that's 9 to 12 mm deep. ^ Connecting rod bearings fail for a number of reasons. To properly determine what actually caused a rod bearing to fail, you've got to take apart all rod bearings and main bearings and compare them side by side. If all or most of the bearings and journals show similar damage (scoring, exposed copper, or heat discoloration) the likely cause is oil starvation, poor maintenance, customer abuse, or running the engine with an aftermarket power booster (nitrous oxide setup, supercharger, turbocharger). If only the bearing or journal for the failed rod looks bad but all the other ones look good (no scoring, no exposed copper or heat discoloration) and the crankshaft journals are smooth with no heat discoloration, then that particular bearing/ clearance would be suspect. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1691 Connecting Rod: Specifications Standard (New) Service Limit Small End Bore Diameter 18.96 - 18.98 mm --Large End Bore Diameter (Nominal) 48.0 mm --End Play Installed on Crankshaft 015 - 0.30 mm 0.40 mm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > End Play Connecting Rod: Testing and Inspection End Play CONNECTING ROD Connecting Rod End Play: Standard (New): 0.15 - 0.30 mm (0.006 - 0.012 inch) Service Limit: 0.40 mm (0.016 inch) - If out-of-tolerance, install a new connecting rod. - If still out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft. CRANKSHAFT Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; dial reading should not exceed service limit. Crankshaft End Play: Standard (New): 0.10 - 0.35 mm (0.004 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) - If end play is excessive, inspect the thrust washers and thrust surface on the crankshaft. Replace parts as necessary. NOTE: Thrust washer thickness is fixed and must not be changed either by grinding or shimming. Thrust washers are installed with grooved sides facing outward. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > End Play > Page 1694 Connecting Rod: Testing and Inspection Selection SELECTION Each rod falls into one of four tolerance ranges (from 0 to + 0.024 mm (0 to + 0.0009 inch), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 inch) increments) depending on the size of its big end bore. It's then stamped with a number (1, 2, 3, or 4) indicating the range. You may find any combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4 in any engine. Normal Bore Size: 48.0 mm (1.89 inch) NOTE: Reference numbers are for big end bore size and do NOT indicate the position of the rod in the engine. - Inspect connecting rod for cracks and heat damage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1695 Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Referal For information regarding this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Cylinder Block Assembly / Service and Repair. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications First step: 25 Nm (2.5 kgs.cm, 18 ft.lbs.) Second step: B16A2 engine: 76 Nm (7.8 kgs.cm, 56 ft.lbs.) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: 51 Nm (5.2 kgs.cm, 38 ft.lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1699 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Application and ID CAUTION: If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. NOTE: - Letters have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the 5 main journal bores. - Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft (codes for main journal size), to choose the correct bearings. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1700 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Testing and Inspection CLEARANCE 1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, remove the main caps and bearing halves. 2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main journal. NOTE: If the engine is still in the car when you bolt the main cap down to check clearance, the weight of the crankshaft and flywheel will flatten the plastigage further than just the torque on the cap bolt, and give you an incorrect reading. For an accurate reading, support the crank with a jack under the counterweights and check only one bearing at a time. 4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the bolts. 1st step: 25 Nm (2.5 kgs.cm, 18 ft.lbs.) Final step: B16A2 engine: 76 Nm (7.8 kgs.cm, 56 ft.lbs.) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: 51 Nm (5.2 kgs.cm, 38 ft.lbs.) NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection. 5. Remove the cap and bearing again, and measure the widest part of the plastigage. Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): No.1, 2, 4, 5 Journals: 0.024 - 0.042 mm (0.0009 - 0.0017 inch) No.3 Journals: 0.030 - 0.048 mm (0.0012 - 0.0019 inch) Service Limit: 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): No.1, 5 Journals: 0.018 - 0.036 mm (0.0007 - 0.0014 inch) No. 2,3,4 Journals: 0.024 - 0.042 mm (0.0009 - 0.0017 inch) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, (remove the engine if it's still in the car), remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the same color code, and recheck the clearance. CAUTION: Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check again. NOTE: If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over. SELECTION CAUTION: If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Crankshaft Bore Code Location B16A2 Engine: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1701 Letters have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the 5 main journal bores. Use them, and the numbers or bars stamped on the crank (codes for main journal size), to choose the correct bearings. D16Y5,D16Y7,D16Y8 Engines: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1702 Letters have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the 5 main journal bores. Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft (codes for main journal size), to choose the correct bearings. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1703 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Referal For information regarding this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Cylinder Block Assembly / Service and Repair. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Out-Of-Round: Standard (New) ........................................................................................................................................................... 0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch) Max. Service Limit ...................................................................................... ................................................................................... 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Runout: Standard (New) ................................................................................................................................... .............................. 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) Max. Service Limit ............................................................. ................................................................................................................ 0.04 mm (0.002 inch) Taper: Standard (New) ........................................................................................................................................................... 0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch) Max. Service Limit ........................................................................................................................................ ............................................. 0.005 mm (0.002 inch) End Play: Standard (New) ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 inch) Service Limit ................................................................................... .......................................................................................... 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > End Play Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection End Play CONNECTING ROD Connecting Rod End Play: Standard (New): 0.15 - 0.30 mm (0.006 - 0.012 inch) Service Limit: 0.40 mm (0.016 inch) - If out-of-tolerance, install a new connecting rod. - If still out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft. CRANKSHAFT Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; dial reading should not exceed service limit. Crankshaft End Play: Standard (New): 0.10 - 0.35 mm (0.004 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 inch) - If end play is excessive, inspect the thrust washers and thrust surface on the crankshaft. Replace parts as necessary. NOTE: Thrust washer thickness is fixed and must not be changed either by grinding or shimming. Thrust washers are installed with grooved sides facing outward. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > End Play > Page 1709 Crankshaft: Testing and Inspection Main Bearing Inspection CLEARANCE 1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, remove the main caps and bearing halves. 2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel. 3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main journal. NOTE: If the engine is still in the car when you bolt the main cap down to check clearance, the weight of the crankshaft and flywheel will flatten the plastigage further than just the torque on the cap bolt, and give you an incorrect reading. For an accurate reading, support the crank with a jack under the counterweights and check only one bearing at a time. 4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the bolts. 1st step: 25 Nm (2.5 kgs.cm, 18 ft.lbs.) Final step: B16A2 engine: 76 Nm (7.8 kgs.cm, 56 ft.lbs.) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: 51 Nm (5.2 kgs.cm, 38 ft.lbs.) NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection. 5. Remove the cap and bearing again, and measure the widest part of the plastigage. Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): No.1, 2, 4, 5 Journals: 0.024 - 0.042 mm (0.0009 - 0.0017 inch) No.3 Journals: 0.030 - 0.048 mm (0.0012 - 0.0019 inch) Service Limit: 0.06 mm (0.002 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): No.1, 5 Journals: 0.018 - 0.036 mm (0.0007 - 0.0014 inch) No. 2,3,4 Journals: 0.024 - 0.042 mm (0.0009 - 0.0017 inch) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, (remove the engine if it's still in the car), remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the same color code, and recheck the clearance. CAUTION: Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance. 7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color listed above or below that one), and check again. NOTE: If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over. SELECTION CAUTION: If the codes are indecipherable because of an accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent. Crankshaft Bore Code Location Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > End Play > Page 1710 B16A2 Engine: Letters have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the 5 main journal bores. Use them, and the numbers or bars stamped on the crank (codes for main journal size), to choose the correct bearings. D16Y5,D16Y7,D16Y8 Engines: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > End Play > Page 1711 Letters have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of the 5 main journal bores. Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft (codes for main journal size), to choose the correct bearings. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly Crankshaft: Service and Repair Disassembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the oil pan assembly. 2. Remove the right side cover. 3. Remove the oil screen. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1714 4. Remove the oil pump. 5. Remove the baffle plate (B16A2 engine). 6. Remove the bolts and the bearing caps. CAUTION: To prevent warpage unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time, repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened. 7. Remove the rod caps/bearings and main caps/bearings. Keep all caps/bearing in order. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1715 8. Lift the crankshaft out of the engine, being careful not to damage journals. 9. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods and set them aside with their respective caps. 10. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the engine in proper order. 11. If you can feel ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer. Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. CAUTION: If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are pushed out. 12. Use the wooden handle of a hammer to drive the pistons out. 13. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps after removing each piston/connecting rod assembly. 14. Mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number to avoid mix-up on reassembly. NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod does not indicate its position in the engine, it indicates the rod bore size. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1716 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Inspection INSPECTION - Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners or a suitable brush. - Check the keyway and threads. ALIGNMENT - Measure runout on all main journals to make sure the crank is not bent. - The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Crankshaft Total Indicated Runout: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): 0.020 mm (0.0008 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.030 mm (0.0012 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 inch) OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER - Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod and main journal in two places. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1717 - The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Journal Out-of-Round: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): 0.0004 mm (0.0002 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.006 mm (0.0002 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): 0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) - Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main journal. - The difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit. Journal Taper: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.010 mm (0.004 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): 0.0025 mm (0.0001 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1718 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Assembly Before installing the crankshaft, apply a coat of engine oil to the main bearings and rod bearings. 1. Insert the bearing halves into the cylinder block and connecting rods. 2. Hold the crankshaft so the rod journals for cylinders No. 2 and No. 3 are straight down. 3. Lower the crankshaft into the block, seating the rod journals into connecting rods No. 2 and No. 3, and install the rod caps and nuts finger-tight. 4. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, seat journals into connecting rods No. 1 and No. 4, and install the rod caps and nuts finger-tight. NOTE: Install caps so the bearing recess is on the same side as the recess in the rod. 5. Check rod bearing clearance with plastigage, then torque the cap nuts. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. Torque: B16A2 engine: 40 Nm (4.1 kgs.cm, 30 ft.lbs.) D16Y5,D16Y7,D16Y8 engines: 31 Nm (3.2 kgs.cm, 23 ft.lbs.) NOTE: Reference numbers on connecting rod are for big-end bore tolerance and do not indicate the position of piston in the engine. 6. Install the thrust washers on the No. 4 journal. Oil the thrust washer surfaces. 7. Install the main bearing caps. Check clearance with plastigage, then tighten the bearing cap bolts in 2 steps. First step: 25 Nm (2.5 kgs.cm, 18 ft.lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1719 Second step: B16A2 engine: 76 Nm (7.8 kgs.cm, 56 ft.lbs.) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: 51 Nm (5.2 kgs.cm, 38 ft.lbs.) NOTE: Coat the thrust washer surfaces and bolt threads with oil. CAUTION: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod bearing is replaced, it is necessary after reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it reaches normal operating temperature, then continue to run it for approximately 15 minutes. NOTE: Use liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003. - Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry before applying liquid gasket. - Apply liquid gasket evenly, being careful to cover all the mating surface. - To prevent oil leakage, apply liquid gasket to the inner threads of the bolt holes. - Do not install the parts if five minutes or more have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket. Instead reapply liquid gasket after removing the old residue. - After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1720 8. Apply liquid gasket to the block mating surface of the right side cover, then install it on the cylinder block. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1721 9. Apply liquid gasket to the oil pump mating surface of the block, then install the oil pump on the cylinder block. Apply grease to the lips of the oil seals. Then, align the inner rotor with the crankshaft and install the oil pump. When the pump is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted. NOTE: Apply a light coat of oil to the crankshaft and to the lip of seal. - Use new O-rings and apply oil when installing them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1722 10. Install the oil screen. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications When installing and tightening the pulley, follow the procedure below. Clean, remove any oil, and lubricate points shown. Crankshaft pulley bolt size and torque value: 14 x 1.25 mm 20 Nm (2.0 kgs.cm, 14 ft.lbs.) + 90° NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench when installing. 1. Tighten the pulley bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (2.0 kgs.cm, 14 ft.lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1726 2. Use a felt tip pen to mark the pulley bolt head and washer. 3. Tighten the pulley bolt an additional 90°. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1727 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair When installing and tightening the pulley, follow the procedure below. Clean, remove any oil, and lubricate points shown. Crankshaft pulley bolt size and torque value: 14 x 1.25 mm 20 Nm (2.0 kgs.cm, 14 ft.lbs.) + 90° NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench when installing. 1. Tighten the pulley bolt to the specified torque. Torque: 20 Nm (2.0 kgs.cm, 14 ft.lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1728 2. Use a felt tip pen to mark the pulley bolt head and washer. 3. Tighten the pulley bolt an additional 90°. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Piston: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION 1. Check the piston for distortion or cracks. NOTE: If a cylinder is bored, an oversized piston must be used. 2. Measure the piston diameter at a distance A from bottom of the skirt. B16A2 engine: A: 15 mm (0.6 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: A: 5 mm (0.2 inch) Piston Diameter: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): 80.980 - 80.990 mm (3.1882 - 3.1886 inch) Service Limit: 80.970 mm (3.1878 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): 74.980 - 74.990 mm (2.9520 - 2.9524 inch) Service Limit: 74.970 mm (2.9516 inch) 3. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore diameter and the piston diameter. Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance Standard (New): 0.010 - 0.040 mm (0.0004 - 0.0016 inch) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) If the clearance is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston and cylinder block for excessive wear. Oversize Piston Diameter B16A2 engine: 0.25: 81.23 - 81.24 mm (3.1980 - 3.1984 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1732 0.25: 75.23 - 75.24 mm (2.9618 - 2.9622 inch) 0.50: 75.48 - 75.49 mm (2.9716 - 2.9720 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly Piston: Service and Repair Disassembly REMOVAL 1. Remove the oil pan assembly. 2. Remove the right side cover. 3. Remove the oil screen. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1735 4. Remove the oil pump. 5. Remove the baffle plate (B16A2 engine). 6. Remove the bolts and the bearing caps. CAUTION: To prevent warpage unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time, repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened. 7. Remove the rod caps/bearings and main caps/bearings. Keep all caps/bearing in order. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1736 8. Lift the crankshaft out of the engine, being careful not to damage journals. 9. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods and set them aside with their respective caps. 10. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the engine in proper order. 11. If you can feel ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge reamer. Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. CAUTION: If the ridge is not removed, it may damage the pistons as they are pushed out. 12. Use the wooden handle of a hammer to drive the pistons out. 13. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps after removing each piston/connecting rod assembly. 14. Mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number to avoid mix-up on reassembly. NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod does not indicate its position in the engine, it indicates the rod bore size. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1737 Piston: Service and Repair Assembly Before installing the pistons, apply a coat of engine oil to the ring grooves and cylinder bores. 1. If the crankshaft is already installed: - Set the crankshaft to BDC for each cylinder. - Remove the connecting rod caps, and slip short sections of rubber hose over the threaded ends of the connecting rod bolts. - Install the ring compressor, check that the bearing is securely in place, then position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer. - Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment before pushing the piston into place. - Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. Install the rod caps with bearings, and torque the nuts to: B16A2 engine: 40 Nm (4.1 kgs.cm, 30 ft.lbs.) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: 31 Nm (3.2 kgs.cm, 23 ft.lbs.) 2. If the crankshaft is not installed: - Remove the rod caps and bearings, install the ring compressor, then position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer. - Position all pistons at top dead center. NOTE: Maintain downward force on the ring compressor to prevent the rings from expanding before entering the cylinder bore. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1738 Piston: Service and Repair Piston Pins REMOVAL 1. Assemble the special tool as shown. 2. Assemble and adjust the length of the piston pin driver and shaft to 53 mm (2.1 inch) as shown. 3. Place the piston on the special tool and press the pin out with the special tools and a hydraulic press. INSPECTION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1739 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Piston Pin Diameter: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): 20.994 - 21.000 mm (0.8265 - 0.8268 inch) Oversize: 20.997 - 21.003 (0.8267 0.8269 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): 18.994 - 19.000 mm (0.7478 - 0.7480 inch) Oversize: 18.997 - 19.003 (0.7479 0.7481 inch) NOTE: All replacement piston pins are oversize. 2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. 3. Measure the piston pin-to-piston clearance. NOTE: Check the piston for distortion or cracks. If the piston pin clearance is greater than 0.024 mm (0.0009 inch), remeasure using an oversized piston pin. Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance: Standard (New): 0.010 - 0.022 mm (0.0004 - 0.0009 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1740 4. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and the connecting rod small end diameter. Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Interference: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): 0.013 - 0.032 mm (0.0005 - 0.0013 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): 0.014 - 0.040 mm (0.0006 - 0.0016 inch) INSTALLATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1741 1. Use a hydraulic press for installation. - When pressing the pin in or out, be sure you position the recessed flat on the piston against the lugs on the base attachment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Pin: Specifications Piston Pin Diameter ............................................................................................................................. ................................................ 0.7478-0.7480 inches Piston Pin To Piston Clearance ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.0004-0.0009 inches Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1745 Piston Pin: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Assemble the special tool as shown. 2. Assemble and adjust the length of the piston pin driver and shaft to 53 mm (2.1 inch) as shown. 3. Place the piston on the special tool and press the pin out with the special tools and a hydraulic press. INSPECTION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1746 1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Piston Pin Diameter: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): 20.994 - 21.000 mm (0.8265 - 0.8268 inch) Oversize: 20.997 - 21.003 (0.8267 0.8269 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): 18.994 - 19.000 mm (0.7478 - 0.7480 inch) Oversize: 18.997 - 19.003 (0.7479 0.7481 inch) NOTE: All replacement piston pins are oversize. 2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. 3. Measure the piston pin-to-piston clearance. NOTE: Check the piston for distortion or cracks. If the piston pin clearance is greater than 0.024 mm (0.0009 inch), remeasure using an oversized piston pin. Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance: Standard (New): 0.010 - 0.022 mm (0.0004 - 0.0009 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1747 4. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and the connecting rod small end diameter. Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Interference: B16A2 engine: Standard (New): 0.013 - 0.032 mm (0.0005 - 0.0013 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines: Standard (New): 0.014 - 0.040 mm (0.0006 - 0.0016 inch) INSTALLATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1748 1. Use a hydraulic press for installation. - When pressing the pin in or out, be sure you position the recessed flat on the piston against the lugs on the base attachment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Diameter (Std.) ......................................................................................................................... ................................................. 2.9520-2.9524 inches Piston Clearance ............................................ ...................................................................................................................................... 0.0004-0.0016 inches Piston Pin Diameter ......................................................................................... .................................................................................... 0.7478-0.7480 inches Piston Pin To Piston Clearance ............................................................................................................................................................ 0.0004-0.0009 inches Piston Ring End Gap: Top ...................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 0.006-0.012 inches Second ..................................................................... ...................................................................................................................... 0.012-0.018 inches Oil .. .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................. 0.008-0.028 inches Piston Ring To Groove Clearance Top Ring .............................................................................................................................................. ...................................... 0.0014-0.0024 inches Second Ring ............................................................. .................................................................................................................. 0.0012-0.0022 inches Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1752 Piston Ring: Service and Repair END GAP 1. Using a piston, push a new ring into the cylinder bore 15 - 20 mm (0.6 - 0.8 inch) from the bottom. 2. Measure the piston ring end-gap with a feeler gauge: - If the gap is too small, check to see if you have the proper rings for your engine. - If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore diameter against the wear limits, See Cylinder Block Assembly / Service and Repair / Inspection and Service. If the bore is over the service limit, the cylinder block must be rebored. Piston Ring End-Gap: Top Ring B16A2 engine Standard (New): 0.20 - 0.35 mm (0.008 - 0.014 inch) Service Limit: 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines Standard (New): 0.15 - 0.30 mm (0.006 - 0.012 inch) Service Limit: 0.60 mm (0.024 inch) Second Ring B16A2 engine Standard (New): 0.40 - 0.55 mm (0.016 - 0.022 inch) Service Limit: 0.70 mm (0.028 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines Standard (New): 0.30 - 0.45 mm (0.012 - 0.018 inch) Service Limit: 0.70 mm (0.028 inch) Oil Ring B16A2 engine Standard (New): 0.20 - 0.50 mm (0.008 - 0.020 inch) Service Limit: 0.70 mm (0.028 inch) D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engines Standard (New): 0.20 - 0.70 mm (0.008 - 0.028 inch) Service Limit: 0.80 mm (0.031 inch) REPLACEMENT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1753 1. Using a ring expander, remove the old piston rings. 2. Clean all ring grooves thoroughly. NOTE: Use a squared-off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with blade to fit piston grooves. - Top ring groove is 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) wide. - Second ring groove is 1.2 mm (0.047 inch) wide. - Oil ring groove is 2.8 mm (0.11 inch) wide. - File down the blade if necessary. CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush to clean ring lands, or cut ring lands deeper with cleaning tool. NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the connecting rod, do not install new rings yet. 3. Install new rings in the proper sequence and position. NOTE: Do not reuse old piston rings. RING TO GROOVE CLEARANCE After installing a new set of rings, measure ring-to-groove clearances: Top Ring Clearance Standard (New): B16A2 engine: 0.045-0.070 mm (0.0018-0.0028 inch) D16Y5,D16Y7,D16Y8 engines: 0.035-0.060 mm (0.0014-0.0024 inch) Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1754 Second Ring Clearance Standard (New): B16A2 engine: 0.040-0.065 mm (0.0016-0.0026 inch) D16Y5,D16Y7,D16Y8 engines: 0.030-0.055 mm (0.0012-0.0022 inch) Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) ALIGNMENT 1. Install the rings as shown. NOTE: The manufacturing marks must be facing upward. 2. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do not bind. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1755 3. Position the ring end gaps as shown: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... .......................................... 0.007-0.009 inches Exhaust ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 0.009-0.011 inches Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1760 Valve Clearance: Adjustments NOTE: Valves should be adjusted only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). - After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the upper cover. 3. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark on the cam-shaft pulley should be at top, and the TDC marks should align with the cylinder head surface. 4. Adjust valves on No. 1 cylinder. Intake: 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust: 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1761 5. Loosen the locknut, and turn the adjustment screw until the feeler gauge slides back and forth with a slight amount of drag. 6. Tighten the locknut, and check the clearance again. Repeat the adjustment if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 1762 7. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark should be on the exhaust side. Adjust valves on No. 3 cylinder. 8. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. Both TDC grooves are once again visible. Adjust valves on No. 4 cylinder. 9. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark should be on the intake side. Adjust valves on No. 2 cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Relieving Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 6 mm service bolt on top of the fuel filter. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 6 mm service bolt at the fuel filter while holding the special banjo bolt with another wrench. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 6 mm service bolt. 6. Slowly loosen the 6 mm service bolt one complete turn. NOTE: A fuel pressure gauge can be attached at the 6 mm service bolt hole. - Always replace the washer between the service bolt and the special banjo bolt whenever the service bolt is loosened. - Replace all washers whenever the bolts are removed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Service Tips Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1770 NOTE: Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original locations. - Inspect rocker shafts and rocker arms. - Rocker arms must be installed in the same position if reused. - When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1771 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen the adjusting screws. 2. Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts, then remove the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm assembly. - When removing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the camshaft holders, the springs and the rocker arms on the shaft. Camshaft Holder Bolts Loosening Sequence: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1772 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Inspection Clearance Inspection Clearance Inspection Measure both the intake rocker shaft and exhaust rocker shaft. 1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location. 2. Zero the gauge to the shaft diameter. 3. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm and check for an out-of-round condition. Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1773 Standard (New): Intake: 0.017 - 0.050 mm (0.0007 - 0.0020 inch) Exhaust: 0.018 - 0.054 mm (0.0007 - 0.0021 inch) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) 4. Repeat these measurements on all the rockers. - If the clearance is over the service limit, replace the rocker shaft and all over-tolerance rocker arms. Inspection Using Special Tools CAUTION: Before using the Valve Inspection Tool, make sure that the air pressure gauge on the air compressor indicates over 400 kPa (4 kgf.cm, 57 psi). - Inspect the valve clearance before rocker arm inspection. - Cover the timing belt with a shop towel to protect the belt. - Check the intake primary rocker arm of each cylinder at TDC. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Plug the relief hole with the special tool. 3. Remove the sealing bolt from the inspection hole and connect an air pressure regulator with a 0 - 100 psi gauge. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1774 4. Loosen the regulator valve on the valve inspection tool and apply the specified air pressure. Specified Air Pressure: 250 kPa (2.5 kgf.cm, 36 psi) 5. Make sure that the intake primary and secondary rocker arms are mechanically connected by the piston and that the mid rocker arm does not move when pushed manually. 6. If any intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary rocker arms, replace the rocker arms as a set. 7. Remove the special tools. 8. Use a 10 mm diameter rod to depress each lost motion assembly through its full movement. Replace any lost motion assembly that does move smoothly. 9. After inspection, check that the MIL does not come on. Manual Inspection 1. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. 2. Remove the cylinder head cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1775 3. Push the intake mid rocker arm on the No. 1 cylinder manually. 4. Check that the intake mid rocker arm moves independently of the primary and secondary intake rocker arms. 5. Check the intake mid rocker arm of each cylinder at TDC. - If the intake mid rocker arm does not move, remove the mid, primary and secondary intake rocker arms as an assembly and check that the pistons in the mid and primary rocker arms move smoothly. - If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary, mid, and secondary rocker arms as an assembly. Lost Motion Assemblies Inspection Inspection NOTE: When reassembling the primary rocker arm, carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of the rocker arm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1776 1. Inspect the rocker arm piston. Push it manually. - If it does not move smoothly, replace the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling. - Bundle the rocker arms with a rubber band to prevent them from separating. D16Y5 engine: NOTE: Set the timing plate and return spring as shown below. D16Y8 engine: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1777 2. Remove the lost motion assembly from the holder and inspect it. Test it by pushing the plunger with your finger. - If the lost motion assembly plunger does not move smoothly, replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1778 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Assembly CAMSHAFT, ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT SEAL/PULLEY INSTALLATION CAUTION: Make sure that all rockers are in alignment with their valves when torquing the rocker assembly bolts. - Valve locknuts should be loosened and adjusting screws backed off before installation. - To prevent the rocker arm assembly from coming apart, leave the camshaft holder bolts in the holders. 1. After wiping down the camshaft, camshaft seal and journals in the cylinder head, lubricate both surfaces and install the camshaft. 2. Clean and install the oil control orifice with a new O-ring. 3. Turn the camshaft until its keyway is facing up (No. 1 piston TDC). 4. Apply liquid gasket (Part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003) to the head mating surfaces of the No. 1 and No. 5 camshaft holders. - Apply liquid gasket to the shaded areas. 5. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely install the bolts. - Make sure that the rocker arms are properly positioned on the valve stems. 6. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the sequence shown to ensure that the rockers do not bind on the valves. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Service Tips > Page 1779 Specified torque: 8 mm bolts: 20 Nm (2.0 kgs.cm, 14 ft.lbs.) Apply engine oil to the threads. 6 mm bolts: 12 Nm (1.2 kgs.cm, 8.7 ft.lbs.) Apply engine oil to the threads. 6 mm bolts: (11), (12), (13), (14) 7. Install the back cover, then install the camshaft pulley. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Cover: Service and Repair Referal For information regarding this component, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Cylinder Head Assembly / Service and Repair. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications Valve Guide: Specifications Cylinder Head Warpage Limit .............................................................................................................. ............................................................. 0.002 inches Cylinder Head Minimum Thickness .................. ................................................................................................................................................. 3.738 inches Valve Guides: Standard Inside Diameter .................................................................................................................... ........................................... 0.217-0.218 inches Stem To Guide Clearance: Intake ................................................................................................................................................... .................................... 0.001-0.002 inches Exhaust ........................................................................... ......................................................................................................... 0.002-0.003 inches Valve Seats: Seat Angle, Degrees ........................................................................................................................... ...................................................................... 45 Seat Width: Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 0.033-0.045 Exhaust ........................................................................... ......................................................................................................... 0.049-0.061 inches Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1786 Valve Guide: Testing and Inspection Measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble method). Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.04 - 0.10 mm (0.002 - 0.004 inch) Service Limit: 0.16 mm (0.006 inch) Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.10 - 0.16 mm (0.004 - 0.006 inch) Service Limit: 0.22 mm (0.009 inch) - If the measurement exceeds the service limit, recheck using a new valve. - If the measurement is now within the service limit, reassemble using a new valve. - If the measurement still exceeds the limit, recheck using the alternate method below, then replace the valve and guide, if necessary. NOTE: An alternate method of checking guide to stem clearance is to subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide, measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge. Take the measurements in three places along the valve stem and three places inside the valve guide. The difference between the largest guide measurement and the smallest stem measurement should not exceed the service limit. Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.02 - 0.05 mm (0.001 - 0.002 inch) Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance: Standard (New): 0.05- 0.08 mm (0.002 - 0.003 inch) Service Limit: 0.11 mm (0.004 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1787 Valve Guide: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. As illustrated, use a commercially-available air-impact valve guide driver attachment modified to fit the diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure can be done using the special tool and a conventional hammer. 2. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for about an hour. 3. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder head to 300°F (150°C). Monitor the temperature with a cooking thermometer. CAUTION: Do not use a torch; it may warp the head. - Do not get the head hotter than 300°F (150°C); excessive heat may loosen the valve seats. - To avoid burns, use heavy gloves when handling the heated cylinder head. 4. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1 inch) towards the combustion chamber. This will knock off some of the carbon and make removal easier. CAUTION: Always wear safety goggles or a face shield when driving valve guides. - Hold the air hammer directly in line with the valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1788 5. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward the camshaft side of the head. If a valve guide still won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm (5/16 inch) bit, then try again. CAUTION: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks. 6. Remove the new guides from the freezer, one at a time, as you need them. 7. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to drive the guide in to the specified installed height. If you have all 16 guides to do, you may have to reheat the head. Valve Guide Installed Height: Intake: 17.85 - 18.35 mm (0.703 - 0.722 inch) Exhaust: 18.65 - 19.15 mm (0.734 - 0.754 inch) REAMING NOTE: For new valve guides only. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1789 1. Coat both the reamer and valve guide with cutting oil. 2. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the valve guide bore. 3. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while removing it from the bore. 4. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water to remove any cutting residue. 5. Check the clearance with a valve. Verify that the valve slides in the valve guide without exerting pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Specifications Valve Seat: Specifications Cylinder Head Warpage Limit .............................................................................................................. ............................................................. 0.002 inches Cylinder Head Minimum Thickness .................. ................................................................................................................................................. 3.738 inches Valve Guides: Standard Inside Diameter .................................................................................................................... ........................................... 0.217-0.218 inches Stem To Guide Clearance: Intake ................................................................................................................................................... .................................... 0.001-0.002 inches Exhaust ........................................................................... ......................................................................................................... 0.002-0.003 inches Valve Seats: Seat Angle, Degrees ........................................................................................................................... ...................................................................... 45 Seat Width: Intake ................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 0.033-0.045 Exhaust ........................................................................... ......................................................................................................... 0.049-0.061 inches Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1793 Valve Seat: Service and Repair RECONDITIONING 1. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a valve seat cutter. NOTE: If the guides are worn, replace them before cutting the valve seats. 2. Carefully cut a 45° seat, removing only enough material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat. 3. Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30° cutter and the lower edge of the seat with the 60° cutter. Check the width of the seat and adjust accordingly. 4. Make one more very light pass with the 45° cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by the other cutters. Valve Seat Width: Standard (New): Intake: 0.85 -1.15 mm (0.033 - 0.045 inch) Exhaust: 1.25 - 1.55 mm (0.049 - 0.061 inch) Service Limit: Intake: 1.6 mm (0.063 inch) Exhaust: 2.0 mm (0.079 inch) 5. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound to the valve face, and insert the valve in its original location in the head, then lift and snap it closed against the seat several times. 6. The actual valve seating surface, as shown by the blue compound, should be centered on the seat. - If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must make a second cut with the 60° cutter to move it down, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore seat width. - If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must make a second cut with the 30° cutter to move it up, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore seat width. NOTE: The final cut should always be made with the 45° cutter. 7. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and measure the valve stem installed height. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1794 Intake, Exhaust Stem Installed Height: Standard (New): 53.17 - 53.64 mm (2.093 - 2.112 inch) Service Limit: 53.89 mm (2.122 inch) 8. If the valve stem installed height is over the service limit, replace the valve and recheck. If its still over the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the valve seat in the head is too deep. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Specifications Valve Spring: Specifications Free Length Intake ................................................................................................................................................... .................................................... 2.280 inches Exhaust ..................................................................... ................................................................................................................................ 2.310 inches Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly Valve Spring: Service and Repair Disassembly NOTE: Identify valves and valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. 1. Using an appropriate-sized socket and plastic mallet, lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve keepers before installing the valve spring compressor. 2. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring and remove the valve keeper. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1800 3. Install the valve guide seal remover. 4. Remove the valve seal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1801 Valve Dimensions Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1802 Valve Spring: Service and Repair Assembly VALVES, VALVE SPRINGS AND VALVE SEALS INSTALLATION 1. Coat valve stems with engine oil. Insert the valves in the valve guides. NOTE: Make sure the valves move up and down smoothly. 2. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head. 3. Install the valve seals using the valve guide seal installer. NOTE: Exhaust and intake valve seals are not interchangeable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1803 4. Install the valve spring and valve retainer, then install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and install the valve keepers. NOTE: Place the end of the valve spring with closely wound coils toward the cylinder head. 5. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mallet to ensure proper seating of the valve and valve keepers. NOTE: Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly Valve: Service and Repair Disassembly NOTE: Identify valves and valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. 1. Using an appropriate-sized socket and plastic mallet, lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve keepers before installing the valve spring compressor. 2. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring and remove the valve keeper. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1808 3. Install the valve guide seal remover. 4. Remove the valve seal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1809 Valve Dimensions Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1810 Valve: Service and Repair Assembly VALVES, VALVE SPRINGS AND VALVE SEALS INSTALLATION 1. Coat valve stems with engine oil. Insert the valves in the valve guides. NOTE: Make sure the valves move up and down smoothly. 2. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head. 3. Install the valve seals using the valve guide seal installer. NOTE: Exhaust and intake valve seals are not interchangeable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 1811 4. Install the valve spring and valve retainer, then install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and install the valve keepers. NOTE: Place the end of the valve spring with closely wound coils toward the cylinder head. 5. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mallet to ensure proper seating of the valve and valve keepers. NOTE: Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - Belt Tension Gauge Calibration and Repair Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Belt Tension Gauge Calibration and Repair Bulletin No. 96-014 Issue Date Feb. 20, 1996 Model ALL Applicable To ALL File Under SPECIAL TOOLS Belt Tension Gauge Calibration and Repair Tensioning the engine belts properly with the belt tension gauge (T/N 07JGG-001010A) is critical to bearing life of the A/C compressor, alternator, etc. Calibration of the belt tension gauge should be checked regularly. CALIBRATION A Belt Tension Gauge Checker, needed for checking the calibration of the belt tension gauge, is now available. One checker is being automatically shipped to each dealership. Additional checkers may be ordered through normal parts ordering channels. The part number is 07TGG-001010A. Procedure 1. Push the handle and slide the checker into the gauge. Position the checker as shown. 2. Release the handle and read the tension value on the Kg scale. 3. Compare your reading to the value etched on the checker. Your gauge is in calibration if it is within +/- 3 kg of the checker value. If your belt tension gauge is out of calibration, you cannot recalibrate it yourself. Contact America Kowa Seiki about sending it for recalibration. REPLACEMENT PARTS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - Belt Tension Gauge Calibration and Repair > Page 1817 If your belt tension gauge is damaged, replacement parts are available from America Kowa Seiki. They are: REPAIR AND CALIBRATION INFORMATION To order replacement parts for a gauge, contact: America Kowa Seiki 20013 S. Rancho Way Rancho Dominguez, CA 90220 (800) 824-9655 To return your belt tension gauge for calibration: ^ Contact America Kowa Seiki for authorization and shipping instructions. ^ Pack the belt tension gauge in a suitable box. Use "bubble pack" to protect the gauge. ^ Ship according to their instructions. America Kowa Seiki will charge a fixed fee to inspect, clean and calibrate the belt tension gauge, and return it via UPS ground. Any repair parts needed are extra. The gauge will be returned within 15 days. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1818 Drive Belt: Specifications NOTE: When using a new belt, adjust deflection or tension to new values. Run the engine for 5 minutes then turn it off. Readjust the deflection or tension to used belt values. Deflection [1]: With Used Belt .............................................................................................................................................................. 10.5 - 14.0 mm (0.41 - 0.55 inch) With New Belt ................................................................................. ............................................................................... 7.5 - 10.0 mm (0.30 - 0.39 inch) Tension [2]: With Used Belt ................................................................................................................................................ 340 490 N (35 - 50 kgf, 77 - 110 ft. lbs.) With New Belt ............................................................................................................................................... 640 780 N (65 - 80 kgf, 143 - 176 ft. lbs.) [1] With 98 N (10 kgf, 22 ft. lbs.) between pulleys. [2] Measured with belt tension gauge. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > A/C Compressor Drive Belt: Adjustments A/C Compressor Deflection Method 1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb), and measure the deflection between the A/C compressor and the crankshaft pulley. A/C Compressor Belt Used Belt: B16A2 engine 6.0 - 9.5 mm (0.24 - 0.37 in) Except B16A2 engine 7.5 - 9.5 mm (0.30 - 0.37 in) New Belt: B16A2 engine 4.5 - 6.5 mm (0.18 - 0.26 in) Except B16A2 engine 5.0 - 6.5 mm (0.20 0.26 in) Note these items when adjusting belt tension: If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. - "Used belt" means a belt which has been used for five minutes or more. - "New belt" means a belt which has been used for less than five minutes. 2. Loosen, the center nut of the idler pulley (SANDEN), or the pivot bolt of the idler pulley bracket and the lock nut of the adjusting bolt (DENSO). 3. Turn the adjusting bolt to get proper belt tension. 4. Retighten the center nut of the idler pulley (SANDEN), or the pivot bolt of the idler pulley bracket and the lock nut of the adjusting bolt (DENSO). 5. Recheck the deflection of the A/C compressor belt. Tension Gauge Method 1. Attach the special tool to the A/C compressor belt as shown below, and measure the tension of the belt. A/C Compressor Belt Used Belt: B16A2 engine 390 - 540 N (40 - 55 kg, 88 - 120 lb) Except B16A2 engine 340 - 490 N (35 - 50 kg, 77 - 110 lb) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > A/C Compressor > Page 1821 New Belt: B16A2 engine 740 - 880 N (75 - 90 kg, 170 - 200 lb) Except B16A2 engine 690 - 830 N (70 - 85 kg, 150 - 190 lb) Note these items when adjusting belt tension: Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the belt tension gauge. - If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. - "Used belt" means a belt which has been used for five minutes or more. - "New belt" means a belt which has been used for less than five minutes. 2. Loosen the center nut of the idler pulley (SANDEN), or the pivot bolt of the idler pulley bracket and the lock nut of the adjusting bolt (DENSO). 3. Turn the adjusting bolt to get proper belt tension. 4. Retighten the center nut of the idler pulley (SANDEN), or the pivot bolt of the idler pulley bracket and the lock nut of the adjusting bolt (DENSO). 5. Recheck the tension of the A/C compressor belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > A/C Compressor > Page 1822 Drive Belt: Adjustments Alternator Deflection Method: Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbf), and measure the deflection between the alternator and the crankshaft pulley. Deflection 8.0-10.5 mm (0.31-0.41 in) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the deflection should be 6.0 - 8.5 mm (0.26-0.33 in) when first measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the lower mounting nut and the upper mounting bolt. 2. Move the alternator to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the upper mounting bolt and the lower mounting nut to the specified torques. 3. Recheck the deflection of the belt. Belt Tension Gauge Method: Following the gauge manufacturer's instructions, attach the special tool to the belt, and measure the tension. Tension 340 - 490 N (35 - 50 kgf, 77 - 110 lbf) NOTE: On a brand-new belt (one that has been run for less than five minutes), the tension should be 540-740 N (55 - 75 kgf, 121 - 165 lbf) when first Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > A/C Compressor > Page 1823 measured. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace it. If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the lower mounting nut and the upper mounting bolt. 2. Move the alternator to obtain the proper belt tension, then retighten the upper mounting bolt and the lower mounting nut to the specified torques. 3. Recheck the tension of the belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Adjustments > A/C Compressor > Page 1824 Drive Belt: Adjustments Power Steering Pump Belt NOTE: When using a new belt, first adjust the deflection or tension to the values for the new belt, then readjust the deflection or tension to the values for the used belt after running engine for five minutes. Inspection Attach the special tool to the belt and measure the tension of the belt. Tension: '99-'00 models: B16A2 Engine Type only Used Belt: 390 - 540 N (40 - 55 kgf, 88 - 120 lbs.) New Belt: 740 - 880 N (75 - 90 kgf, 170 - 200 lbs.) '96-'00 models: Other Engine Types Used Belt: 340 - 490 N (35 - 50 kgf, 77 - 110 lbs.) New Belt: 640 - 780 N (65 - 80 kgf, 143 - 176 lbs.) NOTE: If there are cracks or any damage evident on the belt, replace it with a new one. - Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the tension gauge. Inspect the pump belt for cracks or any damage. Replace the belt with a new one if necessary. Measurement without Belt Tension Gauge: Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs.) and measure the deflection between the power steering pump and the crankshaft pulleys. Deflection: '99-'00 models: B16A2 Engine Type only Used Belt: 7.5 - 11.0 mm (0.30 - 0.43 inch) New Belt: 5.0 - 7.0 mm (0.20 - 0.28 inch) '96-'00 models: Other Engine Types Used Belt: 10.5 - 14.0 mm (0.41 - 0.55 inch) New Belt: 7.5 - 10.0 mm (0.30 - 0.39 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Accessory Bracket > Component Information > Specifications Engine Accessory Bracket: Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Accessory Bracket > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1828 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idler Pulley: > 00-003 > May > 00 > A/C Idler Pulley - Growling Noise at Idle Idler Pulley: Customer Interest A/C Idler Pulley - Growling Noise at Idle 00-003 May 9, 2000 Applies To: 1996 - 99 Civic - ALL 1996 - 97 del Sol ALL 1996 - 97 CR-V - ALL Growl From A/C Idler Pulley SYMPTOM A growl from the A/C idler pulley at, or just above, idle. PROBABLE CAUSE The A/C idler pulley bearing is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the A/C idler pulley. PARTS INFORMATION A/C Idler Pulley Kit (Civic CX, DX, LX, HX, EX; del Sol S, del Sol Si): P/N 38950P2K-305, H/C 6254742 A/C Idler Pulley Kit (Civic Si, del Sol VTEC, CR-V): P/N 38950-P3F-305, H/C 6334296 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the power steering belt 2. Remove the power steering pump, and set it aside with its hoses connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idler Pulley: > 00-003 > May > 00 > A/C Idler Pulley - Growling Noise at Idle > Page 1840 3. Loosen the idler pulley, then remove the belt and let it hang from the engine mount. 4. Remove the idler pulley assembly, then disassemble it and discard the pulley and parts shown. 5. Assemble the pulley with the parts from the appropriate kit listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 6. Reinstall the power steering pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idler Pulley: > 00-003 > May > 00 > A/C Idler Pulley - Growling Noise at Idle > Page 1841 7. Reinstall the belts, and adjust them to the tension specified in the appropriate service manual. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idler Pulley: > 00-003 > May > 00 > A/C Idler Pulley - Growling Noise at Idle Idler Pulley: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C Idler Pulley - Growling Noise at Idle 00-003 May 9, 2000 Applies To: 1996 - 99 Civic - ALL 1996 - 97 del Sol ALL 1996 - 97 CR-V - ALL Growl From A/C Idler Pulley SYMPTOM A growl from the A/C idler pulley at, or just above, idle. PROBABLE CAUSE The A/C idler pulley bearing is faulty. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the A/C idler pulley. PARTS INFORMATION A/C Idler Pulley Kit (Civic CX, DX, LX, HX, EX; del Sol S, del Sol Si): P/N 38950P2K-305, H/C 6254742 A/C Idler Pulley Kit (Civic Si, del Sol VTEC, CR-V): P/N 38950-P3F-305, H/C 6334296 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the power steering belt 2. Remove the power steering pump, and set it aside with its hoses connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idler Pulley: > 00-003 > May > 00 > A/C Idler Pulley - Growling Noise at Idle > Page 1847 3. Loosen the idler pulley, then remove the belt and let it hang from the engine mount. 4. Remove the idler pulley assembly, then disassemble it and discard the pulley and parts shown. 5. Assemble the pulley with the parts from the appropriate kit listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 6. Reinstall the power steering pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idler Pulley: > 00-003 > May > 00 > A/C Idler Pulley - Growling Noise at Idle > Page 1848 7. Reinstall the belts, and adjust them to the tension specified in the appropriate service manual. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1849 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications - Engine Oil Pressure: - At Idle: 69 kPa (10 psi) minimum - At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (50 psi) minimum Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1854 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is correct: 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and install an oil pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 4. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be: Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle: 69 kPa (0.7 kgf.cm, 10 psi) minimum At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (3.5 kgf.cm, 50 psi) minimum - If the oil pressure is within specifications, replace the oil pressure switch and recheck. - If the oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect the oil pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 96017 > Feb > 96 > Engine - Oil Dipstick Difficult to Remove Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Dipstick Difficult to Remove Bulletin No. 96-017 Issue Date Feb. 26, 1996 File Under Engine Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED Model 1996 CIVIC Engine Oil Dipstick Is Difficult to Remove SYMPTOM The engine oil dipstick is difficult to remove from its tube. PROBABLE CAUSE The two O-rings that seal the dipstick are too thick. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door and 4-door (Ohio-built): Thru VIN ......... TL017657 3-door (Canada-built): Thru VIN ......... TH115012 4-door (Canada-built): Thru VIN ......... TH503194 PARTS INFORMATION Oil level dipstick O-rings (2 per package): P/N 91312-S04-999, H/C 5028535 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 111103 Flat rate time: 0.2 hour Failed part: P/N 15650-P2F-A00 H/C 4802377 Defect code: 030 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 96-017A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 96017 > Feb > 96 > Engine - Oil Dipstick Difficult to Remove > Page 1863 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the dipstick O-rings with the ones listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 1. Pull the oil dipstick out of its tube, and wipe it clean with a shop towel. 2. Remove the O-rings with a seal pick, and discard them. 3. Clean the dipstick O-ring grooves with brake cleaner, then allow the dipstick to air-dry. 4. Roll the new O-rings into the grooves on the dipstick. 5. Insert and pull out the dipstick several times, making sure it fits snugly but moves smoothly in its tube. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 96017 > Feb > 96 > Engine - Oil Dipstick Difficult to Remove Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Dipstick Difficult to Remove Bulletin No. 96-017 Issue Date Feb. 26, 1996 File Under Engine Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED Model 1996 CIVIC Engine Oil Dipstick Is Difficult to Remove SYMPTOM The engine oil dipstick is difficult to remove from its tube. PROBABLE CAUSE The two O-rings that seal the dipstick are too thick. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door and 4-door (Ohio-built): Thru VIN ......... TL017657 3-door (Canada-built): Thru VIN ......... TH115012 4-door (Canada-built): Thru VIN ......... TH503194 PARTS INFORMATION Oil level dipstick O-rings (2 per package): P/N 91312-S04-999, H/C 5028535 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 111103 Flat rate time: 0.2 hour Failed part: P/N 15650-P2F-A00 H/C 4802377 Defect code: 030 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 96-017A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 96017 > Feb > 96 > Engine - Oil Dipstick Difficult to Remove > Page 1869 CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the dipstick O-rings with the ones listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 1. Pull the oil dipstick out of its tube, and wipe it clean with a shop towel. 2. Remove the O-rings with a seal pick, and discard them. 3. Clean the dipstick O-ring grooves with brake cleaner, then allow the dipstick to air-dry. 4. Roll the new O-rings into the grooves on the dipstick. 5. Insert and pull out the dipstick several times, making sure it fits snugly but moves smoothly in its tube. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Recommendation GF-4 Standard SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Use ONLY New GF-4 Standard Engine Oil APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: There's a new performance standard for engine oil: GF-4. It was jointly developed by automotive and oil experts, and it represents a significant performance upgrade and improvement in fuel economy. GF-4 engine oils must pass grueling tests totaling over 500 hours. On top of this, Honda Genuine engine oils are also tested to ensure specific compatibility with Honda vehicles. GF-4 engine oil is compatible with all current and earlier model year Honda cars and trucks. It also provides these added benefits: - Improved oxidation resistance (reduced thickening of the oil) - Improved deposit protection and better wear protection - Better low-temperature performance over the life of the oil - Environmental protection by extending the life of emissions systems While Honda has upgraded its engine oil to GF-4, other brands may not yet be at this new standard. Keep in mind you must use Honda Genuine engine oil for all warranty repairs. If you use some other brand of oil for non-warranty repairs, make sure that oil meets the GF-4 standard. We recommend you stop using non-GF-4 engine oils and check with your supplier that you're purchasing GF-4 oil. Engine oil produced after April 1, 2005, that meets the GF-4 standard, must post this starburst certification mark on the container. Always look for this mark; some oil container labels won't specifically refer to GF-4. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil For D16Y7 engine (1.6 L SOHC)Engine For Engine Overhaul ........................................................... .................................................................................................... 4.3 L (4.5 US qts. 3.8 Imp.qt) For Oil Change, Including Filter ........................................................................................................................................... 3.6 L (3.8 US qts. 3.2 Imp.qts) For D16Y5, D16Y8 (1.6 L VTEC DOHC)Engine For Engine Overhaul ............................................... ................................................................................................................ 3.7 L (3.9 US qts. 3.3 Imp.qt) For Oil Change, Including Filter ........................................................................................................................................... 3.3 L (3.5 US qts. 2.9 Imp.qts) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1876 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engien Oil New standard for engine oil, GF-4. See TSB SN050109 for Honda Service News 050109 for additional information. API Classification ................................................................................................................................. ................................ SH or SJ Energy Conserving II Viscosity ........................................................... ......................................................................................................... SAE 5W-30 (Preferred) SAE 10W-30 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1877 Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn off the engine. Allow the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan so the dipstick will show the actual level. 2. Make certain that the oil level indicated on the dipstick is between the upper and lower marks. 3. If the level has dropped close to the lower mark, add oil until it reaches the upper mark. CAUTION: Insert the dipstick carefully to avoid bending it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service Engine Oil: Service and Repair Oil and Filter Service ENGINE OIL Inspection 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn off the engine. Allow the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan so the dipstick will show the actual level. 2. Make certain that the oil level indicated on the dipstick is between the upper and lower marks. 3. If the level has dropped close to the lower mark, add oil until it reaches the upper mark. CAUTION: Insert the dipstick carefully to avoid bending it. Replacement CAUTION: Remove the drain bolt carefully while the engine is hot; the hot oil may cause scalding. 1. Warm up the engine. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1880 2. Drain the engine oil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1881 3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer, and refill the engine with the recommended oil. NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at every other oil change. Under severe conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil change. The numbers in the middle of the API Service label tell you the oil's SAE viscosity or weight. Select the oil for your car according to this chart: An oil with a viscosity of 5W - 30 is preferred for improved fuel economy and year-round protection in the car. You may use a 10W - 30 oil if the climate in your area is limited to the temperature range shown on the chart. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1882 4. Run the engine for more than three minutes, then check for oil leakage. OIL FILTER Replacement WARNING: After the engine has been run, the exhaust pipe will be hot; be careful when working around the exhaust pipe. - Be careful when loosening the drain bolt while the engine is hot. Burns can result because the oil temperature is very high. 1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the threads and rubber seal on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the new filter's rubber seal. NOTE: Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 3. Install the oil filter by hand. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1883 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the oil filter wrench. Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise. Tightening torque: 22 Nm (2.2 kgs.cm, 16 ft.lbs.) Use this procedure to tighten the filter if eight numbers (1 to 8) are printed on the surface of the filter. 1) Make a mark on the oil filter base under the number that shows at the bottom of the filter when the rubber seal is seated. 2) Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise seven numbers from the marked point. For example, if a mark is made under the number 2 when the rubber seal is seated, the filter should be tightened until the number 1 comes up to the marked point. CAUTION: Using any procedure other than those shown could result in serious engine damage due to oil leakage. 5. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than three minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1884 Engine Oil: Service and Repair Oil Service REPLACEMENT CAUTION: Remove the drain bolt carefully while the engine is hot; the hot oil may cause scalding. 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Drain the engine oil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1885 3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer, and refill the engine with the recommended oil. NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at every other oil change. Under severe conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil change. The numbers in the middle of the API Service label tell you the oil's SAE viscosity or weight. Select the oil for your car according to this chart: An oil with a viscosity of 5W - 30 is preferred for improved fuel economy and year-round protection in the car. You may use a 10W - 30 oil if the climate in your area is limited to the temperature range shown on the chart. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil and Filter Service > Page 1886 4. Run the engine for more than three minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Filter: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT WARNING: After the engine has been run, the exhaust pipe will be hot; be careful when working around the exhaust pipe. - Be careful when loosening the drain bolt while the engine is hot. Burns can result because the oil temperature is very high. 1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench. 2. Inspect the threads and rubber seal on the new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block, then apply a light coat of oil to the new filter's rubber seal. NOTE: Use only filters with a built-in bypass system. 3. Install the oil filter by hand. 4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the oil filter wrench. Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise. Tightening torque: 22 Nm (2.2 kgs.cm, 16 ft.lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1890 Use this procedure to tighten the filter if eight numbers (1 to 8) are printed on the surface of the filter. 1) Make a mark on the oil filter base under the number that shows at the bottom of the filter when the rubber seal is seated. 2) Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise seven numbers from the marked point. For example, if a mark is made under the number 2 when the rubber seal is seated, the filter should be tightened until the number 1 comes up to the marked point. CAUTION: Using any procedure other than those shown could result in serious engine damage due to oil leakage. 5. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than three minutes, then check for oil leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Pan: Service and Repair OIL PAN INSTALLATION B16A2, D16Y7 Engines: 1. Apply liquid gasket on the oil pump and right side cover mating areas as shown below. NOTE: Use liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003. - Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry before applying liquid gasket. - Apply liquid gasket as an even bead, centered between the edges of the mating surface. - To prevent oil leakage, apply liquid gasket to the inner threads of the bolt holes. - Do not install the parts if five minutes or more have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the old residue. - After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1894 2. Install the oil pan gasket and oil pan. NOTE: Use a new oil pan gasket. - Install the oil pan no more than five minutes after applying liquid gasket. 3. Tighten the bolts and nuts finger tight at six points as shown below. 4. Tighten all bolts and nuts, starting from nut (1), clock wise in three steps. NOTE: Excessive tightening can cause distortion of the oil pan gasket and oil leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1895 Torque: 12 Nm 11.2 kgs.cm, 8.7 ft.lbs.) D16Y5, D16Y8 Engines: 1. Install the oil pan gasket on the oil pan. 2. Apply liquid gasket to the block mating surfaces of the oil pan, then install it. Apply liquid gasket to the shaded areas. NOTE: Use liquid gasket part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003. - Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry before applying liquid gasket. - Apply liquid gasket as an even bead, centered between the edges of the mating surface. - To prevent leakage of oil, apply liquid gasket to the inner threads of the bolt holes. - Do not install the parts if five minutes or more have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the old residue. - After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil. 3. Tighten nuts finger-tight at six points as shown. 4. Tighten all bolts and nuts, starting from nut (1), clockwise in three steps. NOTE: Excessive tightening can cause distortion of the oil pan gasket and oil leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1896 Torque: 12 Nm (1.2 kgs.cm, 8.7 ft.lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1904 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1905 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1906 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1907 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1908 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1909 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1910 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1911 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1912 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1913 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1914 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1915 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1916 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1917 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1918 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1919 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1920 Oil Pressure Indicator Light Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications - Engine Oil Pressure: - At Idle: 69 kPa (10 psi) minimum - At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (50 psi) minimum Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1925 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is correct: 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and install an oil pressure gauge. 3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem before continuing. 4. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should be: Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (80°C) Engine Oil Pressure: At Idle: 69 kPa (0.7 kgf.cm, 10 psi) minimum At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (3.5 kgf.cm, 50 psi) minimum - If the oil pressure is within specifications, replace the oil pressure switch and recheck. - If the oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect the oil pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set Intake Manifold: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set 04-004 August 10, 2004 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord V6 - ALL 1996-00 Civic DX, LX - ALL 1999-00 Odyssey - ALL Rough Idle at Cold Start; MIL Comes On With DTC P0107 or P0108 (Supersedes 04-004, dated March 5, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09103 Skill Level: Repair Technician SYMPTOM In cold weather, the engine idles roughly after a cold start. The MIL may also come on with DTC P0107 (MAP sensor circuit low voltage) or DTC P0108 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture freezes inside the MAP sensor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the MAP sensor. For Japan-built Civics, also replace the intake manifold. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1934 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Accord V6; 1998-00 Civic DX, LX; Odyssey Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1935 1996-97 Civic DX, LX Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 81400 Symptom Code: K4900 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS *1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P data link connector (DLC).* 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 3. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the correct date and time. 4. From the System Selection Menu screen, select PGM FI. 5. From the Mode Menu screen, select DTCs/Freeze Data. 6. Enter the repair order number when prompted, then read the screen. Is DTC P0107 or P0108 set? Yes - Go to step 7. No - Go to step 8. 7. Press the freeze data (camera film strip) icon on the right side of the screen. Look at the IAT SENSOR value. Is the IAT value at or below 32°F (0°) (4.0 volts)? Yes - Press the red DTC icon on the right side of the screen to clear the DTC. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Go to the appropriate *REPAIR PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* 8. Find out from your customer the approximate ambient air temperature when the problem happened. Was the ambient air temperature at or below 32°F (0°C) when the problem happened? Yes - Go to the appropriate REPAIR * PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* *REPAIR PROCEDURE - ACCORD V6, ODYSSEY* NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1936 Discard the instructions that came with the kit they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 2. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 3. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 4. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1937 6. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. *7. Accord V6 only: Remove and discard the throttle body cover.* 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. * NOTE: For 1998-99 Accord V6 models, discard the sensor spacer from the kit, and use P/N 16442-P8F-A21, H/C 6562896, instead. Also, discard the adapter harness bracket from the kit. This bracket cannot be mounted to the spacer on those models.* 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. *10. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Install the adapter harness bracket on the sensor spacer (one flange bolt).* 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the MAP sensor. *13. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place.* *14. 1998-99 Accord V6 only: Use a wire tie to secure the engine harness 3P connector to any nearby vacuum hose. Make sure the connector and the harness do not interfere with the throttle cables and the wire tie does not pinch the vacuum hose.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1938 REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (U.S.-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 3. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the 3P connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 4. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1939 5. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. 7. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. 10. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 11. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1940 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 13. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 14. Clamp the engine harness in place. 15. Reinstall the air cleaner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (JAPAN-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual). Make sure you replace the fuel pressure regulator 0-ring and the seal rings and rubber rings for the fuel injectors. 3. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1941 4. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 5. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 6. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1942 8. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 9. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 10. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 9. 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 12. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1943 13. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 14. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 15. Clamp the engine harness in place. 16. Reinstall the air cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Intake Manifold: Customer Interest Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Intake Manifold: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 1948 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set Intake Manifold: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set 04-004 August 10, 2004 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord V6 - ALL 1996-00 Civic DX, LX - ALL 1999-00 Odyssey - ALL Rough Idle at Cold Start; MIL Comes On With DTC P0107 or P0108 (Supersedes 04-004, dated March 5, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09103 Skill Level: Repair Technician SYMPTOM In cold weather, the engine idles roughly after a cold start. The MIL may also come on with DTC P0107 (MAP sensor circuit low voltage) or DTC P0108 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture freezes inside the MAP sensor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the MAP sensor. For Japan-built Civics, also replace the intake manifold. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1954 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Accord V6; 1998-00 Civic DX, LX; Odyssey Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1955 1996-97 Civic DX, LX Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 81400 Symptom Code: K4900 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS *1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P data link connector (DLC).* 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 3. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the correct date and time. 4. From the System Selection Menu screen, select PGM FI. 5. From the Mode Menu screen, select DTCs/Freeze Data. 6. Enter the repair order number when prompted, then read the screen. Is DTC P0107 or P0108 set? Yes - Go to step 7. No - Go to step 8. 7. Press the freeze data (camera film strip) icon on the right side of the screen. Look at the IAT SENSOR value. Is the IAT value at or below 32°F (0°) (4.0 volts)? Yes - Press the red DTC icon on the right side of the screen to clear the DTC. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Go to the appropriate *REPAIR PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* 8. Find out from your customer the approximate ambient air temperature when the problem happened. Was the ambient air temperature at or below 32°F (0°C) when the problem happened? Yes - Go to the appropriate REPAIR * PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* *REPAIR PROCEDURE - ACCORD V6, ODYSSEY* NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1956 Discard the instructions that came with the kit they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 2. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 3. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 4. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1957 6. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. *7. Accord V6 only: Remove and discard the throttle body cover.* 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. * NOTE: For 1998-99 Accord V6 models, discard the sensor spacer from the kit, and use P/N 16442-P8F-A21, H/C 6562896, instead. Also, discard the adapter harness bracket from the kit. This bracket cannot be mounted to the spacer on those models.* 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. *10. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Install the adapter harness bracket on the sensor spacer (one flange bolt).* 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the MAP sensor. *13. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place.* *14. 1998-99 Accord V6 only: Use a wire tie to secure the engine harness 3P connector to any nearby vacuum hose. Make sure the connector and the harness do not interfere with the throttle cables and the wire tie does not pinch the vacuum hose.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1958 REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (U.S.-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 3. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the 3P connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 4. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1959 5. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. 7. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. 10. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 11. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1960 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 13. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 14. Clamp the engine harness in place. 15. Reinstall the air cleaner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (JAPAN-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual). Make sure you replace the fuel pressure regulator 0-ring and the seal rings and rubber rings for the fuel injectors. 3. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1961 4. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 5. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 6. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1962 8. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 9. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 10. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 9. 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 12. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 1963 13. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 14. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 15. Clamp the engine harness in place. 16. Reinstall the air cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Intake Manifold: All Technical Service Bulletins Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Intake Manifold: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 1968 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1969 Intake Manifold: Specifications For the Specifications for Intake Manifold, go to Engine/Specifications. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1970 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair NOTE: Use new O-rings and gaskets when reassembling. CAUTION: Check for folds or scratches on the surface of the gasket. - Replace with a new gasket if damaged. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1976 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1977 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1978 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1979 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1980 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1981 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1982 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1983 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1984 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1985 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1986 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1987 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1988 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1989 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1990 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1991 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1992 Oil Pressure Indicator Light Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Customer Interest Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks 01-040 August 14, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 2001 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED * Civic Rear Main Oil Seal Leaks (Supersedes 01-040, 1996-2001 Civic Rear Main Seal Leak, dated June 12, 2001) * Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The engine leaks oil between the block and the transmission. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear main oil seal (crankshaft oil seal) is contaminated. VEHICLES AFFECTED REQUIRED MATERIALS PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks > Page 2002 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91214-P7A-004 H/C 5618988 Defect Code: 051 Contention Code: B06 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. *DIAGNOSIS Clean the area with a shop towel where the engine block and transmission meet. Start the engine, and look for oil leakage from the area with the aid of a powdered leak detector. ^ If you see any signs of leakage, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you see no signs of leakage, then what looked like leakage may have been excess residue from a previous repair on another part. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission. Refer to section 13 or 14 of the appropriate service manual. 2. Remove and discard the rear main oil seal (crankshaft oil seal). 3. Install the new oil seal. Refer to page 7-29 of the '96-00 service manual or page 7-27 of the '01 service manual. 4. Reinstall the transmission. 5. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 6. Refill the transmission with the appropriate fluid. 7. 2001 models only Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed with all electrical items turned off) for 10 minutes. 8. 2001 2-door EX and LX models only Drive the vehicle above 40 mph for 5 to 10 minutes with the cruise control on. (This lets the cruise control actuator learn how much slack there is in the throttle cable.)* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks > Page 2003 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks 01-040 August 14, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 2001 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED * Civic Rear Main Oil Seal Leaks (Supersedes 01-040, 1996-2001 Civic Rear Main Seal Leak, dated June 12, 2001) * Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM The engine leaks oil between the block and the transmission. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear main oil seal (crankshaft oil seal) is contaminated. VEHICLES AFFECTED REQUIRED MATERIALS PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks > Page 2009 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 91214-P7A-004 H/C 5618988 Defect Code: 051 Contention Code: B06 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. *DIAGNOSIS Clean the area with a shop towel where the engine block and transmission meet. Start the engine, and look for oil leakage from the area with the aid of a powdered leak detector. ^ If you see any signs of leakage, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If you see no signs of leakage, then what looked like leakage may have been excess residue from a previous repair on another part. Continue with normal troubleshooting. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission. Refer to section 13 or 14 of the appropriate service manual. 2. Remove and discard the rear main oil seal (crankshaft oil seal). 3. Install the new oil seal. Refer to page 7-29 of the '96-00 service manual or page 7-27 of the '01 service manual. 4. Reinstall the transmission. 5. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. 6. Refill the transmission with the appropriate fluid. 7. 2001 models only Do the idle learn procedure: ^ Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.) are turned off, then start the engine. ^ Let the engine warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). ^ Let the engine idle (throttle fully closed with all electrical items turned off) for 10 minutes. 8. 2001 2-door EX and LX models only Drive the vehicle above 40 mph for 5 to 10 minutes with the cruise control on. (This lets the cruise control actuator learn how much slack there is in the throttle cable.)* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: > 01-040 > Aug > 01 > Engine Rear Main Oil Seal - Leaks > Page 2010 DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seals Installation Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Seals Installation NOTE: Engine removal is not required. - The crankshaft oil seal housing should be dry. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to the lips of the seals. Front Crankshaft Seal 1. Using the special tool, drive in the timing pulley end seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. Rear Crankshaft Seal 2. Measure the flywheel-end seal thickness and the oil seal housing depth. Using the special tool, drive the flywheel-end seal into the rear cover to the point where the clearance between the bottom of the oil seal and the right side cover is 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.02 - 0.03 inch). NOTE: Align the hole in the driver attachment with the pin on the crankshaft. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seals Installation > Page 2013 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Rear Main Seal Installation INSTALLATION The seal surface on the block should be dry. Apply a light coat of oil to the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 1. Drive the crankshaft oil seal squarely into the right side cover using the special tools. 2. Confirm that the clearance is equal all the way around with a feeler gauge. Clearance: 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.02 - 0.03 inch) NOTE: Refer to Front Crankshaft Seal / Service and Repair for installation of the oil pump side crankshaft oil seal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair NOTE: Engine removal is not required. - The crankshaft oil seal housing should be dry. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to the lips of the seals. Front Crankshaft Seal 1. Using the special tool, drive in the timing pulley end seal until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the crankshaft and check that the oil seal lip is not distorted. Rear Crankshaft Seal 2. Measure the flywheel-end seal thickness and the oil seal housing depth. Using the special tool, drive the flywheel-end seal into the rear cover to the point where the clearance between the bottom of the oil seal and the right side cover is 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.02 - 0.03 inch). NOTE: Align the hole in the driver attachment with the pin on the crankshaft. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair On Vehicle Service NOTE: Cylinder head removal is not required in this procedure. The procedure shown below applies when using the in-car valve spring compressor (Snap-on YA8845 with YA8845 - 2 A 7/8" attachment). WARNING: Always wear approved eye protection when using the in-car valve spring compressor. 1. Turn the crankshaft so that the No. 1 and the No. 4 pistons are at Top Dead Center (TDC). 2. Remove the cylinder head cover and the rocker arm assembly. NOTE: When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders, springs and rocker arms on the shaft. 3. Remove the fuel injectors and the wire harness. 4. Using the 8 mm bolts supplied with the tool, mount the two uprights to the cylinder head at the end camshaft holders. The uprights fit over the camshaft as shown. 5. Insert the cross shaft through the top hole of the two uprights. Intake Valve Seals: 6. Select the 7/8 inch diameter short compressor attachment, and fasten the attachment to the No. 4 hole of the lever arm with the speed pin supplied. 7. Insert an air adaptor into the spark plug hole. Pump air into the cylinder to keep the valve closed while compressing springs and removing the valve keepers. 8. Put shop towels over the oil passages to prevent the valve keepers from falling into the cylinder head. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 2021 9. Position the lever arm under the cross shaft so the lever is perpendicular to the shaft and the compressor attachment rests on top of the retainer for the spring being compressed. Use the front position slot on the lever as shown. 10. Using a downward motion on the lever arm, compress the valve spring and remove the keepers from the valve stem. Slowly release pressure on the spring. 11. Remove the valve seals. 12. Install the valve seals. 13. Install the springs, the retainers and the keepers in reverse order of removal. Exhaust Valve Seals: 14. Select the 7/8 inch diameter short compressor attachment, and fasten the attachment to the No. 2 hole of the lever arm with the speed pin supplied. 15. Position the lever arm under the cross shaft so the lever is perpendicular to the shaft and the compressor attachment rests on top of the retainer for the spring being compressed. Use the front position slot on the lever as shown. 16. Using a downward motion on the lever arm, compress the valve spring and remove the keepers from the valve stem. Slowly release pressure on the spring. 17. Remove the valve seals. 18. Install the valve seals. 19. Install the springs, the retainers and the keepers in reverse order of removal. 20. Repeat steps 6 to 19 on the other cylinders. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 2022 Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Disassembly NOTE: Identify valves and valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original position. 1. Using an appropriate-sized socket and plastic mallet, lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen the valve keepers before installing the valve spring compressor. 2. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring and remove the valve keeper. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 2023 3. Install the valve guide seal remover. 4. Remove the valve seal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 2024 Valve Dimensions Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 2025 Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Assembly VALVES, VALVE SPRINGS AND VALVE SEALS INSTALLATION 1. Coat valve stems with engine oil. Insert the valves in the valve guides. NOTE: Make sure the valves move up and down smoothly. 2. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head. 3. Install the valve seals using the valve guide seal installer. NOTE: Exhaust and intake valve seals are not interchangeable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > On Vehicle Service > Page 2026 4. Install the valve spring and valve retainer, then install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and install the valve keepers. NOTE: Place the end of the valve spring with closely wound coils toward the cylinder head. 5. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mallet to ensure proper seating of the valve and valve keepers. NOTE: Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the stem. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Timing Belt: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine - Timing Belt Noise Timing Belt: Customer Interest Engine - Timing Belt Noise Bulletin No. 96-057 Issue Date OCT 28, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To ALL File Under ENGINE Timing Belt Noise SYMPTOM A whine or chirping noise can be heard coming from the front of the engine at idle or just above idle. PROBABLE CAUSE The timing belt is tensioned too tight. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the timing belt tension according to the procedure given in this service bulletin. NOTE: This procedure applies only to 1996 Civics. The procedure in the service manual should be used for all other years. 1. Start the engine. Let it run until it is warmed up (the cooling fan cycles on and off twice). 2. Turn off the engine. Connect the PGM tester and monitor the coolant temperature. Let the coolant cool down to 135°F (57°C). (This should take about an hour in an ambient temperature of about 75°F.) 3. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise until either the No. 1 or No. 4 piston is at TDC. 4. Remove the plug for the timing belt tensioner bolt. 5. Loosen the timing belt tensioner bolt 1/2 turn. Then torque the bolt to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). 6. Install the plug. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 110371 Flat rate time: 0.3 hour Failed part: P/N 14400-P2E-004 H/C 4837357 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-057A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Timing Belt: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine - Timing Belt Noise > Page 2040 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Timing Belt: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine Timing Belt Noise Timing Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Timing Belt Noise Bulletin No. 96-057 Issue Date OCT 28, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To ALL File Under ENGINE Timing Belt Noise SYMPTOM A whine or chirping noise can be heard coming from the front of the engine at idle or just above idle. PROBABLE CAUSE The timing belt is tensioned too tight. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the timing belt tension according to the procedure given in this service bulletin. NOTE: This procedure applies only to 1996 Civics. The procedure in the service manual should be used for all other years. 1. Start the engine. Let it run until it is warmed up (the cooling fan cycles on and off twice). 2. Turn off the engine. Connect the PGM tester and monitor the coolant temperature. Let the coolant cool down to 135°F (57°C). (This should take about an hour in an ambient temperature of about 75°F.) 3. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise until either the No. 1 or No. 4 piston is at TDC. 4. Remove the plug for the timing belt tensioner bolt. 5. Loosen the timing belt tensioner bolt 1/2 turn. Then torque the bolt to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). 6. Install the plug. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 110371 Flat rate time: 0.3 hour Failed part: P/N 14400-P2E-004 H/C 4837357 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-057A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Timing Belt: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine Timing Belt Noise > Page 2046 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2047 Timing Belt: Diagrams NOTE: Refer to Service and Repair / Removal and Installation for procedure to position the crankshaft and pulley before installing the belt. - Mark the direction of rotation on the belt before removing. - Do not use the upper cover and lower cover for storing removed items. - Clean the upper cover and lower cover before installing. - Replace the camshaft seals and crankshaft seals if there is oil leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Timing Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation REMOVAL NOTE: Replace the timing belt at 105,000 miles (168,000 km) according to the maintenance schedule (normal conditions/severe conditions). If the vehicle is regularly driven in one or more of the following conditions, replace the timing belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.A.) 100,000 km (Canada). In very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C). - In very low temperatures (under -20°F, -29°C). - Turn the crankshaft pulley so the No. 1 piston is at Top Dead Center (TDC) before removing the belt. - Inspect the water pump before installing the timing belt. 1. Remove the splash shield. 2. Loosen the mounting bolt and lock bolt, then remove the Power Steering (P/S) pump belt and pump. 3. Loosen the idler pulley center nut and adjusting bolt, then remove the Air conditioning (A/C) compressor belt. 4. Loosen the mounting nut and lock bolt, then remove the alternator belt. 5. Remove the dipstick, then remove the upper cover and idler pulley bracket. NOTE: Do not use the upper cover to store removed items. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2050 6. Remove the upper bracket. NOTE: Use a jack to support the engine before the upper bracket is removed. - Make sure to place a cushion between the oil pan and the jack. 7. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 8. Remove the lower cover and dipstick tube. NOTE: Do not use the lower cover to store removed items. 9. Remove the CKF sensor from the oil pump. 10. Loosen the adjusting bolt 180°. Push the tensioner to remove tension from the timing belt, then retighten the adjusting bolt. 11. Remove the timing belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2051 INSTALLATION Install the timing belt in the reverse order of removal; Only key points are described here. 1. Set the timing belt drive pulley so that the No. 1 piston is at Top Dead Center (TDC). Align the groove on the timing belt drive pulley to the pointer on the oil pump. 2. Set the camshaft pulley to TDC. Align the TDC marks on the camshaft pulley to the cylinder head surface. 3. Install the timing belt tightly in the sequence shown. (1) Timing belt drive pulley (crankshaft) -> (2) Adjusting pulley -> (3) Water pump pulley -> (4) Camshaft pulley. NOTE: Make sure the timing belt drive pulley and camshaft pulley are at TDC. 4. Loosen and retighten the adjusting bolt to tension the timing belt. 5. Install the lower cover and upper cover. NOTE: Clean the upper and lower covers before installation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2052 6. Install the crankshaft pulley, then tighten the pulley bolt. 7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns counterclockwise so that the timing belt positions on the pulleys. 8. Adjust the timing belt tension. 9. Check that the crankshaft pulley and camshaft pulley are both at TDC. 10. If the camshaft and crankshaft pulleys are not positioned at TDC, remove the timing belt and adjust the position. Then reinstall the timing belt. 11. After installation, adjust the tension of each belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2053 Timing Belt: Service and Repair Inspection INSPECTION 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the upper cover. 3. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant soaking. NOTE: Replace the belt if oil or coolant soaked. - Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the belt. 4. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt. TENSION ADJUSTMENT CAUTION: Always adjust the timing belt tension with the engine cold. NOTE: - The tensioner is spring-loaded to apply tension to the belt automatically after making the following adjustment. - Always rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise when viewed from the pulley side. Rotating it clockwise may result in improper adjustment of the belt tension. - Inspect the timing belt before adjusting the belt tension. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the upper cover. 3. Rotate the crankshaft five or six revolutions to set the belt. 4. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2054 5. Loosen the adjusting bolt 180°. 6. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise three teeth on the camshaft pulley. 7. Tighten the adjusting bolt. 8. After inspecting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Timing Belt Tensioner: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine - Timing Belt Noise Timing Belt Tensioner: Customer Interest Engine - Timing Belt Noise Bulletin No. 96-057 Issue Date OCT 28, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To ALL File Under ENGINE Timing Belt Noise SYMPTOM A whine or chirping noise can be heard coming from the front of the engine at idle or just above idle. PROBABLE CAUSE The timing belt is tensioned too tight. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the timing belt tension according to the procedure given in this service bulletin. NOTE: This procedure applies only to 1996 Civics. The procedure in the service manual should be used for all other years. 1. Start the engine. Let it run until it is warmed up (the cooling fan cycles on and off twice). 2. Turn off the engine. Connect the PGM tester and monitor the coolant temperature. Let the coolant cool down to 135°F (57°C). (This should take about an hour in an ambient temperature of about 75°F.) 3. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise until either the No. 1 or No. 4 piston is at TDC. 4. Remove the plug for the timing belt tensioner bolt. 5. Loosen the timing belt tensioner bolt 1/2 turn. Then torque the bolt to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). 6. Install the plug. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 110371 Flat rate time: 0.3 hour Failed part: P/N 14400-P2E-004 H/C 4837357 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-057A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Timing Belt Tensioner: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine - Timing Belt Noise > Page 2063 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Timing Belt Tensioner: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine - Timing Belt Noise Timing Belt Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Timing Belt Noise Bulletin No. 96-057 Issue Date OCT 28, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To ALL File Under ENGINE Timing Belt Noise SYMPTOM A whine or chirping noise can be heard coming from the front of the engine at idle or just above idle. PROBABLE CAUSE The timing belt is tensioned too tight. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the timing belt tension according to the procedure given in this service bulletin. NOTE: This procedure applies only to 1996 Civics. The procedure in the service manual should be used for all other years. 1. Start the engine. Let it run until it is warmed up (the cooling fan cycles on and off twice). 2. Turn off the engine. Connect the PGM tester and monitor the coolant temperature. Let the coolant cool down to 135°F (57°C). (This should take about an hour in an ambient temperature of about 75°F.) 3. Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise until either the No. 1 or No. 4 piston is at TDC. 4. Remove the plug for the timing belt tensioner bolt. 5. Loosen the timing belt tensioner bolt 1/2 turn. Then torque the bolt to 44 N.m (33 lb-ft). 6. Install the plug. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 110371 Flat rate time: 0.3 hour Failed part: P/N 14400-P2E-004 H/C 4837357 Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-057A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Timing Belt Tensioner: > 96-057 > Oct > 96 > Engine - Timing Belt Noise > Page 2069 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2070 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2079 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2080 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2081 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2082 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2083 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2084 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2085 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2086 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2087 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2088 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2089 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2090 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2091 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2092 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2093 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2094 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch <--> [Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch] > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch <--> [Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch] > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 > Page 2099 Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC Pressure Switch - 2 Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Specifications Resistance ........................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 14 - 30 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2104 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Mechanical Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Solenoid Valve - 1 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations VTEC Solenoid Valve - 1 Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Solenoid Valve - 1 > Page 2107 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations VTEC Solenoid Valve - 2 Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2108 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the VTEC solenoid valve. 2. Measure resistance between the terminal and body ground. Resistance: 14 - 30 ohms 3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve assembly from the cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter for clogging. - If there is clogging, replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 2109 4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. - If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the engine oil pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts Fuel Pressure: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts 97-020 MAR 10, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts New Gauge The fuel pressure gauge with 10" hose (T/N 07406-0040001) has been discontinued. The gauge that replaces it (T/N 07406-004000A) has an easier-to-read face, a protective boot around the gauge housing, and a 48" hose. Replacement Parts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts > Page 2115 The replacement hose for the old gauge (24", T/N 07406-004020A) has also been discontinued. If you need a replacement hose, order the new 48" hose (T/N 07406-004020B). The new hose comes with an adapter so you can use it with the old fuel pressure gauge (T/N 07406-0040001). Before connecting the hose to the vehicle, make sure the aluminum washer on the end of the hose seals properly. If the aluminum washer doesn't seal, replace the washer. Replacement washers come in a set of five (T/N 07406-0040300). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2116 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Condition: engine idling, regulator vacuum hose disconnected Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kg/Sq.cm; 38 - 46 psi) Condition: engine idling, regulator vacuum hose connected Pressure should be: 200 - 250 kPa (2.0 - 2.5 kg/Sq.cm; 28 - 36 psi) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2117 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the service bolt on the fuel filter while holding the banjo bolt with another wrench. Attach the special tool. 3. Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure with the engine idling and the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator disconnected from the fuel pressure regulator and pinched. If the engine will not start, turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait for two seconds, turn it off, then back on again and read the fuel pressure. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kg/Sq.cm, 38 - 46 psi) 4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Pressure should be: 200 - 250 kPa (2.0 - 2.5 kg/Sq.cm, 28 - 36 psi) If the fuel pressure is not as specified, first check the fuel pump. If the fuel pump is OK, check the following: If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, Inspect for: Pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect for: Clogged fuel filter. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - Fuel line leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester Idle Speed: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester 03-016 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord -ALL 1996-00 Civic -ALL 1997-01 CR-V - ALL 1997-01 Prelude - ALL *1999-04 Odyssey - ALL* Inspecting Idle Speed With the PGM Tester or Honda Diagnostic System (Supersedes 03-016, dated March 25, 2003, to update the information marked by asterisks) BACKGROUND The ECM/PCM controls the vehicle's idle speed with the idle air control (IAC) valve. The IAC valve and the air bleed screw (idle adjusting screw) work together to allow the proper amount of air into the intake manifold when the throttle valve is closed (the accelerator pedal is released). The ECM/PCM "learns" to work the IAC valve based on the total amount of air entering the intake manifold. Air can enter the intake manifold from several sources, including the air bleed screw, but only the air bleed screw is adjustable. If any changes are made that alter this airflow, specifically with the air bleed screw, the ECM/PCM must learn new idle parameters. When the air bleed screw is properly set, the ECM/PCM controls the engine's idle speed seamlessly. But when the air bleed screw is not properly set, either of these symptoms may be present: ^ Idle speed dips and then quickly recovers. ^ Engine stalls intermittently when it is just "off-idle." Here are the criteria for this symptom: - The accelerator pedal is released but the driver's right foot rests over the pedal, causing just enough pressure for the ECM/PCM to detect an input, yet there is little or no throttle valve opening (the throttle valve is either not allowing any airflow or it is opened so slightly that more air supply is needed). - The engine speed is about 1,250 rpm or less. - The lockup clutch (A/T models) or the clutch (M/T models) is disengaged. - All during this time, the driver's foot does not move and stays resting over the accelerator pedal. - The air bleed screw is not set properly and does not allow enough airflow. - The amount of "air leakage" into the intake manifold is very low. (The normal amount of air let into the intake manifold by sources other than the IAC valve, the air bleed screw, and normal operation of the throttle body can vary slightly from vehicle to vehicle.) NOTE: "Air leakage" cannot be easily checked. If the first four criteria are met when the vehicle stalls, you can assume the last two criteria are met as well. CORRECTIVE ACTION L4 Models and 1999-00 Odyssey: Inspect the idle speed with the PGM Tester or Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) (see INSPECTION PROCEDURE A). V6 Models except 1999-00 Odyssey: Inspect the idle speed with the PGM Tester or HDS, and clean out the throttle body if needed (see INSPECTION PROCEDURE B). PARTS INFORMATION Throttle Body Gasket (use only if needed): Refer to the parts catalog. TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 2122 PGM Tester with SN 320 or Honda Diagnostic System with 1.006.004 or later software REQUIRED MATERIALS Carburetor Cleaner: P/N 08732-0006, H/C 4713673 or Throttle Plate and Induction Cleaner: P/N 08732-9009, H/C 6204945 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Inspect Idle Speed (L4 and V6 Models) Operation Number: 120301 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 16400-PAA-A61 H/C 5429006 *Defect Code: 07403 Symptom Code: 08901* Skill Level: Repair Technician Clean Throttle Body (V6 Models Except 1999-00 Odyssey) Operation Number: 216001 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 16400-PAA-A61 H/C 5429006 *Defect Code: 08103 Symptom Code: 08901* Skill Level: Repair Technician NOTE: Warranty claims for these labor operations must be submitted separately. Do not combine them on the same claim. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE A 1. Access the air bleed screw on the throttle body. 2. Record the current setting of the screw: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 2123 ^ Turn the screw clockwise, and count the number of turns (both full and partial) it takes to fully seat the screw. ^ Turn the screw counterclockwise back to its original setting. ^ Subtract the number of clockwise turns it took to seat the screw from 3-1/2. Record that number. Example: If it took two full turns to seat the screw, subtracting 3-1/2 from that gives you 1-1/2. 3. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). 4. Turn off all electrical items (A/C, audio unit defogger, lights, etc.). Center the steering wheel so there is no power steering load. 5. Connect the PGM Tester or HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn on the PGM Tester or HDS. Enter the VIN and odometer reading. 7. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester or HDS to get to DATA LIST. Scroll down the list to IAC. 8. While watching the IAC counts on the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw (either counterclockwise or clockwise) until the IAC count reaches 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey) or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. (Count the number of counterclockwise turns you have made, and add that number to the screw setting you recorded in step 2.) ^ If you see an IAC count of 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey), turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 9. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey), and you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns, leave the screw set where it is. Go to step 9. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 9. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes to allow the ECM/PCM to learn the new idle parameters. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Turn off and disconnect the PGM Tester or HDS. INSPECTION PROCEDURE B 1. Access the air bleed screw on the throttle body. 2. Record the current setting of the screw: ^ Turn the screw clockwise, and count the number of turns (both full and partial) it takes to fully seat the screw. ^ Turn the screw counterclockwise back to its original setting. ^ Subtract the number of clockwise turns it took to seat the screw from 3-1/2. Record that number. Example: If it took two full turns to seat the screw, subtracting 3-1/2 from that gives you 1-1/2. 3. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). 4. Turn off all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.). Center the steering wheel so there is no power steering load. 5. Connect the PGM Tester or HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn on the PGM Tester or HDS. Enter the VIN and odometer reading. 7. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester or HDS to get to DATA LIST. Scroll down the list to IAC. 8. While watching the IAC counts on the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw (either counterclockwise or clockwise) until the IAC count reaches 7 or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. (Count the number of counterclockwise turns you have made, and add that number to the screw setting you recorded in step 2.) ^ If you see an IAC count of 7, turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 14. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 7, and you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns, leave the screw set where it is. Go to step 9. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Remove the throttle body (see the Fuel and Emissions section of the appropriate service manual). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 2124 10. Open the throttle. Spray carburetor cleaner or throttle plate and induction cleaner into the throttle body to clean out any contaminants. Make sure you spray the cleaner through the back of the throttle body not the front, to avoid damaging the IAC valve. 11. Inspect the throttle body gasket, and replace it if needed. Reinstall the throttle body, making sure all cables are properly adjusted, the accelerator pedal works properly, and all hoses and cables are correctly routed. 12. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature. Make sure all electrical items are turned off and the steering wheel is centered. 13. While watching the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw until the IAC count reaches 7 or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. ^ If you see an IAC count of 7, turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 14. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 7, leave the screw set at 3-1/2 turns. Go to step 14. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 14. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes to allow the ECM/PCM to learn the new idle parameters. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Turn off and disconnect the PGM Tester or HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Manual Transmission Idle Speed: Specifications Manual Transmission Base Idle Speed .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 450 ± 50 rpm Controlled Idle Speed USA ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 670 ± 50 rpm Canada ...................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm With Headlights On Low ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 750 ± 50 rpm With fan switch on HI and A/C On ....................................................................................................... ............................................................ 850 ± 50 rpm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Manual Transmission > Page 2127 Idle Speed: Specifications Automatic Transmission Controlled Idle Speed USA ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 700 ± 50 rpm Canada ...................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm With fan switch on HI and A/C On ....................................................................................................... ............................................................ 810 ± 50 rpm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With A/T Adjust the idle speed using a Honda PGM Tester if possible. If not, use the following procedure: NOTE: - Leave the IAC valve connected. - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: USA: D16Y5 engine with CVT, D16Y7 engine with A/T, D16YS engine with A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) D16Y7 engine with M/T: 670 ± 50 rpm Canada: D16Y8 engine, D16Y7 engine: M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 4. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn clockwise or counterclockwise. 5. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn, check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn again. NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more than 1/2-turn without checking the idle speed. 6. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T 810 ± 50 rpm A/T,CVT 810 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air conditioner is on. - If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 2130 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With CVT Adjust the idle speed using a Honda PGM Tester if possible. If not, use the following procedure: NOTE: - Leave the IAC valve connected. - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: USA: D16Y5 engine with CVT and D16Y7 engine with A/T and D16Y8 engine with A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) D16Y7 engine with M/T: 670 ± 50 rpm Canada: D16Y8 engine, D16Y7 engine: 750 ± 50 rpm 4. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn clockwise or counterclockwise. 5. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn, check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn again. NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more than 1/2-turn without checking the idle speed. 6. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be (all): 810 ± 50 rpm NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air conditioner is on. - If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 2131 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With M/T NOTE: - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (transmission in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Disconnect the IAC valve connector. 4. If the engine stalls, restart the engine with the accelerator pedal slightly depressed. Stabilize the rpm at 1,000, then slowly release the pedal until the engine idles. 5. Check idling in no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: 450 ± 50 rpm Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw. NOTE: After adjusting the idle speed in this step, recheck the ignition timing. If it is out of spec, go back to step 4. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Reconnect the 2P connector on the IAC valve, then do the ECM reset procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 2132 8. Restart and idle the engine with no-load conditions for one minute, then check the idle speed. NOTE: (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. Idle speed should be: (USA): 670 ± 50 rpm (Canada): 750 ± 50 rpm 9. Idle the engine for one minute with headlights (Low) ON, and check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: 750 ± 50 rpm 10. Turn the headlights off. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: 810 ± 50 rpm NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC, 1.6L DOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC Air Cleaner (ACL) NOTE: Do not clean the ACL element it with compressed air (except dry type). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Relieving Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 6 mm service bolt on top of the fuel filter. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 6 mm service bolt at the fuel filter while holding the special banjo bolt with another wrench. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 6 mm service bolt. 6. Slowly loosen the 6 mm service bolt one complete turn. NOTE: A fuel pressure gauge can be attached at the 6 mm service bolt hole. - Always replace the washer between the service bolt and the special banjo bolt whenever the service bolt is loosened. - Replace all washers whenever the bolts are removed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Ignition Timing Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Cable: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2155 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2156 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2157 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2158 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2159 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2160 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2161 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2162 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2163 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2164 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2165 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2166 Ignition Cable: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2167 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2168 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2169 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2170 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2171 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might break them inside. 1. Check the condition of the ignition wire terminals. If any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken or distorted, replace the ignition wire. 2. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance. 3. If resistance exceeds 25 K Ohm, replace the ignition wire. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Distributor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2180 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2181 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2182 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Distributor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2188 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2189 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2190 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2191 Distributor: Locations Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Distributor: Exploded Views HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 2194 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2195 Distributor: Service and Repair Removal: 1. Disconnect the connector from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the distributor ignition (DI) cap. 3. Remove the mounting bolts from the distributor, then remove the distributor from the cylinder head. Installation: NOTE: Before you install the distributor, bring the No.1 piston to compression stroke TDC. 1. Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, then install it. 2. Slip the distributor into position. NOTE: The lug on the end of the distributor and its mating grooves in the camshaft end are both offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the distributor 180° out of time. 3. Install the mounting bolts, and tighten them lightly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2196 4. Connect the ignition wires to the distributor ignition (DI) cap as shown. 5. Connect the connector to the distributor. 6. Set the ignition timing. 7. After setting the ignition timing, tighten the mounting bolts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator for: Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too low - Insufficient cooling Fouled plugs may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too high - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coil or ignition wires 2. D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engine: - Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool, and replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2200 3. B16A2 engine: - Do not adjust the gap of a platinum tip plug: replace the spark plug if the center electrode is rounded or if the gap is not within the specifications. NOTE: Use only the spark plugs listed. 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kg.m, 13 lb.ft). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Check compression with engine at normal operating temperature and throttle in wide open position. Prior to performing test, disable ignition and fuel injection to prevent fuel from being sprayed into cylinders while cranking engine. Ensure is fully charged and that cranking speed is 250 RPM. Standard reading should be 135-184 psi. The maximum variation between cylinders is 28 psi. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... .......................................... 0.007-0.009 inches Exhaust ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 0.009-0.011 inches Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2207 Valve Clearance: Adjustments NOTE: Valves should be adjusted only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). - After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the upper cover. 3. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark on the cam-shaft pulley should be at top, and the TDC marks should align with the cylinder head surface. 4. Adjust valves on No. 1 cylinder. Intake: 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust: 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2208 5. Loosen the locknut, and turn the adjustment screw until the feeler gauge slides back and forth with a slight amount of drag. 6. Tighten the locknut, and check the clearance again. Repeat the adjustment if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 2209 7. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark should be on the exhaust side. Adjust valves on No. 3 cylinder. 8. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. Both TDC grooves are once again visible. Adjust valves on No. 4 cylinder. 9. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark should be on the intake side. Adjust valves on No. 2 cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams Water Pump: Diagrams NOTE: Use new O-rings when reassembling. - Use liquid gasket, Part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2213 Water Pump: Service and Repair INSPECTION 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. Check that it turns freely. 3. Check for signs of seal leakage. NOTE: A small amount of "weeping" from the bleed hole is normal. REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the timing belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2214 2. Remove the water pump by removing five bolts. NOTE: Inspect, repair and clean the O-ring groove and mating surface with the cylinder block. 3. Install the water pump in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Keep the O-ring in position when installing. - Clean the spilled engine coolant. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Coolant Capacity, Quarts: Man. Transmission .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................... 4.4 Auto. Transmission ................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. 4.5 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2220 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Coolant/Anti-freeze Ethylene Glycol Based Coolant Concentration Minimum 50 % Maximum 60 % Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2221 Coolant: Service and Repair CAUTION: When pouring engine coolant, be sure to shut the relay box lid and not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the paint. If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately. 1. Slide the heater temperature control lever to maximum heat. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch. 2. Remove the radiator cap. 3. Loosen the drain plug, and drain the coolant. 4. Remove the drain bolt from the cylinder block. 5. Apply liquid gasket to the drain bolt threads, then reinstall the bolt with a new washer and tighten it securely. 6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2222 7. Remove, drain and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the tank halfway to the MAX mark with water, then up to the MAX mark with antifreeze. 8. Mix the recommended antifreeze with an equal amount of water in a clean container. NOTE: Use only genuine Honda antifreeze/coolant. - For best corrosion protection, the coolant concentration must be maintained year-round at 50% minimum. Coolant concentrations less than 50% may not provide sufficient protection against corrosion or freezing. - Coolant concentrations greater than 60% will impair cooling efficiency and are not recommended. CAUTION: Do not mix different brands of antifreeze/coolants. - Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products; they may not be compatible with the coolant. Engine Coolant Refill Capacity [including reservoir (0.4 (0.42 US quart. 0.35 Imp quart))]. 9. Pour coolant into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck, and install the radiator cap loosely. 10. Start the engine and let it run until it warms up (the radiator fan comes on at least twice). 11. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator, add coolant if needed. 12. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again and check for leaks. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations Lower Right Front of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2229 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2230 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2231 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2232 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2233 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2234 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2235 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2236 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2237 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2238 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2239 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2240 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2241 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2242 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2243 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2244 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2245 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Electrical Diagrams Fans (Part 1 of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2246 Fans (Part 2 of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2247 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation Radiator Fan Voltage is provided at all times to the radiator fan relay (contacts) through fuse 57. With the ignition switch in ON (II), voltage is provided to the coil of the relay through fuse 17. The radiator fan relay can be grounded through either the engine coolant temperature switch or the engine control module (ECM) or Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The engine coolant temperature switch grounds the radiator fan relay (coil) when the engine coolant temperature exceeds 199 °F (83 °C). The switch opens when coolant temperature decreases 3 ° - 8 °C. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2248 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect electrical connector to fan motor. 2. Connect battery voltage across motor terminals using suitable jumper wires. 3. If fan fails to operate, motor is defective. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2252 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 Radiator fan relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Fan Controls Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2256 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Removing the ECT switch while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the ECT switch. NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the ECT switch. 1 Remove the ECT switch from the thermostat housing. 2. Suspend the ECT switch in a container of water as shown. 3. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a thermometer. CAUTION: Do not let the thermometer touch the bottom of the hot container. 4. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Right Side of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2264 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Fan Controls Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2268 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Removing the ECT switch while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the ECT switch. NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the ECT switch. 1 Remove the ECT switch from the thermostat housing. 2. Suspend the ECT switch in a container of water as shown. 3. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a thermometer. CAUTION: Do not let the thermometer touch the bottom of the hot container. 4. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Blows Cold Air; A/C Blows Warm Air NOTE: This article applies to all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose (P/N 95005-35008-10M, H/C 2325058), and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air > Page 2277 Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air APPLIES TO: all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C ? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2278 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Locations Heater Core: Locations 96-98 Models SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Defroster-activated A/C System Turning the defroster on activates the A/C and sets the air flow mode to FRESH. It is possible to turn the A/C off or to change the air flow to RECIRCULATE by pressing the A/C button or the FRESH/RECIRCULATE button. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Heater Core: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2284 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2285 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2286 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2287 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2288 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2289 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2290 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2291 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2292 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2293 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2294 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2295 Heater Core: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2296 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2297 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2298 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2299 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2300 Heater Core: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable, then drain cooling system. 3. Snap open cable clip, then disconnect heater valve cable from heater valve. 4. Disconnect heater hoses at heater, then remove heater unit mounting nut from engine compartment side. 5. Remove instrument panel. 6. Remove heat duct or evaporator and steering column bracket. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2301 7. Remove clip, heater mounting nuts and heater assembly. Fig. 16 Heater Core Removal Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2302 8. Remove heater core cover attaching screws, then the cover, Fig. 16. 9. Remove pipe clamp and damper arm attaching screws. 10. Pull heater core from heater housing. Ensure care is taken not to bend inlet and outlet pipes during removal. 11. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: a. Do not interchange inlet and outlet hoses. b. Connect all cables and ensure they are properly adjusted. 12. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 13. After refilling cooling system, bleed cooling system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Locations > Page 2307 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation When the ignition switch is in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 25 to the gauges in the gauge assembly. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge The engine coolant temperature gauge has two intersecting coils wound around a permanent magnet rotor. Voltage applied to the coils, through fuse 25, generates a magnetic field. The magnetic field, controlled by the coolant temperature sending unit, causes the rotor to rotate and the gauge needle to move. As the resistance in the sending unit varies, current through the gauge coils changes. The gauge needle moves toward the coil with the strongest magnetic field. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Locations > Page 2308 Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection 1. Check No. 15 (10A) fuse in under dash fuse/relay box before testing. Fig. 1 Engine Coolant Temperature Unit 2. Ensure ignition switch is in Off position, then disconnect yellow/green wire from coolant temperature sending unit, Fig. 1, and ground it with a jumper wire. 3. Turn ignition switch to On position. 4. Check as needle of coolant temperature gauge starts moving toward H mark. Turn ignition switch to Off position before pointer reaches H mark on gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage gauge. 5. If pointer of gauge does not move, check the following: a. Blown fuse in under dash fuse/relay box. b. Open in yellow/green wire, yellow or red wire. c. If fuse and wiring are satisfactory, replace coolant temperature gauge. 6. If gauge is satisfactory, inspect sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Radiator: Testing and Inspection 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine coolant to the top of the filler neck. 2. Attach the pressure tester to the radiator and apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa (0.95 - 1.25 kgf.cm, 14 - 18 psi). 3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure. 4. Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap. NOTE: Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2312 Radiator: Service and Repair 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses, and ATF cooler hoses. 3. Disconnect the fan motor connector. 4. Remove the radiator upper bracket, then pull up the radiator. 5. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from the radiator. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal: NOTE: Set the upper and lower cushions securely. - Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Specifications Radiator Cap: Specifications Radiator Cap Pressure Relief .............................................................................................................. .................................................................... 14-18 psi Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2316 Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the radiator cap, wet its seal with engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester. 2. Apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa (0.95 - 1.25 kgf.cm, 14 - 18 psi). 3. Check for a drop in pressure. 4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2321 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 Radiator fan relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Right Side of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2330 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Fan Controls Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2334 Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Removing the ECT switch while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the ECT switch. NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the ECT switch. 1 Remove the ECT switch from the thermostat housing. 2. Suspend the ECT switch in a container of water as shown. 3. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a thermometer. CAUTION: Do not let the thermometer touch the bottom of the hot container. 4. Measure the resistance between the A and B terminals according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Locations > Page 2341 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation When the ignition switch is in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 25 to the gauges in the gauge assembly. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge The engine coolant temperature gauge has two intersecting coils wound around a permanent magnet rotor. Voltage applied to the coils, through fuse 25, generates a magnetic field. The magnetic field, controlled by the coolant temperature sending unit, causes the rotor to rotate and the gauge needle to move. As the resistance in the sending unit varies, current through the gauge coils changes. The gauge needle moves toward the coil with the strongest magnetic field. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Locations > Page 2342 Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection 1. Check No. 15 (10A) fuse in under dash fuse/relay box before testing. Fig. 1 Engine Coolant Temperature Unit 2. Ensure ignition switch is in Off position, then disconnect yellow/green wire from coolant temperature sending unit, Fig. 1, and ground it with a jumper wire. 3. Turn ignition switch to On position. 4. Check as needle of coolant temperature gauge starts moving toward H mark. Turn ignition switch to Off position before pointer reaches H mark on gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage gauge. 5. If pointer of gauge does not move, check the following: a. Blown fuse in under dash fuse/relay box. b. Open in yellow/green wire, yellow or red wire. c. If fuse and wiring are satisfactory, replace coolant temperature gauge. 6. If gauge is satisfactory, inspect sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat Opening Temperature Starts Opening ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 169-176°F Fully Open ................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................... 194°F Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2346 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection Note: Replace the thermostat if it is open at room temperature. Procedure to test a closed thermostat: 1. Suspend the thermostat in a container of water as shown. 2. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a thermometer. Check the temperature at which the thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open. CAUTION: Do not let the thermometer touch the bottom of the hot container. 3. Measure lift height of the thermostat when fully open. STANDARD THERMOSTAT Lift height: above 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) Starts opening: 169° - 176°F (76° - 80°C) Fully open: 194°F {90°C) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2347 Thermostat: Service and Repair NOTE: Use a new O-ring when reassembling. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams Water Pump: Diagrams NOTE: Use new O-rings when reassembling. - Use liquid gasket, Part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-0003. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2351 Water Pump: Service and Repair INSPECTION 1. Remove the timing belt. 2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. Check that it turns freely. 3. Check for signs of seal leakage. NOTE: A small amount of "weeping" from the bleed hole is normal. REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the timing belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2352 2. Remove the water pump by removing five bolts. NOTE: Inspect, repair and clean the O-ring groove and mating surface with the cylinder block. 3. Install the water pump in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Keep the O-ring in position when installing. - Clean the spilled engine coolant. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2362 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2363 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2364 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2370 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2371 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2372 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > SN050508 > May > 05 > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Catalytic Converter Noise? Check the Heat Shield APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that buzzes or rattles, and you suspect the catalytic converter is the culprit? Before you start replacing the converter, first check the heat shield area. If there any stones or debris trapped inside, they can cause buzzing or rattling. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > SN050508 > May > 05 > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Catalytic Converter Noise? Check the Heat Shield APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that buzzes or rattles, and you suspect the catalytic converter is the culprit? Before you start replacing the converter, first check the heat shield area. If there any stones or debris trapped inside, they can cause buzzing or rattling. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2382 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2383 Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) is used to convert hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO 2), dinitrogen (N2) and water vapor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2384 Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: Testing and Inspection 1. Using a flashlight, make a visual check for plugging, melting and cracking of the catalyst. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications BY ENGINE: D16Y5, D16Y7 Exhaust Manifold Bolts ............................................................................................... ............................................................................... 23 Nm (17 lb ft) Upper Cover Bolts ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 23 Nm (17 lb ft) TWC Converter Cover Bolts ................................................................................................................ ........................................................ 11 Nm (8 lb ft) D16Y8 Exhaust Manifold Bolts ............................................................................................................ .................................................................. 31 Nm (23 lb ft) Upper Cover Bolts ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 23 Nm (17 lb ft) Exhaust Pipe A to Manifold ................................. ....................................................................................................................................... 54 Nm (40 lb ft) Exhaust Pipe A to TWC ....................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 16 Nm (12 lb ft) Exhaust Pipe B .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 33 Nm (25 lb ft) Muffler to Pipe B ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 lb ft) B1682 Upper Cover Bolts ............................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 23 Nm (17 lb ft) Exhaust Manifold Bolts ....................................... ....................................................................................................................................... 31 Nm (23 lb ft) Exhaust Pipe A to Manifold ............................................................................................................. ........................................................... 54 Nm (40 lb ft) Exhaust Pipe A to TWC ....................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 16 Nm (12 lb ft) Exhaust Pipe B .................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 33 Nm (25 lb ft) Muffler to Pipe B ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... 22 Nm (16 lb ft) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2388 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair B16A2 DOHC VTEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2389 D16Y8 SOHC VTEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2390 D16Y5 SOHC VTEC-E And D16Y7 SOHC Non-VTEC NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling. CAUTION: Check for folds or scratches on the surface of the gasket. - Replace with a new gasket if damaged. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Pipe: > 98-014 > Feb > 98 > Exhaust Pipe - Rattling/Buzzing Sound Exhaust Pipe: Customer Interest Exhaust Pipe - Rattling/Buzzing Sound 98-014 February 23, 1998 Applies To: 1996 - 98 Civic - ALL CX, DX, and LX models Rattle or Buzz From Exhaust Pipe A SYMPTOM A rattling or buzzing sound from exhaust pipe A. PROBABLE CAUSE The heat shields around exhaust pipe A are cracked. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the heat shields at exhaust pipe A. PARTS INFORMATION Exhaust Pipe A Heat Shield Kit (includes 4 nuts): P/N 06180-S01-000, H/C 5808001 Gasket: P/N 18212-SF4-000, H/C 2691681 Self-Locking Nut (3 required): P/N 90212-5A5-003, H/C 1169812 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 311116 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 06180-S01-000 H/C 5808001 Defect code: 043 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 98-014A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle, and allow the exhaust system to cool. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Pipe: > 98-014 > Feb > 98 > Exhaust Pipe - Rattling/Buzzing Sound > Page 2399 2. Remove and discard the three self-locking nuts securing exhaust pipe A to the exhaust manifold. 3. Remove and retain the two nuts securing exhaust pipe A to the mounting bracket then lower the pipe from the exhaust manifold. 4. Remove the heat shields from exhaust pipe A. 5. Install the new heat shields using the four nuts from the kit, and torque the nuts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 6. Reinstall exhaust pipe A to the exhaust manifold using three new self-locking nuts and a new gasket. Torque the nuts to 33 N.m (25 lb-ft). 7. Reinstall the two nuts onto the mounting bracket. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Pipe: > 98-014 > Feb > 98 > Exhaust Pipe Rattling/Buzzing Sound Exhaust Pipe: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust Pipe - Rattling/Buzzing Sound 98-014 February 23, 1998 Applies To: 1996 - 98 Civic - ALL CX, DX, and LX models Rattle or Buzz From Exhaust Pipe A SYMPTOM A rattling or buzzing sound from exhaust pipe A. PROBABLE CAUSE The heat shields around exhaust pipe A are cracked. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the heat shields at exhaust pipe A. PARTS INFORMATION Exhaust Pipe A Heat Shield Kit (includes 4 nuts): P/N 06180-S01-000, H/C 5808001 Gasket: P/N 18212-SF4-000, H/C 2691681 Self-Locking Nut (3 required): P/N 90212-5A5-003, H/C 1169812 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 311116 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 06180-S01-000 H/C 5808001 Defect code: 043 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 98-014A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle, and allow the exhaust system to cool. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Pipe: > 98-014 > Feb > 98 > Exhaust Pipe Rattling/Buzzing Sound > Page 2405 2. Remove and discard the three self-locking nuts securing exhaust pipe A to the exhaust manifold. 3. Remove and retain the two nuts securing exhaust pipe A to the mounting bracket then lower the pipe from the exhaust manifold. 4. Remove the heat shields from exhaust pipe A. 5. Install the new heat shields using the four nuts from the kit, and torque the nuts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 6. Reinstall exhaust pipe A to the exhaust manifold using three new self-locking nuts and a new gasket. Torque the nuts to 33 N.m (25 lb-ft). 7. Reinstall the two nuts onto the mounting bracket. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heat Shield: > 98-014 > Feb > 98 > Exhaust Pipe Rattling/Buzzing Sound Heat Shield: Customer Interest Exhaust Pipe - Rattling/Buzzing Sound 98-014 February 23, 1998 Applies To: 1996 - 98 Civic - ALL CX, DX, and LX models Rattle or Buzz From Exhaust Pipe A SYMPTOM A rattling or buzzing sound from exhaust pipe A. PROBABLE CAUSE The heat shields around exhaust pipe A are cracked. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the heat shields at exhaust pipe A. PARTS INFORMATION Exhaust Pipe A Heat Shield Kit (includes 4 nuts): P/N 06180-S01-000, H/C 5808001 Gasket: P/N 18212-SF4-000, H/C 2691681 Self-Locking Nut (3 required): P/N 90212-5A5-003, H/C 1169812 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 311116 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 06180-S01-000 H/C 5808001 Defect code: 043 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 98-014A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle, and allow the exhaust system to cool. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heat Shield: > 98-014 > Feb > 98 > Exhaust Pipe Rattling/Buzzing Sound > Page 2414 2. Remove and discard the three self-locking nuts securing exhaust pipe A to the exhaust manifold. 3. Remove and retain the two nuts securing exhaust pipe A to the mounting bracket then lower the pipe from the exhaust manifold. 4. Remove the heat shields from exhaust pipe A. 5. Install the new heat shields using the four nuts from the kit, and torque the nuts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 6. Reinstall exhaust pipe A to the exhaust manifold using three new self-locking nuts and a new gasket. Torque the nuts to 33 N.m (25 lb-ft). 7. Reinstall the two nuts onto the mounting bracket. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heat Shield: > 98-014 > Feb > 98 > Exhaust Pipe - Rattling/Buzzing Sound Heat Shield: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust Pipe - Rattling/Buzzing Sound 98-014 February 23, 1998 Applies To: 1996 - 98 Civic - ALL CX, DX, and LX models Rattle or Buzz From Exhaust Pipe A SYMPTOM A rattling or buzzing sound from exhaust pipe A. PROBABLE CAUSE The heat shields around exhaust pipe A are cracked. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the heat shields at exhaust pipe A. PARTS INFORMATION Exhaust Pipe A Heat Shield Kit (includes 4 nuts): P/N 06180-S01-000, H/C 5808001 Gasket: P/N 18212-SF4-000, H/C 2691681 Self-Locking Nut (3 required): P/N 90212-5A5-003, H/C 1169812 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 311116 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 06180-S01-000 H/C 5808001 Defect code: 043 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 98-014A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle, and allow the exhaust system to cool. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heat Shield: > 98-014 > Feb > 98 > Exhaust Pipe - Rattling/Buzzing Sound > Page 2420 2. Remove and discard the three self-locking nuts securing exhaust pipe A to the exhaust manifold. 3. Remove and retain the two nuts securing exhaust pipe A to the mounting bracket then lower the pipe from the exhaust manifold. 4. Remove the heat shields from exhaust pipe A. 5. Install the new heat shields using the four nuts from the kit, and torque the nuts to 9.8 N.m (7.2 lb-ft). 6. Reinstall exhaust pipe A to the exhaust manifold using three new self-locking nuts and a new gasket. Torque the nuts to 33 N.m (25 lb-ft). 7. Reinstall the two nuts onto the mounting bracket. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Locations Integrated Control Unit: Locations Rear Of Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Integrated Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2429 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2430 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2431 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2432 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2433 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2434 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2435 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2436 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2437 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2438 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2439 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2440 Integrated Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2441 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2442 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2443 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2444 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2449 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2450 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2451 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2452 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2453 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2454 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2455 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2456 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2457 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2458 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2459 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2460 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 2461 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View > Page 2464 Engine Control Module: Locations Picture View Behind Right Kick Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2467 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2468 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2469 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2470 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2471 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2472 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2473 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2474 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2475 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2476 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2477 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2478 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2479 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2480 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2481 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2482 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Programming and Relearning Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset Procedure NOTE: Resetting the ECM/PCM will erase any stored DTCs and any freeze data. It will also restart all readiness code monitors. Either of the following actions will reset the ECM/PCM. - Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. - Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. NOTE: Removing the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse cancels the clock and the radio presets. Make note of the customer's presets so you can reset them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2485 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset Procedure NOTE: Resetting the ECM/PCM will erase any stored DTCs and any freeze data. It will also restart all readiness code monitors. Either of the following actions will reset the ECM/PCM. - Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. - Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. NOTE: Removing the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse cancels the clock and the radio presets. Make note of the customer's presets so you can reset them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay > Page 2490 PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Main Relay (PGM-FI) Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2493 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2494 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2495 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2496 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2497 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2498 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2499 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2500 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2501 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2502 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2503 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2504 PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2505 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2506 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2507 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2508 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2509 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2510 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation Description The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2511 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2512 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2513 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2519 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2520 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2521 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2522 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2523 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2524 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2525 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2526 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2527 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2528 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2529 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2530 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2531 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2532 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2533 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2534 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2535 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PURPOSE AND OPERATION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2536 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2537 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2538 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay > Page 2543 PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Main Relay (PGM-FI) Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2546 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2547 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2548 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2549 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2550 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2551 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2552 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2553 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2554 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2555 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2556 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2557 PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2558 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2559 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2560 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2561 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2562 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2563 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation Description The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2564 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2565 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2566 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2572 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2573 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2574 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2575 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2576 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2577 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2578 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2579 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2580 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2581 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2582 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2583 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2584 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2585 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2586 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2587 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2588 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - See Malfunction Indicator Lamp when the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is turned ON. - Perform the following input test for the ignition control module (ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems. INPUT TEST FOR THE IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM) 1. Remove the distributor ignition (DI) cap, the distributor ignition (DI) rotor and the leak cover (TEC). 2. Disconnect the wires from the ICM. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the BLK/YEL wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no battery voltage, check the BLK/YEL wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the ICM. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the wire*1 and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no battery voltage, check: the ignition coil. - the wire*1 between the ignition coil and the ICM. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. *1: BLU2 wire (HITACHI) WHT/BLU wire (TEC) 5. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connector A (32P). Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire between the ECM/PCM and the ICM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2589 - There should be continuity. 6. Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire to body ground. - There should be no continuity. 7. Check for continuity on the BLU1 wire between the test tachometer connector and the ICM. - There should be continuity. 8. Check for continuity on the BLU1 wire to body ground. - There should be no continuity. 9. If all the tests are normal, replace the ICM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set 04-004 August 10, 2004 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord V6 - ALL 1996-00 Civic DX, LX - ALL 1999-00 Odyssey - ALL Rough Idle at Cold Start; MIL Comes On With DTC P0107 or P0108 (Supersedes 04-004, dated March 5, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09103 Skill Level: Repair Technician SYMPTOM In cold weather, the engine idles roughly after a cold start. The MIL may also come on with DTC P0107 (MAP sensor circuit low voltage) or DTC P0108 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture freezes inside the MAP sensor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the MAP sensor. For Japan-built Civics, also replace the intake manifold. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2600 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Accord V6; 1998-00 Civic DX, LX; Odyssey Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2601 1996-97 Civic DX, LX Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 81400 Symptom Code: K4900 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS *1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P data link connector (DLC).* 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 3. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the correct date and time. 4. From the System Selection Menu screen, select PGM FI. 5. From the Mode Menu screen, select DTCs/Freeze Data. 6. Enter the repair order number when prompted, then read the screen. Is DTC P0107 or P0108 set? Yes - Go to step 7. No - Go to step 8. 7. Press the freeze data (camera film strip) icon on the right side of the screen. Look at the IAT SENSOR value. Is the IAT value at or below 32°F (0°) (4.0 volts)? Yes - Press the red DTC icon on the right side of the screen to clear the DTC. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Go to the appropriate *REPAIR PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* 8. Find out from your customer the approximate ambient air temperature when the problem happened. Was the ambient air temperature at or below 32°F (0°C) when the problem happened? Yes - Go to the appropriate REPAIR * PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* *REPAIR PROCEDURE - ACCORD V6, ODYSSEY* NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2602 Discard the instructions that came with the kit they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 2. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 3. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 4. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2603 6. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. *7. Accord V6 only: Remove and discard the throttle body cover.* 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. * NOTE: For 1998-99 Accord V6 models, discard the sensor spacer from the kit, and use P/N 16442-P8F-A21, H/C 6562896, instead. Also, discard the adapter harness bracket from the kit. This bracket cannot be mounted to the spacer on those models.* 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. *10. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Install the adapter harness bracket on the sensor spacer (one flange bolt).* 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the MAP sensor. *13. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place.* *14. 1998-99 Accord V6 only: Use a wire tie to secure the engine harness 3P connector to any nearby vacuum hose. Make sure the connector and the harness do not interfere with the throttle cables and the wire tie does not pinch the vacuum hose.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2604 REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (U.S.-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 3. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the 3P connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 4. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2605 5. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. 7. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. 10. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 11. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2606 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 13. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 14. Clamp the engine harness in place. 15. Reinstall the air cleaner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (JAPAN-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual). Make sure you replace the fuel pressure regulator 0-ring and the seal rings and rubber rings for the fuel injectors. 3. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2607 4. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 5. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 6. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2608 8. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 9. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 10. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 9. 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 12. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2609 13. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 14. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 15. Clamp the engine harness in place. 16. Reinstall the air cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set 04-004 August 10, 2004 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord V6 - ALL 1996-00 Civic DX, LX - ALL 1999-00 Odyssey - ALL Rough Idle at Cold Start; MIL Comes On With DTC P0107 or P0108 (Supersedes 04-004, dated March 5, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09103 Skill Level: Repair Technician SYMPTOM In cold weather, the engine idles roughly after a cold start. The MIL may also come on with DTC P0107 (MAP sensor circuit low voltage) or DTC P0108 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture freezes inside the MAP sensor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the MAP sensor. For Japan-built Civics, also replace the intake manifold. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2615 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Accord V6; 1998-00 Civic DX, LX; Odyssey Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2616 1996-97 Civic DX, LX Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 81400 Symptom Code: K4900 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS *1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P data link connector (DLC).* 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 3. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the correct date and time. 4. From the System Selection Menu screen, select PGM FI. 5. From the Mode Menu screen, select DTCs/Freeze Data. 6. Enter the repair order number when prompted, then read the screen. Is DTC P0107 or P0108 set? Yes - Go to step 7. No - Go to step 8. 7. Press the freeze data (camera film strip) icon on the right side of the screen. Look at the IAT SENSOR value. Is the IAT value at or below 32°F (0°) (4.0 volts)? Yes - Press the red DTC icon on the right side of the screen to clear the DTC. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Go to the appropriate *REPAIR PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* 8. Find out from your customer the approximate ambient air temperature when the problem happened. Was the ambient air temperature at or below 32°F (0°C) when the problem happened? Yes - Go to the appropriate REPAIR * PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* *REPAIR PROCEDURE - ACCORD V6, ODYSSEY* NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2617 Discard the instructions that came with the kit they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 2. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 3. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 4. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2618 6. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. *7. Accord V6 only: Remove and discard the throttle body cover.* 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. * NOTE: For 1998-99 Accord V6 models, discard the sensor spacer from the kit, and use P/N 16442-P8F-A21, H/C 6562896, instead. Also, discard the adapter harness bracket from the kit. This bracket cannot be mounted to the spacer on those models.* 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. *10. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Install the adapter harness bracket on the sensor spacer (one flange bolt).* 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the MAP sensor. *13. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place.* *14. 1998-99 Accord V6 only: Use a wire tie to secure the engine harness 3P connector to any nearby vacuum hose. Make sure the connector and the harness do not interfere with the throttle cables and the wire tie does not pinch the vacuum hose.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2619 REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (U.S.-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 3. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the 3P connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 4. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2620 5. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. 7. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. 10. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 11. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2621 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 13. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 14. Clamp the engine harness in place. 15. Reinstall the air cleaner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (JAPAN-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual). Make sure you replace the fuel pressure regulator 0-ring and the seal rings and rubber rings for the fuel injectors. 3. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2622 4. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 5. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 6. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2623 8. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 9. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 10. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 9. 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 12. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 2624 13. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 14. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 15. Clamp the engine harness in place. 16. Reinstall the air cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2629 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2630 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2631 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2632 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2633 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2634 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2635 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2636 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2637 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2638 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2639 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2640 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2641 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2642 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2643 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2644 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Barometric Pressure Sensor: Locations The Barometric Pressure Sensor (BARO) is built into the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2651 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2655 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2659 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2660 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2661 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2662 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2665 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2666 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2667 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2668 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2669 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2670 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2671 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2672 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2673 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2674 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2675 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2676 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2677 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2678 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2679 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2680 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2681 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper cover and dipstick/tube. 4. Remove the lower cover and idler pulley bracket. 5. Disconnect the CKF sensor connector, then remove the CKF sensor. 6. Install the CKF sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Electric Load Sensor: Component Locations Engine Compartment Picture View Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2686 Starter Cables/Battery Ground Cable/Engine Ground Cable A, Engine Compartment Overview Of Power Terminals (T) And Grounds (G) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2687 Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2688 Electric Load Sensor: Connector Locations Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Left Front Corner of Fuel Tank Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Ignition Hall Effect Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Ignition Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance At 0°C (32°F) ....................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 5.0 - 7.0 K Ohms At 40°C (104°F) .......................................................... ..................................................................................................................... 1.0 - 1.5 K Ohms At 100°C (212°F) ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 0.3 - 0.4 K Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2699 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Rear of D16Y8 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2700 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The IAT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Underside of Vehicle, Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications With 5 in.Hg. ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 2.4 - 2.5 Volts With 15 in.Hg. ................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. 1.4 - 1.5 Volts With 25 in.Hg. ............................................................................................................................. .................................................................... 0.5 - 0.6 Volts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2707 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Rear of D16Y8 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2708 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation PURPOSE The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 2717 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 2723 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2724 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications OXYGEN SENSOR (WITH ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND ON THREADS) ......................................................................................... 45 Nm (33 lb-ft) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2725 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Below Rear of D16Y5 Eng. Below Rear of D16Y5 Eng. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2728 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2729 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2730 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2731 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2732 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2733 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2734 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2735 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2736 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2737 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2738 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2739 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2740 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2741 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2742 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2743 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2744 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PURPOSE The Engine Control Module (ECM) uses the O2 signal to fine tune the Fuel Injector duration to maintain the correct fuel mixture. OPERATION The Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) is installed in the exhaust manifold with the sensor end extending into the exhaust stream. It uses zirconia and platinum to compare exhaust oxygen content with that of the outside air. When heated by the combination of its internal heater and exhaust gases, the sensor supplies a low voltage signal (0.0 - 1.0 volt) to the ECM. The amount of voltage produced is determined by the air/fuel mixture, A high voltage (0.7 - 1.0 volt) indicates a rich mixture, and a low (0 - 0.3 volts) voltage indicates a lean mixture. Oxygen sensor operation is monitored by the Engine Control Module (ECM) and a malfunction should be accompanied by a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Circuit and output testing procedures are covered in detail in the Diagnostic Trouble Code Charts. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection Oxygen Sensor malfunctions will cause increased emission output and smog check failure. Other symptoms may include poor idle quality or poor fuel economy. HINT: When monitoring oxygen sensor operation with an oscilloscope, watch for a sine wave with a frequency of at least 8 cycles in 10 seconds. A "lazy" oxygen sensor will not always set a code, but will usually cause abnormal emissions levels. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2745 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2746 Part 2 Of 2 The scan tool indicates Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0135: An electrical problem in the Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S) (Sensor 1) Heater system. (Except D16Y5 engine with M/T) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2747 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair PRIMARY H02S: 1. Remove the primary H02S. D16Y5, D16Y7 Engines: a. Disconnect the primary H02S connector, then remove the cover. b. Remove the primary H02S. B16A2, D16Y8 Engines: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2748 a. Disconnect the primary H02S connector then remove the primary H02S. 2. Install the primary H02S in reverse order of removal. SECONDARY H02S: 1. Remove the secondary H02S. D16Y5, D16Y7 Engines: a. Disconnect the secondary H02S connector, then remove the secondary H02S. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2749 B16A2, D16Y8 Engines: a. Remove the grommet, and pull out the secondary H02S connector, then disconnect the secondary H02S connector. b. Remove the secondary H02S. 2. Install the secondary H02S in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Lower Left Rear of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2753 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2754 Part 2 Of 2 This signals the ECM/ PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2759 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2760 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2761 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2762 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2763 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2764 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2765 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2766 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2767 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2768 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2769 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2770 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2771 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2772 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2773 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2774 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1 / Rear of D16Y8 Engine Rear of D16Y8 Engine Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1.2 / Top of D16Y7 Engine Top of D16Y7 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2778 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications A/T Gear Position Signal: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2782 A/T Gear Position Signal: Locations Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2785 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2786 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2787 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2788 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2789 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2790 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2791 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2792 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2793 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2794 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2795 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2796 A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2797 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2798 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2799 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2800 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2801 All Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2802 A/T Gear Position Signal: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come on. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the powertrain (all except '96-'98 CVT) or transmission ('96-'98 CVT) control module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for CVT) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2803 A/T Gear Position Signal: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2804 A/T Gear Position Signal: Adjustments 1. Shift to the P position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of D4 or D position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No. 1 and No. 7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. - If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position N in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2805 A/T Gear Position Signal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown above. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the P and N position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position P anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch <--> [Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch] > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch <--> [Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch] > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 > Page 2810 Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC Pressure Switch - 2 Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View > Page 2817 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Picture View Lower Right Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2820 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2821 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2822 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2823 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2824 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2825 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2826 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2827 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2828 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2829 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2830 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2831 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2832 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2833 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2834 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2835 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2836 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 15 and the BLK/WHT and BLK/YEL wire to the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). The sensor is grounded by the BLK wire to G101. The speedometer and other control units in the circuit supply about 5 volts to the BLU/WHT wire. The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) intermittently grounds the BLU/WHT wire which generates a pulsed signal in it. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the car. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2837 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2838 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2844 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2845 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2846 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2847 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2848 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2849 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2850 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2851 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2852 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2853 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2854 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2855 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2856 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2857 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2858 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2859 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2864 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2865 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2866 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2867 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2868 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2869 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2870 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2871 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2872 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2873 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2874 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2875 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2876 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2877 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2878 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2879 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1 / Rear of D16Y8 Engine Rear of D16Y8 Engine Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1.2 / Top of D16Y7 Engine Top of D16Y7 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2883 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2888 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Hall Effect Sensor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Hall Effect Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Ignition Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Underside of Vehicle, Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts Fuel Pressure: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts 97-020 MAR 10, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts New Gauge The fuel pressure gauge with 10" hose (T/N 07406-0040001) has been discontinued. The gauge that replaces it (T/N 07406-004000A) has an easier-to-read face, a protective boot around the gauge housing, and a 48" hose. Replacement Parts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts > Page 2910 The replacement hose for the old gauge (24", T/N 07406-004020A) has also been discontinued. If you need a replacement hose, order the new 48" hose (T/N 07406-004020B). The new hose comes with an adapter so you can use it with the old fuel pressure gauge (T/N 07406-0040001). Before connecting the hose to the vehicle, make sure the aluminum washer on the end of the hose seals properly. If the aluminum washer doesn't seal, replace the washer. Replacement washers come in a set of five (T/N 07406-0040300). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2911 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Condition: engine idling, regulator vacuum hose disconnected Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kg/Sq.cm; 38 - 46 psi) Condition: engine idling, regulator vacuum hose connected Pressure should be: 200 - 250 kPa (2.0 - 2.5 kg/Sq.cm; 28 - 36 psi) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2912 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the service bolt on the fuel filter while holding the banjo bolt with another wrench. Attach the special tool. 3. Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure with the engine idling and the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator disconnected from the fuel pressure regulator and pinched. If the engine will not start, turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait for two seconds, turn it off, then back on again and read the fuel pressure. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kg/Sq.cm, 38 - 46 psi) 4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Pressure should be: 200 - 250 kPa (2.0 - 2.5 kg/Sq.cm, 28 - 36 psi) If the fuel pressure is not as specified, first check the fuel pump. If the fuel pump is OK, check the following: If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, Inspect for: Pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect for: Clogged fuel filter. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - Fuel line leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester Idle Speed: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester 03-016 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord -ALL 1996-00 Civic -ALL 1997-01 CR-V - ALL 1997-01 Prelude - ALL *1999-04 Odyssey - ALL* Inspecting Idle Speed With the PGM Tester or Honda Diagnostic System (Supersedes 03-016, dated March 25, 2003, to update the information marked by asterisks) BACKGROUND The ECM/PCM controls the vehicle's idle speed with the idle air control (IAC) valve. The IAC valve and the air bleed screw (idle adjusting screw) work together to allow the proper amount of air into the intake manifold when the throttle valve is closed (the accelerator pedal is released). The ECM/PCM "learns" to work the IAC valve based on the total amount of air entering the intake manifold. Air can enter the intake manifold from several sources, including the air bleed screw, but only the air bleed screw is adjustable. If any changes are made that alter this airflow, specifically with the air bleed screw, the ECM/PCM must learn new idle parameters. When the air bleed screw is properly set, the ECM/PCM controls the engine's idle speed seamlessly. But when the air bleed screw is not properly set, either of these symptoms may be present: ^ Idle speed dips and then quickly recovers. ^ Engine stalls intermittently when it is just "off-idle." Here are the criteria for this symptom: - The accelerator pedal is released but the driver's right foot rests over the pedal, causing just enough pressure for the ECM/PCM to detect an input, yet there is little or no throttle valve opening (the throttle valve is either not allowing any airflow or it is opened so slightly that more air supply is needed). - The engine speed is about 1,250 rpm or less. - The lockup clutch (A/T models) or the clutch (M/T models) is disengaged. - All during this time, the driver's foot does not move and stays resting over the accelerator pedal. - The air bleed screw is not set properly and does not allow enough airflow. - The amount of "air leakage" into the intake manifold is very low. (The normal amount of air let into the intake manifold by sources other than the IAC valve, the air bleed screw, and normal operation of the throttle body can vary slightly from vehicle to vehicle.) NOTE: "Air leakage" cannot be easily checked. If the first four criteria are met when the vehicle stalls, you can assume the last two criteria are met as well. CORRECTIVE ACTION L4 Models and 1999-00 Odyssey: Inspect the idle speed with the PGM Tester or Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) (see INSPECTION PROCEDURE A). V6 Models except 1999-00 Odyssey: Inspect the idle speed with the PGM Tester or HDS, and clean out the throttle body if needed (see INSPECTION PROCEDURE B). PARTS INFORMATION Throttle Body Gasket (use only if needed): Refer to the parts catalog. TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 2917 PGM Tester with SN 320 or Honda Diagnostic System with 1.006.004 or later software REQUIRED MATERIALS Carburetor Cleaner: P/N 08732-0006, H/C 4713673 or Throttle Plate and Induction Cleaner: P/N 08732-9009, H/C 6204945 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Inspect Idle Speed (L4 and V6 Models) Operation Number: 120301 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 16400-PAA-A61 H/C 5429006 *Defect Code: 07403 Symptom Code: 08901* Skill Level: Repair Technician Clean Throttle Body (V6 Models Except 1999-00 Odyssey) Operation Number: 216001 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 16400-PAA-A61 H/C 5429006 *Defect Code: 08103 Symptom Code: 08901* Skill Level: Repair Technician NOTE: Warranty claims for these labor operations must be submitted separately. Do not combine them on the same claim. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE A 1. Access the air bleed screw on the throttle body. 2. Record the current setting of the screw: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 2918 ^ Turn the screw clockwise, and count the number of turns (both full and partial) it takes to fully seat the screw. ^ Turn the screw counterclockwise back to its original setting. ^ Subtract the number of clockwise turns it took to seat the screw from 3-1/2. Record that number. Example: If it took two full turns to seat the screw, subtracting 3-1/2 from that gives you 1-1/2. 3. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). 4. Turn off all electrical items (A/C, audio unit defogger, lights, etc.). Center the steering wheel so there is no power steering load. 5. Connect the PGM Tester or HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn on the PGM Tester or HDS. Enter the VIN and odometer reading. 7. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester or HDS to get to DATA LIST. Scroll down the list to IAC. 8. While watching the IAC counts on the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw (either counterclockwise or clockwise) until the IAC count reaches 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey) or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. (Count the number of counterclockwise turns you have made, and add that number to the screw setting you recorded in step 2.) ^ If you see an IAC count of 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey), turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 9. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey), and you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns, leave the screw set where it is. Go to step 9. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 9. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes to allow the ECM/PCM to learn the new idle parameters. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Turn off and disconnect the PGM Tester or HDS. INSPECTION PROCEDURE B 1. Access the air bleed screw on the throttle body. 2. Record the current setting of the screw: ^ Turn the screw clockwise, and count the number of turns (both full and partial) it takes to fully seat the screw. ^ Turn the screw counterclockwise back to its original setting. ^ Subtract the number of clockwise turns it took to seat the screw from 3-1/2. Record that number. Example: If it took two full turns to seat the screw, subtracting 3-1/2 from that gives you 1-1/2. 3. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). 4. Turn off all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.). Center the steering wheel so there is no power steering load. 5. Connect the PGM Tester or HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn on the PGM Tester or HDS. Enter the VIN and odometer reading. 7. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester or HDS to get to DATA LIST. Scroll down the list to IAC. 8. While watching the IAC counts on the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw (either counterclockwise or clockwise) until the IAC count reaches 7 or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. (Count the number of counterclockwise turns you have made, and add that number to the screw setting you recorded in step 2.) ^ If you see an IAC count of 7, turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 14. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 7, and you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns, leave the screw set where it is. Go to step 9. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Remove the throttle body (see the Fuel and Emissions section of the appropriate service manual). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 2919 10. Open the throttle. Spray carburetor cleaner or throttle plate and induction cleaner into the throttle body to clean out any contaminants. Make sure you spray the cleaner through the back of the throttle body not the front, to avoid damaging the IAC valve. 11. Inspect the throttle body gasket, and replace it if needed. Reinstall the throttle body, making sure all cables are properly adjusted, the accelerator pedal works properly, and all hoses and cables are correctly routed. 12. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature. Make sure all electrical items are turned off and the steering wheel is centered. 13. While watching the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw until the IAC count reaches 7 or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. ^ If you see an IAC count of 7, turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 14. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 7, leave the screw set at 3-1/2 turns. Go to step 14. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 14. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes to allow the ECM/PCM to learn the new idle parameters. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Turn off and disconnect the PGM Tester or HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Manual Transmission Idle Speed: Specifications Manual Transmission Base Idle Speed .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 450 ± 50 rpm Controlled Idle Speed USA ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 670 ± 50 rpm Canada ...................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm With Headlights On Low ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 750 ± 50 rpm With fan switch on HI and A/C On ....................................................................................................... ............................................................ 850 ± 50 rpm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Manual Transmission > Page 2922 Idle Speed: Specifications Automatic Transmission Controlled Idle Speed USA ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 700 ± 50 rpm Canada ...................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm With fan switch on HI and A/C On ....................................................................................................... ............................................................ 810 ± 50 rpm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With A/T Adjust the idle speed using a Honda PGM Tester if possible. If not, use the following procedure: NOTE: - Leave the IAC valve connected. - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: USA: D16Y5 engine with CVT, D16Y7 engine with A/T, D16YS engine with A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) D16Y7 engine with M/T: 670 ± 50 rpm Canada: D16Y8 engine, D16Y7 engine: M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 4. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn clockwise or counterclockwise. 5. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn, check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn again. NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more than 1/2-turn without checking the idle speed. 6. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T 810 ± 50 rpm A/T,CVT 810 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air conditioner is on. - If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 2925 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With CVT Adjust the idle speed using a Honda PGM Tester if possible. If not, use the following procedure: NOTE: - Leave the IAC valve connected. - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: USA: D16Y5 engine with CVT and D16Y7 engine with A/T and D16Y8 engine with A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) D16Y7 engine with M/T: 670 ± 50 rpm Canada: D16Y8 engine, D16Y7 engine: 750 ± 50 rpm 4. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn clockwise or counterclockwise. 5. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn, check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn again. NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more than 1/2-turn without checking the idle speed. 6. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be (all): 810 ± 50 rpm NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air conditioner is on. - If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 2926 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With M/T NOTE: - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (transmission in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Disconnect the IAC valve connector. 4. If the engine stalls, restart the engine with the accelerator pedal slightly depressed. Stabilize the rpm at 1,000, then slowly release the pedal until the engine idles. 5. Check idling in no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: 450 ± 50 rpm Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw. NOTE: After adjusting the idle speed in this step, recheck the ignition timing. If it is out of spec, go back to step 4. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Reconnect the 2P connector on the IAC valve, then do the ECM reset procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 2927 8. Restart and idle the engine with no-load conditions for one minute, then check the idle speed. NOTE: (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. Idle speed should be: (USA): 670 ± 50 rpm (Canada): 750 ± 50 rpm 9. Idle the engine for one minute with headlights (Low) ON, and check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: 750 ± 50 rpm 10. Turn the headlights off. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: 810 ± 50 rpm NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC, 1.6L DOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC Air Cleaner (ACL) NOTE: Do not clean the ACL element it with compressed air (except dry type). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Relieving Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 6 mm service bolt on top of the fuel filter. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 6 mm service bolt at the fuel filter while holding the special banjo bolt with another wrench. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 6 mm service bolt. 6. Slowly loosen the 6 mm service bolt one complete turn. NOTE: A fuel pressure gauge can be attached at the 6 mm service bolt hole. - Always replace the washer between the service bolt and the special banjo bolt whenever the service bolt is loosened. - Replace all washers whenever the bolts are removed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Ignition Timing Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Cable: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2950 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2951 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2952 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2953 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2954 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2955 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2956 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2957 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2958 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2959 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2960 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2961 Ignition Cable: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2962 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2963 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2964 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2965 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2966 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might break them inside. 1. Check the condition of the ignition wire terminals. If any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken or distorted, replace the ignition wire. 2. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance. 3. If resistance exceeds 25 K Ohm, replace the ignition wire. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Distributor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2975 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2976 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2977 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Distributor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2983 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2984 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 2985 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2986 Distributor: Locations Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Distributor: Exploded Views HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 2989 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2990 Distributor: Service and Repair Removal: 1. Disconnect the connector from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the distributor ignition (DI) cap. 3. Remove the mounting bolts from the distributor, then remove the distributor from the cylinder head. Installation: NOTE: Before you install the distributor, bring the No.1 piston to compression stroke TDC. 1. Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, then install it. 2. Slip the distributor into position. NOTE: The lug on the end of the distributor and its mating grooves in the camshaft end are both offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the distributor 180° out of time. 3. Install the mounting bolts, and tighten them lightly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2991 4. Connect the ignition wires to the distributor ignition (DI) cap as shown. 5. Connect the connector to the distributor. 6. Set the ignition timing. 7. After setting the ignition timing, tighten the mounting bolts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator for: Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too low - Insufficient cooling Fouled plugs may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too high - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coil or ignition wires 2. D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engine: - Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool, and replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2995 3. B16A2 engine: - Do not adjust the gap of a platinum tip plug: replace the spark plug if the center electrode is rounded or if the gap is not within the specifications. NOTE: Use only the spark plugs listed. 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kg.m, 13 lb.ft). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Check compression with engine at normal operating temperature and throttle in wide open position. Prior to performing test, disable ignition and fuel injection to prevent fuel from being sprayed into cylinders while cranking engine. Ensure is fully charged and that cranking speed is 250 RPM. Standard reading should be 135-184 psi. The maximum variation between cylinders is 28 psi. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance Intake ................................................................................................................................................... .......................................... 0.007-0.009 inches Exhaust ................................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 0.009-0.011 inches Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3002 Valve Clearance: Adjustments NOTE: Valves should be adjusted only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100°F (38°C). - After adjusting, retorque the crankshaft pulley bolt. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the upper cover. 3. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark on the cam-shaft pulley should be at top, and the TDC marks should align with the cylinder head surface. 4. Adjust valves on No. 1 cylinder. Intake: 0.18 - 0.22 mm (0.007 - 0.009 inch) Exhaust: 0.23 - 0.27 mm (0.009 - 0.011 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3003 5. Loosen the locknut, and turn the adjustment screw until the feeler gauge slides back and forth with a slight amount of drag. 6. Tighten the locknut, and check the clearance again. Repeat the adjustment if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications > Page 3004 7. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise (camshaft pulley turns 90°). The "UP" mark should be on the exhaust side. Adjust valves on No. 3 cylinder. 8. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 4 piston to TDC. Both TDC grooves are once again visible. Adjust valves on No. 4 cylinder. 9. Rotate the crankshaft 180° counterclockwise to bring No. 2 piston to TDC. The "UP" mark should be on the intake side. Adjust valves on No. 2 cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set 04-004 August 10, 2004 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord V6 - ALL 1996-00 Civic DX, LX - ALL 1999-00 Odyssey - ALL Rough Idle at Cold Start; MIL Comes On With DTC P0107 or P0108 (Supersedes 04-004, dated March 5, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09103 Skill Level: Repair Technician SYMPTOM In cold weather, the engine idles roughly after a cold start. The MIL may also come on with DTC P0107 (MAP sensor circuit low voltage) or DTC P0108 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture freezes inside the MAP sensor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the MAP sensor. For Japan-built Civics, also replace the intake manifold. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3014 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Accord V6; 1998-00 Civic DX, LX; Odyssey Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3015 1996-97 Civic DX, LX Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 81400 Symptom Code: K4900 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS *1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P data link connector (DLC).* 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 3. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the correct date and time. 4. From the System Selection Menu screen, select PGM FI. 5. From the Mode Menu screen, select DTCs/Freeze Data. 6. Enter the repair order number when prompted, then read the screen. Is DTC P0107 or P0108 set? Yes - Go to step 7. No - Go to step 8. 7. Press the freeze data (camera film strip) icon on the right side of the screen. Look at the IAT SENSOR value. Is the IAT value at or below 32°F (0°) (4.0 volts)? Yes - Press the red DTC icon on the right side of the screen to clear the DTC. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Go to the appropriate *REPAIR PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* 8. Find out from your customer the approximate ambient air temperature when the problem happened. Was the ambient air temperature at or below 32°F (0°C) when the problem happened? Yes - Go to the appropriate REPAIR * PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* *REPAIR PROCEDURE - ACCORD V6, ODYSSEY* NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3016 Discard the instructions that came with the kit they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 2. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 3. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 4. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3017 6. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. *7. Accord V6 only: Remove and discard the throttle body cover.* 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. * NOTE: For 1998-99 Accord V6 models, discard the sensor spacer from the kit, and use P/N 16442-P8F-A21, H/C 6562896, instead. Also, discard the adapter harness bracket from the kit. This bracket cannot be mounted to the spacer on those models.* 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. *10. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Install the adapter harness bracket on the sensor spacer (one flange bolt).* 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the MAP sensor. *13. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place.* *14. 1998-99 Accord V6 only: Use a wire tie to secure the engine harness 3P connector to any nearby vacuum hose. Make sure the connector and the harness do not interfere with the throttle cables and the wire tie does not pinch the vacuum hose.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3018 REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (U.S.-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 3. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the 3P connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 4. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3019 5. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. 7. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. 10. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 11. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3020 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 13. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 14. Clamp the engine harness in place. 15. Reinstall the air cleaner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (JAPAN-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual). Make sure you replace the fuel pressure regulator 0-ring and the seal rings and rubber rings for the fuel injectors. 3. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3021 4. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 5. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 6. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3022 8. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 9. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 10. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 9. 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 12. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3023 13. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 14. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 15. Clamp the engine harness in place. 16. Reinstall the air cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set 04-004 August 10, 2004 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord V6 - ALL 1996-00 Civic DX, LX - ALL 1999-00 Odyssey - ALL Rough Idle at Cold Start; MIL Comes On With DTC P0107 or P0108 (Supersedes 04-004, dated March 5, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09103 Skill Level: Repair Technician SYMPTOM In cold weather, the engine idles roughly after a cold start. The MIL may also come on with DTC P0107 (MAP sensor circuit low voltage) or DTC P0108 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture freezes inside the MAP sensor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the MAP sensor. For Japan-built Civics, also replace the intake manifold. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3029 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Accord V6; 1998-00 Civic DX, LX; Odyssey Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3030 1996-97 Civic DX, LX Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 81400 Symptom Code: K4900 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS *1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P data link connector (DLC).* 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 3. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the correct date and time. 4. From the System Selection Menu screen, select PGM FI. 5. From the Mode Menu screen, select DTCs/Freeze Data. 6. Enter the repair order number when prompted, then read the screen. Is DTC P0107 or P0108 set? Yes - Go to step 7. No - Go to step 8. 7. Press the freeze data (camera film strip) icon on the right side of the screen. Look at the IAT SENSOR value. Is the IAT value at or below 32°F (0°) (4.0 volts)? Yes - Press the red DTC icon on the right side of the screen to clear the DTC. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Go to the appropriate *REPAIR PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* 8. Find out from your customer the approximate ambient air temperature when the problem happened. Was the ambient air temperature at or below 32°F (0°C) when the problem happened? Yes - Go to the appropriate REPAIR * PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* *REPAIR PROCEDURE - ACCORD V6, ODYSSEY* NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3031 Discard the instructions that came with the kit they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 2. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 3. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 4. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3032 6. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. *7. Accord V6 only: Remove and discard the throttle body cover.* 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. * NOTE: For 1998-99 Accord V6 models, discard the sensor spacer from the kit, and use P/N 16442-P8F-A21, H/C 6562896, instead. Also, discard the adapter harness bracket from the kit. This bracket cannot be mounted to the spacer on those models.* 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. *10. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Install the adapter harness bracket on the sensor spacer (one flange bolt).* 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the MAP sensor. *13. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place.* *14. 1998-99 Accord V6 only: Use a wire tie to secure the engine harness 3P connector to any nearby vacuum hose. Make sure the connector and the harness do not interfere with the throttle cables and the wire tie does not pinch the vacuum hose.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3033 REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (U.S.-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 3. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the 3P connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 4. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3034 5. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. 7. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. 10. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 11. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3035 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 13. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 14. Clamp the engine harness in place. 15. Reinstall the air cleaner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (JAPAN-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual). Make sure you replace the fuel pressure regulator 0-ring and the seal rings and rubber rings for the fuel injectors. 3. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3036 4. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 5. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 6. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3037 8. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 9. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 10. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 9. 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 12. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3038 13. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 14. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 15. Clamp the engine harness in place. 16. Reinstall the air cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/C Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation A/C Signal: Description and Operation OPERATION This signals the ECM/PCM when there is a demand for cooling from the air conditioning system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/C Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3042 A/C Signal: Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/C Signal > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3043 This signals the ECM/PCM when there is a demand for cooling from the air conditioning system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3048 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3049 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3050 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3051 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3052 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3053 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3054 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3055 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3056 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3057 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3058 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3059 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3060 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3061 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3062 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3063 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance At 0°C (32°F) ....................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 5.0 - 7.0 K Ohms At 40°C (104°F) .......................................................... ..................................................................................................................... 1.0 - 1.5 K Ohms At 100°C (212°F) ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 0.3 - 0.4 K Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3067 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Rear of D16Y8 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3068 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The IAT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Barometric Pressure Sensor: Locations The Barometric Pressure Sensor (BARO) is built into the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Locations Integrated Control Unit: Locations Rear Of Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Integrated Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3077 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3078 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3079 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3080 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3081 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3082 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3083 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3084 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3085 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3086 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3087 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3088 Integrated Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3089 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3090 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3091 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3092 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations Brake Signal: Locations This signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is depressed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 3096 Brake Signal: Description and Operation PURPOSE/OPERATION This signals the Engine Control Module (ECM) when the Brake Pedal is depressed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3100 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3104 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Starter Switch Signal <--> [Cranking Signal] > Component Information > Description and Operation Starter Switch Signal: Description and Operation OPERATION This signals the ECM/PCM when the engine is cranking. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Starter Switch Signal <--> [Cranking Signal] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3108 Starter Switch Signal: Testing and Inspection This signals the ECM/PCM when the engine is cranking. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3112 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3113 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3114 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3115 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3118 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3119 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3120 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3121 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3122 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3123 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3124 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3125 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3126 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3127 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3128 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3129 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3130 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3131 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3132 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3133 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3134 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper cover and dipstick/tube. 4. Remove the lower cover and idler pulley bracket. 5. Disconnect the CKF sensor connector, then remove the CKF sensor. 6. Install the CKF sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Photo View Data Link Connector: Locations Photo View Gray connector, below left side of dash panel, above kick panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Photo View > Page 3139 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3142 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3143 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3144 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3145 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3146 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3147 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3148 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3149 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3150 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3151 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3152 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3153 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3154 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3155 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3156 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3157 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3158 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Electric Load Sensor: Component Locations Engine Compartment Picture View Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3163 Starter Cables/Battery Ground Cable/Engine Ground Cable A, Engine Compartment Overview Of Power Terminals (T) And Grounds (G) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3164 Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3165 Electric Load Sensor: Connector Locations Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3170 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3171 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3172 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3173 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3174 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3175 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3176 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3177 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3178 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3179 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3180 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3181 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3182 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View > Page 3185 Engine Control Module: Locations Picture View Behind Right Kick Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3188 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3189 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3190 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3191 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3192 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3193 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3194 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3195 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3196 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3197 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3198 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3199 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3200 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3201 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3202 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3203 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Programming and Relearning Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset Procedure NOTE: Resetting the ECM/PCM will erase any stored DTCs and any freeze data. It will also restart all readiness code monitors. Either of the following actions will reset the ECM/PCM. - Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. - Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. NOTE: Removing the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse cancels the clock and the radio presets. Make note of the customer's presets so you can reset them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3206 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset Procedure NOTE: Resetting the ECM/PCM will erase any stored DTCs and any freeze data. It will also restart all readiness code monitors. Either of the following actions will reset the ECM/PCM. - Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. - Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. NOTE: Removing the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse cancels the clock and the radio presets. Make note of the customer's presets so you can reset them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Left Front Corner of Fuel Tank Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Ignition Hall Effect Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Ignition Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Specifications Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 3.5 Nm (2.5 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3217 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1 / Rear of D16Y8 Engine Rear of D16Y8 Engine Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1.2 / Top of D16Y7 Engine Top of D16Y7 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3220 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3221 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3222 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3223 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3224 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3225 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3226 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3227 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3228 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3229 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3230 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3231 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3232 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3233 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3234 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3235 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3236 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation Idle Air Control Idle Air Control Valve (IAC Valve) When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is depressed, the P/S load is high, or the alternator Is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the IAC Valve to maintain the correct idle speed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3241 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3242 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3243 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3244 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3245 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3246 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3247 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3248 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3249 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3250 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3251 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3252 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3253 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3254 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3255 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3256 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Underside of Vehicle, Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay > Page 3264 PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Main Relay (PGM-FI) Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3267 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3268 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3269 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3270 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3271 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3272 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3273 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3274 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3275 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3276 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3277 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3278 PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3279 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3280 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3281 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3282 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3283 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3284 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation Description The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3285 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3286 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3287 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Customer Interest Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 3296 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 3302 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads Hood Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads 00-004 March 6, 2001 *Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 2001 Civic 4-door from VIN 1HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 1HGES....1L041276 - 4-door from VIN 2HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 2HGES....1L511373 - 2-door from VIN 1HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 1HGES....1L035953* Rattle From the Hood (Supersedes 00-004, dated January 25, 2000) SYMPTOM A rattle from the front of the vehicle when driving over rough roads or small bumps. PROBABLE CAUSE Excessive striker-to-latch clearance. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the hood edge cushions and the hood latch. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Adjust each hood edge cushion so only one thread is showing and the "80" on the top is in the position shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads > Page 3308 2. Loosen the hood latch mounting bolts, and adjust the latch so it is flush with the top of the bulkhead. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads > Page 3314 2. Loosen the hood latch mounting bolts, and adjust the latch so it is flush with the top of the bulkhead. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3315 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Does Not Come ON NOTE: If this symptom is intermittent, check for a loose fuse No.25 (METER 7.5 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box, a poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal A18, or an intermittent open in the GRN/ORN wire between the ECM/PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON > Page 3318 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Stays ON Part 1 Of 3 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON > Page 3319 Part 2 Of 3 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON > Page 3320 Part 3 Of 3 NOTE: - When there is no Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) stored, the MIL will stay on if the SCS service connector is connected and the ignition switch is on. - If this symptom is intermittent, check for: A loose FIE/M (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box - A loose No.13 FUEL PUMP fuse (15 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C7) and the service check connector - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D4) and the MAP sensor - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D10), the TP sensor, the EGR valve lift sensor (D16Y5 engine) and/or the Fuel tank pressure sensor ('96 D16Y8 engine (coupe), '97 D16Y7 engine (coupe: KL model, sedan: KL (LX model), '97 D16Y8 engine (coupe: all models, sedan: KL model), '98-all models) - PGM-FI main relay See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications With 5 in.Hg. ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 2.4 - 2.5 Volts With 15 in.Hg. ................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. 1.4 - 1.5 Volts With 25 in.Hg. ............................................................................................................................. .................................................................... 0.5 - 0.6 Volts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3324 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Rear of D16Y8 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3325 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation PURPOSE The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 3334 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 3340 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3341 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications OXYGEN SENSOR (WITH ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND ON THREADS) ......................................................................................... 45 Nm (33 lb-ft) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3342 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Below Rear of D16Y5 Eng. Below Rear of D16Y5 Eng. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3345 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3346 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3347 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3348 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3349 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3350 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3351 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3352 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3353 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3354 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3355 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3356 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3357 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3358 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3359 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3360 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3361 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PURPOSE The Engine Control Module (ECM) uses the O2 signal to fine tune the Fuel Injector duration to maintain the correct fuel mixture. OPERATION The Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) is installed in the exhaust manifold with the sensor end extending into the exhaust stream. It uses zirconia and platinum to compare exhaust oxygen content with that of the outside air. When heated by the combination of its internal heater and exhaust gases, the sensor supplies a low voltage signal (0.0 - 1.0 volt) to the ECM. The amount of voltage produced is determined by the air/fuel mixture, A high voltage (0.7 - 1.0 volt) indicates a rich mixture, and a low (0 - 0.3 volts) voltage indicates a lean mixture. Oxygen sensor operation is monitored by the Engine Control Module (ECM) and a malfunction should be accompanied by a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Circuit and output testing procedures are covered in detail in the Diagnostic Trouble Code Charts. See: Testing and Inspection Oxygen Sensor malfunctions will cause increased emission output and smog check failure. Other symptoms may include poor idle quality or poor fuel economy. HINT: When monitoring oxygen sensor operation with an oscilloscope, watch for a sine wave with a frequency of at least 8 cycles in 10 seconds. A "lazy" oxygen sensor will not always set a code, but will usually cause abnormal emissions levels. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3362 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3363 Part 2 Of 2 The scan tool indicates Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0135: An electrical problem in the Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S) (Sensor 1) Heater system. (Except D16Y5 engine with M/T) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3364 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair PRIMARY H02S: 1. Remove the primary H02S. D16Y5, D16Y7 Engines: a. Disconnect the primary H02S connector, then remove the cover. b. Remove the primary H02S. B16A2, D16Y8 Engines: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3365 a. Disconnect the primary H02S connector then remove the primary H02S. 2. Install the primary H02S in reverse order of removal. SECONDARY H02S: 1. Remove the secondary H02S. D16Y5, D16Y7 Engines: a. Disconnect the secondary H02S connector, then remove the secondary H02S. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3366 B16A2, D16Y8 Engines: a. Remove the grommet, and pull out the secondary H02S connector, then disconnect the secondary H02S connector. b. Remove the secondary H02S. 2. Install the secondary H02S in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Lower Left Rear of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3370 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3371 Part 2 Of 2 This signals the ECM/ PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Locations Integrated Control Unit: Locations Rear Of Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Integrated Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3378 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3379 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3380 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3381 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3382 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3383 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3384 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3385 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3386 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3387 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3388 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3389 Integrated Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3390 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3391 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3392 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3393 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors 03-020 April 2, 2010 Applies To: All OBD II-equipped models except Passport OBD II DTCs and Their Associated Monitors (Supersedes 03-020, dated March 29, 2003, to revise the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) *REVISION SUMMARY Numerous DTCs were added. Refer to the list for details.* Following is a list of all OBD II DTCs and their associated monitors for all Honda automobiles with OBD II. No one model has every DTC in the list. DTC P0AA6 thru P0A9E Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3398 DTC P0A94 thru P0157 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3399 DTC P0158 thru P0400 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3400 DTC P0401 thru P0562 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3401 DTC P0563 thru P0748 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3402 DTC P0750 thru P0977 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3403 DTC P0979 thru P1193 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3404 DTC P1253 thru P1459 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3405 DTC P1486 thru P1585 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3406 DTC P1586 thru P1678 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3407 DTC P1679 thru P1860 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3408 DTC P1861 thru P2238 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3409 DTC P2240 thru U0073 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Emissions - OBD II DTC's And Associated Monitors > Page 3410 DTC U0100 thru U1288 Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View > Page 3413 Engine Control Module: Locations Picture View Behind Right Kick Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3416 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3417 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3418 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3419 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3420 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3421 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3422 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3423 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3424 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3425 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3426 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3427 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3428 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3429 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3430 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3431 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Programming and Relearning Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset Procedure NOTE: Resetting the ECM/PCM will erase any stored DTCs and any freeze data. It will also restart all readiness code monitors. Either of the following actions will reset the ECM/PCM. - Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. - Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. NOTE: Removing the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse cancels the clock and the radio presets. Make note of the customer's presets so you can reset them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3434 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset Procedure NOTE: Resetting the ECM/PCM will erase any stored DTCs and any freeze data. It will also restart all readiness code monitors. Either of the following actions will reset the ECM/PCM. - Use the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to clear the ECM's/PCM's memory. NOTE: See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. - Turn the ignition switch OFF. Remove the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds. NOTE: Removing the BACK UP (7.5 A) fuse cancels the clock and the radio presets. Make note of the customer's presets so you can reset them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay > Page 3439 PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Main Relay (PGM-FI) Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3442 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3443 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3444 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3445 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3446 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3447 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3448 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3449 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3450 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3451 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3452 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3453 PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3454 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3455 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3456 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3457 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3458 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3459 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation Description The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3460 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3461 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3462 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set 04-004 August 10, 2004 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord V6 - ALL 1996-00 Civic DX, LX - ALL 1999-00 Odyssey - ALL Rough Idle at Cold Start; MIL Comes On With DTC P0107 or P0108 (Supersedes 04-004, dated March 5, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09103 Skill Level: Repair Technician SYMPTOM In cold weather, the engine idles roughly after a cold start. The MIL may also come on with DTC P0107 (MAP sensor circuit low voltage) or DTC P0108 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture freezes inside the MAP sensor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the MAP sensor. For Japan-built Civics, also replace the intake manifold. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3472 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Accord V6; 1998-00 Civic DX, LX; Odyssey Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3473 1996-97 Civic DX, LX Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 81400 Symptom Code: K4900 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS *1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P data link connector (DLC).* 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 3. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the correct date and time. 4. From the System Selection Menu screen, select PGM FI. 5. From the Mode Menu screen, select DTCs/Freeze Data. 6. Enter the repair order number when prompted, then read the screen. Is DTC P0107 or P0108 set? Yes - Go to step 7. No - Go to step 8. 7. Press the freeze data (camera film strip) icon on the right side of the screen. Look at the IAT SENSOR value. Is the IAT value at or below 32°F (0°) (4.0 volts)? Yes - Press the red DTC icon on the right side of the screen to clear the DTC. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Go to the appropriate *REPAIR PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* 8. Find out from your customer the approximate ambient air temperature when the problem happened. Was the ambient air temperature at or below 32°F (0°C) when the problem happened? Yes - Go to the appropriate REPAIR * PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* *REPAIR PROCEDURE - ACCORD V6, ODYSSEY* NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3474 Discard the instructions that came with the kit they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 2. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 3. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 4. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3475 6. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. *7. Accord V6 only: Remove and discard the throttle body cover.* 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. * NOTE: For 1998-99 Accord V6 models, discard the sensor spacer from the kit, and use P/N 16442-P8F-A21, H/C 6562896, instead. Also, discard the adapter harness bracket from the kit. This bracket cannot be mounted to the spacer on those models.* 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. *10. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Install the adapter harness bracket on the sensor spacer (one flange bolt).* 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the MAP sensor. *13. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place.* *14. 1998-99 Accord V6 only: Use a wire tie to secure the engine harness 3P connector to any nearby vacuum hose. Make sure the connector and the harness do not interfere with the throttle cables and the wire tie does not pinch the vacuum hose.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3476 REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (U.S.-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 3. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the 3P connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 4. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3477 5. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. 7. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. 10. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 11. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3478 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 13. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 14. Clamp the engine harness in place. 15. Reinstall the air cleaner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (JAPAN-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual). Make sure you replace the fuel pressure regulator 0-ring and the seal rings and rubber rings for the fuel injectors. 3. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3479 4. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 5. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 6. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3480 8. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 9. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 10. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 9. 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 12. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3481 13. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 14. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 15. Clamp the engine harness in place. 16. Reinstall the air cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set Absolute Pressure Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set 04-004 August 10, 2004 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord V6 - ALL 1996-00 Civic DX, LX - ALL 1999-00 Odyssey - ALL Rough Idle at Cold Start; MIL Comes On With DTC P0107 or P0108 (Supersedes 04-004, dated March 5, 2004) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 03214 Symptom Code: 09103 Skill Level: Repair Technician SYMPTOM In cold weather, the engine idles roughly after a cold start. The MIL may also come on with DTC P0107 (MAP sensor circuit low voltage) or DTC P0108 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) set. PROBABLE CAUSE Moisture freezes inside the MAP sensor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the MAP sensor. For Japan-built Civics, also replace the intake manifold. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3487 PARTS INFORMATION WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Accord V6; 1998-00 Civic DX, LX; Odyssey Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3488 1996-97 Civic DX, LX Failed Part: P/N 37830-PAA-500 H/C 5430319 Defect Code: 81400 Symptom Code: K4900 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS *1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) with version 1.012.023 or later software to the 16P data link connector (DLC).* 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Turn on the HDS. 3. At the screen prompts, enter the VIN and the odometer reading, and then verify the correct date and time. 4. From the System Selection Menu screen, select PGM FI. 5. From the Mode Menu screen, select DTCs/Freeze Data. 6. Enter the repair order number when prompted, then read the screen. Is DTC P0107 or P0108 set? Yes - Go to step 7. No - Go to step 8. 7. Press the freeze data (camera film strip) icon on the right side of the screen. Look at the IAT SENSOR value. Is the IAT value at or below 32°F (0°) (4.0 volts)? Yes - Press the red DTC icon on the right side of the screen to clear the DTC. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn off and disconnect the HDS. Go to the appropriate *REPAIR PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* 8. Find out from your customer the approximate ambient air temperature when the problem happened. Was the ambient air temperature at or below 32°F (0°C) when the problem happened? Yes - Go to the appropriate REPAIR * PROCEDURE.* * No - Continue with normal troubleshooting.* *REPAIR PROCEDURE - ACCORD V6, ODYSSEY* NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3489 Discard the instructions that came with the kit they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 2. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 3. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 4. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3490 6. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. *7. Accord V6 only: Remove and discard the throttle body cover.* 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. * NOTE: For 1998-99 Accord V6 models, discard the sensor spacer from the kit, and use P/N 16442-P8F-A21, H/C 6562896, instead. Also, discard the adapter harness bracket from the kit. This bracket cannot be mounted to the spacer on those models.* 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. *10. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Install the adapter harness bracket on the sensor spacer (one flange bolt).* 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the MAP sensor. *13. Odyssey, 2000-02 Accord V6 only: Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place.* *14. 1998-99 Accord V6 only: Use a wire tie to secure the engine harness 3P connector to any nearby vacuum hose. Make sure the connector and the harness do not interfere with the throttle cables and the wire tie does not pinch the vacuum hose.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3491 REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (U.S.-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. 3. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the 3P connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 4. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3492 5. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. 7. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 8. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 9. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 8. 10. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 11. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3493 12. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 13. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 14. Clamp the engine harness in place. 15. Reinstall the air cleaner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - CIVIC (JAPAN-BUILT) NOTE: Discard the instructions that came with the kit; they are incorrect for this repair. Follow this procedure instead. 1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2 of the 1996-00 Civic Service Manual). Make sure you replace the fuel pressure regulator 0-ring and the seal rings and rubber rings for the fuel injectors. 3. Release the engine harness from its clamp. Then unplug the 3P connector from the MAP sensor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3494 4. Use a small, flat-tip screwdriver to pry out the retainer from the connector. Also, pry out the retainer from the new 3P connector. 5. Remove the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) from the old 3P connector. 6. Insert the No. 1 terminal (YEL/RED wire) into the left (No. 1) cavity of the new 3P connector. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 2 terminal (GRN/WHT wire) to the center (No. 2) cavity of the new 3P connector. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to transfer the No. 3 terminal (RED/GRN wire) to the right (No. 3) cavity of the new 3P connector. Discard the old 3P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3495 8. Snap the retainer into place on the new 3P connector. 9. Remove the MAP sensor and the 0-ring from the throttle body (two washer-screws). Discard the sensor and the 0-ring, but save the washer-screws. 10. Position the new 0-ring on the throttle body. Then install the sensor spacer with the washer-screws you saved in step 9. 11. Install the new MAP sensor on the sensor spacer (one washer-screw). Then plug the small (black) end of the adapter harness into the sensor. 12. Install the adapter harness bracket on the throttle body (one flange bolt). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Absolute Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Absolute Pressure Sensor: > 04-004 > Aug > 04 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0107or P0108 Set > Page 3496 13. Plug the large (gray) end of the adapter harness into the engine harness 3P connector. Slide the engine harness 3P connector onto the harness bracket until it clicks into place. 14. Models with cruise control: Reposition the vacuum hose and its clamp. Make sure the brake booster vacuum hose and the fuel return line do not interfere with each other. 15. Clamp the engine harness in place. 16. Reinstall the air cleaner. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3501 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3502 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3503 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3504 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3505 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3506 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3507 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3508 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3509 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3510 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3511 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3512 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3513 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3514 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3515 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3516 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Barometric Pressure Sensor: Locations The Barometric Pressure Sensor (BARO) is built into the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3523 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3527 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ECT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3531 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3532 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3533 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3534 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3537 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3538 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3539 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3540 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3541 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3542 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3543 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3544 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3545 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3546 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3547 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3548 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3549 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3550 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3551 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3552 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3553 Crankshaft Fluctuation Sensor: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the cylinder head cover. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Remove the upper cover and dipstick/tube. 4. Remove the lower cover and idler pulley bracket. 5. Disconnect the CKF sensor connector, then remove the CKF sensor. 6. Install the CKF sensor in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Electric Load Sensor: Component Locations Engine Compartment Picture View Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3558 Starter Cables/Battery Ground Cable/Engine Ground Cable A, Engine Compartment Overview Of Power Terminals (T) And Grounds (G) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3559 Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Electric Load Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3560 Electric Load Sensor: Connector Locations Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations Left Front Corner of Fuel Tank Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Ignition Hall Effect Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Ignition Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications Resistance At 0°C (32°F) ....................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 5.0 - 7.0 K Ohms At 40°C (104°F) .......................................................... ..................................................................................................................... 1.0 - 1.5 K Ohms At 100°C (212°F) ..................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 0.3 - 0.4 K Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3571 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations Rear of D16Y8 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3572 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The IAT Sensor is a temperature dependant resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the intake air temperature increases as shown above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Underside of Vehicle, Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Specifications With 5 in.Hg. ........................................................................................................................................ ........................................................... 2.4 - 2.5 Volts With 15 in.Hg. ................................................... .............................................................................................................................................. 1.4 - 1.5 Volts With 25 in.Hg. ............................................................................................................................. .................................................................... 0.5 - 0.6 Volts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3579 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Rear of D16Y8 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3580 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation PURPOSE The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals and inputs the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Oxygen Sensor: Customer Interest Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 3589 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Oxygen Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oxygen Sensor: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 3595 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3596 Oxygen Sensor: Specifications OXYGEN SENSOR (WITH ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND ON THREADS) ......................................................................................... 45 Nm (33 lb-ft) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3597 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Below Rear of D16Y5 Eng. Below Rear of D16Y5 Eng. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3600 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3601 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3602 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3603 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3604 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3605 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3606 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3607 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3608 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3609 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3610 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3611 Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3612 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3613 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3614 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3615 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3616 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation PURPOSE The Engine Control Module (ECM) uses the O2 signal to fine tune the Fuel Injector duration to maintain the correct fuel mixture. OPERATION The Primary HO2S (Sensor 1) is installed in the exhaust manifold with the sensor end extending into the exhaust stream. It uses zirconia and platinum to compare exhaust oxygen content with that of the outside air. When heated by the combination of its internal heater and exhaust gases, the sensor supplies a low voltage signal (0.0 - 1.0 volt) to the ECM. The amount of voltage produced is determined by the air/fuel mixture, A high voltage (0.7 - 1.0 volt) indicates a rich mixture, and a low (0 - 0.3 volts) voltage indicates a lean mixture. Oxygen sensor operation is monitored by the Engine Control Module (ECM) and a malfunction should be accompanied by a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Circuit and output testing procedures are covered in detail in the Diagnostic Trouble Code Charts. See: Testing and Inspection Oxygen Sensor malfunctions will cause increased emission output and smog check failure. Other symptoms may include poor idle quality or poor fuel economy. HINT: When monitoring oxygen sensor operation with an oscilloscope, watch for a sine wave with a frequency of at least 8 cycles in 10 seconds. A "lazy" oxygen sensor will not always set a code, but will usually cause abnormal emissions levels. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3617 Oxygen Sensor: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3618 Part 2 Of 2 The scan tool indicates Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0135: An electrical problem in the Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary HO2S) (Sensor 1) Heater system. (Except D16Y5 engine with M/T) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3619 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair PRIMARY H02S: 1. Remove the primary H02S. D16Y5, D16Y7 Engines: a. Disconnect the primary H02S connector, then remove the cover. b. Remove the primary H02S. B16A2, D16Y8 Engines: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3620 a. Disconnect the primary H02S connector then remove the primary H02S. 2. Install the primary H02S in reverse order of removal. SECONDARY H02S: 1. Remove the secondary H02S. D16Y5, D16Y7 Engines: a. Disconnect the secondary H02S connector, then remove the secondary H02S. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3621 B16A2, D16Y8 Engines: a. Remove the grommet, and pull out the secondary H02S connector, then disconnect the secondary H02S connector. b. Remove the secondary H02S. 2. Install the secondary H02S in reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Lower Left Rear of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3625 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3626 Part 2 Of 2 This signals the ECM/ PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3631 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3632 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3633 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3634 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3635 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3636 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3637 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3638 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3639 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3640 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3641 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3642 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3643 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3644 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3645 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3646 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1 / Rear of D16Y8 Engine Rear of D16Y8 Engine Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1.2 / Top of D16Y7 Engine Top of D16Y7 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3650 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications A/T Gear Position Signal: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3654 A/T Gear Position Signal: Locations Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3657 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3658 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3659 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3660 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3661 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3662 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3663 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3664 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3665 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3666 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3667 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3668 A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3669 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3670 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3671 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3672 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3673 All Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3674 A/T Gear Position Signal: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come on. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the powertrain (all except '96-'98 CVT) or transmission ('96-'98 CVT) control module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for CVT) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3675 A/T Gear Position Signal: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3676 A/T Gear Position Signal: Adjustments 1. Shift to the P position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of D4 or D position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No. 1 and No. 7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. - If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position N in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3677 A/T Gear Position Signal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown above. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the P and N position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position P anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch <--> [Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch] > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch <--> [Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch] > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 > Page 3682 Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC Pressure Switch - 2 Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View > Page 3689 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Picture View Lower Right Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3692 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3693 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3694 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3695 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3696 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3697 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3698 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3699 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3700 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3701 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3702 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3703 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3704 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3705 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3706 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3707 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3708 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 15 and the BLK/WHT and BLK/YEL wire to the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). The sensor is grounded by the BLK wire to G101. The speedometer and other control units in the circuit supply about 5 volts to the BLU/WHT wire. The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) intermittently grounds the BLU/WHT wire which generates a pulsed signal in it. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the car. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3709 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3710 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3715 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3716 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3717 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3718 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3719 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3720 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3721 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3722 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3723 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3724 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3725 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3726 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3727 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3728 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3729 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3730 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1 / Rear of D16Y8 Engine Rear of D16Y8 Engine Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1.2 / Top of D16Y7 Engine Top of D16Y7 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3734 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications A/T Gear Position Signal: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3738 A/T Gear Position Signal: Locations Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3741 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3742 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3743 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3744 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3745 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3746 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3747 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3748 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3749 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3750 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3751 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3752 A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3753 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3754 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3755 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3756 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3757 All Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3758 A/T Gear Position Signal: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come on. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the powertrain (all except '96-'98 CVT) or transmission ('96-'98 CVT) control module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for CVT) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3759 A/T Gear Position Signal: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3760 A/T Gear Position Signal: Adjustments 1. Shift to the P position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of D4 or D position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No. 1 and No. 7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. - If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position N in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3761 A/T Gear Position Signal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown above. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the P and N position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position P anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3766 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3767 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3768 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3769 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3770 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3771 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3772 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3773 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3774 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3775 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3776 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3777 Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3778 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3779 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3780 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3781 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch <--> [Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch] > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch <--> [Variable Valve Timing Pressure Switch] > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Pressure Switch - 1 > Page 3786 Variable Valve Timing (VTEC) Pressure Switch: Locations VTEC Pressure Switch - 2 Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Electrical Specifications Resistance ........................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 14 - 30 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 3791 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Mechanical Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Solenoid Valve - 1 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations VTEC Solenoid Valve - 1 Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > VTEC Solenoid Valve - 1 > Page 3794 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations VTEC Solenoid Valve - 2 Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3795 Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Testing and Inspection INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the VTEC solenoid valve. 2. Measure resistance between the terminal and body ground. Resistance: 14 - 30 ohms 3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the VTEC solenoid valve assembly from the cylinder head, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter for clogging. - If there is clogging, replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3796 4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid valve with your finger and check its movement. - If the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the engine oil pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Vehicle View > Page 3803 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Locations Picture View Lower Right Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3806 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3807 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3808 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3809 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3810 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3811 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3812 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3813 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3814 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3815 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3816 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3817 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3818 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3819 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3820 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3821 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3822 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 15 and the BLK/WHT and BLK/YEL wire to the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). The sensor is grounded by the BLK wire to G101. The speedometer and other control units in the circuit supply about 5 volts to the BLU/WHT wire. The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) intermittently grounds the BLU/WHT wire which generates a pulsed signal in it. The number of pulses per minute increases/decreases with the speed of the car. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3823 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3824 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Alternator FR Signal <--> [Voltage Signal] > Component Information > Description and Operation Alternator FR Signal: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION This signals the ECM/PCM when the Alternator (ALT) is charging. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Alternator FR Signal <--> [Voltage Signal] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3828 Alternator FR Signal: Testing and Inspection This signals the ECM/PCM when the Alternator (ALT) is charging. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 3838 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 3839 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 3840 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 3846 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 3847 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 3848 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > SN050508 > May > 05 > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Catalytic Converter Noise? Check the Heat Shield APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that buzzes or rattles, and you suspect the catalytic converter is the culprit? Before you start replacing the converter, first check the heat shield area. If there any stones or debris trapped inside, they can cause buzzing or rattling. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: > SN050508 > May > 05 > Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Catalytic Converter Noise SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Catalytic Converter Noise? Check the Heat Shield APPLIES TO: All models SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that buzzes or rattles, and you suspect the catalytic converter is the culprit? Before you start replacing the converter, first check the heat shield area. If there any stones or debris trapped inside, they can cause buzzing or rattling. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3858 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3859 Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) is used to convert hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO 2), dinitrogen (N2) and water vapor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter <--> [Catalytic Converter] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3860 Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter: Testing and Inspection 1. Using a flashlight, make a visual check for plugging, melting and cracking of the catalyst. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Locations > EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Canister Purge Control Valve: Locations EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Right Rear Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Locations > EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve > Page 3866 Canister Purge Control Valve: Locations Evaporative Emission Purge Control Solenoid Valve Top Center Of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3867 Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Purge Control Solenoid Valve*9 When the engine coolant temperature is above 154 °F (68 °C), the ECM/PCM controls the EVAP purge control solenoid valve which controls vacuum to the EVAP purge control canister. Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Purge Control Solenoid Valve*4 When the engine coolant temperature above 154 °F (68 °C), intake air temperature above 32 °F (0 °C) and vehicle speed above 0 mile (0 kph) or [A/C compressor clutch on and intake air temperature above 160 °F (41 °C)], the ECM/PCM controls the EVAP purge control solenoid valve which controls vacuum to the EVAP purge control canister. *9 '96 D16Y5 engine, '96 D16Y7 engine, '96 D16Y8 engine (Sedan), '97 D16Y5 engine, '97 D16Y7 engine (Coupe: KA, KC models, Sedan: KA, KC, KL, (LX) models, Hatchback: all models), '97 D16Y8 engine (Sedan: KA, KC model) *4 '96 D16Y8 engine (Coupe), '97 D16Y7 engine (Coupe: KL model, Sedan: KL, (LX) model), '97 D16Y8 engine (Coupe: all models, sedan:KL model), '98 all models, '99 all models, '00 all models. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Bypass Solenoid Valve Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Bypass Solenoid Valve Left Front Corner of Fuel Tank Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Bypass Solenoid Valve > Page 3872 Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Evaporative Emission Purge Control Solenoid Valve Top Center of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Canister Purge Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3875 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3876 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3877 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3878 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3879 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3880 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3881 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3882 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3883 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3884 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3885 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3886 Canister Purge Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3887 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3888 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3889 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3890 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Two-Way Valve <--> [Evaporative Check Valve] > Component Information > Specifications Two-Way Valve: Specifications Should stabilize Vacuum between .......................................................................................................................................................... 0.8 - 2.1 kPa (0.2 - 0.6 in.Hg.) Pressure between ............................................................................... ........................................................................................... 1.0 kPa (0.3 in.Hg.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Two-Way Valve <--> [Evaporative Check Valve] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3894 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Two-Way Valve <--> [Evaporative Check Valve] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3895 Two-Way Valve: Testing and Inspection Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Two Way Valve Testing ['96 D16Y5 engine, '96 D16Y7 engine, '96 D16Y8 engine (sedan), '97 D16Y5 engine, '97 D16Y7 engine (coupe: KA, KC models, sedan: (KA, KC, KL (DX) models, hatchback: all models), '97 D16Y8 engine (sedan: (KA, KC models)]: 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Remove the vapor line from the EVAP two way valve on the fuel tank, and connect it to a T-fitting from a vacuum gauge and a vacuum pump as shown. 3. Apply vacuum slowly and continuously while watching the gauge. The vacuum should stabilize momentarily at 0.7-2.0 kPa (5-15 mmHg, 0.2-0.6 in.Hg). If the vacuum stabilizes (valve opens) below 0.7 kPa (5 mmHg, 0.2 in.Hg) or above 2.0 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.6 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest. 4. Move the vacuum pump hose from the vacuum fitting to the pressure fitting, and move the vacuum gauge hose from the vacuum side to the pressure side as shown. 5. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the gauge. The pressure should stabilize at 1.3-4.7 kPa (0-35 mmHg, 0.4-1.4 in.Hg). - If the pressure momentarily stabilizes (valve opens) at 1.3-4.7 kPa (10-35 mmHg, 0.4-in. Hg), the valve is OK. - If the pressure stabilizes below 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.4 in.Hg) or above 4.7 kPa (35 mmHg, 1.4 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest. Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Two Way Valve Testing ['96 D16Y8 engine (coupe), '97 D16Y7 engine (coupe: KL model, sedan: KL (LX) model), '97 D16Y5 engine (coupe: all models, sedan: KL model, '98-all models)]: 1. Remove the fuel fill cap. 2. Remove the vapor line from the EVAP two way valve, and connect it to a T-fitting from a vacuum gauge and a vacuum pump as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Two-Way Valve <--> [Evaporative Check Valve] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3896 3. Apply vacuum slowly and continuously while watching the gauge. The vacuum should stabilize momentarily at 0.8-2.1 kPa (6-16 mmHg, 0.2-0.6 in.Hg). If the vacuum stabilizes (valve opens) below 0.8 kPa (6 mmHg, 0.2 in.Hg) or above 2.1 kPa (16 mmHg, 0.6 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest. 4. Move the vacuum pump hose from the vacuum fitting to the pressure fitting, and move the vacuum gauge hose from the vacuum side to the pressure side as shown. 5. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the gauge. The pressure should be stabilize momentarily above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg). - If the pressure momentarily stabilizes (valve opens) above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg), the valve is OK. - If the pressure stabilizes below 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3902 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3903 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3904 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3905 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3906 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3907 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3908 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3909 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3910 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3911 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3912 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3913 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3914 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3915 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3916 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3917 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations Leak Detection Solenoid: Locations Right Rear of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > Refueling Control Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Float Test Refueling Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Float Test Float Test 1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the fuel tank pressure, then reinstall the cap. 3. Remove the fuel hose joint protector. Disconnect the ORVR vapor recirculation hose, and connect a vacuum pump to the vapor recirculation hose. 4. Plug the hose port. 5. Apply vacuum to the ORVR vapor recirculation hose. - If the vacuum holds, replace the ORVR vent shut valve. - If the vacuum does not hold, the float is OK. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > Refueling Control Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Float Test > Page 3926 Refueling Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Valve Test Valve Test 1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full. 2. Remove the fuel fill cap. 3. Remove the fuel hose joint protector. Disconnect the ORVR signal hose. 4. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP control canister, and then plug the port with a plug. 5. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP control canister vent shut valve, and connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum hose. 6. Pump the vacuum pump 80 times. - If the vacuum holds, go to step 7. - If the vacuum does not hold, go to step 9. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > Refueling Control Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Float Test > Page 3927 7. Connect a second vacuum pump to the ORVR signal hose. 8. Apply vacuum (1 pump) to the ORVR signal hose, then check the vacuum on the pump in step 6. - If the vacuum holds, replace the ORVR vent shut valve. - If the vacuum is released, the 0RVR vent shut valve is OK. 9. Disconnect the ORVR quick disconnect from the EVAP canister, then plug the port on the canister. Reapply vacuum (80 pumps). - If the vacuum holds, replace the ORVR vent shut valve. - If the vacuum does not hold, inspect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 0-ring. If the O-ring is OK, replace the EVAP canister and repeat step 4. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > Refueling Control Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3928 Refueling Control Valve: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the fuel tank. 2. Remove the ORVR vent shut valve from the fuel tank. 3. Install parts in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Control Solenoid <--> [EGR Control Solenoid] > Component Information > Locations Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Control Solenoid: Locations Rear of Engine Compartment (CVT) NOTE: The D16Y8 engine does not come equipped with an EGR valve Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Control Solenoid <--> [EGR Control Solenoid] > Component Information > Locations > Page 3933 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Control Solenoid: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Control Solenoid Valve*7 When EGR is required for control of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions, the ECM controls the EGR control solenoid valve which supplies regulated vacuum to the EGR valve. *7 CVT (D16Y5 engine) NOTE: The D16Y8 engine does not come equipped with an EGR valve. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Fillpipe Restrictor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fillpipe Restrictor: Description and Operation Fillpipe Restrictor The fillpipe restrictor is used to prevent leaded fuel from being added to the fuel tank. The gasoline pump for unleaded fuel has a smaller nozzle. The fillpipe restrictor will only allow the unleaded type nozzle to be inserted into the fuel tank. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Fillpipe Restrictor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3937 Fillpipe Restrictor: Testing and Inspection Remove the fuel filler cap and check the fillpipe restrictor for tampering. On models with more that one fuel tank, check each tank filler tube. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3942 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Testing and Inspection 1. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the PCV valve when the hose between PCV valve and intake manifold in lightly pinched with your fingers or pliers. If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve grommet for cracks and damage. If the grommet is OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts Fuel Pressure: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts 97-020 MAR 10, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts New Gauge The fuel pressure gauge with 10" hose (T/N 07406-0040001) has been discontinued. The gauge that replaces it (T/N 07406-004000A) has an easier-to-read face, a protective boot around the gauge housing, and a 48" hose. Replacement Parts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts > Page 3948 The replacement hose for the old gauge (24", T/N 07406-004020A) has also been discontinued. If you need a replacement hose, order the new 48" hose (T/N 07406-004020B). The new hose comes with an adapter so you can use it with the old fuel pressure gauge (T/N 07406-0040001). Before connecting the hose to the vehicle, make sure the aluminum washer on the end of the hose seals properly. If the aluminum washer doesn't seal, replace the washer. Replacement washers come in a set of five (T/N 07406-0040300). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3949 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Condition: engine idling, regulator vacuum hose disconnected Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kg/Sq.cm; 38 - 46 psi) Condition: engine idling, regulator vacuum hose connected Pressure should be: 200 - 250 kPa (2.0 - 2.5 kg/Sq.cm; 28 - 36 psi) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3950 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the service bolt on the fuel filter while holding the banjo bolt with another wrench. Attach the special tool. 3. Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure with the engine idling and the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator disconnected from the fuel pressure regulator and pinched. If the engine will not start, turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait for two seconds, turn it off, then back on again and read the fuel pressure. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kg/Sq.cm, 38 - 46 psi) 4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Pressure should be: 200 - 250 kPa (2.0 - 2.5 kg/Sq.cm, 28 - 36 psi) If the fuel pressure is not as specified, first check the fuel pump. If the fuel pump is OK, check the following: If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, Inspect for: Pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect for: Clogged fuel filter. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - Fuel line leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Relieving Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 6 mm service bolt on top of the fuel filter. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 6 mm service bolt at the fuel filter while holding the special banjo bolt with another wrench. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 6 mm service bolt. 6. Slowly loosen the 6 mm service bolt one complete turn. NOTE: A fuel pressure gauge can be attached at the 6 mm service bolt hole. - Always replace the washer between the service bolt and the special banjo bolt whenever the service bolt is loosened. - Replace all washers whenever the bolts are removed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester Idle Speed: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester 03-016 May 19, 2006 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord -ALL 1996-00 Civic -ALL 1997-01 CR-V - ALL 1997-01 Prelude - ALL *1999-04 Odyssey - ALL* Inspecting Idle Speed With the PGM Tester or Honda Diagnostic System (Supersedes 03-016, dated March 25, 2003, to update the information marked by asterisks) BACKGROUND The ECM/PCM controls the vehicle's idle speed with the idle air control (IAC) valve. The IAC valve and the air bleed screw (idle adjusting screw) work together to allow the proper amount of air into the intake manifold when the throttle valve is closed (the accelerator pedal is released). The ECM/PCM "learns" to work the IAC valve based on the total amount of air entering the intake manifold. Air can enter the intake manifold from several sources, including the air bleed screw, but only the air bleed screw is adjustable. If any changes are made that alter this airflow, specifically with the air bleed screw, the ECM/PCM must learn new idle parameters. When the air bleed screw is properly set, the ECM/PCM controls the engine's idle speed seamlessly. But when the air bleed screw is not properly set, either of these symptoms may be present: ^ Idle speed dips and then quickly recovers. ^ Engine stalls intermittently when it is just "off-idle." Here are the criteria for this symptom: - The accelerator pedal is released but the driver's right foot rests over the pedal, causing just enough pressure for the ECM/PCM to detect an input, yet there is little or no throttle valve opening (the throttle valve is either not allowing any airflow or it is opened so slightly that more air supply is needed). - The engine speed is about 1,250 rpm or less. - The lockup clutch (A/T models) or the clutch (M/T models) is disengaged. - All during this time, the driver's foot does not move and stays resting over the accelerator pedal. - The air bleed screw is not set properly and does not allow enough airflow. - The amount of "air leakage" into the intake manifold is very low. (The normal amount of air let into the intake manifold by sources other than the IAC valve, the air bleed screw, and normal operation of the throttle body can vary slightly from vehicle to vehicle.) NOTE: "Air leakage" cannot be easily checked. If the first four criteria are met when the vehicle stalls, you can assume the last two criteria are met as well. CORRECTIVE ACTION L4 Models and 1999-00 Odyssey: Inspect the idle speed with the PGM Tester or Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) (see INSPECTION PROCEDURE A). V6 Models except 1999-00 Odyssey: Inspect the idle speed with the PGM Tester or HDS, and clean out the throttle body if needed (see INSPECTION PROCEDURE B). PARTS INFORMATION Throttle Body Gasket (use only if needed): Refer to the parts catalog. TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 3958 PGM Tester with SN 320 or Honda Diagnostic System with 1.006.004 or later software REQUIRED MATERIALS Carburetor Cleaner: P/N 08732-0006, H/C 4713673 or Throttle Plate and Induction Cleaner: P/N 08732-9009, H/C 6204945 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Inspect Idle Speed (L4 and V6 Models) Operation Number: 120301 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 16400-PAA-A61 H/C 5429006 *Defect Code: 07403 Symptom Code: 08901* Skill Level: Repair Technician Clean Throttle Body (V6 Models Except 1999-00 Odyssey) Operation Number: 216001 Flat Rate Time: 0.6 hour Failed Part: P/N 16400-PAA-A61 H/C 5429006 *Defect Code: 08103 Symptom Code: 08901* Skill Level: Repair Technician NOTE: Warranty claims for these labor operations must be submitted separately. Do not combine them on the same claim. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. INSPECTION PROCEDURE A 1. Access the air bleed screw on the throttle body. 2. Record the current setting of the screw: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 3959 ^ Turn the screw clockwise, and count the number of turns (both full and partial) it takes to fully seat the screw. ^ Turn the screw counterclockwise back to its original setting. ^ Subtract the number of clockwise turns it took to seat the screw from 3-1/2. Record that number. Example: If it took two full turns to seat the screw, subtracting 3-1/2 from that gives you 1-1/2. 3. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). 4. Turn off all electrical items (A/C, audio unit defogger, lights, etc.). Center the steering wheel so there is no power steering load. 5. Connect the PGM Tester or HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn on the PGM Tester or HDS. Enter the VIN and odometer reading. 7. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester or HDS to get to DATA LIST. Scroll down the list to IAC. 8. While watching the IAC counts on the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw (either counterclockwise or clockwise) until the IAC count reaches 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey) or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. (Count the number of counterclockwise turns you have made, and add that number to the screw setting you recorded in step 2.) ^ If you see an IAC count of 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey), turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 9. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 1 (or 7 for '99-00 Odyssey), and you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns, leave the screw set where it is. Go to step 9. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 9. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes to allow the ECM/PCM to learn the new idle parameters. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Turn off and disconnect the PGM Tester or HDS. INSPECTION PROCEDURE B 1. Access the air bleed screw on the throttle body. 2. Record the current setting of the screw: ^ Turn the screw clockwise, and count the number of turns (both full and partial) it takes to fully seat the screw. ^ Turn the screw counterclockwise back to its original setting. ^ Subtract the number of clockwise turns it took to seat the screw from 3-1/2. Record that number. Example: If it took two full turns to seat the screw, subtracting 3-1/2 from that gives you 1-1/2. 3. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature (the cooling fan cycles twice). 4. Turn off all electrical items (A/C, audio unit, defogger, lights, etc.). Center the steering wheel so there is no power steering load. 5. Connect the PGM Tester or HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC). 6. Turn on the PGM Tester or HDS. Enter the VIN and odometer reading. 7. Follow the screen prompts on the PGM Tester or HDS to get to DATA LIST. Scroll down the list to IAC. 8. While watching the IAC counts on the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw (either counterclockwise or clockwise) until the IAC count reaches 7 or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. (Count the number of counterclockwise turns you have made, and add that number to the screw setting you recorded in step 2.) ^ If you see an IAC count of 7, turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 14. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 7, and you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns, leave the screw set where it is. Go to step 9. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Remove the throttle body (see the Fuel and Emissions section of the appropriate service manual). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - Idle Speed Inspection With PGM Tester > Page 3960 10. Open the throttle. Spray carburetor cleaner or throttle plate and induction cleaner into the throttle body to clean out any contaminants. Make sure you spray the cleaner through the back of the throttle body not the front, to avoid damaging the IAC valve. 11. Inspect the throttle body gasket, and replace it if needed. Reinstall the throttle body, making sure all cables are properly adjusted, the accelerator pedal works properly, and all hoses and cables are correctly routed. 12. Start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature. Make sure all electrical items are turned off and the steering wheel is centered. 13. While watching the PGM Tester or HDS, slowly turn the air bleed screw until the IAC count reaches 7 or you have turned the screw counterclockwise a total of 3-1/2 turns. ^ If you see an IAC count of 7, turn the screw clockwise 1/2 turn, and then go to step 14. ^ If you do not see an IAC count of 7, leave the screw set at 3-1/2 turns. Go to step 14. You should never set the air bleed screw counterclockwise more than 3-1/2 turns from its seated position. If you set the screw further it could work itself out of the throttle body over time. 14. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes to allow the ECM/PCM to learn the new idle parameters. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Turn off and disconnect the PGM Tester or HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Manual Transmission Idle Speed: Specifications Manual Transmission Base Idle Speed .................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 450 ± 50 rpm Controlled Idle Speed USA ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 670 ± 50 rpm Canada ...................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm With Headlights On Low ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 750 ± 50 rpm With fan switch on HI and A/C On ....................................................................................................... ............................................................ 850 ± 50 rpm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications > Manual Transmission > Page 3963 Idle Speed: Specifications Automatic Transmission Controlled Idle Speed USA ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................................... 700 ± 50 rpm Canada ...................................................................... .............................................................................................................................. 750 ± 50 rpm With fan switch on HI and A/C On ....................................................................................................... ............................................................ 810 ± 50 rpm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With A/T Adjust the idle speed using a Honda PGM Tester if possible. If not, use the following procedure: NOTE: - Leave the IAC valve connected. - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: USA: D16Y5 engine with CVT, D16Y7 engine with A/T, D16YS engine with A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) D16Y7 engine with M/T: 670 ± 50 rpm Canada: D16Y8 engine, D16Y7 engine: M/T 750 ± 50 rpm A/T 750 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) 4. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn clockwise or counterclockwise. 5. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn, check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn again. NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more than 1/2-turn without checking the idle speed. 6. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: M/T 810 ± 50 rpm A/T,CVT 810 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air conditioner is on. - If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 3966 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With CVT Adjust the idle speed using a Honda PGM Tester if possible. If not, use the following procedure: NOTE: - Leave the IAC valve connected. - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system 1. Connect a tachometer. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: USA: D16Y5 engine with CVT and D16Y7 engine with A/T and D16Y8 engine with A/T: 700 ± 50 rpm (in [N] or [P] position) D16Y7 engine with M/T: 670 ± 50 rpm Canada: D16Y8 engine, D16Y7 engine: 750 ± 50 rpm 4. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn clockwise or counterclockwise. 5. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn, check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn the idle adjusting screw 1/2-turn again. NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more than 1/2-turn without checking the idle speed. 6. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be (all): 810 ± 50 rpm NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air conditioner is on. - If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 3967 Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection With M/T NOTE: - Before setting the idle speed, check the following items: The MIL has not been reported on. - Ignition timing - Spark plugs - Air cleaner - PCV system - (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (transmission in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Connect a tachometer. 3. Disconnect the IAC valve connector. 4. If the engine stalls, restart the engine with the accelerator pedal slightly depressed. Stabilize the rpm at 1,000, then slowly release the pedal until the engine idles. 5. Check idling in no-load conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner are not operating. Idle speed should be: 450 ± 50 rpm Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by removing the cap and turning the idle adjusting screw. NOTE: After adjusting the idle speed in this step, recheck the ignition timing. If it is out of spec, go back to step 4. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 7. Reconnect the 2P connector on the IAC valve, then do the ECM reset procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > System Diagnosis > With A/T > Page 3968 8. Restart and idle the engine with no-load conditions for one minute, then check the idle speed. NOTE: (Canada) Pull the parking brake lever up. Start the engine, then check that the headlights are off. Idle speed should be: (USA): 670 ± 50 rpm (Canada): 750 ± 50 rpm 9. Idle the engine for one minute with headlights (Low) ON, and check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: 750 ± 50 rpm 10. Turn the headlights off. Idle the engine for one minute with heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then check the idle speed. Idle speed should be: 810 ± 50 rpm NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, see Symptom Chart. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Filter Element: Service and Repair 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC, 1.6L DOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC Air Cleaner (ACL) NOTE: Do not clean the ACL element it with compressed air (except dry type). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3977 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3978 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3979 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3980 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3981 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3982 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3983 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3984 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3985 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3986 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3987 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3988 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3989 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3990 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3991 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3992 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fillpipe Restrictor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fillpipe Restrictor: Description and Operation Fillpipe Restrictor The fillpipe restrictor is used to prevent leaded fuel from being added to the fuel tank. The gasoline pump for unleaded fuel has a smaller nozzle. The fillpipe restrictor will only allow the unleaded type nozzle to be inserted into the fuel tank. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fillpipe Restrictor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3996 Fillpipe Restrictor: Testing and Inspection Remove the fuel filler cap and check the fillpipe restrictor for tampering. On models with more that one fuel tank, check each tank filler tube. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair Relieving Before disconnecting fuel pipes or hoses, release pressure from the system by loosening the 6 mm service bolt on top of the fuel filter. WARNING: - Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames or sparks away from your work area. - Be sure to relieve fuel pressure while the ignition switch is off. 1. Write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery negative terminal. 3. Remove the fuel fill cap. 4. Use a box end wrench on the 6 mm service bolt at the fuel filter while holding the special banjo bolt with another wrench. 5. Place a rag or shop towel over the 6 mm service bolt. 6. Slowly loosen the 6 mm service bolt one complete turn. NOTE: A fuel pressure gauge can be attached at the 6 mm service bolt hole. - Always replace the washer between the service bolt and the special banjo bolt whenever the service bolt is loosened. - Replace all washers whenever the bolts are removed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations Fuel Injector: Locations Top Center of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Injector: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4006 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4007 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4008 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4009 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4010 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4011 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4012 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4013 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4014 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4015 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4016 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4017 Fuel Injector: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4018 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4019 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4020 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4021 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4022 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation Fuel injector Timing and Duration The ECM/PCM contains memories for the basic discharge durations at various engine speeds and manifold air flow rates. The basic discharge duration, after being read out from the memory, is further modified by signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final discharge duration. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4023 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Replacement WARNING: Do not smoke when working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the connectors from the fuel injectors. 3. Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the fuel pressure regulator. Place a shop towel over the fuel return hose, then disconnect it from the fuel pressure regulator. Disconnect the vacuum hoses and 2P connector from the EVAP purge control solenoid valve. 4. Remove the retainer nuts on the fuel rail. 5. Disconnect the fuel rail. 6. Remove the fuel injectors from the intake manifold. 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4024 1.6L DOHC VTEC 7. Slide new cushion rings onto the fuel injectors. 8. Coat new O-rings with clean engine oil, and put them on the fuel injectors. 9. Insert the fuel injectors into the fuel rail first. 10. Coat new seal rings with clean engine oil, and press them into the intake manifold. 11. To prevent damage to the 0-rings, install the fuel injectors in the fuel rail first, then install them in the intake manifold. 12. Install and tighten the retainer nuts. 13. Connect the vacuum hoses and fuel return hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Connect the vacuum hoses and 2P connector to the EVAP purge control solenoid valve. 14. Install the connectors on the fuel injectors. 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for approximately two seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this two or three times, then check whether there is any fuel leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Quick-Connect Fittings <--> [Fuel Line Coupler] > Component Information > Service Precautions Fuel Quick-Connect Fittings: Service Precautions WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system Keep open flames away from your work area. The fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly connects the in-tank fuel pump with the fuel feed pipe. For removing or installing the fuel pump and fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings. Pay attention to following: - The fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly is not heat-resistant; be careful not to damage it during welding or other heat-generating procedures. - The fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly is not acid-proof; do not touch it with a shop towel which was used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace the fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly if it came into contact with electrolyte or something similar. - When connecting or disconnecting the fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly, be careful not to bend or twist it excessively. Replace it if damaged. A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be reconnected, but the retainer on the mating pipe cannot be reused once it has been removed from the pipe. Replace the retainer when - Replacing the fuel pump. - Replacing the fuel feed pipe. - It has been removed from the pipe. - It is damaged. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Quick-Connect Fittings <--> [Fuel Line Coupler] > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4028 Fuel Quick-Connect Fittings: Service and Repair Disconnection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings for dirt, and clean if necessary. 3. Hold the connector with one hand and press down the retainer tabs with the other hand, then pull the connector off. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the pipe or other parts. Do not use tools. - If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes off easily. - Do not remove the retainer from the pipe; once removed, the retainer must be replaced with a new one. 4. Check the contact area of the pipe for dirt and damage. - If the surface is dirty, clean it. - If the surface is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel pump or fuel feed pipe. 5. To prevent damage and keep out foreign matter, cover the disconnected connector and pipe end with plastic bags. Connection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames away from your work area. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Quick-Connect Fittings <--> [Fuel Line Coupler] > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4029 1. Check the pipe contact area for dirt and damage, and clean if necessary. 2. Insert a new retainer into the connector if the retainer is damaged, or after - replacing the fuel pump. - replacing the fuel feed pipe. - removing the retainer from the pipe. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly, remove the old retainer from the mating pipe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Quick-Connect Fittings <--> [Fuel Line Coupler] > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4030 3. Align the quick-connect fittings with the pipe, and align the retainer locking pawls with the connector grooves. Then press the quick-connect fittings onto the pipe until both retainer pawls lock with a clicking sound. NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of new engine oil on the pipe end. 4. Make sure the connection is secure and the pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually and by pulling the connector. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). The fuel pump will run for about two seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat two or three times, and check that there is no leakage in the fuel supply system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4035 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4036 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4037 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4038 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4039 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4040 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4041 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4042 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4043 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4044 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4045 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4046 Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4047 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4048 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4049 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Control Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4050 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure Regulator: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4054 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Testing and Inspection Testing WARNING: Do not smoke during the test. Keep open flames away from your work area. 1. Attach the special tool(s) to the service port on the fuel filter. Pressure should be: Except 1.6L DOHC VTEC : 260-310 kPa (2.7-3.2 kg/Sq.cm, 38-46 psi) 1.6L DOHC VTEC : 270-320 kPa (2.8-3.3 kg/Sq.cm, 40-47 psi) (with the fuel pressure regulator vacuum hose disconnected and pinched) 2. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. 3. Check that the fuel pressure rises when the vacuum hose from the fuel pressure regulator is disconnected again. If the fuel pressure did not rise, replace the fuel pressure regulator. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4055 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Service and Repair Replacement WARNING: Do not smoke while working on fuel system. Keep open flame away from your work area. 1. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure regulator, then relieve fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose. 3. Remove the two 6 mm retainer bolts and the fuel pressure regulator. 4. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring, and carefully install it into its proper position. 5. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts Fuel Pressure: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts 97-020 MAR 10, 1997 Applies To: ALL Models New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts New Gauge The fuel pressure gauge with 10" hose (T/N 07406-0040001) has been discontinued. The gauge that replaces it (T/N 07406-004000A) has an easier-to-read face, a protective boot around the gauge housing, and a 48" hose. Replacement Parts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tools - New Fuel Pressure Gauge and Replacement Parts > Page 4061 The replacement hose for the old gauge (24", T/N 07406-004020A) has also been discontinued. If you need a replacement hose, order the new 48" hose (T/N 07406-004020B). The new hose comes with an adapter so you can use it with the old fuel pressure gauge (T/N 07406-0040001). Before connecting the hose to the vehicle, make sure the aluminum washer on the end of the hose seals properly. If the aluminum washer doesn't seal, replace the washer. Replacement washers come in a set of five (T/N 07406-0040300). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4062 Fuel Pressure: Specifications Condition: engine idling, regulator vacuum hose disconnected Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kg/Sq.cm; 38 - 46 psi) Condition: engine idling, regulator vacuum hose connected Pressure should be: 200 - 250 kPa (2.0 - 2.5 kg/Sq.cm; 28 - 36 psi) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4063 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1. Relieve fuel pressure. 2. Remove the service bolt on the fuel filter while holding the banjo bolt with another wrench. Attach the special tool. 3. Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure with the engine idling and the vacuum hose of the fuel pressure regulator disconnected from the fuel pressure regulator and pinched. If the engine will not start, turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait for two seconds, turn it off, then back on again and read the fuel pressure. Pressure should be: 260 - 310 kPa (2.7 - 3.2 kg/Sq.cm, 38 - 46 psi) 4. Reconnect vacuum hose to the fuel pressure regulator. Pressure should be: 200 - 250 kPa (2.0 - 2.5 kg/Sq.cm, 28 - 36 psi) If the fuel pressure is not as specified, first check the fuel pump. If the fuel pump is OK, check the following: If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, Inspect for: Pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect for: Clogged fuel filter. - Faulty fuel pressure regulator. - Fuel line leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4068 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4069 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4070 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4071 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4072 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4073 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4074 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4075 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4076 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4077 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4078 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4079 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4080 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4081 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4082 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4083 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4084 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PURPOSE AND OPERATION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4085 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4086 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4087 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 4091 Fuel Return Line: Diagrams NOTE: Check all hose clamps and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 4092 Fuel Return Line: Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Locations > Page 4093 Fuel Lines Check fuel system lines, hoses, fuel filter, and other components for damage, leaks and deterioration, and replace if necessary. NOTE: Check all hose clamps and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Line: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4099 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4100 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4101 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4102 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4103 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4104 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4105 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4106 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4107 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4108 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4109 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4110 Fuel Line: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4111 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4112 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4113 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4114 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4115 Fuel Line: Exploded Views NOTE: Check all hose clamps and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4116 Fuel Line: Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line <--> [Fuel Supply Line] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4117 Fuel Lines Check fuel system lines, hoses, fuel filter, and other components for damage, leaks and deterioration, and replace if necessary. NOTE: Check all hose clamps and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Service and Repair Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications Fuel Gauge Sender: Specifications Float Position E 1/2 F USA,Canada Produced (ceramic Board Type) 105 - 108 ohms 29.5 - 35.5 ohms 3.5 - 5 ohms Japan Produced (wire -Wound Type) 105 - 110 ohms 29.5 - 39.5 ohms 2 - 5 ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4125 Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4126 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from your work area. NOTE: Refer to fuel gauge system circuit. 1. Check the No.25 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fusel relay box before testing. 2. Remove the access panel from the floor. 3. Disconnect the 3P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. 4. Connect the voltmeter positive probe to the No.2 terminal and the negative probe to the No.1 terminal, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5 and 8 V. If the voltage is as specified, go to step 5. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK wire. - poor ground (G552). 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Attach a jumper wire between the No.1 and No.2 terminals, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts moving toward the "F" mark. CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer reaches "F" on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the fuel gauge. NOTE: The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, hence the fuel level is continuously indicated even when the ignition switch is OFF, and the pointer moves more slowly than that of a bimetal type. - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at all, replace the gauge. - If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4127 8. Remove the fuel gauge sending unit as shown. 9. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4128 If the resistance readings are beyond the range, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Gauge Sending Unit <--> [Fuel Tank Unit] > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sending Unit: Locations Below Center of Rear Seat Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Speed Control (Linkage): Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4136 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4137 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4138 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4139 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4140 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4141 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4142 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4143 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4144 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4145 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4146 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4147 Idle Speed Control (Linkage): Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4148 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4149 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4150 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed Control (Linkage) > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4151 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Specifications Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 3.5 Nm (2.5 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4155 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1 / Rear of D16Y8 Engine Rear of D16Y8 Engine Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1.2 / Top of D16Y7 Engine Top of D16Y7 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4158 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4159 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4160 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4161 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4162 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4163 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4164 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4165 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4166 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4167 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4168 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4169 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4170 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4171 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4172 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4173 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4174 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation Idle Air Control Idle Air Control Valve (IAC Valve) When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is depressed, the P/S load is high, or the alternator Is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the IAC Valve to maintain the correct idle speed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay > Page 4179 PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Main Relay (PGM-FI) Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4182 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4183 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4184 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4185 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4186 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4187 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4188 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4189 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4190 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4191 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4192 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4193 PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4194 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4195 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4196 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4197 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4198 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4199 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation Description The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4200 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4201 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4202 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4208 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4209 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4210 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4211 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4212 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4213 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4214 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4215 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4216 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4217 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4218 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4219 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4220 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4221 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4222 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4223 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4224 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation PURPOSE AND OPERATION The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON, and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4225 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4226 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4227 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Locations > PGM-FI Mail Relay > Page 4232 PGM-FI Main Relay: Locations Main Relay (PGM-FI) Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4235 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4236 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4237 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4238 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4239 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4240 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4241 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4242 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4243 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4244 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4245 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4246 PGM-FI Main Relay: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4247 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4248 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4249 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4250 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4251 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4252 PGM-FI Main Relay: Description and Operation Description The PGM-FI main relay actually contains two individual relays. This relay is located at the right side of the cowl. One relay is energized whenever the ignition is on which supplies the battery voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the fuel injectors, and power for the second relay. The second relay is energized for two seconds when the ignition is switched ON (II), and when the engine is running, to supply power to the fuel pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4253 PGM-FI Main Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay Testing NOTE: - If the engine starts and continues to run, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. - Use the terminal numbers below; ignore the terminal numbers molded into the relay. 1. Remove the PGM-FI main relay. 2. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.2 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check for continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, go on to step 3. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 3. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.3 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.7 terminal and No.6 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. - If there is continuity, go on to step 4. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. 4. Attach the battery positive terminal to the No.6 terminal and the battery negative terminal to the No.1 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. Then check that there is continuity between the No.5 terminal and No.4 terminal of the PGM-FI main relay. If there is continuity, the PGM-FI main relay is OK. If the fuel pump still does not work, go to Harness Testing. - If there is no continuity, replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4254 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > PGM-FI Main Relay <--> [Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System)] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4255 Part 2 Of 2 Troubleshooting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4261 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4262 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4263 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4264 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4265 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4266 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4267 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4268 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4269 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4270 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4271 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4272 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4273 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4274 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4275 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4276 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4281 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4282 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4283 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4284 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4285 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4286 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4287 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4288 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4289 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4290 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4291 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4292 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4293 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4294 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4295 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4296 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1 / Rear of D16Y8 Engine Rear of D16Y8 Engine Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1.2 / Top of D16Y7 Engine Top of D16Y7 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4300 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Specifications Throttle Body: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................ 22 Nm (16 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4304 Throttle Body: Description and Operation Description The throttle body is either a single-barrel side-draft type (D16Y5, D16Y8, B16A2 engine) or a down-draft type (D16Y7 engine). The lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine coolant from the cylinder head. The idle adjusting screw which regulates the bypass air is located on the top of the throttle body. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4305 Throttle Body: Testing and Inspection Inspection 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC 1.6L DOHC VTEC 1. Check that the throttle cable operates smoothly without binding or sticking. If there are any abnormalities, check for. Excessive wear or play in the throttle valve shaft. - Sticky or binding throttle lever at the fully closed position. - Clearance between throttle stop screw and throttle lever at the fully closed position. Replace the throttle body if there is excessive play in the throttle valve shaft or if the shaft is binding or sticking. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Body: Service and Repair Removal 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC, 1.6L DOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC NOTE: - Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. - After reassembly, adjust the throttle cable. - The TP sensor is not removable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4308 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Disassembly 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4309 1.6L DOHC VTEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA99I002000 > May > 99 > Recall 99I002000: Throttle Cable Replacement Throttle Cable: Recalls Recall 99I002000: Throttle Cable Replacement This is not a safety defect in accordance with the Safety Act. However, it is deemed a safety improvement campaign by the agency. Vehicle Description: Passenger vehicles. The accelerator pedal feels rough or notchy when you press it. It may feel like the car is not responding properly when traveling at low speeds and are required to move the accelerator pedal to make slight speed adjustments. Dealers will replace the throttle cable. Honda has decided to conduct a Product Improvement Campaign to replace the throttle cable. Owners can contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign Throttle Cable Replacement Throttle Cable: Recalls Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement 99-047 May 24, 1999 Applies To: 1996 Civic - ALL Product Update: Civic Throttle Cable (Supersedes 96-029, Rough Feel When Pressing the Accelerator Pedal, dated June 10, 1996) *BACKGROUND The accelerator pedal feels rough or notchy when you press it. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door: DX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...TL069407 HX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ7...TL071119 EX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...TL070668 3-door: CX - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH122085 DX - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH121933 4-door: DX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...TL051812 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH544896 LX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...TL053313 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH544755 EX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...TL050609 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ8...TH544644 CORRECTIVE ACTION Determine the lot number/production date of the throttle cable and, if necessary, replace the cable. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin.* PARTS INFORMATION Throttle Cable: LX - P/N 17910-501 -C03, H/C 5041157 CX, DX - P/N 17910-S01-G03, H/C 5038195 EX, HX - P/N 17910-S01-A02, H/C 5038138 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed part: P/N 17910-S01-A01 H/C 4810370 *Defect code: 338 Contention code: K62 Skill level: Repair Technician* INSPECTION PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4322 *1. Locate and write down the throttle cable production lot number stamped on the cable. 2. Does the lot number end in A? YES - Continue to step 3. NO - This vehicle is not affected. Center-punch the VIN and return the vehicle to the customer. 3. The fifth character (A0-S01 -ExxxA) is the production year code, E for 1995 and F for 1996. ^ If the cable was produced in 1995 (E), go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the cable was produced in 1996 (F), continue to step 4. 4. The three digits following the year are the date code for the date of production, 001 through 365. ^ If the date code is from 001 through 162, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the date code is 163 or greater, continue to step 5. 5. Check the operation of the accelerator pedal. ^ If the accelerator pedal does not move smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the accelerator pedal moves smoothly, center-punch the VIN and return the vehicle to the customer.* REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4323 1. Loosen the throttle cable locknut, and remove the cable from the bracket. Detach the inner cable from the throttle link. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4324 2. Remove the cable from the guide brackets, then twist and pull the throttle cable grommet out of the bulkhead. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4325 3. Under the dash, detach the inner cable end from the accelerator pedal bracket. Discard the old throttle cable. 4. From the engine compartment, feed a new throttle cable (see PARTS INFORMATION) through the bulkhead, then push and twist the grommet into place. Install the cable in its guide brackets. 5. Attach the inner cable end to the accelerator pedal. 6. Open the throttle valve fully, then attach the inner cable to the throttle link, and install the cable in the bracket without tightening the locknut. 7. Turn the adjusting nut until you have 10 to 12 mm of cable deflection, then tighten the locknut. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4326 8. Check the accelerator pedal; it should feel smooth when you operate it, and it should open the throttle valve fully when you press it to the floor. *9. Center-punch a completion mark above the first character of the engine compartment VIN.* Example of Customer Letter *May 1999 Product Update Campaign: Civic Throttle Cable Dear Civic Owner: We are sending this letter because we are interested in your satisfaction with your Civic. The throttle cable may cause the accelerator pedal to begin to feel rough or notchy when you press on it. Although this does not affect the operation of the throttle, it may feel like the car is not responding properly when you are traveling at low speeds and are required to move the accelerator pedal to make slight speed adjustments. What is the Update? An improved throttle cable is available that eliminates this rough or notchy feeling. What should you do? Call your local Honda dealer and make an appointment to have the car's throttle cable inspected and, if necessary, replaced. This work will be done free of charge. If your car has the original throttle cable, the dealer will replace it. If you had the throttle cable replaced under warranty, the improved part may already have been installed. The dealer will inspect the cable and, if it is not the improved part, replace it with the improved cable. What to do if our information is incorrect. This notice was mailed to you according to the latest information we have. If you no longer own this car, or some information in this notice is incorrect, please fill out and return the included, postage-paid Information Change Card. If you have questions. If you need assistance with locating a Honda dealer, or you have questions about this notice, please call the Honda Consumer Affairs Office at (800) 999-1009. Thank you for your cooperation. We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause you.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough Throttle Cable: Customer Interest Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough Bulletin No. 96-029 Issue Date JUNE 10, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under ENGINE Rough Feel When Pressing the Accelerator Pedal SYMPTOM The accelerator pedal feels rough when you press it. Throttle body operation is not affected. Many customers may think this problem is low-speed driveability and may not complain. Whenever a vehicle within the affected VIN range comes in for service, inspect the throttle for smooth operation. PROBABLE CAUSE The throttle cable. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the throttle cable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4332 1. Loosen the throttle cable locknut, and remove the cable from the bracket. Detach the inner cable from the throttle link. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4333 2. Remove the cable from the guide brackets, then twist and pull the throttle cable grommet out of the bulkhead. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4334 3. Under the dash, detach the inner cable end from the accelerator pedal bracket. Discard the old throttle cable. 4. From the engine compartment, feed a new throttle cable (see PARTS INFORMATION) through the bulkhead, then push and twist the grommet into place. Install the cable in its guide brackets. 5. Attach the inner cable end to the accelerator pedal. 6. Open the throttle valve fully, then attach the inner cable to the throttle link, and install the cable in the bracket without tightening the locknut. 7. Turn the adjusting nut until you have 10 to 12 mm of cable deflection, then tighten the locknut. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4335 8. Check the accelerator pedal; it should feel smooth when you operate it, and it should open the throttle valve fully when you press it to the floor. PARTS INFORMATION Throttle Cable LX - P/N 17910-S01-C03, H/C 5041157 CX, DX - P/N 17910-S01-G03, H/C 5038195 EX, HX: - P/N 17910-S01-A02, H/C 5038138 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 216103 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 17910-S01-A01 H/C 4810370 Defect code: 030 B99 Template ID: LX - 96-029A CX, DX - 96-029B EX, HX - 96-029C Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement Throttle Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement 99-047 May 24, 1999 Applies To: 1996 Civic - ALL Product Update: Civic Throttle Cable (Supersedes 96-029, Rough Feel When Pressing the Accelerator Pedal, dated June 10, 1996) *BACKGROUND The accelerator pedal feels rough or notchy when you press it. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door: DX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...TL069407 HX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ7...TL071119 EX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...TL070668 3-door: CX - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH122085 DX - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH121933 4-door: DX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...TL051812 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH544896 LX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...TL053313 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH544755 EX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...TL050609 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ8...TH544644 CORRECTIVE ACTION Determine the lot number/production date of the throttle cable and, if necessary, replace the cable. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin.* PARTS INFORMATION Throttle Cable: LX - P/N 17910-501 -C03, H/C 5041157 CX, DX - P/N 17910-S01-G03, H/C 5038195 EX, HX - P/N 17910-S01-A02, H/C 5038138 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed part: P/N 17910-S01-A01 H/C 4810370 *Defect code: 338 Contention code: K62 Skill level: Repair Technician* INSPECTION PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4341 *1. Locate and write down the throttle cable production lot number stamped on the cable. 2. Does the lot number end in A? YES - Continue to step 3. NO - This vehicle is not affected. Center-punch the VIN and return the vehicle to the customer. 3. The fifth character (A0-S01 -ExxxA) is the production year code, E for 1995 and F for 1996. ^ If the cable was produced in 1995 (E), go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the cable was produced in 1996 (F), continue to step 4. 4. The three digits following the year are the date code for the date of production, 001 through 365. ^ If the date code is from 001 through 162, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the date code is 163 or greater, continue to step 5. 5. Check the operation of the accelerator pedal. ^ If the accelerator pedal does not move smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the accelerator pedal moves smoothly, center-punch the VIN and return the vehicle to the customer.* REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4342 1. Loosen the throttle cable locknut, and remove the cable from the bracket. Detach the inner cable from the throttle link. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4343 2. Remove the cable from the guide brackets, then twist and pull the throttle cable grommet out of the bulkhead. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4344 3. Under the dash, detach the inner cable end from the accelerator pedal bracket. Discard the old throttle cable. 4. From the engine compartment, feed a new throttle cable (see PARTS INFORMATION) through the bulkhead, then push and twist the grommet into place. Install the cable in its guide brackets. 5. Attach the inner cable end to the accelerator pedal. 6. Open the throttle valve fully, then attach the inner cable to the throttle link, and install the cable in the bracket without tightening the locknut. 7. Turn the adjusting nut until you have 10 to 12 mm of cable deflection, then tighten the locknut. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4345 8. Check the accelerator pedal; it should feel smooth when you operate it, and it should open the throttle valve fully when you press it to the floor. *9. Center-punch a completion mark above the first character of the engine compartment VIN.* Example of Customer Letter *May 1999 Product Update Campaign: Civic Throttle Cable Dear Civic Owner: We are sending this letter because we are interested in your satisfaction with your Civic. The throttle cable may cause the accelerator pedal to begin to feel rough or notchy when you press on it. Although this does not affect the operation of the throttle, it may feel like the car is not responding properly when you are traveling at low speeds and are required to move the accelerator pedal to make slight speed adjustments. What is the Update? An improved throttle cable is available that eliminates this rough or notchy feeling. What should you do? Call your local Honda dealer and make an appointment to have the car's throttle cable inspected and, if necessary, replaced. This work will be done free of charge. If your car has the original throttle cable, the dealer will replace it. If you had the throttle cable replaced under warranty, the improved part may already have been installed. The dealer will inspect the cable and, if it is not the improved part, replace it with the improved cable. What to do if our information is incorrect. This notice was mailed to you according to the latest information we have. If you no longer own this car, or some information in this notice is incorrect, please fill out and return the included, postage-paid Information Change Card. If you have questions. If you need assistance with locating a Honda dealer, or you have questions about this notice, please call the Honda Consumer Affairs Office at (800) 999-1009. Thank you for your cooperation. We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause you.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > NHTSA99I002000 > May > 99 > Recall 99I002000: Throttle Cable Replacement Throttle Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 99I002000: Throttle Cable Replacement This is not a safety defect in accordance with the Safety Act. However, it is deemed a safety improvement campaign by the agency. Vehicle Description: Passenger vehicles. The accelerator pedal feels rough or notchy when you press it. It may feel like the car is not responding properly when traveling at low speeds and are required to move the accelerator pedal to make slight speed adjustments. Dealers will replace the throttle cable. Honda has decided to conduct a Product Improvement Campaign to replace the throttle cable. Owners can contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough Throttle Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough Bulletin No. 96-029 Issue Date JUNE 10, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under ENGINE Rough Feel When Pressing the Accelerator Pedal SYMPTOM The accelerator pedal feels rough when you press it. Throttle body operation is not affected. Many customers may think this problem is low-speed driveability and may not complain. Whenever a vehicle within the affected VIN range comes in for service, inspect the throttle for smooth operation. PROBABLE CAUSE The throttle cable. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the throttle cable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4354 1. Loosen the throttle cable locknut, and remove the cable from the bracket. Detach the inner cable from the throttle link. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4355 2. Remove the cable from the guide brackets, then twist and pull the throttle cable grommet out of the bulkhead. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4356 3. Under the dash, detach the inner cable end from the accelerator pedal bracket. Discard the old throttle cable. 4. From the engine compartment, feed a new throttle cable (see PARTS INFORMATION) through the bulkhead, then push and twist the grommet into place. Install the cable in its guide brackets. 5. Attach the inner cable end to the accelerator pedal. 6. Open the throttle valve fully, then attach the inner cable to the throttle link, and install the cable in the bracket without tightening the locknut. 7. Turn the adjusting nut until you have 10 to 12 mm of cable deflection, then tighten the locknut. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4357 8. Check the accelerator pedal; it should feel smooth when you operate it, and it should open the throttle valve fully when you press it to the floor. PARTS INFORMATION Throttle Cable LX - P/N 17910-S01-C03, H/C 5041157 CX, DX - P/N 17910-S01-G03, H/C 5038195 EX, HX: - P/N 17910-S01-A02, H/C 5038138 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 216103 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 17910-S01-A01 H/C 4810370 Defect code: 030 B99 Template ID: LX - 96-029A CX, DX - 96-029B EX, HX - 96-029C Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough Throttle Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough Bulletin No. 96-029 Issue Date JUNE 10, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under ENGINE Rough Feel When Pressing the Accelerator Pedal SYMPTOM The accelerator pedal feels rough when you press it. Throttle body operation is not affected. Many customers may think this problem is low-speed driveability and may not complain. Whenever a vehicle within the affected VIN range comes in for service, inspect the throttle for smooth operation. PROBABLE CAUSE The throttle cable. VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the throttle cable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4363 1. Loosen the throttle cable locknut, and remove the cable from the bracket. Detach the inner cable from the throttle link. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4364 2. Remove the cable from the guide brackets, then twist and pull the throttle cable grommet out of the bulkhead. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4365 3. Under the dash, detach the inner cable end from the accelerator pedal bracket. Discard the old throttle cable. 4. From the engine compartment, feed a new throttle cable (see PARTS INFORMATION) through the bulkhead, then push and twist the grommet into place. Install the cable in its guide brackets. 5. Attach the inner cable end to the accelerator pedal. 6. Open the throttle valve fully, then attach the inner cable to the throttle link, and install the cable in the bracket without tightening the locknut. 7. Turn the adjusting nut until you have 10 to 12 mm of cable deflection, then tighten the locknut. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 96029 > Jun > 96 > Engine - Accelerator Pedal Feels Rough > Page 4366 8. Check the accelerator pedal; it should feel smooth when you operate it, and it should open the throttle valve fully when you press it to the floor. PARTS INFORMATION Throttle Cable LX - P/N 17910-S01-C03, H/C 5041157 CX, DX - P/N 17910-S01-G03, H/C 5038195 EX, HX: - P/N 17910-S01-A02, H/C 5038138 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 216103 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 17910-S01-A01 H/C 4810370 Defect code: 030 B99 Template ID: LX - 96-029A CX, DX - 96-029B EX, HX - 96-029C Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement Throttle Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement 99-047 May 24, 1999 Applies To: 1996 Civic - ALL Product Update: Civic Throttle Cable (Supersedes 96-029, Rough Feel When Pressing the Accelerator Pedal, dated June 10, 1996) *BACKGROUND The accelerator pedal feels rough or notchy when you press it. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door: DX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...TL069407 HX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ7...TL071119 EX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...TL070668 3-door: CX - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH122085 DX - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH121933 4-door: DX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...TL051812 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH544896 LX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...TL053313 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH544755 EX - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...TL050609 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ8...TH544644 CORRECTIVE ACTION Determine the lot number/production date of the throttle cable and, if necessary, replace the cable. CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION All owners of affected vehicles will be mailed a notification of this campaign. An example of the customer notification is at the end of this service bulletin.* PARTS INFORMATION Throttle Cable: LX - P/N 17910-501 -C03, H/C 5041157 CX, DX - P/N 17910-S01-G03, H/C 5038195 EX, HX - P/N 17910-S01-A02, H/C 5038138 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Failed part: P/N 17910-S01-A01 H/C 4810370 *Defect code: 338 Contention code: K62 Skill level: Repair Technician* INSPECTION PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4372 *1. Locate and write down the throttle cable production lot number stamped on the cable. 2. Does the lot number end in A? YES - Continue to step 3. NO - This vehicle is not affected. Center-punch the VIN and return the vehicle to the customer. 3. The fifth character (A0-S01 -ExxxA) is the production year code, E for 1995 and F for 1996. ^ If the cable was produced in 1995 (E), go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the cable was produced in 1996 (F), continue to step 4. 4. The three digits following the year are the date code for the date of production, 001 through 365. ^ If the date code is from 001 through 162, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the date code is 163 or greater, continue to step 5. 5. Check the operation of the accelerator pedal. ^ If the accelerator pedal does not move smoothly, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If the accelerator pedal moves smoothly, center-punch the VIN and return the vehicle to the customer.* REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4373 1. Loosen the throttle cable locknut, and remove the cable from the bracket. Detach the inner cable from the throttle link. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4374 2. Remove the cable from the guide brackets, then twist and pull the throttle cable grommet out of the bulkhead. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4375 3. Under the dash, detach the inner cable end from the accelerator pedal bracket. Discard the old throttle cable. 4. From the engine compartment, feed a new throttle cable (see PARTS INFORMATION) through the bulkhead, then push and twist the grommet into place. Install the cable in its guide brackets. 5. Attach the inner cable end to the accelerator pedal. 6. Open the throttle valve fully, then attach the inner cable to the throttle link, and install the cable in the bracket without tightening the locknut. 7. Turn the adjusting nut until you have 10 to 12 mm of cable deflection, then tighten the locknut. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > 99-047 > May > 99 > Campaign - Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4376 8. Check the accelerator pedal; it should feel smooth when you operate it, and it should open the throttle valve fully when you press it to the floor. *9. Center-punch a completion mark above the first character of the engine compartment VIN.* Example of Customer Letter *May 1999 Product Update Campaign: Civic Throttle Cable Dear Civic Owner: We are sending this letter because we are interested in your satisfaction with your Civic. The throttle cable may cause the accelerator pedal to begin to feel rough or notchy when you press on it. Although this does not affect the operation of the throttle, it may feel like the car is not responding properly when you are traveling at low speeds and are required to move the accelerator pedal to make slight speed adjustments. What is the Update? An improved throttle cable is available that eliminates this rough or notchy feeling. What should you do? Call your local Honda dealer and make an appointment to have the car's throttle cable inspected and, if necessary, replaced. This work will be done free of charge. If your car has the original throttle cable, the dealer will replace it. If you had the throttle cable replaced under warranty, the improved part may already have been installed. The dealer will inspect the cable and, if it is not the improved part, replace it with the improved cable. What to do if our information is incorrect. This notice was mailed to you according to the latest information we have. If you no longer own this car, or some information in this notice is incorrect, please fill out and return the included, postage-paid Information Change Card. If you have questions. If you need assistance with locating a Honda dealer, or you have questions about this notice, please call the Honda Consumer Affairs Office at (800) 999-1009. Thank you for your cooperation. We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause you.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable: > NHTSA99I002000 > May > 99 > Recall 99I002000: Throttle Cable Replacement Throttle Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 99I002000: Throttle Cable Replacement This is not a safety defect in accordance with the Safety Act. However, it is deemed a safety improvement campaign by the agency. Vehicle Description: Passenger vehicles. The accelerator pedal feels rough or notchy when you press it. It may feel like the car is not responding properly when traveling at low speeds and are required to move the accelerator pedal to make slight speed adjustments. Dealers will replace the throttle cable. Honda has decided to conduct a Product Improvement Campaign to replace the throttle cable. Owners can contact Honda at 1-800-999-1009. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4381 Throttle Cable: Specifications Throttle Cable Deflection .......................................................................................................................................................... 10 - 12 mm (0.39 - 0.47 in.) Adjusting Lock Nut ............................................................................................................................... .................................................... 9.8 Nm (7.2 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4382 Throttle Cable: Testing and Inspection Inspection/Adjustment 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Check that the throttle cable operates smoothly with no binding or sticking. Repair as necessary. 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC 1.6L DOHC VTEC 3. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable deflection should be 10-12 mm (3/8-1/2 in.). 4. If deflection is not within specs, loosen the locknut, turn the adjusting nut until the deflection is as specified, then retighten the locknut. 5. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4383 throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle position whenever you release the accelerator pedal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4384 Throttle Cable: Adjustments Inspection/Adjustment 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 2. Check that the throttle cable operates smoothly with no binding or sticking. Repair as necessary. 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC 1.6L DOHC VTEC 3. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable deflection should be 10-12 mm (3/8-1/2 in.). 4. If deflection is not within specs, loosen the locknut, turn the adjusting nut until the deflection is as specified, then retighten the locknut. 5. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4385 throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle position whenever you release the accelerator pedal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4386 Throttle Cable: Service and Repair Installation 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC, 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC: 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC 1. Open the throttle valve fully, then install the throttle cable in the throttle linkage, and install the cable housing in the cable bracket. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Hold the cable sheath, removing all slack from the cable. 4. Set the locknut on the cable bracket. Adjust the adjusting nut so that its free play is 0 mm. 1.6L SOHC VTEC-E, 1.6L SOHC VTEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable <--> [Throttle Cable/Linkage] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4387 1.6L SOHC Non-VTEC 5. Remove the cable sheath from the throttle bracket, reset the adjusting nut and tighten the locknut. 1.6L DOHC VTEC: 1. Open the throttle valve fully, then install the throttle cable in the throttle linkage, and install the cable housing in the cable bracket. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Hold the throttle link to the throttle lever; there should be no clearance. 4. Hold the cable sheath, removing all slack from the cable. 5. Turn the adjusting nut until it is 3 mm (1/8 in.) away from the cable bracket. 6. Tighten the locknut. The cable deflection should now be 10 - 12 mm (3/8 - 1/2 in.). If not, see Inspection/Adjustment. See: Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4392 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4393 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4394 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4395 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4396 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4397 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4398 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4399 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4400 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4401 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4402 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4403 Throttle Full Open Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4404 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4405 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4406 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4407 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1 / Rear of D16Y8 Engine Rear of D16Y8 Engine Throttle Position (TP) Sensor - 1.2 / Top of D16Y7 Engine Top of D16Y7 Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4411 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The TP Sensor is a potentiometer. It is connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the throttle position sensor varies the voltage signal to the ECM/PCM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations Number One Cylinder: Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Timing Marks and Indicators > System Information > Locations Ignition Timing Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4426 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Distributor: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 4435 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 4436 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 4437 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping Distributor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping 05-027 September 19, 2008 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic DX, LX, EX - ALL MIL Is On With DTC P0420 or Engine Ping Under Load (Supersedes 05-027, dated May 20, 2008, to update the information marked by black bars and shown with asterisks.) SYMPTOM MIL is on with DTC P0420 (catalyst system efficiency below threshold) or the engine pings under load. DTC P0301 (No. 1 cylinder misfire detected), P0302 (No. 2 cylinder misfire detected), P0303 (No. 3 cylinder misfire detected), or P0304 (No. 4 cylinder misfire detected), may also be set. PROBABLE CAUSE Poor connections at the igniter terminals. CORRECTIVE ACTION Crimp the wires from the distributor subassembly, and install a new catalytic converter if code P0420 is stored in the PCM/ECM. PARTS INFORMATION TOOL INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 4443 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 30130-P06-006 H/C 4317988 Defect Code: 06401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the distributor assembly from the vehicle: ^ Refer to 1996-2000 Civic Service Manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword DISTRIBUTOR, and select Distributor Replacement from the list. 2. Remove the distributor cap, the rotor, and the cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 4444 3. Use a diagonal cutter to cut away the side of the terminal boot as shown, and slide the boot down the wire. NOTE: Steps 4 thru 5 are done for each terminal shown, one at a time. Use caution not to twist or bend the terminals during removal. If you damage the terminals or the distributor, replace the distributor subassembly. 4. Center the terminal in the opening of the crimping tool, and carefully crimp the terminal by closing the tool completely. 5. Slide the boot back down over the terminal. The open end will not cause a problem. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the other two terminals. 7. Reinstall the terminals. When reinstalling a terminal, do not insert it at an angle or wiggle it from side to side. This can spread the terminal and cause a poor contact. 8. Reassemble the distributor, install a new O-ring, and install it in the vehicle. NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Distributor: > 05-027 > Sep > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0420/Engine Ping > Page 4445 If the terminals or wires are damaged, replace the distributor housing with the appropriate part listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 9. Replace the catalytic converter if code P0420 was stored in the PCM/ECM. ^ See section 9 of the service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword EXHAUST, and select Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation from the list. 10. Start the vehicle. Check the ignition timing, and adjust it if necessary. 11. If the MIL was on, clear the code with the HDS. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4446 Distributor: Locations Right Side of D16Y8 Engine (Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Distributor: Exploded Views HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 4449 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4450 Distributor: Service and Repair Removal: 1. Disconnect the connector from the distributor. 2. Disconnect the ignition wires from the distributor ignition (DI) cap. 3. Remove the mounting bolts from the distributor, then remove the distributor from the cylinder head. Installation: NOTE: Before you install the distributor, bring the No.1 piston to compression stroke TDC. 1. Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, then install it. 2. Slip the distributor into position. NOTE: The lug on the end of the distributor and its mating grooves in the camshaft end are both offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the distributor 180° out of time. 3. Install the mounting bolts, and tighten them lightly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Distributor, Ignition > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4451 4. Connect the ignition wires to the distributor ignition (DI) cap as shown. 5. Connect the connector to the distributor. 6. Set the ignition timing. 7. After setting the ignition timing, tighten the mounting bolts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Hall Effect Sensor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Cable: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4460 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4461 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4462 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4463 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4464 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4465 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4466 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4467 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4468 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4469 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4470 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4471 Ignition Cable: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4472 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4473 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4474 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4475 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Cable > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4476 Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Carefully remove the ignition wires by pulling on the rubber boots. Do not bend the wires; you might break them inside. 1. Check the condition of the ignition wire terminals. If any terminal is corroded, clean it, and if it is broken or distorted, replace the ignition wire. 2. Connect ohmmeter probes and measure resistance. 3. If resistance exceeds 25 K Ohm, replace the ignition wire. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Ignition Coil: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips > Page 4481 Ignition Coil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P1381 Set SOURCE: Honda Service News July 2004 TITLE: DTC P1381 Set? Check the Ignition Coil Shield. APPLIES TO: 1998-02 Accord L4 or 1996-00 Civic SERVICE TIP: Troubleshooting a DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then remove the distributor cap, and make sure the coil shield is in place and it's correctly installed as shown. If the coil shield installation looks OK, then the ignition coil is the probably faulty and should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4482 Ignition Coil: Specifications HITACHI TEC NOTE: Resistance will vary with the coil temperature; specifications are at 68°F (20°C). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Coil: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4485 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4486 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4487 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4488 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4489 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4490 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4491 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4492 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4493 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4494 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4495 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4496 Ignition Coil: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4497 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4498 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4499 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4500 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4501 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Ignition Coil Schematic Diagram PURPOSE The Ignition Coil transforms battery voltage into ignition voltage and delivers it in the form of a high voltage surge to the secondary ignition components. OPERATION The ignition coil (located in the distributor) uses the principle of mutual induction to step up battery (low) voltage to ignition (high) voltage. The ignition coil contains two sets of copper wire windings around a soft iron core. The primary winding is made of a hundred or so turns of a heavy gage wire. It is connected to the battery through the ignition switch (+) and to the ignition control module (ignitor) (-) so that current flows through it, thus creating a magnetic field. The secondary winding is connected to the coil output tower through the iron core. It contains several thousand turns of wire wound directly onto the iron core. The ratio of the number of wraps in the secondary winding to the number of wraps in the primary windings determines the output voltage of the coil. The ratio is approx. 1 to 110. When current flow in the primary winding is stopped (by the ignitor breaking the circuit ground), the collapse of the magnetic field causes a high voltage (20,000 volts or more) to be induced in the secondary windings. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4502 Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection HITACHI TEC Using an ohmmeter, measure resistance between the terminals. If the resistance is not within specifications, replace the ignition coil. NOTE: Resistance will vary with the coil temperature; specifications are at 68°F (20°C). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4507 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4508 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4509 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4510 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4511 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4512 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4513 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4514 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4515 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4516 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4517 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4518 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4519 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4520 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4521 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4522 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4523 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - See Malfunction Indicator Lamp when the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is turned ON. - Perform the following input test for the ignition control module (ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems. INPUT TEST FOR THE IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM) 1. Remove the distributor ignition (DI) cap, the distributor ignition (DI) rotor and the leak cover (TEC). 2. Disconnect the wires from the ICM. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the BLK/YEL wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no battery voltage, check the BLK/YEL wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the ICM. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the wire*1 and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no battery voltage, check: the ignition coil. - the wire*1 between the ignition coil and the ICM. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. *1: BLU2 wire (HITACHI) WHT/BLU wire (TEC) 5. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connector A (32P). Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire between the ECM/PCM and the ICM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4524 - There should be continuity. 6. Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire to body ground. - There should be no continuity. 7. Check for continuity on the BLU1 wire between the test tachometer connector and the ICM. - There should be continuity. 8. Check for continuity on the BLU1 wire to body ground. - There should be no continuity. 9. If all the tests are normal, replace the ICM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Underside of Vehicle, Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Ignition Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4533 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4534 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4535 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4536 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4537 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4538 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4539 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4540 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4541 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4542 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4543 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4544 Ignition Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4545 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4546 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4547 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4548 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4549 Ignition Control Module: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - See Malfunction Indicator Lamp when the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is turned ON. - Perform the following input test for the ignition control module (ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems. INPUT TEST FOR THE IGNITION CONTROL MODULE (ICM) 1. Remove the distributor ignition (DI) cap, the distributor ignition (DI) rotor and the leak cover (TEC). 2. Disconnect the wires from the ICM. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the BLK/YEL wire and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no battery voltage, check the BLK/YEL wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the ICM. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between the wire*1 and body ground. There should be battery voltage. If there is no battery voltage, check: the ignition coil. - the wire*1 between the ignition coil and the ICM. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. *1: BLU2 wire (HITACHI) WHT/BLU wire (TEC) 5. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connector A (32P). Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire between the ECM/PCM and the ICM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4550 - There should be continuity. 6. Check for continuity on the YEL/GRN wire to body ground. - There should be no continuity. 7. Check for continuity on the BLU1 wire between the test tachometer connector and the ICM. - There should be continuity. 8. Check for continuity on the BLU1 wire to body ground. - There should be no continuity. 9. If all the tests are normal, replace the ICM. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations HITACHI Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4555 TEC Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Hall Effect Sensor, Ignition > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Hall Effect Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Ignition Hall Effect Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - DTC P1381 Diagnostic Tips Troubleshooting Tips for DTC P1381 Troubleshooting a '98-02 Accord L4 or '96-00 Civic with DTC P1381 (CYP sensor intermittent interruption)? If you can't find anything wrong after following the procedure in the appropriate S/M, then try this: 1. Remove the distributor cap, and make sure the ignition coil shield is there and it's correctly installed. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation is right, go to step 2. ^ If the ignition coil shield installation isn't right, properly install the coil shield. 2. Unplug the 4P connector from the alternator 3. Test-drive the vehicle. ^ If DTC P1381 comes back with the alternator unplugged, replace the distributor housing. ^ If DTC P1381 doesn't come back, go to step 4. 4. Plug the 4P connector into the alternator, and use the HDS to do a charging system test. Look at the alternator diode pattern on the display screen. ^ If the diode pattern doesn't look right, replace the alternator. A faulty diode can cause electrical interference that sets this DTC. ^ If the diode pattern looks OK, press on with normal troubleshooting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations Knock Sensor: Locations Underside of Vehicle, Rear of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator for: Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: Advanced ignition timing - Loose spark plug - Plug heat range too low - Insufficient cooling Fouled plugs may be caused by: Retarded ignition timing - Oil in combustion chamber - Incorrect spark plug gap - Plug heat range too high - Excessive idling/low speed running - Clogged air cleaner element - Deteriorated ignition coil or ignition wires 2. D16Y5, D16Y7, D16Y8 engine: - Adjust the gap with a suitable gapping tool, and replace the plug if the center electrode is rounded as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4575 3. B16A2 engine: - Do not adjust the gap of a platinum tip plug: replace the spark plug if the center electrode is rounded or if the gap is not within the specifications. NOTE: Use only the spark plugs listed. 4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to 18 N.m (1.8 kg.m, 13 lb.ft). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Tachometer Connector > Component Information > Locations Tachometer Connector: Locations Left Rear Corner Of Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each key position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No.7 and No.8 terminals. - If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. - If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Key Interlock Solenoid Test > Page 4587 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector. 3. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal and ground to the No.2 terminal of the solenoid momentarily. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No.2 (-) terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 4. Check that the shift lock releases when the release lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the release lever is released. 5. If the solenoid does not work, replace the solenoid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set 00-012 June 26, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-99 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Harsh Shifting Automatic Transmission (Supersedes 00-012, dated June 20, 2000) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM *The transmission shifts harshly, or it may stay in first gear. The harsh shifting is more noticeable on the 1-2 and 2-3 upshifts under light throttle. It is not affected by operating temperature. The MIL may be on with DTC P0730 or P0715 stored.* PROBABLE CAUSE *Contamination of the linear solenoid and its associated passages inside the transmission, or a broken spring internal to the transmission.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION *Flush the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1, then replace the linear solenoid. If shift feel is not affected, replace the transmission.* PARTS INFORMATION Linear Solenoid Assembly: P/N 28250-P4R-315, H/C 5317219 Drain Bolt Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Genuine Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 Civic and 2WD CR-V - 11.6 quarts required 4WD CR-V - 12.4 quarts required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4596 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Drain the transmission. Refill it with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. 3. Start the engine. 4. With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the transmission to D4 5. Release the brake pedal. Press on the accelerator, and bring the speedometer up to 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into fourth, and that the torque converter locks up. 6. Apply the brakes to stop the front wheels. 7. Shift to reverse, and then to neutral. 8. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 4 through 7) four more times. 9. Turn off the engine. 10. Repeat the above drain, refill, and shifting procedure (steps 2 through 9) two more times. 11. Drain the transmission. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Refill the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4597 12. Disconnect the linear solenoid electrical connector. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the linear solenoid. 13. Inspect the linear solenoid mounting surface on the transmission. Remove any contamination. 14. Install the new linear solenoid. Reconnect the electrical connector. 15. Use the PGM Tester to erase any DTCs in the powertrain control module (PCM). *16. Test-drive the vehicle to check the shift feel. If it still shifts harshly, install a remanufactured transmission.* DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set Shift Control Solenoid Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set 00-012 June 26, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-99 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Harsh Shifting Automatic Transmission (Supersedes 00-012, dated June 20, 2000) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM *The transmission shifts harshly, or it may stay in first gear. The harsh shifting is more noticeable on the 1-2 and 2-3 upshifts under light throttle. It is not affected by operating temperature. The MIL may be on with DTC P0730 or P0715 stored.* PROBABLE CAUSE *Contamination of the linear solenoid and its associated passages inside the transmission, or a broken spring internal to the transmission.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION *Flush the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1, then replace the linear solenoid. If shift feel is not affected, replace the transmission.* PARTS INFORMATION Linear Solenoid Assembly: P/N 28250-P4R-315, H/C 5317219 Drain Bolt Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Genuine Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 Civic and 2WD CR-V - 11.6 quarts required 4WD CR-V - 12.4 quarts required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4603 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Drain the transmission. Refill it with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. 3. Start the engine. 4. With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the transmission to D4 5. Release the brake pedal. Press on the accelerator, and bring the speedometer up to 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into fourth, and that the torque converter locks up. 6. Apply the brakes to stop the front wheels. 7. Shift to reverse, and then to neutral. 8. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 4 through 7) four more times. 9. Turn off the engine. 10. Repeat the above drain, refill, and shifting procedure (steps 2 through 9) two more times. 11. Drain the transmission. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Refill the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4604 12. Disconnect the linear solenoid electrical connector. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the linear solenoid. 13. Inspect the linear solenoid mounting surface on the transmission. Remove any contamination. 14. Install the new linear solenoid. Reconnect the electrical connector. 15. Use the PGM Tester to erase any DTCs in the powertrain control module (PCM). *16. Test-drive the vehicle to check the shift feel. If it still shifts harshly, install a remanufactured transmission.* DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4605 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Without CVT Lower Front of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4606 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair Without CVT NOTE: Shift control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and shift control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the shift control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new shift control solenoid valve A/B with a new filter/gasket and the clamp bracket. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, and reconnect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Throttle Valve Solenoid: Electrical Specifications Resistance ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 4.0 - 9.0 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4611 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Mechanical Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Alternative View Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Alternative View > Page 4614 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Locations Photo 30 Lower Front Of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4615 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the linear solenoid connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of the linear solenoid connector. STANDARD: 4.0 - 9.0 Ohms 3. If the resistance is out of specification, replace the linear solenoid assembly. 4. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the linear solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 5. If not, remove the linear solenoid assembly. 6. Check that the linear solenoid fluid passage for dust or dirt. 7. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the linear solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Check that the valve moves. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check that the valve releases. NOTE: You can see the valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the linear solenoid assembly. 9. If the valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or the linear solenoid does not operate, replace the linear solenoid assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4616 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair 1. Remove the mounting bolts and the linear solenoid assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the linear solenoid assembly and transmission housing. 3. Install a new linear solenoid assembly with a new gasket. NOTE: Do not pinch the gasket when installing the linear solenoid; make sure that the gasket is installed properly in the mounting groove of the linear solenoid. 4. Check the linear solenoid connector for rust, dirt or oil, and connect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Electrical Specifications Without CVT Solenoid Valve A Between terminal 2 and ground .............................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 25 Ohms Solenoid Valve B Between terminal 1 and ground .............................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 25 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4621 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Mechanical Specifications Without CVT Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4622 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Locations Without CVT Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4623 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Testing and Inspection Without CVT 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the lock-up control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. STANDARD: 14 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. - A clicking sound should be heard. - Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. - A clicking sound should be heard. - Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4624 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Service and Repair Without CVT NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new lock-up control solenoid valve A/B with a new filter/gasket. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, and reconnect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations Shift Indicator: Locations SRS components are located in this area Review the SRS component locations precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4632 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4633 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4634 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4635 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4636 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4637 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4638 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4639 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4640 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4641 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4642 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4643 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4644 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4645 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4646 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4647 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4648 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4649 Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4650 A/T Gear Position Indicator Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4651 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes ON. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come ON. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the Powertrain (except HX) or Transmission (HX) Control Module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for HX) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 4654 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 4655 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4656 Shift Indicator: Adjustments 1. Shift to the [P] position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of [D4] or [D4] position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No.1 and No.7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [N] in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4657 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral". 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [P] anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4661 Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4667 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagrams Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4671 Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4672 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4673 Shift Interlock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock System Shift Lock System 1. Disconnect the 8P connector from the interlock control unit. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4674 - If all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good control unit, and recheck the system. If the check is OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and you step on the brake pedal (with the shift lever in [P]), the shift lock system is electronically normal; if the shift lever cannot be shifted from [P], test the A/T gear position switch, park pin switch. Reconnect the 8P connector to the interlock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch Signal <--> [Brake Switch - TCC] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4683 Mainshaft Sensor: Locations Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations Park Pin Switch: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4687 Park Pin Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the park pin switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with: - the shift lever any position other than [P], or - the push button pushed in [P]. There should be continuity. 4. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with the shift lever in [P] and the push button released. There should be no continuity. If necessary, replace the park pin switch. NOTE: Park pin switch 4P connector No.1 and No.2 terminals are for A/T gear position console light. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications A/T Gear Position Signal: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4691 A/T Gear Position Signal: Locations Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4694 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4695 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4696 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4697 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4698 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4699 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4700 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4701 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4702 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4703 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4704 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4705 A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4706 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4707 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4708 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4709 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4710 All Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4711 A/T Gear Position Signal: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come on. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the powertrain (all except '96-'98 CVT) or transmission ('96-'98 CVT) control module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for CVT) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4712 A/T Gear Position Signal: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4713 A/T Gear Position Signal: Adjustments 1. Shift to the P position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of D4 or D position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No. 1 and No. 7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. - If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position N in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4714 A/T Gear Position Signal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown above. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the P and N position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position P anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Top of Transmission (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 4721 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Drive Pulley Speed Sensor Right Side Lower Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 4722 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 4723 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 4724 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Secondary Gear Shaft Speed Sensor Right Side Rear of Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4725 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the countershaft speed sensor from the right side cover. 2. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the mainshaft speed sensor from the transmission housing. 3. Replace the 0-ring with a new one before installing the countershaft speed sensor or the mainshaft speed sensor. NOTE: Install the mainshaft speed sensor washer on the mainshaft speed sensor. The mainshaft speed sensor washer is used on models with the D16Y7 engine. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4731 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4732 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4733 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4734 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4735 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4736 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4737 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4738 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4739 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4740 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4741 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4742 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4743 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4744 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4745 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4746 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4747 CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each key position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No.7 and No.8 terminals. - If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. - If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Key Interlock Solenoid Test > Page 4760 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector. 3. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal and ground to the No.2 terminal of the solenoid momentarily. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No.2 (-) terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 4. Check that the shift lock releases when the release lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the release lever is released. 5. If the solenoid does not work, replace the solenoid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set 00-012 June 26, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-99 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Harsh Shifting Automatic Transmission (Supersedes 00-012, dated June 20, 2000) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM *The transmission shifts harshly, or it may stay in first gear. The harsh shifting is more noticeable on the 1-2 and 2-3 upshifts under light throttle. It is not affected by operating temperature. The MIL may be on with DTC P0730 or P0715 stored.* PROBABLE CAUSE *Contamination of the linear solenoid and its associated passages inside the transmission, or a broken spring internal to the transmission.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION *Flush the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1, then replace the linear solenoid. If shift feel is not affected, replace the transmission.* PARTS INFORMATION Linear Solenoid Assembly: P/N 28250-P4R-315, H/C 5317219 Drain Bolt Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Genuine Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 Civic and 2WD CR-V - 11.6 quarts required 4WD CR-V - 12.4 quarts required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4769 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Drain the transmission. Refill it with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. 3. Start the engine. 4. With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the transmission to D4 5. Release the brake pedal. Press on the accelerator, and bring the speedometer up to 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into fourth, and that the torque converter locks up. 6. Apply the brakes to stop the front wheels. 7. Shift to reverse, and then to neutral. 8. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 4 through 7) four more times. 9. Turn off the engine. 10. Repeat the above drain, refill, and shifting procedure (steps 2 through 9) two more times. 11. Drain the transmission. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Refill the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4770 12. Disconnect the linear solenoid electrical connector. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the linear solenoid. 13. Inspect the linear solenoid mounting surface on the transmission. Remove any contamination. 14. Install the new linear solenoid. Reconnect the electrical connector. 15. Use the PGM Tester to erase any DTCs in the powertrain control module (PCM). *16. Test-drive the vehicle to check the shift feel. If it still shifts harshly, install a remanufactured transmission.* DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set Shift Control Solenoid Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set 00-012 June 26, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-99 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Harsh Shifting Automatic Transmission (Supersedes 00-012, dated June 20, 2000) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM *The transmission shifts harshly, or it may stay in first gear. The harsh shifting is more noticeable on the 1-2 and 2-3 upshifts under light throttle. It is not affected by operating temperature. The MIL may be on with DTC P0730 or P0715 stored.* PROBABLE CAUSE *Contamination of the linear solenoid and its associated passages inside the transmission, or a broken spring internal to the transmission.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION *Flush the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1, then replace the linear solenoid. If shift feel is not affected, replace the transmission.* PARTS INFORMATION Linear Solenoid Assembly: P/N 28250-P4R-315, H/C 5317219 Drain Bolt Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Genuine Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 Civic and 2WD CR-V - 11.6 quarts required 4WD CR-V - 12.4 quarts required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4776 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Drain the transmission. Refill it with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. 3. Start the engine. 4. With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the transmission to D4 5. Release the brake pedal. Press on the accelerator, and bring the speedometer up to 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into fourth, and that the torque converter locks up. 6. Apply the brakes to stop the front wheels. 7. Shift to reverse, and then to neutral. 8. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 4 through 7) four more times. 9. Turn off the engine. 10. Repeat the above drain, refill, and shifting procedure (steps 2 through 9) two more times. 11. Drain the transmission. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Refill the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4777 12. Disconnect the linear solenoid electrical connector. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the linear solenoid. 13. Inspect the linear solenoid mounting surface on the transmission. Remove any contamination. 14. Install the new linear solenoid. Reconnect the electrical connector. 15. Use the PGM Tester to erase any DTCs in the powertrain control module (PCM). *16. Test-drive the vehicle to check the shift feel. If it still shifts harshly, install a remanufactured transmission.* DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns Constant Velocity Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns 91-029 January 26, 1999 Applies To: ALL 1988 and later Models* Clicking Noise While Turning (Supersedes 91-029, dated April 17, 1992) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A clicking noise is heard while making right or left turns at 10 mph or less. PROBABLE CAUSE Worn outboard driveshaft joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the noisy outboard driveshaft joint. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Failed part: Use the replacement Part Number Skill level: Repair Technician PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS DIAGNOSIS (Driving method) 1. Drive the car in a circle in an open parking lot at approximately 10 mph with the brakes slightly applied. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 4783 2. Have an assistant stand in the center of the circle and listen for the clicking noise. 3. Drive the car in the opposite direction. The assistant should be able to tell which axle is making the noise. DIAGNOSIS (On-hoist method) 1. Raise the car on a hoist and start the engine. 2. With the transmission in first gear (manual transmission) or D4 (automatic transmission), increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm. 3. Apply the brakes to load the engine speed to 1,500 rpm while maintaining the same throttle position. 4. Turn the wheels slowly to full left and full right positions. Have an assistant listen to determine which axle is making the noise. NOTE: A driveshaft with a light degree of noise may not be detected by this on-hoist method. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the driveshaft as described in Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. 2. Use diagonal cutters to cut the two boot bands and the outboard joint boot, then remove them from the driveshaft. 3. Wipe off the grease to expose the outboard joint. Measure and record distance "A" (from the splined end of the driveshaft to the inner race) as a reference for reassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 4784 4. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise. 5. *Remove the outboard joint using the threaded adapter (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) and a commercially available 5/8" x 18 slide hammer.* 6. Remove and discard the "C" clip from the driveshaft. Clean and inspect the driveshaft splines and ring groove for burrs or other defects. 7. Install the new outboard joint boot provided in the kit. Slide it slowly onto the driveshaft to avoid damaging the boot. 8. Install the new "C" clip onto the ring groove of the driveshaft. 9. Insert the driveshaft in the new outboard joint. Make sure the "C" clip is centered on the shaft and is resting against the chamfered edge of the inner race. 10. Remove the driveshaft from the vise. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 4785 11. To drive the outboard joint on the rest of the way, pick up the assembly and let it fall from about 10 cm (4 to 5 in.) onto a hard surface. NOTICE Do not use a hammer; excessive force may damage the driveshaft. 12. Measure distance "A" (from the splines to the inner race of the joint). If the distance is more than your measurement in Step 3, repeat Step 11. 13. When distance "A" equals your measurement in Step 3, the "C" clip should be seated in the joint. Tap on the inner race with a plastic hammer to make sure the joint does not move on the driveshaft. 14. Fit the small end of the boot into the boot groove on the driveshaft. 15. Install the small boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 16. Pack the outboard boot with the grease included in the kit. Pack the outboard joint with the remaining grease, then fit the boot over the outboard joint. 17. Install the large boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 18. Reinstall the driveshaft assembly into the car. Refer to Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 4791 2. Have an assistant stand in the center of the circle and listen for the clicking noise. 3. Drive the car in the opposite direction. The assistant should be able to tell which axle is making the noise. DIAGNOSIS (On-hoist method) 1. Raise the car on a hoist and start the engine. 2. With the transmission in first gear (manual transmission) or D4 (automatic transmission), increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm. 3. Apply the brakes to load the engine speed to 1,500 rpm while maintaining the same throttle position. 4. Turn the wheels slowly to full left and full right positions. Have an assistant listen to determine which axle is making the noise. NOTE: A driveshaft with a light degree of noise may not be detected by this on-hoist method. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the driveshaft as described in Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. 2. Use diagonal cutters to cut the two boot bands and the outboard joint boot, then remove them from the driveshaft. 3. Wipe off the grease to expose the outboard joint. Measure and record distance "A" (from the splined end of the driveshaft to the inner race) as a reference for reassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 4792 4. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise. 5. *Remove the outboard joint using the threaded adapter (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) and a commercially available 5/8" x 18 slide hammer.* 6. Remove and discard the "C" clip from the driveshaft. Clean and inspect the driveshaft splines and ring groove for burrs or other defects. 7. Install the new outboard joint boot provided in the kit. Slide it slowly onto the driveshaft to avoid damaging the boot. 8. Install the new "C" clip onto the ring groove of the driveshaft. 9. Insert the driveshaft in the new outboard joint. Make sure the "C" clip is centered on the shaft and is resting against the chamfered edge of the inner race. 10. Remove the driveshaft from the vise. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 4793 11. To drive the outboard joint on the rest of the way, pick up the assembly and let it fall from about 10 cm (4 to 5 in.) onto a hard surface. NOTICE Do not use a hammer; excessive force may damage the driveshaft. 12. Measure distance "A" (from the splines to the inner race of the joint). If the distance is more than your measurement in Step 3, repeat Step 11. 13. When distance "A" equals your measurement in Step 3, the "C" clip should be seated in the joint. Tap on the inner race with a plastic hammer to make sure the joint does not move on the driveshaft. 14. Fit the small end of the boot into the boot groove on the driveshaft. 15. Install the small boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 16. Pack the outboard boot with the grease included in the kit. Pack the outboard joint with the remaining grease, then fit the boot over the outboard joint. 17. Install the large boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 18. Reinstall the driveshaft assembly into the car. Refer to Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4794 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Without CVT Lower Front of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4795 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair Without CVT NOTE: Shift control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and shift control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the shift control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new shift control solenoid valve A/B with a new filter/gasket and the clamp bracket. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, and reconnect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Throttle Valve Solenoid: Electrical Specifications Resistance ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 4.0 - 9.0 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4800 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Mechanical Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Alternative View Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Alternative View > Page 4803 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Locations Photo 30 Lower Front Of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4804 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the linear solenoid connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of the linear solenoid connector. STANDARD: 4.0 - 9.0 Ohms 3. If the resistance is out of specification, replace the linear solenoid assembly. 4. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the linear solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 5. If not, remove the linear solenoid assembly. 6. Check that the linear solenoid fluid passage for dust or dirt. 7. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the linear solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Check that the valve moves. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check that the valve releases. NOTE: You can see the valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the linear solenoid assembly. 9. If the valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or the linear solenoid does not operate, replace the linear solenoid assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4805 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair 1. Remove the mounting bolts and the linear solenoid assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the linear solenoid assembly and transmission housing. 3. Install a new linear solenoid assembly with a new gasket. NOTE: Do not pinch the gasket when installing the linear solenoid; make sure that the gasket is installed properly in the mounting groove of the linear solenoid. 4. Check the linear solenoid connector for rust, dirt or oil, and connect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Electrical Specifications Without CVT Solenoid Valve A Between terminal 2 and ground .............................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 25 Ohms Solenoid Valve B Between terminal 1 and ground .............................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 25 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4810 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Mechanical Specifications Without CVT Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4811 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Locations Without CVT Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4812 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Testing and Inspection Without CVT 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the lock-up control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. STANDARD: 14 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. - A clicking sound should be heard. - Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. - A clicking sound should be heard. - Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4813 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Service and Repair Without CVT NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new lock-up control solenoid valve A/B with a new filter/gasket. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, and reconnect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each key position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No.7 and No.8 terminals. - If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. - If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Key Interlock Solenoid Test > Page 4821 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector. 3. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal and ground to the No.2 terminal of the solenoid momentarily. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No.2 (-) terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 4. Check that the shift lock releases when the release lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the release lever is released. 5. If the solenoid does not work, replace the solenoid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set 00-012 June 26, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-99 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Harsh Shifting Automatic Transmission (Supersedes 00-012, dated June 20, 2000) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM *The transmission shifts harshly, or it may stay in first gear. The harsh shifting is more noticeable on the 1-2 and 2-3 upshifts under light throttle. It is not affected by operating temperature. The MIL may be on with DTC P0730 or P0715 stored.* PROBABLE CAUSE *Contamination of the linear solenoid and its associated passages inside the transmission, or a broken spring internal to the transmission.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION *Flush the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1, then replace the linear solenoid. If shift feel is not affected, replace the transmission.* PARTS INFORMATION Linear Solenoid Assembly: P/N 28250-P4R-315, H/C 5317219 Drain Bolt Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Genuine Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 Civic and 2WD CR-V - 11.6 quarts required 4WD CR-V - 12.4 quarts required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4830 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Drain the transmission. Refill it with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. 3. Start the engine. 4. With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the transmission to D4 5. Release the brake pedal. Press on the accelerator, and bring the speedometer up to 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into fourth, and that the torque converter locks up. 6. Apply the brakes to stop the front wheels. 7. Shift to reverse, and then to neutral. 8. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 4 through 7) four more times. 9. Turn off the engine. 10. Repeat the above drain, refill, and shifting procedure (steps 2 through 9) two more times. 11. Drain the transmission. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Refill the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4831 12. Disconnect the linear solenoid electrical connector. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the linear solenoid. 13. Inspect the linear solenoid mounting surface on the transmission. Remove any contamination. 14. Install the new linear solenoid. Reconnect the electrical connector. 15. Use the PGM Tester to erase any DTCs in the powertrain control module (PCM). *16. Test-drive the vehicle to check the shift feel. If it still shifts harshly, install a remanufactured transmission.* DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set Shift Control Solenoid Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set 00-012 June 26, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-99 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Harsh Shifting Automatic Transmission (Supersedes 00-012, dated June 20, 2000) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM *The transmission shifts harshly, or it may stay in first gear. The harsh shifting is more noticeable on the 1-2 and 2-3 upshifts under light throttle. It is not affected by operating temperature. The MIL may be on with DTC P0730 or P0715 stored.* PROBABLE CAUSE *Contamination of the linear solenoid and its associated passages inside the transmission, or a broken spring internal to the transmission.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION *Flush the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1, then replace the linear solenoid. If shift feel is not affected, replace the transmission.* PARTS INFORMATION Linear Solenoid Assembly: P/N 28250-P4R-315, H/C 5317219 Drain Bolt Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Genuine Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 Civic and 2WD CR-V - 11.6 quarts required 4WD CR-V - 12.4 quarts required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4837 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Drain the transmission. Refill it with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. 3. Start the engine. 4. With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the transmission to D4 5. Release the brake pedal. Press on the accelerator, and bring the speedometer up to 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into fourth, and that the torque converter locks up. 6. Apply the brakes to stop the front wheels. 7. Shift to reverse, and then to neutral. 8. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 4 through 7) four more times. 9. Turn off the engine. 10. Repeat the above drain, refill, and shifting procedure (steps 2 through 9) two more times. 11. Drain the transmission. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Refill the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 4838 12. Disconnect the linear solenoid electrical connector. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the linear solenoid. 13. Inspect the linear solenoid mounting surface on the transmission. Remove any contamination. 14. Install the new linear solenoid. Reconnect the electrical connector. 15. Use the PGM Tester to erase any DTCs in the powertrain control module (PCM). *16. Test-drive the vehicle to check the shift feel. If it still shifts harshly, install a remanufactured transmission.* DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4839 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Without CVT Lower Front of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4840 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair Without CVT NOTE: Shift control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and shift control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the shift control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new shift control solenoid valve A/B with a new filter/gasket and the clamp bracket. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, and reconnect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Throttle Valve Solenoid: Electrical Specifications Resistance ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 4.0 - 9.0 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4845 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Mechanical Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Alternative View Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Alternative View > Page 4848 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Locations Photo 30 Lower Front Of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4849 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the linear solenoid connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of the linear solenoid connector. STANDARD: 4.0 - 9.0 Ohms 3. If the resistance is out of specification, replace the linear solenoid assembly. 4. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the linear solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 5. If not, remove the linear solenoid assembly. 6. Check that the linear solenoid fluid passage for dust or dirt. 7. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the linear solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Check that the valve moves. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check that the valve releases. NOTE: You can see the valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the linear solenoid assembly. 9. If the valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or the linear solenoid does not operate, replace the linear solenoid assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4850 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair 1. Remove the mounting bolts and the linear solenoid assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the linear solenoid assembly and transmission housing. 3. Install a new linear solenoid assembly with a new gasket. NOTE: Do not pinch the gasket when installing the linear solenoid; make sure that the gasket is installed properly in the mounting groove of the linear solenoid. 4. Check the linear solenoid connector for rust, dirt or oil, and connect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Electrical Specifications Without CVT Solenoid Valve A Between terminal 2 and ground .............................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 25 Ohms Solenoid Valve B Between terminal 1 and ground .............................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 25 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4855 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Mechanical Specifications Without CVT Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4856 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Locations Without CVT Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4857 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Testing and Inspection Without CVT 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the lock-up control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. STANDARD: 14 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. - A clicking sound should be heard. - Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. - A clicking sound should be heard. - Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4858 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Service and Repair Without CVT NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new lock-up control solenoid valve A/B with a new filter/gasket. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, and reconnect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Bell Housing: Specifications DIMENSIONS Set Ring, 80 mm Thickness P/N# 90414-689-000 ........................................................................................................................... ...................................... 2.50 mm (0.098 inch) P/N# 90415-689-000 ................................................. ................................................................................................................ 2.60 mm (0.102 inch) P/N# 90416-689-000 .................................................................................................................................... ............................. 2.70 mm (0.106 inch) P/N# 90417-689-000 .......................................................... ....................................................................................................... 2.80 mm (0.110 inch) P/N# 90418-689-000 .................................................................................................................................... ............................. 2.90 mm (0.114 inch) P/N# 90419-PH8-000 ......................................................... ....................................................................................................... 3.00 mm (0.118 inch) Set Ring And Outer Race Clearance Standard .............................................................................................................................................. ................................ 0-0.15 mm (0-0.006 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Housing Bearing Bell Housing: Service and Repair Torque Converter Housing Bearing TOOL REQUIRED - 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm - Or Equivalent MAINSHAFT BEARING/OIL SEAL 1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal using the special tools as shown. 2. Drive in the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in the housing using the special tools as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Housing Bearing > Page 4864 3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing using the special tools as shown. COUNTERSHAFT BEARING 1. Remove the countershaft bearing using the special tools as shown. 2. Install the ATF guide plate. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Housing Bearing > Page 4865 3. Drive the new bearing into the housing using the special tools as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Housing Bearing > Page 4866 Bell Housing: Service and Repair Torque Converter Oil Seal Replacement TOOL REQUIRED - 07746-0030100 Driver 40 mm I.D. - 07JAD-PH80200 Pilot, 26 x 30 mm - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07947-6110501 Driver Attachment, 68 mm - 07JAD-PH80101 Driver Attachment - Or Equivalent REMOVAL 1. Remove the differential assembly. 2. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing. 3. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter housing. INSTALLATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Housing Bearing > Page 4867 1. Install a 2.50 mm (0.098 inch) set ring, 80 mm in transmission housing. NOTE: Do not install the oil seal yet. 2. Install the differential assembly into the torque converter housing using the special tool as shown. 3. Install the transmission housing and tighten the bolts. 4. Tap on the transmission housing side of the differential assembly with the special tool to seat the differential assembly in the torque converter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Housing Bearing > Page 4868 housing. 5. Measure the clearance between the 80 mm set ring and outer race of the ball bearing in the transmission housing. Standard: 0 - 0.15 mm (0 - 0.006 inch) 6. If the clearance is more than the standard, select a new 80 mm set ring from the following table and install. NOTE: If the 80 mm set ring-to-ball bearing outer race clearance measured in step 5 is less than the specification, it is not necessary to perform steps 7 and 8. 7. Remove the transmission housing. 8. Replace the 2.50 mm (0.098 inch) 80 mm set ring with the one of the correct thickness selected in step 5. 9. Install the new oil seal flush with the transmission housing using the special tools as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Torque Converter Housing Bearing > Page 4869 10. Install the new oil seal flush with the torque converter housing using the special tools as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch Signal <--> [Brake Switch - TCC] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Case: Service and Repair 1. To remove the mainshaft and countershaft bearings from the transmission housing, expand each snap ring with snap ring pliers, then push the bearing out using the special tools and a press as shown. NOTE: Do not remove the snap rings unless it's necessary to clean the grooves in the housing. Mainshaft Bearing installation use: ATTACHMENT, 72 x 75 mm 07746 - 0010600. Countershaft Bearing installation use: ATTACHMENT, 62 x 68 mm 07746 - 0010500. 2. Expand each snap ring with snap ring pliers, insert the new bearing part-way into the housing using the special tools and a press as shown. Install the bearing with the groove facing outside the housing. NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF. 3. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into the housing until the ring snaps in place around it. NOTE: Mainshaft Bearing Removal use: ATTACHMENT, 72 x 75 mm 07746 - 0010600. Countershaft Bearing Removal use: ATTACHMENT, Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Case, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4876 62 x 68 mm 07746 - 0010500 4. After installing the bearing verify the following: - The snap ring is seated in the bearing and housing grooves. - The snap ring operates properly. - The ring end gap is correct. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch: Description and Operation GENERAL Clutches The four-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin independently on its shaft, transmitting no power. 1ST CLUTCH The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the end of the mainshaft, just behind the right side cover. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft. 2ND CLUTCH The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 2nd clutch is joined back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit. 3RD CLUTCH The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the end of the countershaft. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the countershaft. 4TH CLUTCH The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainstay. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4880 ONE-WAY CLUTCH The one-way clutch is positioned between the countershaft 1st gear and the parking gear, with the parking gear splined to the countershaft. The 1st gear provides the outer race surface, and the parking gear provides the inner race surface. The one-way clutch locks up when power is transmitted from the mainshaft 1st gear to the countershaft 1st gear. The 1st clutch and gears remain engaged in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear ranges in the D3, D4 or 2 position. However, the one-way clutch disengages when the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th clutches/gears are applied in the D4, D3, or 2 position. This is because the increased rotational speed of the gears on the countershaft overrides the locking "speed range" of the one-way clutch. Thereafter, the one-way clutch free-wheels with the 1st clutch still engaged. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4881 Clutch: Service and Repair One-Way Clutch, A/T For information regarding the service and repair of this components, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4885 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagrams Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Countershaft: Specifications DIMENSIONS Distance Collar, 28 mm Thickness 1-P/N# 90503-PC9-000 ........................................................................................................................................................... 39.00 mm (1.535 inch) 2-P/N# 90504-PC9-000 ........................................................................................................................................................... 39.10 mm (1.539 inch) 3-P/N# 90505-PC9-000 ........................................................................................................................................................... 39.20 mm (1.543 inch) 4-P/N# 90507-PC9-000 ........................................................................................................................................................... 39.30 mm (1.547 inch) 5-P/N# 90508-PC9-000 ........................................................................................................................................................... 39.05 mm (1.537 inch) 6-P/N# 90509-PC9-000 ........................................................................................................................................................... 39.15 mm (1.541 inch) 7-P/N# 90510-PC9-000 ........................................................................................................................................................... 39.25 mm (1.545 inch) 8-P/N# 90511-PC9-000 ........................................................................................................................................................... 38.90 mm (1.531 inch) 9-P/N# 90512-PC9-000 ........................................................................................................................................................... 38.95 mm (1.533 inch) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Locknut ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................ 103 Nm (75.9 ft. lbs.) Speed Sensor ...................................................... ................................................................................................................................. 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4889 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4890 Countershaft: Testing and Inspection CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT NOTE: Lubricate all parts with ATF during assembly. 1. Remove the countershaft bearing from the transmission housing. 2. Install the parts below on the countershaft using the special tool and a press as described. NOTE: Do not assemble the O-rings during inspection. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4891 3. Install the parts below on the countershaft subassembly, then torque the locknut to 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Countershaft locknut has left-hand threads. 4. Measure the clearance between the 2nd gear and the 28 mm distance collar with a feeler gauge. NOTE: Take measurements in at least three places and use the average as the actual clearance. Standard: 0.10 - 0.18 mm (0.004 - 0.007 inch). 5. If the clearance is out of tolerance, remove the 28 mm distance collar and measure the width. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4892 6. Select and install a new distance collar, then recheck. 7. After selecting a new distance collar, recheck the clearance and make sure it is within tolerance. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4893 Countershaft: Service and Repair One-Way Clutch, A/T For information regarding the service and repair of this components, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Data Link Connector, A/T > Component Information > Locations Data Link Connector, A/T: Locations Below Right Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Carrier Assembly, A/T > Carrier Bearings, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Carrier Bearings: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT TOOL REQUIRED - 07746-0030100 Driver 40 mm I.D. - Or Equivalent NOTE: Check bearings for wear and rough rotation. If bearings are OK, removal is not necessary. 1. Remove bearings using a bearing puller. 2. Install new bearings using the special tool as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Ring Gear, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Ring Gear: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 101 Nm (74.5 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid Dry Fill ................................................................................................................................................. ............................................... 5.9 liters (6.2 US qts.) Drain and Fill .................................................... .................................................................................................................................. 2.7 liters (2.9 US qts.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4909 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission Fluid Fluid Type ............................................................................................................................................ ................... Genuine Honda Premium Formula ATF Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4910 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection FLUID LEVEL CHECK CAUTION: Keep all of the foreign particles out of the transmission. NOTE: Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Turn off the engine. 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 3. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 4. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. 5. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the recommended fluid* into the filler hole to bring it to the upper mark. 6. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission in the direction shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4911 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair CHECKING NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). 2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, then turn off the engine. 3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth. 4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper mark and lower marks. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the recommended fluid into the filler hole to bring it to the upper mark. Always use Genuine Honda Premium Formula Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. 7. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission in the direction shown. CHANGING NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle. 2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the engine off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4912 3. Remove the drain plug, and drain the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to cooler flushing. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer, then refill the transmission with the recommended fluid into the filler hole to the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Genuine Honda Premium Formula Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity: 2.7 L (2.4 Imp qt.) at changing 5.9 L ( 5.2 Imp qt.) at overhaul Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Line/Hose: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Attaching Brackets ............................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Joint Bolt .............................................................. ................................................................................................................................ 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4916 Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair CONNECTION 1. Connect the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) cooler hoses to the ATF cooler lines and ATF cooler, and secure them with the clips as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pump: Specifications DIMENSIONS Drive Gear ........................................................................................................................................... ...................... 0.105-0.133 mm (0.004-0.005 inch) Driven Gear ......................................................... ...................................................................................................... 0.035-0.063 mm (0.001-0.002 inch) Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial) Clearance: Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .................... 0.03-0.05 mm (0.001-0.002 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ............................................................................................................... 0.07 mm (0.003 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4920 Fluid Pump: Testing and Inspection With A/T 1. Install the ATF pump gears and ATF pump driven gear shaft in the main valve body. NOTE: Lubricate all parts with ATF during inspection. - Install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered side facing up as shown. 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive and driven gears. ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance: Standard (New): - ATF Pump Drive Gear: 0.105 - 0.1325 mm (0.004 - 0.005 inch) - ATF Pump Driven Gear: 0.035 - 0.0625 mm (0.0014 - 0.0025 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4921 3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure the thrust clearance of the ATF pump driven gear to-valve body. ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial) Clearance: Standard (New): 0.03 - 0.05 mm (0.001 - 0.002 inch) - Service Limit: 0.07 mm (0.003 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Idler Gear, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Idler Gear: Service and Repair One-Way Clutch, A/T For information regarding the service and repair of this components, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations Shift Indicator: Locations SRS components are located in this area Review the SRS component locations precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4931 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4932 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4933 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4934 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4935 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4936 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4937 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4938 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4939 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4940 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4941 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4942 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4943 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4944 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4945 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4946 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4947 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4948 Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4949 A/T Gear Position Indicator Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4950 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes ON. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come ON. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the Powertrain (except HX) or Transmission (HX) Control Module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for HX) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 4953 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 4954 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4955 Shift Indicator: Adjustments 1. Shift to the [P] position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of [D4] or [D4] position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No.1 and No.7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [N] in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4956 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral". 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [P] anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4960 Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Mainshaft: Specifications DIMENSIONS Thrust Washer 36.5 x 55 mm Thickness 1-P/N# 90441-P4P-010 ............................................................................................................................................................. 4.00 mm (0.157 inch) 2-P/N# 90442-P4P-010 ............................................................................................................................................................. 4.05 mm (0.159 inch) 3-P/N# 90443-P4P-010 ............................................................................................................................................................. 4.10 mm (0.161 inch) 4-P/N# 90444-P4P-010 ............................................................................................................................................................. 4.15 mm (0.163 inch) 5-P/N# 90445-P4P-010 ............................................................................................................................................................. 4.20 mm (0.165 inch) 6-P/N# 90446-P4P-010 ............................................................................................................................................................. 4.25 mm (0.167 inch) 7-P/N# 90447-P4P-010 ............................................................................................................................................................. 4.30 mm (0.169 inch) 8-P/N# 90448-P4P-010 ............................................................................................................................................................. 4.35 mm (0.171 inch) 9-P/N# 90449-P4P-010 ............................................................................................................................................................. 4.40 mm (0.173 inch) 10-P/N# 90450-P4P-000 ............................................................................................................................................................. 4.45 mm (0.175 inch) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Locknut ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................. 78 Nm (58 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4964 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4965 Mainshaft: Testing and Inspection A/T Only CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT NOTE: Lubricate all parts with ATF during assembly. 1. Remove the mainshaft bearing from the transmission housing. 2. Assemble the parts below on the mainshaft. NOTE: Do not assemble the O-rings during inspection. 3. Torque the mainshaft locknut to 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Mainshaft locknut has left-hand threads. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4966 4. Hold 2nd gear against the 2nd clutch, then measure the clearance between 2nd gear and 3rd gear with a feeler gauge. NOTE: Take measurements in at least three places, and use the average as the actual clearance. Standard: 0.05 - 0.13 mm (0.002 - 0.005 inch) 5. If the clearance is out of tolerance, remove the thrust washer and measure the thickness. 6. Select and install a new washer, then recheck. 7. After replacing the thrust washer, make sure the clearance is within tolerance. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4967 Mainshaft: Service and Repair One-Way Clutch, A/T For information regarding the service and repair of this components, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4971 Mainshaft Sensor: Locations Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations > Page 4976 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagrams Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4980 Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4981 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4982 Shift Interlock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock System Shift Lock System 1. Disconnect the 8P connector from the interlock control unit. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4983 - If all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good control unit, and recheck the system. If the check is OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and you step on the brake pedal (with the shift lever in [P]), the shift lock system is electronically normal; if the shift lever cannot be shifted from [P], test the A/T gear position switch, park pin switch. Reconnect the 8P connector to the interlock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Torque Converter Oil Seal - Installation Tool Seals and Gaskets: Technical Service Bulletins Torque Converter Oil Seal - Installation Tool 00-022 March 7, 2000 Applies To: ALL Models With L4 or V6 Engine and A/T With 44 mm I.D. Torque Converter Oil Seal Torque Converter Oil Seal Installation Tool The service manual procedure for installing the torque converter oil seal requires you to disassemble the transmission. A new required special tool, which attaches to your existing 40 mm l.D. driver, lets you install this seal without removing the main shaft or disassembling the transmission. REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS Seal Driver Attachment: T/N O7XAD-001000A (Shipped to all dealers March 2000 as a required special tool) 40 mm I.D. Driver: T/N 07746-0030100 ORDERING INFORMATION Additional seal driver attachments are available from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This service bulletin is for information only. PROCEDURE 1. Remove the transmission (see section 14 of the appropriate service manual). 2. Remove and discard the torque converter oil seal. Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing. 3. Select the appropriate replacement seal. 4. Press the long end of the seal driver attachment into the driver. Press the new seal onto the short end. Do not apply any type of sealer to the seal or Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Torque Converter Oil Seal - Installation Tool > Page 4988 the torque converter housing; you must install the seal dry. 5. Slide the tool over the mainshaft as far as it will go. 6. With a soft-face hammer, lightly tap the driver until the seal is fully seated in the torque converter housing. 7. Reinstall the transmission. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Brake Switch Signal <--> [Brake Switch - TCC] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4996 Mainshaft Sensor: Locations Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations Park Pin Switch: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 5000 Park Pin Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the park pin switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with: - the shift lever any position other than [P], or - the push button pushed in [P]. There should be continuity. 4. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with the shift lever in [P] and the push button released. There should be no continuity. If necessary, replace the park pin switch. NOTE: Park pin switch 4P connector No.1 and No.2 terminals are for A/T gear position console light. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications A/T Gear Position Signal: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5004 A/T Gear Position Signal: Locations Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5007 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5008 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5009 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5010 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5011 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5012 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5013 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5014 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5015 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5016 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5017 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5018 A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5019 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5020 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5021 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5022 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5023 All Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5024 A/T Gear Position Signal: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come on. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the powertrain (all except '96-'98 CVT) or transmission ('96-'98 CVT) control module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for CVT) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5025 A/T Gear Position Signal: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5026 A/T Gear Position Signal: Adjustments 1. Shift to the P position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of D4 or D position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No. 1 and No. 7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. - If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position N in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5027 A/T Gear Position Signal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown above. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the P and N position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position P anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Top of Transmission (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5034 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Drive Pulley Speed Sensor Right Side Lower Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5035 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5036 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5037 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Secondary Gear Shaft Speed Sensor Right Side Rear of Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5038 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the countershaft speed sensor from the right side cover. 2. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the mainshaft speed sensor from the transmission housing. 3. Replace the 0-ring with a new one before installing the countershaft speed sensor or the mainshaft speed sensor. NOTE: Install the mainshaft speed sensor washer on the mainshaft speed sensor. The mainshaft speed sensor washer is used on models with the D16Y7 engine. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5043 Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5044 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5045 Shift Interlock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock System Shift Lock System 1. Disconnect the 8P connector from the interlock control unit. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5046 - If all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good control unit, and recheck the system. If the check is OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and you step on the brake pedal (with the shift lever in [P]), the shift lock system is electronically normal; if the shift lever cannot be shifted from [P], test the A/T gear position switch, park pin switch. Reconnect the 8P connector to the interlock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each key position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No.7 and No.8 terminals. - If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. - If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Key Interlock Solenoid Test > Page 5052 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector. 3. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal and ground to the No.2 terminal of the solenoid momentarily. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No.2 (-) terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 4. Check that the shift lock releases when the release lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the release lever is released. 5. If the solenoid does not work, replace the solenoid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations Park Pin Switch: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 5056 Park Pin Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the park pin switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with: - the shift lever any position other than [P], or - the push button pushed in [P]. There should be continuity. 4. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with the shift lever in [P] and the push button released. There should be no continuity. If necessary, replace the park pin switch. NOTE: Park pin switch 4P connector No.1 and No.2 terminals are for A/T gear position console light. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set 00-012 June 26, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-99 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Harsh Shifting Automatic Transmission (Supersedes 00-012, dated June 20, 2000) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM *The transmission shifts harshly, or it may stay in first gear. The harsh shifting is more noticeable on the 1-2 and 2-3 upshifts under light throttle. It is not affected by operating temperature. The MIL may be on with DTC P0730 or P0715 stored.* PROBABLE CAUSE *Contamination of the linear solenoid and its associated passages inside the transmission, or a broken spring internal to the transmission.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION *Flush the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1, then replace the linear solenoid. If shift feel is not affected, replace the transmission.* PARTS INFORMATION Linear Solenoid Assembly: P/N 28250-P4R-315, H/C 5317219 Drain Bolt Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Genuine Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 Civic and 2WD CR-V - 11.6 quarts required 4WD CR-V - 12.4 quarts required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5065 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Drain the transmission. Refill it with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. 3. Start the engine. 4. With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the transmission to D4 5. Release the brake pedal. Press on the accelerator, and bring the speedometer up to 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into fourth, and that the torque converter locks up. 6. Apply the brakes to stop the front wheels. 7. Shift to reverse, and then to neutral. 8. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 4 through 7) four more times. 9. Turn off the engine. 10. Repeat the above drain, refill, and shifting procedure (steps 2 through 9) two more times. 11. Drain the transmission. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Refill the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5066 12. Disconnect the linear solenoid electrical connector. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the linear solenoid. 13. Inspect the linear solenoid mounting surface on the transmission. Remove any contamination. 14. Install the new linear solenoid. Reconnect the electrical connector. 15. Use the PGM Tester to erase any DTCs in the powertrain control module (PCM). *16. Test-drive the vehicle to check the shift feel. If it still shifts harshly, install a remanufactured transmission.* DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set Shift Control Solenoid Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set 00-012 June 26, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-99 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Harsh Shifting Automatic Transmission (Supersedes 00-012, dated June 20, 2000) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM *The transmission shifts harshly, or it may stay in first gear. The harsh shifting is more noticeable on the 1-2 and 2-3 upshifts under light throttle. It is not affected by operating temperature. The MIL may be on with DTC P0730 or P0715 stored.* PROBABLE CAUSE *Contamination of the linear solenoid and its associated passages inside the transmission, or a broken spring internal to the transmission.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION *Flush the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1, then replace the linear solenoid. If shift feel is not affected, replace the transmission.* PARTS INFORMATION Linear Solenoid Assembly: P/N 28250-P4R-315, H/C 5317219 Drain Bolt Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Genuine Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 Civic and 2WD CR-V - 11.6 quarts required 4WD CR-V - 12.4 quarts required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5072 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Drain the transmission. Refill it with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. 3. Start the engine. 4. With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the transmission to D4 5. Release the brake pedal. Press on the accelerator, and bring the speedometer up to 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into fourth, and that the torque converter locks up. 6. Apply the brakes to stop the front wheels. 7. Shift to reverse, and then to neutral. 8. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 4 through 7) four more times. 9. Turn off the engine. 10. Repeat the above drain, refill, and shifting procedure (steps 2 through 9) two more times. 11. Drain the transmission. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Refill the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5073 12. Disconnect the linear solenoid electrical connector. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the linear solenoid. 13. Inspect the linear solenoid mounting surface on the transmission. Remove any contamination. 14. Install the new linear solenoid. Reconnect the electrical connector. 15. Use the PGM Tester to erase any DTCs in the powertrain control module (PCM). *16. Test-drive the vehicle to check the shift feel. If it still shifts harshly, install a remanufactured transmission.* DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5074 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Without CVT Lower Front of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5075 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair Without CVT NOTE: Shift control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and shift control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the shift control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new shift control solenoid valve A/B with a new filter/gasket and the clamp bracket. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, and reconnect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5079 Shifter A/T: Description and Operation The shift lever has six positions: P PARK, R REVERSE, N NEUTRAL, D4 1st through 4th gear ranges, D3 1st through 3rd gear ranges, 2-2nd gear. Starting is possible only in P and N positions through the use of a slide-type, neutral-safety switch. The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which gear has been selected without having to look down at the console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5080 Shifter A/T: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT 1. Check that the index mark on the indicator aligns with the [N] mark on the shift indicator panel when the transmission is in NEUTRAL. 2. If not aligned, remove the front console. 3. Remove the shift indicator panel mounting screws and adjust by moving the panel. NOTE: Whenever the shift indicator panel is removed, reinstall the panel as described above. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 97-009 > Feb > 00 > Ignition Switch - Key Cannot Be Removed Shift Cable: Customer Interest Ignition Switch - Key Cannot Be Removed 97-009 February 8, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - All with Automatic Transmission Key Cannot Be Removed From the Ignition Switch (Supersedes 97-009, dated January 26, 1999) SYMPTOM The ignition switch sometimes will not turn to the LOCK (0) position, and the key cannot be removed. PROBABLE CAUSE The shift cable is out of adjustment, preventing the shift lever pin from engaging the key lock switch. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the shift cable. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 214305 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 54315-504-A81 H/C 4778643 Defect Code: 074 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 97-009A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure the shift lever is in Park. 2. Remove the center console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 97-009 > Feb > 00 > Ignition Switch - Key Cannot Be Removed > Page 5090 3. Inspect the key lock switch. If the pin is not in the switch, jiggle the shift lever back and forth without taking it out of Park. ^ If the pin does not return and the key cannot be removed, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the pin returns and the key can be removed, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Move the shift lever to Neutral. 2. Remove the lock pin from the shift cable adjuster. 3. Check the alignment of the hole in the adjuster with the hole in the shift cable. The holes should exactly align. 4. Loosen the locknut on the adjuster. Turn the adjuster in or out until the holes exactly align. Torque the locknut to 7 N.m (5 lb-ft). 5. Reinstall the lock pin. If the lock pin binds as you install it, the shift cable is still out of adjustment. 6. Move the shift lever to all the gear positions. Make sure the shift lever position indicator shows each gear position. 7. Move the shift lever to Park. Make sure the key can be removed from the ignition switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 97-009 > Feb > 00 > Ignition Switch - Key Cannot Be Removed > Page 5091 8. Insert the key in the shift lock release slot, and make sure the shift lever releases. 9. Reinstall the center console. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 97-009 > Feb > 97 > A/T - Shift Cable Adj./Ignition Key Stuck Shift Cable: Customer Interest A/T - Shift Cable Adj./Ignition Key Stuck 97-009 BODY FEB 3, 1997 Applies To: 1996 Civic - with Automatic Transmission Key Cannot Be Removed From the Ignition Switch SYMPTOM The ignition switch sometimes will not return to the Lock position, and the key cannot be removed. PROBABLE CAUSE The shift cable is out of adjustment, preventing the pin from engaging in the key lock switch. DIAGNOSIS If the key will not come out of the ignition switch: 1. Make sure the shift lever is in Park. 2. Remove the center console. 3. Inspect the key lock switch. If the pin is not in the switch, move the shift lever back and forth without taking it out of Park. ^ If the pin does not return and the key cannot be removed, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the pin returns and the key can be removed, continue to CORRECTIVE ACTION. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Cable: > 97-009 > Feb > 97 > A/T - Shift Cable Adj./Ignition Key Stuck > Page 5096 CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the shift cable. 1. Move the shift lever to Neutral. 2. Remove the lock pin from the shift cable adjuster. 3. Check the alignment of the hole in the adjuster with the hole in the shift cable. They should align perfectly. 4. Loosen the locknut on the adjuster. Turn the adjuster in or out until the holes align perfectly. Tighten the locknut to 7 N.m (5 lb-ft). 5. Reinstall the lock pin. If the lock pin binds as you install it, the shift cable is still out of adjustment. 6. Move the shift lever to all the gear positions. Verify that the shift lever position indicator shows each position. 7. Move the shift lever to Park. Verify that the key can be removed. 8. Insert the key in the shift lock release slot, and verify that the shift lever releases. 9. Reinstall the center console. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 214305 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 54315-S04-A81 H/C 4778643 Defect code: 074 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 97-009A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 97-009 > Feb > 00 > Ignition Switch - Key Cannot Be Removed Shift Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Ignition Switch - Key Cannot Be Removed 97-009 February 8, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - All with Automatic Transmission Key Cannot Be Removed From the Ignition Switch (Supersedes 97-009, dated January 26, 1999) SYMPTOM The ignition switch sometimes will not turn to the LOCK (0) position, and the key cannot be removed. PROBABLE CAUSE The shift cable is out of adjustment, preventing the shift lever pin from engaging the key lock switch. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the shift cable. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 214305 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 54315-504-A81 H/C 4778643 Defect Code: 074 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 97-009A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure the shift lever is in Park. 2. Remove the center console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 97-009 > Feb > 00 > Ignition Switch - Key Cannot Be Removed > Page 5102 3. Inspect the key lock switch. If the pin is not in the switch, jiggle the shift lever back and forth without taking it out of Park. ^ If the pin does not return and the key cannot be removed, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the pin returns and the key can be removed, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Move the shift lever to Neutral. 2. Remove the lock pin from the shift cable adjuster. 3. Check the alignment of the hole in the adjuster with the hole in the shift cable. The holes should exactly align. 4. Loosen the locknut on the adjuster. Turn the adjuster in or out until the holes exactly align. Torque the locknut to 7 N.m (5 lb-ft). 5. Reinstall the lock pin. If the lock pin binds as you install it, the shift cable is still out of adjustment. 6. Move the shift lever to all the gear positions. Make sure the shift lever position indicator shows each gear position. 7. Move the shift lever to Park. Make sure the key can be removed from the ignition switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 97-009 > Feb > 00 > Ignition Switch - Key Cannot Be Removed > Page 5103 8. Insert the key in the shift lock release slot, and make sure the shift lever releases. 9. Reinstall the center console. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 97-009 > Feb > 97 > A/T - Shift Cable Adj./Ignition Key Stuck Shift Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Shift Cable Adj./Ignition Key Stuck 97-009 BODY FEB 3, 1997 Applies To: 1996 Civic - with Automatic Transmission Key Cannot Be Removed From the Ignition Switch SYMPTOM The ignition switch sometimes will not return to the Lock position, and the key cannot be removed. PROBABLE CAUSE The shift cable is out of adjustment, preventing the pin from engaging in the key lock switch. DIAGNOSIS If the key will not come out of the ignition switch: 1. Make sure the shift lever is in Park. 2. Remove the center console. 3. Inspect the key lock switch. If the pin is not in the switch, move the shift lever back and forth without taking it out of Park. ^ If the pin does not return and the key cannot be removed, continue with normal troubleshooting. ^ If the pin returns and the key can be removed, continue to CORRECTIVE ACTION. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Cable: > 97-009 > Feb > 97 > A/T - Shift Cable Adj./Ignition Key Stuck > Page 5108 CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the shift cable. 1. Move the shift lever to Neutral. 2. Remove the lock pin from the shift cable adjuster. 3. Check the alignment of the hole in the adjuster with the hole in the shift cable. They should align perfectly. 4. Loosen the locknut on the adjuster. Turn the adjuster in or out until the holes align perfectly. Tighten the locknut to 7 N.m (5 lb-ft). 5. Reinstall the lock pin. If the lock pin binds as you install it, the shift cable is still out of adjustment. 6. Move the shift lever to all the gear positions. Verify that the shift lever position indicator shows each position. 7. Move the shift lever to Park. Verify that the key can be removed. 8. Insert the key in the shift lock release slot, and verify that the shift lever releases. 9. Reinstall the center console. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 214305 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 54315-S04-A81 H/C 4778643 Defect code: 074 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 97-009A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5109 Shift Cable: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Adjuster Locknut .................................................................................................................................. ............................................... 7 Nm (60 inch lbs.) Shift Cable Bracket Bolt ....................................... ........................................................................................................................ 9.8 Nm (86.4 inch lbs.) Shift Cable Cover Bolt ......................................................................................................................... ................................................ 22 Nm (16 Ft. lbs.) Control Lever Bolt ................................................ ................................................................................................................................ 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Shift Cable Holder Bolt ........................................................................................................................ ........................................ 12 Nm (104.4 inch lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5110 Shift Cable: Service and Repair REMOVAL / INSTALLATION WARNING: Make sure lifts are placed properly. 1. Remove the front console. 2. Shift to [N] position, then remove the lock pin from the adjuster. 3. Remove the shift cable bracket. 4. Remove the shift cable holder. 5. Remove the shift cable cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5111 6. Remove the control lever from the control shaft, then remove the shift cable. Take care not to bend the cable when removing/installing it. 7. Install the shift cable in the reverse order of removal. 8. Check the cable adjustment on reassembly. ADJUSTMENT WARNING: Make sure lifts are placed properly. 1. Remove the front console. 2. Shift to [N] position, then remove the lock pin from the adjuster. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5112 3. Check that the hole in the adjuster is perfectly aligned with the hole in the shift cable. There are two holes in the adjuster. They are positioned 90, apart to allow cable adjustment in 1/4 turn increments. 4. If the hole is not perfectly aligned, loosen the locknut on the adjuster and adjust as required. 5. Tighten the locknut to 7 Nm (5 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the lock pin on the adjuster. If you feel the lock pin binding as you reinstall it, the cable is still out of adjustment and must be readjusted. 7. Make sure the lock pin is seated in the adjuster securely. 8. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that the shift position indicator follows the automatic transaxle gear position switch. 9. Start the engine, and check the shift lever in all gears. If any gear does not work properly, refer to troubleshooting. 10. Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder on the A/T gear position indicator panel, and verify that the shift lock lever is released. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Assembly, A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Throttle Valve Solenoid: Electrical Specifications Resistance ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 4.0 - 9.0 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Assembly, A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5118 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Mechanical Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Assembly, A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Alternative View Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Assembly, A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Alternative View > Page 5121 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Locations Photo 30 Lower Front Of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Assembly, A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5122 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the linear solenoid connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of the linear solenoid connector. STANDARD: 4.0 - 9.0 Ohms 3. If the resistance is out of specification, replace the linear solenoid assembly. 4. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the linear solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 5. If not, remove the linear solenoid assembly. 6. Check that the linear solenoid fluid passage for dust or dirt. 7. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the linear solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Check that the valve moves. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check that the valve releases. NOTE: You can see the valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the linear solenoid assembly. 9. If the valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or the linear solenoid does not operate, replace the linear solenoid assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Assembly, A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5123 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair 1. Remove the mounting bolts and the linear solenoid assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the linear solenoid assembly and transmission housing. 3. Install a new linear solenoid assembly with a new gasket. NOTE: Do not pinch the gasket when installing the linear solenoid; make sure that the gasket is installed properly in the mounting groove of the linear solenoid. 4. Check the linear solenoid connector for rust, dirt or oil, and connect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter Clutch: > 97-025 > Mar > 97 > A/T - Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up Torque Converter Clutch: Customer Interest A/T - Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up 97-025 March 24, 1997 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic - All with A/T (except HX) 1996-97 Accord - All with A/T (except V6) Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up SYMPTOM The torque converter doesn't lock up in cold weather. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty thermostat keeps the engine from reaching normal operating temperature in cold weather. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the thermostat. PARTS INFORMATION Thermostat and Gasket Kit: P/N 19301-P08-316, H/C 4286167 Honda Antifreeze/Coolant: P/N CU08730, H/C 1066588 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 114150 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 19301-F10-307 H/C 4344792 Defect code: 030 Contention code: D02 Template ID: 97-025A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter Clutch: > 97-025 > Mar > 97 > A/T - Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up > Page 5132 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then connect the Honda PGM Tester to the 1 6P Data Link Connector (DLC) located under the driver's side of the dashboard next to the kick panel. 2. Turn on the ignition switch, then follow the prompts on the PGM Tester until you reach the Data List. 3. Start the engine. 4. While test-driving, check the engine coolant temperature. If it does not reach 176°F (80°C) within 10 minutes, proceed to the next step. If it does, disregard this bulletin, and follow the troubleshooting procedures on page 14-50 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual. NOTE: This procedure only works if the outside temperature is below 30°F. 5. Wait until the engine is cool; then replace the thermostat and gasket (refer to page 10-9 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual). Refill the radiator with a 50/50 mix of genuine Honda antifreeze/coolant and water. 6. Test-drive the vehicle with the PGM Tester to confirm the engine reaches normal operating temperature. When it does, scroll to the A/T Data List and make sure the torque converter lock-up solenoid turns ON. If it does not, follow the troubleshooting procedures on page 14-50 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter Clutch: > 97-025 > Mar > 97 > A/T - Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up Torque Converter Clutch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up 97-025 March 24, 1997 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic - All with A/T (except HX) 1996-97 Accord - All with A/T (except V6) Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up SYMPTOM The torque converter doesn't lock up in cold weather. PROBABLE CAUSE A faulty thermostat keeps the engine from reaching normal operating temperature in cold weather. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the thermostat. PARTS INFORMATION Thermostat and Gasket Kit: P/N 19301-P08-316, H/C 4286167 Honda Antifreeze/Coolant: P/N CU08730, H/C 1066588 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 114150 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 19301-F10-307 H/C 4344792 Defect code: 030 Contention code: D02 Template ID: 97-025A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter Clutch: > 97-025 > Mar > 97 > A/T - Torque Converter Does Not Lock Up > Page 5138 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then connect the Honda PGM Tester to the 1 6P Data Link Connector (DLC) located under the driver's side of the dashboard next to the kick panel. 2. Turn on the ignition switch, then follow the prompts on the PGM Tester until you reach the Data List. 3. Start the engine. 4. While test-driving, check the engine coolant temperature. If it does not reach 176°F (80°C) within 10 minutes, proceed to the next step. If it does, disregard this bulletin, and follow the troubleshooting procedures on page 14-50 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual. NOTE: This procedure only works if the outside temperature is below 30°F. 5. Wait until the engine is cool; then replace the thermostat and gasket (refer to page 10-9 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual). Refill the radiator with a 50/50 mix of genuine Honda antifreeze/coolant and water. 6. Test-drive the vehicle with the PGM Tester to confirm the engine reaches normal operating temperature. When it does, scroll to the A/T Data List and make sure the torque converter lock-up solenoid turns ON. If it does not, follow the troubleshooting procedures on page 14-50 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Electrical Specifications Without CVT Solenoid Valve A Between terminal 2 and ground .............................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 25 Ohms Solenoid Valve B Between terminal 1 and ground .............................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 25 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5143 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Mechanical Specifications Without CVT Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5144 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Locations Without CVT Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5145 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Testing and Inspection Without CVT 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the lock-up control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. STANDARD: 14 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. - A clicking sound should be heard. - Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. - A clicking sound should be heard. - Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5146 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Service and Repair Without CVT NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new lock-up control solenoid valve A/B with a new filter/gasket. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, and reconnect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Use Worm-Style Clamps With the ATF Cooler Cleaner The spring-style clamps used on the ATF cooler lines are made to hold the cooler lines to the ATF cooler under normal operating conditions. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H) uses high pressure (100 psi) to do its job. With the pump motor running, the spring-style clamps can walk off or disconnect, and you'll wind up with a real mess to clean up in your shop. In March of this year, we sent each Honda dealership a pair of high-quality worm-style clamps to replace the original spring-style clamps. These clamps were part of a cooler cleaner update kit, and securely hold the cooler line in place. They've got a blue cap for easy identification. Need some more? Just call G-TFC, Inc. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5151 Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Flushing Equipment Information 89-022 May 16, 2008 Applies To: Vehicles With an In-Radiator ATF Cooler - ALL ATF Cooler Cleaner (Supersedes 89-022, dated June 18, 2004, to update the information marked by asterisks) Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured A/T, you must thoroughly clean the ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to do so could cause a repeat A/T failure. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (PIN GTHTTCF6H) is a portable, electrically operated special tool that cleans the ATF cooler with high- pressure, heated ATF. This cleaning action melts down waxy varnish residue left by burnt ATF and purges metal particles, clutch material, and other contaminants. The ATF Cooler Cleaner has these features: ^ Quick-connect fittings and color-coded hoses for easy hookup. ^ Uses about 9.5 gallons of Honda ATF-Z1, which gets filtered and recirculated. ^ Heats ATF to a temperature of 1400 to 150°F and then pumps it through the ATF cooler at high pressure (100 psi) using a pulsating action and air purging. Switching the hoses cleans the ATF cooler in the reverse direction. ^ Two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters to trap purged contaminants. ^ Built-in tool tray. This service bulletin gives you information for ordering and servicing this special tool, and guides you through the entire ATF cooler cleaning process. *REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001 Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-On Filter: T/N GTHNBP12 (12-pack) T/N GTHNBP2 (6-pack) T/N GTHGNBP22 (2-pack) ORDERING INFORMATION Additional ATF cooler cleaners or magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To order on the iN, click on SERVICE, then Service Bay, then Tool and Equipment Program. From the Tool and Equipment Program menu, click on the Online Catalog tab, and then search for the desired filter pack by part number.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5152 TOOL DESCRIPTION CLEANING PROCEDURE The cleaning procedure involves hot fluid under high pressure. Check the security of all hoses and connections. Always wear safety glasses or a face shield, gloves, and protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on your skin, rinse with water immediately. Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result in burns and other serious injuries. Always wear eye protection and protective clothing, and follow all instructions in this bulletin. 1. Plug the ATF cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded electrical outlet. NOTICE Make sure the outlet has no other appliances (light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords) plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler cleaner into an extension cord or drop light cord; you would damage the unit. 2. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON. Wait 1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use when the temperature gauge reads 140° to 150°F.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5153 3. Connect the appropriate fittings to the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the line going to the external filter). Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 4. Connect a shop air hose to the air purge valve. NOTICE The quick connect fitting has a one-way check valve to keep ATF from entering your shop's air system. Do not remove or replace the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if your coupler is not compatible. 5. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically to cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. 6. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF with the air purge valve open. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines of residual ATF. 7. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler, then connect the red hose to the cooler inlet line. 8. Connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line. 9. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, open and close the air purge valve periodically. 10. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to OFF with the air purge valve open. Leave the air purge valve open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines of residual ATF. 11. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF cooler lines. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other. 12. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve. Disconnect and stow the coupler if used. 13. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF cooler inlet and outlet lines. 14. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet. TOOL MAINTENANCE Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner working properly: *^ Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters every 20 hours, based on hour meter reading. For more information on filter replacement, see the January 2008 Honda ServiceNews article, Hour Meter Tells You When to Replace ATF Cooler Cleaner Filters.* ^ Fill the tank so the ATF is 4.5 inches from the top of the filler hole; do not overfill. NOTE: If the fluid level is low, the red indicator above the HEAT toggle switch comes on and the tank heater will not work. ^ Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information > Page 5154 Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5155 Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair COOLER FLUSHING WARNING: To prevent injury to face and eyes, always wear safety glasses or a face shield when using the transmission flusher. NOTE: This procedure should be performed before reinstalling the transmission. 1. Check the tool and hoses for wear and cracks before using. If wear or cracks are found, replace the hoses before using. 2. Using the measuring cup fill the tank with 21 ounces (approximately 2/3 full) of biodegradable flushing fluid (J35944-20). Do not substitute with any other fluid. Follow the handling procedure on the fluid container. 3. Secure the flusher filler cap, and pressurize the tank with compressed air to between 550 - 829 kpa (80 - 120 psi). NOTE: The air line should be equipped with a water trap to ensure a dry air system. 4. Hang the tool under the vehicle. 5. Attach the tank's discharge hose to the return line of the transmission cooler using a clamp. 6. Connect the drain hose to the inlet line on the transmission cooler using a clamp. IMPORTANT: Securely clamp the opposite end of the drain hose to a bucket or floor drain. 7. With the water and air valves off, attach the water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if available.) 8. Turn on the flusher water valve so water will flow through the cooler for 10 seconds. NOTE: If water does not flow through the cooler, it is completely plugged, cannot be flushed, and must be replaced. 9. Depress the trigger to mix the flushing fluid into the water flow. Use the wire clip to hold the trigger down. 10. While flushing with the water and flushing fluid for two minutes, turn the air valve on for five seconds every 15 - 20 seconds to create a surging action. AIR PRESSURE: MAX 845 kpa (120 psi) 11. Turn the water valve off. Release the trigger, then reverse the hoses to the cooler so you can flush in the opposite direction. Repeat steps 8 through 10. 12. Release the trigger, and rinse the cooler with water only for one minute. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5156 13. Turn the water valve off, and turn off the water supply. 14. Turn the air valve on to dry the system out with air for two full minutes or until no moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. CAUTION: Residual moisture in the cooler or pipes can damage the transmission. 15. Remove the flusher from the cooler line. Attach the drain hose to a container. 16. Install the transmission, and leave the drain hose attached to the cooler line. 17. Make sure the transmission is in the [P] position. Fill the transmission with Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), and run the engine for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95 L (0.8 Imp qt.) is discharged. 18. Remove the drain hose, and reconnect the cooler return hose to the transmission. 19. Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level. Tool Maintenance 1. Empty and rinse after each use. Fill the can with water and pressurize the can. Flush the discharge line to ensure that the unit is clean. 2. If discharge liquid does not foam, the orifice may be blocked. 3. To clean, disconnect the plumbing from the tank at the large coupling nut. 4. Remove the in-line filter from the discharge side and clean if necessary. 5. The fluid orifice is located behind the filter. Clean it with the pick stored in the bottom of the tank handle, or blow it clean with air. Securely reassemble all parts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5160 Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications A/T Gear Position Signal: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5164 A/T Gear Position Signal: Locations Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5167 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5168 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5169 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5170 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5171 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5172 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5173 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5174 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5175 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5176 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5177 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5178 A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5179 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5180 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5181 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5182 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5183 All Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5184 A/T Gear Position Signal: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come on. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the powertrain (all except '96-'98 CVT) or transmission ('96-'98 CVT) control module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for CVT) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5185 A/T Gear Position Signal: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5186 A/T Gear Position Signal: Adjustments 1. Shift to the P position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of D4 or D position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No. 1 and No. 7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. - If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position N in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5187 A/T Gear Position Signal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown above. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the P and N position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position P anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Top of Transmission (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5194 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Drive Pulley Speed Sensor Right Side Lower Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5195 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5196 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5197 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Secondary Gear Shaft Speed Sensor Right Side Rear of Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5198 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the countershaft speed sensor from the right side cover. 2. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the mainshaft speed sensor from the transmission housing. 3. Replace the 0-ring with a new one before installing the countershaft speed sensor or the mainshaft speed sensor. NOTE: Install the mainshaft speed sensor washer on the mainshaft speed sensor. The mainshaft speed sensor washer is used on models with the D16Y7 engine. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Valve Body: Specifications DIMENSIONS Relief Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.1 mm (0.043 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.6 mm (0.342 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 37.1 mm (1.461 inch) Modulator Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.4 mm (0.055 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 9.4 mm (0.374 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 35.0 mm (1.378 inch) CPB Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.1 mm (0.322 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 47.2 mm (1.858 inch) 1-2 Shift Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 7.6 mm (0.302 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 41.3 mm (1.626 inch) 2nd Orifice Control Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.7 mm (0.028 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 6.6 mm (0.262 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 34.8 mm (1.370 inch) Servo Control Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.1 mm (0.322 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 52.1 mm (2.051 inch) 3-4 Shift Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ........................................ 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ........................................................................... .................................................................................................................. 7.6 mm (0.302 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 57.0 mm (2.244 inch) 2-3 Shift Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 7.6 mm (0.302 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 57.0 mm (2.244 inch) 4th Exhaust Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 6.1 mm (0.242 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 36.4 mm (1.433 inch) 3-4 Orifice Control Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.7 mm (0.028 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 6.6 mm (0.262 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 37.5 mm (1.476 inch) Regulator Valve Spring A Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.8 mm (0.071 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 14.7 mm (0.584 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 87.8 mm (3.457 inch) Regulator Valve Spring B Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.8 mm (0.071 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 9.6 mm (0.381 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 44.0 mm (1.732 inch) Stator Reaction Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 4.5 mm (0.177 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 35.4 mm (1.407 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5202 Free Length ......................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 30.3 mm (1.193 inch) Cooler Relief Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.0 mm (0.039 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.4 mm (0.334 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 33.8 mm (1.331 inch) Torque Converter Check Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.0 mm 90.039 inch) O.D. ........................................................................... .................................................................................................................. 8.4 mm (0.334 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. ............................. 33.8 mm 91.331 inch) Lock-Up Control Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.7 mm (0.028 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 6.6 mm (0.262 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 38.0 mm (1.496 inch) 1st Accumulator Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 2.1 mm (0.083 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 16.0 mm (0.636 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 89.1 mm (3.508 inch) 4th Accumulator Spring A Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 2.6 mm (0.102 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 17.0 mm (0.676 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 87.0 mm (3.508 inch) 4th Accumulator Spring B Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 2.3 mm (0.091 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 10.2 mm (0.402 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 51.6 mm (2.031 inch) 3rd Accumulator Spring A Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 2.8 mm (0.110 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 17.5 mm (0.695 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 89.3 mm (3.516 inch) 3rd Accumulator Spring B Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 2.2 mm (0.087 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 31.0 mm (1.220 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 35.1 mm (1.382 inch) 2nd Accumulator Spring C Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 2.2 mm (0.087 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 14.5 mm (0.576 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 68.0 mm (2.677 inch) 2nd Accumulator Spring A Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 2.4 mm (0.094 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ............................................................................................................... 29.0 mm (1.152 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 39.0 mm (1.535 inch) 2nd Accumulator Spring B Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 1.6 mm (0.063 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 9.0 mm (0.358 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 20.7 mm (0.815 inch) Lock-Up Shift Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 7.6 mm (0.302 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 73.7 mm (2.902 inch) Lock-Up Timing Valve Spring Wire Diameter ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 0.9 mm (0.035 inch) O.D. ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. 8.1 mm (0.319 inch) Free Length .................................................................................................................................................. .............................. 80.7 mm (3.177 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5203 TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Lock-Up Bolts ...................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Regulator Bolts ..................................................... ............................................................................................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Main Bolts ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Secondary Bolts .................................................... ............................................................................................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Servo Bolts .......................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Main Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Main > Page 5206 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Main > Page 5207 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Main > Page 5208 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Main > Page 5209 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Valve Body: Service and Repair Removal NOTE: Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Blow out all passages. When removing the valve body, replace the O-ring. 1. Remove the ATF feed pipes from the servo body, secondary valve body and main valve body. 2. Remove the ATF strainer and servo detent base (two bolts). 3. Remove the servo body and servo separator plate (seven bolts). 4. Remove the secondary valve body, shaft stop and secondary separator plate (three bolts). 5. Remove the lock-up valve body and separator plate (seven bolts). 6. Remove the regulator valve body (one bolt). 7. Remove the stator shaft and stop shaft. 8. Remove the detent spring from the detent arm, then remove the control shaft from the torque converter housing. 9. Remove the detent arm and detent arm shaft from the main valve body. 10. Remove the main valve body (five bolts). NOTE: Do not let the eight check balls fall out of the main valve body when removing the main valve body. 11. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then remove the ATF pump gears. 12. Remove the main separator plate and two dowel pins. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5212 13. Clean the inlet opening of the ATF strainer thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it is in good condition, and the inlet opening is not clogged. 14. Test the filter by pouring clean ATF fluid through the inlet opening. Replace the ATF strainer if it is clogged or damaged. NOTE: The ATF strainer can be reused if it is not clogged. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5213 Valve Body: Service and Repair Repair NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their bores. You may use this procedure to free the valves in the valve bodies. 1. Soak a sheet of #600 abrasive paper in ATF for about 30 minutes. 2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve drops out of its bore. CAUTION: It may be necessary to use a small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver. 3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF soaked #600 paper to polish off any burrs that are on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and dry it with compressed air. 4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF soaked paper, and insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve. Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the paper as you push it in and out. CAUTION: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't require much polishing to remove any burrs. 5. Remove the #600 paper and thoroughly wash the entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with compressed air. 6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It should drop to the bottom of the bore under its own weight. If not, repeat step 4, then retest. 7. Remove the valve, then thoroughly clean it and the valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a lubricant. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5214 Valve Body: Service and Repair Overhaul ATF Pump With A/T 1. Install the ATF pump gears and ATF pump driven gear shaft in the main valve body. NOTE: Lubricate all parts with ATF during inspection. - Install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered side facing up as shown. 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive and driven gears. ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance: Standard (New): - ATF Pump Drive Gear: 0.105 - 0.1325 mm (0.004 - 0.005 inch) - ATF Pump Driven Gear: 0.035 - 0.0625 mm (0.0014 - 0.0025 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5215 3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure the thrust clearance of the ATF pump driven gear to-valve body. ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial) Clearance: Standard (New): 0.03 - 0.05 mm (0.001 - 0.002 inch) - Service Limit: 0.07 mm (0.003 inch) Main Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5216 Part 2 Of 2 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. CAUTION: Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls; it may magnetize the balls. Secondary Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5217 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Replace the secondary valve body kit, P/N 27700 - P4R - 305 (The secondary valve body kit includes the linear solenoid assembly) if any parts are worn or damaged. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. - The CPC valve is installed in the secondary valve body, held in place by the lock bolt. Regulator Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5218 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. 1. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly. CAUTION: The regulator spring cap can pop out when the stop bolt is removed. 2. Reassembly is the reverse order of the disassembly procedure. NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. - Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve body, and tighten the stop bolt. Lock-Up Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5219 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Blow out all passages. - Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, see Valve Body Repair. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. Servo Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5220 NOTE: - Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Blow out all passages - Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged. - Coat all parts with ATF during assembly. - Replace the O-rings. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5221 Valve Body: Service and Repair Assembly NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF before assembly. 1. Install the valve, valve spring and cap in the valve body and secure with the roller. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5222 2. Set the spring in the valve and install it in the valve body. Push the spring in with a screwdriver, then install the spring seat. 3. Install the valve, spring and cap in the valve body. Push the cap, then install the clip. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5223 Valve Body: Service and Repair Lower Valve Body Replacement REPLACEMENT WARNING: Make sure lifts, jacks, and safety stands are placed properly. CAUTION: While removing and installing the lower valve body assembly, be sure not to allow dust and other foreign particles to enter into the transmission. 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands. 2. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels securely. 3. Remove the drain plug, and drain the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. CAUTION: Keep all of other foreign particles out of the transmission. 4. Disconnect the 8P connector from the solenoid harness connector. 5. Remove the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) cooler hoses at the ATF cooler lines. Turn the ends of the ATF cooler hoses up to prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the ATF cooler hoses. CAUTION: Keep all of other foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. Remove the right front mount/bracket. 7. Remove the ATF cooler outlet line. 8. Remove the ATF cooler line bracket bolt. 9. Remove the ATF pan (fourteen bolts). 10. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts). 11. Remove the one bolt securing the solenoid harness connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5224 12. Remove the lower valve body assembly (eight bolts). 13. Install the new lower valve body in the reverse order of the removal procedure. CAUTION: Keep all of other foreign particles out of the transmission. NOTE: Replace the following parts: - O-rings on the solenoid harness connector and the ATF strainer - ATF pan gasket - Sealing washers - If the ATF cooler inlet line bracket is bent or warped, put it back to the original position. 14. Perform the start clutch calibration procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair 1. Remove fluid with syringe, disconnect clutch pipe and reservoir hose from master cylinder, then plug clutch pipe and reservoir hose. 2. Pry out cotter pin and remove pedal pin yoke, then remove nuts and master cylinder. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Bleed hydraulic system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect and plug clutch hydraulic hose from slave cylinder. 2. Remove slave cylinder to clutch housing attaching bolts, then slave cylinder. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Bleed hydraulic system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch > Page 5237 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Interlock Switch Behind Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5244 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5245 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5246 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5247 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5248 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5249 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5250 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5251 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5252 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5253 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5254 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5255 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5256 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5257 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5258 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5259 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5260 CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Cooler, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF Cooler Cleaner Information Use Worm-Style Clamps With the ATF Cooler Cleaner The spring-style clamps used on the ATF cooler lines are made to hold the cooler lines to the ATF cooler under normal operating conditions. The ATF Cooler Cleaner (P/N GHTTTCF6H) uses high pressure (100 psi) to do its job. With the pump motor running, the spring-style clamps can walk off or disconnect, and you'll wind up with a real mess to clean up in your shop. In March of this year, we sent each Honda dealership a pair of high-quality worm-style clamps to replace the original spring-style clamps. These clamps were part of a cooler cleaner update kit, and securely hold the cooler line in place. They've got a blue cap for easy identification. Need some more? Just call G-TFC, Inc. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5273 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5274 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5275 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5276 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5277 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5278 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5279 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5280 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5281 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5282 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5283 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5284 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5285 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5286 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5287 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5288 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5289 CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Carrier Bearings > Component Information > Service and Repair Carrier Bearings: Service and Repair TOOL REQUIRED - 07746-0030100 Driver, 40 mm I.D. - Or Equivalent NOTE: Check bearings for wear and rough rotation. If the bearings are OK, removal is not necessary. 1. Remove the ball bearings using a bearing puller as shown. 2. Install new ball bearings using the special tool as shown. NOTE: Drive the bearings squarely until they bottom against the carrier. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Specifications Axle Shaft: Specifications Component .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... Torque/Ft. Lbs. Spindle Nut ......................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................. 134 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5303 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair NOTE: Replacement procedures for left and right driveshafts are the same. 1. Raise and support front of vehicle, then remove front wheels. 2. Drain transaxle. 3. Raise locking tab on spindle nut, then remove nut. 4. Remove damper fork, then the cotter pin from lower arm ball joint castle nut and remove nut. 5. Install hex nut on ball joint. Ensure nut is flush with ball joint pin end, or threaded section of ball joint pin might be damaged by ball joint remover. 6. Separate ball joint and lower arm using ball joint remover tool No. 07MAC-SL00100, or equivalent. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. 7. Pry driveshaft assembly with screwdriver to force set ring at driveshaft end past groove. 8. Pull on inboard joint and remove driveshaft from differential case or bearing support as an assembly. Do not pull on driveshaft, as inboard joint may come apart. Use care when prying out assembly, and pull it straight to avoid damaging differential oil seal or intermediate shaft outer seal. 9. Pull knuckle outward and remove driveshaft outboard joint from front wheel hub using plastic hammer. 10. Reverse procedure to install. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Constant Velocity Joint: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns Constant Velocity Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns 91-029 January 26, 1999 Applies To: ALL 1988 and later Models* Clicking Noise While Turning (Supersedes 91-029, dated April 17, 1992) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A clicking noise is heard while making right or left turns at 10 mph or less. PROBABLE CAUSE Worn outboard driveshaft joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the noisy outboard driveshaft joint. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Failed part: Use the replacement Part Number Skill level: Repair Technician PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS DIAGNOSIS (Driving method) 1. Drive the car in a circle in an open parking lot at approximately 10 mph with the brakes slightly applied. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Constant Velocity Joint: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 5312 2. Have an assistant stand in the center of the circle and listen for the clicking noise. 3. Drive the car in the opposite direction. The assistant should be able to tell which axle is making the noise. DIAGNOSIS (On-hoist method) 1. Raise the car on a hoist and start the engine. 2. With the transmission in first gear (manual transmission) or D4 (automatic transmission), increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm. 3. Apply the brakes to load the engine speed to 1,500 rpm while maintaining the same throttle position. 4. Turn the wheels slowly to full left and full right positions. Have an assistant listen to determine which axle is making the noise. NOTE: A driveshaft with a light degree of noise may not be detected by this on-hoist method. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the driveshaft as described in Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. 2. Use diagonal cutters to cut the two boot bands and the outboard joint boot, then remove them from the driveshaft. 3. Wipe off the grease to expose the outboard joint. Measure and record distance "A" (from the splined end of the driveshaft to the inner race) as a reference for reassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Constant Velocity Joint: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 5313 4. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise. 5. *Remove the outboard joint using the threaded adapter (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) and a commercially available 5/8" x 18 slide hammer.* 6. Remove and discard the "C" clip from the driveshaft. Clean and inspect the driveshaft splines and ring groove for burrs or other defects. 7. Install the new outboard joint boot provided in the kit. Slide it slowly onto the driveshaft to avoid damaging the boot. 8. Install the new "C" clip onto the ring groove of the driveshaft. 9. Insert the driveshaft in the new outboard joint. Make sure the "C" clip is centered on the shaft and is resting against the chamfered edge of the inner race. 10. Remove the driveshaft from the vise. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Constant Velocity Joint: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 5314 11. To drive the outboard joint on the rest of the way, pick up the assembly and let it fall from about 10 cm (4 to 5 in.) onto a hard surface. NOTICE Do not use a hammer; excessive force may damage the driveshaft. 12. Measure distance "A" (from the splines to the inner race of the joint). If the distance is more than your measurement in Step 3, repeat Step 11. 13. When distance "A" equals your measurement in Step 3, the "C" clip should be seated in the joint. Tap on the inner race with a plastic hammer to make sure the joint does not move on the driveshaft. 14. Fit the small end of the boot into the boot groove on the driveshaft. 15. Install the small boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 16. Pack the outboard boot with the grease included in the kit. Pack the outboard joint with the remaining grease, then fit the boot over the outboard joint. 17. Install the large boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 18. Reinstall the driveshaft assembly into the car. Refer to Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Constant Velocity Joint: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns Constant Velocity Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns 91-029 January 26, 1999 Applies To: ALL 1988 and later Models* Clicking Noise While Turning (Supersedes 91-029, dated April 17, 1992) Updated information is shown with asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM A clicking noise is heard while making right or left turns at 10 mph or less. PROBABLE CAUSE Worn outboard driveshaft joint. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the noisy outboard driveshaft joint. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Defect code: 042 Contention code: B07 Failed part: Use the replacement Part Number Skill level: Repair Technician PARTS INFORMATION REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS DIAGNOSIS (Driving method) 1. Drive the car in a circle in an open parking lot at approximately 10 mph with the brakes slightly applied. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Constant Velocity Joint: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 5320 2. Have an assistant stand in the center of the circle and listen for the clicking noise. 3. Drive the car in the opposite direction. The assistant should be able to tell which axle is making the noise. DIAGNOSIS (On-hoist method) 1. Raise the car on a hoist and start the engine. 2. With the transmission in first gear (manual transmission) or D4 (automatic transmission), increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm. 3. Apply the brakes to load the engine speed to 1,500 rpm while maintaining the same throttle position. 4. Turn the wheels slowly to full left and full right positions. Have an assistant listen to determine which axle is making the noise. NOTE: A driveshaft with a light degree of noise may not be detected by this on-hoist method. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the driveshaft as described in Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. 2. Use diagonal cutters to cut the two boot bands and the outboard joint boot, then remove them from the driveshaft. 3. Wipe off the grease to expose the outboard joint. Measure and record distance "A" (from the splined end of the driveshaft to the inner race) as a reference for reassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Constant Velocity Joint: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 5321 4. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise. 5. *Remove the outboard joint using the threaded adapter (see REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS) and a commercially available 5/8" x 18 slide hammer.* 6. Remove and discard the "C" clip from the driveshaft. Clean and inspect the driveshaft splines and ring groove for burrs or other defects. 7. Install the new outboard joint boot provided in the kit. Slide it slowly onto the driveshaft to avoid damaging the boot. 8. Install the new "C" clip onto the ring groove of the driveshaft. 9. Insert the driveshaft in the new outboard joint. Make sure the "C" clip is centered on the shaft and is resting against the chamfered edge of the inner race. 10. Remove the driveshaft from the vise. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Constant Velocity Joint: > 91-029 > Jan > 99 > Drivetrain - Clicking Noise On Low Speed Turns > Page 5322 11. To drive the outboard joint on the rest of the way, pick up the assembly and let it fall from about 10 cm (4 to 5 in.) onto a hard surface. NOTICE Do not use a hammer; excessive force may damage the driveshaft. 12. Measure distance "A" (from the splines to the inner race of the joint). If the distance is more than your measurement in Step 3, repeat Step 11. 13. When distance "A" equals your measurement in Step 3, the "C" clip should be seated in the joint. Tap on the inner race with a plastic hammer to make sure the joint does not move on the driveshaft. 14. Fit the small end of the boot into the boot groove on the driveshaft. 15. Install the small boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 16. Pack the outboard boot with the grease included in the kit. Pack the outboard joint with the remaining grease, then fit the boot over the outboard joint. 17. Install the large boot band provided in the kit. Bend both sets of locking tabs over, then lightly tap them flat. 18. Reinstall the driveshaft assembly into the car. Refer to Section 16 of the appropriate service manual. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5323 Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair Fig. 1 Front Drive Assembly NOTE: Prior to disassemble, mark rollers and roller grooves. Refer to Fig. 1 for driveshaft service. 1. Remove set ring from inboard joint. 2. Remove boot band by prying up locking tabs with screwdriver and raising end of band. 3. Remove inboard joint, then remove rollers from spider. 4. Remove circlip, then the spider from shaft using suitable bearing remover. 5. Remove stopper ring. 6. Wrap splines on driveshaft with vinyl tape to prevent damaging boots and dynamic damper, then remove boot band and inboard boot. 7. Remove dynamic damper band and dynamic damper. 8. Remove boot bands and outboard boot, then the vinyl tape. 9. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: a. Pack inboard and outboard joints with molybdenum disulfide grease. b. Install rollers on spider shafts, then slide spider assembly into inboard shaft joint. Avoid getting grease on rubber parts. c. Position boots and install small end bands, then expand and compress boots until they return to their normal shape and length. d. Install large end bands. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation 98-018 July 22, 2003 Applies To: ALL Models Driveshaft Boot Band Tool (Supersedes 98-018, Boot Band Tool, dated April 14, 1998) Updated information is shown by asterisks. The replacement boot bands for the driveshaft CV joint boots have changed. The replacement bands are a double loop type that require a special tool for proper installation. * TOOL INFORMATION Boot Band Tool: T/N KD-3191 This tool is already at your dealership. To order additional tools, call the Honda Tool and Equipment Program at 1-888-424-6857. Phone lines are open Monday through Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. CT.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the old boot band(s). Take care not to damage the boot. 2. Remove and inspect the boot. Replace the boot if it is worn or damaged. 3. Install the boot, and fill it with the specified amount and type of grease. Refer to section 16 of the appropriate service manual for the grease amount and type. 4. Adjust the driveshaft to the proper length. Refer to section 16 of the appropriate service manual. 5. Install the replacement boot band onto the large end of the boot with the end of the band facing toward the front of the vehicle. 6. Take up the slack in the boot band by hand, and hold the boot band in place. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation > Page 5328 7. Measure and mark the band with a felt-tip pen at the specified distance from the clip: ^ If you are installing a new boot, mark the band approximately 10 to 14 mm (0.4 to 0.6 in.) from the clip. ^ If you are reinstalling the original boot, mark the band 10 mm (0.4 in.) from the clip. 8. Thread the free end of the band through the nose section of the boot band tool and into the slot on the winding mandrel. 9. Take up the slack in the boot band by hand, then slowly turn the winding mandrel with a wrench. Tighten the band until the mark you made in step 7 meets the edge of the clip. 10. Raise up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90 degrees, then center-punch the clip to hold the band temporarily. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Drivetrain - Revised CV Joint Boot Band/Installation > Page 5329 11. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess 5 to 10 mm (0.2 to 0.4 in.) from the clip. 12. Secure the end of the boot band by tapping it down over the clip with a hammer. 13. Make sure that the boot band and clip do not interfere with anything and that the band does not move. 14. If necessary, repeat steps 5 through 13 to install the boot band on the small end of the boot. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications End Play End Play End Play Front 0.0 to 0.5 mm Rear 0.0 to 0.5 mm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5333 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc in or outward. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5334 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Wheel bearings and hub on these models are an integral assembly and bearings cannot be adjusted. If hub endplay exceeds 0.002 inch with spindle nut properly tightened, hub and bearing assembly should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension TOOL REQUIRED - 07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint remover, 28 mm - 07JAF-SH20110 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Pilot, 38 mm - 07JAF-SH20120 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Shaft, 22.4 x 25.4 mm - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm - 07GAF-SE00401 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Base - 07947-6340201 Driver Attachment 58 x 72 mm - 07965-SD90100 Support Base - 07GAF-SE00200 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Guide Attachment CAUTION: - Replace the self-locking nuts after removal. - The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. NOTE: - Use only genuine Honda wheel weights for aluminum wheels. Non-genuine wheel weights may corrode and damage the aluminum wheels. - On the aluminum wheels, remove the center cap from the inside of the wheel after removing the wheel. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. - Wipe off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball joint. 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5337 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. 4. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut, then remove the nut. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. 6. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and hang the caliper assembly to one side. CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws. 8. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts into the disc to push it away from the wheel hub. NOTE: Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5338 9. Remove the brake disc from the knuckle. 10. Check the front wheel hub for damage and cracks. 11. Remove the wheel sensor from the knuckle (for cars with ABS). NOTE: Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Use the special tool to separate the ball joints from the suspension or steering arm. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot. 12. Clean any dirt or grease off the ball joint. 13. Remove the cotter pin from the steering arm and remove the nut. 14. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown. This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 15. Install a 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5339 16. Install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure you do not damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the pressure bolt. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 17. Once the special tool is in place, turn the adjusting bolt as necessary to make the jaws parallel. Then hand-tighten the pressure bolt, and recheck the jaws to make sure they are still Parallel. NOTE: After making the adjustment to the adjusting bolt, be sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in this position to the allow the jaw to pivot. 18. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint shaft pops loose from the steering arm. Wear eye protection. The ball joint can break loose suddenly and scatter dirt or other debris in your eyes. 19. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint and pull the ball joint out of the steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot and replace it if damaged. 20. Remove the cotter pin from the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 21. Install a 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 22. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and lower arm. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5340 23. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 24. Install the 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 25. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and knuckle. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 26. Pull the knuckle outward and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the knuckle by tapping the driveshaft end with a plastic hammer, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one after removal. 27. Separate the wheel hub from the knuckle using the special tools and a hydraulic press. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. - Hold onto the wheel hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. - To prevent damage to the tool, make sure the threads are fully engaged before pressing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5341 28. Remove the circlip and the splash guard from the knuckle. 29. Press the wheel bearing out of the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. 30. Press the wheel bearing inner race from the wheel hub using the special tools, a bearing separator, and a press as shown. NOTE: Wash the knuckle and wheel hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5342 31. Press a new wheel bearing into the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. NOTE: Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 32. Install the circlip securely in the knuckle groove. 33. Install the splash guard and tighten the screws. 34. Install the wheel hub on the knuckle using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press as shown. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5343 35. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and pay particular attention to the following items: a. Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots when installing the knuckle. b. Torque all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. c. Torque the castle nuts to the lower torque specifications, then tighten them only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening. d. Install new cotter pins on the castle nuts after torquing. e. Avoid twisting the sensor wires when installing the wheel sensor. f. Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and the inside of the brake disc. g. Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. h. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 5344 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension The rear bearing is to be serviced with the wheel wheel hub as one unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Front Spindle Nut .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 181 Nm (134 ft. lbs.) Rear Spindle Nut .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 181 Nm (134 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Drive Plate Bolts .................................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 74 Nm (54 ft.lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5352 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Remove the six drive plate bolts, then separate the drive plate from the crankshaft flange. After installation, tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5356 Flywheel: Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect the ring gear teeth for wear and damage. 2. Inspect the clutch disc mating surface on the flywheel for wear, cracks, and burning. 3. Measure the flywheel runout using a dial indicator through at least two full turns. Push against the flywheel each time you turn it to take up the crankshaft thrust washer clearance. NOTE: The runout can be measured with engine installed. Standard (New): 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) max. Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the flywheel. 4. Turn the inner race of the ball bearing with your finger. The bail bearing should turn smoothly and quietly. Check that the ball bearing outer race fits tightly in the flywheel. If the inner race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or fit tight in the flywheel, replace the ball bearing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5357 Flywheel: Service and Repair TOOL REQUIRED - 07LAB-PV00100 Ring Gear Holder - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010100 Attachment, 32x35 mm - Or Equivalent 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps as shown, and remove the flywheel. 3. Remove the ball bearing from the flywheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5358 4. Drive the new ball bearing into the flywheel using the special tools as shown. 5. Align the hole in the flywheel with the crankshaft dowel pin and install the flywheel. Install the mounting bolts finger-tight. 6. Install the special tool, then torque the flywheel mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations Shift Indicator: Locations SRS components are located in this area Review the SRS component locations precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5366 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5367 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5368 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5369 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5370 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5371 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5372 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5373 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5374 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5375 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5376 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5377 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5378 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5379 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5380 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5381 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5382 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5383 Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5384 A/T Gear Position Indicator Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5385 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes ON. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come ON. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the Powertrain (except HX) or Transmission (HX) Control Module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for HX) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 5388 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 5389 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5390 Shift Indicator: Adjustments 1. Shift to the [P] position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of [D4] or [D4] position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No.1 and No.7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [N] in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5391 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral". 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [P] anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5395 Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Bell Housing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Bell Housing: Service and Repair 1. Remove the oil seal from the clutch housing. 2. Install the oil seal into the clutch housing using the special tools as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Case: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Set Screw ............................................................................................................................................ .................................................. 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) Sealing Bolt ......................................................... ................................................................................................................................. 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Housing Replacement Case: Service and Repair Transmission Housing Replacement REMOVAL NOTE: Place the clutch housing on two pieces of wood thick enough to keep the mainshaft from hitting the workbench. 1. Remove the back-up light switch. 2. Remove transmission hanger. 3. remove the setting screws, washers, springs, and steel balls. 4. Loosen the transmission housing attaching bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove them. 5. Remove the 32 mm sealing bolt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Housing Replacement > Page 5405 6. Expand the snap ring on the countershaft ball bearing, and remove it from the groove using a pair of snap ring pliers. 7. Separate the transmission housing from the clutch housing, and wipe it clean of the sealant. 8. Remove the thrust shim, oil guide plate, and oil gutter plate from the transmission housing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Housing Replacement > Page 5406 Case: Service and Repair Transmission Housing Seal Replacement 1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing. 2. Install the oil seal into the transmission housing using the special tools as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Counter Gear Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Counter Gear Bearing: Service and Repair TOOL REQUIRED - 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm - 07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm - 07746-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm - Or Equivalent 1. Remove the needle bearing using the special tool as shown, then remove the oil guide plate. 2. Install the oil guide plate, then drive the needle bearing into the clutch housing using the special tools as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Countershaft: Specifications DIMENSIONS Countershaft Standard Dimensions A: 30.00-30.015 mm (1.1811-1.1817 inch) B: 35.984-36.00 mm (1.4167-1.4173 inch) C: 24.980-24.993 mm (0.9835-0.9840 inch) Countershaft Service Limit Dimensions A: 29.950 mm (1.1791 inch) B: 35.930 mm (1.4146 inch) C: 24.930 mm (0.9815 inch) Countershaft Runout Standard (Max): 0.02 mm (0.001 inch) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) Clearance Between Countershaft And 1st Gear Standard 0.03-0.10 mm (0.001-0.004 inch) Service Limit 0.22 mm (0.009 inch) 1st Gear Thickness Standard 30.41-30.44 mm (1.197-1.198 inch) Service Limit 30.36 mm (1.195 inch) Clearance Between 2nd And 3rd Gears Standard 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 inch) Service Limit 0.24 mm (0.009 inch) 2nd Gear Spacer Collar Thickness Standard 32.03-32.06 mm (1.261-1.262 inch) Service Limit 32.01 mm (1.260 inch) 2nd Gear Thickness Standard 31.92-31.97 mm (1.257-1.259 inch) Service Limit 31.85 mm (1.254 inch) TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5413 Locknut (Tighten in 3 steps) First 108 Nm (79.6 ft. lbs.) Second Back Off to 0 Third 108 Nm (79.6 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5414 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5415 Countershaft: Testing and Inspection CLEARANCE INSPECTION NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and hub as a set. 1. Measure the clearance between the countershaft and 1st gear. - Standard: 0.03 - 0.10 mm (0.001 - 0.004 inch) - Service Limit: 0.22 mm (0.009 inch) 2. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure the thickness of 1st gear. - Standard: 30.41 - 30.44 mm (1.197 - 1.198 inch) - Service Limit: 30.36 mm (1.195 inch) - If the thickness of 1st gear is less than the service limit, replace 1st gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 1 st gear is within the service limit, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new one. 3. Measure the clearance between 2nd and 3rd gears. - Standard: 0.04 - 0.12 mm (0.002 - 0.005 inch) - Service Limit: 0.24 mm (0.009 inch) 4. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure the thickness of the spacer collar. Standard: 32.03 - 32.06 mm (1.261 - 1.262 inch) 5. If the thickness is less than the service limit, replace the spacer collar with a new one. If the thickness is within the service limit, measure the thickness of 2nd gear. Standard: 31.92 - 31.97 mm (1.257 - 1.259 inch) - Service Limit: 31.85 mm (1.254 inch) - If the thickness of 2nd gear is less than the service limit, replace 2nd gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 2nd gear is within the service limit, replace the 1st/2nd synchro hub with a new one. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Countershaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5416 Countershaft: Service and Repair For information regarding the service and repair of this components, and the system that it is a part of, please refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle; Service and Repair; Transmission Overhaul. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Ring Gear, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Ring Gear: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 101 Nm (74.5 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Ring Gear, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5421 Ring Gear: Service and Repair 1. Remove the bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps, then remove the final driven gear from the differential carrier. NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand threads. 2. Install the final driven gear by tightening the bolts in a crisscross pattern in several steps. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Drain Plug: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Plug ..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fill Plug, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Fill Plug: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Plug ..................................................................................................................................................... .................................................. 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission/Transaxle Fluid S40 Fluid At Oil Change ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 1.8 l (1.9 US qt.) Fluid At Overhaul ........................................ ................................................................................................................................................ 1.9 l 2.0 US qt.) S4C Fluid At Oil Change ......................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 2.2 l (2.3 US qt.) Fluid At Overhaul ........................... ............................................................................................................................................................ 2.3 l (2.4 US qt.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5432 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Transmission/Transaxle Fluid Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) preferred, or an API service SG, SH or SJ grade motor oil with a viscosity of SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as a temporary replacement. An SG grade is preferred but SH or SJ may be used if SG is not available. However, motor oil does not have the proper additives and continued use may cause stiffer shifting. Drain and replace with Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) as soon as convenient. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5433 Fluid - M/T: Testing and Inspection TRANSMISSION OIL CHECK NOTE: Check the transmission oil with the engine OFF and the vehicle on level ground. 1. Remove the oil filler plug, then check the level and condition of the oil. 2. The oil level must be up to the filler hole. If it is below the hole, add oil until it runs out, then reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. 3. If the transmission oil is dirty, remove the drain plug and drain the oil. 4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new washer, and refill the transmission with the recommended oil to the proper level. NOTE: The drain plug washer should be replaced at every oil change. 5. Reinstall the oil filler plug with a new washer. Oil Capacity - 1.8 l (1.9 US qt.) at oil change - 1.9 l 12.0 US qt.) at overhaul NOTE: Always use Genuine Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF). Using motor oil can cause stiffer shifting because it does not contain the proper additives. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Synchronizer Hub: Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect gear teeth on all synchro hubs and synchro sleeves for rounded off corners, which indicate wear. 2. Install each synchro hub in its mating synchro sleeve, and check for freedom of movement. NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set. 3. When assembling the synchro sleeve and synchro hub, be sure to match the three sets of longer teeth (120 degrees apart) on the synchro sleeve with the three sets of deeper grooves in the synchro hub. CAUTION: Do not install the synchro sleeve with its longer teeth in the synchro hub slots because it will damage the spring ring. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Hub, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5438 Synchronizer Hub: Service and Repair INSTALLATION 1. Inspect gear teeth on all synchro hubs and synchro sleeves for rounded off corners, which indicate wear. 2. Install each synchro hub in its mating synchro sleeve, and check for freedom of movement. NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and synchro hub as a set. 3. When assembling the synchro sleeve and synchro hub, be sure to match the three sets of longer teeth (120 degrees apart) on the synchro sleeve with the three sets of deeper grooves in the synchro hub. CAUTION: Do not install the synchro sleeve with its longer teeth in the synchro hub slots because it will damage the spring ring. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Synchronizer Ring: Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect the synchro ring and gear. - A: Inspect the inside of the synchro ring for wear. - B: Inspect the synchro sleeve teeth and matching teeth on the synchro ring for wear (rounded off). - C: Inspect the synchro sleeve teeth and matching teeth on the gear for wear (rounded off). - D: Inspect the gear hub thrust surface for wear. - E: Inspect the cone surface for wear and roughness. - F: Inspect the teeth on all gears for uneven wear, scoring, galling, and cracks. 2. Coat the cone surface of the gear with oil, and place the synchro ring on the matching gear. Rotate the synchro ring, making sure that it does not slip. Measure the clearance between the synchro ring and gear all the way around. NOTE: Hold the synchro ring against the gear evenly while measuring the clearance. Synchro Ring-to-Gear Clearance: - Standard: 0.73 - 1.18 mm (0.029 - 0.046 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Gear, M/T > Synchronizer Ring, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5442 - Service Limit: 0.4 mm (0.02 inch) - If the clearance is less than the service limit, replace the synchro ring and synchro cone. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing: Service and Repair TOOL REQUIRED - 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm - 07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm - Or Equivalent 1. Remove the ball bearing using the special tool as shown. 2. Remove the oil seal from the clutch housing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft Bearing/Bushing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5446 3. Drive the new oil seal into the clutch housing using the special tools as shown. 4. Drive the ball bearing into the clutch housing using the special tools as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Mainshaft: Specifications DIMENSIONS Clearance Between 2nd And 3rd Gears Standard 0.06-0.21 mm (0.002-0.008 inch) Service Limit 0.33 mm (0.013 inch) Clearance Between 4th Gear And Spacer Collar Standard 0.06-0.19 mm (0.002-0.007 inch) Service Limit 0.31 mm (0.012 inch) Clearance Between Spacer Collar And 5th Gear Standard 0.06-0.19 mm (0.002-0.007 inch) Service Limit 0.31 mm (0.012 inch) 3rd Gear Thickness Standard 30.22-30.27 mm (1.190-1.192 inch) service Limit 30.15 mm (1.187 inch) 4th Gear Spacer Collar Distance Standard 22.82-22.86 mm (0.898-0.900 inch) Service Limit 22.81 mm (0.898 inch) 4th Gear Thickness Standard 30.12-30.17 mm (1.186-1.188 inch) Service Limit 30.05 mm (1.183 inch) 5th Gear Space Collar Distance Standard 23.53-23.56 mm (0.926-0.928 inch) Service Limit 23.51 mm (0.926 inch) 5th Gear Thickness Standard 28.42-28.47 mm (1.119-1.121 inch) Service Limit 28.35 mm (1.116 inch) Mainshaft Standard Dimensions A: 21.987-22.000 mm (0.8656-0.8661 inch) B: 26.980-26.993 mm (1.0622-1.0627 inch) C: 33.984-34.000 mm (1.3380-1.3386 inch) D: 25.977-25.990 mm (1.0227-1.0232 inch) Mainshaft Service Limit Dimensions A: 21.930 mm (0.8634 inch) B: 26.930 mm (1.0602 inch) C: 33.930 mm (1.3358 inch) D: 25.920 mm (1.0205 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5450 Mainshaft Runout Standard: 0.02 mm (0.001 inch) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5451 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5452 Mainshaft: Testing and Inspection NOTE: If replacement is required, always replace the synchro sleeve and hub as a set. 1. Measure the clearance between 2nd and 3rd gears. - Standard: 0.06 - 0.21 mm (0.002 - 0.008 inch) - Service Limit: 0.33 mm (0.013 inch) 2. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure the thickness of 3rd gear. - Standard: 30.22 - 30.27 mm (1.190 - 1.192 inch) - Service Limit: 30.15 mm (1.187 inch) - If the thickness of 3rd gear is less than the service limit, replace 3rd gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 3rd gear is within the service limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new one. 3. Measure the clearance between 4th gear and the spacer collar. - Standard: 0.06 - 0.19 mm (0.002 - 0.007 inch) - Service Limit: 0.31 mm (0.012 inch) 4. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure distance (A) on the spacer collar. - Standard: 22.82 - 22.86 mm (0.898 - 0.900 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5453 - Service Limit: 22.81 mm (0.898 inch) 5. If distance (A) is less than the service limit, replace the spacer collar with a new one. If distance (A) is within the service limit, measure the thickness of 4th gear. Standard: 30.12 - 30.17 mm (1.186 - 1.188 inch) - Service limit: 30.05 mm (1.183 inch) - If the thickness of 4th gear is less than the service limit, replace 4th gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 4th gear is within the service limit, replace the 3rd/4th synchro hub with a new one. 6. Measure the clearance between the spacer collar and 5th gear. - Standard: 0.06 - 0.19 mm (0.002 - 0.007 inch) - Service Limit: 0.31 mm (0.012 inch) 7. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure distance (B) on the spacer collar. - Standard: 23.53 - 23.56 mm (0.926 - 0.928 inch) - Service Limit: 23.51 mm (0.926 inch) 8. If distance (B) is less than the service limit, replace the spacer collar with a new one. If distance (B) is within the service limit, measure thickness of 5th gear. Standard: 28.42 - 28.47 mm (1.119 - 1.121 inch) - Service Limit: 28.35 mm (1.116 inch) - If the thickness of 5th gear is less than the service limit, replace 5th gear with a new one. - If the thickness of 5th gear is within the service limit, replace the 5th synchro hub with a new one. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5454 Mainshaft: Adjustments 1. Remove the thrust shim and oil guide plate from the transmission housing 2. Install the 3rd/4th synchro hub, spacer collar, 5th synchro hub, ball bearing, and thrust washer on the mainshaft. Install the assembly in the transmission housing. 3. Measure the distance (B) between the end of the transmission housing and thrust washer. NOTE: Use a straight edge and vernier caliper. - Measure at three locations and average the readings. 4. Measure the distance (C) between the surfaces of the clutch housing and bearing inner race. NOTE: Use a straight edge and depth gauge. - Measure at three locations and average the readings. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5455 5. Select the proper shim on the basis of the following calculations: NOTE: Use only one thrust shim. (Basic Formula) = (B) + (C) - 0.95 = shim thickness. Example of calculation: Distance (B) (2.00 mm) + Distance (C) (0.09 mm) = 2.09 mm subtract the spring washer height (0.95 mm) = the required thrust shim (1.14 mm) 6. Install the oil guide plate and selected thrust shim in the transmission housing. NOTE: Clean the thrust washer, spring washer and thrust shim thoroughly before installation. - Install the thrust washer, spring washer and thrust shim properly. 7. Install the thrust washer and spring washer in the mainshaft. 8. Install the mainshaft in the clutch housing. 9. Place the transmission housing over the mainshaft and onto the clutch housing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5456 10. Tighten the clutch and transmission housings with several 8 mm bolts. NOTE: It is not necessary to use sealing agent between the housings. 8 x 1.25 mm to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) 11. Tap the mainshaft with a plastic hammer. 12. Check the thrust clearance in the manner described below: CAUTION: Measurement should be made at room temperature. a. Slide the mainshaft base and the collar over the mainshaft. b. Attach the mainshaft holder to the mainshaft as follows: NOTE: Back-out the mainshaft holder bolt and loosen the two hex bolts. - Fit the holder over the mainshaft so its lip is toward the transmission. - Align the mainshaft holder's lip around the groove at the inside of the mainshaft splices, then tighten the hex bolts. c. Seat the mainshaft fully by tapping on the end with a plastic hammer. d. Thread the mainshaft holder bolt in until it just contacts the wide surface of the mainshaft base. e. Zero a dial gauge on the end of the mainshaft. f. Turn the mainshaft holder bolt clockwise; stop turning when the dial gauge has reached its maximum movement. The reading on the dial gauge is the amount of mainshaft end play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5457 CAUTION: Turning the mainshaft holder bolt more than 60 degrees after the needle of the dial gauge stops moving may damage the transmission. g. If the reading is within the standard, the clearance is correct. If the reading is not within the standard, recheck the shim thickness. Standard: 0.11 - 0.18 mm (0.004 - 0.007 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5458 Mainshaft: Service and Repair TOOL REQUIRED - 07746-0030100 Driver, 40 mm I.D. - 07746-0030400 Attachment, 35 mm I.D. - 07746-0030300 Attachment, 30 mm I.D. - Or Equivalent DISASSEMBLE NOTE: Before disassembling, inspect the gear clearances. See: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the interlock guide bolt from under the clutch housing. 2. Remove the shift arm B attaching bolt. 3. Remove the mainshaft and countershaft assemblies with the shift fork from the clutch housing. NOTE: Before removing the mainshaft and countershaft assemblies, tape the mainshaft splines to protect the seal. 4. Inspect mainshaft assembly clearance. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5459 5. Remove the ball bearing using a bearing puller as shown. CAUTION: Remove the synchro hubs using a press and steel blocks as shown. Use of a jaw-type puller can cause damage to the gear teeth. 6. Support 4th gear on steel blocks, and press the main shaft out of the 5th synchro hub as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5460 7. Support the 3rd gear on steel blocks, and press the mainshaft out of the 3rd/4th synchro hub as shown. INSPECT 1. Inspect the gear surface and bearing surface for wear and damage, then measure the mainshaft at points A, B. C, and D. Standard: A: 21.987 - 22.000 mm (0.8656 - 0.8661 inch) B: 26.980 - 26.993 mm (1.0622 - 1.0627 inch) C: 33.984 - 34.000 mm (1.3380 - 1.3386 inch) D: 25.977 - 25.990 mm (1.0227 - 1.0232 inch) Service Limit: A: 21.930 mm (0.8634 inch) B: 26.930 mm (1.0602 inch) C: 33.930 mm (1.3358 inch) D: 25.920 mm (1.0205 inch) NOTE: If any part of the mainshaft is less than the service limit, replace it with a new one. 2. Inspect for runout. - Standard (max): 0.02 mm (0.001 inch) - Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) NOTE: Support the mainshaft at both ends as shown. If the runout is more than the service limit, replace the mainshaft with a new one. ASSEMBLE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5461 CAUTION: When installing the 3rd/4th and 5th synchro hubs, support the shaft on steel blocks, and install the synchro hubs using a press. NOTE: Refer to disassemble for reassembly sequence. 1. Support 2nd gear on steel blocks, then install the 3rd/4th synchro hub using the special tools and a press as shown. 2. Install the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve by aligning the stops of the 3rd/4th synchro sleeve and hub. NOTE: After installing, Check the operation of the 3rd/4th synchro hub set. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Mainshaft, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5462 3. Install the 5th synchro hub using the special.tools and a press as shown. 4. Install the ball bearing using the special tools and a press as shown. NOTE: Install the ball bearing with the tapered end facing down. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Reverse Idler Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair Reverse Idler Gear: Service and Repair REMOVAL 1. Remove the reverse shift holder. 2. Remove the reverse idler gear shaft and reverse idler gear. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Specifications Shift Fork: Specifications DIMENSIONS Reverse Shift Fork And 5th/Reverse Shift Piece Pin Clearance Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .................... 0.05-0.35 mm (0.002-0.014 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ................................................................................................................... 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) Reverse Shift Fork And Reverse Idler Gear Clearance Standard .............................................................................................................................................. ............................ 0.5-1.1 mm (0.02-0.04 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ................................................................................................................... 1.8 mm (0.07 inch) Reverse Fork Width Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .................... 12.7-13.0 mm (0.500-0.512 inch) Reverse Shift Fork Groove Width Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .................... 7.05-7.25 mm (0.278-0.285 inch) Shift Fork And Matching Synchro Sleeve Clearance Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .................... 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.026 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ................................................................................................................... 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) Shift Fork Fingers Thickness 3rd/4th ................................................................................................................................................. ........................ 7.4-7.6 mm (0.291-0.299 inch) 1st/2nd, 5th ............................................................... ................................................................................................... 6.2-6.4 mm (0.244-0.252 inch) Shift Fork And Shift Arm Clearance Standard .............................................................................................................................................. ........................ 0.2-0.5 mm (0.008-0.020 inch) Service Limit .............................................................. ................................................................................................................. 0.8 mm (0.030 inch) Shift Fork Groove Standard .............................................................................................................................................. .................... 13.2-13.4 mm (0.520-0.528 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5469 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MBS Shift Piece Shift Fork: Testing and Inspection MBS Shift Piece 1. Measure the width of the MBS shift piece. - Standard: 6.9 - 7.1 mm (0.272 - 0.280 inch) - Service Limit: 6.8 mm (0.268 inch) 2. If the width of the MBS shift piece is less than the service limit, replace the MBS shift piece. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MBS Shift Piece > Page 5472 Shift Fork: Testing and Inspection Reverse Shift Holder CLEARANCE 1. Measure the clearance between the reverse shift fork and 5th/reverse shift piece pin. - Standard: 0.05 - 0.35 mm (0.002 - 0.014 inch) - Service Limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 inch) 2. If the clearances are more than the service limit, measure the widths of the groove in the reverse shift fork. Standard: 7.05 - 7.25 mm (0.278 0.285 inch) If the widths of the grooves are not within the standard, replace the reverse shift holder with a new one. - If the width of the grooves are within the standard, replace the 5th/reverse shift piece with a new one. 3. Measure the clearance between the reverse idler gear and the reverse shift fork. - Standard: 0.5 - 1.1 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) - Service Limit: 1.8 mm (0.07 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MBS Shift Piece > Page 5473 4. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure the width of the reverse shift fork. Standard: 12.7 - 13.0 mm (0.500 - 0.512 inch) - If the width is not within the standard, replace the reverse shift holder with a new one. - If the width is within the standard, replace the reverse idler gear with a new one. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MBS Shift Piece > Page 5474 Shift Fork: Testing and Inspection Shift Fork Clearance NOTE: The synchro sleeve and the synchro hub should be replaced as a set. 1. Measure the clearance between each shift fork and its matching synchro sleeve. - Standard: 0.35 - 0.65 mm (0.014 - 0.026 inch) - Service Limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) 2. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure the thickness of the shift fork fingers. Standard: - 3rd/4th: 7.4 - 7.6 mm (0.291 - 0.299 inch) - 1st/2nd, 5th: 6.2 - 6.4 mm (0.244 - 0.252 inch) - If the thickness of the shift fork fingers is not within the standard, replace the shift fork with a new one. - If the thickness of the shift fork fingers is within the standard, replace the synchro sleeve with a new one. 3. Measure the clearance between the shift piece or shift fork and the shift arm B. - Standard: 0.2 - 0.5 mm (0.008 - 0.02 inch) - Service Limit: 0.8 mm (0.03 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Fork, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MBS Shift Piece > Page 5475 4. If the clearance is more than the service limit, measure the groove of the shift piece or shift fork. Standard: 13.2 - 13.4 mm (0.520 - 0.528 inch). NOTE: If the groove of the shift piece or shift fork is not within the standard, replace the shift piece or shift fork with a new one. If the groove of the shift piece or shift fork is within the standard, replace the shift arm B with a new one. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Selector Shaft, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Selector Shaft: Service and Repair REMOVAL NOTE: The steel balls are all of the same size (5/16 inch). 1. Remove the differential assembly. 2. Remove the 28 mm plug bolt and 1st/2nd select spring. 3. Remove the shift arm C attaching bolt. 4. Remove the shift arm shaft. NOTE: Be careful not to lose the steel ball. 5. Remove the steel ball, spring, and collar. 6. Remove shift arms C and B. and the interlock, then remove the reverse select spring and retainer. 7. Remove the shift arm A attaching bolt, the set ball spring bolt, set spring, and steel ball. 8. Remove the shift rod, then remove the shift arm A. 9. Remove the reverse lock cam. 10. Remove the magnet. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations > Page 5485 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagrams Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5489 Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5490 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5491 Shift Interlock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock System Shift Lock System 1. Disconnect the 8P connector from the interlock control unit. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5492 - If all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good control unit, and recheck the system. If the check is OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and you step on the brake pedal (with the shift lever in [P]), the shift lock system is electronically normal; if the shift lever cannot be shifted from [P], test the A/T gear position switch, park pin switch. Reconnect the 8P connector to the interlock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch Signal <--> [Brake Switch - TCC] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5501 Mainshaft Sensor: Locations Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations Park Pin Switch: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 5505 Park Pin Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the park pin switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with: - the shift lever any position other than [P], or - the push button pushed in [P]. There should be continuity. 4. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with the shift lever in [P] and the push button released. There should be no continuity. If necessary, replace the park pin switch. NOTE: Park pin switch 4P connector No.1 and No.2 terminals are for A/T gear position console light. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications A/T Gear Position Signal: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5509 A/T Gear Position Signal: Locations Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5512 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5513 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5514 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5515 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5516 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5517 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5518 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5519 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5520 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5521 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5522 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5523 A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5524 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5525 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5526 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5527 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5528 All Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5529 A/T Gear Position Signal: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come on. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the powertrain (all except '96-'98 CVT) or transmission ('96-'98 CVT) control module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for CVT) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5530 A/T Gear Position Signal: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5531 A/T Gear Position Signal: Adjustments 1. Shift to the P position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of D4 or D position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No. 1 and No. 7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. - If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position N in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5532 A/T Gear Position Signal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown above. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the P and N position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position P anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Top of Transmission (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5539 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Drive Pulley Speed Sensor Right Side Lower Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5540 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5541 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5542 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Secondary Gear Shaft Speed Sensor Right Side Rear of Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5543 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the countershaft speed sensor from the right side cover. 2. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the mainshaft speed sensor from the transmission housing. 3. Replace the 0-ring with a new one before installing the countershaft speed sensor or the mainshaft speed sensor. NOTE: Install the mainshaft speed sensor washer on the mainshaft speed sensor. The mainshaft speed sensor washer is used on models with the D16Y7 engine. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5549 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5550 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5551 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5552 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5553 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5554 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5555 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5556 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5557 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5558 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5559 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5560 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5561 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5562 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5563 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5564 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5565 CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Key Interlock Solenoid Test Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each key position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No.7 and No.8 terminals. - If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. - If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Key Interlock Solenoid Test > Page 5578 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Shift Lock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector. 3. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal and ground to the No.2 terminal of the solenoid momentarily. NOTE: Do not connect power to the No.2 (-) terminal (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode inside the solenoid. 4. Check that the shift lock releases when the release lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the release lever is released. 5. If the solenoid does not work, replace the solenoid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Customer Interest A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set 00-012 June 26, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-99 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Harsh Shifting Automatic Transmission (Supersedes 00-012, dated June 20, 2000) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM *The transmission shifts harshly, or it may stay in first gear. The harsh shifting is more noticeable on the 1-2 and 2-3 upshifts under light throttle. It is not affected by operating temperature. The MIL may be on with DTC P0730 or P0715 stored.* PROBABLE CAUSE *Contamination of the linear solenoid and its associated passages inside the transmission, or a broken spring internal to the transmission.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION *Flush the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1, then replace the linear solenoid. If shift feel is not affected, replace the transmission.* PARTS INFORMATION Linear Solenoid Assembly: P/N 28250-P4R-315, H/C 5317219 Drain Bolt Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Genuine Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 Civic and 2WD CR-V - 11.6 quarts required 4WD CR-V - 12.4 quarts required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5587 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Drain the transmission. Refill it with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. 3. Start the engine. 4. With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the transmission to D4 5. Release the brake pedal. Press on the accelerator, and bring the speedometer up to 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into fourth, and that the torque converter locks up. 6. Apply the brakes to stop the front wheels. 7. Shift to reverse, and then to neutral. 8. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 4 through 7) four more times. 9. Turn off the engine. 10. Repeat the above drain, refill, and shifting procedure (steps 2 through 9) two more times. 11. Drain the transmission. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Refill the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5588 12. Disconnect the linear solenoid electrical connector. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the linear solenoid. 13. Inspect the linear solenoid mounting surface on the transmission. Remove any contamination. 14. Install the new linear solenoid. Reconnect the electrical connector. 15. Use the PGM Tester to erase any DTCs in the powertrain control module (PCM). *16. Test-drive the vehicle to check the shift feel. If it still shifts harshly, install a remanufactured transmission.* DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set Shift Control Solenoid Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set 00-012 June 26, 2001 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED 1997-99 CR-V - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Harsh Shifting Automatic Transmission (Supersedes 00-012, dated June 20, 2000) Updated information is shown by asterisks and black bars. SYMPTOM *The transmission shifts harshly, or it may stay in first gear. The harsh shifting is more noticeable on the 1-2 and 2-3 upshifts under light throttle. It is not affected by operating temperature. The MIL may be on with DTC P0730 or P0715 stored.* PROBABLE CAUSE *Contamination of the linear solenoid and its associated passages inside the transmission, or a broken spring internal to the transmission.* VEHICLES AFFECTED CORRECTIVE ACTION *Flush the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1, then replace the linear solenoid. If shift feel is not affected, replace the transmission.* PARTS INFORMATION Linear Solenoid Assembly: P/N 28250-P4R-315, H/C 5317219 Drain Bolt Washer: P/N 90471-PX4-000, H/C 3300936 REQUIRED MATERIALS Genuine Honda ATF-Z1: P/N 08200-9001, H/C 6512628 Civic and 2WD CR-V - 11.6 quarts required 4WD CR-V - 12.4 quarts required WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5594 In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Drain the transmission. Refill it with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. 3. Start the engine. 4. With your foot on the brake pedal, shift the transmission to D4 5. Release the brake pedal. Press on the accelerator, and bring the speedometer up to 50 mph. Make sure the transmission shifts through the first three lower gears and into fourth, and that the torque converter locks up. 6. Apply the brakes to stop the front wheels. 7. Shift to reverse, and then to neutral. 8. Repeat the shifting procedure (steps 4 through 7) four more times. 9. Turn off the engine. 10. Repeat the above drain, refill, and shifting procedure (steps 2 through 9) two more times. 11. Drain the transmission. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer. Refill the transmission with Genuine Honda ATF-Z1. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Shift Control Solenoid Valve: > 00-012 > Jun > 01 > A/T - Harsh Shifts/Stays in 1st Gear/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5595 12. Disconnect the linear solenoid electrical connector. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the linear solenoid. 13. Inspect the linear solenoid mounting surface on the transmission. Remove any contamination. 14. Install the new linear solenoid. Reconnect the electrical connector. 15. Use the PGM Tester to erase any DTCs in the powertrain control module (PCM). *16. Test-drive the vehicle to check the shift feel. If it still shifts harshly, install a remanufactured transmission.* DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5596 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Locations Without CVT Lower Front of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Control Solenoid Valve <--> [Shift Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5597 Shift Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair Without CVT NOTE: Shift control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and shift control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the shift control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new shift control solenoid valve A/B with a new filter/gasket and the clamp bracket. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, and reconnect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Throttle Valve Solenoid: Electrical Specifications Resistance ........................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 4.0 - 9.0 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5602 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Mechanical Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Alternative View Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Alternative View > Page 5605 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Locations Photo 30 Lower Front Of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5606 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the linear solenoid connector. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of the linear solenoid connector. STANDARD: 4.0 - 9.0 Ohms 3. If the resistance is out of specification, replace the linear solenoid assembly. 4. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the linear solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. 5. If not, remove the linear solenoid assembly. 6. Check that the linear solenoid fluid passage for dust or dirt. 7. Connect the No. 2 terminal of the linear solenoid connector to the battery positive terminal and connect the No. 1 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Check that the valve moves. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check that the valve releases. NOTE: You can see the valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the linear solenoid assembly. 9. If the valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or the linear solenoid does not operate, replace the linear solenoid assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5607 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair 1. Remove the mounting bolts and the linear solenoid assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of the linear solenoid assembly and transmission housing. 3. Install a new linear solenoid assembly with a new gasket. NOTE: Do not pinch the gasket when installing the linear solenoid; make sure that the gasket is installed properly in the mounting groove of the linear solenoid. 4. Check the linear solenoid connector for rust, dirt or oil, and connect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Electrical Specifications Without CVT Solenoid Valve A Between terminal 2 and ground .............................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 25 Ohms Solenoid Valve B Between terminal 1 and ground .............................................................................................................................................................. 14 - 25 Ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5612 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Mechanical Specifications Without CVT Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ....................................................... 12 Nm (8.7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5613 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Locations Without CVT Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5614 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Testing and Inspection Without CVT 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the lock-up control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Measure the resistance between the No. 2 terminal (solenoid valve A) of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector and body ground, and between the No. 1 terminal (solenoid valve B) and body ground. STANDARD: 14 - 25 Ohms 3. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if the resistance is out of specification. 4. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the No. 1 terminal of the lock-up control solenoid valve connector to the battery positive terminal. - A clicking sound should be heard. - Connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery positive terminal. - A clicking sound should be heard. - Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly if no clicking sound is heard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves <--> [Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5615 Lock Up Control Solenoid Valves: Service and Repair Without CVT NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valves A and B must be removed/replaced as an assembly. 1. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control solenoid valve A/B assembly. 2. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the lock-up control solenoid valve assembly, and install a new lock-up control solenoid valve A/B with a new filter/gasket. 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, and reconnect it securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations Shift Indicator: Locations SRS components are located in this area Review the SRS component locations precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5623 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5624 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5625 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5626 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5627 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5628 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5629 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5630 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5631 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5632 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5633 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5634 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5635 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5636 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5637 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5638 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5639 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5640 Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5641 A/T Gear Position Indicator Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5642 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes ON. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come ON. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the Powertrain (except HX) or Transmission (HX) Control Module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for HX) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 5645 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 5646 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5647 Shift Indicator: Adjustments 1. Shift to the [P] position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of [D4] or [D4] position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No.1 and No.7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [N] in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5648 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral". 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [P] anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5652 Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) <--> [Control Module, A/T] > Component Information > Locations > Page 5658 Powertrain Control Module (PCM): Diagrams Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5662 Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5663 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5664 Shift Interlock Control Module: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock System Shift Lock System 1. Disconnect the 8P connector from the interlock control unit. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5665 - If all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good control unit, and recheck the system. If the check is OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. NOTE: If the shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and you step on the brake pedal (with the shift lever in [P]), the shift lock system is electronically normal; if the shift lever cannot be shifted from [P], test the A/T gear position switch, park pin switch. Reconnect the 8P connector to the interlock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch Signal <--> [Brake Switch - TCC] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Mainshaft Sensor: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Bolt ...................................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 12 Nm (8.7 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Mainshaft Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5674 Mainshaft Sensor: Locations Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations Park Pin Switch: Locations Left Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Park Pin Switch <--> [Shift Interlock Switch] > Component Information > Locations > Page 5678 Park Pin Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the park pin switch. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with: - the shift lever any position other than [P], or - the push button pushed in [P]. There should be continuity. 4. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals with the shift lever in [P] and the push button released. There should be no continuity. If necessary, replace the park pin switch. NOTE: Park pin switch 4P connector No.1 and No.2 terminals are for A/T gear position console light. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications A/T Gear Position Signal: Specifications Torque ................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 ft.lb.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5682 A/T Gear Position Signal: Locations Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5685 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5686 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5687 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5688 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5689 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5690 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5691 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5692 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5693 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5694 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5695 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5696 A/T Gear Position Signal: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5697 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5698 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5699 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5700 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5701 All Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5702 A/T Gear Position Signal: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes on. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come on. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the powertrain (all except '96-'98 CVT) or transmission ('96-'98 CVT) control module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for CVT) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5703 A/T Gear Position Signal: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5704 A/T Gear Position Signal: Adjustments 1. Shift to the P position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of D4 or D position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No. 1 and No. 7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. - If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position N in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > A/T Gear Position Signal <--> [Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5705 A/T Gear Position Signal: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown above. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the P and N position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position P anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Driven Pulley Speed Sensor Top of Transmission (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5712 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Drive Pulley Speed Sensor Right Side Lower Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5713 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Mainshaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Front of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5714 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Countershaft Speed Sensor Lower Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Driven Pulley Speed Sensor > Page 5715 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Secondary Gear Shaft Speed Sensor Right Side Rear of Engine Compartment (CVT) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5716 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the countershaft speed sensor from the right side cover. 2. Remove the 6 mm bolt and the mainshaft speed sensor from the transmission housing. 3. Replace the 0-ring with a new one before installing the countershaft speed sensor or the mainshaft speed sensor. NOTE: Install the mainshaft speed sensor washer on the mainshaft speed sensor. The mainshaft speed sensor washer is used on models with the D16Y7 engine. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5722 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5723 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5724 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5725 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5726 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5727 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5728 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5729 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5730 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5731 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5732 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5733 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5734 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5735 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5736 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5737 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5738 CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - CVT > Transmission Speed Sensor, CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation Precautions Install VSS Properly to Avoid Reman A/T Damage We can't emphasize enough how important it is to follow, to the letter, the installation instructions that come with a reman A/T. These instructions help ensure that you avoid damaging the A/T and score a successful repair. This is particularly true when it comes to installing the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). Step 6 of the instructions tells you to make sure its gear is fully engaged and the VSS is fully seated before you tighten the retaining bolt. If you don't install the VSS properly, the speed sensor gear will get stripped and the A/T will be seriously damaged. So don't take risks with your customer's vehicle. Always follow these instructions to the letter. You can rest assured you're doing the job right. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation ABS Light: Description and Operation 1. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) indicator light comes on when the ABS control unit detects a problem in the system. However, even though the system is normal, the ABS indicator light can come on, too, under the following conditions: Signal disturbance - Wheel spin - Only drive wheels rotate - Battery voltage fluctuates 2. When a problem is detected and the ABS indicator light comes on, the indicator light can stay on until the ignition switch is turned off, or it can automatically go off, depending on the mode. Light stays on until the ignition switch is turned off: When the system is in the system down mode. - Light automatically goes off: When the system is in the control inhibition mode. 3. The ABS indicator light stays on when the system is reactivated without erasing the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC), but it goes off after starting the vehicle. When the wheel sensor system is faulty and the ABS indicator light comes on, the algorithm of the system automatically turns off the ABS indicator light after the wheel speed signal returns to the normal speed. Also, when the DTC is erased, the CPU is reset and the ABS indicator light goes off when the system checked out normal by the initial diagnosis. Therefore, test-drive the vehicle after servicing the wheel sensor system, and be sure that the ABS indicator light does not come on. 4. When the ABS control unit outputs battery voltage to gauge assembly, the ABS indicator light goes off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Brake Fluid Pump > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Pump: Locations Right Side of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Brake Fluid Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Brake Fluid Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5754 Engine Compartment Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Brake Fluid Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5755 Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. ABS pump motor relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Braking Sensor/Switch: Locations Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic Connector - ABS > Component Information > Locations Diagnostic Connector - ABS: Locations SCS Service Connector Below Right Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Electronic Brake Control Module: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Attaching Torx Bolts ............................................................................................................................ ............................................ 9.8 Nm (84 inch lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 5767 Electronic Brake Control Module: Connector Locations Connector A Behind Right Kick Panel Connector B Behind Right Kick Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5768 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Main Control Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Main Control ABS Operation The ABS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates the vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the rate of deceleration. The ABS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and it transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high. The pressure reduction control is a three-mode system, that is pressure reduction, pressure retaining and pressure intensifying modes. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Main Control > Page 5771 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Diagnosis Function SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION Since the anti-lock brake system modulates the braking pressure when a wheel is about to lock, regardless of the driver's intention, the system operation and the braking power will be impaired if there is a malfunction in the system. To prevent this possibility, the self-diagnosis function monitors the main system functions. The ABS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU The CPUs check each other and the circuits of the system. When the CPUs detect failure, they shift to the "system down mode" or the "control inhibition mode". When an abnormality is detected, the ABS indicator light goes on. CHECK MODE/BULB CHECK There is also a check mode of the self-diagnosis system itself; when the ignition switch is first turned on, the ABS indicator light comes on and stays on for a few seconds after the engine starts to signify that the self-diagnosis system and indicator light are functional. FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected in the ABS control system by the self-diagnosis, the solenoid operations are suspended to inhibit anti-lock brake system operation. Under these conditions, the braking system functions just as an ordinary one, maintaining the necessary braking function. When the ABS indicator light is turned on, it means the fail-safe is functioning. SELF TEST - FAULT DETECTION - The self-diagnosis can be classified into these four categories. Initial Diagnosis - Performed right after the engine starts and until the ABS indicator light goes off. Except ABS Control - Performed when the ABS is not functioning. During ABS Control - Performed when the ABS is functioning. During Warning - Performed when the ABS indicator light is ON. ABS Self-diagnosis - The system performs the following controls when a problem is detected by the self-diagnosis. > ABS indicator light ON > Memory of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) > Mode change to the "system down mode" or the "control inhibition mode". 1. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is memorized when a problem is detected and the ABS indicator light does not go off, or when the ABS indicator light comes on. The DTC is not memorized when the ABS indicator light comes on unless the CPU is activated. 2. The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However, when the same DTC is detected twice or more, the later one is written over the old one. Therefore, when the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is recorded as one DTC. 3. The DTCs are indicated in the order of ascending number, not in the order they occur. 4. The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs cannot be canceled by disconnecting the battery. Perform the specified procedures to erase. See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5772 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5773 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5774 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair 1. Remove the right side kick panel. 2. Disconnect the ABS control unit connectors. 3. Remove the ABS control unit. 4. Install the ABS control unit in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications Power Unit: Specifications MODULATOR * Flare Nuts ............................................................................................................................................ .............................................. 15 Nm (11 lb.ft.) Torx Bolts ................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 lb.ft.) 8 mm Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................... 22 Nm (16 lb.ft.) * For EX with optional ABS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5778 Power Unit: Locations Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5779 Power Unit: Service Precautions CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. - To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. WARNING: - Accumulator retains brake fluid under high pressure. Relieve high pressure through maintenance bleeder prior to performing service on the ABS Modulator or Power unit, otherwise personal injury may result. - The ABS Accumulator contains high pressure nitrogen gas. Do not puncture, expose to the flame, or attempt to disassemble the accumulator or it may explode, resulting in severe personal injury. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5780 Power Unit: Description and Operation MODES OF OPERATION The ABS modulator consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor and the damping chamber. The modulator reduces the caliper fluid pressure directly, and it is also referred to as a circulating type because the brake fluid circulates through the caliper, reservoir and the master cylinder. The hydraulic control has three modes: pressure reduction, pressure retaining and pressure intensifying. The hydraulic circuit is the independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel. ABS Modulator Schematic Pressure Intensifying Mode - Inlet valve open, outlet valve closed Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper. Pressure Retaining Mode - Inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve. Pressure Reduction Mode - Inlet valve closed, outlet valve open Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the reservoir. Motor Operation Mode - When starting the pressure reduction mode, the pump motor is ON. When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is OFF. The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the master cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5781 Wheel Speed And Modulator Control Schematic WHEEL SPEED AND MODULATOR CONTROL When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the inlet valve closes to retain the caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops further, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5782 Power Unit: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. - To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. NOTE: Tighten the flare nuts to 15 Nm (1.5 kgf.m, 11 ft. lbs.) . REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the modulator unit 10P and pump motor 2P connectors. 2. Disconnect the brake lines, then remove the modulator unit. INSTALLATION 1. Install the modulator unit, then connect the brake lines. 2. Connect the modulator unit 10P and pump motor 2P connectors. 3. Bleed the brake system. 4. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator light goes off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Wheel Speed Sensor Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Sensor Lock Bolts 7 ft.lb Air Gap Front & Rear 0.02 - 0.04 in For EX with optional ABS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Wheel Speed Sensor > Page 5787 Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Toothed Ring PULSER/WHEEL SENSOR AIR GAP * Front & Rear Standard ........................................................................................................................ .................................................. 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in) * For EX with optional ABS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Front Inside of Left Front Wheel (Right Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front > Page 5790 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Rear Inside of Left Rear Wheel (Right Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5791 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation WHEEL SPEED SENSOR Wheel Sensor AC Current The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. As the gear pulser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor's magnetic coil, AC current is generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The ABS control unit detects the wheel sensor signal frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed. There are four wheel sensors, one for each wheel. The gear pulser has 50 teeth. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Toothed Ring Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Toothed Ring INSPECTION OF THE TOOTHED RING 1. Check the front and rear pulser for chipped or damaged teeth. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser. Standard: 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) NOTE: If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 inch), the probability is a distorted suspension arm which should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Toothed Ring > Page 5794 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wheel Speed Sensor TESTING THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 1. Check the front and rear pulser for chipped or damaged teeth. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser. Standard: 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) NOTE: If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) , the probability is a distorted suspension arm which should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5795 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - Be careful when installing the sensors to avoid twisting the wires. - The torque value of the bolts is 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m, 7 ft. lbs.). FRONT REAR 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the four backing plate bolts. 3. Pull the backing plate away from the trailing arm, then remove the wheel sensor. It is not necessary to disconnect the brake line. NOTE: This illustration is drum brake type. The torque value of the disk type is same as drum type. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Without Anti-Lock Brakes Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Without Anti-Lock Brakes CAUTION: - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. NOTE: The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add fluid as required. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line. 2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Without Anti-Lock Brakes > Page 5800 3. Loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. Brake Bleeding Sequence 4. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. 5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications Standard Pedal Height (with carpet removed) M/T ...................................................................................................................................................... .......................................... 156.5 mm (6.16 in) A/T ............................................................................. ...................................................................................................................... 161 mm (6.33 in) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5804 Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection PEDAL FREE PLAY 1. With the engine off, inspect the play on the pedal pad by pushing the pedal by hand. Free Play: 1 - 5 mm (1/16 - 3/16 inch) Pedal Free Play 2. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake switch. CAUTION: If the pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag. PEDAL HEIGHT 1. Disconnect the brake switch connector, loosen the brake switch locknut, and back off the brake switch until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. At the carpet cutout, measure the pedal height from the right side center of the pedal pad. Standard Pedal Height (with carpet removed): M/T: 156.5 mm (6.16 inch) A/T, CVT: 161 mm (6 5/16 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5805 Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments PEDAL HEIGHT 1. Disconnect the brake switch connector, loosen the brake switch locknut, and back off the brake switch until it is no longer touching the brake pedal. 2. At the carpet cutout, measure the pedal height from the right side center of the pedal pad. Standard Pedal Height (with carpet removed): M/T: 156.5 mm (6.16 inch) A/T, CVT: 161 mm (6 5/16 inch) 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut, and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. NOTE: Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod depressed. 4. Screw in the brake switch until its plunger is fully depressed (threaded end touching the pad on the pedal arm). Then back off the switch 1/4 turn to Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5806 make 0.3 mm (0.01 inch) of clearance between the threaded end and pad. Tighten the locknut firmly. Connect the brake switch connector. CAUTION: Make sure that the brake lights go off when the pedal is released. 5. Check the brake pedal free play as described below. PEDAL FREE PLAY 1. With the engine off, inspect the play on the pedal pad by pushing the pedal by hand. Free Play: 1 - 5 mm (1/16 - 3/16 inch) Pedal Free Play 2. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake switch. CAUTION: If the pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Specifications Brake Caliper: Specifications Front 5410 Type * Mounting Bolt 80 ft.lb Model No. stamped on caliper body Bleeder Screw 78 in.lb Attaching Bolts 24 ft.lb Banjo Bolt 25 ft.lb 2056 Type * Mounting Bolt 80 ft.lb Model No. stamped on caliper body Bleeder Screw 78 in.lb Attaching Bolts 20 ft.lb Banjo Bolt 25 ft.lb Rear Arm Attaching Bolts 17 ft.lb Mounting Bolts 17 ft.lb Bracket Mounting Bolts 28 ft.lb Bleed Screw 78 in.lb Parking Nut 20 ft.lb Banjo Bolt 25 ft.lb Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Brake Caliper: Diagrams Front Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 5813 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 5814 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Brake Caliper: Technician Safety Information WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 5817 Brake Caliper: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 5818 Brake Caliper: Application and ID Front Brake Calipers NOTE: There are two types of front brake calipers. The Calipers can be identified by the "5410" or "2056" stamped on the caliper body. Check the type of brake caliper before servicing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Type 5410 Front Brake Calipers NOTE: There are two types of front brake calipers: The caliper types can be identified by the "5410" or "2056" stamped on the caliper body as shown. Check the type of the brake caliper before servicing. WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. 1. Remove the banjo bolt, and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper. 2. Remove the caliper bolts, then remove the caliper from the bracket. 3. Remove the caliper pins and pin boots from the caliper bracket. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5821 4. If necessary, apply compressed air to the caliper fluid inlet to get the piston out. Place a shop rag or wooden block as shown to cushion the piston when it is expelled. Use low pressure air in short spurts. WARNING: Do not place your fingers in front of the piston. - Do not use high air pressure; use an OSHA approved 30 PSI nozzle. 5. Remove the piston from the caliper, and check the piston for scoring. 6. Remove the boot clip, piston boot and piston seal. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the cylinder bore. Type 2056 Front Brake Calipers NOTE: There are two types of front brake calipers: The caliper types can be identified by the "5410" or "2056" stamped on the caliper body as shown. Check the type of the brake caliper before servicing. WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5822 1. Remove the banjo bolt, and disconnect the brake hose from the caliber. 2. Remove caliper bolt B. pivot the caliper up out of the way, then remove the caliper from the bracket. 3. Remove the guide pin boot from sleeve A on the caliper bracket. 4. Remove the pin boot, sleeve B and sleeve boot from the caliber body. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5823 5. If necessary, apply compressed air to the caliper fluid inlet to get the piston out. Place a shop rag or wooden block as shown to cushion the piston when it is expelled. Use low pressure air in short spurts. WARNING: Do not place your fingers in front of the piston. - Do not use high air pressure; use an OSHA approved 30 PSI nozzle. 6. Remove the piston from the caliper, and check the piston for scoring. Removing Clip, Boot And Seal 7. Remove the boot clip, piston boot and piston seal. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the cylinder bore. Type 5410 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5824 WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. - Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. 1. Clean the piston and caliper bore with brake fluid, and inspect for wear and damage. 2. Coat the new piston seal with the recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set, and install the seal in the cylinder groove. 3. Apply the recommended seal grease in the caliper seal set to the sealing lips and inside of a new piston boot, and secure install it in the caliper with the new boot clip. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the caliper cylinder wall. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5825 4. Lubricate the caliper and piston with brake fluid, then install the piston in the cylinder with the dished end facing in. 5. Apply the recommended seal grease in the caliper seal set to the sliding surface of the pins and the inside of the new pin boots. 6. Install the pin boots into the grooves in the caliper bracket properly. 7. Insert pin A and pin B into the caliper bracket. 8. Install the pin boots into the grooves in the pins properly. 9. Install the brake pads in their original positions. 10. Push in the piston so that the caliper will fit over the pads, and install the caliper. 11. Tighten the caliper bolts. 12. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt. 13. Fill the brake reservoir and bleed the brake system. 14. Perform the following checks. - Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check for brake hoses for interference and twisting. Type 2056 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5826 WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow Out all passages with compressed air. - Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and Other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. - Make sure no dirt or Other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. NOTE: - Coat the piston, piston seal, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. - Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. 1. Clean the piston and caliper bore with brake fluid, and inspect for wear and damage. 2. Coat a new piston seal with the recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set, and install the seal in the cylinder groove. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5827 3. Apply the recommended seal grease in the caliper seal set to the sealing lips and inside of a new piston boot, and secure install it in the caliper with a new boot clip. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the caliper cylinder wall. 4. Lubricate the caliper and piston with brake fluid, then install the piston in the cylinder with the dished end facing in. 5. Apply the recommended seal grease in the caliper seal set to the sliding surface of sleeve B and the inside of the new pin and sleeve boots. 6. Install the new sleeve and pin boots and sleeve B on the caliper. NOTE: Be sure to install the boots into the grooves in the caliper and sleeve B properly. 7. Apply the recommended seal grease in the caliper seal set to the sliding surface of sleeve A and the inside of a new guide pin boot. 8. Install the guide pin boot into the groove in the sleeve A. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5828 9. Make sure that the brake pad retainers and brake pads are in their original positions. 10. Install the caliper onto sleeve A, and pivot it down into position. NOTE: Install the guide pin boot into the groove in the caliper properly. 11. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt. 12. Tighten the caliper bolt B. 13. Fill the brake reservoir and bleed the brake system. 14. Perform the following checks. - Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check for brake hoses for interference and twisting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5829 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Disassembly WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. 1. Remove the caliper shield. 2. Remove the lock pin and clevis pin. Remove the cable clip, and disconnect the cable from the arm. 3. Remove the banjo bolt and two sealing washers. 4. Remove the two caliper mounting bolts and caliper body from the bracket. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5830 5. Remove the pins and pin boots from the caliper bracket. 6. Remove the pad spring from the caliper body. 7. Remove the piston by rotating the piston counterclockwise with the tool, and remove the piston boot. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the piston. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5831 8. Remove the piston seal. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the cylinder bore. 9. Install the special tool between the caliper body and spring cover. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the inside of the caliper cylinder during caliper disassembly. 10. Position the locknuts as shown, then turn the shaft until the plate just contacts the caliper body. NOTE: Do not compress the spring under the spring cover. 11. Turn the shaft clockwise 1/4 - 1/2 turn to compress adjusting spring B in the caliper body. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5832 CAUTION: To prevent damage to the inner components, do not turn the shaft more than 1/2 turn. 12. Lower the locknuts fully, and tighten them securely. NOTE: Keep the locknuts in this position until you reinstall the circlip. 13. Remove the circlip with snap ring pliers. Removing Adjusting Bolt 14. Hold the plate with your fingers, and turn the shaft counterclockwise. Remove the special tool from the caliper. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5833 15. Remove the adjusting bolt. 16. Remove the spring cover, adjusting spring B. spacer, bearing A, and cup from the adjusting bolt. 17. Remove the sleeve piston, and remove the pin from the cam in the caliper body. 18. Remove the return spring. 19. Remove the parking lever and cam as an assembly from the caliper body. CAUTION: Do not loosen the parking nut with the cam installed in the caliper body. If the lever and shaft must be separated, hold the lever in a vise, and loosen the parking nut. 20. Remove the cam boot. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5834 Assembly WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, install them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; It may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. - Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. 1. Pack all cavities of the needle bearing with the recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5835 2. Coat a new cam boot with recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set, and install it in the caliper body. 3. Apply recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set to the pin contacting area of the cam, and install the cam and lever assembly into the caliper body. 4. Install the return spring. CAUTION: When the cam and lever were separated, be sure to assemble them before installing the cam in the caliper body. Install the lever and spring washer, apply locking agent to the threads, and tighten the parking nut while holding the lever with a vise. - Avoid damaging the cam boot since it must be installed before the cam. - When installing the cam, do not allow the cam boot lips to turn outside in. 5. Install the pin in the cam. 6. Install a new O-ring on the sleeve piston. 7. Install the sleeve piston so that the hole in the bottom of the piston is aligned with the pin in the cam, and the two pins on the piston are aligned with the holes in the caliper. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5836 8. Coat a new cup with recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set, and install it with its groove facing the bearing A side of the adjusting bolt. 9. Fit the bearing A, spacer, adjusting spring B. and spring cover on the adjusting bolt, and install them in the caliper cylinder. 10. Install the special tool onto the spring cover, and turn the shaft until the locknut contacts the plate. 11. Check that the flared end of the spring cover is below the circlip groove. 12. Install the circlip into the groove, then remove the special tool. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5837 NOTE: Check that the circlip is seated in the groove properly. 13. Coat a new piston seal with recommended silicone grease in the caliper seal set, and install it in the caliper. 14. Apply recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set to the sealing lips and inside of a new piston boot, and install it in the caliper. 15. Coat the outside of the piston with brake fluid, and install it onto the adjusting bolt while rotating it clockwise with the tool. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the piston and piston boot. 16. Install the pad spring onto the caliper. 17. Apply the recommended pin grease in the caliper seal set to the sliding surface of the pins and inside of the new pin boots. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5838 18. Install the pin boots into the grooves in the caliper bracket properly. 19. Insert pin A and pin B into the caliper bracket. 20. Install the pin boots into the grooves in the pins properly. 21. Install the brake pad retainers and brake pads. 22. Align the cutout in the piston with the tab on the inner pad. 23. Install the caliper onto the caliper bracket, and tighten the caliper mounting bolts. 24. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt. 25. Insert the cable through the arm, and connect the cable to the lever with the clevis pin and lock pin. Install the cable clip securely. 26. Install the caliper shield. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5839 27. Fill the brake reservoir, and bleed the brake system. 28. Operate the brake pedal several times, then adjust the parking brake. 29. After installation, perform the following checks: - Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check the parking brake lever for operation, and adjust it if necessary. - Check for brake hose for interference or twisting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > With Rear Disc Brakes Brake Pad: Specifications Front Pad 5410 Stamped On The Caliper Body: Standard 9.5 - 10.5 mm Service Limit 1.6 mm 2056 Stamped On The Caliper Body: Standard 8.5 - 9.5 mm Service Limit 1.6 mm Rear Pad Standard 7.0 - 8.0 mm Service Limit 1.6 mm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications > With Rear Disc Brakes > Page 5844 Brake Pad: Specifications Pad Thickness 5410 Stamped On The Caliper Body: Standard 9.5 - 10.5 mm Service Limit 1.6 mm 2056 Stamped On The Caliper Body: Standard 8.5 - 9.5 mm Service Limit 1.6 mm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information Brake Pad: Customer Safety Information WARNING: When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads . Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 5847 Brake Pad: Technician Safety Information WARNING: Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front Type 2056 Front Brake Calipers NOTE: There are two types of front brake calipers: The caliper types can be identified by the "5410" or "2056" stamped on the caliper body as shown. Check the type of the brake caliper before servicing. WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. 1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle, and support it on safety stands. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake hose bracket from the knuckle. 3. Remove the caliper bolt B, and pivot the caliper up out of the way. NOTE: Check the hoses and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shim, pad retainers, and pads. NOTE: When replacing the pads, replace the shim together with the pads as a set. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5850 5. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. The measurement does not include the pad backing plate thickness. Brake Pad Thickness: Standard: 8.5 - 9.5 mm (0.33 - 0.37 inch) Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 inch) 6. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the front pads as a set. 7. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 9. Install the pad retainers. 10. Apply grease to the points indicated by the arrows in the following illustration: NOTE: Use the pad grease included in the pad set or Molykote M77 grease, and apply a thin coat of grease evenly to the designated points. - Piston end and inner pad contact surface - Pad and caliper bracket contact surface - Outer pad and caliper body contact surface Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5851 - Outer pad shim and outer pad contact surface - Outer pad shim and caliper body contact surface 11. Install the brake pads and pad shim correctly. WARNING: When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. NOTE: Install the pad with the wear indicator on the inside. 12. Push in the piston so that the caliper will fit over the pads. Make sure that the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. 13. Pivot the caliper down into position, then install caliper bolt B and tighten it. 14. Install the brake hose bracket on the knuckle. NOTE: Inspect the brake hose for interference and twisting. 15. Depress the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work, then road-test. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 16. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. Type 5410 Front Brake Calipers NOTE: There are two types of front brake calipers: The caliper types can be identified by the "5410" or "2056" stamped on the caliper body as shown. Check the type of the brake caliper before servicing. WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. 1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle, and support it on safety stands. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake hose bracket from the knuckle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5852 3. Remove the caliper bolt, and pivot the caliper up out of the way. NOTE: Check the hoses and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shim, pad retainers, and pads. NOTE: When the caliper is equipped with an outer pad shim, replace the shim together with the pads as a set. 5. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. The measurement does not include the pad backing plate thickness. Brake Pad Thickness: Standard: 9.5 - 10.5 mm (0.37 - 0.41 inch) Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 inch) 6. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the front pads as a set. 7. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5853 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 9. Install the pad retainers. 10. Apply grease to the points indicated by the arrows in the following illustration: NOTE: Use the pad grease included in the pad set or Molykote M77 grease, and apply a thin coat of grease evenly to the designated points. - Piston end and inner pad contact surface - Pad and caliper bracket contact surface - Outer pad and caliper body contact surface - Outer pad shim and outer pad contact surface - Outer pad shim and caliper body contact surface 11. Install the brake pads and pad shim correctly. WARNING: When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. NOTE: Install the pad with the wear indicator on the inside. 12. Push in the piston so that the caliper will fit over the pads. Make sure that the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5854 caliper down. 13. Pivot the caliper down into position, then install the caliper bolt and tighten it. CAUTION: Be careful not damage the pin boot when pivoting the caliper down. 14. Install the brake hose bracket on the knuckle. NOTE: Inspect the brake hose for interference or twisting. 15. Depress the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work, then test-drive. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 16. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5855 Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. 1. Block the front wheels, loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, support the rear of the vehicle on safety stands, then remove the rear wheels. Caliper Shield Removal 2. Release the parking brake, and remove the caliper shield. 3. Remove the brake hose clamp bolt from the trailing arm first, then remove the two caliper mounting bolts and the caliper from the bracket. CAUTION: Thoroughly clean the outside of the caliper to prevent dust and dirt from entering inside. - Support the caliper with a piece of wire so that it does not hang from the brake hose. NOTE: Check the hoses and pin boots for damage or deterioration. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5856 4. Remove the outer pad shim, pads, and pad retainers. Checking Pad Thickness 5. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. The measurement does not include the pad backing plate thickness. 6. If the pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the pads and shims together as a set. 7. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 9. Make sure that the pad retainers are installed in their correct positions. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5857 10. Apply grease to the points indicated by the arrow in the following drawing: NOTE: Use the pad grease included in the pad set or Molykote M77 grease, and apply a thin coat of grease evenly to the designated points. - Piston end and inner pad contact surface - Pad and caliper bracket contact surface - Outer pad shim and outer pad contact surface - Outer pad shim and caliper body contact surface 11. Install the brake pads and outer pad shim on the caliper bracket. Install the inner pad with its wear indicator facing downward. WARNING: When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. 12. Rotate the caliper piston clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout in the piston with the tab on the inner pad by turning the piston back. CAUTION: Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it sits properly. 13. Install the brake hose clamp on the trailing arm. 14. Install and tighten the caliper mounting bolts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5858 Removing Caliper Shield 15. Install the caliper shield. 16. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. 17. Depress the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work, then test-drive. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require greater pedal travel immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several light applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal travel. Greater than normal pedal travel may damage the master cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front Type 2056 Front Brake Calipers NOTE: There are two types of front brake calipers: The caliper types can be identified by the "5410" or "2056" stamped on the caliper body as shown. Check the type of the brake caliper before servicing. WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. 1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle, and support it on safety stands. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake hose bracket from the knuckle. 3. Remove the caliper bolt B, and pivot the caliper up out of the way. NOTE: Check the hoses and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shim, pad retainers, and pads. NOTE: When replacing the pads, replace the shim together with the pads as a set. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5861 5. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. The measurement does not include the pad backing plate thickness. Brake Pad Thickness: Standard: 8.5 - 9.5 mm (0.33 - 0.37 inch) Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 inch) 6. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the front pads as a set. 7. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 9. Install the pad retainers. 10. Apply grease to the points indicated by the arrows in the following illustration: NOTE: Use the pad grease included in the pad set or Molykote M77 grease, and apply a thin coat of grease evenly to the designated points. - Piston end and inner pad contact surface - Pad and caliper bracket contact surface - Outer pad and caliper body contact surface Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5862 - Outer pad shim and outer pad contact surface - Outer pad shim and caliper body contact surface 11. Install the brake pads and pad shim correctly. WARNING: When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. NOTE: Install the pad with the wear indicator on the inside. 12. Push in the piston so that the caliper will fit over the pads. Make sure that the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down. 13. Pivot the caliper down into position, then install caliper bolt B and tighten it. 14. Install the brake hose bracket on the knuckle. NOTE: Inspect the brake hose for interference and twisting. 15. Depress the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work, then road-test. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 16. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. Type 5410 Front Brake Calipers NOTE: There are two types of front brake calipers: The caliper types can be identified by the "5410" or "2056" stamped on the caliper body as shown. Check the type of the brake caliper before servicing. WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. 1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle, and support it on safety stands. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake hose bracket from the knuckle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5863 3. Remove the caliper bolt, and pivot the caliper up out of the way. NOTE: Check the hoses and pin boots for damage and deterioration. 4. Remove the pad shim, pad retainers, and pads. NOTE: When the caliper is equipped with an outer pad shim, replace the shim together with the pads as a set. 5. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. The measurement does not include the pad backing plate thickness. Brake Pad Thickness: Standard: 9.5 - 10.5 mm (0.37 - 0.41 inch) Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 inch) 6. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the front pads as a set. 7. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5864 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 9. Install the pad retainers. 10. Apply grease to the points indicated by the arrows in the following illustration: NOTE: Use the pad grease included in the pad set or Molykote M77 grease, and apply a thin coat of grease evenly to the designated points. - Piston end and inner pad contact surface - Pad and caliper bracket contact surface - Outer pad and caliper body contact surface - Outer pad shim and outer pad contact surface - Outer pad shim and caliper body contact surface 11. Install the brake pads and pad shim correctly. WARNING: When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. NOTE: Install the pad with the wear indicator on the inside. 12. Push in the piston so that the caliper will fit over the pads. Make sure that the piston boot is in position to prevent damaging it when pivoting the Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5865 caliper down. 13. Pivot the caliper down into position, then install the caliper bolt and tighten it. CAUTION: Be careful not damage the pin boot when pivoting the caliper down. 14. Install the brake hose bracket on the knuckle. NOTE: Inspect the brake hose for interference or twisting. 15. Depress the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work, then test-drive. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke. 16. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5866 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. 1. Block the front wheels, loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, support the rear of the vehicle on safety stands, then remove the rear wheels. Caliper Shield Removal 2. Release the parking brake, and remove the caliper shield. 3. Remove the brake hose clamp bolt from the trailing arm first, then remove the two caliper mounting bolts and the caliper from the bracket. CAUTION: Thoroughly clean the outside of the caliper to prevent dust and dirt from entering inside. - Support the caliper with a piece of wire so that it does not hang from the brake hose. NOTE: Check the hoses and pin boots for damage or deterioration. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5867 4. Remove the outer pad shim, pads, and pad retainers. Checking Pad Thickness 5. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of each brake pad lining. The measurement does not include the pad backing plate thickness. 6. If the pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace the pads and shims together as a set. 7. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. 9. Make sure that the pad retainers are installed in their correct positions. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5868 10. Apply grease to the points indicated by the arrow in the following drawing: NOTE: Use the pad grease included in the pad set or Molykote M77 grease, and apply a thin coat of grease evenly to the designated points. - Piston end and inner pad contact surface - Pad and caliper bracket contact surface - Outer pad shim and outer pad contact surface - Outer pad shim and caliper body contact surface 11. Install the brake pads and outer pad shim on the caliper bracket. Install the inner pad with its wear indicator facing downward. WARNING: When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads. 12. Rotate the caliper piston clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout in the piston with the tab on the inner pad by turning the piston back. CAUTION: Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it sits properly. 13. Install the brake hose clamp on the trailing arm. 14. Install and tighten the caliper mounting bolts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5869 Removing Caliper Shield 15. Install the caliper shield. 16. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. 17. Depress the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work, then test-drive. NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require greater pedal travel immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several light applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal travel. Greater than normal pedal travel may damage the master cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information 00-088 July 14, 2010 Applies To: ALL Models Brake Disc Refinishing Guidelines (Supersedes 00-088, dated October 6, 2006, to revise the information marked with the black bars) *REVISION SUMMARY The requirement to refinish new brake discs was removed.* American Honda does not allow replacement of brake discs under warranty unless the brake disc is beyond its service limit for refinishing. If the brake disc is within its service limit, you must refinish it. Maximum refinishing limits may be found in the Conventional Brakes section of the appropriate service manual. *Refinish brake discs only when they are scored or out of specification for runout or parallelism. See the appropriate service manual for the specifications.* American Honda requires refinishing of the front brake discs with an on-car brake lathe that mounts to the steering knuckle. Use of an on-car, steering knuckle- mounted lathe is critical because it corrects runout of the hub and disc as an assembly. Experience has shown that very small amounts of runout, not felt as brake pulsation initially, will grow and become noticeable as the discs are subjected to heat and wear over time and mileage. Two on-car brake lathes are recommended. The Kwik-Lathe, model number KWY-108000501, is supported with automatic shipments of adapters for new models, when required. The Accu-turn On-car Brake Lathe, model ACCHONOCLPKG, is also recommended. A power driver is required for the 82000 and is highly recommended for all other models. The Kwik-Lathe power driver model number is KWY-108012005; the Accu-turn lathe includes a power driver. Here are some advantages of using power drivers: ^ The disc is rotated at the optimum speed for a smooth and consistent cut. ^ There is no need to climb in and out of the vehicle to start and stop the engine or to shift the transmission. ^ Securing the opposite wheel with a tie-down strap is not required. ^ There is no waiting for the engine to return to idle and no concern about engine speed changes that can adversely affect brake disc cut and finish. ^ The Traction Control System (TCS) is not involved. ^ Consistent cutting speed increases cutting tool life. ORDERING INFORMATION Order brake lathes and power drivers through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To place an order, call or use the fax order form provided in your Honda Tool and Equipment Program Catalog. Phone lines are open Monday thru Friday from 7:30 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Central Time. You can also order online through the Interactive Network (iN). Click on Service, Tool and Equipment, and then Online Catalog. Click on Alignment, Wheel, and Brake Equipment, and then On-Car Brake Lathes. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None, this bulletin is for information only. FRONT BRAKE DISCS The following guidelines show the Kwik-Way lathe setup, the Accu-turn lathe setup is similar. Setting Up the Vehicle Put the transmission in Neutral. If you are not using the power drive system, start the engine, and let it warm up to its normal operating temperature so the idle speed will stabilize to its lowest rpm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5874 Raise the vehicle on a lift. Check for loose wheel bearings. You must replace loose wheel bearings before you refinish the brake discs. If you do not, the brake lathe will not correct for brake disc runout, resulting in an uneven finish and brake pulsation. Remove the front wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts with flat washers to compensate for the removed wheel. Torque the wheel nuts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Remove the caliper assembly. Use a wire or a S-hook to hold the caliper to the spring or damper tower. Do not kink the brake hose or use it to support the caliper. If you are not using the power drive system and the vehicle has ICS or VSA, make sure you install a brake pad spreader between the pads on the hanging caliper. Also, make sure the ICS or VSA is turned off anytime the engine is started. If the system is not turned off, the brakes could activate, causing the brake pads on the hanging caliper to hit each other or the caliper pistons to fall out. Install the vibration damper on the brake disc. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure you install the protective band around the wheel nuts. If you are not using the power drive system, use a fabric tie-down strap to secure the brake disc that is opposite to the one you are refinishing. If you are working on a Prelude with ATTS, do not use a tie-down strap; let both wheels turn freely. Mounting the Brake Lathe Remove the tool bed from the brake lathe, then mount the brake lathe to the steering knuckle with a Honda 1-piece speed mount. These mounts provide quicker, more accurate mounting, and can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5875 Honda 1-Piece Speed Mounts P/N KWY-108006000 (for most models), P/N KWY-108007500 (Odysseys, Pilots, and Ridgelines with two-piston calipers) Attaching the Power Drive System 1. Make sure the drive motor assembly on the power drive system is level with the brake disc. 2. Attach the mounting yoke to the brake disc, and secure it with one of the wheel nuts. Torque the wheel nut to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5876 3. Attach the driveshaft on the drive motor assembly to the mounting yoke, making sure the center line of the driveshaft is level with the spindle nut on the wheel hub. 4. Set the lower toggle switch on the drive motor assembly to FWD (counterclockwise rotation) or REV (clockwise rotation). Setting Up and Adjusting the Brake Lathe Use Kwik-Way cutting bits, P/N KWY-109109223, and the holding screws that come with them. These bits are stamped KW and are available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Before you use the brake lathe, inspect the tips of the cutting bits with a magnifying glass to make sure the tips are not worn out. Each bit has three tips. If a tip is worn, rotate the bit, and use a new tip. A worn tip produces a poor finish and may cause chattering. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5877 Reinstall the tool bed on the brake lathe with the top of the cutting bits facing up and the feed knobs facing down. Adjust the tool bed until the brake disc is centered between the cutting bits. For proper refinishing, the brake disc must turn toward the top of the cutting bits. Do not set the cutting depth on the brake lathe to more than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.). This is two divisions on the cutting knob. Make sure you start your cut at least 3 mm (0.12 in.) beyond the worn area on the brake disc. If you are cutting larger diameter brake discs, make sure you use the 150 cutting bit holders. These bit holders, available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION), supersede the original bit holders and provide better cutting coverage for larger diameter brake discs. Each bit holder is clearly marked for proper installation on the tool holder. Cutting the Brake Disc To get the smoothest cut and the best brake disc finish, always use the slowest feed speed on the tool bed feed motor. Place the drive belt on the smallest pulley of the feed motor and on the largest pulley of the hand wheel. Make sure the lower toggle switch on the power drive system drive motor assembly is set to the proper rotation to turn the brake disc toward the top of the cutting bits. Plug the tool bed feed motor into the power outlet on the drive motor assembly, then turn on the drive motor with the upper toggle switch on the assembly. If you are not using the power drive system, make sure the transmission is in 1st gear (2nd gear on Preludes with ATTS) or Reverse and the engine is idling, but not at a fast idle. If the transmission and engine are at higher gears and speeds, you will damage the cutting bits. Turn on the tool bed feed motor, and snap it into place; there should be tension on the feed belt. Cut the brake disc until the cutting bits clear the outer edge of the disc. The cutting bits should produce a smooth, consistent finish with no chatter marks or grooves. If the disc did not clean up entirely on the first pass, reset the brake lathe and make a second pass. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5878 Finishing the Job Remove the vibration damper and the protective band (if used). Use a micrometer to measure the thickness of the brake disc. Make sure the thickness is within the service manual specifications. Clean the brake disc with soapy water or brake cleaner, then wipe it dry. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust or chips, but do not use compressed air. Unplug the tool bed feed motor from the drive motor assembly, and remove the mounting yoke from the brake disc. Remove the speed mount from the steering knuckle. Apply a small amount of Molykote 77 grease to the brake pad shims. Reinstall the caliper assembly. (If you did not use the power drive system, use the brake pad spreader to push the pistons back into the caliper.) Torque the nuts and bolts to the required specification (see the appropriate service manual). Refinish the other front brake disc using the same guidelines. Check the brake fluid level, then test-drive the vehicle to make sure the brake pedal is firm and does not pulsate. Lightly apply the brakes about 20 times during the test-drive to seat the brake pads. REAR BRAKE DISCS It is possible to use an on-car lathe on some models if the rear caliper mounts are low enough to clear the vehicle body. A power driver is needed for front drive models. Refinish rear brake discs on bench-mounted equipment if necessary. Follow the same guidelines you used for refinishing front brake discs, noting these differences: ^ Mount the brake lathe to the rear knuckle with the Honda 2-Piece Adapter (P/N KWY-1 08102504). You can order the 2-piece adapter through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program (see ORDERING INFORMATION). Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5879 Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Disc Refinishing Procedure Bulletin No. 86-020 Issue Date May 27, 1997 Model ALL Applicable To ALL Except 2WD Passport File Under BRAKES Brake Disc Refinishing (Supersedes 86-020, dated October 3, 1986) [NEW] * Brake disc replacement under warranty is not allowed unless the disc is beyond its maximum refinishing limit. If a disc is within its limit, it must be refinished. For front and rear brake disc maximum refinishing limit specifications, refer to section 19 of the appropriate service manual (section 5A2 for Passports). Front Brake Discs Whenever a front brake disc is replaced, it must be refinished on the car. Refinishing new front discs is included in the flat-rate time for disc replacement. To avoid brake vibration, always refinish front brake discs on the car with the Kwik-Way or Snap-on brake lathe. Purchasing information for these lathes is in Service Bulletin 87-034, Front Brake Disc Refinishing Equipment, filed in the Special Tools section. Follow these tips to get the best results from your on-car brake lathe. (For detailed instructions, refer to the lathe's operating manual.) ^ Before refinishing, warm the engine to normal operating temperature. ^ On 2WD vehicles, lift both front wheels off the ground. On 4WD vehicles, lift all four wheels off the ground. ^ On 4WD Passports, make sure that the hub nut is properly adjusted (with no end play) and the transmission is in 4H. ^ On Preludes with ATTS (Active Torque Transfer System), let both front wheels turn freely On other vehicles, use a tie-down strap to secure the disc opposite to the one being refinished. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5880 ^ Install the vibration damper on the disc, and install the protective band around the wheel lug nuts. ^ Mount the lathe to the caliper bracket with Honda Quick-Mount Adapters. The adapters can be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program; contact Special Tools at 800-346-6327. The advantage of using the adapters is that they don't have to be removed from the lathe once they are installed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Brakes - Brake Disc Refinishing Information > Page 5881 ^ Use the aligning bar tool to ensure that the lathe moves square to the center of the brake disc. The disc should turn toward the cutting bits. ^ Use "Kwik-Way" cutting bits (P/N KW109-1092-23, H/C 5418866) and the holding screws that come with them. These bits are stamped "K W." They can be purchased from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures, or by contacting a Kwik-Way distributor. The Kwik-Way P/N is 109-1092-23. ^ Before using the lathe, inspect the tips of the cutting bits with a magnifying glass to make sure they are not worn out. Each bit has three tips. ^ Do not set the cutting depth on the lathe to more than 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) This is two divisions on the cutting knob. ^ To refinish, the transmission must be in first gear (D3 or D4, if the shift selector doesn't have a first gear position; second gear on Preludes with ATTS), with the engine at idle (not fast idle). If the transmission and engine are at higher gears and speeds, you will damage the cutting bits. Rear Brake Discs Refinish rear brake discs off the car with conventional disc refinishing equipment. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION [NEW] None; information only. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Nominal Thickness 0.820 in Minimum Refinish Thickness 0.740 in Thickness Variation Parallelism 0.0006 in Lateral Runout 0.006 in Minimum Pad Thickness 0.060 in Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 5884 Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Nominal Thickness 0.350 in Minimum Refinish Thickness 0.320 in Thickness Variation Parallelism 0.0006 in Lateral Runout 0.004 in Minimum Pad Thickness 0.060 in Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front ROTOR INSPECTION 1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle, and support it on safety stands. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake pads. 3. Inspect the disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the disc thoroughly and remove all rust. 4. Use wheel nuts and suitable plain washers to hold the disc securely against the hub, then mount a dial indicator as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (0.4 inch) from the outer edge of the disc. Brake Disc Runout: Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) 5. Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at eight points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm (0.4 inch) in from the outer edge of the disc. Brake Disc Thickness: Standard: 20.9 - 21.8 mm (0.82 - 0.86 inch) Max. Refinishing Limit: 19.0 mm (0.75 inch) NOTE: Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit. Brake Disc Parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) max. NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5887 6. If the disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-way manufacturing Co. and the Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. Max. Refinish Limit: 19.0 mm (0.75 inch) NOTE: A new disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5888 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Rear ROTOR INSPECTION 1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle, and support it on safety stands. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the brake pads. 3. Inspect the disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the disc thoroughly, and remove all rust. 4. Use wheel nuts and suitable plain washers to hold the disc securely against the hub, then mount a dial indicator as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (0.4 inch) from the outer edge of the disc. NOTE: A new disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 inch). 5. Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at eight points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm (0.4 inch) in from the outer edge of the disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit. Brake Disc Thickness: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front > Page 5889 Standard: 8.9 - 9.1 mm (0.350 - 0.358 inch) Max. Refinishing Limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) Brake Disc Parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Max. NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness measurements. 6. If the disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc. Max. Refinishing Limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 inch) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front Removal 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. 4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. 5. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and hang the caliper assembly to one side. CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5892 6. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws. 7. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts into the disc to push it away from the hub. NOTE: Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. 8. Remove the brake disc from the knuckle. Installation 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5893 Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Rear Removal 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. 4. Remove the 6 mm flange bolts and the caliper shield. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. 6. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and hang the caliper assembly to one side. CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws. 8. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts into the disc to push it away from the hub. NOTE: Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. 9. Remove the brake disc. Installation 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Specifications Backing Plate: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Backing Plate ....................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Automatic Transaxle Brake Drum: Specifications Brake Drum Standard Inside Diameter 7.87 in Brake Drum Service Limit 7.91 in Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Automatic Transaxle > Page 5902 Brake Drum: Specifications Brake Drum Standard Inside Diameter 7.09 in Brake Drum Service Limit 7.13 in Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5903 Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection 1. Check the wheel cylinder for leakage. 2. Check the brake linings for cracking, glazing, wear, and contamination. 3. Measure the brake lining thickness. Brake Lining Thickness: Standard: 4.0 mm (0.157 inch) Service Limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) NOTE: Measurement does not include brake shoe thickness. 4. If the brake lining thickness is less than the service limit, replace the brake shoes as a set. 5. Check the bearings in the hub unit for smooth operation. 6. Measure the inside diameter of the brake drum using the inside vernier calipers. Drum Inside Diameter: Standard: 199.9 - 200.0 mm (7.870 - 7.874 inch) Service Limit: 201.0 mm (7.913 inch) 7. If the inside diameter of the brake drum is more than the service limit, replace the brake drum. 8. Check the brake drum for scoring, grooves, and cracks. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5904 Brake Drum: Service and Repair WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake linings or drums reduce stopping ability. - Block the front wheels before jacking up the rear of the vehicle. 1. Block the front wheels, loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, support the rear of the vehicle on safety stands, then remove the rear wheels. 2. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear brake drum. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications Brake Shoe: Specifications Lining Thickness Standard 0.157 in Service Limit 0.08 in Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5908 Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection Rear Drum Brakes Components WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake linings or drums reduce stopping ability. - Block the front wheels before jacking up the rear of the vehicle. NOTE: - Block the front wheels, loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, support the rear of vehicle on safety stands, then remove the rear wheels. - Release the parking brake, and remove the rear brake drum. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5909 Wheel Cylinder & Linings - Measure the brake lining thickness. Specs: Brake Lining Thickness* Standard 4.0 mm (0.157 in) Service Limit 2.0 mm (0.08 in) - If the brake lining thickness is less than service limit, replace the brake shoes as a set. - Check the bearings in the hub unit for smooth operation. * Measurement does not include brake shoe thickness. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Disassembly Tension Pin Removal 1. Remove the tension pins by pushing the retainer springs and turning them. 2. Lower the brake shoe assembly, and remove the lower return spring. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the dust cover on the wheel cylinder. 3. Remove the brake shoe assembly. 4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake lever. 5. Remove the upper return spring, self-adjuster lever, and self-adjuster spring, and separate the brake shoes. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 5912 6. Remove the wave washer, parking brake lever, and pivot pin from the brake shoe by removing the U-clip. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 5913 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Assembly 1. Apply brake cylinder grease (P/N: 08733 - B020E) or equivalent rubber grease to the sliding surface of the pivot pin, and insert the pin into the brake shoe. 2. Install the parking brake lever and wave washer on the pivot pin and secure them with the U-clip. NOTE: Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the pivot pin from coming out of the brake shoe. 3. Connect the parking brake cable to the parking brake lever. 4. Apply grease on each sliding surface. WARNING: Contaminated brake linings reduce stopping ability. Keep grease or oil off the brake linings. Wipe any excess grease off the parts. Lubricating Sliding Surfaces - Apply brake cylinder grease (P/N: 08733 - B020E) or equivalent rubber grease to the sliding surfaces as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 5914 Brake Shoe Lubrication Points - Apply Molykote 44MA to the brake shoe ends and opposite edges of the shoes as shown. 5. Clean the threaded portions of clevises A and B. Coat the threads of the Devises with grease. To shorten the clevises, turn the adjuster bolt. 6. Hook the self-adjuster spring to the self-adjuster lever first, then to the brake shoe. 7. Install the clevises and upper return spring, noting the installation direction. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the wheel cylinder dust covers. 8. Install the lower return spring. 9. Install the tension pins and retaining springs. 10. Install the brake drum. 11. If the wheel cylinder has been removed, bleed the brake system, and check for leaks at brake line connections, and retighten if necessary. 12. Depress the brake pedal several times to set the self-adjusting brake. 13. Adjust the parking brake. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Cylinder: Specifications Bleeder Screw 60 in.lb Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5918 Wheel Cylinder: Service Precautions CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. - Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5919 Wheel Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Wheel Cylinder Assemblies CAUTION: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. NOTE: - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. - Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not reuse the drained fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Coat the piston, piston cup, and wheel cylinder bore with clean brake fluid. Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5920 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. - Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid. Removing Wheel Cylinder From Backing Plate 1. Remove the brake shoes. See: Brake Shoe/Service and Repair 2. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder. 3. Remove the wheel cylinder mounting bolts and the wheel cylinder from the backing plate. 4. Apply sealant between the wheel cylinder and backing plate and install the wheel cylinder. Specs: Bleed Screw 7 Nm (5.1 lb.ft.) Brake Line Nut 15 Nm (11 lb.ft.) Wheel Cylinder Bolts 9 Nm (6.5 lb.ft.) 5. Install the brake shoes. See: Brake Shoe/Service and Repair 6. Bleed brakes. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Without Anti-Lock Brakes Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Without Anti-Lock Brakes CAUTION: - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. NOTE: The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each brake caliper. Add fluid as required. 1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line. 2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Without Anti-Lock Brakes > Page 5926 3. Loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed screw securely. Brake Bleeding Sequence 4. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid. 5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Specifications Brake Caliper: Specifications Front 5410 Type * Mounting Bolt 80 ft.lb Model No. stamped on caliper body Bleeder Screw 78 in.lb Attaching Bolts 24 ft.lb Banjo Bolt 25 ft.lb 2056 Type * Mounting Bolt 80 ft.lb Model No. stamped on caliper body Bleeder Screw 78 in.lb Attaching Bolts 20 ft.lb Banjo Bolt 25 ft.lb Rear Arm Attaching Bolts 17 ft.lb Mounting Bolts 17 ft.lb Bracket Mounting Bolts 28 ft.lb Bleed Screw 78 in.lb Parking Nut 20 ft.lb Banjo Bolt 25 ft.lb Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Diagrams > Front Brake Caliper: Diagrams Front Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 5932 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Diagrams > Front > Page 5933 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Brake Caliper: Technician Safety Information WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 5936 Brake Caliper: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 5937 Brake Caliper: Application and ID Front Brake Calipers NOTE: There are two types of front brake calipers. The Calipers can be identified by the "5410" or "2056" stamped on the caliper body. Check the type of brake caliper before servicing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Type 5410 Front Brake Calipers NOTE: There are two types of front brake calipers: The caliper types can be identified by the "5410" or "2056" stamped on the caliper body as shown. Check the type of the brake caliper before servicing. WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. 1. Remove the banjo bolt, and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper. 2. Remove the caliper bolts, then remove the caliper from the bracket. 3. Remove the caliper pins and pin boots from the caliper bracket. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5940 4. If necessary, apply compressed air to the caliper fluid inlet to get the piston out. Place a shop rag or wooden block as shown to cushion the piston when it is expelled. Use low pressure air in short spurts. WARNING: Do not place your fingers in front of the piston. - Do not use high air pressure; use an OSHA approved 30 PSI nozzle. 5. Remove the piston from the caliper, and check the piston for scoring. 6. Remove the boot clip, piston boot and piston seal. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the cylinder bore. Type 2056 Front Brake Calipers NOTE: There are two types of front brake calipers: The caliper types can be identified by the "5410" or "2056" stamped on the caliper body as shown. Check the type of the brake caliper before servicing. WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5941 1. Remove the banjo bolt, and disconnect the brake hose from the caliber. 2. Remove caliper bolt B. pivot the caliper up out of the way, then remove the caliper from the bracket. 3. Remove the guide pin boot from sleeve A on the caliper bracket. 4. Remove the pin boot, sleeve B and sleeve boot from the caliber body. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5942 5. If necessary, apply compressed air to the caliper fluid inlet to get the piston out. Place a shop rag or wooden block as shown to cushion the piston when it is expelled. Use low pressure air in short spurts. WARNING: Do not place your fingers in front of the piston. - Do not use high air pressure; use an OSHA approved 30 PSI nozzle. 6. Remove the piston from the caliper, and check the piston for scoring. Removing Clip, Boot And Seal 7. Remove the boot clip, piston boot and piston seal. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the cylinder bore. Type 5410 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5943 WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. - Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. 1. Clean the piston and caliper bore with brake fluid, and inspect for wear and damage. 2. Coat the new piston seal with the recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set, and install the seal in the cylinder groove. 3. Apply the recommended seal grease in the caliper seal set to the sealing lips and inside of a new piston boot, and secure install it in the caliper with the new boot clip. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the caliper cylinder wall. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5944 4. Lubricate the caliper and piston with brake fluid, then install the piston in the cylinder with the dished end facing in. 5. Apply the recommended seal grease in the caliper seal set to the sliding surface of the pins and the inside of the new pin boots. 6. Install the pin boots into the grooves in the caliper bracket properly. 7. Insert pin A and pin B into the caliper bracket. 8. Install the pin boots into the grooves in the pins properly. 9. Install the brake pads in their original positions. 10. Push in the piston so that the caliper will fit over the pads, and install the caliper. 11. Tighten the caliper bolts. 12. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt. 13. Fill the brake reservoir and bleed the brake system. 14. Perform the following checks. - Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check for brake hoses for interference and twisting. Type 2056 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5945 WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow Out all passages with compressed air. - Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and Other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. - Make sure no dirt or Other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. NOTE: - Coat the piston, piston seal, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid. - Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. 1. Clean the piston and caliper bore with brake fluid, and inspect for wear and damage. 2. Coat a new piston seal with the recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set, and install the seal in the cylinder groove. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5946 3. Apply the recommended seal grease in the caliper seal set to the sealing lips and inside of a new piston boot, and secure install it in the caliper with a new boot clip. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the caliper cylinder wall. 4. Lubricate the caliper and piston with brake fluid, then install the piston in the cylinder with the dished end facing in. 5. Apply the recommended seal grease in the caliper seal set to the sliding surface of sleeve B and the inside of the new pin and sleeve boots. 6. Install the new sleeve and pin boots and sleeve B on the caliper. NOTE: Be sure to install the boots into the grooves in the caliper and sleeve B properly. 7. Apply the recommended seal grease in the caliper seal set to the sliding surface of sleeve A and the inside of a new guide pin boot. 8. Install the guide pin boot into the groove in the sleeve A. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5947 9. Make sure that the brake pad retainers and brake pads are in their original positions. 10. Install the caliper onto sleeve A, and pivot it down into position. NOTE: Install the guide pin boot into the groove in the caliper properly. 11. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt. 12. Tighten the caliper bolt B. 13. Fill the brake reservoir and bleed the brake system. 14. Perform the following checks. - Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check for brake hoses for interference and twisting Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5948 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Disassembly WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. 1. Remove the caliper shield. 2. Remove the lock pin and clevis pin. Remove the cable clip, and disconnect the cable from the arm. 3. Remove the banjo bolt and two sealing washers. 4. Remove the two caliper mounting bolts and caliper body from the bracket. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5949 5. Remove the pins and pin boots from the caliper bracket. 6. Remove the pad spring from the caliper body. 7. Remove the piston by rotating the piston counterclockwise with the tool, and remove the piston boot. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the piston. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5950 8. Remove the piston seal. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the cylinder bore. 9. Install the special tool between the caliper body and spring cover. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the inside of the caliper cylinder during caliper disassembly. 10. Position the locknuts as shown, then turn the shaft until the plate just contacts the caliper body. NOTE: Do not compress the spring under the spring cover. 11. Turn the shaft clockwise 1/4 - 1/2 turn to compress adjusting spring B in the caliper body. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5951 CAUTION: To prevent damage to the inner components, do not turn the shaft more than 1/2 turn. 12. Lower the locknuts fully, and tighten them securely. NOTE: Keep the locknuts in this position until you reinstall the circlip. 13. Remove the circlip with snap ring pliers. Removing Adjusting Bolt 14. Hold the plate with your fingers, and turn the shaft counterclockwise. Remove the special tool from the caliper. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5952 15. Remove the adjusting bolt. 16. Remove the spring cover, adjusting spring B. spacer, bearing A, and cup from the adjusting bolt. 17. Remove the sleeve piston, and remove the pin from the cam in the caliper body. 18. Remove the return spring. 19. Remove the parking lever and cam as an assembly from the caliper body. CAUTION: Do not loosen the parking nut with the cam installed in the caliper body. If the lever and shaft must be separated, hold the lever in a vise, and loosen the parking nut. 20. Remove the cam boot. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5953 Assembly WARNING: - Never use an air hose or dry brush to clean brake assemblies. - Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner to avoid breathing brake dust. - Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. - When reusing the pads, install them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency. CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; It may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. - Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. 1. Pack all cavities of the needle bearing with the recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5954 2. Coat a new cam boot with recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set, and install it in the caliper body. 3. Apply recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set to the pin contacting area of the cam, and install the cam and lever assembly into the caliper body. 4. Install the return spring. CAUTION: When the cam and lever were separated, be sure to assemble them before installing the cam in the caliper body. Install the lever and spring washer, apply locking agent to the threads, and tighten the parking nut while holding the lever with a vise. - Avoid damaging the cam boot since it must be installed before the cam. - When installing the cam, do not allow the cam boot lips to turn outside in. 5. Install the pin in the cam. 6. Install a new O-ring on the sleeve piston. 7. Install the sleeve piston so that the hole in the bottom of the piston is aligned with the pin in the cam, and the two pins on the piston are aligned with the holes in the caliper. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5955 8. Coat a new cup with recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set, and install it with its groove facing the bearing A side of the adjusting bolt. 9. Fit the bearing A, spacer, adjusting spring B. and spring cover on the adjusting bolt, and install them in the caliper cylinder. 10. Install the special tool onto the spring cover, and turn the shaft until the locknut contacts the plate. 11. Check that the flared end of the spring cover is below the circlip groove. 12. Install the circlip into the groove, then remove the special tool. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5956 NOTE: Check that the circlip is seated in the groove properly. 13. Coat a new piston seal with recommended silicone grease in the caliper seal set, and install it in the caliper. 14. Apply recommended rubber grease in the caliper seal set to the sealing lips and inside of a new piston boot, and install it in the caliper. 15. Coat the outside of the piston with brake fluid, and install it onto the adjusting bolt while rotating it clockwise with the tool. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the piston and piston boot. 16. Install the pad spring onto the caliper. 17. Apply the recommended pin grease in the caliper seal set to the sliding surface of the pins and inside of the new pin boots. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5957 18. Install the pin boots into the grooves in the caliper bracket properly. 19. Insert pin A and pin B into the caliper bracket. 20. Install the pin boots into the grooves in the pins properly. 21. Install the brake pad retainers and brake pads. 22. Align the cutout in the piston with the tab on the inner pad. 23. Install the caliper onto the caliper bracket, and tighten the caliper mounting bolts. 24. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with new sealing washers, and tighten the banjo bolt. 25. Insert the cable through the arm, and connect the cable to the lever with the clevis pin and lock pin. Install the cable clip securely. 26. Install the caliper shield. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5958 27. Fill the brake reservoir, and bleed the brake system. 28. Operate the brake pedal several times, then adjust the parking brake. 29. After installation, perform the following checks: - Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. - Check the parking brake lever for operation, and adjust it if necessary. - Check for brake hose for interference or twisting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications Fluid type DOT 3 or 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Photo 22 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Photo 22 Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Photo 22 > Page 5966 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Additional Image SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS, before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5967 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation The brake system indicator light comes on to alert the driver that the parking brake is applied, or that the brake fluid level is low. It also comes on as a bulb test when the engine is cranked. Brake Fluid Level With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied through fuse 25 to the brake system light. If the brake fluid level is low, the brake fluid level switch closes, providing ground to the circuit. The brake system light then comes on, alerting the driver to a low brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder. (Check brake pad wear before you add fluid). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5968 Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications Brake Hose/Line: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Line-to-Hose ........................................................................................................................................ ................................................. 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Line-to-ABS Modulator Unit ................................. ............................................................................................................................... 19 Nm (14 ft. lbs.) Proportioning Control Valve-to-Line ................................................................................................................................................... 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Master Cylinder-to-Line ............................................................................................... ........................................................................ 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5972 Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection 1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting. 2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leakage. Also check for bent brake lines. 3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary. 4. Check the master cylinder and ABS modulator unit for damage and leakage. CAUTION: Replace the brake hose din whenever the brake hose is serviced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5973 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. 1. Replace the brake hose if the hose is twisted, cracked, or if it leaks. 2. Disconnect the brake hose from the brake line using a 10 mm flare nut wrench. 3. Remove and discard the brake hose clip from the brake hose. 4. Remove the banjo bolt, and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper. 5. Remove the brake hose bracket from the knuckle. 6. Install the brake hose bracket and brake hose onto the knuckle first, then connect the brake hose to the caliper with the banjo bolt and new sealing washers. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5974 7. Install the brake hose onto the upper brake hose bracket with a new brake hose clip. 8. Connect the brake line to the brake hose. 9. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system. 10. Perform the following checks: - Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and tighten if necessary. - Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Specifications Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Brake Line ........................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5978 Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Service and Repair The dual portioning valve is not a serviceable component and must be replaced if found to be faulty. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications Power Unit: Specifications MODULATOR * Flare Nuts ............................................................................................................................................ .............................................. 15 Nm (11 lb.ft.) Torx Bolts ................................................................... ....................................................................................................................... 9.8 Nm (7 lb.ft.) 8 mm Bolts ..................................................................................................................................................... ................................... 22 Nm (16 lb.ft.) * For EX with optional ABS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5982 Power Unit: Locations Right Side Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5983 Power Unit: Service Precautions CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. - To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. WARNING: - Accumulator retains brake fluid under high pressure. Relieve high pressure through maintenance bleeder prior to performing service on the ABS Modulator or Power unit, otherwise personal injury may result. - The ABS Accumulator contains high pressure nitrogen gas. Do not puncture, expose to the flame, or attempt to disassemble the accumulator or it may explode, resulting in severe personal injury. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5984 Power Unit: Description and Operation MODES OF OPERATION The ABS modulator consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor and the damping chamber. The modulator reduces the caliper fluid pressure directly, and it is also referred to as a circulating type because the brake fluid circulates through the caliper, reservoir and the master cylinder. The hydraulic control has three modes: pressure reduction, pressure retaining and pressure intensifying. The hydraulic circuit is the independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel. ABS Modulator Schematic Pressure Intensifying Mode - Inlet valve open, outlet valve closed Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper. Pressure Retaining Mode - Inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve. Pressure Reduction Mode - Inlet valve closed, outlet valve open Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the reservoir. Motor Operation Mode - When starting the pressure reduction mode, the pump motor is ON. When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is OFF. The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the master cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5985 Wheel Speed And Modulator Control Schematic WHEEL SPEED AND MODULATOR CONTROL When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the inlet valve closes to retain the caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops further, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Power Unit <--> [Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5986 Power Unit: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation. - To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material. NOTE: Tighten the flare nuts to 15 Nm (1.5 kgf.m, 11 ft. lbs.) . REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the modulator unit 10P and pump motor 2P connectors. 2. Disconnect the brake lines, then remove the modulator unit. INSTALLATION 1. Install the modulator unit, then connect the brake lines. 2. Connect the modulator unit 10P and pump motor 2P connectors. 3. Bleed the brake system. 4. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator light goes off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-078 > Oct > 03 > Brakes - Brake Indicator Comes ON/Goes OFF Brake Master Cylinder: Customer Interest Brakes - Brake Indicator Comes ON/Goes OFF 03-078 October 28, 2003 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 1997-01 CR-V-ALL 1997-01 Prelude - ALL *1998-02 Accord ALL* Brake System Indicator Comes On and Goes Off (Supersedes 03-078, dated October 17, 2003) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The brake system indicator comes on after a cold start, then goes off after a few minutes of driving. PROBABLE CAUSE The master cylinder reservoir filter is not allowing the cap to vent properly, causing the fluid level in the filter to change. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder reservoir filter. PARTS INFORMATION Master Cylinder Reservoir Filter: P/N 46666-S04-J02, H/C 7602899 Float: P/N 46662-S84-999, H/C 5896766 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 46666-S04-J02 H/C 7602899 Defect Code: 05401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure the brake master cylinder fluid is at its proper level. 2. Release the parking brake. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-078 > Oct > 03 > Brakes - Brake Indicator Comes ON/Goes OFF > Page 5995 3. Check the movement of the float in the reservoir: ^ If the float moves up and down freely, go to step 4. ^ If the float does not move freely, replace the cap and recheck the symptom. 4. Check that the float does float in brake fluid: ^ If it floats, go to step 5. ^ If it sinks, replace the float and recheck the symptom. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals of the cap. You should find no continuity when the float is up, and continuity when the float is down. ^ If continuity is correct, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If continuity is not correct, replace the cap and recheck the symptom. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the brake master cylinder cap. 2. Remove and discard the old filter. 3. Install the new filter in the master cylinder. 4. Reinstall the brake master cylinder cap. 5. Check that the brake system indicator is off. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Master Cylinder: > SN041214 > Dec > 04 > Brake System - Don't Skip Diagnosis Steps in 03-078 Brake Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Brake System - Don't Skip Diagnosis Steps in 03-078 SOURCE: Honda Service News December 2004 TITLE: Don't Skip DIAGNOSIS Steps in S/B 03-078 APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: We can't emphasize enough how important it is to do all the steps called out in DIAGNOSIS for S/B 03-078, Brake System Indicator Comes On and Goes Off. It's particularly important that you're checking the movement of the float in the master cylinder reservoir and you're doing the continuity check for the reservoir cap. If you skip these steps, it could lead to needless replacement of the float and cap, and a future come-back from your customer. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Master Cylinder: > 03-078 > Oct > 03 > Brakes - Brake Indicator Comes ON/Goes OFF Brake Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Brake Indicator Comes ON/Goes OFF 03-078 October 28, 2003 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 1997-01 CR-V-ALL 1997-01 Prelude - ALL *1998-02 Accord ALL* Brake System Indicator Comes On and Goes Off (Supersedes 03-078, dated October 17, 2003) Updated information is shown with asterisks. SYMPTOM The brake system indicator comes on after a cold start, then goes off after a few minutes of driving. PROBABLE CAUSE The master cylinder reservoir filter is not allowing the cap to vent properly, causing the fluid level in the filter to change. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the master cylinder reservoir filter. PARTS INFORMATION Master Cylinder Reservoir Filter: P/N 46666-S04-J02, H/C 7602899 Float: P/N 46662-S84-999, H/C 5896766 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 46666-S04-J02 H/C 7602899 Defect Code: 05401 Symptom Code: 03205 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. DIAGNOSIS 1. Make sure the brake master cylinder fluid is at its proper level. 2. Release the parking brake. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Master Cylinder: > 03-078 > Oct > 03 > Brakes - Brake Indicator Comes ON/Goes OFF > Page 6005 3. Check the movement of the float in the reservoir: ^ If the float moves up and down freely, go to step 4. ^ If the float does not move freely, replace the cap and recheck the symptom. 4. Check that the float does float in brake fluid: ^ If it floats, go to step 5. ^ If it sinks, replace the float and recheck the symptom. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals of the cap. You should find no continuity when the float is up, and continuity when the float is down. ^ If continuity is correct, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. ^ If continuity is not correct, replace the cap and recheck the symptom. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the brake master cylinder cap. 2. Remove and discard the old filter. 3. Install the new filter in the master cylinder. 4. Reinstall the brake master cylinder cap. 5. Check that the brake system indicator is off. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Master Cylinder: > SN041214 > Dec > 04 > Brake System - Don't Skip Diagnosis Steps in 03-078 Brake Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Brake System - Don't Skip Diagnosis Steps in 03-078 SOURCE: Honda Service News December 2004 TITLE: Don't Skip DIAGNOSIS Steps in S/B 03-078 APPLIES TO: All Models SERVICE TIP: We can't emphasize enough how important it is to do all the steps called out in DIAGNOSIS for S/B 03-078, Brake System Indicator Comes On and Goes Off. It's particularly important that you're checking the movement of the float in the master cylinder reservoir and you're doing the continuity check for the reservoir cap. If you skip these steps, it could lead to needless replacement of the float and cap, and a future come-back from your customer. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Master Cylinder Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications Master Cylinder TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Attaching Nuts ..................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Master Cylinder > Page 6013 Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications Master Cylinder Push Rod GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Piston-to-Pushrod Clearance ..................................................................................................................................................... 0 0.4 mm (0 - 0.02 inch) TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Locknut ................................................................................................................................................ ................................................. 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6014 Brake Master Cylinder: Adjustments NOTE: - The master cylinder pushrod-to-piston clearance must be checked and adjustments made, if necessary, before installing the master cylinder. - ABS type is shown, conventional brake type is similar. 1. Set the special tool on the master cylinder body; push in the center shaft until the top of it contacts the end of the secondary piston by turning the adjusting nut. 2. Without disturbing the center shaft's position, install the special tool upside down on the booster. 3. Install the master cylinder nuts, and tighten to the specified torque. 4. Connect the booster in-line with a vacuum gauge 0 - 101 kPa (0 - 760 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) to the booster's engine vacuum supply, and maintain an engine speed that will deliver 66 kPa (500 mmHg, 20 in.Hg) vacuum. 5. With a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the gauge body and the adjusting nut as shown. Clearance: 0 - 0.4 mm (0 - 0.02 inch) NOTE: If the clearance between the gauge body and adjusting nut is 0.4 mm (0.02 inch), the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0 mm. However, if the clearance between the gauge body and adjusting nut is 0 mm, the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0.4 mm (0.02 inch) or more. Therefore, it must be adjusted and rechecked. 6. If clearance is incorrect, loosen the star locknut, and turn the adjuster in or out to adjust. NOTE: Adjust the clearance while the specified vacuum is applied to the booster. - Hold the clevis while adjusting. 7. Tighten the star locknut securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6015 8. Remove the special tool. Brake Booster Length With Booster Removed 9. Adjust the pushrod length as shown if the booster is removed. 10. Install the master cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6016 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connectors. 2. Remove the reservoir cap from the master cylinder. 3. The brake fluid may be sucked out through the top of the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. 4. Disconnect the brake lines from the master cylinder. 5. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts and washers. 6. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster. 7. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake booster. 8. Remove the cotter pin and clevis pin from the clevis. CAUTION: Do not disconnect the clevis by removing it from the operating rod of the brake booster. If the clevis is loosened, adjust the pushrod length before installing the brake booster. 9. Remove the four booster mounting nuts. 10. Pull the brake booster forward until the clevis is clear of the bulkhead. 11. Remove the brake booster from the engine compartment. 12. Install the brake booster and master cylinder in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: - When connecting the brake lines, make sure that there is no interference between the brake lines and other parts. - Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when installing the master cylinder. NOTE: If replacing the master cylinder or brake booster, check and adjust the pushrod clearance before installing the master cylinder. 13. Fill the master cylinder reservoir, and bleed the brake system. 14. After installation, check the brake pedal height and brake pedal free play and adjust if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Cylinder: Specifications Bleeder Screw 60 in.lb Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6020 Wheel Cylinder: Service Precautions CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. - Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6021 Wheel Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Wheel Cylinder Assemblies CAUTION: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. NOTE: - Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air. - Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles. - Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not reuse the drained fluid. - Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Coat the piston, piston cup, and wheel cylinder bore with clean brake fluid. Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6022 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Do not spill brake fluid on the car; it may damage the paint if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. - Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the brake fluid. - Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible. - Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid. Removing Wheel Cylinder From Backing Plate 1. Remove the brake shoes. See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair 2. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder. 3. Remove the wheel cylinder mounting bolts and the wheel cylinder from the backing plate. 4. Apply sealant between the wheel cylinder and backing plate and install the wheel cylinder. Specs: Bleed Screw 7 Nm (5.1 lb.ft.) Brake Line Nut 15 Nm (11 lb.ft.) Wheel Cylinder Bolts 9 Nm (6.5 lb.ft.) 5. Install the brake shoes. See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair 6. Bleed brakes. See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Parking Brake Cable: Testing and Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6027 CAUTION: The parking brake cables must not be bent or distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and premature cable failure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6028 Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments 1. Pull the parking brake lever with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbs.) force to fully apply the parking brake. The parking brake lever should be locked within the specified notches. Lever Locked Notches: 6 - 9 2. Adjust the parking brake if the lever notches are out of specification. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6029 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6030 CAUTION: The parking brake cables must not be bent or distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and premature cable failure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Specifications Parking Brake Lever: Specifications GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Play In Stroke [1] ................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 6 - 9 Notches[2] TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Parking Nut .......................................................................................................................................... ................................................. 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) [1] At 196 N (20 kgf, 44 ft. lbs.) lever force. [2] To be locked when pulled. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Specifications > Automatic Transmission Parking Brake Pedal: Specifications Automatic Transmission Pedal Height [1] ................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 161 mm (6 5/16 inch) Free Play ......................................................... ............................................................................................................................ 1 - 5 mm (1/16 3/16 inch) [1] With floor mat removed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Specifications > Automatic Transmission > Page 6038 Parking Brake Pedal: Specifications Manual Transmission Pedal Height [1] ................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 156.5 mm (6.16 inch) Free Play ......................................................... ............................................................................................................................ 1 - 5 mm (1/16 3/16 inch) [1] With floor mat removed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Release Switch: Locations Below Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Attaching Nuts ..................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 13 Nm (108 inch lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6049 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection FUNCTIONAL TEST 1. With the engine stopped, depress the brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then depress the pedal hard and hold it for 15 seconds. If the pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is bypassing internally, or the brake system (master cylinder, lines, modulator, proportioning control valve, or caliper) is leaking. 2. Start the engine with the pedal depressed. If the pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is operating normally. If the pedal height does not vary, the booster or check valve is faulty. 3. With the engine running, depress the brake pedal lightly. Apply just enough pressure to hold back automatic transmission creep. If the brake pedal sinks more than 25 mm (1.0 inch) in three minutes, the master cylinder is faulty. A slight change in pedal height when the A/C compressor cycles on and off if normal. (The A/C compressor load changes the vacuum available to the booster.) LEAK TEST 1. Depress the brake pedal with the engine running, then stop the engine. If the pedal height does not vary while depressed for 30 seconds, the vacuum booster is OK. If the pedal rises, the booster is faulty. 2. With the engine stopped, depress the brake pedal several times using normal pressure. When the pedal is first depressed, it should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal height should gradually rise. If the pedal position does not vary, check the booster check valve. BOOSTER CHECK VALVE TEST 1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose at the booster. 2. Start the engine and let it idle. There should be vacuum. If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not working properly. Replace the brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6050 Vacuum Brake Booster: Adjustments NOTE: - The master cylinder pushrod-to-piston clearance must be checked and adjustments made, if necessary, before installing the master cylinder. - ABS type is shown, conventional brake type is similar. 1. Set the special tool on the master cylinder body; push in the center shaft until the top of it contacts the end of the secondary piston by turning the adjusting nut. 2. Without disturbing the center shaft's position, install the special tool upside down on the booster. 3. Install the master cylinder nuts, and tighten to the specified torque. 4. Connect the booster in-line with a vacuum gauge 0 - 101 kPa (0 - 760 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) to the booster's engine vacuum supply, and maintain an engine speed that will deliver 66 kPa (500 mmHg, 20 in.Hg) vacuum. 5. With a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the gauge body and the adjusting nut as shown. Clearance: 0 - 0.4 mm (0 - 0.02 inch) NOTE: If the clearance between the gauge body and adjusting nut is 0.4 mm (0.02 inch), the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0 mm. However, if the clearance between the gauge body and adjusting nut is 0 mm, the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0.4 mm (0.02 inch) or more. Therefore, it must be adjusted and rechecked. 6. If clearance is incorrect, loosen the star locknut, and turn the adjuster in or out to adjust. NOTE: Adjust the clearance while the specified vacuum is applied to the booster. - Hold the clevis while adjusting. 7. Tighten the star locknut securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6051 8. Remove the special tool. Brake Booster Length With Booster Removed 9. Adjust the pushrod length as shown if the booster is removed. 10. Install the master cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6052 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when removing the master cylinder. - Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water. - To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels. 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connectors. 2. Remove the reservoir cap from the master cylinder. 3. The brake fluid may be sucked out through the top of the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe. 4. Disconnect the brake lines from the master cylinder. 5. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts and washers. 6. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster. 7. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake booster. 8. Remove the cotter pin and clevis pin from the clevis. CAUTION: Do not disconnect the clevis by removing it from the operating rod of the brake booster. If the clevis is loosened, adjust the pushrod length before installing the brake booster. 9. Remove the four booster mounting nuts. 10. Pull the brake booster forward until the clevis is clear of the bulkhead. 11. Remove the brake booster from the engine compartment. 12. Install the brake booster and master cylinder in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: - When connecting the brake lines, make sure that there is no interference between the brake lines and other parts. - Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines when installing the master cylinder. NOTE: If replacing the master cylinder or brake booster, check and adjust the pushrod clearance before installing the master cylinder. 13. Fill the master cylinder reservoir, and bleed the brake system. 14. After installation, check the brake pedal height and brake pedal free play and adjust if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 96032 > Jun > 96 > Recall - Brake Booster Check Valve Sticking Technical Service Bulletin # 96032 Date: 960614 Recall - Brake Booster Check Valve Sticking Bulletin No. 96-O32 Issue Date JUNE 14, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under BRAKES Safety Recall: Civic Power Brake Booster Check Valve BACKGROUND The brake booster check valve in certain 1996 Civics may stick, which could result in a loss of the brake's power assist. A loss of power assist would require greater than normal brake pedal force, resulting in a reduction in braking performance. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles will be contacted by mail and asked to take the car to a dealership for repair. The text of the customer letter is at the end of this service bulletin. If any affected vehicles are in the dealership's inventory, repair them before they are sold or put into use as demonstrators. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation number: 413304 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 46402-S01-A11 H/C 4932018 Defect code: 251 Contention code: K11 Template ID: 96-032A CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean the brake booster vacuum hose and check valve. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 96032 > Jun > 96 > Recall - Brake Booster Check Valve Sticking > Page 6061 1. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose from the car. 2. Take the hose to the sink. Turn on the hot water tap on the faucet. Let the water run until it gets as hot as possible. 3. Hold the brake booster end of the vacuum hose with a pair of pliers. Place that end under the water stream, and let the water flow through the hose for one minute. NOTE: Make sure you are holding the correct end of the hose under the water stream. The check valve allows the water to flow only one way. 4. Without draining the water from the hose, place the hose in a large container filled with hot water. Make sure the check valve is sitting horizontally. Leave the hose immersed in the container for five minutes. 5. Remove the hose from the container. As before, hold the brake booster end under the hot water stream from the faucet, and flow water through the hose for one minute. Make sure water comes out of the engine end of the hose. 6. Remove the hose from the water stream, and shake as much water as you can out of the hose. Blow compressed air into the brake booster end of Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 96032 > Jun > 96 > Recall - Brake Booster Check Valve Sticking > Page 6062 the hose to remove the remaining water. 7. Reinstall the vacuum hose on the car. 8. Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature. 9. Turn off the engine. Fully depress and release the brake pedal five times. You will feel the brake pedal get harder to push each time you depress it. 10. Press on the brake pedal as you start the engine. The pedal should go down at least another inch as the engine starts. If it does not, diagnose the problem using normal troubleshooting procedures. 11. Center-punch a completion mark above the last character of the engine compartment VIN. Customer Letter Example of Customer Letter June 1996 Safety Recall: Civic Power Brake Booster Check Valve Dear Civic Owner: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. has determined that a defect which relates to motor vehicle safety exists in the brake booster vacuum hose of certain 1996 Civics. Our records indicate that you may own one of the affected vehicles. what Is the defect? The brake booster check valve in certain 1996 Civics may stick, which could result in a loss of the brake's power assist without prior warning. A loss of power assist would require greater than normal brake pedal force, resulting in a reduction in braking performance. This could lead to a vehicle crash. what should you do? Call any authorized Honda automobile dealer and make an appointment to have your car repaired. They will clean the brake booster vacuum hose to prevent this problem from happening. This procedure will be done free of charge. No parts are required. This procedure takes approximately half an hour; but please plan to leave your car with the dealership for half a day to allow them flexibility in scheduling. Check your brakes. Until the dealer repairs your car, you and anyone else who drives your car must check the brakes every time before you begin driving. 1. Before starting the engine. fully depress and release the brake pedal five times. ^ You will feel the brake pedal get harder to push each time you depress it. 2. Then, press on the brake pedal as you start the engine. ^ The pedal should go down at least another inch as the engine starts. - If it does, the check valve is working and you may drive the car. - If it does not, and the pedal is still very hard to depress, the check valve is stuck. contact your Honda dealer, and do not drive the car. WARNING Have your car fixed as soon as possible. until you do, you must check the brakes every time before driving. Failure to do so could result in a crash in which you could be seriously hurt or killed. Who to contact If you experience problems. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 96032 > Jun > 96 > Recall - Brake Booster Check Valve Sticking > Page 6063 If you are not satisfied with the service you receive from your Honda dealer, you may write to: American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Customer Information Service, Mail Stop 540-2S-2A 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746 If you believe that American Honda or the dealer has failed or is unable to remedy the defect in your car, without charge, within a reasonable period of time (60 days from the date you first contact the dealer for an appointment), you may submit a complaint to: Administrator National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 400 Seventh St, S.W. Washington, D.C. 20590 Or call the toll-free Auto Safety Hotline at (800) 424-9393 (residents of Washington D.C. should call 366-0123). what to do if you feel this notice is in error. This notice was mailed to you according to the most current information we have available. If you no longer own a Civic, or the name and address information in this notice is incorrect, please fill out and return the included Information Change Card. This will help us to update our records. If you have questions. If you are not sure how to contact a Honda dealer, or have questions about this notice, please call the Honda Customer Information Service Office at (800) 999-1009. We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause you. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > NHTSA96V106000 > Jun > 96 > Recall 96V106000: Brake Booster Check Valve Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Recalls Recall 96V106000: Brake Booster Check Valve A SOAPY LUBRICANT WAS USED TO INSERT THE CHECK VALVE INTO THE VACUUM HOSE WHICH CAUSES THE BRAKE BOOSTER CHECK VALVE TO STICK. THIS CONDITION CAN CAUSE A LOSS OF THE BRAKE'S POWER ASSIST RESULTING IN A REDUCTION IN BRAKING PERFORMANCE INCREASING THE POTENTIAL FOR A VEHICLE ACCIDENT. DEALERS WILL CLEAN THE CHECK VALVE BY WASHING THE VACUUM HOSE WITH HOT WATER. SYSTEM: BRAKES; HYDRAULIC; POWER ASSIST; CHECK VALVE. VEHICLE DESCRIPTION: SEDANS, HATCHBACKS AND COUPE MODEL PASSENGER VEHICLES. OWNER NOTIFICATION: OWNER NOTIFICATION IS EXPECTED TO BEGIN JUNE 21, 1996. NOTE: OWNERS WHO TAKE THEIR VEHICLES TO AN AUTHORIZED DEALER ON AN AGREED UPON SERVICE DATE AND DO NOT RECEIVE THE FREE REMEDY WITHIN A REASONABLE TIME SHOULD CONTACT HONDA AT 1-800-999-1009. ALSO CONTACT THE NATIONAL HIGHWAY TRAFFIC SAFETY ADMINISTRATION'S AUTO SAFETY HOTLINE AT 1-800-424-9393. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 96032 > Jun > 96 > Recall - Brake Booster Check Valve Sticking Technical Service Bulletin # 96032 Date: 960614 Recall - Brake Booster Check Valve Sticking Bulletin No. 96-O32 Issue Date JUNE 14, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under BRAKES Safety Recall: Civic Power Brake Booster Check Valve BACKGROUND The brake booster check valve in certain 1996 Civics may stick, which could result in a loss of the brake's power assist. A loss of power assist would require greater than normal brake pedal force, resulting in a reduction in braking performance. VEHICLES AFFECTED CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION Owners of affected vehicles will be contacted by mail and asked to take the car to a dealership for repair. The text of the customer letter is at the end of this service bulletin. If any affected vehicles are in the dealership's inventory, repair them before they are sold or put into use as demonstrators. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Operation number: 413304 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 46402-S01-A11 H/C 4932018 Defect code: 251 Contention code: K11 Template ID: 96-032A CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean the brake booster vacuum hose and check valve. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 96032 > Jun > 96 > Recall - Brake Booster Check Valve Sticking > Page 6073 1. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose from the car. 2. Take the hose to the sink. Turn on the hot water tap on the faucet. Let the water run until it gets as hot as possible. 3. Hold the brake booster end of the vacuum hose with a pair of pliers. Place that end under the water stream, and let the water flow through the hose for one minute. NOTE: Make sure you are holding the correct end of the hose under the water stream. The check valve allows the water to flow only one way. 4. Without draining the water from the hose, place the hose in a large container filled with hot water. Make sure the check valve is sitting horizontally. Leave the hose immersed in the container for five minutes. 5. Remove the hose from the container. As before, hold the brake booster end under the hot water stream from the faucet, and flow water through the hose for one minute. Make sure water comes out of the engine end of the hose. 6. Remove the hose from the water stream, and shake as much water as you can out of the hose. Blow compressed air into the brake booster end of Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 96032 > Jun > 96 > Recall - Brake Booster Check Valve Sticking > Page 6074 the hose to remove the remaining water. 7. Reinstall the vacuum hose on the car. 8. Start the engine, and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature. 9. Turn off the engine. Fully depress and release the brake pedal five times. You will feel the brake pedal get harder to push each time you depress it. 10. Press on the brake pedal as you start the engine. The pedal should go down at least another inch as the engine starts. If it does not, diagnose the problem using normal troubleshooting procedures. 11. Center-punch a completion mark above the last character of the engine compartment VIN. Customer Letter Example of Customer Letter June 1996 Safety Recall: Civic Power Brake Booster Check Valve Dear Civic Owner: This notice is sent to you in accordance with the requirements of the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. has determined that a defect which relates to motor vehicle safety exists in the brake booster vacuum hose of certain 1996 Civics. Our records indicate that you may own one of the affected vehicles. what Is the defect? The brake booster check valve in certain 1996 Civics may stick, which could result in a loss of the brake's power assist without prior warning. A loss of power assist would require greater than normal brake pedal force, resulting in a reduction in braking performance. This could lead to a vehicle crash. what should you do? Call any authorized Honda automobile dealer and make an appointment to have your car repaired. They will clean the brake booster vacuum hose to prevent this problem from happening. This procedure will be done free of charge. No parts are required. This procedure takes approximately half an hour; but please plan to leave your car with the dealership for half a day to allow them flexibility in scheduling. Check your brakes. Until the dealer repairs your car, you and anyone else who drives your car must check the brakes every time before you begin driving. 1. Before starting the engine. fully depress and release the brake pedal five times. ^ You will feel the brake pedal get harder to push each time you depress it. 2. Then, press on the brake pedal as you start the engine. ^ The pedal should go down at least another inch as the engine starts. - If it does, the check valve is working and you may drive the car. - If it does not, and the pedal is still very hard to depress, the check valve is stuck. contact your Honda dealer, and do not drive the car. WARNING Have your car fixed as soon as possible. until you do, you must check the brakes every time before driving. Failure to do so could result in a crash in which you could be seriously hurt or killed. Who to contact If you experience problems. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > 96032 > Jun > 96 > Recall - Brake Booster Check Valve Sticking > Page 6075 If you are not satisfied with the service you receive from your Honda dealer, you may write to: American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Customer Information Service, Mail Stop 540-2S-2A 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746 If you believe that American Honda or the dealer has failed or is unable to remedy the defect in your car, without charge, within a reasonable period of time (60 days from the date you first contact the dealer for an appointment), you may submit a complaint to: Administrator National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 400 Seventh St, S.W. Washington, D.C. 20590 Or call the toll-free Auto Safety Hotline at (800) 424-9393 (residents of Washington D.C. should call 366-0123). what to do if you feel this notice is in error. This notice was mailed to you according to the most current information we have available. If you no longer own a Civic, or the name and address information in this notice is incorrect, please fill out and return the included Information Change Card. This will help us to update our records. If you have questions. If you are not sure how to contact a Honda dealer, or have questions about this notice, please call the Honda Customer Information Service Office at (800) 999-1009. We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause you. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: > NHTSA96V106000 > Jun > 96 > Recall 96V106000: Brake Booster Check Valve Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 96V106000: Brake Booster Check Valve A SOAPY LUBRICANT WAS USED TO INSERT THE CHECK VALVE INTO THE VACUUM HOSE WHICH CAUSES THE BRAKE BOOSTER CHECK VALVE TO STICK. THIS CONDITION CAN CAUSE A LOSS OF THE BRAKE'S POWER ASSIST RESULTING IN A REDUCTION IN BRAKING PERFORMANCE INCREASING THE POTENTIAL FOR A VEHICLE ACCIDENT. DEALERS WILL CLEAN THE CHECK VALVE BY WASHING THE VACUUM HOSE WITH HOT WATER. SYSTEM: BRAKES; HYDRAULIC; POWER ASSIST; CHECK VALVE. VEHICLE DESCRIPTION: SEDANS, HATCHBACKS AND COUPE MODEL PASSENGER VEHICLES. OWNER NOTIFICATION: OWNER NOTIFICATION IS EXPECTED TO BEGIN JUNE 21, 1996. NOTE: OWNERS WHO TAKE THEIR VEHICLES TO AN AUTHORIZED DEALER ON AN AGREED UPON SERVICE DATE AND DO NOT RECEIVE THE FREE REMEDY WITHIN A REASONABLE TIME SHOULD CONTACT HONDA AT 1-800-999-1009. ALSO CONTACT THE NATIONAL HIGHWAY TRAFFIC SAFETY ADMINISTRATION'S AUTO SAFETY HOTLINE AT 1-800-424-9393. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6080 Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster Vacuum Hose - Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose at the booster or at the booster side of the valve. - Start the engine and let it idle. There should be vacuum. If no vacuum is available, the check valve is not working properly. Replace the brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, then retest. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6085 Engine Compartment Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6086 Brake Fluid Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. ABS pump motor relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Electronic Brake Control Module: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Attaching Torx Bolts ............................................................................................................................ ............................................ 9.8 Nm (84 inch lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6092 Electronic Brake Control Module: Connector Locations Connector A Behind Right Kick Panel Connector B Behind Right Kick Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6093 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Main Control Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Main Control ABS Operation The ABS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates the vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the rate of deceleration. The ABS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and it transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high. The pressure reduction control is a three-mode system, that is pressure reduction, pressure retaining and pressure intensifying modes. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Main Control > Page 6096 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Diagnosis Function SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION Since the anti-lock brake system modulates the braking pressure when a wheel is about to lock, regardless of the driver's intention, the system operation and the braking power will be impaired if there is a malfunction in the system. To prevent this possibility, the self-diagnosis function monitors the main system functions. The ABS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU The CPUs check each other and the circuits of the system. When the CPUs detect failure, they shift to the "system down mode" or the "control inhibition mode". When an abnormality is detected, the ABS indicator light goes on. CHECK MODE/BULB CHECK There is also a check mode of the self-diagnosis system itself; when the ignition switch is first turned on, the ABS indicator light comes on and stays on for a few seconds after the engine starts to signify that the self-diagnosis system and indicator light are functional. FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION When an abnormality is detected in the ABS control system by the self-diagnosis, the solenoid operations are suspended to inhibit anti-lock brake system operation. Under these conditions, the braking system functions just as an ordinary one, maintaining the necessary braking function. When the ABS indicator light is turned on, it means the fail-safe is functioning. SELF TEST - FAULT DETECTION - The self-diagnosis can be classified into these four categories. Initial Diagnosis - Performed right after the engine starts and until the ABS indicator light goes off. Except ABS Control - Performed when the ABS is not functioning. During ABS Control - Performed when the ABS is functioning. During Warning - Performed when the ABS indicator light is ON. ABS Self-diagnosis - The system performs the following controls when a problem is detected by the self-diagnosis. > ABS indicator light ON > Memory of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) > Mode change to the "system down mode" or the "control inhibition mode". 1. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is memorized when a problem is detected and the ABS indicator light does not go off, or when the ABS indicator light comes on. The DTC is not memorized when the ABS indicator light comes on unless the CPU is activated. 2. The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However, when the same DTC is detected twice or more, the later one is written over the old one. Therefore, when the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is recorded as one DTC. 3. The DTCs are indicated in the order of ascending number, not in the order they occur. 4. The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs cannot be canceled by disconnecting the battery. Perform the specified procedures to erase. See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes/Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6097 Electronic Brake Control Module: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6098 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6099 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair 1. Remove the right side kick panel. 2. Disconnect the ABS control unit connectors. 3. Remove the ABS control unit. 4. Install the ABS control unit in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Photo 22 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Photo 22 Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Photo 22 > Page 6105 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Additional Image SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS, before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6106 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation The brake system indicator light comes on to alert the driver that the parking brake is applied, or that the brake fluid level is low. It also comes on as a bulb test when the engine is cranked. Brake Fluid Level With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied through fuse 25 to the brake system light. If the brake fluid level is low, the brake fluid level switch closes, providing ground to the circuit. The brake system light then comes on, alerting the driver to a low brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder. (Check brake pad wear before you add fluid). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6107 Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Braking Sensor/Switch: Locations Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Release Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Release Switch: Locations Below Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Wheel Speed Sensor Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Sensor Lock Bolts 7 ft.lb Air Gap Front & Rear 0.02 - 0.04 in For EX with optional ABS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Specifications > Wheel Speed Sensor > Page 6121 Wheel Speed Sensor: Specifications Toothed Ring PULSER/WHEEL SENSOR AIR GAP * Front & Rear Standard ........................................................................................................................ .................................................. 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in) * For EX with optional ABS Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Front Inside of Left Front Wheel (Right Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Front > Page 6124 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Rear Inside of Left Rear Wheel (Right Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6125 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation WHEEL SPEED SENSOR Wheel Sensor AC Current The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. As the gear pulser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor's magnetic coil, AC current is generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The ABS control unit detects the wheel sensor signal frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed. There are four wheel sensors, one for each wheel. The gear pulser has 50 teeth. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Toothed Ring Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Toothed Ring INSPECTION OF THE TOOTHED RING 1. Check the front and rear pulser for chipped or damaged teeth. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser. Standard: 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) NOTE: If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 inch), the probability is a distorted suspension arm which should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Toothed Ring > Page 6128 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection Wheel Speed Sensor TESTING THE WHEEL SPEED SENSOR 1. Check the front and rear pulser for chipped or damaged teeth. 2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser. Standard: 0.4 - 1.0 mm (0.02 - 0.04 inch) NOTE: If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) , the probability is a distorted suspension arm which should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6129 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair NOTE: - Be careful when installing the sensors to avoid twisting the wires. - The torque value of the bolts is 9.8 Nm (1.0 kgf.m, 7 ft. lbs.). FRONT REAR 1. Remove the hub bearing unit. 2. Remove the four backing plate bolts. 3. Pull the backing plate away from the trailing arm, then remove the wheel sensor. It is not necessary to disconnect the brake line. NOTE: This illustration is drum brake type. The torque value of the disk type is same as drum type. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch > Page 6136 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Interlock Switch Behind Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6146 Starting System Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6147 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Starter cut relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions Battery Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions Replacing a Battery? Don't Disconnect the Cables With the Engine Running When replacing a battery, many service techs disconnect the battery cables with the engine running to keep the data alive in volatile memory. This practice worked fine back in the day when vehicles were pretty much a box on wheels, but with so many of today's vehicles sporting a impressive array of cool, high tech hardware, it's not recommended. Here's why: ^ The battery works as a capacitor to prevent sudden swings in voltage. With the battery cables disconnected, the alternator voltage regulator tries to stabilize the system voltage, but it can only do so by turning the alternator on and off. ^ When solenoids or relays are turned on and of{ they produce a very high voltage spike that travels through the 12-volt system. This voltage spike can fry sensitive solid state components or corrupt the data that's stored in volatile memory for such components as the gauge control module, the radio, and the various control units. The best way to keep data alive in volatile memory when replacing a battery is to hook up a Honda Computer Memory Saver to the 16P data link connector (DLC). This portable tool works as a secondary 12-volt source. It saves you the hassle of writing down your customer's audio presets, resetting the clock, or even doing the idle learn procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Electrical - Battery Replacement Precautions > Page 6153 The Honda Computer Memory Saver is indeed a real time saver, but here's a word of caution: Don't let the positive battery cable touch any body ground. It will cause a short that will either blow the fuse in the tool or cause a drop in system voltage resulting in the loss of any data that 5 in volatile memory. The Honda Computer Memory Saver is available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. To order one, just call and ask for FZRMS4000H. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Alternator Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair Alternator Bearing: Service and Repair Removing The Alternator Rear Bearing 1. Pull off the rear bearing. - Make sure the tips of the bearing puller jaws are thin enough to fit between the bearing and the slip rings. - Do not reuse the bearing. 2. Use a hand press to install the new bearing. Apply pressure only on the inner race to avoid damaging the bearing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Rectifier Diode / Bridge, Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair Rectifier Diode / Bridge: Service and Repair 1. Remove the four through bolts. 2. Heat the rear bearing seat with a 1,000 W hair drier for about five minutes (120 - 140 °F, 50 - 60 °C). 3. Separate the rear housing from the drive-end housing by inserting a flat tip screwdriver into the openings and prying them a part. Be careful not to damage the stator with the tip of the screwdriver. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Rectifier Diode / Bridge, Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6162 4. Separate the rear housing and drive-end housing with the stator attached to the rear housing. 5. Separate the rear housing from the stator/rectifier assembly by removing the four screws and the terminal nut. 6. Unsolder the rectifier from the stator leads. - To avoid damaging the diodes with heat, pinch the stator leads between pliers to carry heat off, and apply the soldering iron only long enough to separate the leads from the rectifier. - Use a 100 W soldering iron. 7. Install the new rectifier in the reverse order of removal. - Apply the soldering iron only long enough to ensure a good connection so the heat will not damage the diodes. - Use only a rosin core type solder or solder joints will corrode. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch > Page 6168 Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Interlock Switch Behind Left Side of Dash Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Lock: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6173 Ignition Lock: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each key position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No.7 and No.6 terminals. - If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. - If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6174 Ignition Lock: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Remove: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then wire down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. ('99 model) 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 3. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 4. Disconnect the 5P connector from the under-dash fuse/relay box and the 7P connector from the main wire harness. 5.Remove the steering column covers, then remove the mounting bolts and nuts from the steering column. 6. Lower the steering column assembly. 7. Center-punch each of the two shear bolts, then drill their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. CAUTION: Do not damage the steering lock body. 8. Remove the shear bolts and the steering lock assembly. Installation: 1. Install the new steering lock assembly without the key inserted. 2. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts. 3. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition key turns freely. 4. Tighten the shear bolts until the hex heads twist off. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. 6. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Key: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations Starter Motor: Locations Lower Right Side of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Starter Inspection Starter Motor: Testing and Inspection Starter Inspection NOTE: The air temperature must be between 59 and 100 °F (15 and 38 °C) before testing. Recommended Procedure: - Use a starter system tester. - Connect and operate the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. - Test and troubleshoot as described. Alternate Procedure: - Use the following equipment: Ammeter, 0 - 400 A - Voltmeter, 0 - 20 V (accurate within 0.1 volt) - Tachometer, 0 - 1,200 rpm - Hook up a voltmeter and ammeter as shown. NOTE: After this test, or any subsequent repair, reset the ECM/PCM to clear any codes. Check the Starter Engagement: 1. Remove the No.44 (15A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. 2. Turn the ignition switch to START (III) with the shift lever in [N] or [P] position (A/T) or with the clutch pedal depressed (M/T). The starter should crank the engine. If the starter does not crank the engine, go to step 3. - If it cranks the engine erratically or too slowly, go to "Check for Wear and Damage". 3. Check the battery, battery positive cable, ground, starter cut relay, and the wire connections for looseness and corrosion. Test again. If the starter still does not crank the engine, go to step 4. 4. Unplug the connector (BLK/WHT wire and solenoid terminal) from the starter. 5. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive (+) terminal to the solenoid terminal. The starter should crank the engine. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Starter Inspection > Page 6189 - If the starter still does not crank the engine, remove it, and diagnose its internal problem. - If the starter cranks the engine, go to step 6. 6. Check the ignition switch. 7. Check the starter cut relay and clutch interlock switch. 8. Check the A/T gear position switch. 9. Check for an open in the wire between the ignition switch and starter. Check for Wear and Damage The starter should crank the engine smoothly and steadily, If the starter engages, but cranks the engine erratically, remove it, and inspect the starter drive gear and torque converter or flywheel ring gear for damage. - Check the drive gear overrunning clutch for binding or slipping when the armature is rotated with the drive gear held. If damaged, replace the gears. Check Cranking Voltage and Current Draw Cranking voltage should be no less than 8.5 volts. Current draw should be no more than 350 amperes. If cranking voltage is too low, or current draw too high, check for: - dead or low battery. - open circuit in starter armature commutator segments. - starter armature dragging. - shorted armature winding. - excessive drag in engine. Check Cranking rpm Engine speed during cranking should be above 100 rpm. If speed is too low, check for: - loose battery or starter terminals. - excessively worn starter brushes. - open circuit in commutator segments. - dirty or damaged helical spline or drive gear. - defective drive gear overrunning clutch. Check Starter Disengagement With the shift lever in [N] or [P] position (A/T) or with the clutch pedal depressed (M/T), turn the ignition switch to START (III), and release to ON (II). The starter drive gear should disengage from the torque converter or flywheel ring gear when you release the key. If the drive gear hangs up on the torque converter or flywheel ring gear, check for: - solenoid plunger and switch malfunction. - dirty drive gear assembly or damaged overrunning clutch. Starter Solenoid Test Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Starter Inspection > Page 6190 1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the armature housing (ground). The coil is OK if there is continuity. 2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S and M terminals. The coil is OK if there is continuity. Armature Inspection and Test Armature Inspection 1. Inspect the armature for wear or damage due to contact with the permanent magnet or field winding. - If there is wear or damage, replace the armature. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Starter Inspection > Page 6191 Checking The Commutator Diameter 2. Check commutator surface and diameter. - If the surface is dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a lathe within the following specifications, or recondition with #500 or #600 sandpaper. - If commutator diameter is below the service limit, replace the armature. 3. Measure the commutator runout. - If the commutator runout is within the service limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or brass chips between the segments. - If the commutator runout is not within the service limit, replace the armature. 4. Check for mica depth. If necessary, undercut mica with a hacksaw blade to achieve proper depth. If service limit cannot be maintained, replace the Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Starter Inspection > Page 6192 armature. Checking For Continuity 5. Check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If an open circuit exists between any segments, replace the armature. 6. Place the armature on an armature tester. Hold a hacksaw blade on the armature core. - If the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace the armature. Commutator And Armature Continuity Check 7. Check with an ohmmeter that no continuity exists between the commutator and armature coil core, and between the commutator and armature shaft. If there is continuity, replace the armature. Brush Holder Test Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Starter Inspection > Page 6193 1. Check that there is no continuity between the (+) and (-) brush holders. If there is continuity, replace the brush holder assembly. 2. Insert the brush into the brush holder, and bring the brush into contact with the commutator, then attach a spring scale to the spring. Measure the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off the brush. Brush Inspection Measure the brush length. If not within the service limit, replace the brush (or brush holder assembly). NOTE: To seat new brushes after installing them in their holders, slip a strip of #500 or #600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, over the commutator and smoothly rotate the armature. The contact surface of the brushes will be sanded to the same contour as the commutator. Overrunning Clutch Inspection Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Starter Inspection > Page 6194 1. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft. Does it move freely? If not, replace it. Overrunning Clutch Inspection 2. Rotate the overrunning clutch both ways. Does it lock in one direction and rotate smoothly in reverse? If it does not lock in either direction or it locks in both directions, replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Starter Inspection > Page 6195 Starter Motor: Testing and Inspection Starter Performance Test NOTE: Before starting the following checks, disconnect the wire from terminal M, and make a connection as described below using as heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to the wire used for the car). Pull-In Coil Test Pull-in Coil Test: Connect the battery as shown. If the starter pinion pops out, it is working properly. CAUTION: Do not leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds. Hold-In Coil Test Hold-in Coil Test: Disconnect the battery from the M terminal. If the pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil is working properly. CAUTION: Do not leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds. Retracting Test: Disconnect the battery also from the body. If the pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly. CAUTION: Do not leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Starter Inspection > Page 6196 Starter No-load Test: 1. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise. Starter No-Load Test 2. Connect the starter to the battery as described in the diagram and confirm that the motor starts and keeps rotating. 3. If the electric current and motor speed meet the specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is working properly. Specifications: 80 A or less (Electric current), 2,600 rpm or more (Motor-speed) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Starter Motor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 3. Disconnect the starter cable from the B terminal on the solenoid, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire from the S terminal. 4. Remove the two bolts holding the starter, then remove the starter. Starter Cable Installation 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: When installing the starter cable, make sure that the crimped side of the ring terminal is facing out. 6. Connect the battery positive cable and negative cable to the battery. 7. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets ('99 - 00 models). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6199 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Disassembly and Reassembly Starter Brush Holder Assembly 1. Pry back each brush spring with a screwdriver, then position the brush about halfway out of its holder, and release the spring to hold it there. Installation Of Brush Housing Onto The Armature 2. Install the armature in the housing. Next, pry back each brush spring again, and push the brush down until it seats against the commutator, then release the spring against the end of the brush. 3. Install the end cover on the brush holder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6203 Starting System Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6204 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Starter cut relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications Starter Solenoid: Specifications Mounting Nut Torque Mounting Nut Torque B Terminal Mounting Nut Torque 9 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6208 Starter Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Starter Solenoid Test 1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the armature housing (ground). The coil is OK if there is continuity. 2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S and M terminals. The coil is OK if there is continuity. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Behind Front Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6215 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6216 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6217 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6218 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6219 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6220 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6221 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6222 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6223 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6224 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6225 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6226 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6227 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6228 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6229 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6230 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6231 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6236 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6237 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6238 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6241 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6242 Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6243 Fuse: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6244 Fuse: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6245 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6246 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse-to-Component Index Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6247 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6248 Fuse: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Removal: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 5. Remove the two mounting nuts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box out from under the dash. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. Installation: 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/ relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect the airbag connectors. 4. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets ('99 - 00 models). 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off Fuse Block: Customer Interest Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off 00-007 February 15, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Fuse Box Cover Falls Off PROBLEM The cover for the under-dash fuse box (to the left of the steering column) falls off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the spring clip on the cover. VEHICLES AFFECTED PARTS INFORMATION Spring Clip: P/N 90666-SD4-003, H/C 2601532 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841125 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 90666-SD4-003 H/C 2601532 Defect Code: 004 Contention Code: A02 Template ID: 00-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse box cover from the dashboard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off > Page 6257 2. Use a small screwdriver to remove the clip from the fuse box cover. Discard the clip. 3. Install the new spring clip on the cover. 4. Install the cover in the dashboard and check that it fits securely. If it does not, bend the arm on the spring clip up slightly. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off 00-007 February 15, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Fuse Box Cover Falls Off PROBLEM The cover for the under-dash fuse box (to the left of the steering column) falls off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the spring clip on the cover. VEHICLES AFFECTED PARTS INFORMATION Spring Clip: P/N 90666-SD4-003, H/C 2601532 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841125 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 90666-SD4-003 H/C 2601532 Defect Code: 004 Contention Code: A02 Template ID: 00-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse box cover from the dashboard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off > Page 6263 2. Use a small screwdriver to remove the clip from the fuse box cover. Discard the clip. 3. Install the new spring clip on the cover. 4. Install the cover in the dashboard and check that it fits securely. If it does not, bend the arm on the spring clip up slightly. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6266 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6267 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6268 Fuse Block: Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6269 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6270 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6271 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6272 Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6273 Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6276 Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6277 Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6278 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6279 Fuse Block: Application and ID Fuse-to-Component Index Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6280 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6286 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6287 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6288 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6289 Relay Box: Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6290 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6291 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6292 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6293 Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6294 Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6297 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6298 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6299 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6300 Relay Box: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Removal: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 5. Remove the two mounting nuts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box out from under the dash. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. Installation: 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/ relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect the airbag connectors. 4. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets ('99 - 00 models). 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6305 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6306 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6307 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6308 Relay Box: Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6309 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6310 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6311 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6312 Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6313 Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6316 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6317 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6318 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6319 Relay Box: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Removal: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 5. Remove the two mounting nuts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box out from under the dash. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. Installation: 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/ relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect the airbag connectors. 4. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets ('99 - 00 models). 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Behind Front Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6326 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6327 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6328 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6329 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6330 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6331 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6332 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6333 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6334 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6335 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6336 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6337 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6338 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6339 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6340 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6341 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6342 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6347 Fuse: Locations Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6348 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6349 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box Fuse: Application and ID Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6352 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6353 Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6354 Fuse: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6355 Fuse: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6356 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6357 Fuse: Application and ID Fuse-to-Component Index Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Under Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6358 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6359 Fuse: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Removal: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 5. Remove the two mounting nuts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box out from under the dash. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. Installation: 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/ relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect the airbag connectors. 4. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets ('99 - 00 models). 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off Fuse Block: Customer Interest Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off 00-007 February 15, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Fuse Box Cover Falls Off PROBLEM The cover for the under-dash fuse box (to the left of the steering column) falls off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the spring clip on the cover. VEHICLES AFFECTED PARTS INFORMATION Spring Clip: P/N 90666-SD4-003, H/C 2601532 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841125 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 90666-SD4-003 H/C 2601532 Defect Code: 004 Contention Code: A02 Template ID: 00-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse box cover from the dashboard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off > Page 6368 2. Use a small screwdriver to remove the clip from the fuse box cover. Discard the clip. 3. Install the new spring clip on the cover. 4. Install the cover in the dashboard and check that it fits securely. If it does not, bend the arm on the spring clip up slightly. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off Fuse Block: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off 00-007 February 15, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Fuse Box Cover Falls Off PROBLEM The cover for the under-dash fuse box (to the left of the steering column) falls off. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the spring clip on the cover. VEHICLES AFFECTED PARTS INFORMATION Spring Clip: P/N 90666-SD4-003, H/C 2601532 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 841125 Flat Rate Time: 0.2 hour Failed Part: P/N 90666-SD4-003 H/C 2601532 Defect Code: 004 Contention Code: A02 Template ID: 00-007A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the fuse box cover from the dashboard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse Block: > 00-007 > Feb > 00 > Fuse Box Cover - Falls Off > Page 6374 2. Use a small screwdriver to remove the clip from the fuse box cover. Discard the clip. 3. Install the new spring clip on the cover. 4. Install the cover in the dashboard and check that it fits securely. If it does not, bend the arm on the spring clip up slightly. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Fuse Block: Component Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6377 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6378 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6379 Fuse Block: Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6380 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6381 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6382 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6383 Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6384 Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6387 Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6388 Fuse Block: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6389 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6390 Fuse Block: Application and ID Fuse-to-Component Index Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6391 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6397 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6398 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6399 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6400 Relay Box: Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6401 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6402 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6403 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6404 Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6405 Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6408 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6409 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6410 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6411 Relay Box: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Removal: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 5. Remove the two mounting nuts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box out from under the dash. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. Installation: 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/ relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect the airbag connectors. 4. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets ('99 - 00 models). 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Relay Box: Component Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6416 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6417 Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6418 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6419 Relay Box: Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6420 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6421 Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6422 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6423 Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6424 Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6427 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6428 Relay Box: Application and ID Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box > Page 6429 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Page 6430 Relay Box: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Removal: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the airbag connectors. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 5. Remove the two mounting nuts, and pull the under-dash fuse/relay box out from under the dash. 6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and take out the under-dash fuse/relay box. Installation: 1. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/ relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 3. Connect the airbag connectors. 4. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets ('99 - 00 models). 6. Confirm that all systems work properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6440 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6441 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6442 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6443 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6444 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6445 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6446 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6447 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6448 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6454 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6455 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6456 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6457 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6458 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6459 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6460 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6461 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 06-068 > May > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right > Page 6462 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6463 Alignment: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6464 Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6465 The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6466 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6467 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6468 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6469 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6470 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6471 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6472 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Technical Service Bulletin # 06-068 Date: 090502 Steering/Suspension - Vehicle Pulls Left/Right 06-068 May 2, 2009 Applies To: ALL *Vehicle Pulls or Drifts, and/or Steering Wheel Is Off-Center (Supersedes 06-068, Vehicle Pulling or Drifting, dated October 4, 2007, to revise the information marked by asterisks) (Replaces 90-011, Steering Wheel Off-Center Adjustment at PDI)* *REVISION SUMMARY The title description was revised.* SYMPTOM While driving on a straight road, the vehicle pulls or drifts to the right or left. BACKGROUND New tools were developed to help you diagnose and correct a pulling and/or steering wheel off-center issue. There is a diagnosis worksheet included to take on your test-drive and record your findings. These values are used to build the 15-digit DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that is required for your warranty claim. The last step in each repair procedure helps you create the correct code. In the rare case that you have to repair a vehicle that pulls and has the steering wheel off-center, use REPAIR PROCEDURE B to file your warranty claim. For more information, refer to Training Module SSC 44 - Steering Drift or Pull Interactive Service Bulletin. PROBABLE CAUSES Several conditions can cause the vehicle to pull or drift: ^ Wheel alignment ^ Tires ^ Off-center steering wheel (no pulling or drifting, but a customer may believe this is the case) CORRECTIVE ACTION Diagnose the problem using the special tools and the worksheet on page 4 that guides you to one of four repair procedures. TOOL INFORMATION Centering Tape (enough to diagnose 240 vehicles): T/N O7AAJ-001A300 Steering Drift Set Level: T/N 07AAJ-00100 Steering Drift Set: T/N O7MJ-001A140 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6473 Replacement Weight for Steering Drift Set: T/N 07AAJ-001A400 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: P/N 53560-SDA-AO1 H/C 7139652 Defect Code: 07406 Symptom Code: 03602 Skill Level: Repair Technician Diagnostic Trouble Code: To create the 15-digit DTC, see the applicable repair procedure. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. TOOL DESCRIPTIONS The holding force gauge measures the amount of pull on the vehicle. It is a bracket that counts as one weight, plus five removable weights. During the test-drive, attach the bracket and the weights to the steering wheel on the side opposite the pulling direction. For example, if the vehicle pulls Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6474 to the right, attach the bracket and weights to the left side of the steering wheel. Start with the maximum amount of weight on the steering wheel, and remove the weights until the vehicle drives in a straight line. When recording the pull on the worksheet, write down the direction of the pull (lefi or right) and the number of weights required to balance the pull (one through six). For example, if you have the bracket and two weights on the steering wheel, then record this as three weights. NOTE: The bracket counts as one weight. The road crown gauge measures the amount of road crown. Almost all roads have a crown to help drain water during rainstorms. Use the suction cup to attach the road crown gauge bracket to the vehicle in a vertical position. If necessary, bend the bracket until the gauge is vertical. Once you attach and align the road crown gauge, calibrate the gauge to zero. There are two ways to calibrate the gauge: ^ Park the vehicle on a level surface, such as an alignment rack, and calibrate the gauge by moving the gauge until the ball is on the zero mark. ^ If you do not have a perfectly flat surface, park the vehicle on a reasonably flat surface and note the gauge reading. Turn the vehicle 1800 and, with the tires in the same spot, note the new gauge reading. Then move the gauge half of the difference. For example, if your first reading is +3 and, after moving the vehicle, the gauge reads -1, then the difference is 4 degrees. Position the gauge to read +1. NOTE: You must calibrate the gauge with the same weight in the vehicle that you will use for the test-drive. If you plan to have an assistant help you during the test-drive, calibrate the gauge while both of you are sitting in the vehicle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6475 The steering wheel offset gauge is a sticker that attaches to the steering wheel and the steering column cover. Place the sticker on the steering wheel when the steering wheel is straight. When you test-drive the vehicle, you can read how many millimeters the steering wheel is off-center. NOTE: If the vehicle is pulling, repairing the pull may correct the steering wheel offset. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6476 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET REPAIR PROCEDURE A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6477 NOTE: Do this repair procedure if, after doing step 10 of the test-drive, the vehicle pulled in the opposite direction after you swapped the front tires. 1. Swap wheels 2 and 4 on the passenger's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 2, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, put wheels 2 and 4 back to their original positions, and go to step 2. 2. Swap wheels 1 and 3 on the driver's side of the vehicle, and test-drive again. ^ If the pull goes away, replace the tire on wheel 1, then go to step 3. ^ If the pull does not go away, use a known-good tire in position 1 and continue diagnosis. 3. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. REPAIR PROCEDURE B Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6478 1. Place the vehicle on a commercially available, computerized, four-wheel alignment rack, and record the following measurements. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. 2. If any measurement is out of specification, inspect the front suspension for any damage. Repair any damaged parts before continuing your diagnosis. 3. Determine how the front wheel camber is affecting the pull. Pick the combination of left- and right-front camber that best matches the vehicle you are repairing, then note the camber thrust direction for that combination: NOTE: ^ If the camber of both front wheels is negative, but one wheel is grossly more negative than the other, the camber thrust direction will be opposite the wheel with more negative camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more negative, the camber thrust direction is right). ^ If the camber of both front wheels is positive, but one wheel is grossly more positive than the other, the camber thrust direction will be the same as the wheel with more positive camber (for example, if the left-front wheel is more positive, the camber thrust direction is left). 4. Determine how the camber needs to be adjusted. 5. Adjust the camber as needed. Front Camber Adjustment, Double Wishbone Suspension Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6479 ^ Loosen the front subframe bolts. See the applicable service manual for more information. NOTE: The front wheels are being viewed from the rear of the vehicle. ^ Depending which way you need to shift the subframe, insert a pry bar between the subframe and body at both the front and rear positions of the subframe. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the vehicle. You could bend and damage the frame and/or body if you apply too much pressure. ^ Press on both pry bars to shift the subframe. It will move only a few millimeters. This should adjust the camber about 0.2-0.5°. ^ While holding the subframe in place, have an assistant torque the subframe bolts to their proper torque. Front Camber Adjustment, Strut Suspension ^ Raise the vehicle, and remove the front tires. ^ Loosen the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts. ^ Adjust the camber by moving the bottom of the damper within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play. NOTE: Some vehicles have special pinch bolts that allow more adjustment. For more information, refer to the parts catalog. ^ Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque. ^ Reinstall the front wheels and lower the vehicle. Bounce the front of the vehicle several times to stabilize the suspension. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6480 6. Test-drive the vehicle to make sure it no longer pulls. If the steering wheel is now off-center by more than 2 mm, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE C. 7. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. NOTE: Enter each reading in decimal degrees. Example 30' = 0.50. REPAIR PROCEDURE C 1. Make sure the steering wheel is centered. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right until it stops. ^ Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and count the number of revolutions until it stops. ^ Divide the number of revolutions in half, and turn the steering wheel until it is centered. For example, if it takes four revolutions of the steering wheel to go from lock to lock, then two turns is centered. ^ If the steering wheel is off-center by a large amount (20 mm or more), it may not be centered on the steering column shaft. Reinstall the steering wheel before going to step 2. 2. Place the vehicle on a lift, turn the steering wheel until it is centered, and then raise the vehicle. 3. Adjust the tie-rods. Use your measurements from question 13 of the test-drive to make your adjustment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > Page 6481 ^ If the wheels are pointed to the right, shorten the driver's side tie-rod, and lengthen the passenger's side. ^ If the wheels are pointed to the left, shorten the passenger's side tie-rod, and lengthen the driver's side. ^ Each 360° turn of the tie-rod equals about 8 mm of steering wheel adjustment. For example, a steering wheel is off-center by 4 mm with the front wheels pointed right (when the steering wheel is centered). To correct the off-center, shorten the driver's side tie-rod by a half-turn, and lengthen the passenger's side tie-rod by a half-turn. 4. Use your diagnosis worksheet to fill in the following table and build your 15-digit DTC. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6482 Alignment: Specifications Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6483 Alignment: Service Precautions CAUTION: When fasteners are removed, always reinstall them at the same location from which they were removed. If a fastener needs to be replaced, use the correct part number fastener for that application. If the correct part number fastener is not available, a fastener of equal size and strength (or stronger) may be used. Fasteners that are not reused, and those requiring thread locking compound will be called out. The correct torque value must be used when installing fasteners that require it. If the above conditions are not followed, parts or system damage could result. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > General Description Alignment: Description and Operation General Description GENERAL DESCRIPTION "Front End Alignment" refers to the angular relationship between the front wheels, the front suspension attaching parts and the ground. Proper front end alignment must be maintained in order to insure efficient steering, good directional stability and to prevent abnormal tire wear. The most important factors of front end alignment are wheel toe-in, wheel camber and axle caster. CAMBER: Camber is the vertical tilting inward or outward of the front wheels. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheels tilt inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt measured in degrees from the vertical is called the camber angle (1). If camber is extreme or unequal between the wheels, improper steering and excessive tire wear will result. Negative camber causes wear on the inside of the tire, while positive camber causes wear to the outside. CASTER: This illustration shows view from the side of the vehicle. Caster (1) is the vertical tilting of the wheel axis either forward or backward (when viewed from the side of the vehicle). A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). On the short and long arm type suspension you cannot see a caster angle without a special instrument, but if you look straight down from the top of the upper control arm to the ground, the ball joints do not line up (fore and aft) when a caster angle other than 0 degree is present. With a positive angle, the lower ball joint would be slightly ahead (toward the front of the vehicle) of the upper ball joint center line. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > General Description > Page 6486 TOE-IN: This illustration shows view from the top of the vehicle. Toe-in is the measured amount the front wheels are turn in. The actual amount of toe-in is normally a fraction of a degree. Toe-in is measured from the center of the tire treads or from the inside of the tires. The purpose of toe-in is to insure parallel rolling of the front wheels and to offset any small deflections of the wheel support system which occurs when the vehicle is rolling forward. Incorrect toe-in results in excessive toe-in and unstable steering. Toe-in is the last alignment to be set in the front end alignment procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > General Description > Page 6487 Alignment: Description and Operation Camber Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the front wheels from the vertical. When the wheels tilt outward at the top, the camber is positive (+). When the wheels tilt inward at the top, the camber is negative (-). The amount of tilt measured in degrees from the vertical is called the camber angle. If camber is extreme or unequal between the wheels, improper steering and excessive tire wear will result. Negative camber causes wear on the inside of the tire, while positive camber causes wear to the outside. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > General Description > Page 6488 Alignment: Description and Operation Caster Caster is the tilting of the wheel axis either forward or backward from the vertical (when viewed from the side of the vehicle). A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). On the short and long arm type suspension you cannot see a caster angle without a special instrument, but if you look straight down from the top of the upper control arm to the ground, the ball joints do not line up (fore and aft) when a caster angle other than 0 degree is present. With a positive angle, the lower ball joint would be slightly ahead (toward the front of the vehicle) of the upper ball joint center line. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > General Description > Page 6489 Alignment: Description and Operation Toe-In Toe-in is the turning of the front wheels. The actual amount of toe-in is normally a fraction of a degree. Toe-in is measured from the center of the tire treads or from the inside of the tires. The purpose of toe-in is to insure parallel rolling of the front wheels and to offset any small deflections of the wheel support system which occurs when the vehicle is rolling forward. Incorrect toe-in results in excessive toe-in and unstable steering. Toe-in is the last alignment to be set in the front end alignment procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 6490 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Preliminary Checks Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Checks INSPECTION Before making any adjustments affecting caster, camber or toe-in, the following front end inspection should be made. 1. Inspect the tires for proper inflation pressure. 2. Inspect the front wheel bearings for proper adjustment. 3. inspect the ball joints and tie rod ends. If excessive looseness is noted, correct before adjusting. 4. Inspect the wheel and tires for run-out. 5. Inspect the trim height. If not within specifications, the correction must be made before adjusting caster. 6. Inspect the steering unit for looseness at the frame. 7. Inspect shock absorbers for leaks or any noticeable noise. 8. Inspect the control arms or stabilizer bar attachment for looseness. 9. Inspect the front end alignment using alignment equipment. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 10. Alignment must be performed on a level surface. - Check that the suspension is not modified. - Check the tire size and tire pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Preliminary Checks > Page 6493 Alignment: Service and Repair Alignment Preliminary Checks For proper inspection/adjustment of the wheel alignment check and adjust the following before checking the alignment. Check that the suspension is not modified. - Check the tire size and tire pressure. - Check the runout of the wheels and tires. - Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with your hands and move it up and down and right and left to check for wobbling.) NOTE: Use commercially-available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. Caster 1. Check the caster angle. Caster angle: (1°40' ± 1°) +0.67° to +2.67°. 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Camber 1. Check the camber angle. Camber angle: - Front: (0°00' ± 1) -1° to +1°. - Rear: (-1° ± 1°) -2° to 0°. 2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Front Toe 1. Check the tire pressure. 2. Center steering wheel spokes. 3. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead. Front toe: (IN 1 ± 2 mm /IN 0.04 ± 0.08 inch) -0.12 to +0.04 inch a. If adjustment is required, go on to step 4. b. If no adjustment is required, remove alignment equipment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Preliminary Checks > Page 6494 4. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts, and turn both tie-rods in the same direction until the front wheels are in straight ahead position. 5. Turn both tie-rods equally until the toe reading on the turning radius gauge is correct. 6. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. NOTE: Reposition the tie-rod boot if it is twisted or displaced. Rear Toe 1. Release parking brake. NOTE: Measure difference in toe measurements with the wheels pointed straight ahead. - If the parking brake is engaged, you may get an incorrect reading. Rear toe-in: (2 minus 1 or plus 2 mm /0.08 minus 0.04 or plus 0.08 inch) -0.12 to 0 inch. - If adjustment is required, go to step 2. - If no adjustment is required, remove alignment equipment. 2. Before adjustment, note the locations of adjusting bolts on the right and left compensator arms. 3. Loosen the adjusting bolts, and slide the compensator arm in or out, as shown, to adjust the toe. 4. Tighten the adjusting bolts. Example: After the rear toe inspection, the wheel is 2 mm (0.08 inch) out of the specification. a. Move the arm so the adjusting bolt moves 2 mm (0.08 inch) inward from the position recorded before the adjustment. b. The distance the adjusting bolt is moved should be equal to the amount out-of-specification. Turning Angle Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Preliminary Checks > Page 6495 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake, and measure the turning angle of both wheels. Turning angle: Inward wheel: (39°50') 39.83°. - Outward wheel (reference): (33°10') 33.17°. 2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Lower Left Rear of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6501 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6502 Part 2 Of 2 This signals the ECM/ PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications Front Steering Knuckle: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Knuckle to Upper Arm ........................................................................................................................................... ................................ 39-47 Nm (29-35 ft. lbs.) Lower Arm .................................................................. ......................................................................................................... 49-59 Nm (36-43 ft. lbs.) Splash Guard ....................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 4.9 Nm (3.6 ft. lbs.) Caliper Mounting Bolts ......................................... ............................................................................................................................. 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6507 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6508 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Replace the self-locking nuts after removal. - The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. NOTE: - Use only genuine Honda wheel weights for aluminum wheels. Non-genuine wheel weights may corrode and damage the aluminum wheels. - On the aluminum wheels, remove the center cap from the inside of the wheel after removing the wheel. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. - Wipe off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball joint. 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6509 3. Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. 4. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut, then remove the nut. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. 6. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and hang the caliper assembly to one side. CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws. 8. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts into the disc to push it away from the wheel hub. NOTE: Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. 9. Remove the brake disc from the knuckle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6510 10. Check the front wheel hub for damage and cracks. 11. Remove the wheel sensor from the knuckle (for cars with ABS). NOTE: Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Use the special tool to separate the ball joints from the suspension or steering arm. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot. 12. Clean any dirt or grease off the ball joint. 13. Remove the cotter pin from the steering arm and remove the nut. 14. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown. This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 15. Install a 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint. 16. Install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure you do not damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the pressure bolt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6511 NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 17. Once the special tool is in place, turn the adjusting bolt as necessary to make the jaws parallel. Then hand-tighten the pressure bolt, and recheck the jaws to make sure they are still Parallel. NOTE: After making the adjustment to the adjusting bolt, be sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in this position to the allow the jaw to pivot. 18. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint shaft pops loose from the steering arm. Wear eye protection. The ball joint can break loose suddenly and scatter dirt or other debris in your eyes. 19. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint and pull the ball joint out of the steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot and replace it if damaged. 20. Remove the cotter pin from the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 21. Install a 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 22. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and lower arm. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 23. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 24. Install the 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6512 25. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and knuckle. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 26. Pull the knuckle outward and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the knuckle by tapping the driveshaft end with a plastic hammer, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one after removal. 27. Separate the wheel hub from the knuckle using the special tools and a hydraulic press. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. - Hold onto the wheel hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. - To prevent damage to the tool, make sure the threads are fully engaged before pressing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6513 28. Remove the circlip and the splash guard from the knuckle. 29. Press the wheel bearing out of the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. 30. Press the wheel bearing inner race from the wheel hub using the special tools, a bearing separator, and a press as shown. NOTE: Wash the knuckle and wheel hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6514 31. Press a new wheel bearing into the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. NOTE: Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 32. Install the circlip securely in the knuckle groove. 33. Install the splash guard and tighten the screws. 34. Install the wheel hub on the knuckle using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press as shown. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6515 35. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and pay particular attention to the following items: a. Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots when installing the knuckle. b. Torque all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. c. Torque the castle nuts to the lower torque specifications, then tighten them only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening. d. Install new cotter pins on the castle nuts after torquing. e. Avoid twisting the sensor wires when installing the wheel sensor. f. Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and the inside of the brake disc. g. Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. h. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair When a power steering pump or gear has been installed, or an oil line has been disconnected, the air that has entered the system must be bled out before the vehicle is operated. If air is allowed to remain in the power steering fluid system, noisy and unsatisfactory operation of the system may result. When bleeding the system, and any time fluid is added to the power steering system, be sure to use only automatic transmission fluid labeled "DEXRON-IIE". 1. Fill the pump fluid reservoir to the proper label and let the fluid settle for at least two minutes. 2. Start the engine and let it run for a few seconds. Do not turn the steering wheel. Then turn the engine off. 3. Add fluid if necessary. 4. Repeat the above procedure until the fluid level remains constant after running the engine. 5. Raise the front end of the vehicle so that the front wheels are off the ground. 6. Start the engine. Slowly turn the steering wheel right and left, lightly contacting the wheel stops. 7. Add power steering fluid if necessary. 8. Bring down the vehicle, set the steering wheel at the straight forward position after turning it to its full steer positions 2 or 3 times, and stop the engine. 9. Stop the engine. Check the fluid level and refill as required. 10. If the fluid is extremely foamy, allow the vehicle to stand a few minutes and repeat the above procedure. 11. Inspect: a. Belt for tightness. b. Pulley for looseness or damage. The pulley should not wobble with the engine running. c. Hoses so they are not touching any other parts of the vehicle. d. Fluid level and fill to the proper level. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid Type .............................................................................................................................................................. ......... Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid-V or S Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6523 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair FLUID REPLACEMENT NOTE: Check the reservoir at regular intervals, and add fluid as necessary. CAUTION: Always use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid-V or S. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose. 2. Connect a hose of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a suitable container. CAUTION: Take care not to spill the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid. 4. Refit the return hose on the reservoir. 5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line. 6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering from lock-to-lock several times to bleed air from the system. 7. Recheck the fluid level and add some if necessary. CAUTION: Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications Power Steering Lines Power Steering Lines Outlet Hose to Pump 8 ft.lb Cylinder Housing to Cylinder Lines 20 ft.lb Valve Body Unit to Cylinder Lines 12 ft.lb Valve Body Unit to Feed Line 27 ft.lb Valve Body Unit to Return Line 20 ft.lb Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6527 Power Steering Line/Hose: Testing and Inspection - Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference or twisting. - Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting and leakage. - Inspect for leaks at hose and line joints and connections. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6528 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair REPLACEMENT 1. Connect each hose to the corresponding pipe securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown. 2. Add the power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks. ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP 1. Position the adjustable hose clamps at the points indicated (a) in the drawing above. 2. Slide the hose over the line until it contacts the stop. CAUTION: Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary. HOSE CLAMP 1. Position the hose clamps at the points indicated (b) in the drawing above. 2. Slide the hose over the line until it contacts the stop. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Power Steering Pump: Mechanical Specifications Mounting bolts 17 ft.lb Pulley Nut 47 ft.lb Flow Control Valve Cap 36 ft.lb Flange Bolts 14 ft.lb Outlet Line 8 ft.lb Inlet Joint Flange Bolts 8 ft.lb Operating pressure at idle 213 psi Or less. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 6533 Power Steering Pump: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Mounting bolts 17 ft.lb Pulley Nut 47 ft.lb Flow Control Valve Cap 36 ft.lb Flange Bolts 14 ft.lb Outlet Line 8 ft.lb Inlet Joint Flange Bolts 8 ft.lb Operating pressure at idle 213 psi Or less. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6534 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6535 Power Steering Pump: Description and Operation CONSTRUCTION The pump is a vane-type incorporating a flow control valve (with an integrated relief valve) and is driven by a POLY-V-belt from the crank pulley. The pump features 10 vanes. Each vane performs two intake/discharge operations for every rotation of the rotor. This means that the hydraulic fluid pressure pulse becomes extremely small during discharge. OPERATION The belt-driven pulley rotates the rotor through the drive shaft. As the rotor rotates, the hydraulic pressure is applied to the vane chamber of the rotor and the vanes will rotate while being pushed onto the inner circumference of the cam ring. The inner circumference of the cam ring has an extended portion with respect to the center of the shaft, so the vanes move downward in the axial direction as the rotor rotates. As a result of this roller movement, the internal volume of the vane chamber will change, resulting in fluid intake and discharge. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6536 The flow control valve and sub-valve in the pump performs the following steps 1 through 4 to control the flow of fluid, that is to increase the discharge volume when engine speed is low, and to decrease it when the engine speed increases. The assistance thrust of the steering gearbox changes in compliance with the change in the discharge volume. 1. When the engine starts, fluid discharged from the discharge port starts to flow through oil passage A, the fixed orifice and the variable orifice to the steering gearbox. When the engine speed is extremely low, the return port is closed by the flow control valve. Fluid pressure discharged from the discharge port is applied to the top of the sub-valve, and the fluid pressure that passed through oil passage A is applied to the bottom of the sub-valve. When this happens, the pressure difference between the ends of oil passage A, which is caused by the resistance oil passage A when the fluid flows through the passage, is applied to the sub-valve. However, the pressure difference applied to the sub-valve, that is the force that pushes the sub-valve down, is too small to overcome the spring force, and the variable orifice is fully open when the engine speed is extremely low. 2. Because the fluid volume flowing through the fixed orifice and variable orifice increases, a pressure difference is created between the ends of these orifices, and it increases in proportion to the engine speed. As the fluid pressure that passed the fixed orifice and variable orifice is directed to the bottom of the flow control valve, a pressure difference is created between the top and bottom of the valve, which pushes down the flow control valve and opens the return port. As a result, part of the fluid discharged from the discharge port returns to the pump suction port, keeping the discharge volume constant. In this condition, the sub-valve does not move, and the variable orifice stays fully open. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6537 3. The fluid volume that flows thorough oil passage A and the pressure difference applied to the sub-valve increase in proportion to the engine speed. The sub-valve lowers overcoming the spring force, and it starts to close the variable orifice to regulate the discharge volume. When this happens, the fluid volume flowing to the steering gearbox decreases as the engine speed increases. At the same time, the flow control valve continues to control the fluid volume to the return port. 4. As the engine speed increases further, the pressure difference at the sub-valve increases further as well. The sub-valve then closes the variable orifice completely, regulating the discharge volume further. When this happens, the fluid volume discharged from the pump to the steering gearbox is regulated and maintained at a given level until the engine speed reaches the high speed range. The flow control valve functions continues to control the fluid volume to the return port. PRESSURE RELIEF Pressure at the discharge side of the fixed orifice is directed to the bottom of the flow control valve. When the pressure builds up, the relief valve in the flow control valve opens to release the pressure at the bottom of the valve. This allows the flow control valve to be pushed back by the pressure Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6538 difference, and the fluid volume to the pump return port increases. As explained above, the system keeps the pump discharge pressure (relief pressure) from exceeding the given level by controlling the volume of the fluid to the pump return port. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6539 Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Pump Pressure Check Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox. NOTE: First check the power steering fluid level and pump belt tension. CAUTION: Disconnect the high pressure hose with care so as not to spill the power steering fluid on the frame and other parts. 1. Disconnect the outlet line from the pump outlet fitting, then install the P/S joint adaptor (pump) on the pump outlet. 2. Connect the P/S joint adaptor (hose) to the power steering pressure gauge, then connect the outlet hose to the adaptor. 3. Install the power steering pressure gauge to the P/S joint adaptor (pump) as shown. 4. Open the shut off valve fully. 5. Open the pressure control valve fully. 6. Start the engine and let it idle. 7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm the fluid to operating temperature. 8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while idling. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read less than 1500 kPa (15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi). If it reads high, check the outlet line or valve body unit (see General Troubleshooting 17-22). 9. Close the pressure control valve, then close the shut-off valve gradually until the pressure gauge needle is stable. Read the pressure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6540 10. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully. CAUTION: Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more then 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by over-heating. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at least 6,400 - 7,400 kPa (65 - 75 kgf/cm2, 920 - 1,070 psi). A low reading means pump output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation Removal/Installation NOTE: Before disconnecting the hoses from the pump, place a suitable container under the vehicle. 1. Remove the belt by loosening the pump mounting bolts and adjusting bolt ('99-'00 models: B16A2 Engine Type only). 2. Cover the A/C compressor with several shop towels to protect it from spilled power steering fluid. 3. Disconnect the inlet hose and the outlet line from the pump, and plug them. NOTE: Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. 4. Remove the pump mounting bolts and adjusting bolt ('99-'00 models: B16A2 Engine Type only), then remove the pump. NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel with the pump removed. - Wrap the opening of the pump with a piece of tape to prevent foreign material from entering the pump. 5. Connect the inlet hose and the outlet line. Tighten the pump fittings securely. 6. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with mounting bolts and adjusting bolt ('99-'00 models: B16A2 Engine Type only). 7. Install the pump belt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6543 CAUTION: Make sure that the power steering belt is properly positioned on the pulleys. - Do not get power steering fluid or grease in the power steering belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or grease before installation. 8. Adjust the pump belt. 9. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6544 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Overhaul Disassembly CAUTION: The power steering components are made of aluminum. Avoid damaging the components during assembly. NOTE: Clean the disassembled parts with a solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Do not dip the rubber parts in a solvent. - Always replace the O-rings and rubber seals with new ones before assembly. - Apply recommended power steering fluid to the parts indicated in the assembly procedures. - Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the power steering system. - Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with asterisk (*) are worn or damaged. 1. Drain the fluid from the pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6545 2. Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft jaws, hold the pulley with the special tool, and remove the pulley nut and pulley. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise and extension bar. 3. Loosen the flow control valve cap with a hex wrench and remove it. 4. Remove the O-ring, flow control valve and spring. 5. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring. 6. Remove the pump cover and pump cover seal. 7. Remove the outer side plate, pump cam ring, pump rotor, pump vanes, side plate and O-rings. 8. Remove the snap ring, then remove the sub-valve from the pump housing. 9. Remove the circlip, then remove the pump drive shaft by tapping the shaft end with the plastic hammer. 10. Remove the pump seal spacer and pump seal. Inspection Flow Control Valve: 1. Check the flow control valve for wear, burrs, and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the valve. 2. Inspect the bore the flow control valve for scratches or wear. 3. Slip the valve back in the pump, and check that it moves in and out smoothly. If OK, go on step 4; if not, replace the pump as an assembly. The flow control valve is not available separately. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6546 4. Attach a hose to the end of the valve as shown. 5. Submerge the valve in a container of power steering fluid or solvent, and blow in the hose. If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14.2 psi), repair it as follows. 6. Hold the bottom end of the valve with an open end wrench. 7. Unscrew the seat in the top end of the valve, and remove any shims, the relief check ball, relief valve and relief valve spring. 8. Clean all the parts in solvent, dry them off, then reassemble and retest the valve. If the flow control valve tests OK, reinstall it in the pump. If the flow control valve still leaks air, replace the pump as an assembly. The flow control valve is not available separately. NOTE: If necessary, relief pressure is adjusted at the factory by adding shims under the check ball seat. If you found shims in your valve, be sure you reinstall as many as you took out. Ball Bearing: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6547 1. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race slowly. If any play or roughness is felt, replace the ball bearing. 2. Remove and discard the ball bearing using a press as shown. 3. Install the new ball bearing using a press as shown. Ball Bearing Replacement: Reassembly 1. Align the pin of the sub-valve with the oil passage in pump housing, and push down the sub-valve. Install the snap ring properly. 2. Install the new pump seal in the pump housing by hand, then install the pump seal spacer. NOTE: Insert the pump seal with its grooved side facing in. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6548 3. Position the pump drive shaft in the pump housing, then drive it in using a special tool as shown. 4. Install the 40 mm circlip with its radiused side facing out. 5. Coat the pump cover seal and the cover bushing with the power steering fluid, then install the pump cover seal into the groove in the pump cover. 6. Install the outer side plate over the two rollers. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6549 7. Set the pump cam ring over the two rollers with the " - " mark on the cam ring upward. 8. Assemble pump rotor to the pump cover with the " - " marks on the rotor facing down. 9. Set the 10 vanes in the grooves in the rotor. NOTE: Be sure that the round ends of the vanes are in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring. 10. Coat the O-ring with power steering fluid, and install it into the grooves in the side plate. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6550 11. Install the side plate on the cam ring by aligning the roller set holes in the side plate with the rollers. 12. Coat the O-ring with power steering fluid, and position it into the pump housing. 13. Install the pump cover assembly in the pump housing. 14. Coat the flow control valve with power steering fluid. 15. Install the flow control valve and spring on the pump housing. 16. Coat the O-ring with power steering fluid, and install it on the flow control valve cap. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6551 17. Install the flow control valve cap on the pump housing and tighten it. 18. Coat the O-ring with power steering fluid, and install it into the grooves in the inlet joint. 19. Install the inlet joint on the pump housing. 20. Install the pulley as shown below, then loosely install the pulley nut. Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft jaws. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6552 21. Hold the pulley with the special tool, and tighten the pulley nut. 22. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the pulley by hand. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Pressure Control Control Valve Body Unit: Description and Operation Pressure Control LOW ASSIST AT HIGHER SPEEDS When steering resistance is low, such as when driving at high speeds, or when driving straight ahead, the input shaft is near or in the neutral position, so there is little or no flow to any of the power cylinder orifices. Most of the feed pressure from the pump is bypassed to the reservoir. Because of this, the pressure stays the same in both sides of the power cylinder, resulting in low or no assist. HIGH ASSIST AT LOWER SPEEDS When steering resistance is high, such as when driving at low speeds, or when turning the wheel with the vehicle stopped, the difference in angle created between the input shaft and the valve opens the fluid passage on one side, and closes the fluid passage on the other side, at each pair of orifices. The fluid pressure increases in the side of the power cylinder fed by the larger fluid passage. This increased pressure pushes on the rack piston, allowing the steering wheel to be turned with light effort. On the other side of the power cylinder, the return passage opens allowing the steering fluid to return through the input shaft to the reservoir. The fluid passages to the power cylinder automatically change in size, increasing as the steering resistance increases. In other words, the passages become larger and power assist increases when the steering effort would normally be high, (for example, when parking or making low speed turns), and the passages become smaller and power assist decreases when the steering effort would normally be low, (for example, when driving at high speeds or straight ahead). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Description and Operation > Pressure Control > Page 6557 Control Valve Body Unit: Description and Operation Valve Body Inside the valve body unit is the valve, which is coaxial with the pinion shaft, controls the steering fluid pressure. The valve housing is connected with the fluid line from the pump, the return line to the reservoir, and the two cylinder lines from the respective power cylinder. The pinion shaft is double structured with the input shaft connected to the pinion gear, both of which are interconnected with the torsion bar. The pin inserted in the valve and the pinion shaft groove engage; this allows the pinion shaft to rotate together with the valve. Because of this construction, the difference in angle in the circumferential direction between the input shaft and the valve becomes larger according to the torsional strength of the pinion or steering resistance. However, maximum torsion between the shafts is regulated by the engaged splines of the shafts at the pin engagement section to hold the torsion bar within the set value. This allows the steering system to function as an ordinary rack-and-pinion type steering if the steering fluid is not pressurized because of a faulty pump. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Control Valve Body Unit: Service and Repair Removal TOOL REQUIRED - 07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm NOTE: Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off the valve body unit its lines, and the end if the gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air. 1. Drain the power steering fluid. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it on safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the front wheels. 4. Remove the driver's airbag assembly, and steering wheel. 5. Remove the steering joint cover. 6. Remove the steering joint lower bolt, and disconnect the steering joint by moving the joint toward the column. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6560 7. Remove the cotter pin from the castle nut and remove the nut. 8. Install the 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the 10 mm hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the special tool. NOTE: Remove the ball joint using the special tool. 9. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the special tool. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the ball joint boot. 10. Remove the left tie-rod end, then slide the rack all the way to the right. 11. Separate the exhaust pipe A or TWC. 12. Disconnect the shift linkage. 13. Loosen the 14 mm flare nut and disconnect the feed line. 14. Loosen the adjustable hose clamp and disconnect the return hose. 15. Loosen the 16 mm flare nut and remove the return hose joint from the valve body unit. CAUTION: After disconnecting the hose and line, plug or seal the hose and line with a piece of tape or equivalent to prevent foreign Materials from entering the valve body unit. NOTE: Do not loosen the cylinder line A and B between the valve body unit and cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6561 16. Remove the stiffener plate. NOTE: Some stiffener plate attaching bolts are also used as gearbox mounting bolts. The gearbox will tilt to side when these bolts are removed. 17. Remove the mounting brackets. 18. Pull the steering gearbox all the way down to clear the pinion shaft from the bulkhead, then remove the pinion shaft grommet. 19. Move the steering gearbox to right so the left rack end clears the rear beam, then tilt the left side down to remove it from the vehicle. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the feed line and cylinder lines when removing the gearbox. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6562 20. Remove air tube and clips. 21. Remove cylinder lines A and B from the gearbox. 22. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly moving the steering rack back and forth. 23. Remove the two flange bolts, then remove the valve body unit from the gearbox. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6563 Control Valve Body Unit: Service and Repair Disassembly TOOL REQUIRED - 07NAD-SR3020A Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment - 07GAF-PH70100 Pilot Collar NOTE: - Clean the disassembled parts with a solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Do not dip the rubber parts in a solvent. - Always replace the Wrings and rubber seals with new ones before assembly. 1. Before removing the valve housing, apply vinyl tape to splines of the pinion shaft. 2. Separate the valve housing from the pinion shaft/valve using a press. 3. Check the inner wall of the valve housing where the seal ring slides with your finger. If there is a step in the wall, the valve housing is worn. Replace the valve housing. NOTE: There may be the sliding marks from the seal ring on the wall of the valve housing. Replace the valve housing only if the wall is stepped. - When the valve housing is replaced, install new shim(s) on the bearing surface of the housing to adjust the thickness. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6564 4. Check for wear, burrs and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the sleeve. NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve must be replaced, replace both parts as a set. 5. Remove the circlip and pinion shaft sleeve from the pinion shaft. 6. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and remove the four seal rings from the sleeve. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the edges of the sleeve grooves and outer surface when removing the seal rings. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6565 7. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve seal ring and O-ring at the groove the pinion shaft. Remove the valve seal ring and O-ring. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the edges of the pinion shaft groove and outer surface when removing the valve seal ring and O-ring. 8. Remove the valve oil seal and backup ring from the pinion shaft. NOTE: Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race slowly. If there is any excessive play, replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an assembly. - The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do not intermix old and new pinion shafts and sleeves. 9. Press the valve oil seal and roller bearing out of the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tool shown below. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6566 Control Valve Body Unit: Service and Repair Assembly TOOL REQUIRED - 07NAG-SR30900 Piston Seal Ring - 07974-SA50200 Sleeve Seal Ring Sizing Tool - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010100 Attachment, 32 x 35 mm - 07GAG-SD40100 Piston Seal Ring Guide - 07GAG-SD40200 Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool NOTE: - Clean the disassembled parts with a solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Do not dip the rubber parts in a solvent. - Always replace the Wrings and rubber seals with new ones before assembly. - Apply the recommended power steering fluid to the parts indicated in the assembly procedures. - Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the power steering system. - Use the appropriate special tools where necessary. 1. Apply vinyl tape to the stepped portion of the pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape with the power steering fluid. 2. Install the backup ring with its tapered side as shown below. 3. Coat the inside surface of the new valve oil seal with power steering fluid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6567 4. Slide the valve oil seal over the pinion shaft, being careful not to damage the sealing lip. CAUTION: Install the valve oil seal with its grooved side facing opposite the hearing. 5. Apply vinyl tape to the splines and stepped portion of the shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape with the power steering fluid. 6. Fit the new O-ring in the groove of the pinion shaft. Then slide the new valve seal ring over the shaft and the groove in on the pinion shaft. 7. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft. 8. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the valve seal ring that was installed on the pinion shaft. 9. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the special tool. Set the larger diameter end of the special tool over the valve seal ring. 10. Move the special tool up and down several times to make the valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft. 11. Remove the special tool. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6568 12. Turn the special tool over, and set the smaller diameter end of the special tool over the valve seal ring. Move the special tool up and down several times to make the valve seal ring fit snugly in the pinion shaft. 13. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the special tool. Set the new seal rings over the special tool from the smaller diameter end of the tool, and expand the seal rings. Do two rings at a time from each end of the sleeve. NOTE: Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage them. After installation, be sure to contract the seal rings using the special tool (sizing tool). - There are two types of sleeve seal rings: black and brown. Do not mix the different types of sleeve seal rings as they are not compatible. 14. Set the special tool in the grooves in the sleeve, and set each ring in each groove securely. NOTE: After installation, compress the seal rings with your fingers temporarily. 15. Apply power steering fluid to the seal rings on the sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the special tool. 16. Insert the sleeve into the special tool slowly. 17. Move the sleeve each direction several times to make the seal rings snugly fit in the sleeve. NOTE: Be sure that the seal rings are not turned up. 18. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the pinion shaft. Assemble the sleeve over the pinion shaft by aligning the locating pin on the inside of the sleeve with the cutout in the shaft. Then install the new circlip securely in the pinion shaft groove. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the valve seal ring when inserting the sleeve. - Install the circlip with its radiused side toward the sleeve. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6569 19. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the valve oil seal, then install the seal in the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tools as shown. CAUTION: Install the valve oil seal with its grooved side facing the tool. 20. Press the new bearing into the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tool as shown. NOTE: Place the roller bearing on the valve housing with the stamped letter facing up towards the valve side. 21. Apply vinyl tape to the pinion shaft, then coat the vinyl tape with power steering fluid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6570 22. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the valve seal rings. 23. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft. 24. Press the pinion shaft/sleeve using a hydraulic press as shown. NOTE: Check that the pinion shaft/sleeve turns smoothly by turning the pinion shaft. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6571 Control Valve Body Unit: Service and Repair Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the feed line and cylinder lines when installing the gearbox. 1. Select the 32 mm shim(s). NOTE: Only reinstall the original 32 mm shim(s) when the steering gearbox is reassembled without replacing the pinion shaft, valve housing, and gearbox housing with new ones. If the pinion shaft, valve housing, and gearbox housing are replaced, select the new shim(s) as follows. Shim Selection: a. Set the four 32 mm shims on the bearing surface of the gearbox housing. Total thickness of the four shims should equal no more than 0.70 mm. Shim set: four 32 mm shims (Thickness: 0.10 mm, 0.15 mm, 0.20 mm, 0.25 mm respectively) CAUTION: The four 32 mm shims do not have thickness identification marks. Measure the thickness of each shim using a micrometer, and mark the shim for identification. b. Install the valve body unit on the gearbox, and tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque. c. Measure the clearance between the gearbox and valve body unit using a feeler gauge as shown. NOTE: Measure the clearance at the point midway between the two mounting bolts. d. Determine the required thickness-of the 32 mm shims by subtracting the clearance obtained in the step "c" from the total thickness of the four shims. (Total thickness of the 4 shims) - (Clearance) = Required thickness of the shims NOTE: Select the shims so that the total thickness is close to, but less than, the required thickness. Example: Measurement is 0.28 mm (0.011 inch): 0.70 - 0.28 = 0.42 mm (0.028 - 0.011 = 0.017 inch). The selected shims should be 0.25 mm (0.010 inch) and 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) in thickness. If the required shim thickness is 0.10 mm or less, no shims are necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6572 2. Set the selected 32 mm shims on the bearing surface of the gearbox housing. 3. Coat the new O-ring with grease, and carefully fit it on the valve housing. 4. Apply grease to the needle bearing in the gearbox housing. 5. Install the valve body unit on the gearbox housing by engaging the gears. NOTE: Note the valve body unit installation position (direction of line connection). 6. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque. 7. Install the cylinder lines A and B. 8. Before installing the gearbox, slide the rack ail the way to right. 9. Install the mounting cushion on the steering gearbox. 10. Install the pinion shaft grommet, then insert the pinion shaft up through the bulkhead. NOTE: Align the notch in the pinion shaft grommet with the tab on the valve housing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6573 11. Install the mounting bracket over the mounting cushion, then install two gearbox mounting bolts. 12. Install the stiffener plate with the two gearbox mounting bolts arid stiffener plate attaching bolts. CAUTION: Be sure the air tube is not caught or pinched by stiffener plate. NOTE: Install the bolts loosely first, then tighten them securely. 13. Install the return hose joint by tightening the 16 mm flare nut. 14. Connect the return hose securely, and tighten the adjustable hose clamp from the engine compartment. 15. Connect the feed line and tighten the 14 mm flare nut. NOTE: Make sure that there is no interference between the fluid lines, the rear beam or any other parts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6574 16. Center the steering rack within its stroke. 17. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the pinion shaft (line up the bolt hole with the groove around the shaft), and tighten the lower bolt. NOTE: Connect the steering shaft and pinion with the cable reel and steering rack centered. - Be sure that the lower steering joint bolt is securely in the groove in the steering gearbox pinion. - If the steering wheel and rack are not centered, reposition the serrations at lower end of the steering joint. 18. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately two turns) until the arrow mark on the label points straight up. Reinstall the steering wheel. 19. Install the steering joint cover with the clamps and a clip. 20. Reconnect the tie-rod ends to the steering knuckles, tighten the castle nut to the specified torque, and install new cotter pins. NOTE: Before connecting the tie-rod ends, wipe off any grease contamination from the ball joint tapered section and threads. CAUTION: Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Control Valve Body Unit <--> [Power Steering Valve] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6575 21. Install the exhaust pipe A or TWC. 22. Connect the shift linkage. 23. Install the front wheels. 24. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed air from the system. 25. After installation, perform the following checks. a. Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks. b. Adjust the front toe. See: Alignment c. Check the steering wheel spoke angle. Adjust by turning the right and left tie-rods, if necessary. NOTE: Turn the right and left tie-rods equally. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations Lower Left Rear of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6580 Power Steering Pressure Switch: Testing and Inspection Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6581 Part 2 Of 2 This signals the ECM/ PCM when the power steering load is high. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Locations With Front Passenger's Airbag Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations > Page 6586 Without Front Passenger's Airbag (Part Of Canada Model) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble the airbag assembly. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been operated (deployed), it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag assembly during service, please observe the following precautions: Store the removed airbag assembly with the pad surface up. The driver's (and front passenger's) airbag connector(s) has (have) a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury Store the removed airbag assembly on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F / 100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal procedures for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 6589 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to- metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 6590 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact The driver's airbag (and front passenger's) airbag has (have) a spring-loaded lock connector with a built-in short contact. When this connector is disconnected, the power terminal and the ground terminal in the airbag connector are automatically shorted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact > Page 6593 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation System Description The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charge(s). If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: 1. The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflator(s) must ignite and deploy the airbag(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 6594 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair To prevent accidental airbag deployment, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait three minutes before disconnecting any SRS connectors. - Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C,D). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s). Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Side: Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector and cable reel 2P connector. Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Side: Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector and SRS main harness 2P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6599 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6600 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6601 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6602 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6603 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6604 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6605 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6606 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6607 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6608 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6609 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6610 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6611 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6612 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6613 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6614 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6615 Seat Belt & Ignition Key Reminders Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6616 Key Reminder Switch: Description and Operation Ignition Key Warning Battery voltage is supplied at all times to the seat belt reminder/key-on beeper circuit in the integrated control unit. When you turn on the ignition key switch the integrated control unit senses ground. If you open the driver's door, the door switch closes, causing the beeper to sound until the door is closed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Locations Steering Column Lock: Locations Right Side of Steering Column Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 6620 Steering Column Lock: Testing and Inspection Key Interlock Solenoid Test 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector from the main wire harness. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each key position according to the table. 4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power and ground connected to the No.7 and No.6 terminals. - If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock solenoid is OK. - If the key can be removed, replace the steering lock assembly (the interlock solenoid is not available separately). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 6621 Steering Column Lock: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. Remove: 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then wire down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. ('99 model) 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 3. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 4. Disconnect the 5P connector from the under-dash fuse/relay box and the 7P connector from the main wire harness. 5.Remove the steering column covers, then remove the mounting bolts and nuts from the steering column. 6. Lower the steering column assembly. 7. Center-punch each of the two shear bolts, then drill their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 in) drill bit. CAUTION: Do not damage the steering lock body. 8. Remove the shear bolts and the steering lock assembly. Installation: 1. Install the new steering lock assembly without the key inserted. 2. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts. 3. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition key turns freely. 4. Tighten the shear bolts until the hex heads twist off. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. 6. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications Steering Gear: Specifications Steering Rack Steering Rack Steering Effort 15 Nm Front wheels off ground. Tightening Torque Rack guide locknut 25 Nm Mounting brackets 39 Nm Stiffener plate attaching bolts 38 Nm Steering joint lower bolt 22 Nm Tie-rod end nut 40 to 48 Nm Valve Housing Flange Bolts 14 ft.lb Cylinder End 51 ft.lb Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6625 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6626 Steering Gear: Service Precautions WARNING: - To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of severe frontal collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized mechanic. - Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the air bags. - Do not bump the SRS unit. Otherwise, the system may fail in cause of a collision, or the ai bags may deploy when the ignition switch is ON (II). - All SRS electrical wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation. Related components are located in the steering column, front console, dashboard lower panel, and in the dashboard above the glove box. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6627 Steering Gear: Description and Operation The rack-and-pinion type steering gearbox has a valve body unit incorporated with the pinion to control the steering fluid pressure. Steering fluid from the pump is regulated by a rotary valve in the valve body unit and is sent through the cylinder line to the power cylinder, where hydraulic pressure is applied. The steering fluid in the other side of the power cylinder returns through the cylinder line and valve body unit to the reservoir. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Adjustments > Manual Steering Steering Gear: Adjustments Manual Steering NOTE: Perform the rack guide adjustment with the wheels in the straight ahead position. 1. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut with the special tool, then loosen the rack guide screw. 2. Tighten the rack guide screw until it compresses the spring and seats against the rack guide, then loosen it. 3. Retighten the rack guide screw to 4 Nm (2.9 ft. lbs.), then back it off to specified angle. Specified Return Angle: 30° max. 4. Tighten the locknut while holding the rack guide screw. 5. Check for tight or loose steering through the complete turning travel. 6. Recheck steering effort. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Steering Operation Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Adjustments > Manual Steering > Page 6630 Steering Gear: Adjustments Power-Assisted Rack Guide Adjustment NOTE: Perform rack guide adjustment with the wheels in the straight ahead position. 1. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut with the special tool. '96-'97 models: Loosen the rack guide screw. '98-'00 models: Remove the rack guide screw and remove the old sealant off of the threaded section. Apply new sealant all around the threads. Loosely install the rack guide screw. 2. Tighten the rack guide screw to 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18 ft. lbs.), then loosen it. 3. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 Nm (0.4 kgf-m, 2.9 ft. lbs.), then back it off to specified angle. Specified Return Angle: 20° max. 4. Tighten the locknut while holding the rack guide screw. 5. Check for tight or loose steering through the complete turning travel. 6. Perform following inspections: - Steering operation. - Power assist with vehicle parked. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Steering Gear: Service and Repair Power Steering Removal TOOL REQUIRED - 07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm NOTE: Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off the valve body unit its lines, and the end if the gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air. 1. Drain the power steering fluid. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it on safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the front wheels. 4. Remove the driver's airbag assembly, and steering wheel. 5. Remove the steering joint cover. 6. Remove the steering joint lower bolt, and disconnect the steering joint by moving the joint toward the column. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6633 7. Remove the cotter pin from the castle nut and remove the nut. 8. Install the 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the 10 mm hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the special tool. NOTE: Remove the ball joint using the special tool. 9. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the special tool. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the ball joint boot. 10. Remove the left tie-rod end, then slide the rack all the way to the right. 11. Separate the exhaust pipe A or TWC. 12. Disconnect the shift linkage. 13. Loosen the 14 mm flare nut and disconnect the feed line. 14. Loosen the adjustable hose clamp and disconnect the return hose. 15. Loosen the 16 mm flare nut and remove the return hose joint from the valve body unit. CAUTION: After disconnecting the hose and line, plug or seal the hose and line with a piece of tape or equivalent to prevent foreign Materials from entering the valve body unit. NOTE: Do not loosen the cylinder line A and B between the valve body unit and cylinder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6634 16. Remove the stiffener plate. NOTE: Some stiffener plate attaching bolts are also used as gearbox mounting bolts. The gearbox will tilt to side when these bolts are removed. 17. Remove the mounting brackets. 18. Pull the steering gearbox all the way down to clear the pinion shaft from the bulkhead, then remove the pinion shaft grommet. 19. Move the steering gearbox to right so the left rack end clears the rear beam, then tilt the left side down to remove it from the vehicle. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the feed line and cylinder lines when removing the gearbox. Steering Gear Disassembly TOOL REQUIRED - 07NAD-SR3020A Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment - 07GAF-PH70100 Pilot Collar NOTE: - Before disassemble the gearbox, wash it off with solvent and a brush. - Do not dip seals and O-rings in solvent. 1. Remove the steering gearbox. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6635 2. Remove the tie-rod end and locknut. 3. Remove air tube and clips. 4. Remove the boot bands and tie-rod clips. Pull the boots away from the ends of the gearbox. 5. Hold the steering rack with a wrench, and unscrew the rack end with another wrench. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. 6. Loosen the locknut, then remove the rack guide screw and O-ring. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6636 7. Remove the spring and the rack guide from the gear housing. 8. Remove cylinder lines A and B from the gearbox. 9. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly moving the steering rack back and forth. 10. Remove the two flange bolts, then remove the valve body unit from the gearbox. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6637 11. Drill a 3 mm (0.12 inch) diameter hole approximately 2.5 - 3.0 mm (0.10 - 0.12 inch) in depth in the staked point on the cylinder. CAUTION: Do not allow metal shavings to enter the cylinder housing. - After removing the cylinder end, remove any burrs at the staked point. 12. Hold the steering gearbox using a C-clamp as shown. 13. Loosen and remove the cylinder end. 14. Assemble a 12 x 1.25 mm flange nut onto a 12 x 175 mm grade 10 flange bolt as shown. NOTE: Wrap the flange portion of the bolt with vinyl tape to protect the cylinder. 15. Install the flange bolt into the end of the steering rack until it bottoms in the hole, then back the flange bolt out 1/4 turn. Hold the flange bolt, and tighten the flange nut against the rack by hand. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6638 16. Install the bearing separator on the gearbox housing as shown. 17. Set the gearbox in a press so the gear housing point upward, then press the cylinder end seal and steering rack out of the gearbox. NOTE: Hold the steering rack to keep it from falling when pressed clear. CAUTION: Be careful not damage to inner surface of the cylinder housing with the flange bolt. - Do not place your fingers under the steering rack. 18. Remove the 12 mm bolt and nut from the steering rack. 19. Remove the cylinder end seal from the steering rack. 20. Insert a 24" long, 3/8" drive extension and the special tool into the cylinder from the gearbox side. NOTE: Make sure that the special tool is securely positioned on the backup ring edges. CAUTION: Be careful not damage to inner surface of the cylinder housing with the special tool. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6639 21. Set the gearbox in a press, then press out the cylinder end seal and backup ring from the gearbox. CAUTION: Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it if necessary, when removing the cylinder end seal. - Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do not try to remove the seal by striking the tool. It will break the backup ring, and the cylinder end seal will remain in the gearbox. 22. Carefully pry the piston seal ring and O-ring off the piston rack. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the inside of seal ring groove and piston edges when removing the seal ring. 23. Before removing the valve housing, apply vinyl tape to splines of the pinion shaft. 24. Separate the valve housing from the pinion shaft/valve using a press. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6640 25. Check the inner wall of the valve housing where the seal ring slides with your finger. If there is a step in the wall, the valve housing is worn. Replace the valve housing. NOTE: There may be the sliding marks from the seal ring on the wall of the valve housing. Replace the valve housing only if the wall is stepped. - When the valve housing is replaced, install new shim(s) on the bearing surface of the housing to adjust the thickness. 26. Check for wear, burrs and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the sleeve. NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve must be replaced, replace both parts as a set. 27. Remove the circlip and pinion shaft sleeve from the pinion shaft. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6641 28. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and remove the four seal rings from the sleeve. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the edges of the sleeve grooves and outer surface when removing the seal rings. 29. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve seal ring and O-ring at the groove the pinion shaft. Remove the valve seal ring and O-ring. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the edges of the pinion shaft groove and outer surface when removing the valve seal ring and O-ring. 30. Remove the valve oil seal and backup ring from the pinion shaft. NOTE: Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race slowly. If there is any excessive play, replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an assembly. - The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do not intermix old and new pinion shafts and sleeves. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6642 31. Press the valve oil seal and roller bearing out of the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tool shown below. Steering Gear Assembly TOOL REQUIRED - 07NAG-SR30900 Piston Seal Ring - 07974-SA50800 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide - 07974-SA50200 Sleeve Seal Ring Sizing Tool - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010100 Attachment, 32 x 35 mm - 07GAG-SD40100 Piston Seal Ring Guide - 07GAG-SD40200 Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6643 NOTE: - Clean the disassembled parts with a solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Do not dip the rubber parts in a solvent. - Always replace the Wrings and rubber seals with new ones before assembly. - Apply the recommended power steering fluid to the parts indicated in the assembly procedures. - Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the power steering system. - Use the appropriate special tools where necessary. 1. Apply vinyl tape to the stepped portion of the pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape with the power steering fluid. 2. Install the backup ring with its tapered side as shown below. 3. Coat the inside surface of the new valve oil seal with power steering fluid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6644 4. Slide the valve oil seal over the pinion shaft, being careful not to damage the sealing lip. CAUTION: Install the valve oil seal with its grooved side facing opposite the hearing. 5. Apply vinyl tape to the splines and stepped portion of the shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape with the power steering fluid. 6. Fit the new O-ring in the groove of the pinion shaft. Then slide the new valve seal ring over the shaft and the groove in on the pinion shaft. 7. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft. 8. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the valve seal ring that was installed on the pinion shaft. 9. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the special tool. Set the larger diameter end of the special tool over the valve seal ring. 10. Move the special tool up and down several times to make the valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft. 11. Remove the special tool. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6645 12. Turn the special tool over, and set the smaller diameter end of the special tool over the valve seal ring. Move the special tool up and down several times to make the valve seal ring fit snugly in the pinion shaft. 13. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the special tool. Set the new seal rings over the special tool from the smaller diameter end of the tool, and expand the seal rings. Do two rings at a time from each end of the sleeve. NOTE: Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage them. After installation, be sure to contract the seal rings using the special tool (sizing tool). - There are two types of sleeve seal rings: black and brown. Do not mix the different types of sleeve seal rings as they are not compatible. 14. Set the special tool in the grooves in the sleeve, and set each ring in each groove securely. NOTE: After installation, compress the seal rings with your fingers temporarily. 15. Apply power steering fluid to the seal rings on the sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the special tool. 16. Insert the sleeve into the special tool slowly. 17. Move the sleeve each direction several times to make the seal rings snugly fit in the sleeve. NOTE: Be sure that the seal rings are not turned up. 18. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the pinion shaft. Assemble the sleeve over the pinion shaft by aligning the locating pin on the inside of the sleeve with the cutout in the shaft. Then install the new circlip securely in the pinion shaft groove. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the valve seal ring when inserting the sleeve. - Install the circlip with its radiused side toward the sleeve. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6646 19. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the valve oil seal, then install the seal in the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tools as shown. CAUTION: Install the valve oil seal with its grooved side facing the tool. 20. Press the new bearing into the valve housing using a hydraulic press and special tool as shown. NOTE: Place the roller bearing on the valve housing with the stamped letter facing up towards the valve side. 21. Apply vinyl tape to the pinion shaft, then coat the vinyl tape with power steering fluid. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6647 22. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the valve seal rings. 23. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft. 24. Press the pinion shaft/sleeve using a hydraulic press as shown. NOTE: Check that the pinion shaft/sleeve turns smoothly by turning the pinion shaft. 25. Coat the piston seal ring guide with power steering fluid, then slide it onto the rack, big end first. 26. Position the new O-ring and new piston seal ring on the special tool, then slide them down toward the big end of the tool. NOTE: Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage them. After installation, be sure to contract the seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool). - Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set. 27. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on top of the O-ring. 28. Coat the piston seal ring and the inside of the special tool with power steering fluid. 29. Carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the piston seal ring. 30. Move the special tool back and forth several times to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6648 31. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end edges, then coat the surface of the tape with the power steering fluid. NOTE: Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped portion. 32. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal with power steering fluid. 33. Install the cylinder end seal onto the steering rack with its grooved side toward the piston. CAUTION: When installing the cylinder end seal, be careful not damage the sealing lip face of the seal with the edges or teeth of the steering rack. 34. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack. NOTE: Remove any residue of take adhesive. 35. Install the new backup ring on the steering rack, then place the cylinder end seal to piston. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6649 36. Grease the steering rack teeth, then insert the steering rack into the gear housing. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder housing with the rack edges. 37. Install the flange bolt into the end of the steering rack until it bottoms in the hole, then back the flange bolt out 1/4 turn. Hold the flange bolt and tighten the flange nut against the rack by hand. 38. Install the cylinder end seal into the bottom of the cylinder by pressing on the bolt with a press as shown. CAUTION: Do not push on the bolt with excessive force as it may damage the cylinder end seal. 39. Remove the flange bolt, and center the steering rack. 40. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and coat the surface of the tape with the power steering fluid. NOTE: Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped portion. 41. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal with power steering fluid. 42. Install the cylinder end seal onto the steering rack with its grooved side toward the piston. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6650 43. Push in the cylinder end seal with your finger. CAUTION: When installing the cylinder end seal, be careful not damage the sealing face of the seal with the threads and burrs at the staked position of the cylinder housing. 44. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack. NOTE: Remove any residue of tape adhesive. 45. Hold the steering gearbox using a C-clamp as shown. 46. Coat the inside surface of the cylinder end with power steering fluid, then install the cylinder end by screwing it into the cylinder housing. 47. Remove the C-clamp from the steering gearbox. 48. After tightening the cylinder end, stake the point of the cylinder housing shown below. NOTE: Stake the cylinder in the position opposite from where the stake was removed during disassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6651 49. Select the 32 mm shim(s). NOTE: Only reinstall the original 32 mm shim(s) when the steering gearbox is reassembled without replacing the pinion shaft, valve housing, and gearbox housing with new ones. If the pinion shaft, valve housing, and gearbox housing are replaced, select the new shim(s) as follows. Shim Selection: a. Set the four 32 mm shims on the bearing surface of the gearbox housing. Total thickness of the four shims should equal no more than 0.70 mm. Shim set: four 32 mm shims (Thickness: 0.10 mm, 0.15 mm, 0.20 mm, 0.25 mm respectively) CAUTION: The four 32 mm shims do not have thickness identification marks. Measure the thickness of each shim using a micrometer, and mark the shim for identification. b. Install the valve body unit on the gearbox, and tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque. c. Measure the clearance between the gearbox and valve body unit using a feeler gauge as shown. NOTE: Measure the clearance at the point midway between the two mounting bolts. d. Determine the required thickness-of the 32 mm shims by subtracting the clearance obtained in the step "c" from the total thickness of the four shims. (Total thickness of the 4 shims) - (Clearance) = Required thickness of the shims NOTE: Select the shims so that the total thickness is close to, but less than, the required thickness. Example: Measurement is 0.28 mm (0.011 inch): 0.70 - 0.28 = 0.42 mm (0.028 - 0.011 = 0.017 inch). The selected shims should be 0.25 mm (0.010 inch) and 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) in thickness. If the required shim thickness is 0.10 mm or less, no shims are necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6652 50. Set the selected 32 mm shims on the bearing surface of the gearbox housing. 51. Coat the new O-ring with grease, and carefully fit it on the valve housing. 52. Apply grease to the needle bearing in the gearbox housing. 53. Install the valve body unit on the gearbox housing by engaging the gears. NOTE: Note the valve body unit installation position (direction of line connection). 54. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque. 55. Install the cylinder lines A and B. NOTE: Clean the joints of the cylinder lines A and B thoroughly. The joints must be free of foreign material. - Install the cylinder lines A and B by fighting the flare nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque. 56. Grease the sliding surface of the rack guide, and install it onto the gear housing. 57. Apply a thin coat of grease to the new O-ring, and install it on the rack guide screw. 58. Install the spring, rack guide screw and locknut on the gear housing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6653 59. Adjust the rack guide screw. NOTE: After adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by sliding the rack right and left. 60. Install the new lockwasher in the groove in the steering rack. 61. Screw each rack ends into the rack. 62. Hold the steering rack with a wrench, and tighten the rack ends. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. 63. After tightening the rack ends, stake the four sections of lock washer with a drift and a mallet. a. Place the wood block on the press table, then set the lock washer section of the rack end on the wood block securely. b. Be sure the tool is aligned with the flat sections of the steering rack end before pressing. c. Stake the lock washer in the center of the flat section of the steering rack end. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6654 64. Apply grease to the circumference of the rack end housing. 65. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot grooves on the rack ends. 66. Install the boots in the rack end with the tie-rod clips. NOTE: Install the boots with the rack in the straight ahead position (right and left tie-rods are equal in length). 67. Adjust the air hose fitting position of the boots by turning it as shown below. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6655 68. Install new boot bands on the boot, and bend both sets of locking tabs. CAUTION: Stake the band locking tabs firmly. 69. Lightly tap on the doubled-over portions to reduce their height. 70. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots are not deformed or twisted. 71. Connect the air tube between the right and left boot. 72. Install the clips on the cylinder lines, then clamp the air tube with the clips. Installation CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the feed line and cylinder lines when installing the gearbox. 1. Before installing the gearbox, slide the rack ail the way to right. 2. Install the mounting cushion on the steering gearbox. 3. Install the pinion shaft grommet, then insert the pinion shaft up through the bulkhead. NOTE: Align the notch in the pinion shaft grommet with the tab on the valve housing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6656 4. Install the mounting bracket over the mounting cushion, then install two gearbox mounting bolts. 5. Install the stiffener plate with the two gearbox mounting bolts arid stiffener plate attaching bolts. CAUTION: Be sure the air tube is not caught or pinched by stiffener plate. NOTE: Install the bolts loosely first, then tighten them securely. 6. Install the return hose joint by tightening the 16 mm flare nut. 7. Connect the return hose securely, and tighten the adjustable hose clamp from the engine compartment. 8. Connect the feed line and tighten the 14 mm flare nut. NOTE: Make sure that there is no interference between the fluid lines, the rear beam or any other parts. 9. Center the steering rack within its stroke. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6657 10. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the pinion shaft (line up the bolt hole with the groove around the shaft), and tighten the lower bolt. NOTE: Connect the steering shaft and pinion with the cable reel and steering rack centered. - Be sure that the lower steering joint bolt is securely in the groove in the steering gearbox pinion. - If the steering wheel and rack are not centered, reposition the serrations at lower end of the steering joint. 11. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately two turns) until the arrow mark on the label points straight up. Reinstall the steering wheel. 12. Install the steering joint cover with the clamps and a clip. 13. Reconnect the tie-rod ends to the steering knuckles, tighten the castle nut to the specified torque, and install new cotter pins. NOTE: Before connecting the tie-rod ends, wipe off any grease contamination from the ball joint tapered section and threads. CAUTION: Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. 14. Install the exhaust pipe A or TWC. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6658 15. Connect the shift linkage. 16. Install the front wheels. 17. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed air from the system. 18. After installation, perform the following checks. a. Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks. b. Adjust the front toe. c. Check the steering wheel spoke angle. Adjust by turning the right and left tie-rods, if necessary. NOTE: Turn the right and left tie-rods equally. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6659 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Manual Steering Removal and Installation TOOL REQUIRED - 07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm NOTE: Using solvent and a brush, to wash any oil and dirt off the gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air. REMOVAL 1. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it on safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the front wheels. 3. Remove the steering wheel. 4. Remove the steering joint cover. 5. Remove the steering joint lower bolt, and disconnect the steering joint by moving the joint toward the column. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6660 6. Remove the cotter pin from the castle nut and remove the newt 7. Install the 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the 10 mm hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. NOTE: Remove the ball joint using the special tool. Refer to section 18 for how to use the ball joint remover. 8. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the special tool. CAUTION: Avoid damaging the ball joint boot. 9. Remove the left tie-rod end, then slide the rack all the way to the right. 10. Separate the exhaust pipe A or TWC. 11. Disconnect the shift linkage. 12. Remove the stiffener plate. 13. Remove the mounting bracket. 14. Pull the steering gearbox all the way down to clear the pinion shaft from the bulkhead, then remove the pinion shaft grommet. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6661 15. Move the steering gearbox to right so the left rack end clears the rear beam, then tilt the left side down to remove it from the car. INSTALLATION 1. Slide the rack all the way to the right. 2. Install the pinion shaft grommet, and insert the pinion shaft up through the bulkhead. NOTE: Align the notch in the pinion shaft grommet with the tab on the gear housing. 3. Install the mounting brackets with the two gearbox mounting bolts on the cushion. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6662 4. Install the stiffener plate with the two gearbox mounting bolts and stiffener plate attaching bolts. NOTE: Install the bolts loosely first, then tighten them securely. 5. Center the steering rack within its stroke. 6. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the pinion shaft (line up the bolt hole with the groove around the shaft), and tighten the lower bolt. NOTE: Connect the steering shaft and pinion with the steering wheel and steering rack centered. - Be sure that the lower steering joint bolt is securely in the groove in the steering gearbox pinion. - If the steering wheel and rack are not centered, reposition the serrations at lower end of the steering joint. 7. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately two turns) until the arrow mark on the label points straight up. Reinstall the steering wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6663 8. Install the steering joint cover with the clamps and clips. 9. Reconnect the tie-rod ends to the steering knuckles, then tighten the castle nut to the specified torque, and install new cotter pins. NOTE: Before connecting the tie-rod ends, wipe off any grease contamination from the ball joint tapered section and threads. CAUTION: Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. 10. Install the exhaust pipe A or TWC. 11. Connect the shift linkage. 12. Install the front wheels. 13. After installation, perform the following checks. a. Adjust the front toe. b. Check the steering wheel spoke angle. Adjust by turning the right and led tie-rods, if necessary. NOTE: Turn the right and left tie-rods equally. Overhaul TOOL REQUIRED - 07746-0020100 Driver, 22 mm I.D. - Roll Pin Drift DISASSEMBLE 1. Place the gearbox in a vise with a soft jaws, then clamp the gearbox at the mount bracket or gear housing. CAUTION: Be careful not to distort the gear housing by clamping it too tight in the vise incorrectly. 2. Remove the tie-rod end and locknut. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6664 3. Remove the boot bands and tie-rod clips. Pull the boots away from the ends of the gearbox. 4. Hold the steering rack with one wrench, and unscrew the rack end with another wrench. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. 5. Push the right end of the rack back into the cylinder housing so the smooth surface that rides against the seal won't be damaged. 6. Loosen the locknut, and remove the rack guide screw. 7. Remove the disc washer, spring and rack guide from the gear housing. 8. Remove the pinion dust seal and the 35 mm snap ring. 9. Hold the pinion shaft with a vise securely. Remove the pinion by tapping evenly around the flanged section of the gearbox with a plastic hammer. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6665 CAUTION: Do not tap on the steering rack. NOTE: Do not reuse the removed pinion. 10. Slide the steering rack out of the cylinder housing. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the bushing in the cylinder housing. 11. Remove the rack end bushing. 12. Replace the gearbox mounting cushion if necessary: a. To remove the cushion, use a sharp knife and make a cut down the length of the cushion. Be careful not to damage the paint on the outside of the cylinder housing. Remove the old cushion. b. Apply weatherstrip adhesive to the inside of the new cushion. Install the cushion onto the cylinder housing and position it 20 - 22 mm (0.79 0.87 inch) from the end of the cylinder housing as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6666 NOTE: After installing the cushion, wipe off any excess adhesive that may have dripped into the inside of the cylinder housing. ASSEMBLE NOTE: Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Do not dip the rubber parts in solvent. - Always replace the non-reuseable parts with new ones before assembly. - Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the steering gearbox. 1. Apply a thin coat of grease to the inside surface of the rack end bushing. Grease quantity: 1 - 3g (0.04 - 0.1 oz). CAUTION: Do not fill the slots with grease; they must remain open to serve as air passages. 2. Install the rack end bushing by aligning the round projection on the bushing with the hole in the cylinder housing 3. Grease the steering rack teeth. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6667 4. Install the steering rack into the cylinder housing carefully to avoid damaging the rack end bushing. 5. Drive in the steering pinion in the gear housing with the special tools. 6. Install the 35 mm snap ring securely in the gear housing groove. 7. Apply vinyl tape to the pinion shaft, then coat the vinyl tape with grease. 8. Install the pinion dust seal on the gear housing until it seats properly, then remove the tape. 9. Grease the sliding surface of the rack guide, and install it on to the gear housing. 10. Install the spring, disc washer and rack guide screw on the gear housing. NOTE: Install the disc washer with its convex side facing in. 11. Adjust the rack guide screw. 12. Install the new lock washer in the groove in the steering rack. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6668 13. Install the steering rack end into the rack. 14. Hold the steering rack with a wrench and tighten the rack end with another. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench. 15. After tightening the rack ends, stake the four sections of the lock washer with a roll pin drift and a mallet. a. Place the wood block on the press table, then set the lock washer section of the rack end on the wood block securely. Be sure the tool is aligned with the flat sections of the steering rack end before pressing. b. Stake the lock washer in the center of the flat section of the steering rack end. 16. Apply grease to the circumference of the rack end housing. 17. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot grooves on the rack ends. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6669 18. Install the boots in the rack end with the tie-rod clips. NOTE: Install the boot band with the rack in the straight ahead position (right and led tie-rods are equal in length). 19. Install the boot band so that the locking tabs of the band (stake points) are in the range shown below. (Tabs should face up and slightly forward.) 20. Bend both sets of locking tabs. 21. Lightly tap on the doubled-over portions to reduce their height. CAUTION: Stake the band locking tabs firmly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering > Page 6670 22. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots are not deformed or twisted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Specifications Steering Wheel: Specifications Free play 0 to 10 mm Steering Wheel Nut 49 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6674 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage Steering Wheel: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not disassemble the airbags. it has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag during service, please observe the following precautions. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury. Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put any things on the removed airbag. Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag. Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200° F / 93° C). Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 6677 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal Procedures (see "Damaged Airbag Special Procedure") for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 6678 Steering Wheel: Service Precautions Deployed Air Bag Put on a pair of shop gloves and safety glasses to protect your hands and eyes from possible irritation and heat when handling the deployed air bag assembly. Driver Airbag Assembly After the air bag assembly has been deployed, the surface of the air bag may contain a powdery residue. This powder consists primarily of cornstarch (used to lubricate the bag as it inflates) and by products of the chemical reaction. Sodium hydroxide dust (similar to lye soap) is produced as a by product of the deployment reaction. The sodium hydroxide then quickly reacts with atmospheric moisture and is converted to sodium carbonate and sodium bicarbonate (baking soda). Therefore, it is unlikely that sodium hydroxide will be present after deployment. Passenger Airbag Assembly The passenger inflator requires no special precaution after deployment. 95% of the particulate emission are potassium chloride (KCL), which is commonly sold as an edible salt-substitutes. even if water is applied. Post deployment products are relatively pH neutral. Disposing the inflator by burying it in a landfill will not products any hazardous products. As with any dusty environment, safety goggles, dust mask and gloves should be worn. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 6679 Steering Wheel: Service Precautions Undeployed Air Bag During the course of a vehicle's useful life, certain situations may arise which will necessitate the disposal of a live (undeployed) air bag assembly. This information covers proper procedures for disposing of a live air bag assembly. Before a live air bag assembly can be disposed of, it must be deployed. A live air bag assembly must not be disposed of through normal refuse channels. Special care is necessary when handling and storing a live (undeployed) air bag assembly. The rapid gas generation produced during deployment of the air bag could cause the air bag assembly, or an object in front of the air bag assembly, to be thrown through the air in the unlikely event of an accidental deployment. WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROPER SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) AIR BAG ASSEMBLY DISPOSAL PROCEDURES CAN RESULT IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT WHICH MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. AN UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF THROUGH NORMAL REFUSE CHANNELS. THE UNDEPLOYED AIR BAG ASSEMBLY CONTAINS SUBSTANCES THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE ILLNESS OR PERSONAL INJURY IF THE SEALED CONTAINER IS DAMAGED DURING DISPOSAL. DISPOSAL IN ANY MANNER INCONSISTENT WITH PROPER PROCEDURES MAY BE A VIOLATION OF FEDERAL, STATE, AND / OR LOCAL LAW. In situations which require deployment of a live air bag assembly, deployment may be accomplished inside or outside the vehicle. The method employed Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 6680 depends upon the final disposition of the particular vehicle, as noted in "Deployment Outside Vehicle" and "Deployment Inside Vehicle". WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY, MAKE SURE THE BAG OPENING IS POINTED AWAY FROM YOU. IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. NEVER CARRY THE AIR BAG ASSEMBLY BY THE WIRES OR CONNECTOR ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE MODULE. Handling/Installation/Diagnosis 1. Air bag assembly should not be subjected to temperatures above 65° C (150° F). 2. Air bag assembly, and SDM should not be used if they have been dropped from a height of 100 centimeters (3.28 feet) or more. 3. When a SDM is replaced, it must be oriented with the arrow on the SDM pointing toward the front of the vehicle. It is very important for the SDM to be located flat on the mounting surface, parallel to the vehicle datum line. It is important that the SDM mounting surface is free of any dirt or other foreign material. 4. Do not apply power to the SRS unless all components are connected or a diagnostic chart requests it, as this will set a diagnostic trouble code. 5. The "SRS Diagnostic System Check" must be the starting point of any SRS diagnostics. The "SRS Diagnostic System Check" will verify proper "AIR BAG" warning lamp operation and will lead you to the correct chart to diagnose any SRS malfunctions. Bypassing these procedures may result in extended diagnostic time, incorrect diagnosis, and incorrect parts replacements. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 6681 Steering Wheel: Service Precautions Steering Wheel and Cable Reel Alignment Steering Wheel and Cable Reel Alignment NOTE: To avoid misalignment of the steering wheel or airbag on reassembly, make sure the wheels are turned straight ahead before removing the steering wheel. Rotate the cable reel clockwise unit it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately two and a half turns) until the arrow mark on the cable reel label points straight up. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6682 Steering Wheel: Adjustments Steering Wheel and Cable Reel Alignment NOTE: To avoid misalignment of the steering wheel or airbag on reassembly, make sure the wheels are turned straight ahead before removing the steering wheel. Rotate the cable reel clockwise unit it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately two and a half turns) until the arrow mark on the cable reel label points straight up. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Removal NOTE: Before removing the steering wheel, align the front wheels straight ahead. REMOVAL 1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly from the steering wheel. Refer to Air Bags and Seat Belts. 2. Disconnect the horn connector and cruise control switches connector. 3. Remove the steering wheel nut. 4. Remove the steering wheel by rocking it slightly from side-to-side as you pull steadily with both hands. CAUTION: Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft when installing the steering wheel. NOTE: Before installing the steering wheel, align the front wheels straight ahead. . Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6685 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Before installing the steering wheel, center the cable reel. Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise approximately two turns. The arrow mark on the cable reel label should points straight up. 2. Install the steering wheel with the steering wheel nut. NOTE: Be sure the steering wheel shaft engages the cable reel and canceling sleeve. 3. Attach the cruise control switches connector to the steering wheel clip. 4. Connect the horn connector. 5. Install the driver's airbag assembly, and confirm proper system operation. 6. Check the horn and cruise control switches for proper operations. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair Tie Rod Boot: Service and Repair TOOL REQUIRED - 07974-SA50800 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the boot set ring and the boot. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the boot installation section with grease. 2. Pack the interior of the boot and lip with grease. 3. Wipe the grease off the sliding surface of the ball pin, then pack the lower area with fresh grease. CAUTION: Keep grease off the boot installation section and the tapered section of the ball pin. - Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the boot. 4. Install the boot in the groove of the boot installation section securely, then bleed the air from the boot. 5. Adjust the special tool with the adjusting bolt until the end of the tool aligns with the groove on the boot. Slide the set ring over the tool and into position. CAUTION: After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease contamination and wipe it if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Specifications Tie Rod End: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Attaching Nut ....................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 44 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Lower Ball Joint: Specifications Lower TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Castle Nut ............................................................................................................................................ ................................... 49 - 59 Nm (36 - 43 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Lower > Page 6698 Ball Joint: Specifications Upper TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Castle Nut Upper.................................................................................................................................. ................................... 39 - 47 Nm (29 - 35 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6699 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Grasp tire at top and bottom. 3. Shake tire back and forth, check for any side to side movement in ball joint. 4. Replace ball joint if there is any side to side movement. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub Ball Joint: Service and Repair Dust Cover, Wheel Hub TOOL REQUIRED - 07GAG-SD40700 Upper Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide - 07974-SA50700 Lower Ball Boot Clip Guide 1. Remove the set ring and the boot. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the boot installation section with grease. 2. Pack the interior of the boot and lip with grease. 3. Wipe the grease off the sliding surface of the ball pin and pack with fresh grease. CAUTION: Keep grease off the boot installation section and the tapered section of the ball pin. - Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the boot. 4. Install the boot in the groove of the boot installation section securely, then bleed air. 5. Install the upper and lower ball joint boot set rings using the special tools as follows: Lower ball joint: Adjust the special tool with the adjusting bolt until the end of the tool aligns with the groove on the boot. Slide the set ring over the tool and into position. CAUTION: After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease contamination and wipe it if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Page 6702 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Lower Ball Joint TOOL REQUIRED - 07974-SA50700 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide - 07965-SB00100 Ball Joint Remover/Installer - 07965-SB00200 Ball Joint Installer Base 1. Remove the knuckle. 2. Remove the boot by prying the set ring off. 3. Check the boot for deterioration and damage, replace if necessary. 4. Install the special tools on the ball joint and tighten the castle nut. 5. Position the special tools over the ball joint as shown, then set the assembly in a vise. Press the ball joint out of the knuckle. 6. Place the ball joint in position by hand. 7. Install the special tools over the ball joint as shown, then press the ball joint in. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Page 6703 8. Install the ball joint boot and set ring using the special tool. 9. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and pay particular attention to the following items: a. Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots when installing the knuckle. b. Torque all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. c. Torque the castle nuts to the lower torque specifications, then tighten them only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening. d. Install new cotter pins on the castle nuts after torquing. e. Avoid twisting the sensor wires when installing the wheel sensor. f. Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and the inside of the brake disc. g. Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. h. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Dust Cover, Wheel Hub > Page 6704 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Upper Ball Joint TOOL REQUIRED - 07GAG-SD40700 Upper Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide - 07974-SA50700 Lower Ball Boot Clip Guide 1. Remove the set ring and the boot. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the boot installation section with grease. 2. Pack the interior of the boot and lip with grease. 3. Wipe the grease off the sliding surface of the ball pin and pack with fresh grease. CAUTION: Keep grease off the boot installation section and the tapered section of the ball pin. - Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the boot. 4. Install the boot in the groove of the boot installation section securely, then bleed air. 5. Install the upper and lower ball joint boot set rings using the special tools as follows: Lower ball joint: Adjust the special tool with the adjusting bolt until the end of the tool aligns with the groove on the boot. Slide the set ring over the tool and into position. CAUTION: After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease contamination and wipe it if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Upper Control Arms, Rear 1. Remove the upper arm bushing and inner bushing as shown. 2. Mark a scribe line on the upper arm inner bushing so that it is in line with the bolt mounting surface. 3. Mark on the upper arm at two points so that they are in line and make a right angle with the arm as shown. 4. Drive in the upper arm inner bushing with the marks aligned. 5. Drive the upper arm bushing into the upper arm. NOTE: Drive in the upper arm bushing and inner bushing until their leading edges are flush with the upper arm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Rear Cross-Member > System Information > Description and Operation Rear Cross-Member: Description and Operation Description The rear floor cross-member position is critical for rear wheel alignment. During replacement, check the position of the rear beam and the rear damper base, and position the rear floor cross-member properly. Weld securely following the welder manufacturer's instructions to maintain rigidity. Use of the positioning jig is recommended. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications Front Steering Knuckle: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Knuckle to Upper Arm ........................................................................................................................................... ................................ 39-47 Nm (29-35 ft. lbs.) Lower Arm .................................................................. ......................................................................................................... 49-59 Nm (36-43 ft. lbs.) Splash Guard ....................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 4.9 Nm (3.6 ft. lbs.) Caliper Mounting Bolts ......................................... ............................................................................................................................. 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6716 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6717 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Replace the self-locking nuts after removal. - The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. NOTE: - Use only genuine Honda wheel weights for aluminum wheels. Non-genuine wheel weights may corrode and damage the aluminum wheels. - On the aluminum wheels, remove the center cap from the inside of the wheel after removing the wheel. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. - Wipe off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball joint. 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6718 3. Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. 4. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut, then remove the nut. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. 6. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and hang the caliper assembly to one side. CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws. 8. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts into the disc to push it away from the wheel hub. NOTE: Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. 9. Remove the brake disc from the knuckle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6719 10. Check the front wheel hub for damage and cracks. 11. Remove the wheel sensor from the knuckle (for cars with ABS). NOTE: Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Use the special tool to separate the ball joints from the suspension or steering arm. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot. 12. Clean any dirt or grease off the ball joint. 13. Remove the cotter pin from the steering arm and remove the nut. 14. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown. This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 15. Install a 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint. 16. Install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure you do not damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the pressure bolt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6720 NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 17. Once the special tool is in place, turn the adjusting bolt as necessary to make the jaws parallel. Then hand-tighten the pressure bolt, and recheck the jaws to make sure they are still Parallel. NOTE: After making the adjustment to the adjusting bolt, be sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in this position to the allow the jaw to pivot. 18. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint shaft pops loose from the steering arm. Wear eye protection. The ball joint can break loose suddenly and scatter dirt or other debris in your eyes. 19. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint and pull the ball joint out of the steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot and replace it if damaged. 20. Remove the cotter pin from the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 21. Install a 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 22. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and lower arm. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 23. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 24. Install the 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6721 25. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and knuckle. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 26. Pull the knuckle outward and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the knuckle by tapping the driveshaft end with a plastic hammer, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one after removal. 27. Separate the wheel hub from the knuckle using the special tools and a hydraulic press. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. - Hold onto the wheel hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. - To prevent damage to the tool, make sure the threads are fully engaged before pressing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6722 28. Remove the circlip and the splash guard from the knuckle. 29. Press the wheel bearing out of the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. 30. Press the wheel bearing inner race from the wheel hub using the special tools, a bearing separator, and a press as shown. NOTE: Wash the knuckle and wheel hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6723 31. Press a new wheel bearing into the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. NOTE: Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 32. Install the circlip securely in the knuckle groove. 33. Install the splash guard and tighten the screws. 34. Install the wheel hub on the knuckle using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press as shown. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6724 35. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and pay particular attention to the following items: a. Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots when installing the knuckle. b. Torque all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. c. Torque the castle nuts to the lower torque specifications, then tighten them only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening. d. Install new cotter pins on the castle nuts after torquing. e. Avoid twisting the sensor wires when installing the wheel sensor. f. Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and the inside of the brake disc. g. Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. h. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation Front Strut / Shock Tower: Description and Operation Description The front wheelhouse component is constructed as a unit with the front damper housing. Therefore, replacement of the component affects the front wheel alignment. When assembling it, either use a positioning jig or follow dimensions on the frame repair chart for positioning. Weld carefully. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 6729 Front Strut / Shock Tower: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the related parts. - Parts to be removed when removing the front bulkhead - Parts on passenger side of lower dashboard which are especially flammable - Electrical accessories in engine compartment and wire harnesses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 6730 2. Pull out and straighten the damaged area to approximately the original shape. - Attach the car to the frame straightener by tightening the underbody clamps at the horizontal pinch weld points. - Before cutting off the damaged sections, pull them out so that they are restored to the original shape. - Do not pull out more than necessary. - Pull out and straighten the damaged area of the lower dashboard, front pillar, and other parts. - After pulling, check the damper housing position using the body dimensional drawings and positioning jig. NOTE: Check the condition of the door and hinges. 3. Peel off the undercoat. Heat the undercoat at the weld areas of the wheelhouse and front side frame with a gas torch, and peel off the undercoat with a metal spatula. CAUTION: Be careful not to burn the fittings inside the passenger compartment and dashboard insulator when heating. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 6731 4. When replacing the front wheelhouse. - Center punch around the spot weld imprints on the front side frame and damper housing. - Drill holes in the center punched areas using a spot cutter. - Using a chisel, pry off the welded flange. - Level and finish the burrs on the welding surfaces with a sander. 5. When replacing the damper housing and front wheelhouse as an assembly. -1 Remove the wheelhouse upper member. - Center punch around the spot weld imprints. - Use the special spot cutter to drill holes at the spot weld nuggets. - Remove the MIG weld flange with a disc sander. WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear goggles or safety glasses whenever sanding, cutting or grinding. - Using a chisel, pry off the welded flange from the front pillar and damper housing. NOTE: Remove the wheelhouse upper member carefully so they can be reused. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 6732 -2 Using a spot cutter, drill holes in the spot welded area on the front side frame and dashboard upper side member. -3 From the passenger compartment side, drill holes in the spot welded area with as mm (0.2 in). NOTE: Drill holes completely through the parts since the replacement damper housing will be welded by MIG welding. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 6733 6. Mold the related parts. - Level and finish the burrs left on the welding surfaces with a sander. - Fill all drilled holes by MIG or gas welding. - Use a hammer and dolly to even out the welded areas of the lower dashboard, front side frame and dashboard upper side member. 7. Set the new front wheelhouse and damper housing. - Apply body paint to both sides of the new front wheelhouse and damper housing. - See Paint Repair section. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Remove the undercoat from both sides of the welding section and expose the steel plate using a disc sander WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear goggles or safety glasses whenever sanding, cutting or grinding - Clamp to the front side frame with vise-grips and squill vises. NOTE: Apply the spot sealer to the welding surface when spot welding. - Clamp the front bulkhead with vise-grips. - Measure the front compartment diagonally. NOTE: Use of a positioning jig is recommended. - Spot weld several points in the clamped sections, and temporarily attach the front wheelhouse and damper housing WARNING: To prevent eye injury and bums when welding, wear an approved welding helmet, gloves and safety shoes. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 6734 8. Check the dimensions, temporarily install the hood, front fender and headlight, and check for differences in level and clearance. - Check the engine and transmission mount brackets position. 9. Perform the main welding. - Weld as much as possible with the jig still mounted. WARNING: To prevent eye injury and bums when welding, wear an approved welding helmet, gloves and safety shoes. - Make 20% to 30% more spot welds than there were holes drilled. - Plug weld the holes areas of the dashboard lower and damper housing with a MIG welder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 6735 10. Weld the wheelhouse upper member. When the upper member is to be reused, make MIG welds at the drilled holes. 11. Finish the welded area. Use a hammer and dolly to even out the side bulkhead and front side frame flanges for close fit with the surface of the front wheelhouse and damper housing. 12. Apply the sealer. Apply sealer to the mating surfaces of the lower dashboard and front side frame, etc. 13. Apply the paint. See Paint Repair section. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. 14. Apply the undercoat. Undercoat the front floor, etc, and apply anti-rust agent to the inside of the welding section of the front side frame, lower dashboard, and upper member. 15. Install the related parts. Install in the reverse order in which they were removed. 16. Inspect, check and make adjustment. - Measure the front wheel alignment. - Inspect the brake system. - Adjust the headlight aim. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair Sub-frame Torque Sequence Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Coil Spring Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Coil Spring TOOL REQUIRED - Spring Strut Compressor REMOVAL 1. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the damper pinch bolt from the top of damper fork. 3. Remove the damper fork bolt and self-locking nut from the bottom of the damper fork, then remove damper fork. 4. Remove the damper by removing the two nuts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Coil Spring > Page 6743 5. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 6. Release the pressure from the spring compressor. INSTALLATION 1. Install the damper unit on a spring compressor. 2. Assemble the damper in reverse order of removal except the damper mounting washer and self locking nut. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. 3. Position the damper mounting base on the damper unit as shown. 4. Compress the damper spring. 5. Install the damper mounting rubber, damper mounting washer and a new 10 mm self-locking nut. 6. Hold the damper shaft and tighten the 10 mm self-locking nut. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Coil Spring > Page 6744 7. Loosely install the damper on the frame with the aligning tab facing inside, then loosely install the two flange nuts. 8. Install the damper fork over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the damper fork so the aligning tab is aligned with the slot in the damper fork. 9. Loosely install the damper pinch bolt on the top of the damper fork. 10. Loosely install the damper fork bolt and a new self-locking nut on the bottom of the damper fork. 11. Raise the knuckle with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 12. Tighten the damper pinch bolt. 13. Tighten the damper fork bolt and self-locking nut. 14. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper. 15. Install the brake hose mounts with the brake hose mounting bolts. 16. Install the front wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Coil Spring > Page 6745 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Coil Spring REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the speaker cover and speaker (Hatchback) Sedan and Coupe: Remove the trunk side pane. 3. Remove the two flange nuts. 4. Remove the flange bolt from the damper. 5. Remove the flange bolt that connects the lower arm to the trailing arm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Coil Spring > Page 6746 6. Lower the rear suspension, and remove the damper. 7. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the self-locking nut. 8. Release the pressure from the spring compressor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Coil Spring > Page 6747 INSTALLATION 1. Install the damper unit on a spring compressor. NOTE: Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Assemble the rear damper in reverse order of disassembly except the damper mounting washer and self-locking nut. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Coil Spring > Page 6748 3. Position the damper mounting base on the damper unit as shown. 4. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. 5. Install the damper mounting washer, and loosely install a new self-locking nut. 6. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench and tighten the self-locking nut. 7. Lower the rear suspension, and position the damper with the spring stop pointed toward the left side of the vehicle. 8. Loosely install the two flange nuts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Coil Spring > Page 6749 9. Loosely install the flange bolt. 10. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. WARNING: The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 11. Tighten the flange bolt. 12. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the damper to the specified torque. 13. Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Specifications > Strut Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Strut TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Upper Bolt ............................................................................................................................................ ................................................ 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.) Lower Bolt ............................................................. ............................................................................................................................... 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Specifications > Strut > Page 6754 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Shock TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Upper Self-Locking Nut ....................................................................................................................... ................................................ 29 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Upper Flange Nut .................................................. ............................................................................................................................... 49 Nm (36 ft. lbs.) Rear Lower Bolt ................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6755 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Application and ID Type ..................................................................................................................................................... ............... Telescopic, Hydraulic Nitrogen Gas Filled Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Removal and Replacement Strut Front Strut REMOVAL 1. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the damper pinch bolt from the top of damper fork. 3. Remove the damper fork bolt and self-locking nut from the bottom of the damper fork, then remove damper fork. 4. Remove the damper by removing the two nuts. DISASSEMBLE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6758 1. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 2. Release the pressure from the spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the next column. INSPECTION 1. Reassemble all parts, except the spring. 2. Push on the damper assembly as shown. 3. Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. NOTE: The damper should move smoothly. If it does not (no compression or no extension), the gas is leaking, and the damper should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6759 4. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises or binding during these tests. ASSEMBLE 1. Install the damper unit on a spring compressor. 2. Assemble the damper in reverse order of removal except the damper mounting washer and self locking nut. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6760 3. Position the damper mounting base on the damper unit as shown. 4. Compress the damper spring. 5. Install the damper mounting rubber, damper mounting washer and a new 10 mm self-locking nut. 6. Hold the damper shaft and tighten the 10 mm self-locking nut. INSTALLATION 1. Loosely install the damper on the frame with the aligning tab facing inside, then loosely install the two flange nuts. 2. Install the damper fork over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the damper fork so the aligning tab is aligned with the slot in the damper fork. 3. Loosely install the damper pinch bolt on the top of the damper fork. 4. Loosely install the damper fork bolt and a new self-locking nut on the bottom of the damper fork. 5. Raise the knuckle with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 6. Tighten the damper pinch bolt. 7. Tighten the damper fork bolt and self-locking nut. 8. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper. 9. Install the brake hose mounts with the brake hose mounting bolts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6761 10. Install the front wheel. Rear Strut REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the speaker cover and speaker (Hatchback) Sedan and Coupe: Remove the trunk side pane. 3. Remove the two flange nuts. 4. Remove the flange bolt from the damper. 5. Remove the flange bolt that connects the lower arm to the trailing arm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6762 6. Lower the rear suspension, and remove the damper. DISASSEMBLE 1. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the self-locking nut. 2. Release the pressure from the spring compressor, then disassemble. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6763 INSPECTION 1. Reassemble all parts, except the spring. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6764 2. Push on the damper as shown. 3. Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. NOTE: The damper should move smoothly. If it does not (no compression or no extension), the gas is leaking, and the damper should be replaced. 4. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises and binding during these tests. ASSEMBLE 1. Install the damper unit on a spring compressor. NOTE: Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Assemble the rear damper in reverse order of disassembly except the damper mounting washer and self-locking nut. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. 3. Position the damper mounting base on the damper unit as shown. 4. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. 5. Install the damper mounting washer, and loosely install a new self-locking nut. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6765 6. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench and tighten the self-locking nut. INSTALLATION 1. Lower the rear suspension, and position the damper with the spring stop pointed toward the left side of the vehicle. 2. Loosely install the two flange nuts. 3. Loosely install the flange bolt. 4. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. WARNING: The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 5. Tighten the flange bolt. 6. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the damper to the specified torque. 7. Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6766 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Removal and Replacement Shock Front Shock REMOVAL 1. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the damper pinch bolt from the top of damper fork. 3. Remove the damper fork bolt and self-locking nut from the bottom of the damper fork, then remove damper fork. 4. Remove the damper by removing the two nuts. DISASSEMBLE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6767 1. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut. 2. Release the pressure from the spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the next column. INSPECTION 1. Reassemble all parts, except the spring. 2. Push on the damper assembly as shown. 3. Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. NOTE: The damper should move smoothly. If it does not (no compression or no extension), the gas is leaking, and the damper should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6768 4. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises or binding during these tests. ASSEMBLE 1. Install the damper unit on a spring compressor. 2. Assemble the damper in reverse order of removal except the damper mounting washer and self locking nut. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6769 3. Position the damper mounting base on the damper unit as shown. 4. Compress the damper spring. 5. Install the damper mounting rubber, damper mounting washer and a new 10 mm self-locking nut. 6. Hold the damper shaft and tighten the 10 mm self-locking nut. INSTALLATION 1. Loosely install the damper on the frame with the aligning tab facing inside, then loosely install the two flange nuts. 2. Install the damper fork over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the damper fork so the aligning tab is aligned with the slot in the damper fork. 3. Loosely install the damper pinch bolt on the top of the damper fork. 4. Loosely install the damper fork bolt and a new self-locking nut on the bottom of the damper fork. 5. Raise the knuckle with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 6. Tighten the damper pinch bolt. 7. Tighten the damper fork bolt and self-locking nut. 8. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper. 9. Install the brake hose mounts with the brake hose mounting bolts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6770 10. Install the front wheel. Rear Shock REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the speaker cover and speaker (Hatchback) Sedan and Coupe: Remove the trunk side pane. 3. Remove the two flange nuts. 4. Remove the flange bolt from the damper. 5. Remove the flange bolt that connects the lower arm to the trailing arm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6771 6. Lower the rear suspension, and remove the damper. DISASSEMBLE 1. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor according to the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the self-locking nut. CAUTION: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the self-locking nut. 2. Release the pressure from the spring compressor, then disassemble. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6772 INSPECTION 1. Reassemble all parts, except the spring. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6773 2. Push on the damper as shown. 3. Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. NOTE: The damper should move smoothly. If it does not (no compression or no extension), the gas is leaking, and the damper should be replaced. 4. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises and binding during these tests. ASSEMBLE 1. Install the damper unit on a spring compressor. NOTE: Follow the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Assemble the rear damper in reverse order of disassembly except the damper mounting washer and self-locking nut. NOTE: Align the bottom of damper spring and spring lower seat as shown. 3. Position the damper mounting base on the damper unit as shown. 4. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor. 5. Install the damper mounting washer, and loosely install a new self-locking nut. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Strut > Page 6774 6. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench and tighten the self-locking nut. INSTALLATION 1. Lower the rear suspension, and position the damper with the spring stop pointed toward the left side of the vehicle. 2. Loosely install the two flange nuts. 3. Loosely install the flange bolt. 4. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack until the vehicle just lifts off the safety stand. WARNING: The floor jack must be securely positioned or personal injury may result. 5. Tighten the flange bolt. 6. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the damper to the specified torque. 7. Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Trailing Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trailing Arm Bushing: > 00-006 > Mar > 06 > Suspension Rear Suspension Clunk/Squeak On Bumps Trailing Arm Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Suspension Clunk/Squeak On Bumps 00-006 March 31, 2006 Applies To: *1988-00 Civic - ALL 1997-01 CR-V-ALL 1993-97 Del Sol - ALL* Clunk or Squeak From Rear Suspension (Supersedes 00-006, dated December 11, 2001, to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM A clunk or squeak from the rear suspension when going over rough or bumpy roads. PROBABLE CAUSE Broken rear trailing arm bushing(s). CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the rear trailing arm bushing(s). PARTS INFORMATION *Rear Trailing Arm Bushing: 1988-00 Civic and 1993-97 Del Sol P/N 52385-SR3-000, H/C 4098299 1997-01 CR-V: P/N 52385-SR3-003, H/C 7424773 TOOL INFORMATION Trailing Arm Bushing Installation Set: T/N 07AAF-SK7A130, H/C 8283822 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 1988-00 Civic and 1993-97 Del Sol: P/N 52385-SR3-000 H/C 4098299 1997-01 CR-V: P/N 52385-SR3-003 H/C 7424773 Defect Code: 01801 Symptom Code: 04205* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Trailing Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trailing Arm Bushing: > 00-006 > Mar > 06 > Suspension Rear Suspension Clunk/Squeak On Bumps > Page 6784 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE *NOTE: ISIS online service manual information is only available for vehicles 1990 and newer. 1. Remove the rear trailing arm: ^ Refer to the suspension section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword REAR SUSPENSION, then select Suspension Arms Replacement from the list.* 2. Mark the trailing arm at the arrow on the bottom of the bushing. 3. Place the arm on a hydraulic press, supported by the hub base, with the spindle facing up. 4. With the hub driver, press the old bushing out of the trailing arm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Trailing Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trailing Arm Bushing: > 00-006 > Mar > 06 > Suspension Rear Suspension Clunk/Squeak On Bumps > Page 6785 5. Install the new bushing with the short end toward the outside of the vehicle. Align the arrow with the mark you made on the trailing arm. 6. Press the new bushing into the trailing arm until its edge is 10 to 12 mm above the surface of the arm. 7. Reinstall the trailing arm. 8. If necessary, repeat steps 1 thru 7 to install a new bushing in the other rear trailing arm. 9. Bleed the brake system: * ^ Refer to the brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, then select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 10. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed: ^ Refer to the suspension section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword WHEEL ALIGNMENT, then select Wheel Alignment - Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment from the list.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Trailing Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trailing Arm Bushing: > 00-006 > Mar > 06 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Clunk/Squeak On Bumps Trailing Arm Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Suspension Clunk/Squeak On Bumps 00-006 March 31, 2006 Applies To: *1988-00 Civic - ALL 1997-01 CR-V-ALL 1993-97 Del Sol - ALL* Clunk or Squeak From Rear Suspension (Supersedes 00-006, dated December 11, 2001, to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM A clunk or squeak from the rear suspension when going over rough or bumpy roads. PROBABLE CAUSE Broken rear trailing arm bushing(s). CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the rear trailing arm bushing(s). PARTS INFORMATION *Rear Trailing Arm Bushing: 1988-00 Civic and 1993-97 Del Sol P/N 52385-SR3-000, H/C 4098299 1997-01 CR-V: P/N 52385-SR3-003, H/C 7424773 TOOL INFORMATION Trailing Arm Bushing Installation Set: T/N 07AAF-SK7A130, H/C 8283822 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed Part: 1988-00 Civic and 1993-97 Del Sol: P/N 52385-SR3-000 H/C 4098299 1997-01 CR-V: P/N 52385-SR3-003 H/C 7424773 Defect Code: 01801 Symptom Code: 04205* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Trailing Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trailing Arm Bushing: > 00-006 > Mar > 06 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Clunk/Squeak On Bumps > Page 6791 Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Parts and Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE *NOTE: ISIS online service manual information is only available for vehicles 1990 and newer. 1. Remove the rear trailing arm: ^ Refer to the suspension section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword REAR SUSPENSION, then select Suspension Arms Replacement from the list.* 2. Mark the trailing arm at the arrow on the bottom of the bushing. 3. Place the arm on a hydraulic press, supported by the hub base, with the spindle facing up. 4. With the hub driver, press the old bushing out of the trailing arm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Trailing Arm > Trailing Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trailing Arm Bushing: > 00-006 > Mar > 06 > Suspension - Rear Suspension Clunk/Squeak On Bumps > Page 6792 5. Install the new bushing with the short end toward the outside of the vehicle. Align the arrow with the mark you made on the trailing arm. 6. Press the new bushing into the trailing arm until its edge is 10 to 12 mm above the surface of the arm. 7. Reinstall the trailing arm. 8. If necessary, repeat steps 1 thru 7 to install a new bushing in the other rear trailing arm. 9. Bleed the brake system: * ^ Refer to the brakes section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword BLEED, then select Brake System Bleeding from the list. 10. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if needed: ^ Refer to the suspension section of the appropriate service manual, or ^ Online, enter keyword WHEEL ALIGNMENT, then select Wheel Alignment - Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment from the list.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications End Play End Play End Play Front 0.0 to 0.5 mm Rear 0.0 to 0.5 mm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6796 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc in or outward. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6797 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Wheel bearings and hub on these models are an integral assembly and bearings cannot be adjusted. If hub endplay exceeds 0.002 inch with spindle nut properly tightened, hub and bearing assembly should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension TOOL REQUIRED - 07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint remover, 28 mm - 07JAF-SH20110 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Pilot, 38 mm - 07JAF-SH20120 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Shaft, 22.4 x 25.4 mm - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm - 07GAF-SE00401 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Base - 07947-6340201 Driver Attachment 58 x 72 mm - 07965-SD90100 Support Base - 07GAF-SE00200 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Guide Attachment CAUTION: - Replace the self-locking nuts after removal. - The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. NOTE: - Use only genuine Honda wheel weights for aluminum wheels. Non-genuine wheel weights may corrode and damage the aluminum wheels. - On the aluminum wheels, remove the center cap from the inside of the wheel after removing the wheel. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. - Wipe off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball joint. 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6800 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. 4. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut, then remove the nut. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. 6. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and hang the caliper assembly to one side. CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws. 8. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts into the disc to push it away from the wheel hub. NOTE: Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6801 9. Remove the brake disc from the knuckle. 10. Check the front wheel hub for damage and cracks. 11. Remove the wheel sensor from the knuckle (for cars with ABS). NOTE: Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Use the special tool to separate the ball joints from the suspension or steering arm. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot. 12. Clean any dirt or grease off the ball joint. 13. Remove the cotter pin from the steering arm and remove the nut. 14. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown. This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 15. Install a 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6802 16. Install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure you do not damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the pressure bolt. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 17. Once the special tool is in place, turn the adjusting bolt as necessary to make the jaws parallel. Then hand-tighten the pressure bolt, and recheck the jaws to make sure they are still Parallel. NOTE: After making the adjustment to the adjusting bolt, be sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in this position to the allow the jaw to pivot. 18. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint shaft pops loose from the steering arm. Wear eye protection. The ball joint can break loose suddenly and scatter dirt or other debris in your eyes. 19. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint and pull the ball joint out of the steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot and replace it if damaged. 20. Remove the cotter pin from the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 21. Install a 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 22. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and lower arm. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6803 23. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 24. Install the 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 25. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and knuckle. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 26. Pull the knuckle outward and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the knuckle by tapping the driveshaft end with a plastic hammer, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one after removal. 27. Separate the wheel hub from the knuckle using the special tools and a hydraulic press. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. - Hold onto the wheel hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. - To prevent damage to the tool, make sure the threads are fully engaged before pressing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6804 28. Remove the circlip and the splash guard from the knuckle. 29. Press the wheel bearing out of the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. 30. Press the wheel bearing inner race from the wheel hub using the special tools, a bearing separator, and a press as shown. NOTE: Wash the knuckle and wheel hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6805 31. Press a new wheel bearing into the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. NOTE: Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 32. Install the circlip securely in the knuckle groove. 33. Install the splash guard and tighten the screws. 34. Install the wheel hub on the knuckle using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press as shown. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6806 35. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and pay particular attention to the following items: a. Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots when installing the knuckle. b. Torque all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. c. Torque the castle nuts to the lower torque specifications, then tighten them only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening. d. Install new cotter pins on the castle nuts after torquing. e. Avoid twisting the sensor wires when installing the wheel sensor. f. Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and the inside of the brake disc. g. Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. h. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6807 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension The rear bearing is to be serviced with the wheel wheel hub as one unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Front Spindle Nut .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 181 Nm (134 ft. lbs.) Rear Spindle Nut .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 181 Nm (134 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information 06-082 December 15, 2006 Applies To: ALL Tubeless Tire Repair Information This service bulletin provides the resource information required to repair tubeless tires on Honda automobiles and light trucks. To properly repair a tire, follow the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) "Puncture Repair Procedures for Passenger and Light Truck Tires" outlined on the RMA wall poster. One wall poster has been provided to your dealership. Additional posters can be ordered through Helm, the RMA website, www.rma.org, or the tire manufacturers. Michelin(R) PAX System(TM), tires can be repaired using the same repair procedures described on the RMA poster. Whenever you repair a PAX System tire, you must inspect the support ring. Refer to the PAX System support ring section of this service bulletin for inspection procedures. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Refer to the tire manufacturer for warranty information. REQUIRED MATERIALS ^ 1/8 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/4 inch Patch-plug with lead wire ^ 1/8 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Plugs (stem)* ^ 1/4 inch Patches* ^ 3/4 inch Patches* ^ Chemical cement ^ Liquid buffer ^ Rim-bead sealer ^ Inner liner sealer REQUIRED TOOLS ^ Tire stitcher, 1-1/2 inch wheel ^ Tire crayons ^ Tire test tank ^ Awl or probe ^ Flexible blade skiving knife ^ 1/8 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ 1/4 inch Carbide tire tool with adapter ^ Low speed buffer with quick release chuck and exhaust hose ^ Carbide buffing wheel with adapter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Tires - Tubless Tire Repair Information > Page 6817 ^ Reversible drill motor (800 RPM MAX) ^ Tire spreader ^ Inspection lamp * For repairable injuries that exceed 25 degrees TIRE REPAIR GUIDELINES Never repair tires worn below 2/32 inch of tread. Never repair a tire without removing the tire from the wheel for internal inspection. Never repair a tire with a tread injury larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Never use only a plug (stem) or a patch only to repair a tire injury. NOTE: If the angle of the tire injury exceeds 25 degrees, you must use the two-piece repair system as recommended by the RMA. MICHELIN PAX SYSTEM SUPPORT RING INSPECTION PAX System support rings are not repairable, under any circumstances, but they can be reused if no damage is found during a thorough inspection. If a PAX System tire ran flat or underinflated, dismount the tire from the wheel and inspect the wheel, tire, and support ring for damage. Refer to the Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin in ISIS. Enter SEARCH BY PUBLICATION, select Job Aids, then select Michelin PAX Support Rings Technical Bulletin from the list. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information Tires: Technician Safety Information WARNING: This vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Refer to the SRS component and wiring location view in order to determine whether you are performing service on or near the SRS components or the SRS wiring. when you are performing service on or near the SRS components or the SRS wiring, refer to the SRS service information. failure to follow warnings could result in possible air bag deployment, personal injury, or otherwise unneeded SRS system repairs. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6820 Tires: Vehicle Damage Warnings CAUTION: Always use the correct fastener in the proper location. When you replace a fastener, use ONLY the exact part number for that application. Honda will call out those fasteners that require a replacement after removal. Honda will also call out the fasteners that require thread lockers or thread sealant. Unless otherwise specified, do not use supplemental coatings (Paints, greases, or other corrosion inhibitors) on threaded fasteners or fastener joint interfaces. Generally, such coatings adversely affect the fastener torque and the joint clamping force, and may damage the fastener. When you install fasteners, use the correct tightening sequence and specifications. Following these instructions can help you avoid damage to parts and systems. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6821 Tires: Description and Operation GENERAL DESCRIPTION Replacement wheels or tires must be equivalent to the originals in load capacity, specified dimension and mounting configuration. Improper size or type may affect bearing life, brake performance, speedometer/odometer calibration, vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis. All model are equipped with metric sized tubeless steel belted radial tires. Correct tire pressures and driving habits have an important influence on tire life. Heavy cornering, excessively rapid acceleration and unnecessary sharp braking increase premature and uneven wear. TREAD WEAR INDICATORS The original equipment tires have built-in tread wear indicators (1) to show when tires need replacement. These indicators may appear as wide bands. When the indicators appear in two or more grooves at three locations, tire replacement is recommended. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes Tires: Testing and Inspection Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF ABNORMAL TIRE AHEAD WEAR AND MAJOR CAUSES: CAUTION: Similar wear patterns can be caused by worn suspension parts, misalignment of wheels and tires, and other suspension related problems. Spotty Wear Wear localized on shoulder sections, and in an extreme cases, the tire becomes polygonal in shape. 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. 3. Play in hub bearings or ball joint. 4. Rotating parts out of balance. Tread Wear One-Sided 1. Rotating parts out of balance. 2. Tire or wheel out of round. 3. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. Localized Tread Wear Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6824 1. Once spotty wear develops in tread due to hard braking or abrupt starting, localized wear tends to be promoted. Shoulder Wear (Generally Wear Develops In Outer Shoulder): 1. Camber or toe-in incorrect. 2. Shoulder wear caused by repeated hard-cornering. Wear In Shoulders At Points Opposed To Each Other 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Play in bearings or ball joint. Premature Wear In Shoulders 1. Flexing of tire excessive due to under-inflation. One Sided Feather Edging 1. Wear caused by repeated hard cornering. 2. Camber or toe-in incorrect. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6825 Tires: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis By Symptom Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6826 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6827 Tires: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis List If the following conditions are noted, rotation is required. 1. Front tire wear is different from rear. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 4. Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. If the following conditions are noted, check the wheel alignment. 1. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Front tire treads have scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of tread ribs or blocks. 4. There is cupping, flat spotting etc. Higher than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Hard ride. 2. Poor steering stability. 3. Rapid and uneven wear at center of the tread. Lower than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Tire squeal on turns. 2. Hard steering. 3. Rapid and uneven wear on the edges of the tread. 4. Tire rim bruises and rupture. 5. Tire cord breakage. 6. High tire temperatures. 7. Reduced handling. 8. Reduced fuel economy. Unequal pressure on same axle can cause: 1. Uneven braking. 2. Steering lead. 3. Reduced handling. 4. Swerve on acceleration. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6828 Tires: Testing and Inspection Irregular and Premature Wear Irregular and/or premature wear has many causes. Some of them are incorrect inflation pressures, lack of tire rotation, poor driving habits or improper wheel alignment. Incorrect inflation is common cause of tire premature wear. NOTE: Due to their design, radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly on the front tires. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. After rotation, be sure to check wheel nut torque, and set tire pressures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6829 Tires: Testing and Inspection Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF ABNORMAL TIRE AHEAD WEAR AND MAJOR CAUSES: CAUTION: Similar wear patterns can be caused by worn suspension parts, misalignment of wheels and tires, and other suspension related problems. Spotty Wear Wear localized on shoulder sections, and in an extreme cases, the tire becomes polygonal in shape. 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. 3. Play in hub bearings or ball joint. 4. Rotating parts out of balance. Tread Wear One-Sided 1. Rotating parts out of balance. 2. Tire or wheel out of round. 3. Hub or knuckle out of round or distorted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6830 Localized Tread Wear 1. Once spotty wear develops in tread due to hard braking or abrupt starting, localized wear tends to be promoted. Shoulder Wear (Generally Wear Develops In Outer Shoulder): 1. Camber or toe-in incorrect. 2. Shoulder wear caused by repeated hard-cornering. Wear In Shoulders At Points Opposed To Each Other 1. Tire or wheel out of round or distorted. 2. Play in bearings or ball joint. Premature Wear In Shoulders 1. Flexing of tire excessive due to under-inflation. One Sided Feather Edging 1. Wear caused by repeated hard cornering. 2. Camber or toe-in incorrect. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6831 Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6832 Part 2 Of 2 Diagnosis List If the following conditions are noted, rotation is required. 1. Front tire wear is different from rear. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 4. Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. If the following conditions are noted, check the wheel alignment. 1. Left and right front tire wear is unequal. 2. Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. 3. Front tire treads have scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of tread ribs or blocks. 4. There is cupping, flat spotting etc. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6833 Higher than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Hard ride. 2. Poor steering stability. 3. Rapid and uneven wear at center of the tread. Lower than recommended pressure can cause: 1. Tire squeal on turns. 2. Hard steering. 3. Rapid and uneven wear on the edges of the tread. 4. Tire rim bruises and rupture. 5. Tire cord breakage. 6. High tire temperatures. 7. Reduced handling. 8. Reduced fuel economy. Unequal pressure on same axle can cause: 1. Uneven braking. 2. Steering lead. 3. Reduced handling. 4. Swerve on acceleration. Irregular and Premature Wear Irregular and/or premature wear has many causes. Some of them are incorrect inflation pressures, lack of tire rotation, poor driving habits or improper wheel alignment. Incorrect inflation is common cause of tire premature wear. NOTE: Due to their design, radial tires tend to wear faster in the shoulder area, particularly on the front tires. This makes regular rotation especially necessary. After rotation, be sure to check wheel nut torque, and set tire pressures. Radial Tire Lead/Pull "Lead/Pull" is vehicle deviation from a straight path, on a level road with no pressure on the steering wheel. Lead is usually caused by: 1. Poorly manufactured radial tires. 2. Uneven brake adjustment. 3. Wheel alignment. The way in which a tire is built can produce lead in a car. An example of this is placement of the belt. Off-center belts on radial tires can cause the tire to develop a side force while rolling straight down the road and the tire will tend to roll like a cone. The "Radial Tire Lead/Pull Correction" chart should be used to make sure that front wheel alignment is not mistaken for tire lead. Rear tires will not cause lead/pull. Radial Tire Waddle Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Abnormal Tire Ahead Wear and Major Causes > Page 6834 Waddle is side-to-side movement at the front and/or rear of the car. It can be caused by the steel belt not being straight within the tire, or by excessive lateral runout of the tire or wheel. It is most noticeable at low speed, about 8 to 48 km/h (5 to 30 mph). It may also cause rough ride at 80 to 113 km/h (50 to 70 mph). The car can be road tested to see which end of the car has the faulty tire. If the tire causing the waddle is on the rear, the rear end of the car will "waddle". From the driver's seat, it feels as if someone is pushing on the side of the car. If the faulty tire is on the front, the waddle is more easily seen. The front sheet metal appears to be moving back and forth. It feels as if the driver's seat is the pivot point in the car. Another more time-consuming method of determining the faulty tire is substituting tire and wheel assemblies that are known to be good. Follow these steps: 1. Drive the car to determine if the waddle is coming from the front or rear. 2. Install tire and wheel assemblies known to be good (from a similar car) in place of those on the end of the car which is waddling. If the waddle cannot be isolated to front or rear, start with the rear tires. 3. Road test again. If improvement is noted, install the original tire and wheel assemblies one at a time until the faulty tire is found. If no improvement is noted, install tires known to be good in place of all four. Then, install the originals one at a time until the faulty tire is found. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel Tires: Service and Repair Separating the Tire From the Wheel Use a tire changing machine to demount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or wheel rim could result. Follow the tire changing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly separate the tire from the wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 6837 Tires: Service and Repair Mounting the Tire on the Wheel CAUTION: Recommended vehicle tire mounting and inflation procedures are especially important with radial tires. Failure to follow these procedures can cause bead deformation in both tube type and tubeless tires due to incorrect bead seating. Bead deformation may lead to chafing, lower sidewall and bead area cracking, eccentric wear, ride vibration and nonretreadable casings. Only use rims approved for radial tire usage by the rim manufacture. 1. Clean the rim. Remove all rust and other foreign material. 2. Lubricate tire beads and rim bead seats with an approved rubber lubricant. CAUTION: Do not use silicon base lubricants. This could cause the tire to slip on the wheel. 3. Attach the tire to the wheel. a. Use a tire changing machine. b. Align air valve and tire balancing match marks (about 8 mm diameter paint mark). Hold in this position and inflate the until the tire beads are firmly seated on the rim against the flanges (steel wheel model only). 4. Inflate the tire to operating pressure. 5. Check the bead seating. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 6838 Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance: a. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. b. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. NOTE: Using wheel balancing equipment. Follow the tire balancing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly balance wheel and tire. Balance weight for the wheel should not exceed 170 g in total, and 140 g is the maximum amount for either side. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 6839 Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation Tire rotation is recommended to equalize wear for longer life. If the following conditions are noted, rotate the tires: - Front tire wear is different from rear. - Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. Check wheel alignment if the following conditions are noted: - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Wear is uneven across the tread of any front tire. - Front tire treads have a scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of the tread ribs or blocks. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 6840 Tires: Service and Repair Separating the Tire From the Wheel Use a tire changing machine to demount tires. Do not use hand tools or tire irons alone to remove the tire from the wheel. Damage to the tire beads or wheel rim could result. Follow the tire changing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly separate the tire from the wheel. Mounting the Tire on the Wheel CAUTION: Recommended vehicle tire mounting and inflation procedures are especially important with radial tires. Failure to follow these procedures can cause bead deformation in both tube type and tubeless tires due to incorrect bead seating. Bead deformation may lead to chafing, lower sidewall and bead area cracking, eccentric wear, ride vibration and nonretreadable casings. Only use rims approved for radial tire usage by the rim manufacture. 1. Clean the rim. Remove all rust and other foreign material. 2. Lubricate tire beads and rim bead seats with an approved rubber lubricant. CAUTION: Do not use silicon base lubricants. This could cause the tire to slip on the wheel. 3. Attach the tire to the wheel. a. Use a tire changing machine. b. Align air valve and tire balancing match marks (about 8 mm diameter paint mark). Hold in this position and inflate the until the tire beads are firmly seated on the rim against the flanges (steel wheel model only). 4. Inflate the tire to operating pressure. 5. Check the bead seating. Balancing Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 6841 Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance: a. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. b. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. NOTE: Using wheel balancing equipment. Follow the tire balancing machine manufacturer's instructions to properly balance wheel and tire. Balance weight for the wheel should not exceed 170 g in total, and 140 g is the maximum amount for either side. Tire Rotation Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 6842 Tire rotation is recommended to equalize wear for longer life. If the following conditions are noted, rotate the tires: - Front tire wear is different from rear. - Uneven wear exists across the tread of any tire. - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Left and right rear tire wear is unequal. Check wheel alignment if the following conditions are noted: - Left and right front tire wear is unequal. - Wear is uneven across the tread of any front tire. - Front tire treads have a scuffed appearance with "feather" edges on one side of the tread ribs or blocks. Inflation of Tires Tire pressure, in cold condition (after vehicle has set for three hours or more, and driven less than one mile) should be checked monthly or before any extended trip. Tire pressure increases approximately 15% when the tires become hot during driving. Tire pressure specification is shown on the label located on the left door lock pillar. NOTE: Check the tire pressure whenever irregular wear is found. Tire inflation greatly affects tire wear. If the alignment check does not reveal any alignment problems, check the condition of the shock absorbers and wheel/tire balance. Tire Replacement TIRE REPLACEMENT When replacement is necessary, the original metric the size should be used. Most metric tire sizes do not have exact corresponding alphanumeric tire sizes. It is recommended that new tires be installed in pairs on the same axle. If necessary to replace only one tire, it should be paired with tire having the most tread, to equalize braking traction. CAUTION: Do not mix different types of tires such as radial, bias and bias-belted tires except in emergencies, because vehicle handling may be seriously affected and may result in loss of control. Tire Dismounting Remove valve cap on valve step and deflate the tire. Then use a tire changing machine to mount or dismount tires. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instruction. Do not use hand tools or tire lever alone to change tires as they may damage the tire beads or wheel rim. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 6843 Tire Mounting Rim bead seats should be cleaned with a wire brush or coarse steel wool to remove lubricants, and light rust. Before mounting a tire, the bead area should be well lubricated with an approved tire lubricant. After mounting, inflate the tire to 196 kPa (28 psi) so that beads are completely seated. Inflate the air to specified pressure and install valve cap to the stem. WARNING: Never stand over tire when inflating. bead may break when bead snaps over rim's safety hump and cause serious personal injury. never exceed 240 kPa (35 psi) pressure when inflating. if 240 kPa (35 psi) pressure will not seat beads, deflate, re-lubricate and re-inflate. over inflation may cause the bead to break and cause serious personal injury. Tire Repair There are many different materials on the market used to repair tires. Manufacturers have published detailed instructions on how and when to repair tires. These instructions can be obtained from the tire manufacturer if they are not included with the repair kit. Wheel Inspection Damaged wheels and wheels with excessive run-out must be replaced. Wheel run out at rim (Base on hub Bore): General Balance Procedure Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Separating the Tire From the Wheel > Page 6844 Deposits of mud, etc. must be cleaned from the inside of the rim. The tire should be inspected for the following: match mount paint marks, bent rims, bulges, irregular tire wear, proper wheel size and inflation pressure. Then balance according to the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. There are two types of wheel and tire balance. Static balance is the equal distribution of weight around the wheel. Assemblies that are statically unbalanced cause a bouncing action called tramp. This condition will eventually cause uneven tire wear. Dynamic balance is the equal distribution of weight on each side of the wheel center-line so that when the tire spins there is no tendency for the assembly to move from side to side. Assemblies that are dynamically unbalanced may cause shimmy. WARNING: Stones should be removed from the tread to avoid operator injury during spin balancing and to obtain a good balance. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications Wheels: Specifications Wheel Runout Wheel Runout Axial Runout Steel Wheel 0.0 to 1.0 mm Aluminum Wheel 0.0 to 0.7 mm Service Limit 2.0 mm Maximum Radial Runout Steel Wheel 0.0 to 1.0 mm Aluminum Wheel 0.0 to 0.7 mm Service Limit 1.5 mm Maximum Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6848 Wheels: Testing and Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Check for bent or deformed wheels. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the wheel runout by turning the wheel. Front And Rear Wheel Axial Runout: Standard: Steel Wheel: 0 -1.0 mm 10 - 0.04 inch) - Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service Limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 inch) Front And Rear Wheel Radial Runout: Standard: Steel Wheel: 0 -1.0 mm (0 - 0.04 inch) - Aluminum Wheel: 0 - 0.7 mm (0 - 0.03 inch) Service Limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) 5. If the wheel runout is more than the service limit, replace the wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications End Play End Play End Play Front 0.0 to 0.5 mm Rear 0.0 to 0.5 mm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6852 Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle off the ground, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts. 3. Attach the dial gauge as shown. 4. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc in or outward. Front/Rear: Standard: 0 - 0.05 mm (0 - 0.002 inch) 5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6853 Wheel Bearing: Adjustments Wheel bearings and hub on these models are an integral assembly and bearings cannot be adjusted. If hub endplay exceeds 0.002 inch with spindle nut properly tightened, hub and bearing assembly should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension TOOL REQUIRED - 07MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint remover, 28 mm - 07JAF-SH20110 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Pilot, 38 mm - 07JAF-SH20120 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Shaft, 22.4 x 25.4 mm - 07749-0010000 Driver - 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm - 07GAF-SE00401 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Base - 07947-6340201 Driver Attachment 58 x 72 mm - 07965-SD90100 Support Base - 07GAF-SE00200 Wheel Hub Dis/Assembly Guide Attachment CAUTION: - Replace the self-locking nuts after removal. - The vehicle should be on the ground before any bolts or nuts connected to rubber mounts or bushings are tightened. - Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the nut by loosening. NOTE: - Use only genuine Honda wheel weights for aluminum wheels. Non-genuine wheel weights may corrode and damage the aluminum wheels. - On the aluminum wheels, remove the center cap from the inside of the wheel after removing the wheel. - Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and brake disc. - Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and wheel. - Wipe off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball joint. 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6856 2. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations. 3. Remove the wheel nuts and wheel. 4. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut, then remove the nut. 5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts. 6. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and hang the caliper assembly to one side. CAUTION: To prevent accidental damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage. 7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws. 8. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts into the disc to push it away from the wheel hub. NOTE: Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6857 9. Remove the brake disc from the knuckle. 10. Check the front wheel hub for damage and cracks. 11. Remove the wheel sensor from the knuckle (for cars with ABS). NOTE: Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector. Use the special tool to separate the ball joints from the suspension or steering arm. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot. 12. Clean any dirt or grease off the ball joint. 13. Remove the cotter pin from the steering arm and remove the nut. 14. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown. This will ease installation of the tool and prevent damage to the pressure bolt threads. 15. Install a 10 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the ball joint. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6858 16. Install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws carefully, making sure you do not damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the pressure bolt. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 17. Once the special tool is in place, turn the adjusting bolt as necessary to make the jaws parallel. Then hand-tighten the pressure bolt, and recheck the jaws to make sure they are still Parallel. NOTE: After making the adjustment to the adjusting bolt, be sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in this position to the allow the jaw to pivot. 18. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint shaft pops loose from the steering arm. Wear eye protection. The ball joint can break loose suddenly and scatter dirt or other debris in your eyes. 19. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint and pull the ball joint out of the steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot and replace it if damaged. 20. Remove the cotter pin from the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 21. Install a 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 22. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and lower arm. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6859 23. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut. 24. Install the 12 mm hex nut on the ball joint. Be sure that the hex nut is flush with the ball joint pin end, or the threaded section of the ball joint pin might be damaged by the ball joint remover. 25. Use the special tool to separate the ball joint and knuckle. NOTE: If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint. 26. Pull the knuckle outward and remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the knuckle by tapping the driveshaft end with a plastic hammer, then remove the knuckle. NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one after removal. 27. Separate the wheel hub from the knuckle using the special tools and a hydraulic press. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. - Hold onto the wheel hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear. - To prevent damage to the tool, make sure the threads are fully engaged before pressing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6860 28. Remove the circlip and the splash guard from the knuckle. 29. Press the wheel bearing out of the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. 30. Press the wheel bearing inner race from the wheel hub using the special tools, a bearing separator, and a press as shown. NOTE: Wash the knuckle and wheel hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6861 31. Press a new wheel bearing into the knuckle using the special tools and a press as shown. NOTE: Place the wheel bearing on the knuckle with the pack seal (metal color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage the sleeve of the pack seal. 32. Install the circlip securely in the knuckle groove. 33. Install the splash guard and tighten the screws. 34. Install the wheel hub on the knuckle using the special tools shown and a hydraulic press as shown. CAUTION: Take care not to distort the splash guard. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6862 35. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and pay particular attention to the following items: a. Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots when installing the knuckle. b. Torque all mounting hardware to the specified torque values. c. Torque the castle nuts to the lower torque specifications, then tighten them only far enough to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening. d. Install new cotter pins on the castle nuts after torquing. e. Avoid twisting the sensor wires when installing the wheel sensor. f. Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surfaces of the front wheel hub and the inside of the brake disc. g. Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel. h. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6863 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension The rear bearing is to be serviced with the wheel wheel hub as one unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Front Spindle Nut .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 181 Nm (134 ft. lbs.) Rear Spindle Nut .......................................................................................................................................... ....................................... 181 Nm (134 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications TIGHTENING SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Nut ............................................................................................................................................ ................................................... 110 Nm (80 ft. lbs.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Air Mix Control Motor Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Air Mix Control Motor Below Right Side of Center Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 6880 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Mode Control Motor Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 6881 Behind Left Side of Front Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 6882 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Recirculation Control Motor Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Air Mix Control Motor > Page 6883 Behind Glove Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6884 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mode Control Motor Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Mode Control Motor 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the mode control motor. 2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal, and ground the No.7 terminal. CAUTION: Never connect the battery in the opposite direction. 3. Using a jumper wire, connect the No. terminal individually to the No.2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 terminals in that order. Each time the connection is made, the mode control motor should run smoothly and stop. NOTE: If the mode control motor does not run when jumping the first terminal, jump that terminal again after jumping the other terminals. The mode control motor is OK if it runs when jumping the first terminal again. 4. If the mode control motor does not run in step 3, remove it, then check the mode control linkage and doors for smooth movement. If they move smoothly, replace the mode control motor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mode Control Motor > Page 6887 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Recirculation Control Motor 1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the recirculation control motor. 2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal, and ground the No.2 and No.4 terminals; the recirculation control motor should run smoothly. CAUTION: Never connect the battery in the opposite direction. 3. Disconnect the No.2 or No.4 terminals from ground; the recirculation control motor should stop at FRESH or RECIRCULATE. NOTE: Don't cycle the recirculation control motor for a long time. 4. If the recirculation control motor does not run in step 2, remove it, then check the recirculation control linkage and door for smooth movement. If they move smoothly, replace the recirculation control motor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fresh Air/Recirculation Actuator Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Fresh Air/Recirculation Actuator 1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the recirculation control motor, and remove the wire harness clip from it. 2. Remove the two self-tapping screws and the recirculation control motor. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. After installation, make sure the recirculation control motor rung smoothly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fresh Air/Recirculation Actuator > Page 6890 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Control Motor 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the mode control motor. 2. Remove the rod from the arm of the mode control motor. 3. Remove the two self-tapping screws and the mode control motor. 4. Install in the reverse order of removal. After installation, make sure the mode control motor runs smoothly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Air Door Cable: Locations Illustrated Index Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in Air Bag Systems before performing repairs or service. Defroster-activated A/C System Turning the defroster on activates the A/C and sets the air flow mode to FRESH. It is possible to change the air flow to RECIRCULATE by pressing the A/C button or the FRESH/RECIRCULATE by pressing the A/C button or the FRESH/RECIRCULATE button. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6894 Air Door Cable: Adjustments 1. From under the hood, disconnect the heater valve cable from the heater valve. 2. From under the dash, disconnect the air mix control cable housing from the cable clamp. 3. Set the temperature control lever to MAX. COOL. 4. With the air mix control cable attached to the air mix control arm, gently pull on the outer cable housing to fully close the door and to remove any slack in the cable. Don't pull to hard, or the temperature control lever will move. 5. Hold the air mix control arm against the stop, then snap the air mix control cable housing into the cable clamp. 6. From under the hood, move the heater valve arm to the fully closed position, then attach the heater valve cable to the heater valve arm. 7. Hold the heater valve arm in the closed position, and gently pull on the heater cable outer housing to take up any slack, then install the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6895 Air Door Cable: Service and Repair 1. Cut the inner cable on the lever side of the cable holder, then remove both pieces of the inner cable. 2. Using a sharp knife, cut completely through the end of the cable housing at the two locations. 3. Slide the large section of the cable housing out of the cable holder, being careful not to damage the cable stops. 4. Carefully remove the cut pieces of the cable housing with a small flat tip screwdriver. 5. Hook the tip of the new air mix control cable to the temperature control lever, then push the cable housing into the cable holder until it locks into place. NOTE: After assembly, check that the temperature control lever slides smoothly through the full stroke from right to left. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the A/C thermostat. 2. Connect battery power to the No.3 terminal, ground the No.2 terminal, and connect a test light between the No.1 and No.3 terminals. NOTE: Use a 12 V, 3W - 18W test light. 3. Dip the A/C thermostat into a cup filled with ice water, and check the test light. Serpentine-type evaporator The light should go off at 36 - 39 °F (2 - 4 °C) or less, and should come on at 39 - 41 °F (4 - 5 °C) or more. Laminate-type evaporator The light should go off at 39 - 43 °F (4 - 6 °C) or less, and should come on at 43 - 45 °F (6 - 7 °C) or more. If the light doesn't come on and go off as specified, replace the A/C thermostat. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Blower (Heater) Motor Gets Hot and Blows A Fuse Blower Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Blower (Heater) Motor Gets Hot and Blows A Fuse SOURCE: Honda Service News November 2003 TITLE: Heater Blower Motor Gets Hot or Blows a Fuse APPLIES TO: 1990-04 Accords, 1992-04 Civics, 1997-04 CR-Vs, 2003 Elements, 2000-04 Insights, 1995-04 Odysseys, 1996-02 Passports, 2003-04 Pilots, 1997-01 Preludes, and 2000-04 S2000s SERVICE TIP: A blocked cooling hose for the heater blower motor can cause the motor to overheat, draw more current, blow a fuse, or even melt its plastic impeller. Before you order a replacement blower motor, make sure the cooling hose isn't blocked. On some models, you'll find the cooling hose molded into the blower motor housing; on other models, it's a separate piece. Check the S/M for the vehicle you're working on to determine the actual location of the cooling hose. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations > Blower Motor Blower Motor: Locations Blower Motor Below Right Side Of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations > Blower Motor > Page 6905 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6908 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6909 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6910 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6911 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6912 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6913 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6914 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6915 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6916 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6917 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6918 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6919 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6920 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6921 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6922 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6923 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6924 Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor (Part 1 Of 3) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6925 Blower Motor (Part 2 Of 3) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6926 Blower Motor (Part 3 Of 3) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Unit Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Unit Removal and Installation SRS Main Harness CAUTION: All SRS electrical wiring harnesses are covered with yellow outer insulation. Before disconnecting the SRS wire harness, install the short connector (5) on the airbag (5). Replace the entire affected SRS harness assembly it it has an open circuit or damaged wiring. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the glove box and glove box frame. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Unit > Page 6929 3. Remove the tapping screws (2) and remove the heater duct. 4. Remove the A/C band and the evaporator. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Unit > Page 6930 5. Remove the mounting bolts (3). 6. Disconnect the connectors from the blower motor. resistor then remove the blower. 7. Install the blower in the reverse order of removal and make sure there is no air leakage. NOTE: Before assembly make cure that the air door and linkage moves smoothly without binding. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Unit > Page 6931 Blower Unit Components Replacement Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Unit > Page 6932 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor NOTE: The blower motor, recirculation control motor, end resistor can be replaced without removing the blower assembly SRS Main Harness CAUTION: All SRS electrical wiring harnesses are covered with yellow outer insulation. Before disconnecting the SRS wire harness, install the short connector (5) on the airbag (5). Replace the entire affected SRS harness assembly it it has an open circuit or damaged wiring. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the glove box and glove box frame. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blower Unit > Page 6933 6. Disconnect the connectors from the blower motor. resistor then remove the blower. 7. Install the blower in the reverse order of removal and make sure there is no air leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6937 Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Blower Motor Relay Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Blower motor relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Blower Motor Relay > Page 6940 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor High Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Blower motor high relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6948 Blower Motor Switch: Connector Locations Underside of Heater Control Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6951 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6952 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6953 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6954 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6955 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6956 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6957 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6958 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6959 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6960 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6961 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6962 Blower Motor Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6963 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6964 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6965 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6966 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6967 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6968 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Compressor Clutch: Component Locations Left Front Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6974 Wiring/Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Nippondenso Compressor Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Nippondenso Compressor - Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch set. - Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag. - Measure the clearance between the pulley and the pressure plate all the way around. If the clearance is not within specified limits, the pressure plate must be removed and shims added or removed as required, following the procedure. Clearance: 0.5 ± 0.15 mm (0.020 ± 0.006 in) NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm and 0.5 mm. - Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not within specifications, replace the field coil. Field Coil Resistance: 3.4 to 3.8 Ohms at 20 °C (68 °F) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Nippondenso Compressor > Page 6977 Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Sanden Compressor - Check the plated parts of the armature plate for color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch set. - Check the rotor pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the rotor pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag. - Measure the clearance between the rotor pulley and the armature plate all the way around. If the clearance is not within specified limits, the armature plate must be removed and shims added or removed as required, following the procedure. Clearance: 0.5 ± 0.15 mm (0.020 ± 0.006 in) NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm and 0.5 mm - Release the field coil connector from the holder, then disconnect it. Check the thermal protector for continuity. If there is no continuity, replace the Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Nippondenso Compressor > Page 6978 thermal protector. NOTE: The thermal protector will have no continuity above 251.6 to 262.4 °F (122 to 128 °C). When the temperature drops below 240.8 to 219.8 °F (116 to 104 °C), the thermal protector will have continuity. - Check resistance of the field coil. Field Coil Resistance: 3.05 to 3.35 Ohms at 68 °F (20 °C) If resistance is not within specifications, replace the field coil. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Nippondenso Compressor Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Nippondenso Compressor 1. Remove the center bolt while holding the pressure plate with the special tool. 2. Remove the pressure plate and shims, taking care not to lose the shims. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Nippondenso Compressor > Page 6981 3. Remove the snap ring B with snap ring pliers, then remove the pulley. Be careful not to damage the pulley and compressor. 4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground terminal. Remove the snap ring A with snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil. Be careful not to damage the field coil and compressor. 5. Reassemble the compressor clutch in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items: - Install the field coil with the wire side facing down. - Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces with non-petroleum solvent. - Install new snap rings, and make sure they are fully seated in the groove. - Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's reassembled. - Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be damaged by pulley. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Nippondenso Compressor > Page 6982 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Sanden Compressor 1. Remove the center nut while holding the armature plate with the tool. 2. Remove the armature plate by pulling it up by hand. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Nippondenso Compressor > Page 6983 3. Remove snap ring B with snap ring pliers. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the rotor pulley and compressor during removal/installation. - Once snap ring B is removed, replace it with a new one. 4. Remove the rotor pulley from the shaft with a puller and the special tool. NOTE: Place the claws of the puller on the back of the rotor pulley, not on the belt area; otherwise the rotor pulley can be damaged. 5. Remove the screw from the field coil ground terminal then disconnect the field coil connector. Remove snap ring A with snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the field coil and compressor during remove/installation. - Once snap ring A is removed, replace it with a new one. - When installing the field coil, align the boss on the field coil with the hole in the compressor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Nippondenso Compressor > Page 6984 6. Position the rotor pulley squarely over the field coil. Press the rotor pulley onto the compressor boss with the special tool. If the rotor pulley does not press on straight, remove it, and check the rotor pulley and compressor boss for burrs or damage. CAUTION: Maximum press load: 39,200 kPa 1400 kg/sq.cm, 5,690 psi) 7. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Make note of the following items. - Install the field coil with the wire side facing down. - Clean the rotor pulley and compressor sliding surfaces with non-petroleum solvent. - Make sure the snap rings are fully seated in the groove. - Make sure that the rotor pulley turns smoothly after it's reassembled. - Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be damaged by the rotor pulley. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Component Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6989 Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 6990 Wiring/Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6991 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation A/C Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from the air conditioning system, it delays the compressor from being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6992 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 A/C compressor clutch relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Disconnect the condenser fan connector from the A/C wire harness, then remove the A/C wire harness from the condenser fan shroud. 3. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the discharge and condenser lines from the condenser. NOTE: Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust contamination. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6996 4. Remove the bolt from the suction hose bracket, and remove the two bolts and the upper mount bracket. Remove the condenser assembly by lifting it up. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins when removing the condenser assembly. 5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. - If you're installing a new condenser, add refrigerant oil (SANDEN, SP-10 or DENSO, ND-OIL 8). - Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. NOTE: Be sure to use the right O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Be careful not to damage the condenser fins when installing the condenser assembly. - Charge the system and test its performance. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Specifications Condenser Fan: Specifications Condenser Fan Condenser Fan Mounting Bolt Torque 9.8 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7000 Condenser Fan: Locations Lower Right Front of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Condenser Fan: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7003 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7004 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7005 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7006 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7007 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7008 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7009 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7010 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7011 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7012 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7013 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7014 Condenser Fan: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7015 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7016 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7017 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7018 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7019 Condenser Fan: Description and Operation Radiator Fan Voltage is provided at all times to the radiator fan relay (contacts) through fuse 57. With the ignition switch in ON (II), voltage is provided to the coil of the relay through fuse 17. The radiator fan relay can be grounded through either the engine coolant temperature switch or the engine control module (ECM) or Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The engine coolant temperature switch grounds the radiator fan relay (coil) when the engine coolant temperature exceeds 199 °F (83 °C). The switch opens when coolant temperature decreases 3 ° - 8 °C. Condenser Fan Voltage is provided at all times to the condenser fan relay (contacts) through fuse 56. With the ignition switch in ON (II), voltage is provided to the coil of the relay through fuse 17. When you push the A/C switch and put the heater fan switch in 1, 2, 3, or 4 position, the A/C thermostat comes on, the condenser fan relay energizes, and the condenser fan motor runs. A/C Thermostat The A/C thermostat is located on the evaporator housing. The A/C thermostat turns off the A/C compressor clutch if the temperature at the evaporator goes below 3 °C (37 °F). This prevents condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins and blocking the air delivery into the passenger compartment. If the temperature goes below 3 °C (37 °F) turning off the A/C thermostat, ground will be removed from the condenser fan relay. This will deenergize the relay and remove voltage from the condenser fan motor causing the fan to stop running. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7020 Condenser Fan: Testing and Inspection Condenser Fan (Part 1 Of 3) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7021 Condenser Fan (Part 2 Of 3) Condenser Fan(Part 3 Of 3) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Component Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7026 Fan Controls Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7027 Wiring/Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7028 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 Condenser fan relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Shroud > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Condenser Fan Shroud: > 98-028 > Sep > 98 > A/C Condenser Fan Motor Inoperative Condenser Fan Shroud: Customer Interest A/C Condenser Fan Motor - Inoperative 98-028 September 29, 1998 Applies To: 1996-98 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Condenser Fan Motor Inoperative (Supersedes 98-028, dated April 14, 1998) SYMPTOM The No.56 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box is blown, the condenser fan does not work, or the A/C performs poorly. PROBABLE CAUSE The slope angle of the condenser fan shroud allows water to puddle at the bottom of the shroud. During the winter months the standing water freezes, causing the condenser fan motor to stall. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996 Civic - ALL 1997 Civic - ALL except Japan Production with factory A/C 1998 Civic Ohio Production with factory A/C: 2-door EX - thru VIN 1HGEJ....WL064136 4-door LX and EX - thru VIN 1HGEJ....WL025004 Canada Production with factory A/C: 4-door LX and EX - thru VIN 2HGEJ....WH561523 Dealer Installed A/C: ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the condenser fan motor and, if necessary, the shroud with the parts listed under PARTS INFORMATION. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 80161-S04-000 H/C 4780243 Defect code: 032 Contention code: B02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. PARTS INFORMATION Condenser Fan Motor: P/N 80151-SR3-013, H/C 4323192 Condenser Fan Shroud: P/N 80161-504-000, H/C 4780243 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Shroud > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Condenser Fan Shroud: > 98-028 > Sep > 98 > A/C Condenser Fan Motor Inoperative > Page 7037 REPAIR PROCEDURE *1. Under the hood, remove these items:* *2. Remove the condenser fan shroud upper mounting bolts, and disconnect the connectors and wire harness clips:* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Shroud > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Condenser Fan Shroud: > 98-028 > Sep > 98 > A/C Condenser Fan Motor Inoperative > Page 7038 *3. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. Move the splash shield out of the way.* *4. From under the vehicle, disconnect the connectors and wire harness clips:* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Shroud > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Condenser Fan Shroud: > 98-028 > Sep > 98 > A/C Condenser Fan Motor Inoperative > Page 7039 *5. Remove the condenser fan shroud:* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Shroud > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Condenser Fan Shroud: > 98-028 > Sep > 98 > A/C Condenser Fan Motor Inoperative > Page 7040 6. Check the slope angle at the bottom of the condenser fan shroud. ^ If the condenser fan shroud has the original slope angle, replace both the condenser fan shroud and the condenser fan motor with the parts listed under PARTS INFORMATION. ^ If the condenser fan shroud has the revised slope angle, replace only the condenser fan motor with the part listed under PARTS INFORMATION, and continue with normal troubleshooting to find the cause of the fan motor failure. *7. Reinstall the condenser fan shroud in reverse order of removal. 8. Operate the A/C to confirm that the condenser fan works and the A/C performs properly.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Shroud > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Condenser Fan Shroud: > 98-028 > Sep > 98 > A/C Condenser Fan Motor - Inoperative Condenser Fan Shroud: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C Condenser Fan Motor - Inoperative 98-028 September 29, 1998 Applies To: 1996-98 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Condenser Fan Motor Inoperative (Supersedes 98-028, dated April 14, 1998) SYMPTOM The No.56 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box is blown, the condenser fan does not work, or the A/C performs poorly. PROBABLE CAUSE The slope angle of the condenser fan shroud allows water to puddle at the bottom of the shroud. During the winter months the standing water freezes, causing the condenser fan motor to stall. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996 Civic - ALL 1997 Civic - ALL except Japan Production with factory A/C 1998 Civic Ohio Production with factory A/C: 2-door EX - thru VIN 1HGEJ....WL064136 4-door LX and EX - thru VIN 1HGEJ....WL025004 Canada Production with factory A/C: 4-door LX and EX - thru VIN 2HGEJ....WH561523 Dealer Installed A/C: ALL CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the condenser fan motor and, if necessary, the shroud with the parts listed under PARTS INFORMATION. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 80161-S04-000 H/C 4780243 Defect code: 032 Contention code: B02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. PARTS INFORMATION Condenser Fan Motor: P/N 80151-SR3-013, H/C 4323192 Condenser Fan Shroud: P/N 80161-504-000, H/C 4780243 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Shroud > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Condenser Fan Shroud: > 98-028 > Sep > 98 > A/C Condenser Fan Motor - Inoperative > Page 7046 REPAIR PROCEDURE *1. Under the hood, remove these items:* *2. Remove the condenser fan shroud upper mounting bolts, and disconnect the connectors and wire harness clips:* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Shroud > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Condenser Fan Shroud: > 98-028 > Sep > 98 > A/C Condenser Fan Motor - Inoperative > Page 7047 *3. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. Move the splash shield out of the way.* *4. From under the vehicle, disconnect the connectors and wire harness clips:* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Shroud > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Condenser Fan Shroud: > 98-028 > Sep > 98 > A/C Condenser Fan Motor - Inoperative > Page 7048 *5. Remove the condenser fan shroud:* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan Shroud > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Condenser Fan Shroud: > 98-028 > Sep > 98 > A/C Condenser Fan Motor - Inoperative > Page 7049 6. Check the slope angle at the bottom of the condenser fan shroud. ^ If the condenser fan shroud has the original slope angle, replace both the condenser fan shroud and the condenser fan motor with the parts listed under PARTS INFORMATION. ^ If the condenser fan shroud has the revised slope angle, replace only the condenser fan motor with the part listed under PARTS INFORMATION, and continue with normal troubleshooting to find the cause of the fan motor failure. *7. Reinstall the condenser fan shroud in reverse order of removal. 8. Operate the A/C to confirm that the condenser fan works and the A/C performs properly.* Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7054 Control Assembly: Connector Locations Underside of Heater Control Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Assembly: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7057 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7058 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7059 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7060 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7061 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7062 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7063 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7064 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7065 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7066 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7067 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7068 Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7069 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7070 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7071 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7072 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7073 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7074 Control Assembly: Description and Operation The air delivery system directs the flow of air used by the heater and air conditioner systems. Mode Selection Mode selection is controlled by the mode switches in the heater control panel and the mode control motor. When you select a specific mode, voltage is applied through the dimming circuit to the LED, which comes ON, indicating the mode selected. Ground is provided to the mode control motor through that mode switch. The motor then runs until the air control door reaches the proper position. Fresh/Recirculation Selection When you press the fresh or recirculation button, a ground signal is sent from the heater control panel to the recirculation control motor. The motor then runs until the recirculation door reaches the proper position. Battery voltage is also applied through the dimming circuit to the corresponding LED, and the LED comes ON. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7075 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Control Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover, the glove box and the center dashboard lower cover . 2. Disconnect the air mix control cable from the heater unit. 3. Remove the rear window defogger switch, the hazard warning switch and the audio unit. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the heater control panel. Remove the five self-tapping screws and the center panel together with the heater control panel. NOTE: The locking tabs are on the bottom of the connectors. 5. Remove the four self-tapping screws and the heater control panel. 6. Install in the reverse order to removal. Adjust the air mix control cable and the heater valve cable . Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7078 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7083 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7084 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7085 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7086 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7087 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7088 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7089 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7090 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7091 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7092 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7093 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7094 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7095 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7096 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7097 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7098 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7099 Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Speed (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7100 Blower Motor Speed (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Right Side of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Specifications Evaporator Case: Specifications Evaporator case Evaporator case Mounting Torque 10 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Evaporator Case: Service and Repair Removal and Installation 1. Move the temperature control to "HOT." '96-98: Slide the temperature control lever. '99-00: Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the temperature control knob. Turn the ignition switch off. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station . 4. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the suction and receiver lines from the evaporator. NOTE: Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust contamination. 5. Remove the glove box . 6. Remove the self-tapping screw and the passenger's dashboard lower cover. Remove the bolt, the nut and the knee bolster, then remove the five bolts and the glove box frame. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7109 7. Disconnect the connector from the A/C thermostat, and remove the wire harness from the evaporator. Remove the four self-tapping screws, the mounting bolt and the mounting nut. Disconnect the drain hose, then remove the evaporator. 8. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. - If you're installing a new evaporator, add refrigerant oil (SANDEN, SP-10 or DENSO, ND-OIL 8). - Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. NOTE: Be sure to use the right O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Apply sealant to the grommets. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. - Charge the system and test its performance. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7110 Evaporator Case: Service and Repair Overhaul 1. Pull out the A/C thermostat sensor from the evaporator fins. 2. Remove the self-tapping screws and clamps from the housings. 3. Carefully separate the housings, then remove the evaporator. 4. If necessary, remove the expansion valve. NOTE: When loosening the expansion valve nuts, use a second wrench to hold the expansion valve or the evaporator pipe. Otherwise, they can be damaged. 5. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Make note of following items. - Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. NOTE: Be sure to use the right O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage. - Install the expansion valve capillary tube so that it is in direct contact with the suction line. Then wrap with tape. - Reinstall the A/C thermostat sensor to its original location. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Specifications Evaporator Core: Specifications SANDEN Lubricant type SP - 10 (P/N 38897 - P13 - A01AH or 38899 -P13 -A01) (For Refrigerant: HFC-134a (R-134a)) Lubricant capacity 45 Nm NIPPONDENSO Lubricant type ND - OIL 8 (P/N 38899 - PR7 - 003 (For Refrigerant: HFC-134a (R-134a)) Lubricant capacity 60 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Photo 82 Behind Right Side Of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7117 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation The A/C thermostat is located on the evaporator housing. The A/C thermostat turns OFF the A/C compressor clutch if the temperature at the evaporator goes below 3°C (37°F). This prevents condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins and blocking the air delivery into the passenger compartment. The blower motor will keep running when the sensor turns OFF the compressor. If the temperature goes below 3°C (37°F) turning OFF the A/C thermostat, ground will be removed from the condenser fan relay. This will deenergize the relay and remove voltage from voltage from the condenser fan motor causing the fan to stop running. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7118 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the A/C thermostat. 2. Connect battery power to the No.3 terminal, ground the No.2 terminal, and connect a test light between the No.1 and No.3 terminals. NOTE: Use a 12 V,3 W-18 W test light. 3. Dip the A/C thermostat into a cup filled with ice water, and check the test light. Serpentine-type evaporator The light should go off at 36 - 39°F (2 - 4°C) or less, and should come on at 39 - 41°F (4 - 5°C) or more. Laminate-type evaporator The light should go off at 39 - 43°F (4 - 5°C) or less, and should come on at 43 - 45°F (6 - 7°C) or more. If the light doesn't come on and go off as specified, replace the A/C thermostat. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Expansion Valve: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect battery ground cable and discharge A/C system using refrigerant recovery equipment. 2. Disconnect receiver and suction lines from evaporator and plug lines. 3. Remove glove box and frame. 4. Disconnect electrical connector from thermostat switch. Fig. 22 Removing Evaporator Housing Supports 5. Remove self-tapping screws and bands, Fig. 22. Fig. 23 Evaporator Housing Removal 6. Remove mounting bolts and evaporator housing, Fig. 23. 7. Remove evaporator sensor from the evaporator fins. 8. Separate housings, then remove evaporator cover. 9. The expansion valve can be removed after the evaporator has been lifted out of the case. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7122 9. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: a. Use new O-rings when installing expansion valve and connecting refrigerant lines. b. Install expansion valve and secure valve sensor against suction line with tape. c. Reinstall evaporator sensor in its original location. d. Ensure there is no air leakage in the evaporator housing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air Heater Blows Cold Air; A/C Blows Warm Air NOTE: This article applies to all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose (P/N 95005-35008-10M, H/C 2325058), and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air/A/C Blows Hot Air > Page 7128 Heater Control Valve Cable: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air SOURCE: Honda Service News TITLE: Heater Blows Cold Air, A/C Blows Warm Air APPLIES TO: all A/C-equipped Honda models that use a heater valve cable. SERVICE TIP: Got a vehicle in your shop that blows cold air from the heater or warm air from the A/C ? The problem could just be the heater valve cable has slipped off the heater valve arm. There's a real easy fix for this problem. Slip the heater valve cable back onto the heater valve arm. Then cut yourself a 10 mm length of 3.5 mm vacuum hose and slide it onto the arm. This holds the cable on the arm nice and snug so it won't slip off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Control Valve > Heater Control Valve Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7129 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Locations Heater Core: Locations 96-98 Models SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Defroster-activated A/C System Turning the defroster on activates the A/C and sets the air flow mode to FRESH. It is possible to turn the A/C off or to change the air flow to RECIRCULATE by pressing the A/C button or the FRESH/RECIRCULATE button. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Heater Core: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7135 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7136 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7137 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7138 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7139 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7140 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7141 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7142 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7143 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7144 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7145 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7146 Heater Core: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7147 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7148 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7149 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7150 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7151 Heater Core: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable, then drain cooling system. 3. Snap open cable clip, then disconnect heater valve cable from heater valve. 4. Disconnect heater hoses at heater, then remove heater unit mounting nut from engine compartment side. 5. Remove instrument panel. 6. Remove heat duct or evaporator and steering column bracket. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7152 7. Remove clip, heater mounting nuts and heater assembly. Fig. 16 Heater Core Removal Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7153 8. Remove heater core cover attaching screws, then the cover, Fig. 16. 9. Remove pipe clamp and damper arm attaching screws. 10. Pull heater core from heater housing. Ensure care is taken not to bend inlet and outlet pipes during removal. 11. Reverse procedure to install, noting the following: a. Do not interchange inlet and outlet hoses. b. Connect all cables and ensure they are properly adjusted. 12. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 13. After refilling cooling system, bleed cooling system. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation Heater Core Case: Service and Repair Removal and Installation SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. From under the hood, open the clamp, then disconnect the heater valve cable from the heater valve arm. Turn the heater valve arm to the fully opened position as shown. 3. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator. WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot; the engine coolant is under pressure and could severely scald you. 4. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater unit. CAUTION: Engine coolant will damage paint. Quickly rinse any spilled engine coolant from painted surfaces. NOTE: Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7158 5. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. NOTE: When removing the mounting nut, take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines, the brake lines, etc. 6. Remove the dashboard. 7. Remove the heater duct or evaporator. 8. Disconnect the connectors from the mode control motor and air mix control motor ('99 - 00 models), then remove the wire harness clips and wire harness from the heater unit. Remove the clip from the heater duct, then remove the two mounting nuts and the heater unit. 9. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make note of the following items. - Apply sealant to the grommets. - Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses. Make sure that the clamps are secure. - Refill the cooling system with engine coolant. - Connect all cables, and make sure they are properly adjusted. - Make sure that there is no air leakage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7159 Heater Core Case: Service and Repair Overhaul 1. Remove the two self-tapping screws and the heater core cover. 2. Pull out the grommet from the heater core pipes. 3. Remove the self-tapping screw and the clamp. 4. Pull out the heater core from the heater unit. NOTE: Be careful not to bend the inlet and outlet pipes during heater core removal. 5. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor (Nippondenso) High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor (Nippondenso) 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station. 2. Remove the relief valve and the O-ring. Plug the opening to keep foreign matter from entering the system and the compressor oil from running out. 3. Clean the mating surfaces. 4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing it. 5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief valve. 6. Charge the system and test its performance. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor (Nippondenso) > Page 7164 High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor (Sanden) 1. Remove the relief valve and the O-ring. NOTE: Do not let the compressor oil run out. - Make sure that no foreign matter enters the system. 2. Clean the mating surfaces. 3. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing it. NOTE: To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils. - Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption. - Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. 4. Install and tighten the relief valve. 5. Charge the system and test its performance. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Hose/Line HVAC: Mechanical Specifications Discharge hose to the compressor 9.8 Nm 6 x 1.00 mm Discharge hose to the condenser 9.8 Nm Condenser pipe to the condenser 9.8 Nm Condenser pipe to the receiver/dryer 9.8 Nm Receiver pipe A to the receiver/dryer 9.8 Nm Receiver pipe B to the receiver pipe A 13 Nm Receiver pipe C to the receiver pipe B 13 Nm Receiver pipe C to the Evaporator 9.8 Nm Suction pipe B to the Evaporator 9.8 Nm Suction pipe A to the Suction pipe B 31 Nm Suction hose to the Suction pipe A 31 Nm Suction hose to the Compressor 9.8 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 7169 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 7170 Hose/Line HVAC: Capacity Specifications SANDEN Line or hose 10 mL NIPPONDENSO Line or hose 10 mL Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Specifications Receiver Dryer: Specifications SANDEN Lubricant Capacity 10 mL NIPPONDENSO Lubricant Capacity 10 mL Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection Refrigerant: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection 07-030 October 12, 2007 Applies To: ALL Vehicles With Conventional A/C Compressors A/C Leak Detection (Supersedes 07-030, dated June 15, 2007, to update the information marked by asterisks) The OPTIMAX Jr. (TM)A/C Leak Detection Kit for Honda vehicles, P/N TRP124893, is a new required tool. The kit is used to add small amounts of dye to A/C systems to help locate smaller leaks that an electronic leak detector might not find. When searching for leaks, always begin by using an electronic leak detector. Refer to Service Bulletin 97-027, Denso HLD-100 Halogen Leak Detector; for tips on using this tool, then follow up with the OPTIMAX Jr. This new detection kit complements but does not replace the electronic detector. The kit contains: ^ TRP8640CS, OPTIMAX Jr. (TM) cordless, fluorescent leak detection flashlight lamp (includes 3 standard AA batteries) ^ TRP38600601, (6) 0.06 oz. (1.7 g) Tracer-Stick(R) R134a/PAG A/C dye capsules with ID labels ^ TRP3887, R-134a Universal Connect Set(TM) ^ TRP120884, GLO-AWAY(TM) dye cleaner ^ TRP9940, fluorescence-enhancing glasses ^ TRP1143, (1) empty Tracer-Stick dye capsule ORDERING INFO *One OPTIMAX Jr. A/C Leak Detection Kit was shipped to each current dealer as a required special tool. Additional kits and replacement capsules may be ordered through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program. On the iN, click on Service, Service Bay, Tool and Equipment Program, Online Catalog tab, and Air Conditioning Equipment, or call.* NOTICE ^ Do not use leak-trace dye in any Honda hybrid vehicle equipped with a dual-scroll compressor This can increase the chance of electric shock. The compressor is easily identified by the orange high-voltage cable that is connected to the compressor body. ^ Only Tracer-Stick single-dose fluorescent dye capsules from Tracer Products (Tracerline(R)) are approved for use in Honda vehicles. Other dyes contain solvents that may contaminate the system's refrigerant oil, leading to component failure. ^ Adding excessive amounts of dye can lead to compressor damage and failure. USING THE OPTIMAX JR. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 7178 1. Before adding any leak-detection dye, check to see if there is dye in the system now. ^ Check for a label in the engine compartment indicating that fluorescent leak-detection dye has been added to the system. ^ Dye may have been added even though no label is present. To confirm this: - Put on the fluorescence-enhancing glasses, and remove the low-side service port sealing cap. - Direct the ultraviolet lamp into the valve stem area. If dye has been previously added, the lubricant traces will have a bright yellow fluorescent glow. You may need to press the port's valve stem briefly to release some lubricant and dye from the system. ^ If there is no dye in the system, go to step 2. ^ If there is dye in the system, go to step 5. Do not add more dye. 2. Add the dye. NOTE: Air and moisture must be evacuated from the universal connect set if it is being used for the first time, or if it has been stored with the control valve open. If the air and moisture have been evacuated, go to step 3; otherwise do the following: (a) Attach the empty dye capsule (provided in the dye kit) to the control valve fitting. (b) Attach the service valve fitting (provided in the kit) to the empty dye capsule. (c) Attach the low-side hose of the A/C recovery and charging station, and open the quick coupler's hand-wheel valve. Then open the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set. (d) Following the manufacturer's instructions for your recovery and charging station, evacuate the universal connect set for approximately 3 minutes. (e) When evacuation is complete, be sure the set's control valve is closed (finger tight), and disconnect the NC recovery and charging station. (f) Remove the service valve fitting and the empty dye capsule from the set, and store them for future use. NOTE: ^ Check the refrigerant charge level. There must be enough refrigerant in the system to operate the A/C compressor and to circulate refrigerant oil. ^ If the refrigerant charge is too low, recover the remaining amount and recharge the system before adding any dye. (g) Start the vehicle and operate the A/C system. Follow your A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's operating instructions for low-side charging to install the dye. * NOTE: Only 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant is needed to push the dye into the A/C system.* (h) Once the refrigerant charge is programmed, open the control valve on the set to allow the dye to enter the system. (i) After the dye capsule clears, allow the low-side of the A/C system to reach its lowest operating pressure, then quickly close both the service equipment's low-side coupler valve and the control valve on the set. (j) Remove the set from the vehicle by releasing its quick coupler. Remove the empty dye capsule from the service valve fitting. Return the hose, control valve, and service-valve fitting to the storage case. * NOTE: Store the hose with the control valve closed. This will retain a small amount of refrigerant in the hose so it does not have to be evacuated the next time you use it.* (k) Fill out an identification label (provided in the kit), and attach it to a location near the A/C charge label. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 7179 3. Connect the universal connect set and the Tracer- Stick dye capsule: (a) Be sure the quick coupler and control valves on the set are closed. (b) Remove the low-side service port sealing cap, and connect the set to the low-side service port using the quick coupler. (c) Hold a new dye capsule so that the embossed arrow is pointing up. Remove the black end cap, and carefully attach the capsule to the control valve fitting. NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing up or the dye will leak out of the capsule. (d) Turn the capsule so the embossed arrow is pointing down. Remove the orange end cap, and carefully attach the service valve fitting provided in the kit (finger tight). NOTE: The capsule must be held with the embossed arrow pointing down or the dye will leak out. 4. Connect the NC service equipment: With the universal connect set and dye capsule attached to the vehicle's low-side service port, connect the A/C refrigerant recovery and charging station's low-side hose quick coupler to the service valve fitting. Open the blue hand-wheel valves on both quick couplers. Leave the control valve (black knob) on the universal connect set closed. NOTE: * ^ If you have recovered refrigerant to weigh it as part of your diagnostics, or if there is a low charge, it is more efficient to recharge the system using normal procedures before installing the universal connect set. Dye can then be added using approximately 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) of refrigerant.* ^ You do not need to connect the service equipment's high-side hose to the vehicle to install the dye. If the high-side hose is connected, make sure its coupler valve is closed before proceeding. ^ Do not use the A/C recovery and charging station to recover or evacuate the A/C system when a full dye capsule is attached. The dye will be drawn into the service equipment instead of being added to the vehicle's A/C system. 5. Inspect the A/C system for leaks: (a) Run the A/C system for at least 15 minutes to circulate the dye through the system. Large leaks will be seen immediately as a fluorescent yellow glow. Smaller leaks may require at least 24 hours of vehicle operation before they become visible. Operate the A/C system as much as possible during this time to keep the dye circulating. (b) Stop the vehicle's engine and inspect the system for leaks using the ultraviolet (UV) lamp and fluorescence-enhancing glasses from the kit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/C - Refrigerant Leak Detection > Page 7180 Low ambient light conditions (a dark work area) will aid in locating the leak. NOTE: Not all UV lamps work well with all types of fluorescent dye. Use only the lamp provided in the kit to inspect for leaks. (c) Inspect the entire system. Be sure to check these locations: ^ damaged and corroded areas ^ fittings ^ hose-to-line couplings ^ refrigerant controls ^ service ports ^ brazed or welded areas ^ areas near attachment points (d) Check for evaporator leaks by illuminating the evaporator drain tube area with the UV lamp and glasses. (e) After repairing a leak, remove any fluorescent residue using the GLO-AWAY dye cleaner from the kit and hot water (follow the instructions on the bottle). Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications A/C Refrigerant Capacity 550 +0 -50 g A/C Refrigerant Type R-134a Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7183 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications A/C Refrigerant Capacity 550 +0 -50 g A/C Refrigerant Type R-134a Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Condensor 20 mL Evaporator 45 mL Line or hose 10 mL Receiver/Dryer 10 mL Leakage Repair 25 mL Compressor (Sanden) 130 mL Remove oil from new compressor equal to the amount drained from the old compressor but not more than 50 ml. Compressor (Denso) 130 mL Remove oil from new compressor equal to the amount drained from the old compressor but not more than 50 ml. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7188 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Refrigerant Oil Type ............................................................................................................................ ......................................................................... SP-10 Honda PN ....................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ 38897-P13-A01AH Honda Code ......................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... 5023627 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations Left Front Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7193 Wiring/Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7194 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Battery voltage is supplied through fuse 56 to the A/C compressor clutch relay contacts at all times. With the ignition switch in ON (II), voltage is applied to the coil of the A/C compressor clutch relay through fuse 17. When you push the A/C switch ON , and the heater fan switch is in position 1, 2, 3, or 4, a "ground" input is provided to the engine control module (ECM) or powertrain control module (PCM) through the A/C thermostat and the A/C pressure switch. The A/C compressor clutch relay is grounded by the engine control module (ECM) or Powertrain Control Module (PCM). When energized, the A/C compressor clutch relay allows battery voltage to turn on the A/C compressor clutch. The A/C ON indicator light comes on when the A/C system is requested. A/C Pressure Switch The A/C pressure switch is located in the condenser outlet line where refrigerant is in a high temperature/high pressure liquid state. The switch will sense abnormally high or low pressure, and open the circuit. This removes ground, and the compressor will stop running. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7199 Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Blower Motor Relay Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Blower motor relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Blower Motor Relay > Page 7202 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor High Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Blower motor high relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Component Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7207 Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7208 Wiring/Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7209 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation A/C Compressor Clutch Relay When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from the air conditioning system, it delays the compressor from being energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7210 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 A/C compressor clutch relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Component Locations Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7215 Fan Controls Right Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7216 Wiring/Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Condenser Fan Motor Relay, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7217 Condenser Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 Condenser fan relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7222 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7223 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7224 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7225 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7226 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7227 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7228 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7229 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7230 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7231 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7232 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7233 Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7234 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7235 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7236 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7237 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7238 Control Module HVAC: Testing and Inspection Blower Motor Speed (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7239 Blower Motor Speed (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Air Conditioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the A/C thermostat. 2. Connect battery power to the No.3 terminal, ground the No.2 terminal, and connect a test light between the No.1 and No.3 terminals. NOTE: Use a 12 V, 3W - 18W test light. 3. Dip the A/C thermostat into a cup filled with ice water, and check the test light. Serpentine-type evaporator The light should go off at 36 - 39 °F (2 - 4 °C) or less, and should come on at 39 - 41 °F (4 - 5 °C) or more. Laminate-type evaporator The light should go off at 39 - 43 °F (4 - 6 °C) or less, and should come on at 43 - 45 °F (6 - 7 °C) or more. If the light doesn't come on and go off as specified, replace the A/C thermostat. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7251 Blower Motor Switch: Connector Locations Underside of Heater Control Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7254 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7255 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7256 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7257 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7258 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7259 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7260 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7261 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7262 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7263 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7264 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7265 Blower Motor Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7266 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7267 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7268 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7269 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7270 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7271 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Right Side of Engine Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Photo 82 Behind Right Side Of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7278 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation The A/C thermostat is located on the evaporator housing. The A/C thermostat turns OFF the A/C compressor clutch if the temperature at the evaporator goes below 3°C (37°F). This prevents condensation from freezing on the evaporator fins and blocking the air delivery into the passenger compartment. The blower motor will keep running when the sensor turns OFF the compressor. If the temperature goes below 3°C (37°F) turning OFF the A/C thermostat, ground will be removed from the condenser fan relay. This will deenergize the relay and remove voltage from voltage from the condenser fan motor causing the fan to stop running. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7279 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the A/C thermostat. 2. Connect battery power to the No.3 terminal, ground the No.2 terminal, and connect a test light between the No.1 and No.3 terminals. NOTE: Use a 12 V,3 W-18 W test light. 3. Dip the A/C thermostat into a cup filled with ice water, and check the test light. Serpentine-type evaporator The light should go off at 36 - 39°F (2 - 4°C) or less, and should come on at 39 - 41°F (4 - 5°C) or more. Laminate-type evaporator The light should go off at 39 - 43°F (4 - 5°C) or less, and should come on at 43 - 45°F (6 - 7°C) or more. If the light doesn't come on and go off as specified, replace the A/C thermostat. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Component Locations Left Front Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 7284 Wiring/Connector Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 7285 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Battery voltage is supplied through fuse 56 to the A/C compressor clutch relay contacts at all times. With the ignition switch in ON (II), voltage is applied to the coil of the A/C compressor clutch relay through fuse 17. When you push the A/C switch ON , and the heater fan switch is in position 1, 2, 3, or 4, a "ground" input is provided to the engine control module (ECM) or powertrain control module (PCM) through the A/C thermostat and the A/C pressure switch. The A/C compressor clutch relay is grounded by the engine control module (ECM) or Powertrain Control Module (PCM). When energized, the A/C compressor clutch relay allows battery voltage to turn on the A/C compressor clutch. The A/C ON indicator light comes on when the A/C system is requested. A/C Pressure Switch The A/C pressure switch is located in the condenser outlet line where refrigerant is in a high temperature/high pressure liquid state. The switch will sense abnormally high or low pressure, and open the circuit. This removes ground, and the compressor will stop running. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ventilation Switch > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Thermal Limiting Fuse > Component Information > Locations Thermal Limiting Fuse: Locations Left Front Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Thermal Limiting Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 7292 Thermal Limiting Fuse: Description and Operation Battery voltage is supplied through fuse 56 to the A/C compressor clutch relay contacts at all times. With the ignition switch in ON (II), voltage is applied to the coil of the A/C compressor clutch relay through fuse 17. When you push the A/C switch ON , and the heater fan switch is in position 1, 2, 3, or 4, a "ground" input is provided to the engine control module (ECM) or powertrain control module (PCM) through the A/C thermostat and the A/C pressure switch. The A/C compressor clutch relay is grounded by the engine control module (ECM) or Powertrain Control Module (PCM). When energized, the A/C compressor clutch relay allows battery voltage to turn on the A/C compressor clutch. The A/C ON indicator light comes on when the A/C system is requested. Thermal Protector The thermal protector, located on the A/C compressor, opens and turns the compressor off if it senses high temperature. Once the compressor cools, the switch will close and the compressor will begin running again. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Thermal Limiting Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 7293 Thermal Limiting Fuse: Service and Repair 1. Remove the bolt, the ground terminal and the holder. Disconnect the field coil connector, then remove the thermal protector. 2. Replace the thermal protector with a new one, and apply silicone sealant to the top of the thermal protector. 3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ventilation Switch > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Locations With Front Passenger's Airbag Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations > Page 7302 Without Front Passenger's Airbag (Part Of Canada Model) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble the airbag assembly. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been operated (deployed), it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag assembly during service, please observe the following precautions: Store the removed airbag assembly with the pad surface up. The driver's (and front passenger's) airbag connector(s) has (have) a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury Store the removed airbag assembly on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F / 100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal procedures for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 7305 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to- metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 7306 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact The driver's airbag (and front passenger's) airbag has (have) a spring-loaded lock connector with a built-in short contact. When this connector is disconnected, the power terminal and the ground terminal in the airbag connector are automatically shorted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact > Page 7309 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation System Description The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charge(s). If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: 1. The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflator(s) must ignite and deploy the airbag(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7310 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair To prevent accidental airbag deployment, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait three minutes before disconnecting any SRS connectors. - Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C,D). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s). Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Side: Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector and cable reel 2P connector. Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Side: Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector and SRS main harness 2P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications Air Bag: Specifications Airbag Assembly Airbag Assembly Drivers Side Torx Bolt(s) 9.8 Nm Passengers Side Lower Mounting Nut(s) 9.8 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7314 Air Bag: Locations Behind Right Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble the airbag assembly. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been operated (deployed), it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag assembly during service, please observe the following precautions: Store the removed airbag assembly with the pad surface up. The driver's (and front passenger's) airbag connector(s) has (have) a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury Store the removed airbag assembly on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F / 100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal procedures for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 7317 Air Bag: Service Precautions Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Inserting the probe into the terminal side of the connector, and tampering the connector could cause malfunction of the SRS system or an error in inspection. Use a probe with a tapered tip. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using tools which are not specified standard design could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 7318 Air Bag: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to- metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7319 Air Bag: Description and Operation SRS Airbag The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Airbag Replacement After a collision in which the airbags were deployed, the airbag assemblies and the SRS unit must be replaced. WARNING: Store a removed airbag with the pad surface up. If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury. CAUTION: - Always disconnect the airbag connector(s) when the harness is disconnected. - Do not disassemble or tamper with the airbag. NOTE: - Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. When repairing, use only new SRS parts. Carefully inspect the airbag before you install it. Do not install an airbag that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s): Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. NOTE: When disconnected, the airbag connector is automatically shorted. 3. Remove the airbag(s): Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7322 Remove the two Torx bolts using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the driver's airbag. CAUTION: Be sure to install the SRS wiring so that it is not pinched or interfering with other parts. 4. Install the new airbag(s): Place the driver's airbag into the steering wheel, and secure it with new Torx bolts. 5. Reconnect the airbag connector(s). Connect the driver's airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, then install the access panel on the steering wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7323 6. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 7. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. - Make sure both horn buttons work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7324 Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Airbag Replacement After a collision in which the airbags were deployed, the airbag assemblies and the SRS unit must be replaced. WARNING: Store a removed airbag with the pad surface up. If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury. CAUTION: - Always disconnect the airbag connector(s) when the harness is disconnected. - Do not disassemble or tamper with the airbag. NOTE: - Do not install used SRS parts from another vehicle. When repairing, use only new SRS parts. Carefully inspect the airbag before you install it. Do not install an airbag that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s): Disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. NOTE: When disconnected, the airbag connector is automatically shorted. 3. Remove the airbag(s): Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7325 - Remove the three mounting nuts from the bracket, then remove the harness clip. - Lift the front passenger's airbag out of the dashboard by covering the lid and dashboard with a cloth, and prying carefully with a flat-tip screwdriver. NOTE: The lid of the airbag has pawls on its side which attach it to the dashboard. CAUTION: Be sure to install the SRS wiring so that it is not pinched or interfering with other parts. 4. Install the new airbag(s): - Place the front passenger's airbag into the dashboard. - Tighten the front passenger's airbag mounting nuts 5. Reconnect the airbag connector(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7326 Attach the airbag connector to the connector holder, then reinstall the glove box. 6. Connect the battery positive cable, then connect the negative cable. 7. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. - Make sure both horn buttons work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7327 Air Bag: Service and Repair Airbag Assembly Disposal and Deployment Damaged Airbag/Tensioner Special Procedure Before scrapping any airbags (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, before you deploy the airbags, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instructions. Only after the airbags have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure: Damaged Airbag Special Procedure WARNING: If an airbag cannot be deployed, it should not be treated as normal scrap; it should still be considered a potentially explosive device that can cause serious injury. 1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal procedure . 2. In all cases, make a short circuit by twisting together the two airbag inflator wires. 3. Package the airbag in exactly the same packaging that the new replacement part came in. 4. Mark the outside of the box "DAMAGED AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED" so it does not get confused with your parts stock. 5. Contact your Honda District Service Manager for how and where to return it for disposal. Deployed Air Bag Handling When handling a deployed air bag assembly, a face shield and rubber gloves should be worn. Vehicle interior and A/C, vent, defroster and heater ducts should be vacuumed. If sinus or throat irritation is encountered during air bag removal, exit vehicle and breathe fresh air. If skin irritation is encountered, flush effected area with cool water. If sinus, throat, skin or any other type of irritation continues, consult a physician. After handling a deployed air bag assembly, wash hands and rinse thoroughly with water. An air bag that has been deployed should be removed from the vehicle. Prior to removing a deployed air bag assembly, place tape over air bag exhaust vents. After unit has been removed, it should be placed in a heavy duty plastic bag and sealed securely. The sealed plastic bag should then be placed with automotive scrap. An air bag assembly that has not been deployed, must be deployed prior to disposal. Driver's Air Bag Before scrapping any airbags (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, before you deploy the airbags, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instructions. Only after the airbags have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure: Deploying the Airbags: In-vehicle NOTE: If an SRS vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags should be deployed while still in the vehicle. The airbags should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle. WARNING: Confirm that each airbag assembly is securely mounted; otherwise, severe personal injury could result from deployment. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable. 2. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool label. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7328 3. Remove the access panel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and the cable reel. 4. Cut off the airbag connector, strip the ends of the airbag wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator clips to the airbag. Place the deployment tool at least thirty feet (10 meters) away from the airbag. 5. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool: - If the green light on the tool comes on, the air-bag igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the airbag. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. - If the red light on the tool comes on, the airbag is ready to be deployed. 6. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbag should deploy (deployment is both highly audible and visible; a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). If the airbags deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. - If an airbag doesn't deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. WARNING: During deployment, the airbag assembly can become hot enough to burn you. Wait thirty minutes after deployment before touching the assembly. 7. Dispose of the complete airbag assembly. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag, and seal it securely. CAUTION: Wear a face shield and gloves when handling a deployed airbag. - Wash your hands and rinse them well with water after handling a deployed airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7329 Passenger's Air Bag Before scrapping any airbags (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, before you deploy the airbags, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instructions. Only after the airbags have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure: Deploying the Airbags: In-vehicle NOTE: If an SRS vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags should be deployed while still in the vehicle. The airbags should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle. WARNING: Confirm that each airbag assembly is securely mounted; otherwise, severe personal injury could result from deployment. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable. 2. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool label. 3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 4. Cut off the airbag connector, strip the ends of the airbag wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator clips to the airbag. Place the deployment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7330 tool at least thirty feet (10 meters) away from the airbag. 5. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool: - If the green light on the tool comes on, the air- bag igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the airbag. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. - If the red light on the tool comes on, the airbag is ready to be deployed. 6. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbag should deploy (deployment is both highly audible and visible; a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). If the airbags deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. - If an airbag doesn't deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. WARNING: During deployment, the airbag assembly can become hot enough to burn you. Wait thirty minutes after deployment before touching the assembly. 7. Dispose of the complete airbag assembly. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag, and seal it securely. CAUTION: Wear a face shield and gloves when handling a deployed airbag. - Wash your hands and rinse them well with water after handling a deployed airbag. Deploying Airbags/Tensioner (Outside Vehicle) Before scrapping any airbags (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period, before you deploy the airbags, the Honda District Service Manager must give approval and/or special instructions. Only after the airbags have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure: Deploying the Airbag: Out-of-Vehicle NOTE: If an intact airbag has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage or service, it should be deployed as follows: WARNING: Position the airbag face up, outdoors on flat ground at least thirty feet (10 m) from any obstacles or people. 1. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure listed or on the tool label. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7331 2. Cut off the airbag connector, strip the ends of the airbag wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator clips to the airbag. Place the deployment tool at least thirty feet (10 meters) away from the airbag. 3. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool: - If the green light on the tool comes on, the air-bag igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the airbag. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. - If the red light on the tool comes on, the airbag is ready to be deployed. 4. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbag should deploy (deployment is both highly audible and visible; a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation). If the airbags deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this procedure. - If an airbag doesn't deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to Damaged Airbag Special Procedure. WARNING: During deployment, the airbag assembly can become hot enough to burn you. Wait thirty minutes after deployment before touching the assembly. 5. Dispose of the complete airbag assembly. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag, and seal it securely. CAUTION: Wear a face shield and gloves when handling a deployed airbag. - Wash your hands and rinse them well with water after handling a deployed airbag. Deployment Tool Check Procedure Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7332 Deployment Tool: Check Procedure 1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector handles on the tool; connect the tool to a battery. 2. Push the operation switch: green means the tool is OK; red means the tool is faulty. 3. Disconnect the battery and the yellow clips. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Airbag Replacement > Page 7333 Air Bag: Service and Repair Airbag Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble the airbag assembly. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been operated (deployed), it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag assembly during service, please observe the following precautions: Store the removed airbag assembly with the pad surface up. The driver's (and front passenger's) airbag connector(s) has (have) a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury Store the removed airbag assembly on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F / 100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal procedures for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Air Bag Control Module: Specifications SRS Unit SRS Unit Torx Bolt(s) 9.8 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7337 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Dashboard/Door Behind Left Side of Front Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7338 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7339 Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions Take extra care when painting or doing body work in the area below the dashboard. Avoid direct exposure of the SRS unit or wiring to heat guns, welding, or spraying equipment. Disconnect the airbag connector(s) before disconnecting SRS harness connectors. After any degree of frontal body damage, or after a collision without airbag deployment, inspect the SRS unit for physical damage. If it is dented, cracked, or deformed, replace it. Be sure the SRS unit is installed securely. Do not disassemble the SRS unit. Store the SRS unit in a cool (less than about 104 °F / 40 °C) and dry (less than 80% humidity, no moisture) place. Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit, and keep it away from dust. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit. The airbag(s) could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7340 Air Bag Control Module: Application and ID 96 - 97 Model SRS Units Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7341 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charge(s). If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: 1. The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflator(s) must ignite and deploy the airbag(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7342 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before disconnecting any part of the SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connector(s). - During installation or replacement, do not bump (impact wrench, hammer etc.) the area near the SRS unit. NOTE: Do not damage the SRS unit terminals or connectors. - Do not disassemble the SRS unit; it has no serviceable parts. - Store the SRS unit in a clean, dry area. - Do not use any SRS unit which has been subjected to water or shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s): NOTE: When disconnected, the airbag connector is automatically shorted. Driver's Side Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Front Passenger's Side Disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the right side cover from the SRS unit. 4. Remove the left side cover from the SRS unit, then disconnect the SRS main harness 18P connector from the SRS unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7343 5. Remove the four Torx bolts from the SRS unit, then pull out the SRS unit from the driver's side. 6. Install the new SRS unit. NOTE: Do not reuse a torx bolt that has red threads. Replace the bolt with a new one. 7. Connect the SRS main harness 8P connector to the SRS unit; push it into position until it clicks. 8. Install the SRS unit covers (right and left). Make sure the covers snap together in the middle. 9. Reconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, then reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 10. Reconnect the front passenger's airbag connector to the SRS main harness. 11. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7344 12. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Specifications Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Specifications Cable Reel Cable Reel Airbag Assembly Torx Bolt(s) 9.8 Nm Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Nut 50 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > General Precautions Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions General Precautions WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible injury, always disconnect the driver's and front passenger's airbag connectors (automatically shorted) before working near any SRS wiring. CAUTION: Whenever the ignition switch is ON(II) , or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. WARNING: Do not use test equipment on the yellow SRS wires and connectors in the steering column, console, dashboard, and floor. You could unintentionally set off the airbags, which could cause injury to you and others. While working on other systems, be careful not to damage SRS wiring or components. Damage could make the airbags inoperative, which could lead to the driver's or the passenger's injury or death it the car were in a severe frontal collision. NOTE: - If an intact airbag assembly has been removed from a scrapped vehicle or has been found defective or damaged during transit, storage or service, it should be deployed. - Before removing the steering gearbox, remove the driver's airbag assembly and steering wheel. After installing the steering gearbox, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. - SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in Air Bags and Seat Belts before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > General Precautions > Page 7350 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble the airbag assembly. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been operated (deployed), it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag assembly during service, please observe the following precautions: Store the removed airbag assembly with the pad surface up. The driver's (and front passenger's) airbag connector(s) has (have) a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury Store the removed airbag assembly on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F / 100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal procedures for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > General Precautions > Page 7351 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to- metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > General Precautions > Page 7352 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions Precautions For Electrical Inspections When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector. Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector. Inserting the probe into the terminal side of the connector, and tampering the connector could cause malfunction of the SRS system or an error in inspection. Use a probe with a tapered tip. Do not insert the probe forcibly. Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using tools which are not specified standard design could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > General Precautions > Page 7353 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service Precautions Steering-Related Precautions Steering Column Removal Steering Column Removal CAUTION: Before removing the steering column, disconnect the connector between the cable reel and the SRS main harness. - If the steering column is going to be removed with-out dismounting the steering wheel, lock the steering by turning the ignition key to 0-LOCK position, or remove the key from the ignition switch so that the steering wheel will not turn. NOTE: When the airbag and cable reel are disconnected, don't reconnect the battery cable. If the battery is reconnected and the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS unit will store this as an open in the driver's airbag inflator, and the SRS indicator light will come on. - For disconnecting the spring-loaded lock type connector. Do not replace the original steering wheel with any other design because it will make it impossible to properly install the airbag (only use genuine Honda replacement parts). After reassembly, confirm the wheels are still turned straight ahead and that the steering wheel spoke angle is correct. If minor spoke angle adjustment is necessary, do so only by adjusting the tie-rods, not by removing and repositioning the steering wheel. Steering Wheel and Cable Reel Alignment Steering Wheel and Cable Reel Alignment NOTE: To avoid misalignment of the steering wheel on reassembly, make sure the wheels are turned straight ahead before removing the steering wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > General Precautions > Page 7354 Rotate the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately two and a half turns) until the arrow mark on the cable reel label points straight up. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7355 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Adjustments Steering Wheel and Cable Reel Alignment NOTE: To avoid misalignment of the steering wheel on reassembly, make sure the wheels are turned straight ahead before removing the steering wheel. Rotate the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately two and a half turns) until the arrow mark on the cable reel label points straight up. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7356 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair WARNING: Store a remove airbag assembly with the pad surface up. If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury. CAUTION: - Always disconnect the airbag connector(s) when the harness is disconnected. - Do not disassemble or tamper with the airbag. NOTE: Carefully inspect the airbag assembly before installing it. Do not install an airbag that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. NOTE: When disconnected, the airbag connector is automatically shorted. 3. Make sure the wheels are aligned straight ahead. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Remove the two Torx bolts from the steering wheel, and disconnect the horn connector. Then remove the driver's airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7357 6. Disconnect the connectors from the horn and cruise control set/resume switches, then remove the steering wheel nut. 7. Remove the steering wheel using a steering wheel puller. 8. Remove the column covers. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7358 9. Disconnect the 3P connector between the main wire harness and cable reel sub-harness, and the 2P connector between the cable reel and SRS main harness. 10. Remove the cable reel from the column. NOTE: Before installing the steering wheel, the front wheels should be aligned straight ahead. - Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. - After reassembly, confirm that the wheels are still turned straight ahead and that the steering wheel spoke angle is correct (road test). If minor spoke angle adjustment is necessary, do so only by adjusting the tie-rods, not by removing and repositioning the steering wheel. 11. Set the cancel sleeve so that the projections are aligned vertically. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7359 12. Carefully install the cable reel on the steering column shaft. Then connect the 3P connector to the cable reel sub-harness, and connect the 2P connector to the SRS main harness. 13. Install the steering column covers. 14. If necessary, center the cable reel. (New replacement cable reels come centered.) Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (approximately two and a half turns) until the arrow mark on the cable reel label points straight up. 15. Install the steering wheel, then connect the horn connector and cruise control set/resume switch connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 7360 16. Install the steering wheel nut, and connect the horn connector to the steering wheel. Then install the driver's airbag. 17. Attach the cable reel 2P and 3P connector to the connector holder. Then install the driver's dashboard lower cover. 18. Reconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 19. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. 20. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper system operation: - Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. - Make sure both horn buttons work. - Make sure the headlight and wiper switches work. - Go for a test drive, and make sure the cruise control switches work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Diagnostic Connector, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Diagnostic Connector: Locations Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations Impact Sensor: Locations The impact sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Safing Sensor: Locations The safing sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Locations SRS Indicator Light Power Circuit SRS Indicator Light Power Circuit SRS Indicator Light Control Circuit SRS Indicator Light Control Circuit Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7375 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7376 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7377 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7378 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7379 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7380 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7381 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7382 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7383 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7384 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7385 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7386 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7387 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7388 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7389 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7390 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7391 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Electrical Diagrams SRS Indicator Light Power Circuit SRS Indicator Light Power Circuit SRS Indicator Light Control Circuit SRS Indicator Light Control Circuit Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7392 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation Self-diagnosis System A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS indicator light comes on and goes off after about six seconds if the system is operating normally. If the light does not come on, or does not go off after six seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates an abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible. For better serviceability, the memory will store the cause of the malfunction, and the data link circuit passes on the information from the memory to the data link connector (DLC). This information can be read with the Honda PGM Tester connected to the DLC (16P). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Testing and Inspection SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On. The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On (Part 1 Of 3) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On > Page 7395 The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On (Part 2 Of 3) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On > Page 7396 The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On (Part 3 Of 3) CAUTION: Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbag(s) could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On > Page 7397 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Testing and Inspection SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Go Off The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Go Off 96 - 97 Models CAUTION: Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than three minutes, be careful not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries. The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Go Off - '96 - 97 Models (Part 1 Of 5) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On > Page 7398 The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Go Off - '96 - 97 Models (Part 2 Of 5) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On > Page 7399 The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Go Off - '96 - 97 Models (Part 3 Of 5) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On > Page 7400 The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Go Off - '96 - 97 Models (Part 4 Of 5) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Come On > Page 7401 The SRS Indicator Light Doesn't Go Off - '96 - 97 Models (Part 5 Of 5) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair Child Seat: Service and Repair Child Seat Anchor Plate 2 Door/4 Door 3 Door Attachment points are provided for a rear seat mounted child restraint system which uses a top tether. The attachment points are located on the rear shelf or rear trim panel, just behind the rear seat-back. When using a child seat with a top tether, install the child seat anchor plates securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7405 NOTE: - Do not remove the toothed washer from the child seat anchor plate. Use the child seat anchor plate with the toothed washer attached to it. - When installing a child seat on the rear seat, follow the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat. - Additional anchor plates are available. WARNING: - Do not use the child seat anchor plate for any other purpose; it is designed exclusively for installation of a child seat. - Make sure the rear seat-back is locked firmly when installing a child seat. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Knee Diverter: > 95055 > Dec > 95 > Interior - Rattle from Driver's Side Lower Dash Cover Knee Diverter: Customer Interest Interior - Rattle from Driver's Side Lower Dash Cover Bulletin No. 95-055 Issue Date DEC 18, 1995 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To ALL File Under BODY Rattle From the Driver's Lower Dashboard Cover SYMPTOM A rattle from the driver's lower dashboard cover when the car is driven on a rough road. PROBABLE CAUSE Vibration of the knee bolster against the dashboard cover. REQUIRED MATERIALS EPT Sealer 10T: P/N 06992-SA5-000, H/C 2086668 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 510001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 77893-S01-A00 H/C 4849840 Contention code: B07 Defect code: 045 Template ID: 95-055A CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply EPT Sealer 10T to the knee bolster. NOTE: SRS components are located near the repair area. Before you begin, review section 24 of the 1996 Civic Service Manual for SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Knee Diverter: > 95055 > Dec > 95 > Interior - Rattle from Driver's Side Lower Dash Cover > Page 7414 1. Remove the driver's lower dashboard cover. 2. Remove the knee bolster. 3. Cut two 20 x 20 mm pieces of EPT Sealer 10T. 4. Peel oft the backing, and attach the EPT Sealer 10T to the areas on opposite sides of both bolster clips. 5. Reinstall the bolster and tighten its two bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft). 6. Reinstall the driver's lower dashboard cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Knee Diverter: > 95055 > Dec > 95 > Interior - Rattle from Driver's Side Lower Dash Cover Knee Diverter: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Rattle from Driver's Side Lower Dash Cover Bulletin No. 95-055 Issue Date DEC 18, 1995 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To ALL File Under BODY Rattle From the Driver's Lower Dashboard Cover SYMPTOM A rattle from the driver's lower dashboard cover when the car is driven on a rough road. PROBABLE CAUSE Vibration of the knee bolster against the dashboard cover. REQUIRED MATERIALS EPT Sealer 10T: P/N 06992-SA5-000, H/C 2086668 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 510001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 77893-S01-A00 H/C 4849840 Contention code: B07 Defect code: 045 Template ID: 95-055A CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply EPT Sealer 10T to the knee bolster. NOTE: SRS components are located near the repair area. Before you begin, review section 24 of the 1996 Civic Service Manual for SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Knee Diverter: > 95055 > Dec > 95 > Interior - Rattle from Driver's Side Lower Dash Cover > Page 7420 1. Remove the driver's lower dashboard cover. 2. Remove the knee bolster. 3. Cut two 20 x 20 mm pieces of EPT Sealer 10T. 4. Peel oft the backing, and attach the EPT Sealer 10T to the areas on opposite sides of both bolster clips. 5. Reinstall the bolster and tighten its two bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft). 6. Reinstall the driver's lower dashboard cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7421 Knee Bolster / Dashboard Lower Cover Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Knee Diverter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7422 Knee Diverter: Description and Operation Knee Bolster The knee bolsters are used to absorb energy to protect knees and control the forward movement of the vehicle's front seat occupants during a frontal crash, by limiting leg movement. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications Air Bag Control Module: Specifications SRS Unit SRS Unit Torx Bolt(s) 9.8 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7427 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Dashboard/Door Behind Left Side of Front Console Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7428 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7429 Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions Take extra care when painting or doing body work in the area below the dashboard. Avoid direct exposure of the SRS unit or wiring to heat guns, welding, or spraying equipment. Disconnect the airbag connector(s) before disconnecting SRS harness connectors. After any degree of frontal body damage, or after a collision without airbag deployment, inspect the SRS unit for physical damage. If it is dented, cracked, or deformed, replace it. Be sure the SRS unit is installed securely. Do not disassemble the SRS unit. Store the SRS unit in a cool (less than about 104 °F / 40 °C) and dry (less than 80% humidity, no moisture) place. Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit, and keep it away from dust. During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area around the SRS unit. The airbag(s) could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injury. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7430 Air Bag Control Module: Application and ID 96 - 97 Model SRS Units Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7431 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charge(s). If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: 1. The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflator(s) must ignite and deploy the airbag(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7432 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before disconnecting any part of the SRS wire harness, disconnect the airbag connector(s). - During installation or replacement, do not bump (impact wrench, hammer etc.) the area near the SRS unit. NOTE: Do not damage the SRS unit terminals or connectors. - Do not disassemble the SRS unit; it has no serviceable parts. - Store the SRS unit in a clean, dry area. - Do not use any SRS unit which has been subjected to water or shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable from the battery, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s): NOTE: When disconnected, the airbag connector is automatically shorted. Driver's Side Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and cable reel. Front Passenger's Side Disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger's airbag and SRS main harness. 3. Remove the right side cover from the SRS unit. 4. Remove the left side cover from the SRS unit, then disconnect the SRS main harness 18P connector from the SRS unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7433 5. Remove the four Torx bolts from the SRS unit, then pull out the SRS unit from the driver's side. 6. Install the new SRS unit. NOTE: Do not reuse a torx bolt that has red threads. Replace the bolt with a new one. 7. Connect the SRS main harness 8P connector to the SRS unit; push it into position until it clicks. 8. Install the SRS unit covers (right and left). Make sure the covers snap together in the middle. 9. Reconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, then reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 10. Reconnect the front passenger's airbag connector to the SRS main harness. 11. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7434 12. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Locations With Front Passenger's Airbag Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations > Page 7439 Without Front Passenger's Airbag (Part Of Canada Model) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble the airbag assembly. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been operated (deployed), it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag assembly during service, please observe the following precautions: Store the removed airbag assembly with the pad surface up. The driver's (and front passenger's) airbag connector(s) has (have) a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury Store the removed airbag assembly on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F / 100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal procedures for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 7442 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to- metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 7443 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact The driver's airbag (and front passenger's) airbag has (have) a spring-loaded lock connector with a built-in short contact. When this connector is disconnected, the power terminal and the ground terminal in the airbag connector are automatically shorted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact > Page 7446 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation System Description The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charge(s). If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: 1. The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflator(s) must ignite and deploy the airbag(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7447 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair To prevent accidental airbag deployment, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait three minutes before disconnecting any SRS connectors. - Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C,D). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s). Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Side: Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector and cable reel 2P connector. Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Side: Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector and SRS main harness 2P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Specifications Child Seat Tether Attachment: Specifications Child Restraint Child Restraint Anchor Plate 22 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7452 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation Attachment points are provided for a rear seat mounted child restraint system which uses a top tether. The attachment points are located on the rear shelf, just behind the rear seat-back. When using a child seat with a top tether, install the child seat anchor plates securely. WARNING: Do not use the child seat anchor plate for any other purpose; it is designed exclusively for installation of a child seat. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7453 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair 2 Door / 4 Door Child Seat Anchor Plate Attachment points are provided for a rear seat mounted child restraint system which uses a top tether. The attachment points are located on the rear shelf or rear trim panel, just behind the rear seat-back. When using a child seat with a top tether, install the child seat anchor plates securely. NOTE: Remove the plug covers from the attachment points of the rear shelf. NOTE: - Do not remove the toothed washer from the child seat anchor plate. Use the child seat anchor plate with the toothed washer attached to it. - When installing a child seat on the rear seat, follow the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat. - Additional anchor plates are available. - Do not use the child seat anchor plate for any other purpose, it is designed exclusively for installation of a child seat - Make sure the rear seat-back is locked firmly when installing a child seat. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract 03-062 September 16, 2003 Applies To: ALL Seat Belt Slow to Retract (Replaces 91-030, dated January 22, 1996) SYMPTOM The seat belt will not retract all the way, or retracts slowly. PROBABLE CAUSE Dirt on the seat belt webbing and guide. CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean the seat belts and guides with a mild soap and water solution, or isopropyl alcohol. This applies only to three-point active and passive seat belt systems, not to motorized systems. REQUIRED MATERIALS Required only for three-point passive seat belts. Teflon Tape (ten pieces per package): P/N 81496-SH3-505, H/C 4008041 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION This repair is covered by the Lifetime Seat Belt Limited Warranty. Failed Part: P/N 818AD-SM1-A05ZB H/C 3478047 Defect Code: L11 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Three-Point Active Seat Belts 1. Use either isopropyl alcohol, or prepare a solution of 5 ounces of mild dishwashing liquid in a gallon of warm water. NOTICE Do not use strong cleaning solutions, upholstery cleaners or commercial automotive interior cleaners. They can affect the durability of the webbing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7462 2. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner. Insert the cloth between the seat belt and metal loop on the upper anchor. Use a credit card or similar item to help insert the cloth into the loop. Work the cloth back and forth to clean the dirt out of the inside of the loop. 3. Pull the seat belt out fully. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. 4. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in 4 seconds or less. Three-Point Passive Seat Belts 1. Clean the metal loop in the upper anchor as described for Three-Point Active Seat Belts. 2. Remove the door panel and the seat belt guide. Refer to the appropriate service manual. 3. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7463 4. Clean and dry the seat belt guide, then put a piece of teflon tape on the inside. Use the teflon tape specified in this service bulletin; other brands or types of tape may eventually peel off and restrict seat belt movement. 5. Install the seat belt guide and the door panel. 6. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in four seconds or less. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 93033 > Jun > 96 > Seat Belt - Tongue Stopper Button Broken Seat Belt: Customer Interest Seat Belt - Tongue Stopper Button Broken Bulletin No. 93-033 Issue Date JUNE 3, 1996 Model: 1992 and Later [NEW] Applicable To: ALL except PASSPORT [NEW] File Under: BODY Broken Seat Belt Tongue Stopper Button (Supersedes 93-033, dated October 22, 1993) PROBLEM The seat belt tongue stopper button is broken, allowing the tongue to slide down to the floor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a new seat belt tongue stopper button listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 1. Slide the seat belt tongue up the seat belt past the tongue stopper button hole. Temporarily secure the seat belt tongue to the belt fabric with masking tape. 2. Insert the male section of the button through the hole in the belt fabric. Align and install the female section of the stopper to the male section. 3. Preset the closed gap on a pair of vise-grip pliers to 4.5 mm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt: > 93033 > Jun > 96 > Seat Belt - Tongue Stopper Button Broken > Page 7468 4. Place the flat portion of the jaws over the tongue stopper, and squeeze until the vise-grip jaws lock and deform the stopper shaft. PARTS INFORMATION Seat Belt Tongue Stopper: WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Warranty Coverage: Seat belts that fail to function properly during normal use are covered under warranty for the useful life of the car. Warranty Does Not Cover: ^ Malfunction due to abuse, alteration, accidental damage or damage resulting from a collision or misuse. ^ Replacement of a properly functioning seat belt for cosmetic or comfort reasons. Operation number: 854125 Flat rate time: 0.2 hour (one or two sides) Failed part: P/N 04814-SM1-AO2ZA [NEW] H/C 3919289 Defect code: L18 Contention code: A02 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract 03-062 September 16, 2003 Applies To: ALL Seat Belt Slow to Retract (Replaces 91-030, dated January 22, 1996) SYMPTOM The seat belt will not retract all the way, or retracts slowly. PROBABLE CAUSE Dirt on the seat belt webbing and guide. CORRECTIVE ACTION Clean the seat belts and guides with a mild soap and water solution, or isopropyl alcohol. This applies only to three-point active and passive seat belt systems, not to motorized systems. REQUIRED MATERIALS Required only for three-point passive seat belts. Teflon Tape (ten pieces per package): P/N 81496-SH3-505, H/C 4008041 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION This repair is covered by the Lifetime Seat Belt Limited Warranty. Failed Part: P/N 818AD-SM1-A05ZB H/C 3478047 Defect Code: L11 Contention Code: B99 Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE Three-Point Active Seat Belts 1. Use either isopropyl alcohol, or prepare a solution of 5 ounces of mild dishwashing liquid in a gallon of warm water. NOTICE Do not use strong cleaning solutions, upholstery cleaners or commercial automotive interior cleaners. They can affect the durability of the webbing. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7474 2. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner. Insert the cloth between the seat belt and metal loop on the upper anchor. Use a credit card or similar item to help insert the cloth into the loop. Work the cloth back and forth to clean the dirt out of the inside of the loop. 3. Pull the seat belt out fully. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. 4. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in 4 seconds or less. Three-Point Passive Seat Belts 1. Clean the metal loop in the upper anchor as described for Three-Point Active Seat Belts. 2. Remove the door panel and the seat belt guide. Refer to the appropriate service manual. 3. Soak a clean cloth in the cleaner, and clean both sides of the seat belt webbing. Dry the webbing thoroughly with a clean cloth. Do not use a hair dryer or similar device. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 03-062 > Sep > 03 > Interior - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page 7475 4. Clean and dry the seat belt guide, then put a piece of teflon tape on the inside. Use the teflon tape specified in this service bulletin; other brands or types of tape may eventually peel off and restrict seat belt movement. 5. Install the seat belt guide and the door panel. 6. Test the belt for proper retraction by pulling the latch plate down to the floor of the vehicle and then releasing it. The belt should retract fully in four seconds or less. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 93033 > Jun > 96 > Seat Belt - Tongue Stopper Button Broken Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Seat Belt - Tongue Stopper Button Broken Bulletin No. 93-033 Issue Date JUNE 3, 1996 Model: 1992 and Later [NEW] Applicable To: ALL except PASSPORT [NEW] File Under: BODY Broken Seat Belt Tongue Stopper Button (Supersedes 93-033, dated October 22, 1993) PROBLEM The seat belt tongue stopper button is broken, allowing the tongue to slide down to the floor. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install a new seat belt tongue stopper button listed under PARTS INFORMATION. 1. Slide the seat belt tongue up the seat belt past the tongue stopper button hole. Temporarily secure the seat belt tongue to the belt fabric with masking tape. 2. Insert the male section of the button through the hole in the belt fabric. Align and install the female section of the stopper to the male section. 3. Preset the closed gap on a pair of vise-grip pliers to 4.5 mm. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 93033 > Jun > 96 > Seat Belt - Tongue Stopper Button Broken > Page 7480 4. Place the flat portion of the jaws over the tongue stopper, and squeeze until the vise-grip jaws lock and deform the stopper shaft. PARTS INFORMATION Seat Belt Tongue Stopper: WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Warranty Coverage: Seat belts that fail to function properly during normal use are covered under warranty for the useful life of the car. Warranty Does Not Cover: ^ Malfunction due to abuse, alteration, accidental damage or damage resulting from a collision or misuse. ^ Replacement of a properly functioning seat belt for cosmetic or comfort reasons. Operation number: 854125 Flat rate time: 0.2 hour (one or two sides) Failed part: P/N 04814-SM1-AO2ZA [NEW] H/C 3919289 Defect code: L18 Contention code: A02 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7481 Seat Belt: Specifications Seat Belt Replacement Seat Belt Replacement Front Seat Belts Seat Belt Guide Bolts 9.8 Nm Upper Anchor Bolt 32 Nm Retractor Bolt 32 Nm Retractor Mounting Bolt 9.8 Nm Lower Anchor Bolt 32 Nm Seat Belt Buckle Center Anchor Bolt 32 Nm Rear Seat Belts Center Anchor Bolts 32 Nm Retractor Bolt 32 Nm Retractor Mounting Bolt 9.8 Nm Seat Belt Buckle Center Anchor Bolt 32 Nm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7482 Seats And Seat Belts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7483 Seat Belt: Testing and Inspection In-vehicle: 1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on anything. 2. After installing the anchors, check for free movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary, remove the anchor bolts and check that the washers and other parts are not damaged or improperly installed. 3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration. Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only soap and water to clean. NOTE: Dirt build-up in the metal loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth dampened in isopropyl alcohol. 4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled Out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only during a sudden stop or impact. 5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract automatically when released. 6. For each passenger's seat belt, make sure that the locking mechanism in the seat belt retractor will engage when the seat belt is pulled all the way out. 7. Replace the seat belt with a new one if there is any abnormality. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front CAUTION: Check the front seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Front seat belt removal (4D): 1. Slide the front seat forward fully. 2. Remove the center pillar lower trim panel. 3. Remove the upper anchor cover and lower anchor cap. 4. Remove all the anchor bolts and the retractor bolt, remove the retractor mounting bolt, then remove the front seat belt and retractor. 5. Remove the center pillar upper trim. 6. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7486 Upper Anchor Bolt Construction Lower Anchor Bolt Construction Retractor Bolt Construction 7. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described. - Make sure you assemble the washers and collars on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt. Front seat belt removal (2D/3D): 1. Slide the front seat forward fully. 2. Remove: - Rear seat-back and rear seat cushion - Rear center shelf and rear side shelf (3D) - Rear trim panel (3D) - Side trim panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7487 3. Remove the upper anchor cover and lower anchor cap. 4. Remove all the anchor bolts and the retractor bolt, remove the retractor mounting bolt, then remove the front seat belt and retractor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7488 Upper Anchor Bolt Construction/Lower Anchor Bolt Construction/Retractor Bolt Construction 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described. - Make sure you assemble the washers and collars on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown. - Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt. Seat belt buckle removal: 1. Remove the front seat through the door opening. 2. Remove the center cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7489 3. Remove the center anchor bolt, then remove the seat belt buckle. Center Anchor Bolt Construction 4. Driver's: Detach the seat belt switch connector and harness clip from the seat cushion. Remove the seat cushion mounting bolts from the inner seat track, and move the inner seat track, then pull the seat belt switch harness out. NOTE: Take care not to damage the hinge bracket. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure you assemble the washers and bearing on the center anchor bolt as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7490 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt CAUTION: Check the rear seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be careful not to damage them during removal and installation. Rear seat belt removal (2D/4D): 1. Remove: - Rear seat cushion - Rear seat-back (2D) - Side trim panel (2D) - Rear shelf - Rear trim panel - Trunk side trim, Japan-produced - Trunk trim panel, USA-produced 2. Remove all the anchor bolts and retractor bolt, then remove the rear seat belt and retractor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7491 Upper Anchor Bolt Construction/Lower Anchor Bolt Construction/Retractor Bolt Construction 3. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described. - Make sure you assemble the washers and collar on the upper anchor bolt as shown. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt. Rear seat belt removal (3D): 1. Remove: - Rear seat-back and rear seat cushion - Rear center shelf and rear side shelf - Rear trim panel and side trim panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7492 2. Remove the upper anchor cover. 3. Remove all the anchor bolts and retractor bolt, then remove the rear seat belt and retractor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7493 Upper Anchor Bolt Construction/Lower Anchor Bolt Construction/Retractor Bolt Construction 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described. - Make sure you assemble the washers and collars on the upper anchor bolt as shown. - Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt. Seat belt buckle/Center belt tongue removal: 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7494 2 Door/4 Door 3 Door Center Anchor Bolt Construction 2. Remove the center anchor bolts, then remove the seat belt buckles and center belt tongue. 3. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Before attaching the seat-back and seat cushion, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Buckle Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt Buckle 1. Remove the front seat through the door opening. 2. Remove the center cover. 3. Remove the center anchor bolt, then remove the seat belt buckle. 4. Driver's: Detach the seat belt switch connector and harness clip from the seat cushion. Remove the seat cushion mounting bolts from the inner seat track, and move the inner seat track, then pull the seat belt switch harness out. NOTE: Take care not to damage the hinge bracket. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure you assemble the washers and bearing on the center anchor bolt as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Belt Buckle > Page 7499 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt Buckle 2 Door / 4 Door Coupe-Sedan Seat Belt Buckle / Center Belt Tongue 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. 2. Remove the center anchor bolts, then remove the seat belt buckles and center belt tongue. 3. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Before attaching the seat-back and seat cushion, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7504 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7505 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7506 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7507 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7508 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7509 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7510 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7511 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7512 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7513 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7514 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7515 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7516 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7517 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7518 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7519 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7520 Seat Belt And Ignition Reminders Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7521 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is applied to the seat belt reminder light. When the seat belt is not buckled, the seat belt reminder/key-ON beeper circuit in the integrated control unit senses ground through the closed seat belt switch. The seat belt reminder light comes ON and stays ON, and the beeper beeps for 6 seconds. The reminder light and beeper will stop when the seat belt is buckled or the timer circuit deactivates them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection 4 Door 2 Door / 4 Door Retractor Inspection 1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat belt can be pulled out freely. 2. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the retractor is leaned slowly up to 150 from the mounted position. The seat belt should lock when the retractor is leaned over 400. CAUTION: Do not attempt to disassemble the retractor. 3. Replace the seat belt with a new one if there is any abnormality. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations Impact Sensor: Locations The impact sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Safing Sensor: Locations The safing sensor is located inside the SRS Unit, refer to SRS Unit / Service and Repair. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna Mast > Component Information > Service and Repair Antenna Mast: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect the connector between the antenna lead and sub antenna lead. 2. Remove the two mounting screws, then remove the mast antenna. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Alarm Module: Locations Rear of Radio Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Canada Security Control Unit Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Canada > Page 7543 Security Control Unit Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair Storing Transmitter Codes - The codes of up to four transmitters can be stored in the control unit. (If a fifth code is stored, the code which was stored first will be erased.) - When the system enters the registration mode, all previously stored codes will be erased. - The system leaves the registration mode and returns to the normal mode if you turn the valet switch OFF, or - turn the ignition switch OFF, or - do not press the transmitter button for more than 10 seconds. Procedure NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between steps. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Antitheft Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Antitheft Lighting Relay: Locations Upper Left Kick Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Antitheft Relay > Component Information > Locations Antitheft Relay: Locations Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Antitheft Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7553 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7558 Disconnect the 12P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Reconnect the 12P connector to the power door lock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7562 Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the audio unit, then disconnect the A and B connectors. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7563 Disconnect the A and B connectors from the audio unit. Reconnect the B connector only to the audio unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function Keyless Entry Transmitter: Customer Interest Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function 97-080 November 17, 1997 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Radio Display Is Blank SYMPTOM The radio display is blank, and the functions do not work. The keyless remote transmitter may also be inoperable. The symptoms may be intermittent. PROBABLE CAUSE The crystal oscillator inside the radio is contaminated. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door: EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL050389 (U.S. production) HX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ7...VL050796 (U.S. production) 4-door: EX-Thru VIN 2HGEJ8...VH541409 (Canada production) EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL015811 (U.S. production) LX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...VL015720 (U.S. production) DIAGNOSIS 1. Record the customer's pre-set frequency selections. 2. Remove the radio Backup fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds to clear the radio's memory. 3. Reinstall the fuse, then check the operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. If both the radio and transmitter work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. - If the radio and transmitter do not work, check all fuses and electrical connections for other possible causes. If the radio works after checking all fuses and electrical connections, then disregard this Service Bulletin. If the radio and transmitter still do not work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the radio with a remanufactured unit. (See S/B89-029 for details.) Once the radio has been replaced, check operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. PARTS INFORMATION Radio: P/N 39110-S01-A01RM, H/C 4923447 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 010150 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 39110-S01-A01 H/C 4811279 Defect code: 032 Contention code: F05 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function > Page 7572 Template ID: 97-080A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7578 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7579 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7580 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7581 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7582 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7583 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7584 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7585 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7586 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7587 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7588 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7589 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7590 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7591 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7592 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7593 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7594 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7595 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7596 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7597 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7598 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7599 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7600 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7601 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7602 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function Keyless Entry Transmitter: All Technical Service Bulletins Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function 97-080 November 17, 1997 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Radio Display Is Blank SYMPTOM The radio display is blank, and the functions do not work. The keyless remote transmitter may also be inoperable. The symptoms may be intermittent. PROBABLE CAUSE The crystal oscillator inside the radio is contaminated. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door: EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL050389 (U.S. production) HX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ7...VL050796 (U.S. production) 4-door: EX-Thru VIN 2HGEJ8...VH541409 (Canada production) EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL015811 (U.S. production) LX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...VL015720 (U.S. production) DIAGNOSIS 1. Record the customer's pre-set frequency selections. 2. Remove the radio Backup fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds to clear the radio's memory. 3. Reinstall the fuse, then check the operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. If both the radio and transmitter work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. - If the radio and transmitter do not work, check all fuses and electrical connections for other possible causes. If the radio works after checking all fuses and electrical connections, then disregard this Service Bulletin. If the radio and transmitter still do not work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the radio with a remanufactured unit. (See S/B89-029 for details.) Once the radio has been replaced, check operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. PARTS INFORMATION Radio: P/N 39110-S01-A01RM, H/C 4923447 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 010150 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 39110-S01-A01 H/C 4811279 Defect code: 032 Contention code: F05 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function > Page 7607 Template ID: 97-080A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information Technical Service Bulletin # 96-046 Date: 961021 Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information Bulletin No. 96-046 Issue Date OCT 21, 1996 Model ALL Applicable To Refer to the list below File Under ACCESSORIES Keyless Remote Transmitter Information This Service Bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering*, and transmitter batteries. A transmitter quick reference guide is included. Use this index to find the information for the vehicle you are working on. Vehicle: Procedure Number: Civic 1992-93 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 8 del Sol 1993 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 7 Accord 1990-93 (except Wagon) 2 1991-93 EX Wagon 3 1991-93 LX Wagon 4 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1994-97 EX Wagon 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Prelude 1988-91 1 1992-93 (with optional security system) 2 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Odyssey 1995 (with optional security system) 5 1995-97 EX 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Passport 1994-95 (with optional security system, not applicable to 1995.5 model) 9 1996-97 (with optional security system) 10 *Transmitter prices are subject to change without notice. PARTS INFORMATION Transmitter ordering information and battery part numbers are in each transmitter section. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7612 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This Service Bulletin is for information only. TRANSMITTER QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Procedure 1 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7613 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Alpine of America by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form (found in Parts Information Bulletin A91 -0031) along with a dealer check for $59.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Honda/Alpine V.S.S. P.O. Box 2859 Torrance, CA 90509 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 2 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7614 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip into place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter, and install it in the new one. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 8319. For each set ordered, send a dealer check for $24.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Alpine Electronics of America 19145 Gramercy Place Torrance, CA 90501 Attention: Al Sula (Parts) Alpine's ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Additional transmitters can be ordered from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If you have questions on how to order the four ROM chip set, call Alpine's Parts Department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7615 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 3 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the HONDANET 2000 system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. Procedure 4 Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7616 This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form,* (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.), to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90801-5745 If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (800)852-4690, or Fax them at (310) 898-1029 (weekdays, from 8:30 A.M. thru 4:00 PM., PST). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your Dealership C.O.D. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. *On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. Procedure 5 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering wheel cover flashes when the system is in the programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. The parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. The parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7617 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 6 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Press and hold the driver's door master power door lock switch up in the unlock position. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key in the ignition switch and remove it. Repeat this four more times within 10 seconds, then leave the key in the switch. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that all power door locks (except the driver's) cycle to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the system. 5. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. (You can program two transmitters per vehicle.) 6. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 7 Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7618 NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on one of the transmitters. (A non-programmed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times with the transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the same transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 7. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on each transmitter. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle) Check that the power door locks cycle after you push each transmitter button, confirming that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 8 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7619 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM button and the CD/TAPE button) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on all other transmitters. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 9 NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7620 1. Locate the security system control unit mounted under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst to confirm that you're in the programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at three-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to let you know that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter or between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps, and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 9. Push all the function buttons on each transmitter to make sure they work correctly. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 10 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7621 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times, This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Move the driver's seat forward, and locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor, underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch on. 3. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit with a pen or pencil. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Check that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front marker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. If you have other transmitters to program, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. Turn the ignition switch off to exit the programming mode. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7622 Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. One battery per transmitter is needed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7628 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7629 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7630 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7631 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7632 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7633 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7634 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7635 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7636 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7637 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7638 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7639 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7640 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7641 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7642 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7643 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7644 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7645 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7646 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7647 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7648 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7649 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7650 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7651 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 7652 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information Technical Service Bulletin # 96-046 Date: 961021 Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information Bulletin No. 96-046 Issue Date OCT 21, 1996 Model ALL Applicable To Refer to the list below File Under ACCESSORIES Keyless Remote Transmitter Information This Service Bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering*, and transmitter batteries. A transmitter quick reference guide is included. Use this index to find the information for the vehicle you are working on. Vehicle: Procedure Number: Civic 1992-93 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 8 del Sol 1993 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 7 Accord 1990-93 (except Wagon) 2 1991-93 EX Wagon 3 1991-93 LX Wagon 4 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1994-97 EX Wagon 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Prelude 1988-91 1 1992-93 (with optional security system) 2 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Odyssey 1995 (with optional security system) 5 1995-97 EX 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Passport 1994-95 (with optional security system, not applicable to 1995.5 model) 9 1996-97 (with optional security system) 10 *Transmitter prices are subject to change without notice. PARTS INFORMATION Transmitter ordering information and battery part numbers are in each transmitter section. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7657 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This Service Bulletin is for information only. TRANSMITTER QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Procedure 1 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7658 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Alpine of America by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form (found in Parts Information Bulletin A91 -0031) along with a dealer check for $59.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Honda/Alpine V.S.S. P.O. Box 2859 Torrance, CA 90509 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 2 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7659 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip into place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter, and install it in the new one. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 8319. For each set ordered, send a dealer check for $24.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Alpine Electronics of America 19145 Gramercy Place Torrance, CA 90501 Attention: Al Sula (Parts) Alpine's ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Additional transmitters can be ordered from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If you have questions on how to order the four ROM chip set, call Alpine's Parts Department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7660 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 3 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the HONDANET 2000 system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. Procedure 4 Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7661 This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form,* (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.), to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90801-5745 If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (800)852-4690, or Fax them at (310) 898-1029 (weekdays, from 8:30 A.M. thru 4:00 PM., PST). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your Dealership C.O.D. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. *On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. Procedure 5 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering wheel cover flashes when the system is in the programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. The parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. The parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7662 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 6 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Press and hold the driver's door master power door lock switch up in the unlock position. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key in the ignition switch and remove it. Repeat this four more times within 10 seconds, then leave the key in the switch. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that all power door locks (except the driver's) cycle to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the system. 5. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. (You can program two transmitters per vehicle.) 6. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 7 Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7663 NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on one of the transmitters. (A non-programmed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times with the transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the same transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 7. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on each transmitter. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle) Check that the power door locks cycle after you push each transmitter button, confirming that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 8 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7664 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM button and the CD/TAPE button) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on all other transmitters. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 9 NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7665 1. Locate the security system control unit mounted under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst to confirm that you're in the programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at three-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to let you know that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter or between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps, and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 9. Push all the function buttons on each transmitter to make sure they work correctly. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 10 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7666 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times, This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Move the driver's seat forward, and locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor, underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch on. 3. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit with a pen or pencil. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Check that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front marker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. If you have other transmitters to program, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. Turn the ignition switch off to exit the programming mode. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 7667 Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. One battery per transmitter is needed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7668 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is faulty; replace the transmitter. - If any door is open, you cannot lock or unlock the door with the transmitter. - If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors relock automatically. - The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch. 1. Using a keyless entry checker (07MAJ - SP00300): - Place the transmitter on the keyless entry checker, and press the transmitter button. If the indicator light does not come on, check for: a dead or low battery - Faulty transmitter - If the ray indicator light comes on, the transmitter is OK. NOTE: After a transmitter battery has been replaced, aim the transmitter at the receiver, and press the transmitter button six times. Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators when you press the sixth time. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7669 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Storing Transmitter Codes - The codes of up to four transmitters can be stored in the control unit. (If a fifth code is stored, the code which was stored first will be erased.) - When the system enters the registration mode, all previously stored codes will be erased. - The system leaves the registration mode and returns to the normal mode if you turn the valet switch OFF, or - turn the ignition switch OFF, or - do not press the transmitter button for more than 10 seconds. Procedure NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between steps. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions DVD Player: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations Integrated Control Unit: Locations Rear of Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Integrated Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7680 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7681 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7682 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7683 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7684 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7685 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7686 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7687 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7688 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7689 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7690 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7691 Integrated Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7692 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7693 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7694 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7695 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7696 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7697 Integrated Control Unit: Electrical Diagrams Integrated Control Unit Part 1 0f 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7698 Integrated Control Unit Part 2 0f 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7699 Integrated Control Unit (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7700 Integrated Control Unit (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7701 Integrated Control Unit: Testing and Inspection SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the integrated control unit. 3. Remove the integrated control unit from the under-dash fuse/relay box. All Systems Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7702 Intermittent Wiper System 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector and the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes Compact Disc Player (CD): Customer Interest Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes 00-015 March 14, 2000 Applies To: All with CD Player/Changer Audio Unit Error Codes (Replaces 91-007, dated October 6, 1997) *If the audio unit displays an error code, use the troubleshooting tables in this service bulletin to troubleshoot the problem. Refer to service bulletin 98-019 for CD Player/Changer exchange information.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 7712 CD Changer Troubleshooting (All except Passport) CD Player Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Radio Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 7713 CD Player/Changer Troubleshooting (Passport only) Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (All except Passport) One-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the rear cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed disc. 3. If a disc is jammed between the player and the magazine, turn the loading gear until the disc returns to the player mechanism. Do not attempt to reload the disc back into the magazine. 4. After the disc is loaded into the player mechanism, turn the changer so that the front is facing you. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 7714 5. Insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1-1/2" from the right side of the opening. 6. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 7. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed tray. 3. If a tray is stuck in the player, reinstall the cover and replace the changer. If all the trays are in the magazine, insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 4. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 5. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 7715 Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (Passport only) One-piece door model: 1. Open the changer door. 2. Check to see if all the trays are in the magazine. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and inspect for a jammed tray. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Handling and Inspecting Compact Discs Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 7716 ^ Handle a CD by its edges; never touch the flat surfaces. Contamination from fingerprints, liquids, felt-tip pens, and labels can cause the CD to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive. ^ When cleaning a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside. Do not wipe the disc in a circular motion. ^ A new CD may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen. ^ Various accessories are available to protect CDs and improve the sound quality of CDs. These accessories increase the thickness or diameter of the discs, and should not be used in CD changers. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compact Disc Player (CD): > SN051000-07 > Oct > 05 > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Compact Disc Player (CD): All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compact Disc Player (CD): > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes Compact Disc Player (CD): All Technical Service Bulletins Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer Error Codes 00-015 March 14, 2000 Applies To: All with CD Player/Changer Audio Unit Error Codes (Replaces 91-007, dated October 6, 1997) *If the audio unit displays an error code, use the troubleshooting tables in this service bulletin to troubleshoot the problem. Refer to service bulletin 98-019 for CD Player/Changer exchange information.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compact Disc Player (CD): > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 7726 CD Changer Troubleshooting (All except Passport) CD Player Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Radio Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compact Disc Player (CD): > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 7727 CD Player/Changer Troubleshooting (Passport only) Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (All except Passport) One-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the rear cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed disc. 3. If a disc is jammed between the player and the magazine, turn the loading gear until the disc returns to the player mechanism. Do not attempt to reload the disc back into the magazine. 4. After the disc is loaded into the player mechanism, turn the changer so that the front is facing you. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compact Disc Player (CD): > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 7728 5. Insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1-1/2" from the right side of the opening. 6. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 7. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed tray. 3. If a tray is stuck in the player, reinstall the cover and replace the changer. If all the trays are in the magazine, insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 4. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 5. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compact Disc Player (CD): > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 7729 Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (Passport only) One-piece door model: 1. Open the changer door. 2. Check to see if all the trays are in the magazine. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and inspect for a jammed tray. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Handling and Inspecting Compact Discs Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compact Disc Player (CD): > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 7730 ^ Handle a CD by its edges; never touch the flat surfaces. Contamination from fingerprints, liquids, felt-tip pens, and labels can cause the CD to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive. ^ When cleaning a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside. Do not wipe the disc in a circular motion. ^ A new CD may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen. ^ Various accessories are available to protect CDs and improve the sound quality of CDs. These accessories increase the thickness or diameter of the discs, and should not be used in CD changers. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Compact Disc Player (CD) > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Compact Disc Player (CD): > SN051000-07 > Oct > 05 > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Compact Disc Player (CD): All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radio/Stereo: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio Display is Blank/Does Not Function Radio/Stereo: Customer Interest Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function 97-080 November 17, 1997 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Radio Display Is Blank SYMPTOM The radio display is blank, and the functions do not work. The keyless remote transmitter may also be inoperable. The symptoms may be intermittent. PROBABLE CAUSE The crystal oscillator inside the radio is contaminated. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door: EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL050389 (U.S. production) HX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ7...VL050796 (U.S. production) 4-door: EX-Thru VIN 2HGEJ8...VH541409 (Canada production) EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL015811 (U.S. production) LX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...VL015720 (U.S. production) DIAGNOSIS 1. Record the customer's pre-set frequency selections. 2. Remove the radio Backup fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds to clear the radio's memory. 3. Reinstall the fuse, then check the operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. If both the radio and transmitter work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. - If the radio and transmitter do not work, check all fuses and electrical connections for other possible causes. If the radio works after checking all fuses and electrical connections, then disregard this Service Bulletin. If the radio and transmitter still do not work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the radio with a remanufactured unit. (See S/B89-029 for details.) Once the radio has been replaced, check operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. PARTS INFORMATION Radio: P/N 39110-S01-A01RM, H/C 4923447 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 010150 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 39110-S01-A01 H/C 4811279 Defect code: 032 Contention code: F05 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Radio/Stereo: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio Display is Blank/Does Not Function > Page 7744 Template ID: 97-080A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function Radio/Stereo: All Technical Service Bulletins Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function 97-080 November 17, 1997 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Radio Display Is Blank SYMPTOM The radio display is blank, and the functions do not work. The keyless remote transmitter may also be inoperable. The symptoms may be intermittent. PROBABLE CAUSE The crystal oscillator inside the radio is contaminated. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door: EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL050389 (U.S. production) HX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ7...VL050796 (U.S. production) 4-door: EX-Thru VIN 2HGEJ8...VH541409 (Canada production) EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL015811 (U.S. production) LX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...VL015720 (U.S. production) DIAGNOSIS 1. Record the customer's pre-set frequency selections. 2. Remove the radio Backup fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds to clear the radio's memory. 3. Reinstall the fuse, then check the operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. If both the radio and transmitter work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. - If the radio and transmitter do not work, check all fuses and electrical connections for other possible causes. If the radio works after checking all fuses and electrical connections, then disregard this Service Bulletin. If the radio and transmitter still do not work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the radio with a remanufactured unit. (See S/B89-029 for details.) Once the radio has been replaced, check operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. PARTS INFORMATION Radio: P/N 39110-S01-A01RM, H/C 4923447 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 010150 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 39110-S01-A01 H/C 4811279 Defect code: 032 Contention code: F05 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Radio/Stereo: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function > Page 7750 Template ID: 97-080A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Connector A Radio/Stereo: Locations Connector A Rear of Radio Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Connector A > Page 7753 Radio/Stereo: Locations Connector B Rear of Radio Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radio/Stereo: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7756 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7757 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7758 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7759 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7760 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7761 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7762 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7763 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7764 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7765 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7766 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7767 Radio/Stereo: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7768 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7769 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7770 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7771 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7772 Radio/Stereo: Connector Views Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7773 Stereo Radio Tuner Terminals Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7774 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7775 Radio/Stereo: Electrical Diagrams Part 1 of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7776 Part 2 of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7777 Radio/Stereo: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the audio unit, then disconnect the A and B connectors. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7778 Disconnect the A and B connectors from the audio unit. Reconnect the B connector only to the audio unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coded Theft Protection Audio Units Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Coded Theft Protection Audio Units NOTE:The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before - disconnecting the battery. - removing the radio fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. - removing the radio. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. For information on how to obtain the code in the event the customer does not have the code please refer to the TSB below. TSB # 98-026 April 15, 1998 Applies To: ALL with Anti-Theft Audio Units Audio Unit Anti-Theft Code Labels BACKGROUND This service bulletin describes where to attach the audio unit anti-theft labels that come in the glove box of vehicles equipped with anti-theft audio systems. If a vehicle has an anti-theft audio system, there are three peel-off labels in the glove box. Two of the labels have both the anti-theft code and the audio unit's serial number, and a third label contains only the serial number for the audio unit. During Pre Delivery Inspection, stick the label with only the serial number on the glove box. If the radio code ever needs to be retrieved through the HONDANET 2000 system, this will save you the time and labor of removing the audio unit to record the serial number. NOTES: - Also perform this procedure when installing an accessory audio unit that is equipped with an anti-theft system. - If a remanufactured audio unit is installed in a vehicle, remove the old labels and install new ones on the glove box, Radio Identification Card, and the vehicle's service records. - If the glove box is ever replaced, transfer the labels from the old glove box to the new one. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This bulletin is for information only. Skill level: Maintenance Technician PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coded Theft Protection Audio Units > Page 7781 1. Stick the label containing only the serial number information on the glove box. 2. Stick the remaining two labels on the Anti-Theft Radio Identification Card and on the vehicle's service records. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coded Theft Protection Audio Units > Page 7782 Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Stereo Radio Tuner 1. Remove the center dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the two mounting bolts, and pull the stereo radio tuner out. 3. Disconnect the 16P connectors, sub antenna lead and DIN cord (with cassette player), then remove the stereo radio tuner. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coded Theft Protection Audio Units > Page 7783 Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Cassette Player 1. Remove the front console panel. 2. Remove the DIN cord from the stereo radio tuner. 3. Remove the four mounting bolts, then remove the cassette player. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair Speaker: Service and Repair Front speaker: 1. Remove the speaker cover. 2. Remove the three screws from the speaker. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector, and remove the door speaker. Tweeter: 1. Remove the door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the tweeter. 3. Remove the mirror garnish. 4. Remove the two screws, then remove the tweeter. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7787 Hatchback/Coupe/Sedan Rear speaker: 1. Remove the rear side shelf or rear shelf. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the speaker. 3. Remove the four screws, then remove the speaker. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Alarm Module: Locations Rear of Radio Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Canada Security Control Unit Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Diagrams > Canada > Page 7794 Security Control Unit Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Antitheft Lighting Relay: Locations Upper Left Kick Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft Relay > Component Information > Locations Antitheft Relay: Locations Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7801 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Locations Integrated Control Unit: Locations Rear of Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Integrated Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7807 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7808 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7809 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7810 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7811 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7812 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7813 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7814 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7815 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7816 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7817 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7818 Integrated Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7819 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7820 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7821 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7822 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7823 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7824 Integrated Control Unit: Electrical Diagrams Integrated Control Unit Part 1 0f 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7825 Integrated Control Unit Part 2 0f 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7826 Integrated Control Unit (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7827 Integrated Control Unit (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7828 Integrated Control Unit: Testing and Inspection SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the integrated control unit. 3. Remove the integrated control unit from the under-dash fuse/relay box. All Systems Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Integrated Control Unit <--> [General Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7829 Intermittent Wiper System 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector and the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7833 Disconnect the 12P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Reconnect the 12P connector to the power door lock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Locations Integrated Control Unit: Locations Rear Of Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Integrated Control Unit: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7841 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7842 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7843 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7844 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7845 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7846 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7847 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7848 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7849 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7850 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7851 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7852 Integrated Control Unit: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7853 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7854 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7855 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Integrated Control Unit <--> [Body Control Module] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7856 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation Front Bumper: Description and Operation Bumper and Door Reinforcement Beams Bumper and door reinforcement beams used on Honda automobiles are made from high strength steel. Should high strength steel be heated, the strength of the steel will be reduced. If high strength steel is damaged, as in an accident where the bumper or door reinforcement beams are bent, the beams may crack should any attempt be made to straighten them. For this reason, bumper and door reinforcement beams should never be repaired; they should be replaced if they become damaged. NOTE: If a door beam is damaged, the whole door panel assembly should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7861 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation Rear Bumper: Description and Operation Bumper and Door Reinforcement Beams Bumper and door reinforcement beams used on Honda automobiles are made from high strength steel. Should high strength steel be heated, the strength of the steel will be reduced. If high strength steel is damaged, as in an accident where the bumper or door reinforcement beams are bent, the beams may crack should any attempt be made to straighten them. For this reason, bumper and door reinforcement beams should never be repaired; they should be replaced if they become damaged. NOTE: If a door beam is damaged, the whole door panel assembly should be replaced. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7865 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Component Information > Description and Operation Cowl: Description and Operation Description Impact damage to the windshield lower area may spread to the back of the panel and wiper mounting area, calling for replacement of the affected skins. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7869 Cowl: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the related parts. - Wiper arm and motor - Windshield - Right and left front fenders - Right and left front door opening trims - Front pillar trim - Hood - Wire harnesses and electrical accessories - Steering column - Dashboard, etc Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7870 2. Cut the windshield lower and separate the welded flange. - Center punch around the spot weld imprints. - Drill holes with a spot cutter through the nuggets. - Peel off the welding flange using a chisel. - Level off and finish the burrs of the pried-off spot welds with a sander WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear goggles or safety glasses whenever sanding, cuffing or grinding. 3. Set the new windshield lower. - Apply an undercoat and body paint to the inside. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Sand off the undercoat down to the metal from both flanges to be welded. - Clamp the new windshield lower in place with vise- grips and squill vises. NOTE: Apply the spot sealer to the welding surface when spot welding. - Install the new windshield and check for proper installation and alignment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7871 4. Tack weld the new windshield lower. WARNING: To prevent eye injury and burns when welding, wear an approved welding helmet, gloves and safety shoes. - Remove the vise-grips and install the fender and hood. Check for differences in level and clearance. 5. Perform the main welding. - Make 20% to 30% more spot welds than there were holes drilled. WARNING: To prevent eye injury and bums when welding, wear an approved welding helmet, gloves and safety shoes. 6. Finish the welding section. Smooth the mating surface with the windshield with a hammer and dolly. 7. Apply the sealer. Apply sealer to the upper dashboard, pillars, etc. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7872 8. Install the front fender and hood. Check the front fender and hood for differences in level and clearance. 9. Apply the paint. See Paint Repair section. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. 10. Apply anti-rust agent to the inside of the windshield lower and dashboard upper. 11. Install the related parts. Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Take care not damage the windshield and the paint finishes. 12. Inspect and clean. - Check the windshield for water leaks. - After installing the dashboard, check the lights, gauges, etc. for proper operation. - Clean the interior. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Front Door Handle: Service and Repair Front Door NOTE: Raise the glass fully. 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Pull out the retainer clip. 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the cylinder protector, lock cylinder and outer handle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door > Page 7880 4. Pull out the outer handle. Pry the outer handle rod out of its joint using diagonal cutters. NOTE: To ease reassembly, note location (A) of the outer handle rod on the joint before disconnecting it. - Take care not to bend the outer handle rod. - Use a shop towel to protect the opening in the door. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door > Page 7881 Front Door Handle: Service and Repair Door NOTE: Raise the glass fully. 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Pull out the retainer clip. 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the cylinder protector, lock cylinder and outer handle. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door > Page 7882 4. Pull out the outer handle. Pry the outer handle rod out of its joint using diagonal cutters. NOTE: To ease reassembly, note location (A) of the outer handle rod on the joint before disconnecting it. - Take care not to bend the outer handle rod. - Use a shop towel to protect the opening in the door. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Front Door NOTE: Raise the glass fully. 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover - Outer handle 2. Remove the bolt, then move the center lower channel forward. 3. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip from the door. Remove the latch through the hole in the door. NOTE: Take care not to bend the inner handle rod, outer handle rod, cylinder rod and lock rod. 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the inner handle rod and connector are connected properly. - Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door > Page 7887 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Door NOTE: Raise the glass fully. 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover - Outer handle 2. Remove the rod protector. 3. Remove the bolts and move the center lower channel. NOTE: Take care not to bend the inner handle rod and lock rods. 4. Remove the inner handle, then remove the latch through the hole in the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door > Page 7888 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Index - 4 Door (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7892 Front Door Index - 4 Door (Part 2 Of 2) Door Panel Replacement CAUTION: Take care not to scratch the door panel and other parts. 1. Remove: - Inner handle. - Mirror mount cover panel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7893 2. If applicable, remove the regulator handle by pulling the clip out with a wire hook. 3. Remove the door grip cover and speaker cover, then remove the screws. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7894 4. Release the clips that hold the door panel. Remove the door panel by pulling it upward. NOTE: Remove the door panel with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments Make sure the door latches securely without slamming. If it needs adjustment: NOTE: The striker nuts are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or down, and in or out. 1. Loosen the screws, then insert a shop towel between the body and striker. 2. Lightly tighten the screws. 3. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer. CAUTION: Do not tap the striker too hard. 4. Loosen the screws, and remove the shop towel. 5. Lightly tighten the screws. 6. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the screws and recheck. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Window Glass: Adjustments Glass Adjustment NOTE: - Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when adjusting the glass. - Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel for damage or deterioration, and replace them if necessary. 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Adjust the glass. 4D: a. Raise the glass fully. b. Loosen the glass mounting bolts (front door) and regulator mounting bolts. c. Push the glass rearward (front door glass) or forward (rear door glass). Front Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7901 Rear d. Tighten the glass mounting bolts (front door) and regulator mounting bolts. e. Loosen the front channel mounting bolts (front door) or rear channel mounting bolt (rear door). f. Lower the glass. Front Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7902 Rear g. Push the front or rear channels against the glass, then tighten the mounting bolts. 2D/3D: a. Raise the glass as far up as possible, and hold it against the glass run channel. b. Loosen the roller guide bolts, and adjust the glass so it is parallel with the glass run channel. c. Tighten the roller guide bolts. d. Loosen the front channel bolts. e. Lower the glass. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7903 f. Push the front channel against the glass, then tighten the mounting bolts. 3. Check that the glass moves smoothly. 4. Raise the glass fully and check for gaps. 5. Check the glass operation. NOTE: Check that the glass contacts the glass run channel evenly. 6. Check for water leaks. Spray water over the roof and on the sealing area as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7904 NOTE: Adjust the water pressure as shown. - Do not squeeze the tip of the hose. 7. Attach the plastic cover, then install the door panel. 8. Install the regulator handle so it points forward and up at a 45 degree angle with the glass closed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7905 Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7906 3. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. 4. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7907 NOTE: Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Front Door Window Motor: Locations Front of Driver's Door (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator Replacement 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7914 3. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. 4. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7915 NOTE: Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 00-013 > Feb > 00 > Rear Doors - Hard To Open Rear Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Rear Doors - Hard To Open 00-013 February 1, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - All 4-door models Rear Doors Are Hard to Open SYMPTOM One or both rear doors are difficult to open. The door handle needs to be lifted abnormally high to release the latch. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear outer handle rods are misadjusted. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the appropriate rear outer handle rod. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 818306 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour - one door Failed Part: P/N 75411-634-000 H/C 0564898 Detect Code: 074 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 00-013A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear door panel and pull the plastic cover down to access the door handle. 2. Remove the three latch mounting screws. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 00-013 > Feb > 00 > Rear Doors - Hard To Open > Page 7926 3. Pull the latch assembly down, and remove the door handle mounting bolts. 4. Pull the outer handle away from the door. Do not disconnect the outer handle rod. Place a shop towel in the door handle opening to protect the door from getting scratched. 5. Turn the outer handle assembly counterclockwise to adjust the outer handle rod. The end of the rod should be flush with the joint or no more than 1 mm beyond it. 6. Reinstall the outer door handle. Torque the door handle mounting bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft). 7. Reinstall the door latch assembly. Torque the latch mounting screws to 6.0 Nm (4.0 lb-ft). 8. Reinstall the plastic cover and the door panel. 9. Open and close the door several times to make sure it opens normally. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 00-013 > Feb > 00 > Rear Doors - Hard To Open Rear Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Rear Doors - Hard To Open 00-013 February 1, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - All 4-door models Rear Doors Are Hard to Open SYMPTOM One or both rear doors are difficult to open. The door handle needs to be lifted abnormally high to release the latch. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear outer handle rods are misadjusted. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the appropriate rear outer handle rod. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 818306 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour - one door Failed Part: P/N 75411-634-000 H/C 0564898 Detect Code: 074 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 00-013A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear door panel and pull the plastic cover down to access the door handle. 2. Remove the three latch mounting screws. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 00-013 > Feb > 00 > Rear Doors - Hard To Open > Page 7932 3. Pull the latch assembly down, and remove the door handle mounting bolts. 4. Pull the outer handle away from the door. Do not disconnect the outer handle rod. Place a shop towel in the door handle opening to protect the door from getting scratched. 5. Turn the outer handle assembly counterclockwise to adjust the outer handle rod. The end of the rod should be flush with the joint or no more than 1 mm beyond it. 6. Reinstall the outer door handle. Torque the door handle mounting bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft). 7. Reinstall the door latch assembly. Torque the latch mounting screws to 6.0 Nm (4.0 lb-ft). 8. Reinstall the plastic cover and the door panel. 9. Open and close the door several times to make sure it opens normally. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7933 Rear Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 00-013 Date: 000201 Rear Doors - Hard To Open 00-013 February 1, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - All 4-door models Rear Doors Are Hard to Open SYMPTOM One or both rear doors are difficult to open. The door handle needs to be lifted abnormally high to release the latch. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear outer handle rods are misadjusted. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the appropriate rear outer handle rod. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 818306 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour - one door Failed Part: P/N 75411-634-000 H/C 0564898 Detect Code: 074 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 00-013A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear door panel and pull the plastic cover down to access the door handle. 2. Remove the three latch mounting screws. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7934 3. Pull the latch assembly down, and remove the door handle mounting bolts. 4. Pull the outer handle away from the door. Do not disconnect the outer handle rod. Place a shop towel in the door handle opening to protect the door from getting scratched. 5. Turn the outer handle assembly counterclockwise to adjust the outer handle rod. The end of the rod should be flush with the joint or no more than 1 mm beyond it. 6. Reinstall the outer door handle. Torque the door handle mounting bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft). 7. Reinstall the door latch assembly. Torque the latch mounting screws to 6.0 Nm (4.0 lb-ft). 8. Reinstall the plastic cover and the door panel. 9. Open and close the door several times to make sure it opens normally. Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 00-013 Date: 000201 Rear Doors - Hard To Open 00-013 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7935 February 1, 2000 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - All 4-door models Rear Doors Are Hard to Open SYMPTOM One or both rear doors are difficult to open. The door handle needs to be lifted abnormally high to release the latch. PROBABLE CAUSE The rear outer handle rods are misadjusted. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the appropriate rear outer handle rod. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 818306 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour - one door Failed Part: P/N 75411-634-000 H/C 0564898 Detect Code: 074 Contention Code: B99 Template ID: 00-013A Skill Level: Repair Technician REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the rear door panel and pull the plastic cover down to access the door handle. 2. Remove the three latch mounting screws. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 7936 3. Pull the latch assembly down, and remove the door handle mounting bolts. 4. Pull the outer handle away from the door. Do not disconnect the outer handle rod. Place a shop towel in the door handle opening to protect the door from getting scratched. 5. Turn the outer handle assembly counterclockwise to adjust the outer handle rod. The end of the rod should be flush with the joint or no more than 1 mm beyond it. 6. Reinstall the outer door handle. Torque the door handle mounting bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft). 7. Reinstall the door latch assembly. Torque the latch mounting screws to 6.0 Nm (4.0 lb-ft). 8. Reinstall the plastic cover and the door panel. 9. Open and close the door several times to make sure it opens normally. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair NOTE: Raise the glass fully. 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover - Outer handle 2. Remove the lock crank and clip. 3. Remove the rear channel collar. NOTE: Take care not to bend the lock rod and inner handle rod. 4. Remove the latch through the hole in the door. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Index - 4 Door (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7943 Front Door Index - 4 Door (Part 2 Of 2) Door Panel Replacement CAUTION: Take care not to scratch the door panel and other parts. 1. Remove: - Inner handle. - Mirror mount cover panel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7944 2. If applicable, remove the regulator handle by pulling the clip out with a wire hook. 3. Remove the door grip cover and speaker cover, then remove the screws. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7945 4. Release the clips that hold the door panel. Remove the door panel by pulling it upward. NOTE: Remove the door panel with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Striker: Adjustments Make sure the door latches securely without slamming. If it needs adjustment: NOTE: The striker nuts are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or down, and in or out. 1. Loosen the screws, then insert a shop towel between the body and striker. 2. Lightly tighten the screws. 3. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer. CAUTION: Do not tap the striker too hard. 4. Loosen the screws, and remove the shop towel. 5. Lightly tighten the screws. 6. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the screws and recheck. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Window Glass: Adjustments Glass Adjustment NOTE: - Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when adjusting the glass. - Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel for damage or deterioration, and replace them if necessary. 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Adjust the glass. 4D: a. Raise the glass fully. b. Loosen the glass mounting bolts (front door) and regulator mounting bolts. c. Push the glass rearward (front door glass) or forward (rear door glass). Front Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7952 Rear d. Tighten the glass mounting bolts (front door) and regulator mounting bolts. e. Loosen the front channel mounting bolts (front door) or rear channel mounting bolt (rear door). f. Lower the glass. Front Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7953 Rear g. Push the front or rear channels against the glass, then tighten the mounting bolts. 2D/3D: a. Raise the glass as far up as possible, and hold it against the glass run channel. b. Loosen the roller guide bolts, and adjust the glass so it is parallel with the glass run channel. c. Tighten the roller guide bolts. d. Loosen the front channel bolts. e. Lower the glass. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7954 f. Push the front channel against the glass, then tighten the mounting bolts. 3. Check that the glass moves smoothly. 4. Raise the glass fully and check for gaps. 5. Check the glass operation. NOTE: Check that the glass contacts the glass run channel evenly. 6. Check for water leaks. Spray water over the roof and on the sealing area as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7955 NOTE: Adjust the water pressure as shown. - Do not squeeze the tip of the hose. 7. Attach the plastic cover, then install the door panel. 8. Install the regulator handle so it points forward and up at a 45 degree angle with the glass closed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7956 Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 3. Carefully lower the glass. Remove the bolts and screw from the rear channel, then remove the glass from the rear channel. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7957 4. Carefully remove the glass from the window slot. 5. Remove the outer molding, then remove the quarter glass. 6. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 7958 7. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. NOTE: If necessary, remove the power window motor from the regulator. - Before removing the power window motor, scribe a line across the sector gear and regulator. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary . Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Rear Door Window Motor: Locations Front of Left Rear Door (Right Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator Replacement Rear Door 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 3. Carefully lower the glass. Remove the bolts and screw from the rear channel, then remove the glass from the rear channel. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7965 4. Carefully remove the glass from the window slot. 5. Remove the outer molding, then remove the quarter glass. 6. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7966 7. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. NOTE: If necessary, remove the power window motor from the regulator. - Before removing the power window motor, scribe a line across the sector gear and regulator. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary . Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Locations Fuel Door Release Cable: Locations Opener Cable/Opener and Latch/Wiper and Washer - 2 Door/3 Door/4 Door Opener Cable/Opener and Latch/Wiper and Washer - 3 Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Locations > Page 7971 Fuel Door Release Cable: Service and Repair NOTE: - When removing the clips, use a clip remover. - Take care not to bend the opener cables. Hood opener cable: NOTE: Remove the front bumper and inner fender. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the hood opener cable is routed and connected properly. - Make sure the hood opens properly. Clip, Cable Cushion Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Locations > Page 7972 Trunk lid/Fuel lid opener cable (2D/4D): NOTE: Remove the following parts from the left side of the vehicle, then pull the carpet back, as necessary. - Rear seat cushion - Rear seat side bolster (4D) - Rear seat-back (2D) - Center pillar lower trim panel (4D) - Lower anchor bolt from the front seat belt (2D) - Side trim - Seat side trim (4D) - Side trim panel (2D) - Trunk mat and spare tire lid - Rear trim panel - Trunk side trim, Japan-produced Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Fuel Door Release Cable > Component Information > Locations > Page 7973 - Trunk trim panel, USA-produced Hatch/Fuel lid opener cable (3D): NOTE: Remove the following parts, then pull the carpet back as necessary. - Rear seat cushion and rear seat-back - Lower anchor bolt from the front seat belt - Side trim - Spare tire lid - Rear center shelf and rear side shelf - Rear trim panel - Side trim panel Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure each opener cable is routed and connected properly. - Make sure the hatch and fuel lid open properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood Latch: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads Hood Latch: Customer Interest Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads 00-004 March 6, 2001 *Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 2001 Civic 4-door from VIN 1HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 1HGES....1L041276 - 4-door from VIN 2HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 2HGES....1L511373 - 2-door from VIN 1HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 1HGES....1L035953* Rattle From the Hood (Supersedes 00-004, dated January 25, 2000) SYMPTOM A rattle from the front of the vehicle when driving over rough roads or small bumps. PROBABLE CAUSE Excessive striker-to-latch clearance. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the hood edge cushions and the hood latch. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Adjust each hood edge cushion so only one thread is showing and the "80" on the top is in the position shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood Latch: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads > Page 7983 2. Loosen the hood latch mounting bolts, and adjust the latch so it is flush with the top of the bulkhead. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hood Latch: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads Hood Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads 00-004 March 6, 2001 *Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - ALL 2001 Civic 4-door from VIN 1HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 1HGES....1L041276 - 4-door from VIN 2HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 2HGES....1L511373 - 2-door from VIN 1HGES....1L000001 thru VIN 1HGES....1L035953* Rattle From the Hood (Supersedes 00-004, dated January 25, 2000) SYMPTOM A rattle from the front of the vehicle when driving over rough roads or small bumps. PROBABLE CAUSE Excessive striker-to-latch clearance. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adjust the hood edge cushions and the hood latch. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Adjust each hood edge cushion so only one thread is showing and the "80" on the top is in the position shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hood Latch: > 00-004 > Mar > 01 > Hood - Rattles on Rough Roads > Page 7989 2. Loosen the hood latch mounting bolts, and adjust the latch so it is flush with the top of the bulkhead. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7990 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Release Handle/Hood Latch Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7991 Trunk Lid Of Hatch/Fuel Lid Opener Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7992 Striker (3D) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7993 Fuel Lid Latch Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7994 Trunk Lid Latch/Lock Cylinder Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7995 Hatch Latch/Lock Cylinder Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood Latch Release: > 99-089 > Nov > 99 > Hood Release Handle - Broken Hood Latch Release: Customer Interest Hood Release Handle - Broken 99-089 November 23, 1999 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - 2-Door thru VIN 1HGEJ6...YL028945 - 4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ8...YL022085 - 3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6...YH102606 - 4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6...YH525584 Hood Release Handle Breaks PROBLEM The hood release handle is broken. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the hood opener cable with an improved part. PARTS INFORMATION Hood Opener Cable: P/N 74130-S01-A01, H/C 4797486 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 812125 Flat rate time: 0.8 hour Failed part: P/N 74130-S01-A01 H/C 4797486 Defect code: 018 Contention code: B01 Template ID: 99-089A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front bumper (see the appropriate service manual). 2. Remove the left inner fender (see the appropriate service manual). 3. Remove the power steering reservoir. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood Latch Release: > 99-089 > Nov > 99 > Hood Release Handle - Broken > Page 8004 4. Release the four clips that attach the hood opener cable to the front bulkhead. Remove the clips from the opener cable; retain the clips. 5. Detach the opener cable from the electrical harness clip behind the left front headlight. 6. Release the two clips that attach the opener cable to the frame. Remove the clips from the cable; retain the clips. 7. Remove the driver's kick panel, then remove the hood release handle (two bolts). 8. '98-00 models only: Remove the hood latch cover. 9. Detach the opener cable from the hood latch. 10. From inside the passenger compartment, pull out the opener cable rubber grommet, then pull the opener cable out through the hole in the body. Discard the opener cable and its rubber grommet. 11. Route the end of the new opener cable through the hole in the body, into the fenderwell, through the hole in the body near the left front headlight, and out to the hood latch. 12. Install the hood release handle. Torque the bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft). 13. Press the opener cable rubber grommet into place. Reinstall the driver's kick panel. 14. Attach the cable end to the hood latch. 15. '98-00 models only: Reinstall the hood latch cover. 16. Attach the two clips to the opener cable, and snap the clips into the mounting holes in the frame. 17. Attach the opener cable to the electrical harness clip behind the left front headlight. 18. Attach the four clips to the opener cable, and snap the clips into the mounting holes in the front bulkhead. 19. Reinstall the power steering reservoir. 20. Reinstall the left inner fender. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Hood Latch Release: > 99-089 > Nov > 99 > Hood Release Handle - Broken > Page 8005 21. Reinstall the front bumper. 22. Pull the hood release handle, and make sure the hood opens and closes properly. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hood Latch Release: > 99-089 > Nov > 99 > Hood Release Handle - Broken Hood Latch Release: All Technical Service Bulletins Hood Release Handle - Broken 99-089 November 23, 1999 Applies To: 1996-00 Civic - 2-Door thru VIN 1HGEJ6...YL028945 - 4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ8...YL022085 - 3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6...YH102606 - 4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6...YH525584 Hood Release Handle Breaks PROBLEM The hood release handle is broken. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the hood opener cable with an improved part. PARTS INFORMATION Hood Opener Cable: P/N 74130-S01-A01, H/C 4797486 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 812125 Flat rate time: 0.8 hour Failed part: P/N 74130-S01-A01 H/C 4797486 Defect code: 018 Contention code: B01 Template ID: 99-089A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the front bumper (see the appropriate service manual). 2. Remove the left inner fender (see the appropriate service manual). 3. Remove the power steering reservoir. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hood Latch Release: > 99-089 > Nov > 99 > Hood Release Handle - Broken > Page 8011 4. Release the four clips that attach the hood opener cable to the front bulkhead. Remove the clips from the opener cable; retain the clips. 5. Detach the opener cable from the electrical harness clip behind the left front headlight. 6. Release the two clips that attach the opener cable to the frame. Remove the clips from the cable; retain the clips. 7. Remove the driver's kick panel, then remove the hood release handle (two bolts). 8. '98-00 models only: Remove the hood latch cover. 9. Detach the opener cable from the hood latch. 10. From inside the passenger compartment, pull out the opener cable rubber grommet, then pull the opener cable out through the hole in the body. Discard the opener cable and its rubber grommet. 11. Route the end of the new opener cable through the hole in the body, into the fenderwell, through the hole in the body near the left front headlight, and out to the hood latch. 12. Install the hood release handle. Torque the bolts to 9.8 Nm (7.2 lb-ft). 13. Press the opener cable rubber grommet into place. Reinstall the driver's kick panel. 14. Attach the cable end to the hood latch. 15. '98-00 models only: Reinstall the hood latch cover. 16. Attach the two clips to the opener cable, and snap the clips into the mounting holes in the frame. 17. Attach the opener cable to the electrical harness clip behind the left front headlight. 18. Attach the four clips to the opener cable, and snap the clips into the mounting holes in the front bulkhead. 19. Reinstall the power steering reservoir. 20. Reinstall the left inner fender. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Hood Latch Release: > 99-089 > Nov > 99 > Hood Release Handle - Broken > Page 8012 21. Reinstall the front bumper. 22. Pull the hood release handle, and make sure the hood opens and closes properly. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Locations Center of Trunk Lid Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hatch Trim Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hatch Trim > Page 8021 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Underside of Hatch Lid Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Sill Panel Replacement Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Sill Panel Replacement > Page 8039 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Sill Panel Replacement > Page 8040 Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Door and Side Moldings Replacement Door molding removal: The following materials and tools are required to repair the door moldings. NOTE: Follow the manufacturer's instructions. Materials: (Reference) - Stripe remover 3M 08907 - Stripe adhesive remover 3M 08908 - Adhesive tape Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Sill Panel Replacement > Page 8041 3M Super Automotive Attachment Tape Tools: - Protective tape - Knife or Cutter - Sponge or Shop towel - Infrared dryer - Film - Putty knife - Alcohol CAUTION: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the door panel, and pull back the plastic cover. 2. Apply protective tape on and around the molding. 3. Release the clips from inside of the door. Carefully cut the adhesive tape with a knife or cutter while pulling the edge of the molding away from the door as shown. NOTE: Take care not to scratch or bend the molding. Door molding installation: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Side Sill Panel Replacement > Page 8042 1. Glue the new adhesive tape to the moldings as shown. 2. Install the clips on the molding. 3. Heat the bonding surface of the door and door molding with an infrared dryer. Door: 104 - 140 °F (40 - 60 °C) Molding: 68 - 86 °F (20 - 30 °C) NOTE: Use care when heating to prevent deformation of the molding. 4. Align the molding with the clip locations, and set the molding. Lightly push on the molding until its edge is fully seated on the adhesive tape. NOTE: Do not spray water on the molding within the first 24 hours after installation. 5. Reassemble all removed parts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Upper Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Fender Liner: > 96043 > Sep > 96 > Body - Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose Front Fender Liner: Customer Interest Body - Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose Bulletin No. 96-043 Issue Date SEP 9, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under BODY Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose PROBLEM The right front inner fender liner may be pulled away from the fender when backing away from a low curb or similar object, allowing it to dangle and hit the right front wheel. VEHICLES AFFECTED 4-door - All Coupe - All 3-door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ.. .TH126156 CORRECTIVE ACTION Add an extra mounting screw to the inner fender liner. 1. Inspect the inner fender liner. If it is damaged, replace it with a new one. 2. Install a self-tapping screw (see PARTS INFORMATION) through the existing hole in the front of the fender liner. Screw it into the bottom of the bumper. PARTS INFORMATION Self-tapping screw, 5x16 mm: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Fender Liner: > 96043 > Sep > 96 > Body - Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose > Page 8056 P/N 90126-SR4-000, H/C 4100947 Inner fender liner, right front: P/N 74101-504-000, H/C 4779401 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 74101-S04-000 H/C 4779401 Defect code: 074 Contention code: A99 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Fender Liner: > 96043 > Sep > 96 > Body - Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose Front Fender Liner: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose Bulletin No. 96-043 Issue Date SEP 9, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under BODY Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose PROBLEM The right front inner fender liner may be pulled away from the fender when backing away from a low curb or similar object, allowing it to dangle and hit the right front wheel. VEHICLES AFFECTED 4-door - All Coupe - All 3-door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ.. .TH126156 CORRECTIVE ACTION Add an extra mounting screw to the inner fender liner. 1. Inspect the inner fender liner. If it is damaged, replace it with a new one. 2. Install a self-tapping screw (see PARTS INFORMATION) through the existing hole in the front of the fender liner. Screw it into the bottom of the bumper. PARTS INFORMATION Self-tapping screw, 5x16 mm: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Fender Liner: > 96043 > Sep > 96 > Body - Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose > Page 8062 P/N 90126-SR4-000, H/C 4100947 Inner fender liner, right front: P/N 74101-504-000, H/C 4779401 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 74101-S04-000 H/C 4779401 Defect code: 074 Contention code: A99 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Fender Liner: > Page 8063 Front Fender Liner: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 96043 Date: 960909 Body - Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose Bulletin No. 96-043 Issue Date SEP 9, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under BODY Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose PROBLEM The right front inner fender liner may be pulled away from the fender when backing away from a low curb or similar object, allowing it to dangle and hit the right front wheel. VEHICLES AFFECTED 4-door - All Coupe - All 3-door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ.. .TH126156 CORRECTIVE ACTION Add an extra mounting screw to the inner fender liner. 1. Inspect the inner fender liner. If it is damaged, replace it with a new one. 2. Install a self-tapping screw (see PARTS INFORMATION) through the existing hole in the front of the fender liner. Screw it into the bottom of the bumper. PARTS INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Fender Liner: > Page 8064 Self-tapping screw, 5x16 mm: P/N 90126-SR4-000, H/C 4100947 Inner fender liner, right front: P/N 74101-504-000, H/C 4779401 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 74101-S04-000 H/C 4779401 Defect code: 074 Contention code: A99 Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Technical Service Bulletin # 96043 Date: 960909 Body - Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose Bulletin No. 96-043 Issue Date SEP 9, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under BODY Inner Fender Liner Comes Loose PROBLEM The right front inner fender liner may be pulled away from the fender when backing away from a low curb or similar object, allowing it to dangle and hit the right front wheel. VEHICLES AFFECTED 4-door - All Coupe - All Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Fender Liner: > Page 8065 3-door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ.. .TH126156 CORRECTIVE ACTION Add an extra mounting screw to the inner fender liner. 1. Inspect the inner fender liner. If it is damaged, replace it with a new one. 2. Install a self-tapping screw (see PARTS INFORMATION) through the existing hole in the front of the fender liner. Screw it into the bottom of the bumper. PARTS INFORMATION Self-tapping screw, 5x16 mm: P/N 90126-SR4-000, H/C 4100947 Inner fender liner, right front: P/N 74101-504-000, H/C 4779401 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 74101-S04-000 H/C 4779401 Defect code: 074 Contention code: A99 Out of warranty: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Fender Liner: > Page 8066 Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8067 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Rear Cross-Member > System Information > Description and Operation Rear Cross-Member: Description and Operation Description The rear floor cross-member position is critical for rear wheel alignment. During replacement, check the position of the rear beam and the rear damper base, and position the rear floor cross-member properly. Weld securely following the welder manufacturer's instructions to maintain rigidity. Use of the positioning jig is recommended. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Component Information > Service and Repair Sub-frame Torque Sequence Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair Grille: Service and Repair Front Grille Hood Edge Protector Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair Carpet: Service and Repair SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove: - Front seat - Rear seat cushion - Kick panel - Center pillar lower trim panel (4D) - Front seat belt lower anchor (2D/3D) - Side trim - Front and rear consoles - Console panel 2. Remove the SRS unit covers. 3. Cut areas (A) and (B) in the carpet, then pull it back as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8083 4. Remove the footrest and parking brake lever mounting bolts, and detach the clips, then remove the carpet. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: - Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet. - Make sure the wire harnesses are routed correctly. - If necessary, replace any damaged clips. - Slip the carpet under the seat side trim 4D or side trim panel 2D/3D on each side properly. - Reattach the cut areas (A) and (B) in the carpet with wire ties. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Locations With Front Passenger's Airbag Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations > Page 8091 Without Front Passenger's Airbag (Part Of Canada Model) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble the airbag assembly. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been operated (deployed), it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag assembly during service, please observe the following precautions: Store the removed airbag assembly with the pad surface up. The driver's (and front passenger's) airbag connector(s) has (have) a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury Store the removed airbag assembly on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F / 100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal procedures for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 8094 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to- metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 8095 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact The driver's airbag (and front passenger's) airbag has (have) a spring-loaded lock connector with a built-in short contact. When this connector is disconnected, the power terminal and the ground terminal in the airbag connector are automatically shorted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact > Page 8098 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation System Description The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charge(s). If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: 1. The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflator(s) must ignite and deploy the airbag(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8099 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair To prevent accidental airbag deployment, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait three minutes before disconnecting any SRS connectors. - Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C,D). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s). Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Side: Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector and cable reel 2P connector. Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Side: Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector and SRS main harness 2P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Glove Compartment: > 96013 > Feb > 96 > Interior - Glove Box Rattles Glove Compartment: Customer Interest Interior - Glove Box Rattles Bulletin No. 96-013 Issue Date: Feb. 12, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under BODY Glove Box Rattle SYMPTOM A rattle coming from the area of the glove box when driving on rough roads. PROBABLE CAUSE A gap between the glove box door and the latch allows them to rattle against each other. VEHICLES AFFECTED Coupe - Thru VIN 1HGEJ....TL007788 3-Door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ.....TH108383 4-Door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ.....TL031610 CORRECTIVE ACTION Install wool felt between the glove box and latch. 1. Open the glove box. 2. Remove the latch assembly from the glove box door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Glove Compartment: > 96013 > Feb > 96 > Interior - Glove Box Rattles > Page 8108 3. On the outside of the glove box door, draw a line between the centers of the two latch mounting holes. 4. Cut a 10 mm by 30 mm piece of wool felt (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 5. Install the wool felt on the glove box door with the top edge of the wool felt along the line you just drew. 6. Reinstall the latch assembly. REQUIRED MATERIALS Wool felt: P/N 06993-SA5-000, H/C 2086676 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 841360 Flat rate time: 0.2 hour Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Glove Compartment: > 96013 > Feb > 96 > Interior - Glove Box Rattles > Page 8109 Failed part: P/N 77500-SO1-A01ZB H/C 4797973 Defect code: 043 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-013A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Glove Compartment: > 96013 > Feb > 96 > Interior - Glove Box Rattles Glove Compartment: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Glove Box Rattles Bulletin No. 96-013 Issue Date: Feb. 12, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To: See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under BODY Glove Box Rattle SYMPTOM A rattle coming from the area of the glove box when driving on rough roads. PROBABLE CAUSE A gap between the glove box door and the latch allows them to rattle against each other. VEHICLES AFFECTED Coupe - Thru VIN 1HGEJ....TL007788 3-Door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ.....TH108383 4-Door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ.....TL031610 CORRECTIVE ACTION Install wool felt between the glove box and latch. 1. Open the glove box. 2. Remove the latch assembly from the glove box door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Glove Compartment: > 96013 > Feb > 96 > Interior - Glove Box Rattles > Page 8115 3. On the outside of the glove box door, draw a line between the centers of the two latch mounting holes. 4. Cut a 10 mm by 30 mm piece of wool felt (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 5. Install the wool felt on the glove box door with the top edge of the wool felt along the line you just drew. 6. Reinstall the latch assembly. REQUIRED MATERIALS Wool felt: P/N 06993-SA5-000, H/C 2086676 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 841360 Flat rate time: 0.2 hour Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Glove Compartment: > 96013 > Feb > 96 > Interior - Glove Box Rattles > Page 8116 Failed part: P/N 77500-SO1-A01ZB H/C 4797973 Defect code: 043 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-013A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 97-056 > Nov > 97 > Interior - Sagging Headliner Technical Service Bulletin # 97-056 Date: 971103 Interior - Sagging Headliner 97-056 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic 2-door November 3, 1997 Sagging Headliner SYMPTOM The headliner sags in the front. PROBABLE CAUSE The headliner is too long. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the headliner with the new part listed under PARTS INFORMATION Headliner Assembly: DX, HX-P/N 83200-S02-A01ZA, H/C 5030366 EX-P/N 83200-502-A11ZA, H/C 5030374 REQUIRED MATERIALS Wool Felt: P/N 06993-SA5-000, H/C 2086676 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: DX, HX-P/N 83200-S02-A01ZA H/C 5030366 EX - P/N 83200-S02-A11ZA H/C 5030374 Defect code: 061 Contention code: A01 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Repair Procedure 1. Remove the headliner from the car. Refer to page 20-64 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual. 2. Inspect the front of the new headliner. - If the front edge of the headliner already has strips of wool felt installed, go to step 5. - If the front edge of the headliner does not have strips of wool felt, continue to step 3. 3. Cut three 150 x 15 mm strips of wool felt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 97-056 > Nov > 97 > Interior - Sagging Headliner > Page 8125 4. Apply the strips of wool felt to the front of the headliner as shown. 5. Install the new headliner in the car. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 97-056 > Nov > 97 > Interior - Sagging Headliner Technical Service Bulletin # 97-056 Date: 971103 Interior - Sagging Headliner 97-056 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic 2-door November 3, 1997 Sagging Headliner SYMPTOM The headliner sags in the front. PROBABLE CAUSE The headliner is too long. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the headliner with the new part listed under PARTS INFORMATION Headliner Assembly: DX, HX-P/N 83200-S02-A01ZA, H/C 5030366 EX-P/N 83200-502-A11ZA, H/C 5030374 REQUIRED MATERIALS Wool Felt: P/N 06993-SA5-000, H/C 2086676 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: DX, HX-P/N 83200-S02-A01ZA H/C 5030366 EX - P/N 83200-S02-A11ZA H/C 5030374 Defect code: 061 Contention code: A01 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Repair Procedure 1. Remove the headliner from the car. Refer to page 20-64 of the 1996-97 Civic Service Manual. 2. Inspect the front of the new headliner. - If the front edge of the headliner already has strips of wool felt installed, go to step 5. - If the front edge of the headliner does not have strips of wool felt, continue to step 3. 3. Cut three 150 x 15 mm strips of wool felt. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 97-056 > Nov > 97 > Interior - Sagging Headliner > Page 8131 4. Apply the strips of wool felt to the front of the headliner as shown. 5. Install the new headliner in the car. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8132 Headliner: Service and Repair CAUTION: When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. NOTE: - Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner. - Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other interior trim. 1. Remove: 4D: Front pillar trim (both sides) - Center pillar lower trim panel (both sides) - Upper anchor bolt from the front seat belt (both sides) - Center pillar outer trim and center pillar upper trim - Ceiling light - Rearview mirror 3D: Front pillar trim (both sides) - Right rear seat-back and rear seat cushion - Rear center shelf - Rear side shelf and side trim panel (right side) - Upper anchor bolts from the front and rear seat belts (right side) - Quarter trim panel (right side) - Ceiling light - Rearview mirror 2D: Front pillar trim (both sides) - Right rear seat-back and rear seat cushion - Side trim panel (right side) - Upper anchor bolt from the front seat belt (right side) - Quarter trim panel (right side) - Ceiling light - Rearview mirror 2. Remove the sunvisor and holder from each side. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8133 3. Remove the grab handles and coat hanger. 2 Door/3 Door/4 Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8134 3 Door 2 Door 4. Remove the rear roof trim and clips, and remove the roof trim and socket plug (moonroof model). 5. 4D: Lower the rear pillar trim on both sides. 3D: Remove the upper anchor bolts from the front and rear seat belts, then lower the quarter trim panel on left side. 2D: Remove the upper anchor bolt from the front seat belt, then lower the quarter trim panel on left side. 6. Lower the headliner. 7. Carefully remove the headliner through the passenger's door opening (2D/4D) or hatch opening (3D). 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: When inserting the headliner through the opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be careful not to scratch the body. - Check that both sides of the headliner are securely attached to the trim. - When installing the roof trim, install the joint toward the right side (moonroof model). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Rear Door Lock Tab Is Hard To Operate Door Locks: Technical Service Bulletins Rear Door Lock Tab Is Hard To Operate 99-025 April 13, 1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic - 4-door DX thru VIN 1 HGEJ6...XL025605 - 4-door DX thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH545281 Rear Door Lock Tab Is Hard to Operate SYMPTOM The lock tab on the rear door is hard to push down and pull up. PROBABLE CAUSE The lock crank is distorted. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the lock crank. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Door Lock Crank: P/N 72630-SM4-003, H/C 3286911 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 72630-SM4-003 H/C 3286911 Detect code: 004 Contention code: B02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-10 of the 1996-99 Civic Service Manual). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Rear Door Lock Tab Is Hard To Operate > Page 8140 2. Remove the screw from the lock crank, and pry the lock crank from the door. 3. Disconnect the lock rod and the lock tab from the lock crank. Discard the lock crank. 4. Connect the lock rod and the lock tab to the new lock crank. Secure the lock crank to the door with the original screw. 5. Reinstall the door panel. 6. Lock and unlock the door with the lock tab several times to make sure the lock mechanism operates smoothly and easily. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Key: Technical Service Bulletins Starting System - Unable To Key In Ignition Switch Can't Turn Ignition Switch? Check for Locked Steering Got a service customer complaining he or she can't turn the ignition switch to start the engine? The reason could just be the steering column lock pin is engaged with the front wheels turned. Here's what typically happens: Some folks use the steering wheel to help support themselves while climbing in or out of the vehicle. This is very common among elderly or disabled drivers. Doing this turns the front wheels, which twists the tires against the ground. The twisted tires apply torque to the steering column. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), the steering column lock pin is engaged. But the applied torque on the steering column binds the lock pin, making it tough to turn the ignition switch. The ignition switch won't turn to ON (II) if the lock pin isn't disengaged from the steering column. Tell your customer there's nothing wrong with the ignition switch itself. All he or she needs to do is turn the steering wheel from side to side while turning the switch. This usually releases the lock pin so the engine can be started. In some cases, though, your customer may need to give a good tug on the wheel. This could easily happen when parking on a hill and the wheels are turned sharply before the engine is shut off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8149 Disconnect the 12P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Reconnect the 12P connector to the power door lock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Diagrams Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8153 Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the audio unit, then disconnect the A and B connectors. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Receiver > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8154 Disconnect the A and B connectors from the audio unit. Reconnect the B connector only to the audio unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function Keyless Entry Transmitter: Customer Interest Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function 97-080 November 17, 1997 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Radio Display Is Blank SYMPTOM The radio display is blank, and the functions do not work. The keyless remote transmitter may also be inoperable. The symptoms may be intermittent. PROBABLE CAUSE The crystal oscillator inside the radio is contaminated. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door: EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL050389 (U.S. production) HX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ7...VL050796 (U.S. production) 4-door: EX-Thru VIN 2HGEJ8...VH541409 (Canada production) EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL015811 (U.S. production) LX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...VL015720 (U.S. production) DIAGNOSIS 1. Record the customer's pre-set frequency selections. 2. Remove the radio Backup fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds to clear the radio's memory. 3. Reinstall the fuse, then check the operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. If both the radio and transmitter work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. - If the radio and transmitter do not work, check all fuses and electrical connections for other possible causes. If the radio works after checking all fuses and electrical connections, then disregard this Service Bulletin. If the radio and transmitter still do not work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the radio with a remanufactured unit. (See S/B89-029 for details.) Once the radio has been replaced, check operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. PARTS INFORMATION Radio: P/N 39110-S01-A01RM, H/C 4923447 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 010150 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 39110-S01-A01 H/C 4811279 Defect code: 032 Contention code: F05 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function > Page 8163 Template ID: 97-080A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8169 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8170 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8171 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8172 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8173 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8174 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8175 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8176 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8177 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8178 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8179 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8180 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8181 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8182 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8183 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8184 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8185 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8186 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8187 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8188 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8189 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8190 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8191 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8192 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8193 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function Keyless Entry Transmitter: All Technical Service Bulletins Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function 97-080 November 17, 1997 Applies To: 1996-97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Radio Display Is Blank SYMPTOM The radio display is blank, and the functions do not work. The keyless remote transmitter may also be inoperable. The symptoms may be intermittent. PROBABLE CAUSE The crystal oscillator inside the radio is contaminated. VEHICLES AFFECTED 2-door: EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL050389 (U.S. production) HX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ7...VL050796 (U.S. production) 4-door: EX-Thru VIN 2HGEJ8...VH541409 (Canada production) EX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ8...VL015811 (U.S. production) LX-Thru VIN 1HGEJ6...VL015720 (U.S. production) DIAGNOSIS 1. Record the customer's pre-set frequency selections. 2. Remove the radio Backup fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for 10 seconds to clear the radio's memory. 3. Reinstall the fuse, then check the operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. If both the radio and transmitter work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. - If the radio and transmitter do not work, check all fuses and electrical connections for other possible causes. If the radio works after checking all fuses and electrical connections, then disregard this Service Bulletin. If the radio and transmitter still do not work, see CORRECTIVE ACTION. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the radio with a remanufactured unit. (See S/B89-029 for details.) Once the radio has been replaced, check operation of the radio and the keyless remote transmitter. PARTS INFORMATION Radio: P/N 39110-S01-A01RM, H/C 4923447 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 010150 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 39110-S01-A01 H/C 4811279 Defect code: 032 Contention code: F05 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 97-080 > Nov > 97 > Radio - Display is Blank/Does Not Function > Page 8198 Template ID: 97-080A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information Technical Service Bulletin # 96-046 Date: 961021 Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information Bulletin No. 96-046 Issue Date OCT 21, 1996 Model ALL Applicable To Refer to the list below File Under ACCESSORIES Keyless Remote Transmitter Information This Service Bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering*, and transmitter batteries. A transmitter quick reference guide is included. Use this index to find the information for the vehicle you are working on. Vehicle: Procedure Number: Civic 1992-93 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 8 del Sol 1993 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 7 Accord 1990-93 (except Wagon) 2 1991-93 EX Wagon 3 1991-93 LX Wagon 4 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1994-97 EX Wagon 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Prelude 1988-91 1 1992-93 (with optional security system) 2 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Odyssey 1995 (with optional security system) 5 1995-97 EX 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Passport 1994-95 (with optional security system, not applicable to 1995.5 model) 9 1996-97 (with optional security system) 10 *Transmitter prices are subject to change without notice. PARTS INFORMATION Transmitter ordering information and battery part numbers are in each transmitter section. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8203 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This Service Bulletin is for information only. TRANSMITTER QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Procedure 1 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8204 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Alpine of America by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form (found in Parts Information Bulletin A91 -0031) along with a dealer check for $59.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Honda/Alpine V.S.S. P.O. Box 2859 Torrance, CA 90509 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 2 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8205 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip into place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter, and install it in the new one. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 8319. For each set ordered, send a dealer check for $24.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Alpine Electronics of America 19145 Gramercy Place Torrance, CA 90501 Attention: Al Sula (Parts) Alpine's ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Additional transmitters can be ordered from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If you have questions on how to order the four ROM chip set, call Alpine's Parts Department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8206 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 3 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the HONDANET 2000 system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. Procedure 4 Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8207 This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form,* (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.), to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90801-5745 If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (800)852-4690, or Fax them at (310) 898-1029 (weekdays, from 8:30 A.M. thru 4:00 PM., PST). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your Dealership C.O.D. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. *On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. Procedure 5 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering wheel cover flashes when the system is in the programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. The parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. The parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8208 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 6 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Press and hold the driver's door master power door lock switch up in the unlock position. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key in the ignition switch and remove it. Repeat this four more times within 10 seconds, then leave the key in the switch. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that all power door locks (except the driver's) cycle to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the system. 5. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. (You can program two transmitters per vehicle.) 6. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 7 Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8209 NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on one of the transmitters. (A non-programmed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times with the transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the same transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 7. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on each transmitter. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle) Check that the power door locks cycle after you push each transmitter button, confirming that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 8 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8210 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM button and the CD/TAPE button) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on all other transmitters. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 9 NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8211 1. Locate the security system control unit mounted under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst to confirm that you're in the programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at three-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to let you know that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter or between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps, and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 9. Push all the function buttons on each transmitter to make sure they work correctly. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 10 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8212 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times, This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Move the driver's seat forward, and locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor, underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch on. 3. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit with a pen or pencil. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Check that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front marker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. If you have other transmitters to program, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. Turn the ignition switch off to exit the programming mode. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8213 Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. One battery per transmitter is needed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information Technical Service Bulletin # 98-011 Date: 040220 Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information 98-011 February 20, 2004 Applies To: ALL Keyless Remote Transmitter Information (Supersedes 98-011, dated February 6, 2003) Updated information is shown by asterisks and a black bar. This service bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering, and transmitter batteries. A remote transmitter quick reference guide is shown below. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8219 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8220 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8221 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8222 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8223 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8224 Remote Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 90-93 Accord, 92-93 Civic & Prelude, 93 Del SOL 1990-93 Accord (2-door and 4-door) with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1993 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1992-93 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8225 This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip in place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Press the reset button next to the ROM chip. 9. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter and install it in the new one. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 5319. This ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Order the additional transmitter from American Honda. If you have questions about how to order a four ROM chip set, call Alpine's parts department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8226 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Accord, Civic, Del SOL, Prelude & 95 Odyssey 1994-95 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Civic with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1994-95 Prelude with dealer-installed security system 1995 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes, and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering column cover flashes when the system is in programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. Check that the parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. Check that the parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 96-98 Civic EX & Except EX, Civic 1996-98 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1996-98 Civic with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8227 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to four transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM and CD/TAPE buttons) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during this procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Within 5 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each of the remaining transmitters. 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Civic, 03-04 Accord, Element, Pilot 1999-00 Civic Value Package with factory-installed keyless entry system 1999-04 Civic EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *1999-03 Civic (except EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2002-04 Civic Si with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Civic Hybrid with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2004 Civic (except LX & EX) with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Civic LX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8228 2003-04 Accord DX with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Element with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system 2004 Element EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot EX models with factory-installed security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 91-93 Accord 5-D00R EX Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8229 1991-93 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry or dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter The transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the iN system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. 91-93 Accord 5-Door LX 1991-93 Accord 5-door LX with dealer-installed security system Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA only by authorized Honda dealers. Send a completed order form (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.) to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90501-5745 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8230 On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (500) 552-4690, or fax them at (310) 595-1029 (weekdays from 5:30A.M. thru 4:00 P.M. Pacific time). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your dealership COD. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 94-97 Accord 5-Door EX, 95-98 Odyssey EX 1994-97 Accord 5-door EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 1995-98 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Programming the Transmitter NOTE: ^ The system accepts up to two transmitters. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Push the driver's power door lock switch to the unlock position and hold it. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, then remove it. Repeat this four more times (five times total) within 10 seconds. (You must complete steps 3 and 4 within 10 seconds or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Insert the key into the ignition switch. After you insert the key, make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. 5. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. All the power door locks (except the driver's door) should cycle to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 6. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. 7. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 96-04 Accord, CRV, DelSOL, Ody., Prelude, S2000, Insight, Pilot 1996-02 Accord with dealer-installed security system 1998-02 Accord DX & LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8231 1997-01 CR-V with dealer-installed security system 1996-97 del Sol with dealer-installed security system 1996-98 Odyssey with dealer-installed security system *1999-04 Odyssey LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* 1996-01 Prelude with dealer-installed security system *2000-04 S2000 with dealer-installed security system 2000-04 Insight with dealer-installed security system 2003-04 Pilot LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system or security system* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8232 1997 Accord SE With Factory-Installed Security System 1997 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Accord EX & 00-02 Accord SE 1998-02 Accord EX with factory-installed security system 2000 and 2002 Accord SE with factory-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8233 (Not interchangeable with CR-V and S2000 remote transmitter) Transmitter Identification The transmitter for the 1995-99 Accord and the 2000-02 Accord look identical, but they are not interchangeable. The 1995-99 transmitter works the doors of a 2000-02 Accord, but it does not open the trunk. If you are not sure which transmitter you have, press and hold the trunk release button while looking at the LED. The LED on the 1995-99 transmitter comes on in about 1.1 seconds. The LED on the 2000-02 transmitter comes on in about 0.5 second. Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 03-04 Accord LX and EX 2003-04 Accord LX and EX with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8234 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1616. Each transmitter uses one battery. 97-04 CR-V & 00-04 S2000 *1997-04 CR-V LX with dealer-installed keyless entry system 1998-04 CR-V EX with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-01 CR-V SE with factory-installed keyless entry system 2000-04 S2000 with factory-installed keyless entry system 2002-04 CR-V with dealer-installed security system* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8235 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete each step within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. Program the transmitters within 10 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-04 Odyssey EX 1999-00 Odyssey EX with factory-installed keyless entry system or dealer-installed security system *2001-04 Odyssey EX models with factory- installed security system* *Transmitter Identification Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8236 The 1999-00 transmitter is not interchangeable with the 2001-04 transmitter. To tell them apart, look at the FCC ID on the back. 1999-00 - FCC ID: E4EG8DN 2001-04 - FCC ID: OUCG8D-440H-A* Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 99-01 Prelude With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 1999-01 Prelude with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8237 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 88-91 Prelude With Dealer-Installed Security System 1988-91 Prelude with dealer-installed security system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8238 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering a Transmitter This transmitter is no longer available. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. 97-99 EV Plus With Factory-Installed Security System 1997-99 EV Plus with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only through Tech Line. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 00-04 Insight With Factory-Installed Keyless Entry System 2000-04 Insight with factory-installed keyless entry system Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8239 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system accepts up to three transmitters. The transmitter codes are stored in a stacking-type memory. If a fourth transmitter code is programmed, the code for the first transmitter is erased. ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all of the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. ^ You must complete steps 1-6 within 4 seconds of the previous step to keep the system from exiting the programming mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on one of the transmitters. (An unprogrammed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Repeat steps 1 2, and 3 two more times using the same transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 6. Press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on the same transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 7. Within 10 seconds, press the "Lock" or "Unlock" button on each transmitter. Make sure the power door locks cycle after you press each transmitter button to confirm that the system accepted the transmitter's code. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to exit the programming mode. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 94-95 Passport (Except 1995-1/2) 1994-95 Passport (except 19951A) with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitters can be accepted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8240 Programming the Transmitter 1. Locate the security system control unit under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst. This confirms that the system is in programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at 3-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter, or wait more than 30 seconds between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch to ON, then turn it to LOCK. 9. Test all the transmitters. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8241 96-97 Passport With Dealer-Installed Security System 1996-97 Passport with dealer-installed security system NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to two transmitters. If you program a third transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter two times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only two transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. Programming the Transmitter 1. Move the driver's seat forward. Locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. Use a pen or pencil to press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front sidemarker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK, then to ON. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8242 6. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit until the LED on the instrument panel begins to flash, then release the button. (Steps 6 and 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 7. Press and release the bottom button on the transmitter. Verify that the LED goes out, the siren chirps twice, and the front sidemarker lights flash twice to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Test the transmitter you just programmed. If it doesn't work repeat steps 2 thru 7. 9. If you have another transmitter to program, repeat steps 2 thru 7. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. 98-02 Passport With Factory-Installed Security System 1998-02 Passport with factory-installed security system Programming the Transmitter To program the transmitters, use one of these two procedures: ^ Procedure One cancels all learned transmitter codes and adds one new transmitter. None of the previously programmed transmitters will work. Use this programming procedure only if all transmitters were lost or stolen, or if a new control unit has been installed. ^ Procedure Two adds additional transmitters without cancelling any of the previously learned codes. The system will accept up to four transmitters. Procedure One (cancels all codes, adds one new transmitter) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position five times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Procedure Two (adds transmitters) 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 98-011 > Feb > 04 > Keyless Entry - Remote Transmitter Information > Page 8243 system will not enter the programming mode.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position and then to the LOCK position three times. Close and open the door. (Complete this process within 10 seconds.) Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the system is in programming mode. 5. Within 20 seconds, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter you are programming. Verify that the door locks cycle once. 6. Within 20 seconds, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Verify that the door locks cycle once to confirm that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Turning the Audible Chirp On/Off (1998-99 only) NOTE: On '00-02 Passports, the audible chirp sounds only when you push the LOCK button on the transmitter a second time. 1. Open the driver's door, then insert the key in the driver's door lock. 2. Turn the key to the "LOCK" position, then to the "UNLOCK" position. Repeat this two more times. (Complete this procedure within 10 seconds.) 3. Within 10 seconds, close and open the door two times. 4. Within 10 seconds, turn the key to the "LOCK" position, and then to the "UNLOCK" position, three times. Close and open the door once. Verify that the power door locks cycle once to confirm that the chirp has been turned on/off. Ordering a Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information Technical Service Bulletin # 96-046 Date: 961021 Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information Bulletin No. 96-046 Issue Date OCT 21, 1996 Model ALL Applicable To Refer to the list below File Under ACCESSORIES Keyless Remote Transmitter Information This Service Bulletin gives you information about keyless remote transmitters for most Honda vehicles. Each procedure describes transmitter programming (if applicable), transmitter ordering*, and transmitter batteries. A transmitter quick reference guide is included. Use this index to find the information for the vehicle you are working on. Vehicle: Procedure Number: Civic 1992-93 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 8 del Sol 1993 2 1994-95 5 1996-97 7 Accord 1990-93 (except Wagon) 2 1991-93 EX Wagon 3 1991-93 LX Wagon 4 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1994-97 EX Wagon 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Prelude 1988-91 1 1992-93 (with optional security system) 2 1994-95 (with optional security system) 5 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Odyssey 1995 (with optional security system) 5 1995-97 EX 6 1996-97 (with optional security system) 7 Passport 1994-95 (with optional security system, not applicable to 1995.5 model) 9 1996-97 (with optional security system) 10 *Transmitter prices are subject to change without notice. PARTS INFORMATION Transmitter ordering information and battery part numbers are in each transmitter section. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8248 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None. This Service Bulletin is for information only. TRANSMITTER QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Procedure 1 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8249 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Alpine of America by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form (found in Parts Information Bulletin A91 -0031) along with a dealer check for $59.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Honda/Alpine V.S.S. P.O. Box 2859 Torrance, CA 90509 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 2 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: This system uses ROM chips that match the transmitter to the security system control unit. When replacing a lost or stolen transmitter, you need to use the three ROM chips (provided with the new transmitter) to match the old transmitter with the new transmitter and the control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8250 1. Remove the rear cover from the old transmitter and the new one. 2. Remove the ROM chip from the old transmitter by sliding its socket holder toward the ROM chip. 3. Insert a new ROM chip into the socket holder, then slide the socket holder toward the socket to lock the chip into place. 4. Repeat step 3 to install a ROM chip into the new transmitter. 5. Reinstall the rear covers on the transmitters. 6. Remove the security system control unit from under the driver's seat. 7. Open the access cover on the control unit, and replace the ROM chip. (Use the same procedure as in steps 2 and 3.) 8. Close the access cover, and reinstall the control unit. If you are replacing a damaged transmitter, don't replace the ROM chips in the transmitters and the control unit; just remove the chip from the old transmitter, and install it in the new one. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If your customer wants to add a third transmitter to the system, you need to order a four ROM chip set directly from Alpine Electronics of America. The Alpine part number for the four ROM chip set is 8319. For each set ordered, send a dealer check for $24.00 (payable to Alpine of America), to this address: Alpine Electronics of America 19145 Gramercy Place Torrance, CA 90501 Attention: Al Sula (Parts) Alpine's ROM chip set does not come with a transmitter. Additional transmitters can be ordered from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. If you have questions on how to order the four ROM chip set, call Alpine's Parts Department at (800) 421-2284, extension 8885. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8251 Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 3 Programming the Transmitter This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. To order a transmitter, you need the vehicle's VIN, the code number from the power door lock control unit, and the ignition key code number. The power door lock code number is a five-digit number etched into the plastic case of the control unit (mounted under the driver's seat). The ignition key code number is a four-digit number stamped on the metal shank of all five original keys delivered with the car. Replacement transmitters are manufactured to match the code of the keyless entry system. The new ignition key is cut to match the vehicle's ignition switch, front door locks, tailgate lock, and glove compartment lock. To order this transmitter, use the controlled parts ordering screen on the HONDANET 2000 system. The transmitters are manufactured in Japan; delivery takes 4 to 6 weeks. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery is not replaceable. Procedure 4 Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8252 This transmitter is not programmable. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered directly from Kenwood USA by authorized Honda Dealers only. Send a completed order form,* (copy it from the Accessory Replacement Parts section of the Dealer Parts Price List) along with a dealer check for $30.00 (payable to Kenwood U.S.A. Corp.), to this address: Kenwood Service Corp. P.O. Box 22745 Long Beach, CA 90801-5745 If you need a transmitter shipped overnight, fill out the order form, then call Kenwood at (800)852-4690, or Fax them at (310) 898-1029 (weekdays, from 8:30 A.M. thru 4:00 PM., PST). You will need to give the information on the order form to the Kenwood representative. The transmitter will be sent to your Dealership C.O.D. Additional shipping and handling charges will be applied to the order. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR1220. Each transmitter uses two batteries. *On the order form, you must include the serial number of the keyless control unit or the number from one of the original transmitters. Procedure 5 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the system's memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the dashboard lower cover. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) The LED on the upper steering wheel cover flashes when the system is in the programming mode. 3. Press the top button on the transmitter. The parking lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted. 4. Press the top button on each of the remaining transmitters. The parking lights flash after each transmitter code is accepted. 5. Release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8253 The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 6 Programming the Transmitter NOTE: Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you are in the programming mode. 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Press and hold the driver's door master power door lock switch up in the unlock position. (Continue to hold the switch during this procedure.) 3. Insert the key in the ignition switch and remove it. Repeat this four more times within 10 seconds, then leave the key in the switch. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the system is in the programming mode. (This step must be completed within 10 seconds, or the system will exit the programming mode.) 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that all power door locks (except the driver's) cycle to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the system. 5. To program a second transmitter, press its "LOCK" or UNLOCK" button within 10 seconds of programming the first transmitter. (You can program two transmitters per vehicle.) 6. Release the master power door lock switch to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2016. Each transmitter uses two batteries. Procedure 7 Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8254 NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on one of the transmitters. (A non-programmed transmitter can be used for this step.) 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF (0). 4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 two more times with the transmitter used in step 2. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the same transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 7. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on each transmitter. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle) Check that the power door locks cycle after you push each transmitter button, confirming that the system has accepted the transmitter's code. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 8 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ Entering the programming mode cancels all learned transmitter codes, so none of the previously programmed transmitters will work. You must reprogram all the transmitters once you're in the programming mode. ^ To keep the system from exiting the programming mode, complete each step within 5 seconds of the previous step, and program the transmitters within 10 seconds of each other. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8255 2. Press and hold the Valet-Disarm button on the radio (between the AM/FM button and the CD/TAPE button) to enter the programming mode. (Continue to hold the button during the procedure, or programming will be cancelled.) Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that you're in the programming mode. 3. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the power door locks cycle to confirm that the code was accepted. 4. Press the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on all other transmitters. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 5. After all the transmitters have been programmed, release the Valet-Disarm button to exit the programming mode. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 9 NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times. This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. Programming the Transmitter Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8256 1. Locate the security system control unit mounted under the driver's seat. 2. Rub your finger over the label on the top of the control unit until you find the depression. Once you find it, push your finger through the label to expose the hole underneath. Inside the hole is a square, yellow button; this is the programming button. 3. Turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 4. Press and hold the programming button. Check that the security siren emits four separate chirps followed by a five-chirp burst to confirm that you're in the programming mode. The siren then emits prompting chirps at three-second intervals. 5. Release the programming button. 6. After a prompting chirp, press the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. Check that the siren emits a confirmation chirp to let you know that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. If you wait more than 30 seconds after the prompting chirp before programming a transmitter or between programming transmitters, the siren emits three chirps, and the system exits the programming mode. 7. To program additional transmitters, wait for another prompting chirp, then press the "LOCK" button. (You can program up to four transmitters per vehicle.) 8. To exit the programming mode, turn the ignition switch on, then turn it off. 9. Push all the function buttons on each transmitter to make sure they work correctly. Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is 23-144 (Radio Shack), A-23 (Eveready), or MS-21/MN-21 (Duracell). Each transmitter uses one battery. Procedure 10 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8257 Programming the Transmitter NOTES: ^ The system uses a stacking-type memory that accepts up to four transmitters. If you program a fifth transmitter, the memory for the first transmitter is pushed out, and it will no longer work. ^ To clear a lost or stolen transmitter from the system's memory, program a transmitter four times, This will remove the missing transmitter from memory, since only four transmitter codes can be accepted. ^ Another way to clear a lost or stolen transmitter is to erase all transmitter codes and then reprogram them. To do this, refer to the security system owner's manual. 1. Move the driver's seat forward, and locate the security system control unit mounted on the floor, underneath the seat. 2. Turn the ignition switch on. 3. Press and hold the green programming button on the side of the control unit with a pen or pencil. When the security system LED on the instrument panel comes on, release the programming button. (Steps 3 and 4 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.) 4. Press and release the top button on the transmitter. Check that the LED goes out, the siren chirps once, and the front marker lights flash to confirm that the transmitter's code was accepted by the control unit. 5. If you have other transmitters to program, repeat steps 3 and 4. 6. Turn the ignition switch off to exit the programming mode. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Keyless Entry Transmitter: > 96-046 > Oct > 96 > Keyless Entry - Transmitter Programming Information > Page 8258 Ordering the Transmitter Transmitters can be ordered only by authorized Honda Dealers. Order them from American Honda using normal parts ordering procedures. Batteries for the Transmitter The battery number is CR2025. One battery per transmitter is needed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8259 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection NOTE: - If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED is faulty; replace the transmitter. - If any door is open, you cannot lock or unlock the door with the transmitter. - If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors relock automatically. - The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if the ignition key is inserted in the ignition switch. 1. Using a keyless entry checker (07MAJ - SP00300): - Place the transmitter on the keyless entry checker, and press the transmitter button. If the indicator light does not come on, check for: a dead or low battery - Faulty transmitter - If the ray indicator light comes on, the transmitter is OK. NOTE: After a transmitter battery has been replaced, aim the transmitter at the receiver, and press the transmitter button six times. Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators when you press the sixth time. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8260 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair Storing Transmitter Codes - The codes of up to four transmitters can be stored in the control unit. (If a fifth code is stored, the code which was stored first will be erased.) - When the system enters the registration mode, all previously stored codes will be erased. - The system leaves the registration mode and returns to the normal mode if you turn the valet switch OFF, or - turn the ignition switch OFF, or - do not press the transmitter button for more than 10 seconds. Procedure NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between steps. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock - Inoperative Power Door Lock Actuator: Customer Interest Power Door Lock - Inoperative Bulletin No. 96-030 Issue Date JUNE 10, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under ELECTRICAL Power Door Lock Is Inoperative SYMPTOM One or more of the power door locks are inoperative. PROBABLE CAUSE The power door lock actuator connectors C556 and C557 are partially connected, or the door lock actuator is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED Ohio produced - thru VIN 1HGEJ....TL037213 Canada produced - thru VIN 2HGEJ....TH523520 DIAGNOSIS Operate the door lock, and listen for the door lock actuator motor to run. ^ If the motor runs, but the door lock will not lock, go to CORRECTIVE ACTION. ^ If the motor does not run, check connectors C556 (driver's side front door) and C557 (passenger's side front door) for loose connections. ^ If the connectors are loose, reconnect the connectors until they lock and check the door lock for proper operation. If the door lock operates properly, the repair is completed. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the affected door lock actuator with one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. NOTE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock - Inoperative > Page 8270 The illustrations show the driver's side; the same procedure applies for the passenger's side. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock - Inoperative > Page 8271 4-Door (Rear) - Removing the Door Latch Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock - Inoperative > Page 8272 2-Door - Removing the Door Latch Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock - Inoperative > Page 8273 Replacing the Door Lock Actuator Reinstalling the Door Latch Assembly 1. Reinstall the door latch assembly and all parts removed in reverse order of removal. NOTE: Replace the bushing in the outer door handle before reattaching the rod joint. 2. Cycle the door locks several times to verify proper operation. PARTS INFORMATION Door lock actuator: 4-Door Right front - P/N 72115-S04-A02, H/C 4778841 Left front - P/N 72155-S04-A02, H/C 4812251 Right rear - P/N 72615-S04-J02, H/C 4779146 Left rear - P/N 72655-S04-J02, H/C 4779187 2-Door Right - P/N 72115-S00-A01, H/C 4846523 Left - P/N 72155-S00-A01, H/C 4891578 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock - Inoperative > Page 8274 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Failed part: P/N 72155-S00-A01 H/C 4891578 Defect code: 032 Contention code: B01 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock Inoperative Power Door Lock Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Power Door Lock - Inoperative Bulletin No. 96-030 Issue Date JUNE 10, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To See VEHICLES AFFECTED File Under ELECTRICAL Power Door Lock Is Inoperative SYMPTOM One or more of the power door locks are inoperative. PROBABLE CAUSE The power door lock actuator connectors C556 and C557 are partially connected, or the door lock actuator is faulty. VEHICLES AFFECTED Ohio produced - thru VIN 1HGEJ....TL037213 Canada produced - thru VIN 2HGEJ....TH523520 DIAGNOSIS Operate the door lock, and listen for the door lock actuator motor to run. ^ If the motor runs, but the door lock will not lock, go to CORRECTIVE ACTION. ^ If the motor does not run, check connectors C556 (driver's side front door) and C557 (passenger's side front door) for loose connections. ^ If the connectors are loose, reconnect the connectors until they lock and check the door lock for proper operation. If the door lock operates properly, the repair is completed. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the affected door lock actuator with one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. NOTE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock Inoperative > Page 8280 The illustrations show the driver's side; the same procedure applies for the passenger's side. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock Inoperative > Page 8281 4-Door (Rear) - Removing the Door Latch Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock Inoperative > Page 8282 2-Door - Removing the Door Latch Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock Inoperative > Page 8283 Replacing the Door Lock Actuator Reinstalling the Door Latch Assembly 1. Reinstall the door latch assembly and all parts removed in reverse order of removal. NOTE: Replace the bushing in the outer door handle before reattaching the rod joint. 2. Cycle the door locks several times to verify proper operation. PARTS INFORMATION Door lock actuator: 4-Door Right front - P/N 72115-S04-A02, H/C 4778841 Left front - P/N 72155-S04-A02, H/C 4812251 Right rear - P/N 72615-S04-J02, H/C 4779146 Left rear - P/N 72655-S04-J02, H/C 4779187 2-Door Right - P/N 72115-S00-A01, H/C 4846523 Left - P/N 72155-S00-A01, H/C 4891578 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 96030 > Jun > 96 > Power Door Lock Inoperative > Page 8284 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Failed part: P/N 72155-S00-A01 H/C 4891578 Defect code: 032 Contention code: B01 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > SN051000-07 > Oct > 05 > Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Compact Disc Player (CD): All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - CD/DVD Precautions Adhesive Labels or Protective Disc Covers on CDs or DVDs: A Big Taboo NOTE: This article applies to all Honda models with a factory- or dealer-installed CD/DVD player or changer. We can't emphasize this enough: Never put adhesive labels or protective disc covers on recordable CDs or DVDs to be used in automotive CD/DVD players or changers. Here's why: ^ Recordable CDs and DVDs are actually thicker than their pre-recorded brethern. Automotive players and changers use rollers to draw the disc into the unit. The added thickness of an adhesive label or a protective disc cover can cause the disc to jam when it's loaded into or ejected from the unit. ^ CD/DVD players or changers are exposed to high temperatures inside the vehicle. High temperature can cause the label adhesive to soften. This can cause the label to curl on the edges and even form bubbles. Curled edges can catch on the rollers and bubbles add thickness to the disc. Either one can cause the disc to jam. To cut down on customer-caused damage, all '05 and later 0/Ms include this notice: Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the CD to jam in the unit. Anytime a service customer comes in with a loading or ejecting problem for a CD/DVD player or changer, ask if he or she used any discs with adhesive labels or protective disc covers. If the answer is yes, contact your DPSM for possible goodwill assistance. If the answer is no, then replace the audio unit under normal warranty. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes Compact Disc Player (CD): All Technical Service Bulletins Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer Error Codes 00-015 March 14, 2000 Applies To: All with CD Player/Changer Audio Unit Error Codes (Replaces 91-007, dated October 6, 1997) *If the audio unit displays an error code, use the troubleshooting tables in this service bulletin to troubleshoot the problem. Refer to service bulletin 98-019 for CD Player/Changer exchange information.* Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 8294 CD Changer Troubleshooting (All except Passport) CD Player Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Radio Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 8295 CD Player/Changer Troubleshooting (Passport only) Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (All except Passport) One-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the rear cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed disc. 3. If a disc is jammed between the player and the magazine, turn the loading gear until the disc returns to the player mechanism. Do not attempt to reload the disc back into the magazine. 4. After the disc is loaded into the player mechanism, turn the changer so that the front is facing you. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 8296 5. Insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1-1/2" from the right side of the opening. 6. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 7. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed tray. 3. If a tray is stuck in the player, reinstall the cover and replace the changer. If all the trays are in the magazine, insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 4. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 5. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 8297 Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (Passport only) One-piece door model: 1. Open the changer door. 2. Check to see if all the trays are in the magazine. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and inspect for a jammed tray. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Handling and Inspecting Compact Discs Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 8298 ^ Handle a CD by its edges; never touch the flat surfaces. Contamination from fingerprints, liquids, felt-tip pens, and labels can cause the CD to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive. ^ When cleaning a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside. Do not wipe the disc in a circular motion. ^ A new CD may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen. ^ Various accessories are available to protect CDs and improve the sound quality of CDs. These accessories increase the thickness or diameter of the discs, and should not be used in CD changers. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 8308 CD Changer Troubleshooting (All except Passport) CD Player Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Radio Troubleshooting (All except Passport) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 8309 CD Player/Changer Troubleshooting (Passport only) Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (All except Passport) One-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the rear cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed disc. 3. If a disc is jammed between the player and the magazine, turn the loading gear until the disc returns to the player mechanism. Do not attempt to reload the disc back into the magazine. 4. After the disc is loaded into the player mechanism, turn the changer so that the front is facing you. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 8310 5. Insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1-1/2" from the right side of the opening. 6. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 7. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and look for a jammed tray. 3. If a tray is stuck in the player, reinstall the cover and replace the changer. If all the trays are in the magazine, insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 4. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 5. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 8311 Manually Removing a Jammed Magazine (Passport only) One-piece door model: 1. Open the changer door. 2. Check to see if all the trays are in the magazine. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Two-piece door model: 1. Remove the changer from the vehicle. 2. Remove the top cover plate from the changer, and inspect for a jammed tray. ^ If a tray is stuck in the changer, replace the changer. ^ If all the trays are in the magazine, place the changer in a horizontal position, and insert a thin stainless steel ruler or a "Slim Jim" under the magazine, about 1/2" from the right side of the opening. 3. Push the ruler in until it presses against the eject lever at the back of the unit. 4. Slowly remove the ruler and magazine at the same time. Handling and Inspecting Compact Discs Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Door Lock Actuator: > 00-015 > Mar > 00 > Audio Unit with CD Player/Changer - Error Codes > Page 8312 ^ Handle a CD by its edges; never touch the flat surfaces. Contamination from fingerprints, liquids, felt-tip pens, and labels can cause the CD to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive. ^ When cleaning a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside. Do not wipe the disc in a circular motion. ^ A new CD may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen. ^ Various accessories are available to protect CDs and improve the sound quality of CDs. These accessories increase the thickness or diameter of the discs, and should not be used in CD changers. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Actuator Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Door Lock Actuator Rear of Driver's Door (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Actuator > Page 8315 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Rear Door Lock Actuator Rear of Left Rear Door (Right Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver's Door Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Driver's Door 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the actuator. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each knob switch position according to the table. 4. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 5. If the actuator fails to work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Driver's Door > Page 8318 Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Passenger's Door 1. Remove the passenger's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator. NOTE: The front passenger's door lock actuator is shown; the left rear and right rear door lock actuators are similar. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. 4. If the actuator fails to work properly, replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Control Module: Locations Dashboard/Door Front of Driver's Door (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Door Lock Control Unit (With Keyless) With Keyless Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Door Lock Control Unit (With Keyless) > Page 8324 Keyless Door Lock Control Unit (USA Only) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8325 Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the control unit. 3. inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8326 Disconnect the 12P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Reconnect the 12P connector to the power door lock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the inner handle. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the door lock switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Actuator <--> [Power Mirror Motor] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Mirror Actuator: Testing and Inspection 1. Pry out the cover panel. 2. Disconnect the 8P connector from the power mirror. 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the tables. Defogger Test: 4. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4 terminals of the 8P connector. There should be continuity. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Actuator <--> [Power Mirror Motor] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8334 Power Mirror Actuator: Service and Repair 1. Remove the power mirror from the door and disconnect the 8P connector. 2. Remove the mirror base cover from the mirror housing. 3. Remove the mirror holder from the mirror housing. Gently pull it out by hand. 4. Remove the three screws from the actuator and the two screws from the bracket at the base of the assembly. 5. Remove the bracket from the housing. 6. Remove the two screws, cut the wire harness, and remove the actuator. 7. Record the terminal locations and wire colors. 8. Route the wire harness of the new actuator through the hole in the bracket. Be sure to pass the wire under the bracket clip. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Actuator <--> [Power Mirror Motor] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8335 9. Pass the connector boot over the wire harness. 10. Insert the terminals into the connector in the original arrangement (recorded in step 7), as shown. 11. Apply tape to seal the intersection of the connector boot and the wire harness. 12. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Be careful not to break the mirror when reinstalling it to the actuator. 13. Reinstall the mirror assembly to the door. 14. Operate the power mirror to check that the actuator works smoothly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Connector A Power Mirror Switch: Locations Connector A Driver's Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Connector A > Page 8340 Power Mirror Switch: Locations Connector B Driver's Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8341 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Without Defogger Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Without Defogger 1. Remove the switch as described in Function Test . 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Without Defogger > Page 8344 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection With Defogger 1. Pry the switch out of the dashboard driver's lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the switch. Mirror Switch Defogger Switch 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage 99-062 January 15, 2007 Applies To: ALL Paint Damage From Environmental Fallout (Supersedes 99-062, dated October 12, 1999 to update the information marked by the black bars and asterisks) SYMPTOM The exterior paint surface does not feel smooth after the vehicle is washed. PROBABLE CAUSE Environmental fallout (airborne metallic particles, tree sap, paint overspray, road tar, insect residue, etc.) has adhered to the exterior paint surface. NOTE: This form of paint damage should not be confused with acid rain damage. Unlike environmental fallout damage, acid rain damage appears on the paint surface as pits or water spots-possibly black or brown in the center-which may feel smooth to the touch. PREVENTION The shipping wax/wrap guard applied to the vehicle at the factory provides the best protection for the paint finish from environmental fallout and acid rain damage. American Honda strongly recommends that you leave the shipping wax/wrap guard on the vehicle for as long as possible. Your dealership is responsible for maintaining the vehicle's finish after the shipping wax/ wrap guard is removed. CORRECTIVE ACTION Select a product line from one of the manufacturers listed in REQUIRED MATERIALS to clean the paint surface and to wax it after cleaning. Make sure you follow the manufacturer's instructions for each of the products you use. REQUIRED MATERIALS Each of the clays listed should do at least three vehicles. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8350 In warranty: American Honda will reimburse for this repair only under these conditions: ^ It is done during PDI ^ No more than 30 days have elapsed since the vehicle was received at the dealership (according to the date noted on the motor carrier's bill of lading) Operation number: 812355 Flat rate time: 1.0 hour Failed P/N: PDI-PAINT, H/C 3173994 *Defect code: 08103 Symptom code 08811* Skill level: Repair Technician *NOTE: When submitting the claim, make sure you enter the vehicle's date of receipt in the customer contention comment section. The claim will be rejected without this information.* REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Wash and dry the vehicle out of direct sunlight. 2. Tear off a piece of clay. Shape the piece with your hands into a flat disk about 3 inches in diameter. 3. Spray a 2-to 3-square-foot area of the affected panel with the manufacturer's lubricant. 4. Clean a 1-square-foot section of the sprayed area by rubbing it with the clay. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8351 5. Check your work by running your fingers over the cleaned and lubricated surface to feel for any remaining contamination. ^ If you feel any particles on the cleaned surface fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, clean the section again, and recheck your work. ^ If the cleaned surface feels smooth, fold the clay in half, knead it back into a disk shape, and go to step 6. NOTE: You must carefully fold and knead the clay to keep a clean side next to the paint surface. Never use clay that has fallen on the ground. Any small pieces of dirt or sand that imbed in the clay will scratch the paint surface. If the clay falls on the ground, discard it and get a fresh piece. 6. Clean the remaining sections of the sprayed area (repeat steps 4 and 5). 7. Wipe the lubricant from all the cleaned sections with a clean terry cloth towel. 8. Clean the rest of the affected panel and any additional panels that need cleaning (repeat steps 3 thru 7). 9. Apply the manufacturer's recommended wax or glaze to all the cleaned panels. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8352 Technical Service Bulletin # 97-028 Date: 970331 Body - Minor Paint Finish Repair 97-028 Applies To: ALL Models March 31, 1997 Minor Paint Finish Repair The first thing a new vehicle owner sees when he or she takes delivery of a new vehicle is the paint finish. Therefore, making the vehicle look good is very important. However, customer feedback has pointed out that many new vehicles are delivered with scratches and swirl marks. This is especially true with dark colored vehicles. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the paint finish using the tools, supplies, and procedures recommended for the type of damage (scratches, swirl marks, etc.) and for the color of the paint WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION None: Information only. RECOMMENDED TOOLS AND SUPPLIES To repair the paint finish, you should use these tools and supplies: Tools and Safety Equipment Mil gauge (film thickness gauge) * Pro Gauge II, or equivalent * ETG (Electronic Thickness Gauge), or equivalent These mil gauges are commercially available. They can be purchased from Pro Motorcar Products at 800-334-2843. - Variable speed electric polisher - Dual action orbital polisher (electric or pneumatic) - Eye protection (face shield or safety goggles) Supplies 9" Foam polishing pads (do not use wool type) - Clean, 100% cotton terry cloth towels or soft flannel cloth - Wet/dry sandpaper (1500 - 2000 grit) - Soft sanding pad - 50/50 Solution of isopropyl alcohol and water While we cannot recommend one manufacturer over another, any of the manufacturers listed here can provide you with quality products through their nationwide distributor network. Contact them for your paint repair supply needs, choose one, and then use the system of only that one manufacturer. If you need to know how to use the products, ask the manufacturer for training. 3M Automotive Trades Division 22100 Telegraph Road P.O. Box 358 Southfield, MI 48037-0358 Phone Number: 800-521-8180 Ext. 6890 Meguiar's 17991 Mitchell South Irvine, CA 92714 Phone Number: 800-347-5700 MOC Products 12306 Montague Street Pacoima, CA 91331 Phone Number: 818-896-2258 Repair Procedure The following procedures may not apply to all conditions or colors. Use the procedure that best suits the condition and color of the vehicle you're Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8353 repairing. Repairing and Polishing the Painted Surface The goal of a minor paint repair is to correct the damage to the upper layer of the painted surface. This is done by removing a thin layer of paint (no more than 0.5 mil) and then restoring the luster by polishing the repaired surface. A quick way to determine the depth of a scratch in the paint is to run your fingernail across the scratch. If your fingernail catches on the scratch, the area will need to be wet sanded and polished. When doing scratch or swirl mark repairs, use only quality products from one manufacturer. Each manufacturer has its own set of paint repair products that have matching materials. Mixing materials from different manufacturers, or using inexpensive products, compromises the repair quality. An electric polisher with an adjustable rpm control set between 1,500 and 1,800 rpm is best for polishing. When using a polisher, faster is not better. Too much polisher speed and too much applied force can cause swirl marks or may even burn the paint. Removing Swirl Marks Most swirl marks can be removed by using a foam polishing pad and polishing material. Use the polisher at 1,500 to 1,800 rpm with a small amount of polishing material on the pad. Always begin with the finest polishing material. If necessary, progress to the next coarser material only when the fine materials are ineffective. When polishing, work in small sections (approximately 24" x 24"). Avoid running the polishing pad over edges of a body panel or body lines where the paint is more susceptible to burning through. Let the cleaner do the work. Do not apply too much force! Forcing the polishing pad could cause deep cuts into the paint and might damage the surface so badly that it would need to be repainted. Polishing Dark Colors This additional procedure, after the polishing process described above, is important to reduce any chance of swirl marks, which show more on dark colors. When polishing is completed, use the same type of foam polishing pad on a random orbital polisher. Apply the finest polishing material to a 24" x 24" work area. Start the polisher, and make three to four passes over the work area. Remove the glaze residue with a cotton terry cloth or soft flannel cloth. Wet Sanding This process is used to repair scratches and acid rain damage deeper than 0.2 mil. The object is to remove as little paint material as possible. When wet sanding, stop frequently and dry the work area. This will allow you to see if the wet sanding has removed the damage. Start by soaking a 1500 or 2000 grit wet/dry sanding paper in water for 15 minutes. Wrap the soaked wet/dry sanding paper around a soft sanding pad. Lightly sand in one direction across (90 degrees) the scratched surface to highlight the surface damage. Flush the area with clean water. To remove any sanding scratches left by the wet sanding process, use a foam polishing pad and a polishing material. Refer to Removing Swirl Marks. Final Inspection When the polishing process is done, the paint surface may look perfect, but residue can hide very fine scratches that will become apparent after a few washings. This is especially true for darker colors. Start the final inspection by spraying a 50/50 solution of isopropyl alcohol and water on the work area and then wiping it dry. NOTE: Avoid spraying the solution on any unpainted plastic parts such as taillights, turn signal lenses, reflectors, etc. The solution can cause cracking. Inspect the repaired area, and repeat the polishing process if necessary. Finish the inspection by waxing the completed vehicle with a high quality wax. Use the wax recommended by the paint repair supplies manufacturer you have chosen. Preventive Maintenance Avoiding scratches and dents while the vehicle is in your dealership inventory requires some preventive maintenance. To help reduce the occurrence of scratches and dents, follow these recommendations: Park vehicles far enough apart to prevent door dents and dings. - Leave the exterior shipping protection on the vehicle until it is ready to be sold. - Implement and use an inventory age control system. - Use deionized water to reduce water spotting. - Wash the vehicles with deionized water, soap, and a wash mitt at least once a week. NOTE: Using a wash mitt will remove any residual dirt from the paint surface. If a wash mitt is not used, the residual dirt on the painted surface will scratch the paint when the surface is dried with a chamois or towel. - Use a clean chamois or terry cloth towel to dry the vehicles. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8354 Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Paint Codes Bulletin No. 95-058 Issue Date December 18, 1995 Model 1996 Applicable To ALL File Under BODY 1996 Honda Paint Codes Paint formulations are determined by each paint company. For questions about formulas or matching, contact your local paint distributor or the paint company's nearest regional office. The information provided is for reference only. American Honda does not endorse any paint company or type of paint. The original paint is acrylic enamel. Paint codes with "M" are metallic colors; those with P are pearlescent colors. NOTE: Herberts Standox uses the Honda Paint Code as its paint intermix code. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8355 Japan-Produced Cars Canada-Produced Civics, paint code ends in -4 U.S.-Produced (Marysville) Accords, paint code ends in -3 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Paint - Industrial Fallout Paint Damage > Page 8356 U.S.-Produced (East Liberty) Civics, paint code ends in -5 (East Liberty uses waterborne paints) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8357 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8358 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > ABS / PC Resin Parts Paint: Description and Operation ABS / PC Resin Parts General The door mirror, and license plate trim are made ABS resin. They can be repaired if the damage or deformation is minor in nature. This section covers ABS repair. Repairing ABS is different from other resins such as PP and urethane. NOTE: - The ABS resin is the copolymer resin consisting of the three monomers of acrylonitrile, butadiene, and styrene. - Polycarbonate is a generic name for high polymers which have the carbonic ester structure in the structural unit. The most prominent feature of polycarbonate is its tensile strength which shows the same level of yielding point as metals in the normal temperature. It also has outstanding impact strength compared to other plastics. NOTE: The following repair procedures also apply to the PC resin and NEPDMIS resin. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8361 Paint: Description and Operation Polypropylene (PP) Resin Parts General The front bumper, rear bumper, front grille, and side sill panel are made of polypropylene (PP) resin. They can be repaired if the damage or deformation is minor in nature. This section covers PP repair. Repairing PP is different from other resins such as ABS and urethane. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8362 Paint: Description and Operation 3C.3B (3-Coat.3-Bake) Paint General 3C.3B paint finish gives the Civic a deep gloss and stunning finish. This manual provides information on paint defect repair and refinishing. Throughout, the objective has been to explain in a simple yet comprehensive manner the basic items you should know about pain repairs. Select the correct material for the defect and repaint or refinish in the correct manner a described. WARNING: Most paints contain substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the container. Spray paint only in a well ventilated area. - Cover spilled paint with sand, or wipe it up at once. - Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. Avoid contact with skin. - If paint gets in your mouth or on your skin, rinse or wash thoroughly with water. If paint gets in your eyes, flush with water and get prompt medical attention. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. Basic Rules in Repairing a 3C.3B paint finish To repair paint damage, always use the 2-part acrylic urethane paints designated; polish and bake each of the three coats, as in production, to maintain the original film thickness, and to assure the same quality as the original finish. Outline of Factory Painting Process: Features in Each Work Process 1. Pretreatment and Electrodeposition In the pretreatment process, the entire body is degreased, cleaned, and coated with zinc phosphate by dipping. After the body has been cleaned with pure water, it is placed in an electrolytic bath of soluble primer (Cationic Electrodeposition). This produces a thorough corrosion inhibiting coating on the inner surfaces and corners of the body, pillars, sills and panel joints. Chipping primer is then applied to the most susceptible areas (see page 8-13). 2. Intermediate coat The intermediate coat is applied to the prepared surface for further protection against damage. 3. Top coat Enamel paint and either polyester or acrylic resin paint are used in the top coat for higher solidity, smoothness, brightness, and weather resistance. Sectional View of Paint Coats: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8363 Paint: Description and Operation Soft Chipping Guard Primer Coat General General The removal of paint and undercoating by stones and gravel immediately exposes metal to the atmosphere, causing it to rust. The thickness of this rust increases if the process continues unchecked. The soft chipping guard primer protects against damage due to the impact of flying objects. The purpose of this guide is to provide information you will find useful when repairing damage to the protective coating. Refer to the Soft Chipping Primer Undercoating Diagram. The soft chipping guard primer is applied over the E.D. (Electrostatically Deposited) primer. It is followed by guide coating and top coating. The soft chipping guard primer produces a smooth surface when dry. It should be sprayed so the thickness of the protective film is 20 microns. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts Paint: Service and Repair ABS / PC Resin Parts Repair Procedures Repair Procedures A. Deep scratches, when filling: 1. Sand the damage section. (#12O-#24O) 2. Apply the filler and dry. 3. Sand the filler (#24O-#4OO) 4. Coat with the primer/primer surfacer and dry. 5. Sand the primer surfacer. (#6OO-#8OO) 6. Top coating. B. Shallow scratches: 1. Coat with the primer/primer surfacer. 2. Sand the primer surfacer. (#6OO-#8OO) 3. Top coating. C. Repaint: 1. Sand the primer surfacer. (#6OO-#8OO) 2. Top coating. Refinishing Procedures Refinishing Procedures 1. Base material reconditioning (sanding) -1. Repaint and replacement part Lightly sand the part with #400, #600 or #800. -2. Slight scores or scratches Use a flexible sanding block and wet sand the damaged section with #400, #600. NOTE: Sand level to remove damage. -3. Deep scratches, when filling. Use a flexible sanding block and wet sand the damaged section with #240, #400. 2. Degreasing and cleaning Clean the repaired area with wax and grease remover, then blow with air dry. WARNING: Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm, 30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. NOTE: Wipe dust off surface with a tack cloth. 3. Filling, drying and sanding Apply the filler in several thin coats. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8366 NOTE: Mix and apply the filler according to the manufacturer's instructions. -1. Dry the filler with an infrared dryer for 5 or 6 minutes. Be sure to keep the dryer 40-50 cm (16-20 in) away from the surface. -2. Scratch the filled surface with your nail. If the surface is white when scratched, dry sand and wet sand with the #240-#400 paper. Be sure to sand level. 4. Cleaning with compressed air, and degreasing Blow the entire area to be coated with compressed air, then clean with wax and grease remover. WARNING: Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2-1 kgf/sq.cm, 30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. NOTE: Clean the whole surface to the help the masking tape adhere securely. 5. Masking Use the masking tape and paper to mask the area that should not be sprayed. 6. Coat with primer/primer surfacer, drying and sanding. - Spray the primer surfacer over the filled area. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm, 30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. - The coating thickness should be 20-25 microns. NOTE: Follow the primer/primer surfacer manufacturers instructions. -1. Drying - Let the primer surfacer dry naturally for 5 to 10 minutes then dry with a infrared dryer. WARNING: Body parts being dried with an industrial dryer can get hot enough to cause injury. Do not touch parts being dried. - Be sure to keep the dryer 40-50 cm (16-20 in) away from the paint film. -2. Sanding Lightly dry sand the whole area to be painted with #600, #800 sandpaper 7. Blow off with compressed air, then clean with wax and grease remover WARNING: Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm, 30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. NOTE: Clean the whole surface to help the masking tape adhere securely. 8. Top coating - Remove dust with a tack cloth before spraying. - Spray the top coating. Spray until the primer surfacer is covered. - The coating thickness should be 30-35 microns. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm, 30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8367 NOTE: For the recommended top coat paint, refer to "Example of repair materials". Solid color: Color enamel + color clear coat Metallic: Metallic enamel + clear coat Pearl: Pearl enamel + clear coat 9. Drying After top coating for about 10 minutes, then dry with an infrared dryer. NOTE: Follow the paint manufacturer's specification to dry properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8368 Paint: Service and Repair Polypropylene (PP) Resin Parts Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8369 Refinishing Procedures Refinishing Procedures 1. Sanding damaged areas Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8370 Shallow scratch: Level and finish damaged areas with #240- #400 sandpaper. - Polish the leveled area with #400 sandpaper. NOTE: Use a flexible block to sand the surface evenly. - Do not remove too much material. Deep groove/tear: Level and finish burrs and other irregularities with #240 sandpaper. Keep the surface as even as possible. 2. Degreasing/cleaning WARNING: Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm,30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. - Clean with wax and grease remover and dry with compressed air. - Wipe off all lint and other foreign particles from the surface with a tack cloth. NOTE: Be sure to use a tack cloth. Dust and dirt are electrostatically drawn to the surface. 3. Applying bumper primer (clear type). - Stir thoroughly before applying the primer. Use a spray gun or brush depending on working conditions WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Cover as wide an area as possible, except for shallow grooves (2-3 coats). NOTE: Do not dilute the primer with thinner. - Warm the primer if the outside temperature is below 50 degrees F(10 degrees C). - Apply the primer to the back of the bumper if the damage is a tear or hole. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8371 4. Drying bumper primer. WARNING: Body parts being dried with an industrial dryer can get hot enough to cause injury.Do not touch parts being dried. - Dry the primer thoroughly with an infrared dryer or other dryer suitable for the purpose. - If the damage or groove is shallow, heat the entire surface evenly. Apply heat locally if the bumper is gouged or torn open. NOTE: Use a dryer whenever possible. - Do not allow temperature to exceed 158 degrees F (70 degrees C) or the bumper will deform 5. Apply filler (BOND QUICK MENDER.) Mix the mender (A) into the hardener (B) in the ratio of I to I, and stir until they are thoroughly mixed. -1. Apply the mixture over the damaged area with a putty knife using light pressure. -2. Even out the surface to match the contour of the bumper. -3. If there is a hole, cover it with a masking tape from the back, and apply the filler over the outside surface. After the filler has been dried, remove the tape and apply filler to the side that was taped. NOTE: Apply filler so it extends over more than the damaged area. 6. Drying filler 7. Sanding filler WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear goggles or safety glasses whenever sanding, cutting or grinding. Wet sand first with #240 sandpaper then with #400 sandpaper. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8372 NOTE: Sand the surface evenly, particularly at the area where the PP resin and mender meet. 8. Degreasing/Cleaning - Blow off the sanded surface, then clean with wax and grease remover. WARNING: Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm,30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. Remove all dust and dirt with a tack cloth. 9. Spraying dual-Liquid bumper primer surfacer (gray) NOTE: Use the urethane bumper primer. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. Spray the primer surfacer over a wider area than the filler and the exposed surfaces of bumper primer. NOTE: Spray 2-3 coats to get 20-25 microns of thickness. 10. Drying and polishing Force dry the primer surfacer with infrared lamps or other industrial dryer. WARNING: Body parts being dried with an industrial dryer can get hot enough to cause injury.Do not touch parts being dried. NOTE: Use a dryer whenever possible. - Do not allow the temperature to exceed 158 degrees F (70 degrees C). -1. After force drying, wet sand the primer surface with #600 sandpaper. NOTE: Use #600 or finer sandpaper as any paper coarser than this might scratch the surface. WARNING: Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm, 30 psi) air nozzle - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. -2. Air blow the surface to be repaired, then degrease with a wax and grease remover. -3. Also clean and degrease where masking tape will be attached. 11. Intermediate coating NOTE: Intermediate coating is recommended for bright colors. - Use the top coat enamel. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most Paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed Read the paint label before Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8373 opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Mix the additive into the solid enamel color, metallic enamel or pearl enamel color in the ratio of 1 to 5 (by weight). - Mix the hardener into the mixture of pigment and additive described above in the ratio of 1 to 4 (by weight). NOTE: Keep the correct ratio, especially of the additive. Excessive additive takes longer to dry. - Adjust to the proper viscosity for spray by adding the thinner specified for the primer into the mixture of primer additive and hardener. Viscosity: 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) 11-13 sec. NOTE: It is not necessary to apply the clear coat. - Spray 2-3 coats of the top coat enamel to get 15-20 microns of thickness. The primer surfacer (gray) should not show through the top coat. NOTE: Apply the top coat enamel to the repaired surface. - Apply the top coat enamel to the entire surface of the primer surfacer when replacement is necessary. 12. Degreasing and Cleaning Air dry the entire surface, then clean with wax and grease remover (for USA usage-Dupont 38125 Enamel Reducer). NOTE: For shading or spot painting, polish the area with a polishing compound. Also sand with a #1500 paper to make a better bonding surface for the paint. 13. Masking - Remove all existing masking paper, then mask with new paper. - Use a heat resistant type masking tape (SCOTCH TAPE) where tape is attached directly to the bumper. - Use brown paper or masking roll paper to cover. NOTE: Mask the area completely to prevent overspray. - Protect resin parts with aluminum foil under the brown paper or masking paper to prevent damage due to heat during baking. 14. Top Coating - Air dry and degrease the surface before spraying the paint Also clean the surface with a tack cloth. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Remove dust and dirt from the surface to be coated with compressed air, then use a tack cloth. - Use a strainer when filling the cup with paint. - Spray the paint evenly over the surface so the replacement part is completely covered. - For application of the top coating refer to step "11 Intermediate coating". NOTE: Do not try to cover the surface with one heavy coat. Apply several thin coats. - With solid color (2-coat type), metallic color and pearl color enamels, allow final coat to flash-off (5-20 minutes) before applying clear coat. - Mix the additive into the clear in the ratio of 1 to 5. Adding the hardener and adjusting viscosity should be done the same way as described on the previous page. Viscosity: 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) 13-15 sec. Mixing Ratio (weight) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8374 15. Drying top coat WARNING: Body parts being dried with an industrial dryer can get hot enough to cause injury. Do not touch parts being dried. - Before force drying, let it air dry for 5-10 minutes. - Force dry the sprayed surface under the infrared lamps for 60-90 minutes. - Keep the drying temperature between 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) and 158 degrees F (70 degrees C). NOTE: Take care not to let the heat deform the part during the drying process. 16. Polishing and Buffing - Let the paint dry gradually, then polish the surface carefully using a polishing compound and sponge buff. - To remove lint or dirt, wet sand the surface with #2000 or finer paper first, then polish with compound. NOTE: Polish all roughness caused by sanding thoroughly. To do this, first polish with very fine compound, then with ultra fine compound. - After polishing, remove the masking paper and tape and wash the entire vehicle thoroughly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8375 Paint: Service and Repair Soft Chipping Guard Primer Coat Repair Material and Tools Repair Materials and Tools WARNING: - Most paints contain substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the container. - Spray paint only in a well ventilated area. - Cover spilled paint with sand, or wipe it up at once. - Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. Avoid contact with skin. - If paint gets in your mouth or on your skin, rinse or wash thoroughly with water. If paint gets in your eyes, flush with water and get prompt medical attention. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. Coating Procedures Coating Procedures NOTE: This section covers the application of the soft chipping primer to the replacement part. 1. Sanding the replacement part WARNING: Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye Injury. Sand the area to be painted with #240-#400 sandpaper. NOTE: Do not oversand the edges or corners of the part. - Do not expose bare metal. 2. Air blowing/degreasing WARNING: Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm, 30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. - Paint thinner is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. Clean the surface with compressed air and wax and grease remover. 3. Masking - Place masking tape or paper around the surface to be painted. - Cover as wide an area as possible with tape or paper to keep primer from spreading. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8376 4. Spraying chipping guard primer - Stir the primer thoroughly. - Put the primer in a beaker and weigh the needed amount of primer to be used. - Mix the hardener into the primer, following the manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Measure the primer and hardener so they are in correct ratio. - Add the specified thinner to the mixture of hardener and primer to attain the proper viscosity for spraying. 2C 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) 18 sec ± 1 - These substances are not available in the U.S.A. Honda recommends using DuPont's 123 Vinyl Coating, or Sherwin-Williams Vinyl Gravel Guard.Follow the manufacturer's instructions for application. - Once mixed with the hardener and thinner, the primer must be used within the times shown. WARNING: Most paints contain substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the container. Spray paint only in a well ventilated area. - Cover spilled paint with sand, or wipe it up at once. - Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. Avoid contact with skin. - If paint gets in your mouth or on your skin, rinse or wash thoroughly with water. If paint gets in your eyes, flush with water and get prompt medical attention. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Fill the gun's paint cup with the primer. Use a strainer when pouring the primer into the cup. - Primer should never be applied to a dirty or greasy surface. Before spraying, blow dust and dirt off the surface and clean with wax and grease remover. (Method of spraying) Do not try to cover the surface with one heavy coat. Apply several thin coats. NOTE: Spray coat 4-5 coats to get 20 microns of thickness, as one coat deposits 5-7 microns. - Spray the primer at 250-300 kPa (2.5-3.0 kgf/sq.cm , 35.6-42.7 psi) pressure. Spraying with improper air pressure will cause imperfections. - Open the gun 3-4 turns. - Wipe up unwanted primer immediately with thinner. 5. Cleaning spray gun - After spraying, be sure to clean the spray gun thoroughly with thinner or solvent. - The gun will be permanently clogged if the primer is allowed to dry. 6. Drying - After spraying the chipping guard primer, air-dry for 7-10 minutes to evaporate the thinner in the primer. Then dry it with infrared lamps at 176 degrees F (80 degrees C) for 30-40 minutes. NOTE: Insufficient baking may cause pinholes if the primer coat is too thick. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8377 - The temperature lamps and drying time recommendations should be followed closely. 7. Intermediate and Top coating - Sand the chipping guard primer film with #280-#400 sandpaper. - Follow the intermediate/top coating procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8378 Paint: Service and Repair 3C.3B (3-Coat.3-Bake) Paint Paint Refinishing Paint Refinishing Paint damage can appear in any form. Before making a repair, check the damaged area carefully, and determine the procedure best suited to the type. The following relates paint refinishing methods to various types of paint damage of damage or defects. Defects and Refinishing Processes Defects and Refinishing Processes WARNING: - Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. A. Damage or defects that have gone through to the metal surface Rusting or deformation: Steps: 1. Featheredge the damaged area. 2. Prepare the metal surface. 3. Apply a chemical coating to metal surface. Metal conditioner, Precoat, A.C.P treatment 4. Apply an undercoat (primer surfacer) 5. Apply an intermediate coat (color matched to top enamel paint). 6. Apply a top coat (body color paint). Solid color: Enamel top coat paint Metallic color: Metallic enamel paint + Clear top coat Pearl color: Pearl enamel paint + Clear top coat B. Damage or defects up to undercoat or intermediate coat External damage or blisters: 1. Perform Steps (4) through (6) under Item A. C. Damage or defects that have not gone through to intermediate coats (only in top coat) Shallow scratches or score marks: 1. If damage has gone through to the metallic paint, spray metallic enamel, then apply top coat wet on wet. 2. If damage has not reached the metallic paint and remained in the clear top coat, polish the damaged surface or-spray clear top coat alone. NOTE: Try to repair by polishing as much as possible if the damage has not reached metallic paint. D. Replacement of Parts -1. Welded parts Rear side outer panel, etc. 1. Perform Step (1) through (6) if the damaged area is covered with filler or welded with reinforcement plate. 2. Perform Step (5) and (6) for undercoats except those on joints (Intermediate coat for replacement parts). 3. On inner panels, apply paint where the undercoats is burned by heat of welding. Follow this with a rust preventive treatment. -2. Single Parts Painting of outer and inner hood, door, trunk lid, hatch, etc. Perform Step (5) and (6) of Item A. - Painting of inside of front fender. - Only enamel top coat paint may be used: - Solid color enamel. Metallic enamel or Pearl enamel. - After spraying enamel paint, perform rust preventive treatment (apply inner or outer rust preventive agent). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8379 Refinishing Procedures Refinishing Procedures 1. Featheredging (polishing damaged areas) -1. Damage to metal surface Sand the damaged area flat and smooth with a double action sander and #60 or #80 disc paper. - Sand the boundary between the metal surface and undercoat with a double action sander and #180 or #280 disc paper. Try to sand a larger area than the damage. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8380 NOTE: Make sure there is no height difference between the metal surface and undercoat. - If double action sander is not available, use a rubber block and wrap sandpaper around it to sand the surface WARNING: To prevent eye Injury, wear goggles or safety glasses whenever sanding, cutting or grinding. -2. Damage to Undercoat Intermediate coat Top coat Paint coat on replacement parts Sand the damaged surface flat and smooth with a double action sander and #280 or #320 paper. NOTE: If double action sander is not available, use a rubber pad and wet or dry sand the surface with #280, #320, #400 or #600 sandpaper. - After sanding, check that the surface is flat and smooth. - Perform the operations in Item 1-1 above for the areas where parts are welded to the body. 2. Preparation of metal surface. Remove all corrosion from the damaged area using a #180 or #280 paper. 3. Air Blowing/degreasing Air blow the sanded area, then degrease with a wax and WARNING: Do not use high air pressure: Use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm, 30psi)air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. 4. Treatment of metal surface - Brush or spray a solution of chrome phosphate or washer primer on the exposed metal surface. - Use the following materials to treat the metal surface: - Metal conditioner (Kamsai Paint) - ACP agent (Nippon Paint) - Precoat (Isam Paint) NOTE: Follow the manufacturer's instructions. - Treat the metal surface, as much as possible, to provide a better bonding surface for the subsequent paint. 5. Application of Filler Drying Sanding - Small cracks or pinholes in the sheet metal should be repaired with a filler and sanded flat and smooth. NOTE: Mix the putty with the hardener in the correct ratio. - Follow the filler manufacturer's instructions. WARNING: Body parts being dried with an industrial dryer can get hot enough to cause injury. Do not touch parts being dried. - Allow the filler to air dry for about 5-6 minutes, then force dry with an infrared lamp. NOTE: Keep the lamp 40-50 cm (16-20 in) from the filler while drying. - Stop drying the filler if a white mark appears when the surface is scratched with your nail. Wet or dry sand the surface flat and smooth with a #280 or #320 paper. 6. Air Blowing/Degreasing Air blow the surface to be repaired, then degrease with a wax and grease remover. NOTE: Also clean and degrease surfaces where masking tape will be attached. 7. Masking Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8381 Mask the areas surrounding the damage to prevent overspray from the primer. 8. Application and Drying of Primer/Drying WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Spray the primer over the filler and surface (use epoxy or 2-part primer) 2-part primer). Spray : 2-3 coats. - Use the following materials: 615SPrimer Surfacer (Dupont) - Primer Surfacer EP (Akzo) - NPS735 Urethane Primer Surfacer (R-M) - Let the primer air dry for 5-10 minutes, then force dry with a infrared lamp. NOTE: Keep the dryer 40-50 cm (16-20 in) from the surface. 9. Application of Polishing Undercoat - Remove the masking paper and tape. - Check that the undercoat has dried thoroughly, then dry or wet sand the surface with a #280 or #320 paper. NOTE: Use a rubber block and sand flat and smooth. - Sand the entire surface to be refinished. 10. Air Blowing/Degreasing WARNING: Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm, 30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. Air blow all the surfaces, then degrease with wax and grease remover (for USA usage-DuPont 38125 Enamel Reducer). NOTE: Also degrease the surfaces where masking tape will be attached. 11. Masking Mask the undamaged areas surrounding the damage to prevent overspray from primer surfacer (undercoat). NOTE: Use masking tape and paper to mask the body. A vinyl cover may also be used to effectively mask the body. 12. Application of Intermediate Coat (same color as enamel) top coat spraying/Drying WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Use the same color paint as the top coat. Spray it over the surface until the undercoat (primer surfacer) is fully covered. - Spray the paint slightly thicker than normal to allow for loss during subsequent polishing. - Super ponacle II (R-M) - Super Centri (Dupont) - Auto cryl (Akzo) 13. Polishing of Intermediate Coat - Check that the paint coat has dried thoroughly, then dry or wet sand the surface with a #600 and #800 paper. NOTE: Use a rubber block and sand flat and smooth, being careful not to expose the undercoat. Polishing of Top Coat (if damaged): Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > ABS / PC Resin Parts > Page 8382 Use the same technique described above. 14. Air Blowing/Degreasing WARNING: Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm, 30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. - Air blow the entire surface, then degrease with wax and grease remover. - For shading or spot painting, polish the area with a polishing compound. Sand with a #2000 paper to give a better bonding surface for the subsequent paint. 15. Masking - Remove all existing masking paper, then mask with new paper. - Use a heat resistant type masking tape (SCOTCH TAPE) where tape is attached directly to the body. - Use brown paper or masking roll paper to cover. NOTE: Mask the area surrounding the damage sufficiently to prevent overspray. It is also a good practice to use a vinyl cover to protect other areas. - Protect resin parts with aluminum foil under the brown paper or masking paper to prevent damage due to heat during baking. 16. Application of Top Coat Spraying/Drying - Prior to putting the car in the painting booth, thoroughly clean the interior and spray water over the floor Be careful about blowing dust and dirt. WARNING: Do not use high air pressure; use only an approved, 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/sq.cm, 30 psi) air nozzle. - Wear goggles or safety glasses to prevent eye injury. - Air blow and degrease the surface before spraying the paint Also clean the surface with a tack cloth. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Spray color matched top coat over the prepared surface. Apply 2-3 coats in two directions until the intermediate coat is fully covered. NOTE: For application of the top coat, refer to step 12 "Application of Intermediate Coat." Solid color: Color enamel + Color clear coat Metallic color: Metallic enamel + Clear coat Pearl color: Pearl enamel + Clear coat WARNING: Body parts being dried with an industrial dryer can get hot enough to cause injury. Do not touch parts being dried. - After spraying, allow the paint to settle for about 10 minutes, then force dry with an infrared lamp. NOTE: Follow the paint manufacturers instructions. 17. Polishing/Buffing - Let the paint dry gradually, then polish the surface carefully using a polishing compound and sponge buff. - To remove lint or dirt, wet sand the surface with #2000 paper or finer first, then polish with compound. NOTE: Polish all roughness caused by sanding thoroughly. To do this, first polish with very fine compound, then with ultra fine compound. - After polishing, remove the masking paper and tape, then wash the entire vehicle thoroughly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Support: Description and Operation Description The front bulkhead is joined to the front wheelhouse and the front side frame. It forms the base for the headlights and other parts and maintains the rigidity of the front section of the body. Pay particular attention to twists and parallelism, and check the mounting of related parts when welding. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8390 Disconnect the 12P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Reconnect the 12P connector to the power door lock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Door Lock Control Module: Locations Dashboard/Door Front of Driver's Door (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Door Lock Control Unit (With Keyless) With Keyless Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Door Lock Control Unit (With Keyless) > Page 8396 Keyless Door Lock Control Unit (USA Only) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8397 Power Door Lock Control Module: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's door panel. 2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the control unit. 3. inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8398 Disconnect the 12P connector from the power door lock control unit. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily. Reconnect the 12P connector to the power door lock control unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Diagrams > Moonroof Close Relay Moonroof Close Relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Diagrams > Moonroof Close Relay > Page 8404 Moonroof Open Relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Moonroof Close Relay Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Close Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Five-terminal type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Moonroof close relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Moonroof Close Relay > Page 8407 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Open Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Five-terminal type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Moonroof open relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Cable Housing <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing] > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof/Moonroof Cable Housing: Service and Repair CAUTION: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the frame. 2. Remove the motor and glass bracket. 3. Remove the nuts, and lift off each guide rail, then remove the cable assembly with sliders attached. NOTE: Take care not to bend the cable tubes and guide rails. 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Damaged parts should be replaced. - Grease the sliding portion with Super High Temp Urea Grease, P/N 08758 - 9002. - Fill the groove in each grommet with sealant. - Install the frame seal securely. - Before installing the motor, make sure both sliders are parallel. - Before installing the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Locations Underside of Roof Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8416 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Be careful not to damage the seats, dashboard and other interior trim. 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the motor connector and glass position switch connector. NOTE: When removing the motor, detach the connector from the frame, remove the bolts and nuts, then remove the motor. 3. Remove the glass. 4. Disconnect the drain tubes, and detach the ceiling light harness. 5. Remove the frame mounting bolts. NOTE: An assistant is helpful when removing the bolts. - Remove the front bolts last. 6. Detach the rear hooks by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8417 7. Pull the drain tubes out the front and rear pillars. NOTE: Before pulling out the drain tube, tie a string to the end of it so it can be reinstalled. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves by using compressed air. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.). - Install the tube clip as shown. 9. Check for water leaks. NOTE: Do not use high-pressure water. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Locations Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Diagrams > Moonroof Close Relay Moonroof Close Relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Diagrams > Moonroof Close Relay > Page 8423 Moonroof Open Relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Moonroof Close Relay Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Close Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Five-terminal type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Moonroof close relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Relay <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Relay] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Moonroof Close Relay > Page 8426 Sunroof/Moonroof Relay: Testing and Inspection Moonroof Open Relay NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Five-terminal type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.2 and No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. Moonroof open relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Open/Close Switch Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Open/Close Switch Underside of Roof Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Open/Close Switch > Page 8431 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Tilt/Close Switch Underside of Roof Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8432 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Adjustments Switch Plate Adjustment (Fully Closed Position) 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Using the moon roof wrench, close the glass fully. NOTE: Check the glass fit to the roof panel. 3. Using an open-end wrench, loosen the switch plate mounting bolts. 4. Adjust position of the switch plate (switch cam) as shown. 5. Check the operation of the glass (from tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch. NOTE: Check the glass height. 6. Close the glass fully, and check for water leaks. NOTE: Do not use high-pressure water. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof/Moonroof Track <--> [Sunroof / Moonroof Track] > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof/Moonroof Track: Service and Repair CAUTION: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 1. Remove the frame. 2. Remove the motor and glass bracket. 3. Remove the nuts, and lift off each guide rail, then remove the cable assembly with sliders attached. NOTE: Take care not to bend the cable tubes and guide rails. 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Damaged parts should be replaced. - Grease the sliding portion with Super High Temp Urea Grease, P/N 08758 - 9002. - Fill the groove in each grommet with sealant. - Install the frame seal securely. - Before installing the motor, make sure both sliders are parallel. - Before installing the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Be careful not to damage the seats, dashboard and other interior trim. 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the motor connector and glass position switch connector. NOTE: When removing the motor, detach the connector from the frame, remove the bolts and nuts, then remove the motor. 3. Remove the glass. 4. Disconnect the drain tubes, and detach the ceiling light harness. 5. Remove the frame mounting bolts. NOTE: An assistant is helpful when removing the bolts. - Remove the front bolts last. 6. Detach the rear hooks by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8439 7. Pull the drain tubes out the front and rear pillars. NOTE: Before pulling out the drain tube, tie a string to the end of it so it can be reinstalled. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves by using compressed air. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.). - Install the tube clip as shown. 9. Check for water leaks. NOTE: Do not use high-pressure water. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair CAUTION: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Be careful not to damage the seats, dashboard and other interior trim. 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the motor connector and glass position switch connector. NOTE: When removing the motor, detach the connector from the frame, remove the bolts and nuts, then remove the motor. 3. Remove the glass. 4. Disconnect the drain tubes, and detach the ceiling light harness. 5. Remove the frame mounting bolts. NOTE: An assistant is helpful when removing the bolts. - Remove the front bolts last. 6. Detach the rear hooks by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8443 7. Pull the drain tubes out the front and rear pillars. NOTE: Before pulling out the drain tube, tie a string to the end of it so it can be reinstalled. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: - Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves by using compressed air. - Check the frame seal. - Clean the surface of the frame. - When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes. - When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.). - Install the tube clip as shown. 9. Check for water leaks. NOTE: Do not use high-pressure water. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks 00-095 March 26, 2002 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord With Moonroof - ALL 1996-02 Civic EX - ALL Squeak From the Moonroof Seal (Supersedes 00-095, dated December 12, 2000) SYMPTOM The moonroof squeaks when the sunshade is open, the moonroof glass is closed, and the vehicle is moving. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install Honda Squeak Reduction Tape around the moonroof opening. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Squeak Reduction Tape (One roll repairs about 12 vehicles): P/N 70200-ALL-999, H/C 6656557 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 514007 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 70200-S54-A01 H/C 5441241 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-095A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With a clean towel, wipe down the moon roof opening with isopropyl alcohol. This surface must be free of any dirt and grease; otherwise, the tape will not stick. 2. Lay a clean shop towel along each moonroof track to prevent grease from getting on your hands or the tape. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 8452 3. Wash your hands thoroughly before applying the tape. 4. Measure and cut off a 270 cm (106 inches) piece of tape. 5. Peel oft about 5 cm (2 inches) of backing. Hold the tape at the very end of the exposed section. 6. Start at the middle of either the right or left side of the moonroof opening and apply 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the tape at the top edge of the moonroof opening. Do not apply the portion you touched with your finger or apply the tape above the edges of the opening. NOTE: Leave enough space to cut oft the section of tape that you touched with your finger. 7. Remove the contaminated portion you touched with your finger. 8. Hold the tape up to the roof opening, and peel the backing away from the tape as you move along the opening. Apply about 7.5 cm (3 inches) at a time. Do not apply the tape above the edge of the opening. 9. Carefully slide the thumb of your free hand along the tape, removing any air bubbles. 10. Repeat steps 5 and 9 until you have applied the tape around the entire opening and until the ends of the tape butt together. Do not overlap the ends of the tape. Cut off any excess tape. 11. Open and close the moonroof several times to ensure that it operates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply grease to the moonroof seal. The seal makes noise only when moved excessively. When the vehicle is driven, the glass does not Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 8453 move enough to cause noise. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks Bulletin No. 96-023 Issue Date APRIL 15, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To EX File Under BODY Wind Noise or Water Leaks From the Moonroof SYMPTOM Water leaks or wind noise at highway speeds from the front or rear edge of the moon roof. PROBABLE CAUSE There is a gap between the roof and the weatherstrip on the edge of the moon roof. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply EPT Sealer 5T (see REQUIRED MATERIALS) between the weatherstrip and moonroof frame. 1. With the moonroof closed, inspect the front and rear edges for gaps between the weatherstrip and the roof. Note the location and length of any gaps. 2. If the gap is in the front, slide the moonroof all the way back. If the gap is in the rear, tilt up the moon roof. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks > Page 8458 3. Cut a strip of EPT Sealer 5T the same length as the gap noted in step 1. Trim the strip so it is 5 mm wide. 4. Lift up the weatherstrip along the gap area. Clean the moonroof frame under the weatherstrip with isopropyl alcohol. 5. Remove the backing from the EPT Sealer 5T. Apply the EPT to the moon roof frame in the area of the gap. 6. Open and close the moon roof several times, then verify that there is no longer a gap. REQUIRED MATERIALS EPT Sealer 5T: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks > Page 8459 P/N 06991-SA5-000, H/C 2086650 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 814301 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 70200-S04-003 H/C 4846333 Defect code: 056 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-023A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks 00-095 March 26, 2002 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord With Moonroof - ALL 1996-02 Civic EX - ALL Squeak From the Moonroof Seal (Supersedes 00-095, dated December 12, 2000) SYMPTOM The moonroof squeaks when the sunshade is open, the moonroof glass is closed, and the vehicle is moving. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install Honda Squeak Reduction Tape around the moonroof opening. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Squeak Reduction Tape (One roll repairs about 12 vehicles): P/N 70200-ALL-999, H/C 6656557 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 514007 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 70200-S54-A01 H/C 5441241 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-095A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With a clean towel, wipe down the moon roof opening with isopropyl alcohol. This surface must be free of any dirt and grease; otherwise, the tape will not stick. 2. Lay a clean shop towel along each moonroof track to prevent grease from getting on your hands or the tape. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 8465 3. Wash your hands thoroughly before applying the tape. 4. Measure and cut off a 270 cm (106 inches) piece of tape. 5. Peel oft about 5 cm (2 inches) of backing. Hold the tape at the very end of the exposed section. 6. Start at the middle of either the right or left side of the moonroof opening and apply 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the tape at the top edge of the moonroof opening. Do not apply the portion you touched with your finger or apply the tape above the edges of the opening. NOTE: Leave enough space to cut oft the section of tape that you touched with your finger. 7. Remove the contaminated portion you touched with your finger. 8. Hold the tape up to the roof opening, and peel the backing away from the tape as you move along the opening. Apply about 7.5 cm (3 inches) at a time. Do not apply the tape above the edge of the opening. 9. Carefully slide the thumb of your free hand along the tape, removing any air bubbles. 10. Repeat steps 5 and 9 until you have applied the tape around the entire opening and until the ends of the tape butt together. Do not overlap the ends of the tape. Cut off any excess tape. 11. Open and close the moonroof several times to ensure that it operates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply grease to the moonroof seal. The seal makes noise only when moved excessively. When the vehicle is driven, the glass does not Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 8466 move enough to cause noise. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks Bulletin No. 96-023 Issue Date APRIL 15, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To EX File Under BODY Wind Noise or Water Leaks From the Moonroof SYMPTOM Water leaks or wind noise at highway speeds from the front or rear edge of the moon roof. PROBABLE CAUSE There is a gap between the roof and the weatherstrip on the edge of the moon roof. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply EPT Sealer 5T (see REQUIRED MATERIALS) between the weatherstrip and moonroof frame. 1. With the moonroof closed, inspect the front and rear edges for gaps between the weatherstrip and the roof. Note the location and length of any gaps. 2. If the gap is in the front, slide the moonroof all the way back. If the gap is in the rear, tilt up the moon roof. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks > Page 8471 3. Cut a strip of EPT Sealer 5T the same length as the gap noted in step 1. Trim the strip so it is 5 mm wide. 4. Lift up the weatherstrip along the gap area. Clean the moonroof frame under the weatherstrip with isopropyl alcohol. 5. Remove the backing from the EPT Sealer 5T. Apply the EPT to the moon roof frame in the area of the gap. 6. Open and close the moon roof several times, then verify that there is no longer a gap. REQUIRED MATERIALS EPT Sealer 5T: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks > Page 8472 P/N 06991-SA5-000, H/C 2086650 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 814301 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 70200-S04-003 H/C 4846333 Defect code: 056 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-023A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair Child Seat: Service and Repair Child Seat Anchor Plate 2 Door/4 Door 3 Door Attachment points are provided for a rear seat mounted child restraint system which uses a top tether. The attachment points are located on the rear shelf or rear trim panel, just behind the rear seat-back. When using a child seat with a top tether, install the child seat anchor plates securely. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8477 NOTE: - Do not remove the toothed washer from the child seat anchor plate. Use the child seat anchor plate with the toothed washer attached to it. - When installing a child seat on the rear seat, follow the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat. - Additional anchor plates are available. WARNING: - Do not use the child seat anchor plate for any other purpose; it is designed exclusively for installation of a child seat. - Make sure the rear seat-back is locked firmly when installing a child seat. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Fabric Upholstery Wrinkle Information Use a Steamer to Smooth Out Fabric Upholstery A garment steamer and a stiff-bristle brush make a great team for removing those nasty wrinkles, lines, or impressions in fabric upholstery. You can buy an inexpensive, small, hand-held garment/ fabric steamer from a number of different manufacturers. Some of these units even come with a handy built-in brush. Once you've got your steamer, follow the manufacturer's instructions to get it ready for use. Then apply a generous amount of steam to the problem area. Keep the steamer moving slowly over the area until it's hot and moist. A Word of Caution: Go easy on the steam if you're cleaning the front passenger seat in a vehicle with side airbags. Moisture can adversely affect or damage the OPDS sensors in the seatback. While the area is hot and moist, use a stiff-bristle brush, or the built-in brush if your steamer has one, to work the fabric back and forth and up and down. Stubborn areas might need more steam and brushing, so be patient and stay with it. It's worth the effort. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat Seat Cover: Service and Repair Front Seat CAUTION: Put on gloves to protect your hands. NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. Seat-back cover removal: 1. Release the hook, and fold back the seat-back cover. 2. Release all inside springs, then fold back the seat- back cover. 3. Remove the headrest. 4. Remove the headrest guide, then remove the seat-back cover. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: To prevent wrinkles when installing a seatback cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the inside springs and hook. Seat cushion cover removal: 1. Remove the seat cushion. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 8484 2. Remove the clips from under the seat cushion, then loosen the seat cushion cover. 3. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the way around, then release the clips, and remove the seat cushion cover. 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips. - Replace the released clips with new ones. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 8485 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Rear Seat CAUTION: Put on gloves to protect your hands. NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers. Seat-back cover removal: 2D/4D: 1. Remove the seat-back. 2. Loosen the seat-back cover by releasing all the clips. 3. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the way around, then release the clips. 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips. - Replace the released clips with new ones. 3D: 1. Remove the seat-back. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 8486 2. Loosen the seat-back cover by releasing all the clips. NOTE: Remove the lock knob, lock collar and latch cover. 3. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the way around, then release the clips. 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips. - Replace the released clips with new ones. Seat side bolster cover removal (4D): 1. Remove the seat side bolster. 2. Loosen the seat side bolster cover by releasing all the clips, then remove it. 3. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat side bolster cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips. - Replace the released clips with new ones. Seat cushion cover removal: 1. Remove the seat cushion. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 8487 4 Door 2 Door/3 Door 2. Loosen the seat cushion cover by releasing all the clips. 3. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the way around, release the clips, and remove the seat cushion cover. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seat > Page 8488 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the clips. - Replace the released clips with new ones. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Latch: Service and Repair 2 Door/4 Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8492 3 Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the inner handle. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the door lock switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Connector A Power Mirror Switch: Locations Connector A Driver's Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Connector A > Page 8501 Power Mirror Switch: Locations Connector B Driver's Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8502 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Without Defogger Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Without Defogger 1. Remove the switch as described in Function Test . 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Without Defogger > Page 8505 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection With Defogger 1. Pry the switch out of the dashboard driver's lower cover. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the switch. Mirror Switch Defogger Switch 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Locations Center of Trunk Lid Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Open/Close Switch Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Open/Close Switch Underside of Roof Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Open/Close Switch > Page 8513 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Tilt/Close Switch Underside of Roof Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8514 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Adjustments Switch Plate Adjustment (Fully Closed Position) 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Using the moon roof wrench, close the glass fully. NOTE: Check the glass fit to the roof panel. 3. Using an open-end wrench, loosen the switch plate mounting bolts. 4. Adjust position of the switch plate (switch cam) as shown. 5. Check the operation of the glass (from tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch. NOTE: Check the glass height. 6. Close the glass fully, and check for water leaks. NOTE: Do not use high-pressure water. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Underside of Hatch Lid Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Service and Repair Spoiler: Service and Repair NOTE: Take care not to scratch the hatch and body. 1. Remove the hatch upper trim. 2. Remove the nuts, and detach the clip, then lift the hatch spoiler up. 3. Disconnect the high mount brake light connector and rear window washer tube, then remove the hatch spoiler. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Spoiler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8522 4. If necessary, remove the spoiler trim from the spoiler frame. NOTE: The hatch spoiler trim for Canada produced cars cannot be disassembled. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: If necessary, replace any damaged clips. - Make sure the connector and washer tube are connected properly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation Front Strut / Shock Tower: Description and Operation Description The front wheelhouse component is constructed as a unit with the front damper housing. Therefore, replacement of the component affects the front wheel alignment. When assembling it, either use a positioning jig or follow dimensions on the frame repair chart for positioning. Weld carefully. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8527 Front Strut / Shock Tower: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the related parts. - Parts to be removed when removing the front bulkhead - Parts on passenger side of lower dashboard which are especially flammable - Electrical accessories in engine compartment and wire harnesses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8528 2. Pull out and straighten the damaged area to approximately the original shape. - Attach the car to the frame straightener by tightening the underbody clamps at the horizontal pinch weld points. - Before cutting off the damaged sections, pull them out so that they are restored to the original shape. - Do not pull out more than necessary. - Pull out and straighten the damaged area of the lower dashboard, front pillar, and other parts. - After pulling, check the damper housing position using the body dimensional drawings and positioning jig. NOTE: Check the condition of the door and hinges. 3. Peel off the undercoat. Heat the undercoat at the weld areas of the wheelhouse and front side frame with a gas torch, and peel off the undercoat with a metal spatula. CAUTION: Be careful not to burn the fittings inside the passenger compartment and dashboard insulator when heating. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8529 4. When replacing the front wheelhouse. - Center punch around the spot weld imprints on the front side frame and damper housing. - Drill holes in the center punched areas using a spot cutter. - Using a chisel, pry off the welded flange. - Level and finish the burrs on the welding surfaces with a sander. 5. When replacing the damper housing and front wheelhouse as an assembly. -1 Remove the wheelhouse upper member. - Center punch around the spot weld imprints. - Use the special spot cutter to drill holes at the spot weld nuggets. - Remove the MIG weld flange with a disc sander. WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear goggles or safety glasses whenever sanding, cutting or grinding. - Using a chisel, pry off the welded flange from the front pillar and damper housing. NOTE: Remove the wheelhouse upper member carefully so they can be reused. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8530 -2 Using a spot cutter, drill holes in the spot welded area on the front side frame and dashboard upper side member. -3 From the passenger compartment side, drill holes in the spot welded area with as mm (0.2 in). NOTE: Drill holes completely through the parts since the replacement damper housing will be welded by MIG welding. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8531 6. Mold the related parts. - Level and finish the burrs left on the welding surfaces with a sander. - Fill all drilled holes by MIG or gas welding. - Use a hammer and dolly to even out the welded areas of the lower dashboard, front side frame and dashboard upper side member. 7. Set the new front wheelhouse and damper housing. - Apply body paint to both sides of the new front wheelhouse and damper housing. - See Paint Repair section. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Remove the undercoat from both sides of the welding section and expose the steel plate using a disc sander WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear goggles or safety glasses whenever sanding, cutting or grinding - Clamp to the front side frame with vise-grips and squill vises. NOTE: Apply the spot sealer to the welding surface when spot welding. - Clamp the front bulkhead with vise-grips. - Measure the front compartment diagonally. NOTE: Use of a positioning jig is recommended. - Spot weld several points in the clamped sections, and temporarily attach the front wheelhouse and damper housing WARNING: To prevent eye injury and bums when welding, wear an approved welding helmet, gloves and safety shoes. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8532 8. Check the dimensions, temporarily install the hood, front fender and headlight, and check for differences in level and clearance. - Check the engine and transmission mount brackets position. 9. Perform the main welding. - Weld as much as possible with the jig still mounted. WARNING: To prevent eye injury and bums when welding, wear an approved welding helmet, gloves and safety shoes. - Make 20% to 30% more spot welds than there were holes drilled. - Plug weld the holes areas of the dashboard lower and damper housing with a MIG welder. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Strut / Shock Tower > Front Strut / Shock Tower > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8533 10. Weld the wheelhouse upper member. When the upper member is to be reused, make MIG welds at the drilled holes. 11. Finish the welded area. Use a hammer and dolly to even out the side bulkhead and front side frame flanges for close fit with the surface of the front wheelhouse and damper housing. 12. Apply the sealer. Apply sealer to the mating surfaces of the lower dashboard and front side frame, etc. 13. Apply the paint. See Paint Repair section. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. 14. Apply the undercoat. Undercoat the front floor, etc, and apply anti-rust agent to the inside of the welding section of the front side frame, lower dashboard, and upper member. 15. Install the related parts. Install in the reverse order in which they were removed. 16. Inspect, check and make adjustment. - Measure the front wheel alignment. - Inspect the brake system. - Adjust the headlight aim. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Rear Door Lock Tab Is Hard To Operate Tailgate: Technical Service Bulletins Rear Door Lock Tab Is Hard To Operate 99-025 April 13, 1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic - 4-door DX thru VIN 1 HGEJ6...XL025605 - 4-door DX thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH545281 Rear Door Lock Tab Is Hard to Operate SYMPTOM The lock tab on the rear door is hard to push down and pull up. PROBABLE CAUSE The lock crank is distorted. CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the lock crank. PARTS INFORMATION Rear Door Lock Crank: P/N 72630-SM4-003, H/C 3286911 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Failed part: P/N 72630-SM4-003 H/C 3286911 Detect code: 004 Contention code: B02 Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-10 of the 1996-99 Civic Service Manual). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Rear Door Lock Tab Is Hard To Operate > Page 8538 2. Remove the screw from the lock crank, and pry the lock crank from the door. 3. Disconnect the lock rod and the lock tab from the lock crank. Discard the lock crank. 4. Connect the lock rod and the lock tab to the new lock crank. Secure the lock crank to the door with the original screw. 5. Reinstall the door panel. 6. Lock and unlock the door with the lock tab several times to make sure the lock mechanism operates smoothly and easily. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Component Information > Description and Operation Cowl: Description and Operation Description Impact damage to the windshield lower area may spread to the back of the panel and wiper mounting area, calling for replacement of the affected skins. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8543 Cowl: Service and Repair Replacement 1. Remove the related parts. - Wiper arm and motor - Windshield - Right and left front fenders - Right and left front door opening trims - Front pillar trim - Hood - Wire harnesses and electrical accessories - Steering column - Dashboard, etc Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8544 2. Cut the windshield lower and separate the welded flange. - Center punch around the spot weld imprints. - Drill holes with a spot cutter through the nuggets. - Peel off the welding flange using a chisel. - Level off and finish the burrs of the pried-off spot welds with a sander WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear goggles or safety glasses whenever sanding, cuffing or grinding. 3. Set the new windshield lower. - Apply an undercoat and body paint to the inside. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. - Sand off the undercoat down to the metal from both flanges to be welded. - Clamp the new windshield lower in place with vise- grips and squill vises. NOTE: Apply the spot sealer to the welding surface when spot welding. - Install the new windshield and check for proper installation and alignment. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8545 4. Tack weld the new windshield lower. WARNING: To prevent eye injury and burns when welding, wear an approved welding helmet, gloves and safety shoes. - Remove the vise-grips and install the fender and hood. Check for differences in level and clearance. 5. Perform the main welding. - Make 20% to 30% more spot welds than there were holes drilled. WARNING: To prevent eye injury and bums when welding, wear an approved welding helmet, gloves and safety shoes. 6. Finish the welding section. Smooth the mating surface with the windshield with a hammer and dolly. 7. Apply the sealer. Apply sealer to the upper dashboard, pillars, etc. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8546 8. Install the front fender and hood. Check the front fender and hood for differences in level and clearance. 9. Apply the paint. See Paint Repair section. WARNING: Ventilate when spraying paint. Most paint contains substances that are harmful if inhaled or swallowed. Read the paint label before opening the paint container. - Avoid contact with skin. Wear an approved respirator, gloves, eye protection and appropriate clothing when painting. - Paint is flammable. Store it in a safe place, and keep it away from sparks, flames or cigarettes. 10. Apply anti-rust agent to the inside of the windshield lower and dashboard upper. 11. Install the related parts. Install in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Take care not damage the windshield and the paint finishes. 12. Inspect and clean. - Check the windshield for water leaks. - After installing the dashboard, check the lights, gauges, etc. for proper operation. - Clean the interior. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body Moonroof Seal Squeaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks 00-095 March 26, 2002 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord With Moonroof - ALL 1996-02 Civic EX - ALL Squeak From the Moonroof Seal (Supersedes 00-095, dated December 12, 2000) SYMPTOM The moonroof squeaks when the sunshade is open, the moonroof glass is closed, and the vehicle is moving. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install Honda Squeak Reduction Tape around the moonroof opening. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Squeak Reduction Tape (One roll repairs about 12 vehicles): P/N 70200-ALL-999, H/C 6656557 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 514007 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 70200-S54-A01 H/C 5441241 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-095A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With a clean towel, wipe down the moon roof opening with isopropyl alcohol. This surface must be free of any dirt and grease; otherwise, the tape will not stick. 2. Lay a clean shop towel along each moonroof track to prevent grease from getting on your hands or the tape. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 8556 3. Wash your hands thoroughly before applying the tape. 4. Measure and cut off a 270 cm (106 inches) piece of tape. 5. Peel oft about 5 cm (2 inches) of backing. Hold the tape at the very end of the exposed section. 6. Start at the middle of either the right or left side of the moonroof opening and apply 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the tape at the top edge of the moonroof opening. Do not apply the portion you touched with your finger or apply the tape above the edges of the opening. NOTE: Leave enough space to cut oft the section of tape that you touched with your finger. 7. Remove the contaminated portion you touched with your finger. 8. Hold the tape up to the roof opening, and peel the backing away from the tape as you move along the opening. Apply about 7.5 cm (3 inches) at a time. Do not apply the tape above the edge of the opening. 9. Carefully slide the thumb of your free hand along the tape, removing any air bubbles. 10. Repeat steps 5 and 9 until you have applied the tape around the entire opening and until the ends of the tape butt together. Do not overlap the ends of the tape. Cut off any excess tape. 11. Open and close the moonroof several times to ensure that it operates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply grease to the moonroof seal. The seal makes noise only when moved excessively. When the vehicle is driven, the glass does not Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 8557 move enough to cause noise. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof Wind Noise or Water Leaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks Bulletin No. 96-023 Issue Date APRIL 15, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To EX File Under BODY Wind Noise or Water Leaks From the Moonroof SYMPTOM Water leaks or wind noise at highway speeds from the front or rear edge of the moon roof. PROBABLE CAUSE There is a gap between the roof and the weatherstrip on the edge of the moon roof. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply EPT Sealer 5T (see REQUIRED MATERIALS) between the weatherstrip and moonroof frame. 1. With the moonroof closed, inspect the front and rear edges for gaps between the weatherstrip and the roof. Note the location and length of any gaps. 2. If the gap is in the front, slide the moonroof all the way back. If the gap is in the rear, tilt up the moon roof. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof Wind Noise or Water Leaks > Page 8562 3. Cut a strip of EPT Sealer 5T the same length as the gap noted in step 1. Trim the strip so it is 5 mm wide. 4. Lift up the weatherstrip along the gap area. Clean the moonroof frame under the weatherstrip with isopropyl alcohol. 5. Remove the backing from the EPT Sealer 5T. Apply the EPT to the moon roof frame in the area of the gap. 6. Open and close the moon roof several times, then verify that there is no longer a gap. REQUIRED MATERIALS EPT Sealer 5T: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof Wind Noise or Water Leaks > Page 8563 P/N 06991-SA5-000, H/C 2086650 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 814301 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 70200-S04-003 H/C 4846333 Defect code: 056 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-023A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks 00-095 March 26, 2002 Applies To: 1998-02 Accord With Moonroof - ALL 1996-02 Civic EX - ALL Squeak From the Moonroof Seal (Supersedes 00-095, dated December 12, 2000) SYMPTOM The moonroof squeaks when the sunshade is open, the moonroof glass is closed, and the vehicle is moving. CORRECTIVE ACTION Install Honda Squeak Reduction Tape around the moonroof opening. REQUIRED MATERIALS Honda Squeak Reduction Tape (One roll repairs about 12 vehicles): P/N 70200-ALL-999, H/C 6656557 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 514007 Flat Rate Time: 0.4 hour Failed Part: P/N 70200-S54-A01 H/C 5441241 Defect Code: 042 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-095A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. With a clean towel, wipe down the moon roof opening with isopropyl alcohol. This surface must be free of any dirt and grease; otherwise, the tape will not stick. 2. Lay a clean shop towel along each moonroof track to prevent grease from getting on your hands or the tape. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 8569 3. Wash your hands thoroughly before applying the tape. 4. Measure and cut off a 270 cm (106 inches) piece of tape. 5. Peel oft about 5 cm (2 inches) of backing. Hold the tape at the very end of the exposed section. 6. Start at the middle of either the right or left side of the moonroof opening and apply 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the tape at the top edge of the moonroof opening. Do not apply the portion you touched with your finger or apply the tape above the edges of the opening. NOTE: Leave enough space to cut oft the section of tape that you touched with your finger. 7. Remove the contaminated portion you touched with your finger. 8. Hold the tape up to the roof opening, and peel the backing away from the tape as you move along the opening. Apply about 7.5 cm (3 inches) at a time. Do not apply the tape above the edge of the opening. 9. Carefully slide the thumb of your free hand along the tape, removing any air bubbles. 10. Repeat steps 5 and 9 until you have applied the tape around the entire opening and until the ends of the tape butt together. Do not overlap the ends of the tape. Cut off any excess tape. 11. Open and close the moonroof several times to ensure that it operates smoothly. NOTE: Do not apply grease to the moonroof seal. The seal makes noise only when moved excessively. When the vehicle is driven, the glass does not Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 00-095 > Mar > 02 > Body - Moonroof Seal Squeaks > Page 8570 move enough to cause noise. DISCLAIMER Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks Bulletin No. 96-023 Issue Date APRIL 15, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To EX File Under BODY Wind Noise or Water Leaks From the Moonroof SYMPTOM Water leaks or wind noise at highway speeds from the front or rear edge of the moon roof. PROBABLE CAUSE There is a gap between the roof and the weatherstrip on the edge of the moon roof. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply EPT Sealer 5T (see REQUIRED MATERIALS) between the weatherstrip and moonroof frame. 1. With the moonroof closed, inspect the front and rear edges for gaps between the weatherstrip and the roof. Note the location and length of any gaps. 2. If the gap is in the front, slide the moonroof all the way back. If the gap is in the rear, tilt up the moon roof. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks > Page 8575 3. Cut a strip of EPT Sealer 5T the same length as the gap noted in step 1. Trim the strip so it is 5 mm wide. 4. Lift up the weatherstrip along the gap area. Clean the moonroof frame under the weatherstrip with isopropyl alcohol. 5. Remove the backing from the EPT Sealer 5T. Apply the EPT to the moon roof frame in the area of the gap. 6. Open and close the moon roof several times, then verify that there is no longer a gap. REQUIRED MATERIALS EPT Sealer 5T: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 96023 > Apr > 96 > Moonroof - Wind Noise or Water Leaks > Page 8576 P/N 06991-SA5-000, H/C 2086650 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Operation number: 814301 Flat rate time: 0.4 hour Failed part: P/N 70200-S04-003 H/C 4846333 Defect code: 056 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 96-023A Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Trunk / Liftgate Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Lamp Switch (Cruise Control) <--> [Brake Switch (Cruise Control)] > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Lamp Switch (Cruise Control) <--> [Brake Switch (Cruise Control)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 8584 Brake Lamp Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8588 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch (M/T) 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8592 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Actuator <--> [Cruise Control Servo] > Component Information > Locations > Photo 18 Cruise Control Actuator: Locations Photo 18 Left Front Corner Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Actuator <--> [Cruise Control Servo] > Component Information > Locations > Photo 18 > Page 8597 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Actuator <--> [Cruise Control Servo] > Component Information > Locations > Page 8598 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Actuator <--> [Cruise Control Servo] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Actuator Test Cruise Control Actuator: Testing and Inspection Actuator Test 1. Disconnect the actuator cable from the actuator rod and the 4P connector. 2. Connect battery power to the No.4 terminal and ground to the No.1, No.2 and No.3 terminals. 3. Connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum hose. Then apply vacuum to the actuator. 4. The actuator rod should pull in completely. It the rod pulls in only part-way or not at all, check for a leaking vacuum line or defective solenoid. 5. With voltage and vacuum still applied, try to pull the actuator rod out by hand. You should not be able to pull it out. If you can, it is defective. 6. Disconnect ground from the No.3 terminal. The actuator rod should return. If it does not return, but the vent hose and filter are not plugged, the solenoid valve assembly is defective. 7. Repeat steps 2 through 5, and disconnect ground from the No.1 terminal. The actuator rod should return. If it does not return, but the vent hose and filter are not plugged, the solenoid valve assembly is defective. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Actuator <--> [Cruise Control Servo] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Actuator Test > Page 8601 8. If you replace the solenoid valve assembly, be sure to use new O-rings on each solenoid. 9. Disconnect power and ground from the 4P connector. Disconnect the vent hose from the actuator. Connect a vacuum pump to the actuator vent hose port, and apply vacuum. The actuator rod should pull in completely. If not, the vacuum valve is stuck open. Replace the actuator. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Actuator <--> [Cruise Control Servo] > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Actuator Test > Page 8602 Cruise Control Actuator: Testing and Inspection Actuator Solenoid Test 1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the actuator. 2. Check for resistance between the terminals according to the table. NOTE: Resistance will vary slightly with temperature; specified resistance is at 70 °F (20 °C). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Actuator <--> [Cruise Control Servo] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Actuator Disassembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Actuator <--> [Cruise Control Servo] > Component Information > Service and Repair > Actuator Disassembly > Page 8605 Cruise Control Actuator: Service and Repair Actuator Replacement 1. Pull back the boot, and loosen the locknut. Then disconnect the cable from the bracket. 2. Disconnect the cable end from the actuator rod 3. Disconnect the 4P connector from the actuator. 4. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the vacuum tank. Pull out the vent hose. 5. Remove the three mounting bolts and the actuator with the bracket. 6. If necessary, disconnect the cable end from the linkage over the accelerator pedal, then turn the grommet 90° in the bulkhead, and remove the cable. 7. Install in the reverse order of removal, and adjust free play at the actuator rod after connecting the cable. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Actuator Cable <--> [Cruise Control Servo Cable] > Component Information > Specifications Actuator Cable: Specifications Locknut Free Play 11 +/- 1.0 mm Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Actuator Cable <--> [Cruise Control Servo Cable] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8609 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Actuator Cable <--> [Cruise Control Servo Cable] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8610 Actuator Cable: Adjustments 1. Check that the actuator cable operates smoothly with no binding or sticking. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (A/T in [N] or [P], M/T in neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 3. Measure the amount of movement of the actuator rod until the cable pulls on the accelerator lever (engine speed starts to increase). Free play should be 11 ± 1.0 mm (0.43 ± 0.04 in.). 4. If free play is not within specs, loosen the locknut, and turn the adjusting nut as required. NOTE: If necessary, check the throttle cable free play, then recheck the actuator rod free play. 5. Retighten the locknut, and recheck the free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Actuator Cable <--> [Cruise Control Servo Cable] > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8611 Actuator Cable: Service and Repair Actuator/Cable Replacement 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. Fig. 44 Actuator Cable Components 3. Pull back boot and loosen locknut, then disconnect cable from bracket, Fig. 44. 4. Disconnect cable end from actuator rod. 5. Disconnect 4-P connector. 6. Pull ventilation hose from grommet. 7. Disconnect vacuum hose from check valve. 8. Remove two actuator mount attaching bolts, then the actuator with bracket and reservoir. 9. Disconnect cable end from linkage over accelerator pedal, then turn grommet 90° in firewall and remove cable. 10. Reverse procedure to install, adjusting actuator cable as necessary. 11. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Test/Replacement Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Carefully push out the switch from behind the dash-board. 3. Disconnect the connector from the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If there is no continuity, replace the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 8617 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the driver's airbag connector. 4. Remove the dashboard driver's lower cover. 5. Disconnect the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector from the main wire harness. 6. Check for continuity between the terminals of the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, the switch is OK. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, go to step 7. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 8618 7. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 8. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, replace the cable reel. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. 9. If all tests prove OK, reconnect the cable reel and cable reel sub-harness connector, then reinstall the steering column covers. 10. Reconnect the driver's airbag connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 11. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. 12. After connecting the airbag connectors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. ('99 - 00 models). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Test/Replacement Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Carefully push out the switch from behind the dash-board. 3. Disconnect the connector from the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If there is no continuity, replace the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 8621 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the driver's airbag connector. 4. Remove the dashboard driver's lower cover. 5. Disconnect the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector from the main wire harness. 6. Check for continuity between the terminals of the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, the switch is OK. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, go to step 7. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 8622 7. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 8. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, replace the cable reel. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. 9. If all tests prove OK, reconnect the cable reel and cable reel sub-harness connector, then reinstall the steering column covers. 10. Reconnect the driver's airbag connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 11. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. 12. After connecting the airbag connectors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. ('99 - 00 models). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Module: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Relays and Modules - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8630 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Lamp Switch (Cruise Control) <--> [Brake Switch (Cruise Control)] > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Lamp Switch (Cruise Control) <--> [Brake Switch (Cruise Control)] > Component Information > Locations > Page 8635 Brake Lamp Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection 1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 8639 Clutch Switch: Testing and Inspection Clutch Switch (M/T) 1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the switch. 2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table. 3. If necessary, replace the switch or adjust pedal height. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Test/Replacement Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Carefully push out the switch from behind the dash-board. 3. Disconnect the connector from the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If there is no continuity, replace the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 8645 Cruise Control Switch: Testing and Inspection Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the driver's airbag connector. 4. Remove the dashboard driver's lower cover. 5. Disconnect the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector from the main wire harness. 6. Check for continuity between the terminals of the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, the switch is OK. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, go to step 7. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 8646 7. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 8. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, replace the cable reel. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. 9. If all tests prove OK, reconnect the cable reel and cable reel sub-harness connector, then reinstall the steering column covers. 10. Reconnect the driver's airbag connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 11. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. 12. After connecting the airbag connectors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. ('99 - 00 models). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Test/Replacement Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Main Switch Test/Replacement 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Carefully push out the switch from behind the dash-board. 3. Disconnect the connector from the switch. 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If there is no continuity, replace the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 8649 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Set/Resume Switch Test/Replacement 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. ('99 - 00 models). 2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes. 3. Disconnect the driver's airbag connector. 4. Remove the dashboard driver's lower cover. 5. Disconnect the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector from the main wire harness. 6. Check for continuity between the terminals of the cable reel sub-harness 3P connector in each switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, the switch is OK. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, go to step 7. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Main Switch Test/Replacement > Page 8650 7. Remove the two screws, then remove the switch. 8. Check for continuity between the terminals in switch position according to the table. - If there is continuity, and it matches the table, replace the cable reel. - If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch. 9. If all tests prove OK, reconnect the cable reel and cable reel sub-harness connector, then reinstall the steering column covers. 10. Reconnect the driver's airbag connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 11. Reconnect the battery positive cable, then the negative cable. 12. After connecting the airbag connectors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator light should come on for about six seconds and then go off. 13. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets. ('99 - 00 models). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation ABS Light: Description and Operation 1. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) indicator light comes on when the ABS control unit detects a problem in the system. However, even though the system is normal, the ABS indicator light can come on, too, under the following conditions: Signal disturbance - Wheel spin - Only drive wheels rotate - Battery voltage fluctuates 2. When a problem is detected and the ABS indicator light comes on, the indicator light can stay on until the ignition switch is turned off, or it can automatically go off, depending on the mode. Light stays on until the ignition switch is turned off: When the system is in the system down mode. - Light automatically goes off: When the system is in the control inhibition mode. 3. The ABS indicator light stays on when the system is reactivated without erasing the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC), but it goes off after starting the vehicle. When the wheel sensor system is faulty and the ABS indicator light comes on, the algorithm of the system automatically turns off the ABS indicator light after the wheel speed signal returns to the normal speed. Also, when the DTC is erased, the CPU is reset and the ABS indicator light goes off when the system checked out normal by the initial diagnosis. Therefore, test-drive the vehicle after servicing the wheel sensor system, and be sure that the ABS indicator light does not come on. 4. When the ABS control unit outputs battery voltage to gauge assembly, the ABS indicator light goes off. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8659 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8660 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8661 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8662 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8663 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8664 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8665 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8666 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8667 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8668 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8669 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8670 Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8671 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8672 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8673 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8674 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8675 Seat Belt And Ignition Reminders Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Charge Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection Charging System Light Test Part 1 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8679 Part 2 Of 2 If the charging system light does not come on or does not go off, or the battery is dead or low, test the following items in the order listed below: 1. Battery 2. Charging system light 3. Voltage 4. Alternator control system (USA) 5. Alternator/regulator Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Locations With Front Passenger's Airbag Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations > Page 8684 Without Front Passenger's Airbag (Part Of Canada Model) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble the airbag assembly. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been operated (deployed), it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag assembly during service, please observe the following precautions: Store the removed airbag assembly with the pad surface up. The driver's (and front passenger's) airbag connector(s) has (have) a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury Store the removed airbag assembly on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F / 100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal procedures for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 8687 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to- metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 8688 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact The driver's airbag (and front passenger's) airbag has (have) a spring-loaded lock connector with a built-in short contact. When this connector is disconnected, the power terminal and the ground terminal in the airbag connector are automatically shorted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact > Page 8691 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation System Description The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charge(s). If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: 1. The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflator(s) must ignite and deploy the airbag(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8692 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair To prevent accidental airbag deployment, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait three minutes before disconnecting any SRS connectors. - Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C,D). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s). Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Side: Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector and cable reel 2P connector. Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Side: Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector and SRS main harness 2P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Locations Dashboard Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dashlight Brightness Controller: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8698 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8699 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8700 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8701 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8702 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8703 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8704 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8705 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8706 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8707 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8708 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8709 Dashlight Brightness Controller: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8710 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8711 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8712 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8713 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8714 Dash Lights Brightness Controller Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8715 Dashlight Brightness Controller: Testing and Inspection NOTE: The control unit is built into the dash brightness controller. 1. Carefully pry the controller out of the dashboard. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the controller. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the controller must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch Left Rear Door Striker Area (Right Similar) Left of Rear Seat (Sedan Shown, Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch > Page 8720 Door Switch: Locations Door Switch At Driver's Door Striker Area (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96020 > Mar > 96 > Instruments - Fuel Gauge Sticks Fuel Gauge: Customer Interest Instruments - Fuel Gauge Sticks Bulletin No. 96-020 Issue Date MAR 18, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To 3-DOOR CX thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH113925 File Under ELECTRICAL Fuel Gauge Sticks SYMPTOM The fuel gauge needle sticks in the full or empty position. PROBABLE CAUSE The fuel gauge sending unit binds on the baffle inside the fuel tank. CORRECTIVE ACTION Reposition the fuel gauge sending unit. 1. Record the radio station presets (if applicable), then disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure from the system. (Refer to page 11-139 of the Service Manual.) 3. Carefully remove the drain plug from the fuel tank, and drain the fuel into an approved container. 4. Remove the rear seat cushion (one bolt, then lift the rear of the cushion). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96020 > Mar > 96 > Instruments - Fuel Gauge Sticks > Page 8729 5. Remove the access panel (four screws and one connector). 6. Loosen the five 6 mm mounting nuts for the fuel gauge sending unit. Do not remove the nuts. 7. Rotate the fuel gauge sending unit in a clockwise direction as far as possible. Make sure that the base gasket is not twisted or pinched. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96020 > Mar > 96 > Instruments - Fuel Gauge Sticks > Page 8730 8. Using the sequence shown, tighten the five 6 mm nuts on the fuel gauge sending unit to 5.9 Nm (4.3 lb-ft). 9. Connect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch ON. ^ If the fuel gauge reads empty, reinstall the drain plug with a new 12 mm sealing washer (see PARTS INFORMATION), and continue to step 10. ^ If the fuel gauge reads full, replace the fuel tank with the one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. (Refer to page 11-148 of the Service Manual.) 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and fill the fuel tank. Turn the ignition switch ON. ^ If the fuel gauge reads full, continue to step 11. ^ If the full gauge does not read full, replace the fuel tank with the one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. (Refer to page 11-148 of the Service Manual.) 11. Check for any fuel leaks around the fuel sending unit. 12. Reinstall the access panel and the rear seat cushion. 13. If applicable, enter the customer's radio station presets and reset the clock. PARTS INFORMATION Fuel tank: P/N 17500-S01-A30, H/C 4810339 Sealing washer, 12 mm: P/N 94109-12000, H/C 0171868 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 96020 > Mar > 96 > Instruments - Fuel Gauge Sticks > Page 8731 Failed part: P/N 78130-S01-A01 H/C 4798112 Defect code: 039 Contention code: B99 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge: > SN030314 > Mar > 03 > Fuel Gauge & Low Fuel Indicator Accuracy Check Fuel Gauge: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Gauge & Low Fuel Indicator Accuracy Check SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Charting the Fuel Gauge and the Low Fuel Indicator APPLIES TO: 1998-03 Accord, 1996-03 Civic, or 1999-03 Odyssey SERVICE TIP: If an owner is leery of the fuel gauge or low fuel indicator accuracy and worries about running out of fuel, you may be able to restore faith in the accuracy of this hardware by charting the operation. If the fuel gauge, the low fuel indicator, or both doesn't give your customer a warm, fuzzy feeling, don't replace the fuel gauge or the sending unit until you've first charted the fuel gauge needle position and low fuel indicator status. You rarely improve accuracy by replacing fuel gauges and sending units. To chart the fuel gauge needle position and the low fuel indicator status, do this: 1. Have your customer bring in the vehicle when the fuel tank is nearly empty. 2. Drain any remaining fuel from the tank. 3. Park the vehicle on a flat surface, and add 2 gallons of fuel to the tank with the ignition switch turned to LOCK (0). 4. Start the engine, and note the fuel gauge needle position after 2 minutes. Draw a picture of the fuel gauge showing the position of the needle. Also note on your drawing if the low fuel indicator is on or off. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Add 2 more gallons of fuel to the tank. Start the engine, and note the position of the needle after 2 minutes. Draw another picture of the fuel gauge showing the current position of the needle. Note the status of the low fuel indicator. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Repeat step 5 until the fuel tank is full. Then give your customer all of the pictures you've drawn. They're usually enough to convince even the staunchest Doubting Thomas. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge: > 96020 > Mar > 96 > Instruments - Fuel Gauge Sticks Fuel Gauge: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Fuel Gauge Sticks Bulletin No. 96-020 Issue Date MAR 18, 1996 Model 1996 CIVIC Applicable To 3-DOOR CX thru VIN 2HGEJ6...TH113925 File Under ELECTRICAL Fuel Gauge Sticks SYMPTOM The fuel gauge needle sticks in the full or empty position. PROBABLE CAUSE The fuel gauge sending unit binds on the baffle inside the fuel tank. CORRECTIVE ACTION Reposition the fuel gauge sending unit. 1. Record the radio station presets (if applicable), then disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Relieve the fuel pressure from the system. (Refer to page 11-139 of the Service Manual.) 3. Carefully remove the drain plug from the fuel tank, and drain the fuel into an approved container. 4. Remove the rear seat cushion (one bolt, then lift the rear of the cushion). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge: > 96020 > Mar > 96 > Instruments - Fuel Gauge Sticks > Page 8741 5. Remove the access panel (four screws and one connector). 6. Loosen the five 6 mm mounting nuts for the fuel gauge sending unit. Do not remove the nuts. 7. Rotate the fuel gauge sending unit in a clockwise direction as far as possible. Make sure that the base gasket is not twisted or pinched. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge: > 96020 > Mar > 96 > Instruments - Fuel Gauge Sticks > Page 8742 8. Using the sequence shown, tighten the five 6 mm nuts on the fuel gauge sending unit to 5.9 Nm (4.3 lb-ft). 9. Connect the negative cable to the battery, then turn the ignition switch ON. ^ If the fuel gauge reads empty, reinstall the drain plug with a new 12 mm sealing washer (see PARTS INFORMATION), and continue to step 10. ^ If the fuel gauge reads full, replace the fuel tank with the one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. (Refer to page 11-148 of the Service Manual.) 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and fill the fuel tank. Turn the ignition switch ON. ^ If the fuel gauge reads full, continue to step 11. ^ If the full gauge does not read full, replace the fuel tank with the one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. (Refer to page 11-148 of the Service Manual.) 11. Check for any fuel leaks around the fuel sending unit. 12. Reinstall the access panel and the rear seat cushion. 13. If applicable, enter the customer's radio station presets and reset the clock. PARTS INFORMATION Fuel tank: P/N 17500-S01-A30, H/C 4810339 Sealing washer, 12 mm: P/N 94109-12000, H/C 0171868 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge: > 96020 > Mar > 96 > Instruments - Fuel Gauge Sticks > Page 8743 Failed part: P/N 78130-S01-A01 H/C 4798112 Defect code: 039 Contention code: B99 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Gauge: > SN030314 > Mar > 03 > Fuel Gauge & Low Fuel Indicator Accuracy Check Fuel Gauge: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Gauge & Low Fuel Indicator Accuracy Check SOURCE: Honda Service News March 2003 TITLE: Charting the Fuel Gauge and the Low Fuel Indicator APPLIES TO: 1998-03 Accord, 1996-03 Civic, or 1999-03 Odyssey SERVICE TIP: If an owner is leery of the fuel gauge or low fuel indicator accuracy and worries about running out of fuel, you may be able to restore faith in the accuracy of this hardware by charting the operation. If the fuel gauge, the low fuel indicator, or both doesn't give your customer a warm, fuzzy feeling, don't replace the fuel gauge or the sending unit until you've first charted the fuel gauge needle position and low fuel indicator status. You rarely improve accuracy by replacing fuel gauges and sending units. To chart the fuel gauge needle position and the low fuel indicator status, do this: 1. Have your customer bring in the vehicle when the fuel tank is nearly empty. 2. Drain any remaining fuel from the tank. 3. Park the vehicle on a flat surface, and add 2 gallons of fuel to the tank with the ignition switch turned to LOCK (0). 4. Start the engine, and note the fuel gauge needle position after 2 minutes. Draw a picture of the fuel gauge showing the position of the needle. Also note on your drawing if the low fuel indicator is on or off. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 5. Add 2 more gallons of fuel to the tank. Start the engine, and note the position of the needle after 2 minutes. Draw another picture of the fuel gauge showing the current position of the needle. Note the status of the low fuel indicator. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Repeat step 5 until the fuel tank is full. Then give your customer all of the pictures you've drawn. They're usually enough to convince even the staunchest Doubting Thomas. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8749 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation When the ignition switch is in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 25 to the gauges in the gauge assembly. Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge has two intersecting coils wound around a permanent magnet rotor. Voltage applied to the coils, through fuse 25, generates a magnetic field. The magnetic field, controlled by the fuel gauge sending unit, causes the rotor to rotate and the gauge needle to move. As the resistance in the sending unit varies, current through the gauge coils changes. The gauge needle moves toward the coil with the strongest magnetic field. The fuel gauge sending unit's resistance varies from about 2 - 5 ohms at full, to about 110 ohms at empty. When you turn the ignition switch off, the gauge remains at the last reading until you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or START (III) again. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8750 Fuel Gauge: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from your work area. NOTE: Refer to fuel gauge system circuit. 1. Check the No.25 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fusel relay box before testing. 2. Remove the access panel from the floor. 3. Disconnect the 3P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. 4. Connect the voltmeter positive probe to the No.2 terminal and the negative probe to the No.1 terminal, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5 and 8 V. If the voltage is as specified, go to step 5. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK wire. - poor ground (G552). 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Attach a jumper wire between the No.1 and No.2 terminals, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts moving toward the "F" mark. CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer reaches "F" on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the fuel gauge. NOTE: The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, hence the fuel level is continuously indicated even when the ignition switch is OFF, and the pointer moves more slowly than that of a bimetal type. - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at all, replace the gauge. - If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8751 8. Remove the fuel gauge sending unit as shown. 9. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8752 If the resistance readings are beyond the range, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications Fuel Gauge Sender: Specifications Float Position E 1/2 F USA,Canada Produced (ceramic Board Type) 105 - 108 ohms 29.5 - 35.5 ohms 3.5 - 5 ohms Japan Produced (wire -Wound Type) 105 - 110 ohms 29.5 - 39.5 ohms 2 - 5 ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8756 Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8757 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from your work area. NOTE: Refer to fuel gauge system circuit. 1. Check the No.25 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fusel relay box before testing. 2. Remove the access panel from the floor. 3. Disconnect the 3P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. 4. Connect the voltmeter positive probe to the No.2 terminal and the negative probe to the No.1 terminal, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5 and 8 V. If the voltage is as specified, go to step 5. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK wire. - poor ground (G552). 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Attach a jumper wire between the No.1 and No.2 terminals, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts moving toward the "F" mark. CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer reaches "F" on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the fuel gauge. NOTE: The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, hence the fuel level is continuously indicated even when the ignition switch is OFF, and the pointer moves more slowly than that of a bimetal type. - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at all, replace the gauge. - If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8758 8. Remove the fuel gauge sending unit as shown. 9. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8759 If the resistance readings are beyond the range, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Locations With Front Passenger's Airbag Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Locations > Page 8764 Without Front Passenger's Airbag (Part Of Canada Model) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Airbag Handling and Storage Do not try to disassemble the airbag assembly. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been operated (deployed), it cannot be repaired or reused. For temporary storage of the airbag assembly during service, please observe the following precautions: Store the removed airbag assembly with the pad surface up. The driver's (and front passenger's) airbag connector(s) has (have) a built-in short contact. WARNING: If the airbag is improperly stored face down, accidental deployment could propel the unit with enough force to cause serious injury Store the removed airbag assembly on a secure flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 212 °F / 100 °C) and free of any oil, grease, detergent or water. CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag assembly, making it inoperative. If you suspect the airbag assembly has been damaged, install a new unit, and refer to the Deployment/Disposal procedures for disposing of the damaged airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 8767 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Wiring Precautions Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer protective covering. Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts. Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to- metal contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions > Airbag Handling and Storage > Page 8768 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions Radio "Code" Theft Protection NOTE: The original radio has a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's code number before a. Disconnecting the battery. b. Removing the fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box. c. Removing the radio. d. After service, reconnect power to the radio and turn it on. When the word "CODE" is displayed, enter the customer's 5-digit code to restore radio operation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact The driver's airbag (and front passenger's) airbag has (have) a spring-loaded lock connector with a built-in short contact. When this connector is disconnected, the power terminal and the ground terminal in the airbag connector are automatically shorted. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Spring-Loaded Lock Connector With Built-In Short Contact > Page 8771 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Description and Operation System Description The SRS is a safety device which, when used in conjunction with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver (and front passenger) in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit (including safing sensor and impact sensor), the cable reel, the driver's airbag (and front passenger's airbag). Operation The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator charge(s). If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and the back-up power circuit respectively will keep voltage at a constant level. For the SRS to operate: 1. The impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor. 2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and must send signals to the airbag inflator(s). 3. The inflator(s) must ignite and deploy the airbag(s). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 8772 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair To prevent accidental airbag deployment, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait three minutes before disconnecting any SRS connectors. - Before disconnecting the SRS main harness (A) from the SRS unit, disconnect both airbags (C,D). - Before disconnecting the cable reel 2P connector (B), disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector (C). 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and wait at least three minutes. 2. Disconnect the airbag connector(s). Driver's 2p Connector Driver's Side: Remove the access panel from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 2P connector and cable reel 2P connector. Passenger's 2p Connector Front Passenger's Side: Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 2P connector and SRS main harness 2P connector. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Panel Illumination Control Module > Component Information > Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8780 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8781 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8782 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8783 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8784 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8785 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8786 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8787 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8788 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8789 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8790 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8791 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8792 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8793 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8794 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8795 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8796 Seat Belt & Ignition Key Reminders Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8797 Key Reminder Switch: Description and Operation Ignition Key Warning Battery voltage is supplied at all times to the seat belt reminder/key-on beeper circuit in the integrated control unit. When you turn on the ignition key switch the integrated control unit senses ground. If you open the driver's door, the door switch closes, causing the beeper to sound until the door is closed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8802 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8803 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8804 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8805 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8806 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8807 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8808 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8809 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8810 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8811 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8812 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8813 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8814 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8815 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8816 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8817 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8818 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8819 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Service Precautions WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from the work area. Drain fuel only into an approved container. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8820 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from the work area. Drain fuel only into an approved container. A thermistor is mounted in the fuel tank unit. When the thermistor is cool, its resistance is very high. When the thermistor's temperature increases, its resistance decreases. Fuel in the fuel tank transfers heat away from the thermistor fast enough to keep it cool so the thermistor's resistance stays high and the low fuel indicator light does not come on. When the fuel level drops below the thermistor, the thermistor's temperature increases. Without the fuel to cool it, the thermistor's resistance decreases, allowing current to flow through the low fuel indicator light and the thermistor to ground, and the low fuel indicator light comes on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8821 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Testing and Inspection NOTE: For the low fuel indicator circuit diagram, refer to the gauge assembly circuit diagram. 1. Check the No.25 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box before testing. 2. Park the vehicle on level ground. 3. Drain the fuel into an approved container. Reinstall the fuel tank drain bolt with a new washer. 4. Add less than 4L (1.1 U.S. Gal, 0.9 Imp. Gal) of fuel, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). The low fuel indicator light should come on within four minutes. If the light comes on within four minutes, go to step 8. - If the light does not come on within four minutes, go to step 5. 5. Remove the access panel from the floor. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the fuel tank sending unit 3P connector. 7. Connect the fuel tank sending unit 3P terminals No.1 and No.3 with a jumper wire. - If the light comes on, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. - If the light does not come on, check for: An open in the GRN/YEL wire between the fuel gauge sending unit and the fuel gauge. - A blown bulb. - A poor ground (G552) 8. Add 4L (1.1 U.S. Gal, 0.9 Imp. Gal) of fuel. The light should go off within four minutes. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair If equipped with maintenance reminder flag: After completing the required service, the maintenance flags may be reset by inserting the ignition key into the appropriate slot, on the instrument below the indicator flag. When the ignition key is inserted into the slot, the indicator flag should change to green. If equipped with maintenance reminder lamp: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Press and hold the select/reset button(s) on the instrument panel, then turn the ignition switch ON (Position II). 3. Hold the button(s) for at least 10 seconds, until the indicator resets. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Customer Interest Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 8833 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 99-029 April 20,1999 Applies To: 1996-99 Civic-4-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6.. .XL009798 -4-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .XH518131 -2-door thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .XL021343 -3-door thru VIN 2HGEJ6.. .XH102598 MIL Is On With Blown Fuse 15 SYMPTOM The MIL is on with a DTC of P1298 (electrical load detector), P0135 (primary heated oxygen sensor), P0141 (secondary heated oxygen sensor), or P0501 (vehicle speed sensor) stored. Fuse 15 in the under-dash fuse box is blown. PROBABLE CAUSE The engine wire harness is rubbing on the intake manifold bracket. CORRECTIVE ACTION Repair the damaged wires, and protect the harness with corrugated tubing. PARTS INFORMATION Corrugated Tubing: P/N 17132-P2E-999, H/C 6182760 7.5 A Fuse: P/N 98200-40750, H/C 4853412 REQUIRED MATERIALS Electrical Tape: 3M P/N 54007-06132 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 737001 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 17132-P2E-A00 H/C 4776399 Defect code: 064 Contention code: B99 Template ID: 99-029A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Write down the customer's radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 3. Raise the car on the hoist. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Malfunction Indicator Lamp: > 99-029 > Apr > 99 > Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ON With Blow Fuse 15 > Page 8839 4. Remove the intake manifold bracket. 5. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the intake manifold bracket. 6. Tape any damaged wires in the harness going to C115 (see REQUIRED MATERIALS). 7. Install the corrugated tubing over the harness. Tape the tubing to the harness to hold it in position. 8. Reinstall the engine wire harness to the intake manifold bracket. Reinstall the bracket to the engine. Torque the bolts to 24 N.m (17 lb-ft). 9. Lower the car. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Enter the customer's radio station presets. Set the clock. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8840 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Does Not Come ON NOTE: If this symptom is intermittent, check for a loose fuse No.25 (METER 7.5 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box, a poor connection at ECM/PCM terminal A18, or an intermittent open in the GRN/ORN wire between the ECM/PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON > Page 8843 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection MIL Stays ON Part 1 Of 3 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON > Page 8844 Part 2 Of 3 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > MIL Does Not Come ON > Page 8845 Part 3 Of 3 NOTE: - When there is no Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) stored, the MIL will stay on if the SCS service connector is connected and the ignition switch is on. - If this symptom is intermittent, check for: A loose FIE/M (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box - A loose No.13 FUEL PUMP fuse (15 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C7) and the service check connector - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D4) and the MAP sensor - An intermittent short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D10), the TP sensor, the EGR valve lift sensor (D16Y5 engine) and/or the Fuel tank pressure sensor ('96 D16Y8 engine (coupe), '97 D16Y7 engine (coupe: KL model, sedan: KL (LX model), '97 D16Y8 engine (coupe: all models, sedan: KL model), '98-all models) - PGM-FI main relay See the OBD II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manuals for specific operating instructions. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Description and Operation Odometer: Description and Operation When the ignition switch is in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 25 to the gauges in the gauge assembly. Speedometer and Odometer The odometer and speedometer drive circuits receive pulses from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). The pulse rate increases as the car accelerates. The frequency and duration of these input pulses are measured and displayed by the speedometer, odometer and tripmeter. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8856 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8857 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8858 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8859 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8860 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8861 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8862 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8863 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8864 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8865 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8866 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8867 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8868 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8869 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8870 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8871 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8872 Oil Pressure Indicator Light Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Panel Illumination Control Module > Component Information > Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8884 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8885 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8886 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8887 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8888 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8889 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8890 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8891 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8892 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8893 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8894 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8895 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8896 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8897 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8898 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8899 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8900 Seat Belt And Ignition Reminders Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8901 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is applied to the seat belt reminder light. When the seat belt is not buckled, the seat belt reminder/key-ON beeper circuit in the integrated control unit senses ground through the closed seat belt switch. The seat belt reminder light comes ON and stays ON, and the beeper beeps for 6 seconds. The reminder light and beeper will stop when the seat belt is buckled or the timer circuit deactivates them. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Locations Dashboard Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dashlight Brightness Controller: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8908 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8909 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8910 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8911 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8912 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8913 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8914 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8915 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8916 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8917 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8918 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8919 Dashlight Brightness Controller: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8920 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8921 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8922 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8923 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8924 Dash Lights Brightness Controller Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8925 Dashlight Brightness Controller: Testing and Inspection NOTE: The control unit is built into the dash brightness controller. 1. Carefully pry the controller out of the dashboard. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the controller. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the controller must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch Left Rear Door Striker Area (Right Similar) Left of Rear Seat (Sedan Shown, Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch > Page 8930 Door Switch: Locations Door Switch At Driver's Door Striker Area (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications Fuel Gauge Sender: Specifications Float Position E 1/2 F USA,Canada Produced (ceramic Board Type) 105 - 108 ohms 29.5 - 35.5 ohms 3.5 - 5 ohms Japan Produced (wire -Wound Type) 105 - 110 ohms 29.5 - 39.5 ohms 2 - 5 ohms Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8934 Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8935 Fuel Gauge Sender: Testing and Inspection WARNING: Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flame away from your work area. NOTE: Refer to fuel gauge system circuit. 1. Check the No.25 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fusel relay box before testing. 2. Remove the access panel from the floor. 3. Disconnect the 3P connector from the fuel gauge sending unit. 4. Connect the voltmeter positive probe to the No.2 terminal and the negative probe to the No.1 terminal, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). There should be between 5 and 8 V. If the voltage is as specified, go to step 5. - If the voltage is not as specified, check for: an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK wire. - poor ground (G552). 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Attach a jumper wire between the No.1 and No.2 terminals, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge starts moving toward the "F" mark. CAUTION: Turn the ignition switch OFF before the pointer reaches "F" on the gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the fuel gauge. NOTE: The fuel gauge is a bobbin (cross-coil) type, hence the fuel level is continuously indicated even when the ignition switch is OFF, and the pointer moves more slowly than that of a bimetal type. - If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not move at all, replace the gauge. - If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8936 8. Remove the fuel gauge sending unit as shown. 9. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and No.2 terminals at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL) and F (FULL) by moving the float. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8937 If the resistance readings are beyond the range, replace the fuel gauge sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Key Reminder Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8942 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8943 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8944 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8945 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8946 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8947 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8948 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8949 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8950 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8951 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8952 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8953 Key Reminder Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8954 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8955 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8956 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8957 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8958 Seat Belt & Ignition Key Reminders Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Key Reminder Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8959 Key Reminder Switch: Description and Operation Ignition Key Warning Battery voltage is supplied at all times to the seat belt reminder/key-on beeper circuit in the integrated control unit. When you turn on the ignition key switch the integrated control unit senses ground. If you open the driver's door, the door switch closes, causing the beeper to sound until the door is closed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Locations Shift Indicator: Locations SRS components are located in this area Review the SRS component locations precautions and procedures in the SRS before performing repairs or service. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8968 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8969 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8970 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8971 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8972 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8973 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8974 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8975 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8976 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8977 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8978 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8979 Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8980 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8981 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8982 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8983 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8984 Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8985 Except CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8986 A/T Gear Position Indicator Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8987 Shift Indicator: Description and Operation With the ignition switch in ON (II) or START (III), voltage is applied to the A/T gear position indicator. The A/T gear position switch provides a ground for each position. As an input is grounded, its indicator light comes ON. If you select R, for example, ground will be provided to the input of the A/T gear position indicator, and the R indicator will come ON. With the headlight switch in PARK or HEAD, voltage is applied to the RED/BLK wire terminal. This changes the indicator panel illumination from fixed to controlled by the dash lights dimmer input through the RED wire. When the Powertrain (except HX) or Transmission (HX) Control Module (PCM or TCM) detects an abnormality in the automatic transmission control system, or when you request diagnostic trouble codes through the service check connector, the PCM or TCM will make the D4 (D for HX) indicator light blink. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 8990 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 8991 Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8992 Shift Indicator: Adjustments 1. Shift to the [P] position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of [D4] or [D4] position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No.1 and No.7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detent and/or the bracket. If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [N] in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8993 Shift Indicator: Service and Repair 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral". 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [P] anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Description and Operation Speedometer Head: Description and Operation When the ignition switch is in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 25 to the gauges in the gauge assembly. Speedometer and Odometer The odometer and speedometer drive circuits receive pulses from the vehicle speed sensor (VSS). The pulse rate increases as the car accelerates. The frequency and duration of these input pulses are measured and displayed by the speedometer, odometer and tripmeter. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Tachometer Connector > Component Information > Locations Tachometer Connector: Locations Left Rear Corner Of Of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Locations Gauge Assembly Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Locations > Page 9004 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation When the ignition switch is in ON (II) or START (III), battery voltage is supplied through fuse 25 to the gauges in the gauge assembly. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge The engine coolant temperature gauge has two intersecting coils wound around a permanent magnet rotor. Voltage applied to the coils, through fuse 25, generates a magnetic field. The magnetic field, controlled by the coolant temperature sending unit, causes the rotor to rotate and the gauge needle to move. As the resistance in the sending unit varies, current through the gauge coils changes. The gauge needle moves toward the coil with the strongest magnetic field. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Locations > Page 9005 Temperature Gauge: Testing and Inspection 1. Check No. 15 (10A) fuse in under dash fuse/relay box before testing. Fig. 1 Engine Coolant Temperature Unit 2. Ensure ignition switch is in Off position, then disconnect yellow/green wire from coolant temperature sending unit, Fig. 1, and ground it with a jumper wire. 3. Turn ignition switch to On position. 4. Check as needle of coolant temperature gauge starts moving toward H mark. Turn ignition switch to Off position before pointer reaches H mark on gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage gauge. 5. If pointer of gauge does not move, check the following: a. Blown fuse in under dash fuse/relay box. b. Open in yellow/green wire, yellow or red wire. c. If fuse and wiring are satisfactory, replace coolant temperature gauge. 6. If gauge is satisfactory, inspect sending unit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Sensor (Gauge) > Component Information > Locations Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations Right Front of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9012 Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard, and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations A/T Gear Position Indicator Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9018 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9019 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9020 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9021 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9022 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9023 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9024 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9025 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9026 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9027 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9028 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9029 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9030 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9031 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9032 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9033 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9034 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Electrical Diagrams A/T Gear Position Indicator - CVT Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9035 A/T Gear Position Indicator - A/T Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Indicator Input Test 1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard and disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 9038 2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the 14P connector. If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Indicator Input Test > Page 9039 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection Switch Test 1. Remove the front console. 2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. - Move the shift lever back and forth without pushing the shift lever at each switch position, and check for continuity within the range of free play of the shift lever. - If there is no continuity within the range of free play, adjust the position of the switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9040 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Adjustments 1. Shift to the [P] position, and loosen the nuts. 2. Slide the switch in the direction of [D4] or [D] position [within 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)] so that there is continuity between the No.1 and No.7 terminals in the range of free play of the shift lever. 3. Recheck for continuity between each of the terminals. NOTE: If adjustment is not possible, check for damage to the shift lever detect and/or the bracket. If there is no damage, replace the console switch. - The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [N] in the range of free play. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9041 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Service and Repair 1. Remove the front console, then disconnect the 14P connector from the A/T gear position switch. 2. Remove the two mounting nuts. 3. Position the switch slider to "Neutral" as shown. 4. Move the shift lever to "Neutral", then slip the switch into position. 5. Attach the switch with the two mounting nuts. 6. Test the switch in the [P] and [N] position of the shift lever. The engine should start when the shift lever is in position [P] anywhere in the range of free play. 7. Connect the 14P connector, clamp the harness, and install the front console. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Back-Up Light Switch (M/T) Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Back-Up Light Switch (M/T) Right Side of Engine Compartment (M/T) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Back-Up Light Switch (M/T) > Page 9048 Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Back-Up Light Switch (SI) Lower Front of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Specifications Backup Light Bulb: Specifications Back-Up Light 21 W Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Specifications Brake Light Bulb: Specifications Brake Light 21 W Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9056 Brake Light Bulb: Description and Operation The brake system indicator light comes ON to alert the driver that the parking brake is applied, or that the brake fluid level is low. It also comes ON as a bulb test when the engine is cranked. Bulb Check With the ignition switch in START (III) and clutch pedal depressed or A/T gear selector in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), voltage is applied through fuse 31 to the brake bulb check circuit. The brake bulb check circuit closes, allowing current to flow through the brake system light and bulb check circuit to ground. The brake system light then comes ON to test the bulb. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect wiring at switch. 2. Loosen locknut and remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Allow 0.039-0.196 inch (1-5 mm) brake pedal freeplay. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Locations Lighting System (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coupe/Sedan Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair Coupe/Sedan High Mount Brake Light Replacement 1. Remove the rear shelf. 2. Remove the two screws, then remove the high mount brake light from the rear shelf. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coupe/Sedan > Page 9065 Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Service and Repair Hatchback High Mount Brake Light Replacement 1. Loosen the two screws, then remove the high mount brake light. Be careful not to damage the hatch spoiler. 2. Remove the bulb socket from the light. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Locations Interior Lights Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9071 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9072 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9073 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9074 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9075 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9076 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9077 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9078 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9079 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9080 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9081 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9082 Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9083 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9084 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9085 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9086 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9087 Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Interior Lights (Without Spotlights) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9088 Interior Lights (With Spotlights) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9089 Courtesy Lamp: Testing and Inspection 1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Pry off the lens. 3. Remove the two mounting nuts (or a bolt) from the housing, then remove the housing. 4. Disconnect the connector(s) from the housing. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. with moonroof Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9090 without moonroof Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9095 Lighting System (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9096 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9097 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test (Canada) 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the connectors from the daytime running lights control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Locations Lighting System (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9101 Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: Testing and Inspection Test (Canada) CAUTION: The daytime running lights resistor becomes very hot when the daytime running lights are on; do not touch it or the attaching hardware immediately after the lights have been turned off. 1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the resistor. 2. Measure the resistance between the resistor terminals (No.1 and No.2) and the power terminal No.3. Resistance: 1.6 Ohms ± 0.08 Ohms 3. Replace the resistor with a new one if any of the resistances are beyond specification. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9102 Daytime Running Lamp Resistor: Service and Repair Daytime Running Lights Resistor Test (Canada) Replacement CAUTION: Halogen headlights become very hot in use; do not touch them or the attaching hardware immediately after they have been turned off. 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Remove the mounting bolts. 3. Disconnect each connector, then remove the headlight/front turn signal/parking light assembly. HEADLIGHT: 60/55 W FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LIGHT: 21/5 W Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Locations Dashboard Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Dashlight Brightness Controller: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9108 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9109 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9110 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9111 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9112 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9113 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9114 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9115 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9116 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9117 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9118 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9119 Dashlight Brightness Controller: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9120 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9121 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9122 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9123 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9124 Dash Lights Brightness Controller Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dashlight Brightness Controller <--> [Dimmer Switch] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9125 Dashlight Brightness Controller: Testing and Inspection NOTE: The control unit is built into the dash brightness controller. 1. Carefully pry the controller out of the dashboard. 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the controller. 3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the input tests shown in the table at the connector. - If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the controller must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Locations Component Location Index Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 9129 Dome Lamp: Testing and Inspection 1. Turn the light switch OFF. 2. Pry off the lens. 3. Remove the two mounting nuts (or a bolt) from the housing, then remove the housing. 4. Disconnect the connectors from the housing. With Moonroof Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 9130 Without Moonroof 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch Left Rear Door Striker Area (Right Similar) Left of Rear Seat (Sedan Shown, Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch > Page 9135 Door Switch: Locations Door Switch At Driver's Door Striker Area (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Panel - Photo 69 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9144 Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9145 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/ hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Hazard Warning Flasher: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9150 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9151 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9152 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9153 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9154 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9155 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9156 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9157 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9158 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9159 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9160 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9161 Hazard Warning Flasher: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9162 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9163 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9164 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9165 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9166 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9170 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9171 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the hazard warning switch or the center outlet panel when prying the switch out. 1. Pry the hazard warning switch out of the center outlet panel. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the hazard warning switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Specifications Headlamp Bulb: Specifications Headlights 60/55 W Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9180 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9181 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9182 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9183 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9184 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9185 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9186 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9187 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9188 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9189 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9190 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9191 Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9192 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9193 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9194 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9195 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9196 Headlamp Switch: Electrical Diagrams Part 1 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9197 Part 2 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9198 Part 3 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9199 Part 4 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9200 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables. If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch: Turn Signal Switch: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlight <--> [Headlamp] > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9201 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Remove dashboard lower cover. 4. Remove steering column upper and lower covers. 5. Disconnect switch electrical connectors. 6. Remove two switch attaching screws, then slide switch assembly out of housing. 7. Reverse procedure to install. 8. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Locations Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View Horn Relay: Locations Alternate View Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 9210 Horn Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 9211 Horn Relay: Locations Picture Location Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9212 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Horn relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Locations Lighting System (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9218 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9219 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9220 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9221 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9222 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9223 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9224 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9225 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9226 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9227 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9228 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9229 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9230 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9231 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9232 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9233 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9234 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9235 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9236 License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair 1. Remove the two screws from the license plate light, and pull the light out part of the way. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the light. 3. Take the lens off, then replace the bulb. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Spotlight: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9241 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9242 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9243 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9244 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9245 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9246 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9247 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9248 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9249 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9250 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9251 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9252 Spotlight: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9253 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9254 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9255 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9256 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9257 Spotlight: Electrical Diagrams Circuit Diagram (Without Spotlights) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9258 Circuit Diagram (With Spotlights) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spotlight <--> [Map Light] > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9259 Spotlight: Testing and Inspection 1. Turn the spotlight switch OFF. 2. Pry off the lens. 3. Remove the two screws and the housing. 4. Disconnect the 1P connector from the housing. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Specifications Parking Light Bulb: Specifications Parking Light 5 W Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Locations Dashboard (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9268 Lighting System (Part 1 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9269 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 9270 Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Testing and Inspection Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test (Canada) 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the connectors from the daytime running lights control unit. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Behind Left Side Of Dash Panel - Photo 69 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations Hazard Flasher Relay: Locations Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9277 Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Flasher Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9278 Hazard Flasher Relay: Testing and Inspection SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/ hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View Horn Relay: Locations Alternate View Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 9283 Horn Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 9284 Horn Relay: Locations Picture Location Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9285 Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Horn relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View Turn Signal Relay: Locations Alternate View Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 9290 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 9291 Turn Signal Relay: Locations Photo Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9292 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/ hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Back-Up Light Switch (M/T) Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Back-Up Light Switch (M/T) Right Side of Engine Compartment (M/T) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Back-Up Light Switch (M/T) > Page 9298 Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Back-Up Light Switch (SI) Lower Front of Transmission Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair 1. Disconnect wiring at switch. 2. Loosen locknut and remove switch. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Allow 0.039-0.196 inch (1-5 mm) brake pedal freeplay. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. Technical Service Bulletin # 97-007 Date: 981215 Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. 97-007 December 15, 1998 Applies To: 1996 - 97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Turn Signal Does Not Cancel (Supersedes 97-007, dated March 10, 1997) SYMPTOMS [NEW] The customer complains of one or more of the following. ^ Low power assist while turning ^ A "notchy" feeling when turning the steering wheel, or looseness in the steering ^ A clicking sound while turning the steering wheel ^ The turn signal switch does not cancel after making a turn PROBABLE CAUSE The cancel sleeve inside the combination switch shrinks and sticks to the combination switch assembly. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996 Civic - ALL 1997 Civic: 2-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8. . .VL049149 3-door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .VH111461 4-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .VL015491 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ8. . .VH540019 - Thru VIN JHMEJ6. . .VS037746 [NEW] - Thru VIN JHMEJ8. . .VS005454 [NEW] CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination switch assembly with the one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Combination Switch Assembly: P/N 35251-S04-A81, H/C 4790218 Steering Wheel Nut: P/N 90163-S04-000, H/C 4852794 Torx Bolt (2 required): P/N 90134-504-A81, H/C 4794996 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 728102 Flat rate time: 0.8 hour Failed part: P/N 35251-504-A81 H/C 4790218 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9310 Defect code: 032 Contention code: B01 Template ID: 97-007A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Repair Procedure 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes before continuing. 3. With the front wheels aligned straight ahead, remove the access panel from the back of the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and the cable reel. NOTE: Disconnecting the 2P connector automatically shorts the airbag wires; a shorting connector is not needed. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Remove the two bolt covers from the back of the steering wheel. Then remove and discard the two Torx bolts, disconnect the horn connector, and remove the driver's airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9311 6. Disconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). 7. Remove the steering wheel nut, and discard it. Then remove the steering wheel by rocking it side-to-side as you pull steadily with both hands. 8. Remove the upper and lower column covers. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9312 9. Disconnect the 3P connector between the main wire harness and the cable reel sub-harness, and disconnect the 2P connector between the cable reel and the SRS main harness. Then remove the cable reel. NOTE: The edges of the knee bolster are sharp. Be careful when you are working near it. 10. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the headlight switch. Then disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the wiper/washer switch. 11. Remove and retain the four screws that secure the combination switch assembly, then remove the assembly from the steering column. 12. Remove the headlight and wiper/washer switches from the old combination switch assembly and install them on the new one (see PARTS INFORMATION). 13. Reconnect the headlight and wiper/washer switch connectors, then reinstall the combination switch assembly with the original screws. 14. Set the cancel sleeve so its projections are aligned vertically. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9313 15. Carefully reinstall the cable reel on the steering column with the original screws. Then reconnect the 3P connector to the cable reel sub-harness and the 2P connector to the SRS main harness, and reinstall the connectors in their holders. 16. Reinstall the steering column covers with the original screws. 17. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops and then rotating it counterclockwise about 2-1/2 turns until the arrow on the label points straight up. 18. Reinstall the steering wheel. Then reconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). Route the wires in their clips on the steering wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9314 19. Install a new steering wheel nut (see PARTS INFORMATION). Torque it to 50 N.m (36 lb-ft). 20. Reconnect the airbag horn connector to the steering wheel, and reinstall the airbag with two new Torx bolts (see PARTS INFORMATION). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (7 lb-ft), then reinstall the bolt covers. 21. Attach the cable reel 2P and 3P connectors to the connector holder. Then reinstall the driver's dashboard lower cover. 22. Reconnect the airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 23. Reconnect the positive cable to the battery, and reconnect the negative cable. 24. Check the operation of the SRS: When you turn the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS light comes on and then goes off after six seconds. 25. Check the operation of the cable reel, the headlight switch, the wiper/washer switch, and both horn buttons. 26. Reset the radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. Technical Service Bulletin # 97-007 Date: 981215 Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. 97-007 December 15, 1998 Applies To: 1996 - 97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Turn Signal Does Not Cancel (Supersedes 97-007, dated March 10, 1997) SYMPTOMS [NEW] The customer complains of one or more of the following. ^ Low power assist while turning ^ A "notchy" feeling when turning the steering wheel, or looseness in the steering ^ A clicking sound while turning the steering wheel ^ The turn signal switch does not cancel after making a turn PROBABLE CAUSE The cancel sleeve inside the combination switch shrinks and sticks to the combination switch assembly. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996 Civic - ALL 1997 Civic: 2-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8. . .VL049149 3-door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .VH111461 4-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .VL015491 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ8. . .VH540019 - Thru VIN JHMEJ6. . .VS037746 [NEW] - Thru VIN JHMEJ8. . .VS005454 [NEW] CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination switch assembly with the one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Combination Switch Assembly: P/N 35251-S04-A81, H/C 4790218 Steering Wheel Nut: P/N 90163-S04-000, H/C 4852794 Torx Bolt (2 required): P/N 90134-504-A81, H/C 4794996 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 728102 Flat rate time: 0.8 hour Failed part: P/N 35251-504-A81 H/C 4790218 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9320 Defect code: 032 Contention code: B01 Template ID: 97-007A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Repair Procedure 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes before continuing. 3. With the front wheels aligned straight ahead, remove the access panel from the back of the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and the cable reel. NOTE: Disconnecting the 2P connector automatically shorts the airbag wires; a shorting connector is not needed. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Remove the two bolt covers from the back of the steering wheel. Then remove and discard the two Torx bolts, disconnect the horn connector, and remove the driver's airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9321 6. Disconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). 7. Remove the steering wheel nut, and discard it. Then remove the steering wheel by rocking it side-to-side as you pull steadily with both hands. 8. Remove the upper and lower column covers. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9322 9. Disconnect the 3P connector between the main wire harness and the cable reel sub-harness, and disconnect the 2P connector between the cable reel and the SRS main harness. Then remove the cable reel. NOTE: The edges of the knee bolster are sharp. Be careful when you are working near it. 10. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the headlight switch. Then disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the wiper/washer switch. 11. Remove and retain the four screws that secure the combination switch assembly, then remove the assembly from the steering column. 12. Remove the headlight and wiper/washer switches from the old combination switch assembly and install them on the new one (see PARTS INFORMATION). 13. Reconnect the headlight and wiper/washer switch connectors, then reinstall the combination switch assembly with the original screws. 14. Set the cancel sleeve so its projections are aligned vertically. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9323 15. Carefully reinstall the cable reel on the steering column with the original screws. Then reconnect the 3P connector to the cable reel sub-harness and the 2P connector to the SRS main harness, and reinstall the connectors in their holders. 16. Reinstall the steering column covers with the original screws. 17. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops and then rotating it counterclockwise about 2-1/2 turns until the arrow on the label points straight up. 18. Reinstall the steering wheel. Then reconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). Route the wires in their clips on the steering wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9324 19. Install a new steering wheel nut (see PARTS INFORMATION). Torque it to 50 N.m (36 lb-ft). 20. Reconnect the airbag horn connector to the steering wheel, and reinstall the airbag with two new Torx bolts (see PARTS INFORMATION). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (7 lb-ft), then reinstall the bolt covers. 21. Attach the cable reel 2P and 3P connectors to the connector holder. Then reinstall the driver's dashboard lower cover. 22. Reconnect the airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 23. Reconnect the positive cable to the battery, and reconnect the negative cable. 24. Check the operation of the SRS: When you turn the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS light comes on and then goes off after six seconds. 25. Check the operation of the cable reel, the headlight switch, the wiper/washer switch, and both horn buttons. 26. Reset the radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9327 Combination Switch: Connector Locations Combination Light Switch Connector A Left Side of Steering Column Combination Light Switch Connector B Left Side of Steering Column Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9328 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9329 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables. If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9330 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Switch Replacement Honda does not provide a service procedure for this component. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch Door Switch: Locations Rear Door Switch Left Rear Door Striker Area (Right Similar) Left of Rear Seat (Sedan Shown, Others Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Rear Door Switch > Page 9335 Door Switch: Locations Door Switch At Driver's Door Striker Area (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9339 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9340 Hazard Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the hazard warning switch or the center outlet panel when prying the switch out. 1. Pry the hazard warning switch out of the center outlet panel. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the hazard warning switch. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9345 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9346 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9347 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9348 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9349 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9350 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9351 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9352 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9353 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9354 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9355 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9356 Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9357 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9358 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9359 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9360 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9361 Headlamp Switch: Electrical Diagrams Part 1 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9362 Part 2 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9363 Part 3 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9364 Part 4 Of 4 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9365 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables. If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch: Turn Signal Switch: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9366 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Remove dashboard lower cover. 4. Remove steering column upper and lower covers. 5. Disconnect switch electrical connectors. 6. Remove two switch attaching screws, then slide switch assembly out of housing. 7. Reverse procedure to install. 8. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables. If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch: Turn Signal Switch: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9370 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Remove dashboard lower cover. 4. Remove steering column upper and lower covers. 5. Disconnect switch electrical connectors. 6. Remove two switch attaching screws, then slide switch assembly out of housing. 7. Reverse procedure to install. 8. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Spot Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9375 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9376 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9377 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9378 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9379 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9380 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9381 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9382 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9383 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9384 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9385 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9386 Spot Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9387 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9388 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9389 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9390 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9391 Spot Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Part 1 of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9392 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Spot Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9393 Spot Lamp: Testing and Inspection 1. Turn the spotlight switch OFF. 2. Pry off the lens. 3. Remove the two screws and the housing. 4. Disconnect the 1p connector from the housing. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Specifications Tail Light Bulb: Specifications Taillight 5 W Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trunk Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9402 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9403 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9404 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9405 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9406 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9407 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9408 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9409 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9410 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9411 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9412 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9413 Trunk Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9414 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9415 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9416 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9417 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9418 Trunk Lamp: Electrical Diagrams Part 1 of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9419 Part 2 Of 2 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9420 Trunk Lamp: Testing and Inspection 1. Open the trunk light cover from the housing. 2. Pry out the light assembly. 3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the housing. 4. Make sure that the bulb is OK. Check for continuity between the No.1 (+) and No.2 (-) terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. Technical Service Bulletin # 97-007 Date: 981215 Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. 97-007 December 15, 1998 Applies To: 1996 - 97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Turn Signal Does Not Cancel (Supersedes 97-007, dated March 10, 1997) SYMPTOMS [NEW] The customer complains of one or more of the following. ^ Low power assist while turning ^ A "notchy" feeling when turning the steering wheel, or looseness in the steering ^ A clicking sound while turning the steering wheel ^ The turn signal switch does not cancel after making a turn PROBABLE CAUSE The cancel sleeve inside the combination switch shrinks and sticks to the combination switch assembly. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996 Civic - ALL 1997 Civic: 2-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8. . .VL049149 3-door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .VH111461 4-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .VL015491 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ8. . .VH540019 - Thru VIN JHMEJ6. . .VS037746 [NEW] - Thru VIN JHMEJ8. . .VS005454 [NEW] CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination switch assembly with the one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Combination Switch Assembly: P/N 35251-S04-A81, H/C 4790218 Steering Wheel Nut: P/N 90163-S04-000, H/C 4852794 Torx Bolt (2 required): P/N 90134-504-A81, H/C 4794996 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 728102 Flat rate time: 0.8 hour Failed part: P/N 35251-504-A81 H/C 4790218 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9430 Defect code: 032 Contention code: B01 Template ID: 97-007A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Repair Procedure 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes before continuing. 3. With the front wheels aligned straight ahead, remove the access panel from the back of the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and the cable reel. NOTE: Disconnecting the 2P connector automatically shorts the airbag wires; a shorting connector is not needed. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Remove the two bolt covers from the back of the steering wheel. Then remove and discard the two Torx bolts, disconnect the horn connector, and remove the driver's airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9431 6. Disconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). 7. Remove the steering wheel nut, and discard it. Then remove the steering wheel by rocking it side-to-side as you pull steadily with both hands. 8. Remove the upper and lower column covers. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9432 9. Disconnect the 3P connector between the main wire harness and the cable reel sub-harness, and disconnect the 2P connector between the cable reel and the SRS main harness. Then remove the cable reel. NOTE: The edges of the knee bolster are sharp. Be careful when you are working near it. 10. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the headlight switch. Then disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the wiper/washer switch. 11. Remove and retain the four screws that secure the combination switch assembly, then remove the assembly from the steering column. 12. Remove the headlight and wiper/washer switches from the old combination switch assembly and install them on the new one (see PARTS INFORMATION). 13. Reconnect the headlight and wiper/washer switch connectors, then reinstall the combination switch assembly with the original screws. 14. Set the cancel sleeve so its projections are aligned vertically. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9433 15. Carefully reinstall the cable reel on the steering column with the original screws. Then reconnect the 3P connector to the cable reel sub-harness and the 2P connector to the SRS main harness, and reinstall the connectors in their holders. 16. Reinstall the steering column covers with the original screws. 17. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops and then rotating it counterclockwise about 2-1/2 turns until the arrow on the label points straight up. 18. Reinstall the steering wheel. Then reconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). Route the wires in their clips on the steering wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9434 19. Install a new steering wheel nut (see PARTS INFORMATION). Torque it to 50 N.m (36 lb-ft). 20. Reconnect the airbag horn connector to the steering wheel, and reinstall the airbag with two new Torx bolts (see PARTS INFORMATION). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (7 lb-ft), then reinstall the bolt covers. 21. Attach the cable reel 2P and 3P connectors to the connector holder. Then reinstall the driver's dashboard lower cover. 22. Reconnect the airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 23. Reconnect the positive cable to the battery, and reconnect the negative cable. 24. Check the operation of the SRS: When you turn the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS light comes on and then goes off after six seconds. 25. Check the operation of the cable reel, the headlight switch, the wiper/washer switch, and both horn buttons. 26. Reset the radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. Technical Service Bulletin # 97-007 Date: 981215 Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. 97-007 December 15, 1998 Applies To: 1996 - 97 Civic - See VEHICLES AFFECTED Turn Signal Does Not Cancel (Supersedes 97-007, dated March 10, 1997) SYMPTOMS [NEW] The customer complains of one or more of the following. ^ Low power assist while turning ^ A "notchy" feeling when turning the steering wheel, or looseness in the steering ^ A clicking sound while turning the steering wheel ^ The turn signal switch does not cancel after making a turn PROBABLE CAUSE The cancel sleeve inside the combination switch shrinks and sticks to the combination switch assembly. VEHICLES AFFECTED 1996 Civic - ALL 1997 Civic: 2-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ8. . .VL049149 3-door - Thru VIN 2HGEJ6. . .VH111461 4-door - Thru VIN 1HGEJ6. . .VL015491 - Thru VIN 2HGEJ8. . .VH540019 - Thru VIN JHMEJ6. . .VS037746 [NEW] - Thru VIN JHMEJ8. . .VS005454 [NEW] CORRECTIVE ACTION Replace the combination switch assembly with the one listed under PARTS INFORMATION. PARTS INFORMATION Combination Switch Assembly: P/N 35251-S04-A81, H/C 4790218 Steering Wheel Nut: P/N 90163-S04-000, H/C 4852794 Torx Bolt (2 required): P/N 90134-504-A81, H/C 4794996 WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 728102 Flat rate time: 0.8 hour Failed part: P/N 35251-504-A81 H/C 4790218 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9440 Defect code: 032 Contention code: B01 Template ID: 97-007A Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. Repair Procedure 1. Write down the radio station presets. 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least three minutes before continuing. 3. With the front wheels aligned straight ahead, remove the access panel from the back of the steering wheel, then disconnect the 2P connector between the driver's airbag and the cable reel. NOTE: Disconnecting the 2P connector automatically shorts the airbag wires; a shorting connector is not needed. 4. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 5. Remove the two bolt covers from the back of the steering wheel. Then remove and discard the two Torx bolts, disconnect the horn connector, and remove the driver's airbag. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9441 6. Disconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). 7. Remove the steering wheel nut, and discard it. Then remove the steering wheel by rocking it side-to-side as you pull steadily with both hands. 8. Remove the upper and lower column covers. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9442 9. Disconnect the 3P connector between the main wire harness and the cable reel sub-harness, and disconnect the 2P connector between the cable reel and the SRS main harness. Then remove the cable reel. NOTE: The edges of the knee bolster are sharp. Be careful when you are working near it. 10. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the headlight switch. Then disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the wiper/washer switch. 11. Remove and retain the four screws that secure the combination switch assembly, then remove the assembly from the steering column. 12. Remove the headlight and wiper/washer switches from the old combination switch assembly and install them on the new one (see PARTS INFORMATION). 13. Reconnect the headlight and wiper/washer switch connectors, then reinstall the combination switch assembly with the original screws. 14. Set the cancel sleeve so its projections are aligned vertically. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9443 15. Carefully reinstall the cable reel on the steering column with the original screws. Then reconnect the 3P connector to the cable reel sub-harness and the 2P connector to the SRS main harness, and reinstall the connectors in their holders. 16. Reinstall the steering column covers with the original screws. 17. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops and then rotating it counterclockwise about 2-1/2 turns until the arrow on the label points straight up. 18. Reinstall the steering wheel. Then reconnect the horn switch connector and the cruise control set/resume switch connector (if equipped). Route the wires in their clips on the steering wheel. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Combination Switch: > 97-007 > Dec > 98 > Lighting - Turn Signal Does Not Cancel. > Page 9444 19. Install a new steering wheel nut (see PARTS INFORMATION). Torque it to 50 N.m (36 lb-ft). 20. Reconnect the airbag horn connector to the steering wheel, and reinstall the airbag with two new Torx bolts (see PARTS INFORMATION). Tighten the bolts to 10 N.m (7 lb-ft), then reinstall the bolt covers. 21. Attach the cable reel 2P and 3P connectors to the connector holder. Then reinstall the driver's dashboard lower cover. 22. Reconnect the airbag 2P connector to the cable reel 2P connector, and reinstall the access panel on the steering wheel. 23. Reconnect the positive cable to the battery, and reconnect the negative cable. 24. Check the operation of the SRS: When you turn the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS light comes on and then goes off after six seconds. 25. Check the operation of the cable reel, the headlight switch, the wiper/washer switch, and both horn buttons. 26. Reset the radio station presets, and set the clock. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 9447 Combination Switch: Connector Locations Combination Light Switch Connector A Left Side of Steering Column Combination Light Switch Connector B Left Side of Steering Column Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9448 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9449 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables. If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. - If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. - If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9450 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Combination Switch Replacement Honda does not provide a service procedure for this component. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Turn Signal Flasher: Diagram Information and Instructions Circuit Identification For In-Line and Fuse Box Connectors C324 To see the configuration of a connector's cavities, look up its view number in Diagrams/Connector Views. Each view includes the color of the connector, where it is located, and what it connects to. Use the Connector Views to help locate the proper cavity when you need to probe a connector. It can be especially helpful if the connector has more than one wire of the same color. Connector views can also be used to help diagnose multiple symptoms in separate circuits which could be caused by a single problem in a connector shared by those circuits. Here's how: 1. Pick one of the multiple symptoms and look up the schematic for that circuit. 2. Make a list of all the in-line and fuse box connectors in that schematic. 3. Then, in the Connector Views, look up each connector on your list to see if circuits related to the other symptoms run through one of them. If they do, inspect that connector for the problem. Example: The blower, rear window defogger, and the windshield wiper don't work. List all in-line and fuse box connectors in the blower controls circuit and then check the Connector View (sample below). You find that C324 is common to the rear window defogger circuit and wiper/washer circuit, so you inspect C324 and find the problem, bent terminals. Circuit Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9455 Each schematic represents one circuit. A circuit's wires and components are arranged to show current flow, from power at the top, to ground at the bottom. Shared Circuits Other circuits may share power or ground terminals or wiring with the circuit shown. A wire that connects one circuit to another, for example, is cut short and has an arrowhead at the end of it pointing in the direction of current flow. Next to the arrowhead is the name of the circuit or component which shares that wiring. To quickly check shared wiring, check the operation of a component it serves. If that component works, you know the shared wiring is OK. Connectors All in-line and fuse box connectors are numbered (C725, C416, etc.). Component connectors are not numbered but are identified by the name of the component. If a component has more than one connector, each connector is assigned a letter (A B, C, etc.). Below most connector numbers and Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9456 component names are PHOTO and VIEW numbers. The PHOTO number refers to a photo that shows the connector's location on the car. The VIEW number refers to an illustration that shows the connector face, wire colors, connector cavity numbers, and other details. The connector cavity numbering sequence begins at the top left corner of the connector. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. . Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing.. Disregard any numbers molded into the connector housing. Wires Wires are identified by the abbreviated names of their colors; the second color is the color of the stripe. Wires are also identified by their location in a connector. The number "2" next to the male and female wire terminals at C416, for example, means those terminals join in cavity 2 of connector C416. Symbols A complete description of schematic symbols is given in wire color abbreviations. Component Locations To see where a component or connector is located on the car, look up its photo number in the Location/Components section. The photo will also tell you the color of the connector, and how many cavities it has. If there is no photo number below or beside a component name or a connector, ground, or terminal number, look up that name or number in the Connector-to-Harness Index. The chart lists how many cavities a connector has, where it's located, and what it connects to. The related illustration shows the connector's location on the harness, and the harness routing. Ground Distribution Schematics Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9457 This sample Ground Distribution schematic shows all of the components that share two ground points. Power Distribution Schematics Power Distribution schematics show how power is supplied from the positive battery terminal to various circuits in the car. Refer to the Power Distribution section to get a more detailed picture of how power is supplied to the circuit you're working on. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9458 From Battery to Ignition Switch, Fuses, and Relays Individual circuit schematics begin with a fuse. The first half of Power Distribution, however, shows the wiring "upstream" between the battery and the fuses. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9459 From Fuses to Relays and Components The second half of Power Distribution shows the wiring "From Fuses to Relays and Components." This can speed your troubleshooting by showing which circuits share fuses. If Power Distribution shows that an inoperative circuit and another circuit share a fuse, check a component in the other circuit. If it works, you know the fuse is good and power is available to the inoperative circuit. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9460 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9461 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9462 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9463 Wire Color Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: BLK ............... .............................................................................................................................................................. .................................................. Black BLU ......................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Blue BRN .... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................ Brown GRN ............................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................. Green GRY ..................................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... Gray LT BLU ............................................................ ...................................................................................................................................................... Light Blue LT GRN .............................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. Light Green ORN ............................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............... Orange PNK ........................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................... Pink PUR ................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ............................. Purple RED ............................................................................................................ ...................................................................................................................... Red WHT ...................... .............................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... White YEL ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................ Yellow Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9464 Wire Color Codes The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics: WHT..........White YEL..........Yellow BLK..........Black BLU..........Blue GRN..........Green RED..........Red ORN..........Orange PNK..........Pink BRN..........Brown GRY..........Gray PUR..........Purple LT BLU....... Light Blue Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9465 LT GRN....... Light Green The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9466 Turn Signal Flasher: Diagnostic Aids Five Step Troubleshooting 1. Verify The Complaint Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to check the accuracy of the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area. 2. Analyze The Schematic Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, trace circuits that share wiring with the problem circuit. The names of circuits that share the same fuse, ground, or switch, and so on, are referred to in each circuit schematic. Try to operate any shared circuits you didn't check in step 1. If the shared circuits work, the shared wiring is OK, and the cause must be in the wiring used only by the problem circuit. If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause. Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit's operation, identify one or more possible causes. 3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible. 4. Fix The Problem Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures. 5. Make Sure The Circuit Works Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on that fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur. Troubleshooting Precautions Before Troubleshooting 1. Check the main fuse and the fuse box. 2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections. CAUTION: Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, or you will damage the alternator diodes. - Do not attempt to crank the engine with the ground cable disconnected or you will severely damage the wiring. While You're Working 1. Make sure connectors are clean, and have no loose terminals or receptacles. 2. Make sure that connectors without wire seals are packed with dielectric (silicone) grease. Part Number: 08798-9001. 3. When connecting a connector, push it until it "clicks" into place. CAUTION: Do not pull on the wires when disconnecting a connector. Pull only on the connector housings. - Most circuits include solid-state devices. Test the voltages in these circuits only with a 1O megaohm or higher impedance digital multimeter. Never use a test light or analog meter on circuits that contain solid-state devices. Damage to the devices may result. Testing For A Short With A Self-Powered Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the battery and load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9467 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) (switched to the lowest "OHMS" range) to the fuse terminal on the load side. 3. Connect the other lead to a known good ground. 4. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 5. If the self-powered test light goes on or the DVOM displays a low reading or no reading (zero), there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. Testing For a Short With a Short Circuit Locator (Short Finder) 1. Remove the blown fuse. Leave the battery connected. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9468 2. Connect the short finder across the battery terminals and the load (component) side of the fuse terminal. 3. Close all switches in the circuit you're testing. 4. Turn on the short tinder. This creates a pulsing magnetic field around the wiring between the fuse box and the short. 5. Beginning at the fuse box, slowly move the short finder along the circuit wiring. The meter will show current pulses through sheet metal and body trim. As long as the meter is between the fuse and the short, the needle will move with each current pulse. Once you move the meter past the point of the short, the needle will stop moving. Check the wiring and connectors in this area to locate the cause of the short. Testing For A Short With A Test Light or DVOM 1. Remove the blown fuse and disconnect the load. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9469 2. Connect a test light or digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM), switched to the appropriate DC volts range, across the fuse terminals to make sure voltage is present. You might have to turn the ignition switch to ON; check the schematic to see. 3. Beginning near the fuse box, wiggle the harness. Continue this at convenient points about six inches apart while watching the test light or DVOM. 4. Where the test light goes off, or the DVOM voltage drops to zero, there is a short to ground in the wiring near that point. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Continuity When testing for continuity at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the car battery. If you're using a DVOM, place it in the lowest "OHMS" range. 2. Connect one lead of a self-powered test light or DVOM to one end of the part of the circuit you want to test. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end. 4. If the self-powered test light glows, there is continuity. If you're using a DVOM, a low reading or no reading (zero), means good continuity. Testing For Voltage Testing for Voltage When testing for voltage at a connector without wire seals, you do not have to separate the two halves of the connector. Instead, probe the connector from the back. Always check both sides of the connector because dirty, corroded, and bent terminals can cause problems (no electrical contact = an open). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9470 1. Connect one lead of the test light to a known good ground, or, if you're using a digital volt ohmmeter (DVOM), place it in the appropriate DC volts range, and connect its negative lead to ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the test light or DVOM to the point you want to check. 3. If the test light glows, there is voltage present. If you're using a DVOM, note the voltage reading. It should be within one volt of measured battery voltage. A loss of more than one volt indicates a problem. NOTE: Always use a DVOM on high impedance circuits. A test light may not glow (even with battery voltage present). Testing For Voltage Drop Wires, connectors, and switches are designed to conduct current with a minimum loss of voltage. A voltage drop of more than one volt indicates a problem. 1. Place the digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) in the appropriate DC volts range. Connect the positive lead to the end of the wire (or to the connector or switch) closest to the battery. 2. Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire (or the other side of the connector or switch). 3. Turn on the components in the circuit. 4. The DVOM will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop, of more than one volt indicates a problem. Check the circuit for loose, dirty, or bent terminals. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9471 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Specifications Turn Signal Bulb: Specifications Turn Signal Light 21 W Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View Turn Signal Relay: Locations Alternate View Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 9480 Lighting System (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 9481 Turn Signal Relay: Locations Photo Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9482 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/ hazard relay must be faulty; replace it. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Turn Signal Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and steering column covers. 2. Disconnect the 4P and 7P connectors from the switch. 3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between them in each switch position according to the tables. If there is no continuity between any of them, check for continuity in the switch harness. If there is continuity in the switch harness, replace the combination light switch. If there is no continuity in the switch harness, replace it. Headlight/Dimmer/Passing Switch: Turn Signal Switch: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9486 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Remove dashboard lower cover. 4. Remove steering column upper and lower covers. 5. Disconnect switch electrical connectors. 6. Remove two switch attaching screws, then slide switch assembly out of housing. 7. Reverse procedure to install. 8. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 9493 Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Photo Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9494 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Rear window defogger relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rear window defogger switch or the center panel when prying the switch out. NOTE: Before testing, check for blown No.16 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 1. Pry the switch out of the center panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector from the switch. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the voltage between the BLK/BLU (+) and the BLK (-) terminals. There should be battery voltage. - If there is no voltage, check for an open in the BLK/BLU wire. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Connect a jumper wire between the BLK/BLU and the BLU/YEL terminals. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the rear window defogger works; if it does, replace the defogger switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Rear Defogger Relay > Component Information > Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Alternate View > Page 9507 Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Photo Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9508 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Power Relay Test NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test. Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.3 terminals when power is disconnected. Rear window defogger relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger Relay > Component Information > Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Windows Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9518 Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9519 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 Power window relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rear window defogger switch or the center panel when prying the switch out. NOTE: Before testing, check for blown No.16 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 1. Pry the switch out of the center panel. 2. Disconnect the 5P connector from the switch. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the voltage between the BLK/BLU (+) and the BLK (-) terminals. There should be battery voltage. - If there is no voltage, check for an open in the BLK/BLU wire. - If there is battery voltage, go to step 4. 4. Connect a jumper wire between the BLK/BLU and the BLU/YEL terminals. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the rear window defogger works; if it does, replace the defogger switch. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9527 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Windows Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Front Door Window Motor: Locations Front of Driver's Door (Frt. Pass. Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor > Component Information > Locations Rear Door Window Motor: Locations Front of Left Rear Door (Right Similar) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations Power Window Relay: Locations Dashboard (Part 2 Of 2) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9542 Behind Left Side of Dash Panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9543 Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection NOTE: See Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test Normally-open type: Check for continuity between the terminals. - There should be continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals. - There should be no continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals when power is disconnected. Type 1 Power window relay Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations Dashboard/Door Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9547 Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Window Glass: Adjustments Glass Adjustment NOTE: - Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when adjusting the glass. - Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel for damage or deterioration, and replace them if necessary. 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Adjust the glass. 4D: a. Raise the glass fully. b. Loosen the glass mounting bolts (front door) and regulator mounting bolts. c. Push the glass rearward (front door glass) or forward (rear door glass). Front Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9552 Rear d. Tighten the glass mounting bolts (front door) and regulator mounting bolts. e. Loosen the front channel mounting bolts (front door) or rear channel mounting bolt (rear door). f. Lower the glass. Front Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9553 Rear g. Push the front or rear channels against the glass, then tighten the mounting bolts. 2D/3D: a. Raise the glass as far up as possible, and hold it against the glass run channel. b. Loosen the roller guide bolts, and adjust the glass so it is parallel with the glass run channel. c. Tighten the roller guide bolts. d. Loosen the front channel bolts. e. Lower the glass. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9554 f. Push the front channel against the glass, then tighten the mounting bolts. 3. Check that the glass moves smoothly. 4. Raise the glass fully and check for gaps. 5. Check the glass operation. NOTE: Check that the glass contacts the glass run channel evenly. 6. Check for water leaks. Spray water over the roof and on the sealing area as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9555 NOTE: Adjust the water pressure as shown. - Do not squeeze the tip of the hose. 7. Attach the plastic cover, then install the door panel. 8. Install the regulator handle so it points forward and up at a 45 degree angle with the glass closed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9556 Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9557 3. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. 4. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9558 NOTE: Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Locations Quarter Glass Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Quarter Glass 3D Removal CAUTION: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. 1. To remove the quarter glass, first remove the: - Rear seat-back and rear seat cushion - Rear center shelf and rear side shelf - Rear trim panel and side trim panel - Upper anchor bolts from the front and rear seat belts - Quarter trim panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9564 Upper Portion/Lower Portion/Pillar Portion 2. From inside the car, use a knife to cut through the quarter glass adhesive all the way around. NOTE: If the clip on the rear edge is broken, the quarter glass can be reinstalled using butyl tape . - Apply protective tape along the edge of the entire quarter glass opening flange. 3. Carefully remove the quarter glass. NOTE: Check the quarter glass trim and clips for damage, and replace them if necessary. Installation 1. Using a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire quarter glass opening flange. NOTE: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the rubber dams from the body. - If any of the clips are broken, remove them from the body. - Mask off surrounding surfaces before applying primer. 2. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. NOTE: After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9565 3. If the quarter glass is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all traces of old adhesive, then clean the quarter glass surface with alcohol where adhesive is to be applied. NOTE: Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease. CAUTION: Avoid setting the quarter glass on its edges: small chips may later develop into cracks. NOTE: Clean the shadowed area. 4. Glue the upper and lower rubber dams to the inside face of the quarter glass, as shown, to contain the adhesive during installation. NOTE: Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. 5. Install the quarter glass trim on the quarter glass, then glue the upper and lower clips as shown. NOTE: Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9566 6. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled (and the clip on the rear edge is broken off), apply a light coat of primer (3M C-100, or equivalent), then apply butyl tape to the quarter glass, as shown, and seal the body hole with piece of urethane tape. NOTE: Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. - Do not peel the separator off the butyl tape. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9567 7. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to the inside face of the quarter glass, as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth. NOTE: Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the quarter glass is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surface. 8. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to the original adhesive remaining around the quarter glass opening flange. Let the body primer dry for at least 10 minutes. NOTE: Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be careful not to mix up glass and body primer sponges. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9568 - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. - Mask off the rear side trim panel before painting the flange. 9. Thoroughly mix the adhesive and hardener together on a glass or metal plate with a putty knife. NOTE: Clean the plate with a sponge and alcohol before mixing. - Follow the instructions that came with the adhesive. 10. Before filling a cartridge, cut the end of the nozzle as shown. 11. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive around the edge of the quarter glass as shown. NOTE: If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled, peel the separator off the butyl tape after applying the adhesive. - Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9569 12. Use suction cups to hold the quarter glass over the opening, align the clips, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. NOTE: Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 13. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. NOTE: To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the quarter glass, wipe with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 14. Let the adhesive dry for at least one hour, then spray water over the quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the quarter glass dry, then seal with sealant. NOTE: Let the car stand for at least four hours after quarter glass installation. If the car has to be used within the first four hours, it must be driven slowly. 15. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for two to three days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). 2D Removal CAUTION: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. 1. To remove the quarter glass, first remove the: - Rear seat-back and rear seat cushion - Side trim panel - Rear shelf - Upper anchor bolt from the front seat belt - Quarter trim panel Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9570 Upper Portion/Rear Edge Portion/Pillar Portion 2. From inside the car, use a knife to cut through the quarter glass adhesive all the way around. NOTE: If the quarter glass is to be reinstalled, take care not to damage the molding. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9571 - Apply protective tape along the edge of the entire quarter glass opening flange. 3. Carefully remove the quarter glass. NOTE: Check the molding for damage, and replace it if necessary. Installation 1. Using a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire quarter glass opening flange. NOTE: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the fastener from the body. - If any of the clips are broken, remove them from the body. - Mask off surrounding surfaces before applying primer. 2. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. NOTE: After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. 3. If the quarter glass is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all traces of old adhesive, then clean the quarter glass surface with alcohol where adhesive is to be applied. NOTE: Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease. CAUTION: Avoid setting the quarter glass on its edges; small chips may later develop into cracks. NOTE: Clean the shadowed area. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9572 4. Install the molding around the edge of the quarter glass as shown. NOTE: If the old molding is to be reinstalled, scrape off the old adhesive tape from the molding, and clean the molding surface with alcohol where new adhesive tape is to be applied. Apply the double-faced adhesive tape to the molding and quarter glass as shown. - Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. Adhesive tape A (3M 4215, or equivalent) Thickness: 0.4 mm (0.02 in.) Width: 5 mm (0.2 in.) Length: 440 mm (17.3 in.) Adhesive tape B (NITTO 501, or equivalent) Thickness: 0.16 mm (0.006 in.) Width: 8 mm (0.3 in.) Length: 440 mm (17.3 in.) Adhesive tape C (3M 4213, or equivalent) Thickness: 0.8 mm (0.03 in.) Width: 5 mm (0.2 in.) Length: 30 mm (1.2 in.) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9573 5. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled, glue the upper and lower clips and fastener as shown. NOTE: Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied. 6. Glue the fastener to the body as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9574 7. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to the inside face of the quarter glass, as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth. NOTE: Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the quarter glass is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surface. 8. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to the original adhesive remaining around the quarter glass opening flange. Let the body primer dry for at least 10 minutes. NOTE: Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be careful not to mix up glass and body primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. - Mask off the rear side trim panel before painting the flange. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9575 9. Thoroughly mix the adhesive and hardener together on a glass or metal plate with a putty knife. NOTE: Clean the plate with a sponge and alcohol before mixing. - Follow the instructions that came with the adhesive. 10. Before filling a cartridge, cut the end of the nozzle as shown. 11. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive around the edge of the quarter glass as shown. NOTE: If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled, peel the separator off the butyl tape after applying the adhesive. - Peel the separator off the adhesive tape after applying the adhesive. - Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9576 12. Use suction cups to hold the quarter glass over the opening, align the clips, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. NOTE: Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry. 13. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. NOTE: To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the quarter glass, wipe with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 14. Let the adhesive dry for at least one hour, then spray water over the quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the quarter glass dry, then seal with sealant. NOTE: Let the car stand for at least four hours after quarter glass installation. If the car has to be used within the first four hours, it must be driven slowly. 15. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for two to three days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9577 Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass and Regulator Replacement 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 3. Carefully lower the glass. Remove the bolts and screw from the rear channel, then remove the glass from the rear channel. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9578 4. Carefully remove the glass from the window slot. 5. Remove the outer molding, then remove the quarter glass. 6. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Quarter Glass > Page 9579 7. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. NOTE: If necessary, remove the power window motor from the regulator. - Before removing the power window motor, scribe a line across the sector gear and regulator. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary . Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Window Glass: Adjustments Glass Adjustment NOTE: - Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when adjusting the glass. - Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel for damage or deterioration, and replace them if necessary. 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Adjust the glass. 4D: a. Raise the glass fully. b. Loosen the glass mounting bolts (front door) and regulator mounting bolts. c. Push the glass rearward (front door glass) or forward (rear door glass). Front Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9583 Rear d. Tighten the glass mounting bolts (front door) and regulator mounting bolts. e. Loosen the front channel mounting bolts (front door) or rear channel mounting bolt (rear door). f. Lower the glass. Front Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9584 Rear g. Push the front or rear channels against the glass, then tighten the mounting bolts. 2D/3D: a. Raise the glass as far up as possible, and hold it against the glass run channel. b. Loosen the roller guide bolts, and adjust the glass so it is parallel with the glass run channel. c. Tighten the roller guide bolts. d. Loosen the front channel bolts. e. Lower the glass. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9585 f. Push the front channel against the glass, then tighten the mounting bolts. 3. Check that the glass moves smoothly. 4. Raise the glass fully and check for gaps. 5. Check the glass operation. NOTE: Check that the glass contacts the glass run channel evenly. 6. Check for water leaks. Spray water over the roof and on the sealing area as shown. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9586 NOTE: Adjust the water pressure as shown. - Do not squeeze the tip of the hose. 7. Attach the plastic cover, then install the door panel. 8. Install the regulator handle so it points forward and up at a 45 degree angle with the glass closed. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9587 Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 3. Carefully lower the glass. Remove the bolts and screw from the rear channel, then remove the glass from the rear channel. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9588 4. Carefully remove the glass from the window slot. 5. Remove the outer molding, then remove the quarter glass. 6. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Adjustments > Page 9589 7. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. NOTE: If necessary, remove the power window motor from the regulator. - Before removing the power window motor, scribe a line across the sector gear and regulator. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary . Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator Replacement 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out through the window slot. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9594 3. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. 4. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. 5. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9595 NOTE: Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Quarter Window Regulator > Component Information > Service and Repair Quarter Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator Replacement Rear Door 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 3. Carefully lower the glass. Remove the bolts and screw from the rear channel, then remove the glass from the rear channel. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Quarter Window Regulator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9599 4. Carefully remove the glass from the window slot. 5. Remove the outer molding, then remove the quarter glass. 6. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Quarter Window Regulator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9600 7. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. NOTE: If necessary, remove the power window motor from the regulator. - Before removing the power window motor, scribe a line across the sector gear and regulator. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary . Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass/Regulator Replacement Rear Door 1. Remove: - Door panel - Plastic cover 2. Carefully move the glass until you can see the bolts, then remove them. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. 3. Carefully lower the glass. Remove the bolts and screw from the rear channel, then remove the glass from the rear channel. NOTE: Take care not to drop the glass inside the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9604 4. Carefully remove the glass from the window slot. 5. Remove the outer molding, then remove the quarter glass. 6. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clip, then remove the regulator through the hole in the door. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 9605 7. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator where shown. NOTE: If necessary, remove the power window motor from the regulator. - Before removing the power window motor, scribe a line across the sector gear and regulator. 8. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding. Also make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is closed. Adjust the position of the glass as necessary . Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Window Seal: > 00-021 > Feb > 00 > Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) Window Seal: Customer Interest Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) 00-021 February 1, 2000 Applies To: 1995-00 Civic - ALL Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield (Replaces 95-056, dated March 2, 1999) SYMPTOM A whistling or howling noise coming from the top, middle of the windshield at highway speeds. The molding may also be deformed or loose. PROBABLE CAUSE Vibration of the upper windshield molding. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply sealant under the entire length of the upper windshield molding. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 824003 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 73150-S04-003 H/C 4779385 Defect Code: 056 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-021A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant: (3M P/N 051135-08662) 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner: (3M P/N 051135-08984) DIAGNOSIS Drive the car at highway speeds to verify the noise. If you hear the noise, and its frequency or volume changes when you push on the top of the windshield in front of the rear view mirror, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Protect the roof by applying 2-inch-wide masking tape along the edge of the upper windshield molding, and around the corners. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Window Seal: > 00-021 > Feb > 00 > Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) > Page 9614 2. Pull the rear edge of the upper windshield molding away from the roof (use a cotter pin puller or similar tool), and apply a liberal amount of 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant underneath it. Apply sealant along the entire masked-off area. 3. Push on the molding to smooth it out and to form a good seal. 4. After five minutes, remove the masking tape. Clean up any excess sealant with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. 5. To give the sealant time to cure, tell the customer not to wash the windshield for 24 hours. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Seal: > 00-021 > Feb > 00 > Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) Window Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) 00-021 February 1, 2000 Applies To: 1995-00 Civic - ALL Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield (Replaces 95-056, dated March 2, 1999) SYMPTOM A whistling or howling noise coming from the top, middle of the windshield at highway speeds. The molding may also be deformed or loose. PROBABLE CAUSE Vibration of the upper windshield molding. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply sealant under the entire length of the upper windshield molding. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 824003 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 73150-S04-003 H/C 4779385 Defect Code: 056 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-021A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant: (3M P/N 051135-08662) 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner: (3M P/N 051135-08984) DIAGNOSIS Drive the car at highway speeds to verify the noise. If you hear the noise, and its frequency or volume changes when you push on the top of the windshield in front of the rear view mirror, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Protect the roof by applying 2-inch-wide masking tape along the edge of the upper windshield molding, and around the corners. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Seal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Window Seal: > 00-021 > Feb > 00 > Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) > Page 9620 2. Pull the rear edge of the upper windshield molding away from the roof (use a cotter pin puller or similar tool), and apply a liberal amount of 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant underneath it. Apply sealant along the entire masked-off area. 3. Push on the molding to smooth it out and to form a good seal. 4. After five minutes, remove the masking tape. Clean up any excess sealant with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. 5. To give the sealant time to cure, tell the customer not to wash the windshield for 24 hours. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield: > 00-021 > Feb > 00 > Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) Windshield: Customer Interest Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) 00-021 February 1, 2000 Applies To: 1995-00 Civic - ALL Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield (Replaces 95-056, dated March 2, 1999) SYMPTOM A whistling or howling noise coming from the top, middle of the windshield at highway speeds. The molding may also be deformed or loose. PROBABLE CAUSE Vibration of the upper windshield molding. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply sealant under the entire length of the upper windshield molding. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 824003 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 73150-S04-003 H/C 4779385 Defect Code: 056 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-021A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant: (3M P/N 051135-08662) 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner: (3M P/N 051135-08984) DIAGNOSIS Drive the car at highway speeds to verify the noise. If you hear the noise, and its frequency or volume changes when you push on the top of the windshield in front of the rear view mirror, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Protect the roof by applying 2-inch-wide masking tape along the edge of the upper windshield molding, and around the corners. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield: > 00-021 > Feb > 00 > Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) > Page 9629 2. Pull the rear edge of the upper windshield molding away from the roof (use a cotter pin puller or similar tool), and apply a liberal amount of 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant underneath it. Apply sealant along the entire masked-off area. 3. Push on the molding to smooth it out and to form a good seal. 4. After five minutes, remove the masking tape. Clean up any excess sealant with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. 5. To give the sealant time to cure, tell the customer not to wash the windshield for 24 hours. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield: > 95-056 > Sep > 97 > Body - Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield Windshield: Customer Interest Body - Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield Bulletin No. 95-056 Issue Date SEP 8, 1997 Model 1995-97 [NEW] CIVIC Applicable To ALL File Under BODY Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield (Supersedes 95-056, dated December 18, 1995) SYMPTOM A whistling or howling noise coming from the top, middle of the windshield at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE Vibration of the upper windshield molding. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 824003 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 731 50-S04-003 H/C 4779385 Defect code: 056 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 97-001A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant: (3M P/N 051135-08662) 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner: (3M P/N 051135-08984) DIAGNOSIS Drive the car at highway speeds to verity the noise. If you hear the noise, and its frequency or volume changes when you push on the top of the windshield in front of the rear view mirror, continue with the CORRECTIVE ACTION. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply sealant under the entire length of the upper windshield molding. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield: > 95-056 > Sep > 97 > Body - Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield > Page 9634 1. Protect the roof by applying 2-inch-wide masking tape along the edge of the upper windshield molding, between the left and right roof moldings. 2. Pull the rear edge of the upper windshield molding away from the roof (use a cotter pin puller or similar tool), and apply a liberal amount of 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant underneath it. Apply sealant along the entire length of the upper windshield molding. 3. Push on the molding to smooth it out and to form a good seal. 4. Remove the masking tape, then clean up any excess sealant with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. 5. To give the sealant time to cure, tell the customer not to wash the windshield for 24 hours. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 00-021 > Feb > 00 > Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) 00-021 February 1, 2000 Applies To: 1995-00 Civic - ALL Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield (Replaces 95-056, dated March 2, 1999) SYMPTOM A whistling or howling noise coming from the top, middle of the windshield at highway speeds. The molding may also be deformed or loose. PROBABLE CAUSE Vibration of the upper windshield molding. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply sealant under the entire length of the upper windshield molding. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation Number: 824003 Flat Rate Time: 0.5 hour Failed Part: P/N 73150-S04-003 H/C 4779385 Defect Code: 056 Contention Code: B07 Template ID: 00-021A Skill Level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant: (3M P/N 051135-08662) 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner: (3M P/N 051135-08984) DIAGNOSIS Drive the car at highway speeds to verify the noise. If you hear the noise, and its frequency or volume changes when you push on the top of the windshield in front of the rear view mirror, go to REPAIR PROCEDURE. REPAIR PROCEDURE 1. Protect the roof by applying 2-inch-wide masking tape along the edge of the upper windshield molding, and around the corners. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 00-021 > Feb > 00 > Windshield - Wind Noise (Whistle) > Page 9640 2. Pull the rear edge of the upper windshield molding away from the roof (use a cotter pin puller or similar tool), and apply a liberal amount of 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant underneath it. Apply sealant along the entire masked-off area. 3. Push on the molding to smooth it out and to form a good seal. 4. After five minutes, remove the masking tape. Clean up any excess sealant with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. 5. To give the sealant time to cure, tell the customer not to wash the windshield for 24 hours. Disclaimer Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 95-056 > Sep > 97 > Body - Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield Windshield: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield Bulletin No. 95-056 Issue Date SEP 8, 1997 Model 1995-97 [NEW] CIVIC Applicable To ALL File Under BODY Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield (Supersedes 95-056, dated December 18, 1995) SYMPTOM A whistling or howling noise coming from the top, middle of the windshield at highway speeds. PROBABLE CAUSE Vibration of the upper windshield molding. WARRANTY CLAIM INFORMATION In warranty: The normal warranty applies. Operation number: 824003 Flat rate time: 0.5 hour Failed part: P/N 731 50-S04-003 H/C 4779385 Defect code: 056 Contention code: B07 Template ID: 97-001A Skill level: Repair Technician Out of warranty: Any repair performed after warranty expiration may be eligible for goodwill consideration by the District Service Manager or your Zone Office. You must request consideration, and get a decision, before starting work. REQUIRED MATERIALS 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant: (3M P/N 051135-08662) 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner: (3M P/N 051135-08984) DIAGNOSIS Drive the car at highway speeds to verity the noise. If you hear the noise, and its frequency or volume changes when you push on the top of the windshield in front of the rear view mirror, continue with the CORRECTIVE ACTION. CORRECTIVE ACTION Apply sealant under the entire length of the upper windshield molding. REPAIR PROCEDURE Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield: > 95-056 > Sep > 97 > Body - Wind Whistle at the Top of the Windshield > Page 9645 1. Protect the roof by applying 2-inch-wide masking tape along the edge of the upper windshield molding, between the left and right roof moldings. 2. Pull the rear edge of the upper windshield molding away from the roof (use a cotter pin puller or similar tool), and apply a liberal amount of 3M Black Super Silicone Sealant underneath it. Apply sealant along the entire length of the upper windshield molding. 3. Push on the molding to smooth it out and to form a good seal. 4. Remove the masking tape, then clean up any excess sealant with 3M General Purpose Adhesive Cleaner. 5. To give the sealant time to cure, tell the customer not to wash the windshield for 24 hours. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9646 Windshield (2 Door/3 Door/4 Door) Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9647 Windshield: Service and Repair Removal CAUTION: - Put on gloves to protect your hands. - Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. 1. To remove the windshield, first remove the: - Rearview mirror - Sunvisors and holders - Front pillar trim - Windshield wiper arms and cowl cover 2. Peel off the molding, and remove the glass brackets. NOTE: When molding removal is difficult, cut the molding with a knife. 3. Pull down the front of the headliner. CAUTION: Take care not to bend the headliner excessively. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9648 4. Apply protective tape along the edge of the dashboard and body as shown. Using an awl, make a hole through the rubber dam and adhesive from inside the car. Push the piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood. 5. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire back and forth in a sawing motion, and carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive around the entire windshield. CAUTION: Hold the piano wire as close to the windshield as possible to prevent damage to the body and dashboard. 6. Carefully remove the windshield. Installation 1. Using a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface around the entire windshield opening flange. NOTE: Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper bonding. - Remove the rubber dams and fasteners from the body. - Mask off surrounding surfaces before painting. 2. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. NOTE: After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water from getting on the surface. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9649 3. If the old windshield is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all traces of old adhesive, then clean the windshield surface with alcohol where new adhesive is to be applied. NOTE: Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and grease. CAUTION: Avoid setting the windshield on its edges; small chips may later develop into cracks. NOTE: Clean the shadowed area. - Clean area (A) as shown. 4. Glue the rubber dam and fasteners to the inside face of the windshield as shown. NOTE: Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9650 5. Align and glue the molding to the edge of the windshield. NOTE: Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. 6. Install the glass brackets and fasteners as shown. NOTE: The numbers after the part names show the quantities of the parts used. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9651 7. Set the windshield on the glass brackets, then center it in the opening. Make alignment marks across the windshield and body with a grease pencil at the four points shown. NOTE: Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied. 8. Remove the windshield. 9. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer around the edge of the windshield as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth. NOTE: Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed up. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the windshield properly, causing a leak after the windshield is installed. - Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9652 10. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to the original adhesive remaining around the windshield opening flange. Let the body primer dry for at least 10 minutes. NOTE: Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be careful not to mix up glass and body primer sponges. - Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. - Mask off the dashboard before painting the flange. 11. Thoroughly mix the adhesive and hardener together on a glass or metal plate with a putty knife. NOTE: Clean the plate with a sponge and alcohol before mixing. - Follow the instructions that come with the adhesive. 12. Before filling a cartridge, cut the end of the nozzle as shown. 13. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive around the edge of the windshield as shown. NOTE: Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9653 14. Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the opening, align it with the alignment marks made in step 7, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the windshield until its edge is fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. NOTE: Do not open or close the doors until adhesive is dry. 15. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. NOTE: To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol. 16. Let the adhesive dry for at least one hour, then spray water over the windshield and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let the windshield dry, then seal with sealant. NOTE: Let the car stand for at least four hours after windshield installation. If the car has to be used within the first four hours, it must be driven slowly. - Keep the windshield dry for the first hour after installation. - Check that the ends of the side molding are set under the cowl cover. 17. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. NOTE: Install the rearview mirror rubber damper after the adhesive has dried thoroughly. - Advise the customer not to do the following things for two to three days: Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up. - Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads). Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Headlamp Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Headlamp Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wipers/Washers Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection Integrated Control Unit Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the integrated control unit. 3. Remove the integrated control unit from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector and the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. All Systems: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9665 Intermittent Wiper System: Key-in/Seat Belt Reminder, Lights-on Reminder System: Bulb Check System (Brake System Light): Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Washer Fluid Level Switch: Testing and Inspection Washer Level Switch Test (Canada) 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the washer. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each float position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the switch, remove the two screws, and pull out the switch. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9673 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Remove instrument panel lower cover. 3. Remove upper and lower steering column covers from steering column. 4. Disconnect 8-P and 6-P connectors from wiper switch. 5. Remove two attaching screws and slide wiper switch out of housing. 6. Reverse procedure to install. 7. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Right Side of Steering Column Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9677 Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9678 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the switch, remove the two screws, and pull out the switch. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9679 Wiper Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Disconnect battery ground cable. 3. Remove dashboard lower cover. 4. Remove steering column upper cover. 5. Disconnect electrical connectors. 6. Remove wiper/washer switch attaching screws, then the switch. 7. Reverse procedure to install. 8. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Washer Fluid Level Switch: Testing and Inspection Washer Level Switch Test (Canada) 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the washer. 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each float position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair Washer Tube Replacement NOTE: - To remove the windshield washer tube, remove the left inner fender. - To remove the rear window washer tube (3D), remove the following parts from the left side of the vehicle. Inner fender - Kick panel and side trim - Rear seat-back and rear seat cushion - Spare tire lid - Rear center shelf and rear side shelf - Rear trim panel and side trim panel - Quarter trim panel - Rear roof trim Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9686 - Hatch spoiler Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Take care not to pinch the washer tubes. - If necessary, replace any damaged clips. - After installing, adjust the aim of the washer nozzles. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Motor: Locations Behind Left Side of Front Bumper Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9690 Windshield Washer Motor: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the washer. 3. Test the washer motor by connecting battery power and ground according to the table. - If the motor fails to run smoothly, replace it. - If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected or blocked washer hose, or a clogged pump outlet in the motor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair 1. Remove front bumper, then disconnect washer hose and 2-P connectors from front and rear washer motors. 2. Remove three mounting bolts and washer reservoir. 3. Reverse procedure to install. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair 1. Remove the front bumper. 2. Disconnect the connectors and washer tubes from the washer motors. 3. Remove the bolts then remove the washer reservoir. 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: - Make sure the washer motor connectors and washer tubes are connected properly. - Check the washer motor operation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper/Washer: 1. Adjust the wiper arms so that their park positions match the illustration. 2. By inserting a tack and moving it as necessary, adjust the washer nozzles so that they aim at positions A, A', B, and B' shown in the illustration. NOTE: The fluid jets should hit within a 50 mm (2.0 in.) radius around each of points A, A', B, and B'. Rear Window Wiper/Washer (3D): 1. Adjust the rear window wiper arm so that its park position matches the illustration. 2. By inserting a tack and moving it as necessary, adjust the washer nozzle so that it aims at position C as shown in the illustration. NOTE: The fluid jet should hit within a 50 mm (2.0 in.) radius around point C. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the switch, remove the two screws, and pull out the switch. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9703 Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair 1. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. 2. Remove instrument panel lower cover. 3. Remove upper and lower steering column covers from steering column. 4. Disconnect 8-P and 6-P connectors from wiper switch. 5. Remove two attaching screws and slide wiper switch out of housing. 6. Reverse procedure to install. 7. On models equipped with radio coded theft protection system, refer to Vehicle Damage Warnings for system disarming and arming procedures. On models equipped with airbag system, refer to Technician Safety Information for system disarming and arming procedures. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments Wiper Arm: Adjustments Windshield Wiper/Washer: 1. Adjust the wiper arms so that their park positions match the illustration. 2. By inserting a tack and moving it as necessary, adjust the washer nozzles so that they aim at positions A, A', B, and B' shown in the illustration. NOTE: The fluid jets should hit within a 50 mm (2.0 in.) radius around each of points A, A', B, and B'. Rear Window Wiper/Washer (3D): 1. Adjust the rear window wiper arm so that its park position matches the illustration. 2. By inserting a tack and moving it as necessary, adjust the washer nozzle so that it aims at position C as shown in the illustration. NOTE: The fluid jet should hit within a 50 mm (2.0 in.) radius around point C. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Front CAUTION: Put on gloves to protect your hands. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the hood and body. 1. Remove the windshield wiper arms, then remove the hood seal and cowl cover. Japan/Canada-Produced USA-Produced 2. Disconnect the connector, then remove the wind shield wiper linkage assembly. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 9709 3. Separate the windshield wiper linkage and windshield wiper motor. Japan/Canada-Produced NOTE: Scribe a line across the link and windshield wiper linkage to show the original adjustment. USA-Produced NOTE: Scribe a line across the link and windshield wiper motor to show the original adjustment. 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. - If necessary, replace any damaged clips. - Install the windshield wiper arms. - Check the windshield wiper motor operation. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 9710 - Grease the moving parts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 9711 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Rear 1. Remove the hatch trim panel. 2. Remove the rear window wiper arm and wiper motor as shown. 3. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. - Install the rear window wiper arm. - Check the rear window wiper motor operation. - Grease the moving parts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Wiper Control Module: Testing and Inspection Integrated Control Unit Input Test SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures before performing repairs or service. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover and knee bolster. 2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the integrated control unit. 3. Remove the integrated control unit from the under-dash fuse/relay box. 4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact. - If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system. - If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector and the fuse/relay box socket. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. - If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it. All Systems: Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9715 Intermittent Wiper System: Key-in/Seat Belt Reminder, Lights-on Reminder System: Bulb Check System (Brake System Light): Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Front Windshield Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Locations Front Windshield Wiper Motor Left Rear Corner of Engine Compartment Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Front Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 9720 Wiper Motor: Locations Rear Window Wiper Motor Underside of Hatch Lid Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Front Wiper Motor 1. Open the hood, and remove the cap nuts. Carefully remove the wiper arms so that they do not touch the hood. 2. Remove the cowl cover by prying out the trim clips. 3. Disconnect the 5P connector from the windshield wiper motor. 4. Test the motor by connecting battery power and ground according to the table. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. 5. Connect an analog voltmeter between the No.5 (+) and No.3 (-) terminals, and run the motor at low or high speed. The voltmeter should indicate 0 V and 4 V or less alternately. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Wiper Motor > Page 9723 Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Wiper Motor Rear Wiper Motor Test (Hatchback) 1. Remove the hatch lower trim panel. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the wiper motor assembly. 3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No.1 terminal and ground to the No.3 terminal. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it. 4. Reconnect the 4P connector to the wiper motor. 5. Connect an analog voltmeter between the No.4 (+) and No.2 (-) terminals. 6. Run the motor by turning the wiper switch ON. The voltmeter should indicate 0 V and 4 V or less alternately. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9724 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair 1. Remove the hatch trim panel. 2. Remove the rear window wiper arm and wiper motor as shown. 3. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. - Install the rear window wiper arm. - Check the rear window wiper motor operation. - Grease the moving parts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair CAUTION: Put on gloves to protect your hands. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the hood and body. 1. Remove the windshield wiper arms, then remove the hood seal and cowl cover. Japan/Canada-Produced USA-Produced 2. Disconnect the connector, then remove the wind shield wiper linkage assembly. 3. Separate the windshield wiper linkage and windshield wiper motor. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 9728 Japan/Canada-Produced NOTE: Scribe a line across the link and windshield wiper linkage to show the original adjustment. USA-Produced NOTE: Scribe a line across the link and windshield wiper motor to show the original adjustment. 4. Installation is the reverse of the removal procedure. NOTE: Make sure the connector is connected properly. - If necessary, replace any damaged clips. - Install the windshield wiper arms. - Check the windshield wiper motor operation. - Grease the moving parts. Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations Right Side of Steering Column Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9732 Wiper/Washer Switch Honda Civic Sedan Workshop Manual (L4-1.6L SOHC (VTEC) (1996)) Honda Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9733 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. 2. Remove the steering column covers. 3. Disconnect the 8P and 6P connectors from the switch, remove the two screws, and pull out the switch. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.